Installation Manual 190-02246-10 - 13

GI 275
Part 23 AML STC

Installation Manual
190-02246-10 May 2022 Revision 13

© 2022
Garmin International, Inc., or its subsidiaries
All Rights Reserved
Except as expressly provided herein, no part of this manual may be reproduced, copied, transmitted,
disseminated, downloaded or stored in any storage medium, for any purpose without the express prior
written consent of Garmin. Garmin hereby grants permission to download a single copy of this manual and
of any revision to this manual onto a hard drive or other electronic storage medium to be viewed and to
print one copy of this manual or of any revision hereto, provided that such electronic or printed copy of this
manual or revision must contain the complete text of this copyright notice and provided further that any
unauthorized commercial distribution of this manual or any revision hereto is strictly prohibited.
SkyWatch® and Stormscope® are registered trademarks of L-3 Communications. Ryan®, TCAD®, and
Avidyne® are registered trademarks of Avidyne Corporation. AC-U-KWIK® is a registered trademark of
Penton Business Media Inc. Bendix/King® and Honeywell® are registered trademarks of Honeywell
International, Inc.
© 2022 SiriusXM Radio Inc. Sirius, XM and all related marks and logos are trademarks of SiriusXM
Radio Inc. All other marks and logos are property of their respective owners. All rights reserved.
Garmin®, FliteCharts®, and SafeTaxi® are registered trademarks of Garmin International or its
subsidiaries. Connext™, GDU™, GTN™, SVT™, and Telligence™ are trademarks of Garmin
International or its subsidiaries. These trademarks may not be used without the express permission of
Garmin.
The Bluetooth® word mark and logos are registered trademarks owned by Bluetooth SIG, Inc. and any use
of such marks by Garmin is under license. Other trademarks and trade names are those of their respective
owners.
ChartView™ is a trademark of Jeppesen, Inc.
Windows® is a registered trademark of Microsoft Corporation in the United States and other countries.
©2022 SD® is a registered trademark of SD-3C, LLC. All rights reserved.
Iridium® is a registered trademark of Iridium Communications, Inc. All rights reserved.
The term Wi-Fi® is a registered trademark of the Wi-Fi Alliance®.
All other product or company names mentioned in this manual are trade names, trademarks, or registered
trademarks of their respective owners.
For aviation product support, visit flyGarmin.com.
For information regarding the Aviation Limited Warranty, refer to Gamin's website.
190-02246-10 GI 275 Part 23 AML STC Installation Manual

Rev. 13 Page i
INFORMATION SUBJECT TO EXPORT CONTROL LAWS
This document may contain information that is subject to the Export Administration Regulations (EAR) issued by the
United States Department of Commerce (15 CFR, Chapter VII, Subchapter C) and may not be exported, released, or
disclosed to foreign nationals inside or outside of the United States without first obtaining an export license.
This information in this document is subject to change without notice. For updates and supplemental information
regarding the operation of Garmin products visit flyGarmin.com.
Software License Notification

AES Encryption
The product may include AES file encryption software, © 2002 DR. Brian Gladman, subject to the following license:
The free distribution and use of this software in both source and binary form is allowed (with or without changes)
provided:
• Distributions of this source code include the above copyright notice, this list of conditions, and the following
disclaimer.
• Distribution in binary form include the above copyright notice, this list of conditions, and the following
disclaimer in the documentation and/or other associated materials.
• The copyright holder’s name is not used to endorse products built using this software without specific written
permission.
Alternatively, provided this notice is retained in full, this product may be distributed under the terms of the GNU
General Public License (GPL) in which case the provisions of the GPL apply instead of those given above.
Disclaimer
The AES file encryption software is provided “as is” with no explicit or implied warranties in respect of its
properties, including, but not limited to, correctness and/or fitness for purpose.

Rev. 13 Page ii
SOFTWARE LICENSE AGREEMENT FOR GARMIN AVIATION PRODUCTS
The software embedded in your Garmin product (the “Licensed Software”) is owned by Garmin International, Inc. (“Garmin” or
“us”). The Licensed Software is protected under copyright laws and international copyright treaties. The Licensed Software is
provided under this Software License Agreement (hereinafter the “Agreement”) and is subject to the following terms and
conditions which are agreed to by End User (“Licensee”, “you” or “your”), on the one hand, and Garmin and its licensors and
affiliated companies of Garmin and its licensors, on the other hand. The Licensed Software is licensed, not sold, to you. Garmin
and Licensee may be referred to individually as a “Party” or jointly as the “Parties.”
IMPORTANT: CAREFULLY READ THIS ENTIRE AGREEMENT BEFORE USING THIS PRODUCT. INSTALLING,
COPYING, OR OTHERWISE USING THIS PRODUCT INDICATES YOUR ACKNOWLEDGMENT THAT YOU HAVE
READ THIS AGREEMENT AND AGREE TO ITS TERMS AND CONDITIONS. IF YOU DO NOT AGREE TO THESE
TERMS AND CONDITIONS, YOU MAY NOT USE THIS PRODUCT.
1. Definitions. The following capitalized terms shall have the meanings set forth below:
a. “Device” means any Garmin device that is delivered by or on behalf of Garmin to Licensee onto which the Licensed
Software is installed.
b. “Documentation” means Gamin's then-current instructional, technical or functional documentation relating to the
Devices or Licensed Software which is delivered or made available by Garmin in connection with this Agreement.
c. “Licensed Software” means the software in binary executable form that is embedded in the Devices and/or made
available for use on the Devices via a software loader card.
d. “Permitted Purpose” means operating and using the Device on which the Licensed Software is installed for the
Device's intended use.
2. License.
a. License Grant. Subject to the terms and conditions of this Agreement and Licensee's compliance with the terms and
conditions of this Agreement, Garmin hereby grants to Licensee a limited, royalty-free, non-exclusive, non-
sublicenseable, non-transferable and revocable right and license to use and perform the Licensed Software as installed
on the Devices and the Documentation solely for the Permitted Purpose and only during the term of this Agreement,
provided that the Licensed Software may only be used by Licensee on Devices on which the Licensed Software has
been installed or otherwise made available by Garmin.
b. Reservation of Rights. Garmin retains exclusive ownership of all right, title and interest in and to the Licensed
Software and Documentation. All of Gamin's rights in and to the Licensed Software and Documentation not expressly
licensed to Licensee under Section 2.1 are expressly reserved for Garmin. Nothing contained in this Agreement shall
be construed as conferring by implication, acquiescence, or estoppel any license or other right upon Licensee. Without
limiting the foregoing, the Parties acknowledge and agree that this Agreement grants Licensee a license of the
Licensed Software under the terms of Section 2.1, and shall not in any manner be construed as a sale of the Licensed
Software or any rights in the Licensed Software.
3. Restrictions; Protection and Third Party Devices.

a. Prohibited Uses. Licensee shall not, shall not attempt to and shall not permit any third party to:
(a) sublicense, lease, loan, sell, resell, market, transfer, rent, disclose, demonstrate, or distribute the Licensed Software
or Documentation to any third party; (b) uninstall the Licensed Software from the Device on which it was originally
installed; (c) make any use of or perform any acts with respect to the Licensed Software or Documentation other than
as expressly permitted in accordance with the terms of this Agreement; (d) use the Licensed Software or
Documentation in any manner that violates any applicable law; (e) reproduce or copy the Licensed Software; (f)
modify, adapt, alter, translate, port, create derivative works of, reverse engineer, decompile or disassemble the
Licensed Software or Documentation or otherwise derive the source code or other proprietary information or trade
secrets from the Licensed Software; (g) remove, alter, or obscure any proprietary notices from the Licensed Software
or Documentation; (h) use the Licensed Software or Documentation to provide services to third parties (such as
business process outsourcing, service bureau applications or third party training); (i) use the Licensed Software on any
equipment, hardware or device other than a Device; or (j) export, re-export or otherwise distribute, directly or
indirectly, the Licensed Software or Documentation to a jurisdiction or country to which the export, re-export or
distribution of such Licensed Software or Documentation is prohibited by applicable law.

Rev. 13 Page iii
b. Protection of Software and Documentation. Licensee shall use its best efforts to protect the Licensed Software and
Documentation from unauthorized access, distribution, modification, display, reproduction, disclosure or use with at
least the same degree of care as Licensee normally uses in protecting its own software and documentation of a similar
nature from unauthorized access, distribution, modification, display, reproduction, disclosure or use. Licensee shall
limit access to the Licensed Software and Documentation to only those employees of Licensee who require access to
the Licensed Software or Documentation for the Permitted Purpose and who have been made aware of the restrictions
set forth in this Agreement. Licensee shall take prompt and appropriate action to prevent unauthorized use or
disclosure of the Licensed Software and Documentation.
4. Term and Termination.

a. Term. The term of this Agreement shall commence on the Effective Date, and shall continue in perpetuity thereafter,
unless terminated earlier as provided in this Section 4.
b. Termination by Garmin. Garmin may immediately terminate this Agreement upon written notice to Licensee if
Licensee commits a material breach of this Agreement or breaches a material term of this Agreement.
c. Effect of Termination. Upon any termination of this Agreement for any Party: (a) Licensee shall immediately cease all
use of the Licensed Software and Documentation; (b) all rights and licenses granted to Licensee to the Licensed
Software and Documentation and Gamin's related obligations shall immediately terminate; and (c) Sections 4.3, 5 and
6 shall survive.
5. Disclaimer; Limitations of Liability; Indemnity.

a. DISCLAIMER. TO THE MAXIMUM EXTENT PERMITTED BY APPLICABLE LAW, THE LICENSED
SOFTWARE AND DOCUMENTATION (INCLUDING ANY RESULTS TO BE OBTAINED FROM ANY USE OF
THE LICENSED SOFTWARE AND DOCUMENTATION) ARE PROVIDED “AS IS” AND “AS AVAILABLE”
WITH NO WARRANTIES, GUARANTEES OR REPRESENTATIONS AND NEITHER GARMIN NOR ITS
AFFILIATES MAKE ANY REPRESENTATION, WARRANTY OR GUARANTEE, STATUTORY OR
OTHERWISE, UNDER LAW OR FROM THE COURSE OF DEALING OR USAGE OF TRADE, EXPRESS OR
IMPLIED, INCLUDING ANY WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR
PURPOSE, NON-INTERFERENCE, NON-INFRINGEMENT, TITLE, OR SIMILAR, UNDER THE LAWS OF
ANY JURISDICTION. GARMIN DOES NOT WARRANT THAT THE LICENSED SOFTWARE OR
DOCUMENTATION WILL MEET LICENSEE'S REQUIREMENTS OR THAT OPERATION OF THE
SOFTWARE WILL BE UNINTERRUPTED OR ERROR FREE. LICENSEE ASSUMES THE ENTIRE RISK AS
TO THE QUALITY AND PERFORMANCE OF THE LICENSED SOFTWARE AND DOCUMENTATION. THE
LICENSED SOFTWARE IS NOT INTENDED FOR USE IN ANY NUCLEAR, MEDICAL, OR OTHER
INHERENTLY DANGEROUS APPLICATIONS, AND GARMIN DISCLAIMS ALL LIABILITY FOR ANY
DAMAGE OR LOSS CAUSED BY SUCH USE OF THE LICENSED SOFTWARE.
b. EXCLUSION OF DAMAGES; LIMITATION OF LIABILITY. NOTWITHSTANDING ANYTHING TO THE
CONTRARY HEREIN, TO THE MAXIMUM EXTENT PERMITTED BY APPLICABLE LAW, UNDER NO
CIRCUMSTANCES AND REGARDLESS OF THE NATURE OF ANY CLAIM SHALL GARMIN BE LIABLE
TO LICENSEE FOR AN AMOUNT IN EXCESS OF USD $100, OR BE LIABLE IN ANY AMOUNT FOR ANY
SPECIAL, INCIDENTAL, CONSEQUENTIAL, PUNITIVE OR INDIRECT DAMAGES, LOSS OF GOODWILL
OR PROFITS, LIQUIDATED DAMAGES, DATA LOSS, COMPUTER FAILURE OR MALFUNCTION,
ATTORNEYS' FEES, COURT COSTS, INTEREST OR EXEMPLARY OR PUNITIVE DAMAGES, ARISING
OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION WITH THE USE OR PERFORMANCE OR NON-PERFORMANCE OF THE
LICENSED SOFTWARE OR DOCUMENTATION, EVEN IF GARMIN HAS BEEN ADVISED OF THE
POSSIBILITY OF SUCH LOSS OR DAMAGES.
c. Indemnity. Licensee shall indemnify, defend and hold Garmin and its affiliates harmless against any and all losses,
claims, actions, causes of action, liabilities, demands, fines, judgments, damages and expenses suffered or incurred by
Garmin or its affiliated companies in connection with: (a) any use or misuse of the Licensed Software or
Documentation by Licensee or any third party in Licensee's reasonable control; or
(b) Licensee's breach of this Agreement.
6. General.
a. No Devices or Services. Licensee acknowledges and agrees that nothing in this Agreement shall be construed as
requiring Garmin to: (a) provide or supply the Devices or any other devices or hardware to Licensee; (b) grant any

Rev. 13 Page iv
licenses to any software other than the Licensed Software; or (c) provide any services, such as support, maintenance,
installation or professional services for the Licensed Software.
b. Non-Exclusive. Each Party's rights and obligations under this Agreement are non-exclusive. Garmin is not precluded
from marketing, licensing, providing, selling or distributing the Licensed Software or Documentation, or any other
products, software, documentation or services, either directly or through any third party.
c. Assignment. Licensee may not assign this Agreement or any of its rights, interests or obligations hereunder without
the prior written consent of Garmin. Any purported assignment in violation of this Section 6.3 shall be null and void.
Subject to the foregoing, this Agreement shall be binding upon and shall inure to the benefit of the Parties and their
respective successors and permitted assigns and transferees.
d. Feedback and Data. Licensee may from time to time provide feedback, comments, suggestions, questions, ideas, or
other information to Garmin concerning the Licensed Software or Documentation or Gamin's products, services,
technology, techniques, processes or materials (“Feedback”). Garmin may in connection with any of its products or
services freely use, copy, disclose, license, distribute and otherwise exploit such Feedback in any manner without any
obligation, payment, royalty or restriction whether based on intellectual property rights or otherwise.
e. Governing Law. The validity, interpretation and enforcement of this Agreement will be governed by the substantive
laws, but not the choice of law rules, of the state of Kansas. This Agreement shall not be governed by the 1980 UN
Convention on Contracts for the International Sale of Goods.
f. Legal Compliance. You represent and warrant that (i) you are not located in a country that is subject to a U.S.
Government embargo, or has been designated by the U.S. Government as a “terrorist supporting” country, and (ii) you
are not listed on any U.S. Government list of prohibited or restricted parties.
g. Injunctive Relief. The Parties acknowledge and agree that irreparable damage would occur if any provision of this
Agreement was not performed in accordance with its specific terms or was otherwise breached and as such, the Parties
will be entitled to an injunction or injunctions to prevent breaches of this Agreement and to enforce specifically the
performance of the terms and provisions of this Agreement without proof of actual damages, this being in addition to
any other remedy to which any Party is entitled at law or in equity.
h. Amendments and Waivers. This Agreement may be amended and any provision of this Agreement may be waived,
provided that any such amendment or waiver will become and remain binding upon a Party only if such amendment or
waiver is set forth in a writing by such Party. No course of dealing between or among any persons having any interest
in this Agreement will be deemed effective to modify, amend or discharge any part of this Agreement or any rights or
obligations of any Party under or by reason of this Agreement. No delay or failure in exercising any right, power or
remedy hereunder will affect or operate as a waiver thereof; nor will any single or partial exercise thereof or any
abandonment or discontinuance of steps to enforce such a right, power or remedy preclude any further exercise
thereof or of any other right, power or remedy. The rights and remedies hereunder are cumulative and not exclusive of
any rights or remedies that any Party would otherwise have.
i. Severability. The provisions of this Agreement will be severable in the event that for any reason whatsoever any of the
provisions hereof are invalid, void or otherwise unenforceable, any such invalid, void or otherwise unenforceable
provisions will be replaced by other provisions which are as similar as possible in terms to such invalid, void or
otherwise unenforceable provisions but are valid and enforceable and the remaining provisions will remain valid and
enforceable to the fullest extent permitted by applicable law, in each case so as to best preserve the intention of the
Parties with respect to the benefits and obligations of this Agreement.
j. No Third-Party Beneficiaries. This Agreement is solely for the benefit of the Parties and does not confer on third
parties any remedy, claim, reimbursement, claim of action or other right in addition to those existing without reference
to this Agreement.
k. Entire Agreement. This Agreement shall constitute the entire agreement between Garmin and you with respect to the
subject matter hereof and will supersede all prior negotiations, agreements and understandings of Garmin and you of
any nature, whether oral or written, with respect to such subject matter.
l. Interpretation. In this Agreement: (a) headings are for convenience only and do not affect the interpretation of this
Agreement; (b) the singular includes the plural and vice versa; (c) the words 'such as', 'including', 'particularly' and
similar expressions are not used as, nor are intended to be, interpreted as words of limitation; (d) a reference to a
person includes a natural person, partnership, joint venture, government agency, association, corporation or other
body corporate; a thing includes a part of that thing; and a party includes its successors and permitted assigns; and (e)
no rule of construction applies to the disadvantage of a Party because that Party was responsible for the preparation of
this Agreement. Any translation of this Agreement from English is provided as a convenience only. If this Agreement
is translated into a language other than English and there is a conflict of terms between the English version and the
other language version, the English version will control.

Rev. 13 Page v
RECORD OF REVISIONS
Rev Revision Date Description
11 10/06/21 Minor change to update software to v2.42 and minor corrections.
12 05/19/22 Updated software to v2.52. Added GPT pressure sensors.
13 05/26/22 Minor correction.
DESCRIPTION OF REVISIONS 12 AND 13 CHANGES

Section Description
1.2.1 Clarified GI 275 unit descriptions to indicate which units can drive non-Garmin autopilots.
1.3.2.4 Added new GPT pressure sensor.
2.1.12 Added limitation for display of Mach Number on ADI page.
3.2.3 Added EIS consideration regarding differential pressure sensors.
3.3.9 Clarified that GI 275 ADAHRS + AP units are required to drive non-Garmin autopilots.
Added statement regarding differential pressure sensors to Fuel Pressure Sensor
3.4.3
subsection.
4.4.1 Corrected part callouts in Figure 4-12 Installation of GI 275 with KI 256 Adapter.
4.6.1 Added Note regarding GMU flex.
Updated replacement and installation guidance for pressure sensors.
4.7.5 Updated Figure 4-52 Brass Sensor Installation, Figure 4-53 Mil-Spec Style Sensor
Installation, and Added new figure for GPT sensor installation.
5.4 Added Feature Enable section.
Added note informing that interfaces not shown in interface tables are not approved per
5.5
this STC.
5.5.3 Added default Filtering Time Constant settings.
Added Generic MapMX format and [2] to Table 5-5 GPS Interfaces and Configuration
5.5.5
Settings.
5.5.6 Added instruction for the Allow for SVT setting.
5.6.1 Added subsections for FD Format and ADI Direction Bug.
5.6.1.1 Added Mach Settings.
5.6.4 Added direction to disable Auto Revert.
5.7.2 Added new part number under the Manifold Pressure Sensor subsection.
5.15.2 Updated procedure for updating databases via USB.
Added Note stating that the Heading Offset Compensation procedure is only needed for
6.4.2.1
installations where the GI 275 is interfaced with an external AHRS source.
6.5.1.2 Added Section 6.5.1.2 ADI OAT Check.
Updated title of section to “Standard Turn Rate Indicator Check” and clarified that
6.5.1.3
standard turn rate indicators require an interface to a GTP 59.

Rev. 13 Page vi
Section Description
Added GFC 500 Servo Clutch fault to Figure 7-9 Autopilot Alert Message
7.1
Troubleshooting.
Added Flag Note 4 regarding Generic MapMX format in Figure B-4 GPS Interconnect.
Added new SS fuel, manifold, and oil pressure sensors to Figure B-8 GEA 24 Sensor
Interconnect, Sheet 1.
Updated CiES fuel probe wiring in Figure B-8 GEA 24 Sensor Interconnect, Sheet 3, and
added Flag Note 20.
Added new SS fuel, manifold, and oil pressure sensors to Figure B-10 GEA 110 Sensor
Interconnect, Sheet 1.
Updated CiES fuel probe wiring in Figure B-10 GEA 110 Sensor Interconnect and added
Flag Note 17.
Added general note clarifying that the GI 275 ADAHRS + AP is required to Figure B-12
Autopilot/Flight Director Interconnect - Bendix.
Autopilot/Flight Director Interconnect - Century.
Appendix B
Autopilot/Flight Director Interconnect - Cessna.
Autopilot/Flight Director Interconnect - Collins.
Autopilot/Flight Director Interconnect - Honeywell (Bendix/King).
Autopilot/Flight Director Interconnect - S-TEC.
Autopilot/Flight Director Interconnect - Sperry.
Added Note 4 Figure B-28 GDU 620 ARINC 429 Interface instructing the installer to verify
that there are an adequate number of available ARINC 429 ports available for the
installation.
C.8 Corrected Note 16.
Added GPT Manifold, Oil, and Fuel Pressure sensors, added v3 sensor config for RPM
C.19
sensor, and update pressure sensor descriptions in Table C-20 EIS Sensor Compatibility.
Added note for Cessna 190/195 models with Cessna Airspeed Indicators.
Appendix D
Separated Viking Air DHC-6-400 model-specific data into separate row.
E.7 Added Mach Settings.

Rev. 13 Page vii
DEFINITIONS
WARNING
A Warning means injury or death is possible.
CAUTION
A Caution means that damage to the equipment is possible.
NOTE
A Note provides additional information.
WARNING
This product, its packaging, and its components contain chemicals known to the State of
California to cause cancer, birth defects, or reproductive harm. This notice is being
provided in accordance with California's Proposition 65. For questions or additional
information, refer to www.garmin.com/prop65.
WARNING
Perchlorate Material – special handling may apply.
Refer to www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/perchlorate.
WARNING
Failure to properly configure the EIS gauges per the POH/AFM and other approved data
could result in serious injury, damage to equipment, or death.
WARNING
This product contains a Lithium-ion battery that must be recycled or disposed of properly.
Battery replacement and removal must be performed by a licensed A&P technician.

Rev. 13 Page viii
Acronyms
A
ADAHRS Air Data/Attitude and Heading Reference System
ADC Air Data Computer
ADI Attitude Direction Indicator
ADS-B Automatic Dependent Surveillance - Broadcast
AFCS Automatic Flight Control System
AFMS Aircraft Flight Manual Supplement
AFM Aircraft Flight Manual
AGL Above Ground Level
AHRS Attitude Heading Reference System
ALT Altitude
AML Approved Model List
AP Autopilot
ASI Airspeed Indicator
ASTM American Society for Testing and Materials
C
CDI Course Deviation Indicator
CDT Compressor Discharge Temperature
CFR Code of Federal Regulation
CHT Cylinder Head Temperature
CWS Control Wheel Steering
D
DC Direct Current
DG Directional Gyro
E
EAR Export Administration Regulations
ECDI Electronic Course Deviation Indicator
EFIS Electronic Flight Instrument System
EGT Exhaust Gas Temperature
EHSI Electronic Horizontal Situation Indicator
EIS Engine Indication System
EMC Electromagnetic Compatibility
EMI Electromagnetic Interference
F
FAA Federal Aviation Administration
FAR Federal Aviation Regulation
FD Flight Director

Rev. 13 Page ix
FIS-B Flight Information Services-Broadcast
FLTA Forward Looking Terrain Avoidance
FOV Field of View
FPM Feet Per Minute
G
GA Go Around
GDC Garmin Air Data Computer
GDL Garmin Data Link
GDU Garmin Display Unit
GEA Garmin Engine and Airframe
GMA Garmin Marker/Audio
GMU Garmin Magnetometer Unit
GNS Garmin Navigation System
GNSS Global Navigation Satellite System
GP Glide Path
GPS Global Positioning System
GPSS Global Positioning System Steering
GPWS Ground Proximity Warning System
GRS Garmin Reference System
GS Glideslope
GSB Garmin Serial Bus
GSU Garmin Sensing Unit
GTN Garmin Touchscreen Navigator
GTOW Gross Takeoff Weight
GTP Garmin Temperature Probe
GTS Garmin Traffic System
GTX Garmin Transponder
GWX Garmin Weather Radar
H
HSDB High Speed Data Bus
HSI Horizontal Situation Indicator
I
IAS Indicated Airspeed
IAT Induction Air Temperature
IFR Instrument Flight Rules
IGRF International Geomagnetic Reference Field
ILS Instrument Landing System
ISA International Standard Atmosphere

Rev. 13 Page x
IVSI Instantaneous Vertical Speed Indicator
K
KIAS Knots Indicated Airspeed
KPH Kilometers Per Hour
Kts Knots
L
LCD Liquid Crystal Display
LOC Localizer
LRU Line Replaceable Unit
M
MFD Multi-Function Display
MPH Miles Per Hour
MPS Meters Per Second
N
NAV Navigation
O
OAT Outside Air Temperature
OEM Original Equipment Manufacturer
P
PFD Primary Flight Display
PIT Pitch Attitude Hold
P/N Part Number
POH Pilot’s Operating Handbook
PVT Position, Velocity, and Time
R
RP Reduced Protection
RPM Revolutions Per Minute
S
SAE Society of Automotive Engineers
SAT Static Air Temperature
SBAS Satellite-Based Augmentation System
STC Supplemental Type Certificate
SVT Synthetic Vision Technology
SXM Sirius XM
T
TA Traffic Advisory
TAS Traffic Advisory System
TAT Total Air Temperature

Rev. 13 Page xi
TAWS Terrain Awareness and Warning System
TC Type Certificate
TCAD Traffic Collision Avoidance Device
TCAS Traffic Alert and Collision Avoidance System
TCDS Type Certificate Data Sheet
TIS-B Traffic Information Service - Broadcast
TIT Turbine Inlet Temperature
TNC Threaded Neill-Concelman
TSO Technical Standard Order
U
UTC Universal Time Coordinated
V
VDI Vertical Deviation Indicator
VHF Very High Frequency
VFR Visual Flight Rules
VLOC VOR/Localizer
VOR Very High Frequency Omni-directional Range
VS Vertical Speed
W
WAAS Wide Area Augmentation System

Rev. 13 Page xii
TABLE OF CONTENTS
1 GI 275 DESCRIPTION ...................................................................................................... 1-1
1.1 STC Applicability ......................................................................................................................1-2
1.2 System Overview .......................................................................................................................1-3
1.3 Equipment ................................................................................................................................1-20
1.4 System Architecture Examples ................................................................................................1-26
2 LIMITATIONS ................................................................................................................... 2-1
2.1 Installation Limitations ..............................................................................................................2-2
2.2 Operational Limitations..............................................................................................................2-7
3 PREPARATION ................................................................................................................. 3-1
3.1 Materials and Parts .....................................................................................................................3-2
3.2 GI 275 Installation Requirements ..............................................................................................3-7
3.3 Interfaces to Other Equipment .................................................................................................3-20
3.4 Selection of GI 275 System Components ...............................................................................3-24
3.5 Electrical Load Analysis ..........................................................................................................3-29
4 INSTALLATION................................................................................................................ 4-1
4.1 Wire Routing and Installation ....................................................................................................4-2
4.2 Pitot-Static Routing ....................................................................................................................4-5
4.3 Equipment Bonding..................................................................................................................4-10
4.4 Instrument Panel Installations ..................................................................................................4-12
4.5 Backshell Assembly .................................................................................................................4-32
4.6 Display Sensors ........................................................................................................................4-37
4.7 Engine Indicating System.........................................................................................................4-60
4.8 Weight and Balance .................................................................................................................4-78
5 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION .......................................................................................... 5-1
5.1 System Configuration Preparation .............................................................................................5-3
5.2 Software / Configuration............................................................................................................5-5
5.3 Unit Type....................................................................................................................................5-7
5.4 Feature Enable..........................................................................................................................5-10
5.5 Interfaces ..................................................................................................................................5-11
5.6 Setup.........................................................................................................................................5-35
5.7 EIS ............................................................................................................................................5-57
5.8 Calibration/Checks ...................................................................................................................5-69
5.9 External Systems ......................................................................................................................5-84
5.10 Diagnostics ...............................................................................................................................5-85
5.11 System Info ..............................................................................................................................5-87
5.12 Maintenance .............................................................................................................................5-87
5.13 Restart Options.........................................................................................................................5-88
5.14 Wireless Connectivity ..............................................................................................................5-89
5.15 Database Loading.....................................................................................................................5-90
6 SYSTEM CHECKOUT...................................................................................................... 6-1
6.1 Checkout Log .............................................................................................................................6-2
6.2 Configuration Ground Checks ...................................................................................................6-5
6.3 Interfaced Equipment Ground Checks .......................................................................................6-6
6.4 AHRS Ground Checks .............................................................................................................6-22
6.5 Indicator-Specific Checks ........................................................................................................6-29

Rev. 13 Page xiii
6.6 Placards and Switch Labeling Check .......................................................................................6-37
6.7 Electromagnetic Interference (EMI) Check .............................................................................6-38
6.8 Flight Checks............................................................................................................................6-40
6.9 Documentation Checks ............................................................................................................6-45
7 TROUBLESHOOTING ..................................................................................................... 7-1
7.1 Troubleshooting Flowcharts.......................................................................................................7-2
7.2 Additional Troubleshooting .....................................................................................................7-18
APPENDIX A CONNECTORS AND PIN FUNCTION..................................................... A-1
A.1 GI 275........................................................................................................................................A-2
A.2 GEA 24......................................................................................................................................A-6
A.3 GEA 110.................................................................................................................................. A-10
A.4 GMU 44B ................................................................................................................................A-13
A.5 GMU 11...................................................................................................................................A-14
A.6 GTP 59 .................................................................................................................................... A-15
A.7 GSB 15 .................................................................................................................................... A-15
APPENDIX B INTERCONNECT DIAGRAMS .................................................................. B-1
APPENDIX C EQUIPMENT COMPATIBILITY AND CONFIGURATION ................ C-1
C.1 Electronic Standby Indicators ................................................................................................... C-3
C.2 ADC .......................................................................................................................................... C-4
C.3 AHRS ........................................................................................................................................ C-5
C.4 GPS Source ............................................................................................................................... C-6
C.5 VHF Navigation Receiver......................................................................................................... C-8
C.6 Analog Navigation Receiver ................................................................................................... C-10
C.7 Radar Altimeter ....................................................................................................................... C-11
C.8 Autopilot.................................................................................................................................. C-12
C.9 External Flight Director .......................................................................................................... C-15
C.10 EIS ........................................................................................................................................... C-16
C.11 Transponder Control ............................................................................................................... C-16
C.12 Serial Altitude (RS-232).......................................................................................................... C-16
C.13 Traffic Source.......................................................................................................................... C-17
C.14 Weather Source ....................................................................................................................... C-19
C.15 Lightning/Electrical Discharge Source ................................................................................... C-19
C.16 GFC 500 PFD Sync................................................................................................................. C-20
C.17 External TAWS ....................................................................................................................... C-20
C.18 Audio Panel ............................................................................................................................. C-21
C.19 EIS Sensors ............................................................................................................................. C-22
APPENDIX D MODEL-SPECIFIC DATA ......................................................................... D-1
APPENDIX E ADVANCED AIRSPEED SETTINGS ......................................................... E-1
E.1 Overview ................................................................................................................................... E-2
E.2 Configuration Page Layout ....................................................................................................... E-2
E.3 Arc Ranges ................................................................................................................................ E-3
E.4 Overspeeds ................................................................................................................................ E-6
E.5 Bugs........................................................................................................................................... E-8
E.6 Markings.................................................................................................................................... E-9
E.7 Mach Settings............................................................................................................................ E-9
E.8 Airspeed Tape Configuration Examples ................................................................................. E-10

Rev. 13 Page xiv
APPENDIX F EIS GAUGE LAYOUT .................................................................................. F-1
F.1 Main EIS Page............................................................................................................................F-2
F.2 AUX EIS Page ...........................................................................................................................F-7
F.3 CHT/EGT Page ..........................................................................................................................F-8
F.4 Fuel Page ....................................................................................................................................F-9
F.5 Summary Page..........................................................................................................................F-10
F.6 Gauge Markings .......................................................................................................................F-11
APPENDIX G HIRF AND LIGHTNING PROTECTION................................................. G-1
G.1 Shielded Wire............................................................................................................................G-2
G.2 Lightning Zones for GTP 59 and GMU 11/44B .......................................................................G-3
G.3 Example Lightning Zoning Diagrams..................................................................................... G-19

Rev. 13 Page xv
LIST OF TABLES
Table 1-1 Garmin Manuals and References for GI 275 System...........................................................1-5
Table 1-2 Garmin Installation Manuals for Other Systems ..................................................................1-5
Table 1-3 Technical References ...........................................................................................................1-6
Table 1-4 GI 275 Variant Functionality ...............................................................................................1-6
Table 1-5 Primary ADI Features by Unit Selection .............................................................................1-8
Table 1-6 HSI Features by Unit Selection ..........................................................................................1-11
Table 1-7 MFD Features by Unit Selection........................................................................................1-13
Table 1-8 CDI Features by Unit Selection..........................................................................................1-14
Table 1-9 Standby Indicator Features by Unit Selection ....................................................................1-16
Table 1-10 EIS Features by Unit Selection ..........................................................................................1-17
Table 3-1 GI 275 Units .........................................................................................................................3-2
Table 3-2 GI 275 Connector Kits .........................................................................................................3-2
Table 3-3 GI 275 LRUs ........................................................................................................................3-3
Table 3-4 LRU Installation Kits ...........................................................................................................3-3
Table 3-5 HSDB Cables .......................................................................................................................3-4
Table 3-6 EIS Annunciator ...................................................................................................................3-5
Table 3-7 Recommended Crimp Tools.................................................................................................3-6
Table 3-8 Power Distribution ...............................................................................................................3-7
Table 3-9 Switch Labels .......................................................................................................................3-8
Table 3-10 Circuit Breaker Labels - Single Essential Bus .....................................................................3-8
Table 3-11 Circuit Breaker Labels - Independent Essential Busses .......................................................3-9
Table 3-12 GI 275 Standby ADI Restrictions per System....................................................................3-10
Table 3-13 GI 275 HSI/Standby ADI Restrictions ...............................................................................3-11
Table 3-14 Required Gauges for EIS....................................................................................................3-13
Table 3-15 Additional Gauges..............................................................................................................3-13
Table 3-16 Available EIS Parameters...................................................................................................3-14
Table 3-17 Garmin LRU HSDB Port Summary...................................................................................3-15
Table 3-18 Traffic Interface..................................................................................................................3-20
Table 3-19 Autopilots and Interfaces....................................................................................................3-22
Table 3-20 External TAWS Setup with GI 275....................................................................................3-23
Table 3-21 Aircraft Eligibility Checklist ..............................................................................................3-24
Table 3-22 GI 275 System Components...............................................................................................3-25
Table 3-23 EGT and CHT Probe Quantity ...........................................................................................3-26
Table 3-24 LRU Current Draw.............................................................................................................3-29
Table 3-25 Net Electrical Load Change Calculation Example (14 VDC Aircraft) ..............................3-30
Table 4-1 Bonding Requirements .......................................................................................................4-10
Table 4-2 GI 275 Multifunction Indicator Weight & Size .................................................................4-15
Table 4-3 Backup Battery Weight and Size........................................................................................4-21
Table 4-4 GSB 15 Weight and Size....................................................................................................4-25
Table 4-5 GMU Recommended Distance from Sources of Magnetic Interference ...........................4-37
Table 4-6 Example Magnetic Interference Test Sequence List..........................................................4-41
Table 4-7 GMU 11 Weight and Size ..................................................................................................4-42
Table 4-8 GMU 44B Weight and Size................................................................................................4-48
Table 4-9 Backup GPS Antenna Weight and Size .............................................................................4-57
Table 4-10 GEA 24 Weight and Size ...................................................................................................4-61
Table 4-11 GEA 110 Weight and Size .................................................................................................4-64
Table 4-12 Weight and Balance Calculation Example .........................................................................4-78
Table 5-1 ADC Interfaces and Configuration Settings.......................................................................5-13

Rev. 13 Page xvi
Table 5-2 ADC Configuration Priority ...............................................................................................5-13
Table 5-3 AHRS Interfaces and Configuration Settings ....................................................................5-14
Table 5-4 AHRS Configuration Priority.............................................................................................5-15
Table 5-5 GPS Interfaces and Configuration Settings........................................................................5-16
Table 5-6 NAV Interfaces and Configuration Settings ......................................................................5-17
Table 5-7 RAD ALT Interfaces and Configuration Settings ..............................................................5-18
Table 5-8 Garmin GFC 500 Autopilot Configuration ........................................................................5-19
Table 5-9 Garmin GFC 600 Autopilot Configuration ........................................................................5-19
Table 5-10 Bendix M-4C/M-4D Autopilot Configuration ...................................................................5-19
Table 5-11 Century 2000 Autopilot Configuration ..............................................................................5-20
Table 5-12 Century 21/31 Autopilot Configuration .............................................................................5-20
Table 5-13 Century 41 Autopilot Configuration ..................................................................................5-20
Table 5-14 Century II/III Autopilot Configuration...............................................................................5-21
Table 5-15 Century IV AC Autopilot Configuration............................................................................5-21
Table 5-16 Century IV DC Autopilot Configuration............................................................................5-21
Table 5-17 Cessna AC Autopilot Configuration ..................................................................................5-22
Table 5-18 Cessna DC Autopilot Configuration (1000 IFCS) .............................................................5-22
Table 5-19 Cessna DC Autopilot Configuration ..................................................................................5-23
Table 5-20 Collins AP-106/107 Autopilot Configuration ....................................................................5-23
Table 5-21 Honeywell (Bendix/King) KAP 150/KFC 150 Autopilot Configuration ..........................5-24
Table 5-22 Honeywell (Bendix/King) KAP 100/200 Autopilot Configuration ...................................5-24
Table 5-23 Honeywell (Bendix/King) KAP 140 Autopilot Configuration ..........................................5-24
Table 5-24 Honeywell (Bendix/King) KFC 225 Autopilot Configuration...........................................5-25
Table 5-25 Honeywell (Bendix/King) KFC 250-4” HSI Autopilot Configuration ..............................5-25
Table 5-26 Honeywell (Bendix/King) KFC 200/250-3” HSI Autopilot Configuration .......................5-26
Table 5-27 Honeywell (Bendix/King) KFC 300 Autopilot Configuration...........................................5-26
Table 5-28 Sperry SPZ-200A/500 Autopilot Configuration ................................................................5-27
Table 5-29 S-TEC 20/30/40/50/60-1 Autopilot Configuration ............................................................5-27
Table 5-30 S-TEC 60-2/65/60 PSS Autopilot Configuration ...............................................................5-28
Table 5-31 S-TEC 55X Autopilot Configuration .................................................................................5-28
Table 5-32 S-TEC 55 Autopilot Configuration ....................................................................................5-29
Table 5-33 AHRS Emulation Configuration Settings ..........................................................................5-29
Table 5-34 Transponder Configuration Settings ..................................................................................5-29
Table 5-35 EIS/GEA Configuration Settings .......................................................................................5-30
Table 5-36 Engine Annunciator Configuration Settings ......................................................................5-30
Table 5-37 Traffic System Configuration Settings...............................................................................5-31
Table 5-38 GDL 69 Configuration Settings .........................................................................................5-32
Table 5-39 Stormscope Configuration Settings....................................................................................5-33
Table 5-40 PFD Sync Configuration Settings ......................................................................................5-33
Table 5-41 General Purpose Discrete In Settings .................................................................................5-33
Table 5-42 General Purpose Discrete Out Settings ..............................................................................5-33
Table 5-43 General Purpose A429 Output Settings..............................................................................5-34
Table 5-44 General Purpose Serial Port Setting ...................................................................................5-34
Table 5-45 Airframe-Specific Configuration Data – Configuration Type Basic Setting .....................5-38
Table 5-46 Photocell Configuration Procedure ....................................................................................5-40
Table 5-47 Lighting Bus Configuration Procedure ..............................................................................5-42
Table 5-48 Photocell Configuration Procedure - Enhanced Lighting ..................................................5-43
Table 5-49 Lighting Bus Configuration Procedure - Enhanced (Display) ...........................................5-44
Table 5-50 Lighting Bus Configuration Procedure - Enhanced (Knob)...............................................5-46
Table 5-51 Terrain/TAWS Setting .......................................................................................................5-54

Rev. 13 Page xvii
Table 5-52 TAWS Airframe-Specific Configuration Data...................................................................5-54
Table 5-53 EIS Configuration - Engine ................................................................................................5-58
Table 5-54 Cruise RPM Setting............................................................................................................5-58
Table 5-55 Fuel Flow K-Factor ............................................................................................................5-62
Table 5-56 CHT/EGT Page Advanced Settings ...................................................................................5-63
Table 5-57 Original Gauge Settings .....................................................................................................5-65
Table 5-58 Additional Gauge Settings..................................................................................................5-65
Table 5-59 Gauge Minimum and Maximum Ranges ...........................................................................5-67
Table 5-60 Extension Harness Parts .....................................................................................................5-71
Table 5-61 Fuel Page Settings ..............................................................................................................5-80
Table 5-62 Fuel Quantity Calibration Settings .....................................................................................5-81
Table 5-63 LRU Status Indicators ........................................................................................................5-87
Table 5-64 Database Summary.............................................................................................................5-91
Table 6-1 Checkout Log .......................................................................................................................6-2
Table 6-2 Interfaced Equipment Ground Check Section Reference.....................................................6-6
Table 6-3 Localizer/Glideslope Checks................................................................................................6-9
Table 6-4 Heading Verification AHRS ..............................................................................................6-24
Table 6-5 Airspeed Test Points...........................................................................................................6-30
Table A-1 GI 275 Unit Connectors ......................................................................................................A-2
Table A-2 J2751/P2751 Connector ......................................................................................................A-3
Table A-3 J2752/P2752 Connector ......................................................................................................A-4
Table A-4 GI 275 - GEA 24 .................................................................................................................A-6
Table A-5 J241/P241 Connector ..........................................................................................................A-7
Table A-9 GI 275 - GEA 110 Connectors ..........................................................................................A-10
Table A-10 J1101/P1101 Connector ....................................................................................................A-11
Table A-11 J1102/P1102 Connector ....................................................................................................A-11
Table A-12 GI 275 - GMU 44B Connectors ........................................................................................A-13
Table A-13 J442/P442 Connector ........................................................................................................A-13
Table A-14 GI 275 - GMU 11 Connectors ...........................................................................................A-14
Table A-15 J111/P111 Connector ........................................................................................................A-14
Table A-16 3-Conductor Shielded Cable .............................................................................................A-15
Table A-17 J201/P201 & J202/P202 ....................................................................................................A-15
Table C-1 LRU Interface Summary ..................................................................................................... C-2
Table C-2 Electronic Standby Indicator ............................................................................................... C-3
Table C-3 Compatible Air Data Computers ......................................................................................... C-4
Table C-4 Compatible Attitude and Heading Reference Systems ....................................................... C-5
Table C-5 Compatible GPS Position Source........................................................................................ C-6
Table C-6 Compatible VHF Navigation Receiver ............................................................................... C-8
Table C-7 Compatible Analog Navigation Receiver.......................................................................... C-10
Table C-8 Compatible Radar Altimeter ............................................................................................. C-11
Table C-9 Compatible Autopilot ........................................................................................................ C-12
Table C-10 Compatible External Flight Director................................................................................. C-15
Table C-11 Compatible Engine Adapters............................................................................................. C-16
Table C-12 Compatible Transponders.................................................................................................. C-16
Table C-13 RS-232 Serial Altitude ...................................................................................................... C-16
Table C-14 Compatible Traffic Source ................................................................................................ C-17
Table C-15 Compatible Weather Radar Sources.................................................................................. C-19

Rev. 13 Page xviii
Table C-16 Compatible Lightning/Electrical Discharge Source.......................................................... C-19
Table C-17 Compatible GFC 500 PFD Sync Interfaces ...................................................................... C-20
Table C-18 Compatible External TAWS Sources................................................................................ C-20
Table C-19 Compatible Audio Panels .................................................................................................. C-21
Table C-20 EIS Sensor Compatibility .................................................................................................. C-22
Table D-1 Aircraft Model-Specific Data .............................................................................................D-2
Table E-1 Advanced Airframe-Specific Configuration Data – Arc Ranges ........................................ E-3
Table E-2 Advanced Airframe-Specific Configuration Data – Bugs .................................................. E-8
Table E-3 Advanced Airframe-Specific Configuration Data – Alternate Bugs................................... E-8
Table E-4 Advanced Airframe-Specific Configuration Data – Markings ........................................... E-9

Rev. 13 Page xix
LIST OF FIGURES
Figure 1-1 GI 275 System Installation (Before and After Example) ....................................................1-4
Figure 1-2 GI 275 Primary ADI ............................................................................................................1-7
Figure 1-3 GI 275 Horizontal Situation Indicator ...............................................................................1-10
Figure 1-4 GI 275 Multi-Function Display Indicator..........................................................................1-12
Figure 1-5 GI 275 Course Deviation Indicator....................................................................................1-14
Figure 1-6 GI 275 Standby Indicator...................................................................................................1-15
Figure 1-7 GI 275 Single-Engine EIS Interfaces ................................................................................1-17
Figure 1-8 GI 275 Twin-Engine EIS Interfaces ..................................................................................1-18
Figure 1-9 VFR GPS Antenna.............................................................................................................1-20
Figure 1-10 GMU 44B Magnetometer ..................................................................................................1-21
Figure 1-11 GMU 11 Magnetometer.....................................................................................................1-21
Figure 1-12 GTP 59 OAT Probe ...........................................................................................................1-21
Figure 1-13 GEA 24 Engine Adapter ....................................................................................................1-22
Figure 1-14 GEA 110 Engine Adapter ..................................................................................................1-22
Figure 1-15 EIS Annunciator (Single) ..................................................................................................1-23
Figure 1-16 EIS Annunciator (Separate)...............................................................................................1-23
Figure 1-17 Carburetor Temperature Probe ..........................................................................................1-23
Figure 1-18 Oil Temperature Probe ......................................................................................................1-23
Figure 1-19 Fuel Flow Transducer FT-60 (Left) and FT-90 (Right) ....................................................1-24
Figure 1-20 Pressure Sensors ................................................................................................................1-24
Figure 1-21 Backup Battery ..................................................................................................................1-25
Figure 1-22 GSB 15 Variants ................................................................................................................1-25
Figure 1-23 GI 275 Primary ADI and Twin-Engine EIS ......................................................................1-26
Figure 1-24 GI 275 Primary ADI, Reverting HSI/Standby ADI, and EIS............................................1-27
Figure 1-25 GI 275 Primary ADI, HSI, and MFD ................................................................................1-28
Figure 1-26 GI 275 Primary ADI, Reverting MFD/Standby ADI, and HSI .........................................1-29
Figure 1-27 GI 275 Primary ADI, Reverting MFD/Standby ADI, HSI, and Single-Engine EIS .........1-30
Figure 1-28 GI 275 Primary ADI, Reverting HSI/Standby ADI, MFD, and EIS .................................1-31
Figure 1-29 KI 256 and KI 525 Replacement .......................................................................................1-32
Figure 3-1 HSDB Architecture: Legend..............................................................................................3-16
Figure 3-2 HSDB Architecture: Primary ADI.....................................................................................3-16
Figure 3-3 HSDB Architecture: Primary ADI with GFC 600 Autopilot ............................................3-16
Figure 3-4 HSDB Architecture: EIS....................................................................................................3-17
Figure 3-5 HSDB Architecture: MFD.................................................................................................3-17
Figure 3-6 HSDB Architecture: Primary ADI with GFC 600 and HSI/Standby ADI ........................3-17
Figure 3-7 HSDB Architecture: Primary ADI with GFC 600, HSI/Standby ADI, and EIS ...............3-18
Figure 3-8 HSDB Architecture: Primary ADI, MFD/Standby ADI, HSI, and EIS ............................3-18
Figure 3-9 HSDB Architecture: Primary ADI, MFD/Standby ADI, HSI, EIS, Co-Pilot ADI ...........3-19
Figure 3-10 Ammeter Placement for Current Measurement .................................................................3-32
Figure 3-11 Tabulated Electrical Load Form ........................................................................................3-33
Figure 3-12 Example of Completed Tabulated Electrical Load Form ..................................................3-35
Figure 4-1 Shield Termination Methods ...............................................................................................4-4
Figure 4-2 Pitot-Static Connections for Single GI 275 Installation ......................................................4-6
Figure 4-3 Pitot-Static Connections for Single GI 275 Installation ......................................................4-7
Figure 4-4 Pitot-Static Connections for Dual GI 275 Installation.........................................................4-8
Figure 4-5 Pitot-Static Connections for Dual GI 275 Installation.........................................................4-9
Figure 4-6 Example of Pilot Field-of-View Installation .....................................................................4-12
Figure 4-7 Example of GI 275s in “Six Pack” Instrument Panel (Single-Engine) .............................4-13

Rev. 13 Page xx
Figure 4-8 Example of GI 275s in “Six Pack” Instrument Panel (Multi-Engine)...............................4-14
Figure 4-9 Example of GI 275s in Non-“Six Pack” Instrument Panel (Single-Engine) .....................4-14
Figure 4-10 GI 275 Multifunction Indicator Dimensions .....................................................................4-15
Figure 4-11 Installation of GI 275 Display in the Instrument Panel .....................................................4-17
Figure 4-12 Installation of GI 275 with KI 256 Adapter.......................................................................4-18
Figure 4-13 GI 275 Cutout ....................................................................................................................4-19
Figure 4-14 Backup Battery Dimensions ..............................................................................................4-21
Figure 4-15 GI 275 Backup Battery Installation ...................................................................................4-22
Figure 4-16 EIS Caution and Warning Annunciator Installation ..........................................................4-23
Figure 4-17 EIS Caution and Warning Annunciators Installation ........................................................4-24
Figure 4-18 GSB 15 Dimensions ..........................................................................................................4-26
Figure 4-19 GSB 15 Cutout Dimensions...............................................................................................4-27
Figure 4-20 GSB 15 Cutout Installation................................................................................................4-28
Figure 4-21 GSB 15 Installation with Mounting Kit (2.25-Inch Cutout)..............................................4-29
Figure 4-22 GSB 15 Installation with Mounting Kit (3.125-Inch Cutout)............................................4-30
Figure 4-23 GSB 15 Decorative Cover Installation ..............................................................................4-31
Figure 4-24 Jackscrew Backshell and Shield Block Assembly.............................................................4-33
Figure 4-25 Shield Block Termination on Jackscrew Backshell Assembly..........................................4-34
Figure 4-26 Jackscrew Backshell Assembly .........................................................................................4-35
Figure 4-27 Magnetic Interference Test Harness ..................................................................................4-39
Figure 4-28 GMU 11 Dimensions.........................................................................................................4-42
Figure 4-29 GMU 11 Mounting Hardware ...........................................................................................4-43
Figure 4-30 Example GMU 11 Mounting Shelf....................................................................................4-44
Figure 4-31 GMU 11 Overbraid Installation.........................................................................................4-46
Figure 4-32 GMU 11 Overbraid Termination .......................................................................................4-47
Figure 4-33 GMU 44B Dimensions ......................................................................................................4-48
Figure 4-34 GMU 44B Installation (Universal Mount Example) .........................................................4-49
Figure 4-35 GMU 44B Installation (Fabricated Bracket Example) ......................................................4-50
Figure 4-36 GMU 44 Series Connector Wire Overbraid Installation ...................................................4-52
Figure 4-37 GTP 59 OAT Probe Dimensions .......................................................................................4-53
Figure 4-38 GTP 59 Installation in Metallic Aircraft............................................................................4-54
Figure 4-39 GTP 59 Installation in Composite Aircraft (Non-Conductive Access Panel) ...................4-55
Figure 4-40 GTP 59 Installation in Composite Aircraft (Conductive Access Panel) ...........................4-56
Figure 4-41 Backup GPS Antenna Dimensions ....................................................................................4-57
Figure 4-42 Backup GPS Antenna Installation (Non-Removable Installation Example) .....................4-58
Figure 4-43 Backup GPS Antenna Installation (Removable Installation Example) .............................4-59
Figure 4-44 Example Support Structure................................................................................................4-61
Figure 4-45 GEA 24 Dimensions ..........................................................................................................4-62
Figure 4-46 GEA 24 Mounting Hardware.............................................................................................4-63
Figure 4-47 GEA 110 Dimensions ........................................................................................................4-64
Figure 4-48 GEA 110 Installation (Mounted Directly to Airframe Example)......................................4-65
Figure 4-49 GEA 110 Installation (Mounted on a Tray Example) .......................................................4-66
Figure 4-50 Carburetor Temperature Sensor Installation Example ......................................................4-67
Figure 4-51 Oil Temperature Sensor Installation Example...................................................................4-68
Figure 4-52 Brass Sensor Installation....................................................................................................4-70
Figure 4-53 Mil-Spec Style Sensor Installation ....................................................................................4-71
Figure 4-54 GPT Sensor Installation .....................................................................................................4-72
Figure 4-55 Fuel Flow Installation Configurations ...............................................................................4-73
Figure 4-56 Example Fuel Flow Transducer Installation......................................................................4-75
Figure 4-57 Fuel Flow Overbraid..........................................................................................................4-76

Rev. 13 Page xxi
Figure 4-58 TCM/Bendix Magneto Vent Hole .....................................................................................4-76
Figure 4-59 Slick Magneto Vent Hole ..................................................................................................4-77
Figure 5-1 System Configuration Flow.................................................................................................5-3
Figure 5-2 Entering the Configuration Menu........................................................................................5-4
Figure 5-3 Software Update ..................................................................................................................5-5
Figure 5-4 Interface and Ports/Config Selections ...............................................................................5-11
Figure 5-5 Airframe Config Page........................................................................................................5-35
Figure 5-6 ADI Styles .........................................................................................................................5-35
Figure 5-7 ADI Aircraft Symbols........................................................................................................5-36
Figure 5-8 Basic (Left) and Advanced (Right) Airspeed Configuration Type Settings......................5-37
Figure 5-9 User-Configurable Airspeed Markings..............................................................................5-37
Figure 5-10 Lighting Page.....................................................................................................................5-39
Figure 5-11 Lighting Curve Slope Configuration .................................................................................5-41
Figure 5-12 Cutoff Percentage Configuration .......................................................................................5-41
Figure 5-13 Display Lighting (Left) and Knob Lighting (Right) Curves .............................................5-43
Figure 5-14 Enhanced Lighting Mode Example Photocell ...................................................................5-44
Figure 5-15 Enhanced Lighting Mode Example Lighting Bus - Display .............................................5-45
Figure 5-16 Selection Between Lighting Bus and Photocell Backup Curves .......................................5-45
Figure 5-17 Vertex Adjustment Dialog Box .........................................................................................5-46
Figure 5-18 Page Config Page - MFD/Standby ADI (Left) and EIS (Right)........................................5-47
Figure 5-19 Primary ADI Page – Basic, 3-in-1, 4-in-1 .........................................................................5-47
Figure 5-20 GI 275 Normal Mode Pages ..............................................................................................5-51
Figure 5-21 External ADC/AHRS Sensor Configuration Example ......................................................5-53
Figure 5-22 Sensor Menu Example.......................................................................................................5-59
Figure 5-23 TIT Sensor Configuration Example...................................................................................5-60
Figure 5-24 Gauge Configuration Example ..........................................................................................5-66
Figure 5-25 Gauge Range Marking Example........................................................................................5-67
Figure 5-26 Side Text Example.............................................................................................................5-68
Figure 5-27 KAP 100 & KFC/KAP 150 Test Harness..........................................................................5-71
Figure 5-28 KFC 200 Test Port .............................................................................................................5-74
Figure 5-29 Fuel Quantity Calibration Page .........................................................................................5-83
Figure 5-30 Fuel Quantity Calculation Procedure.................................................................................5-83
Figure 6-1 Autopilot Test Page ...........................................................................................................6-17
Figure 6-2 Autopilot Test Page - Deviation ........................................................................................6-18
Figure 6-3 GPSS Page .........................................................................................................................6-19
Figure 6-4 GPSS Selection..................................................................................................................6-20
Figure 6-5 ADI Standard Turn Rate Indicators ...................................................................................6-31
Figure 6-6 EMI Victim/Source Matrix................................................................................................6-39
Figure 6-7 Autopilot Performance Checkout Log...............................................................................6-43
Figure 7-1 GI 275 Alert Message Troubleshooting ..............................................................................7-2
Figure 7-2 Battery Alert Message Troubleshooting ..............................................................................7-4
Figure 7-3 AHRS Alert Message Troubleshooting ...............................................................................7-8
Figure 7-4 ADC Alert Message Troubleshooting .................................................................................7-9
Figure 7-5 Terrain/TAWS Alert Message Troubleshooting ...............................................................7-10
Figure 7-6 Traffic Alert Message Troubleshooting.............................................................................7-11
Figure 7-7 Audio and Weather Alert Message Troubleshooting ........................................................7-13
Figure 7-8 NAV Alert Message Troubleshooting ...............................................................................7-14
Figure 7-9 Autopilot Alert Message Troubleshooting ........................................................................7-15
Figure 7-10 Miscellaneous GI 275 Alert Message Troubleshooting ....................................................7-16
Figure 7-11 External LRU Alert Message Troubleshooting .................................................................7-17

Rev. 13 Page xxii
Figure A-1 GI 275 Connectors..............................................................................................................A-2
Figure A-2 GI 275 J2751/P2751 Connector (Looking at Unit) ............................................................ A-3
Figure A-3 GI 275 J2752/P2752 Connector (Looking at Unit) ............................................................ A-4
Figure A-4 GEA 24 Connectors............................................................................................................A-6
Figure A-5 GEA 24 J241/P241 Connector (Looking at Unit) ..............................................................A-7
Figure A-9 GEA 110 Connectors........................................................................................................A-10
Figure A-10 GEA 110 J1101/P1101 Connector (Looking at Unit) ......................................................A-11
Figure A-11 GEA 110 J1102/J1102 Connector (Looking at Unit) .......................................................A-11
Figure A-12 GMU 44B J442/P442 Connector......................................................................................A-13
Figure A-13 GMU 11 J111/P111 Connector (Looking at Unit) ...........................................................A-14
Figure A-14 GSB 15 Connectors ..........................................................................................................A-15
Figure B-1 GI 275 - Power, Lighting, Configuration Module, HSDB, USB Interconnect .................. B-3
Figure B-2 Attitude and Air Data Interconnect..................................................................................... B-5
Figure B-3 External Attitude and Air Data ........................................................................................... B-7
Figure B-4 GPS Interconnect ................................................................................................................ B-8
Figure B-5 NAV Interconnect............................................................................................................... B-9
Figure B-6 Analog CDI Interconnect.................................................................................................. B-11
Figure B-7 GEA 24 Power Interconnect ............................................................................................. B-13
Figure B-8 GEA 24 Sensor Interconnect ............................................................................................ B-14
Figure B-9 GEA 110 Power, Config Module Interconnect ................................................................ B-21
Figure B-10 GEA 110 Sensor Interconnect .......................................................................................... B-22
Figure B-11 Audio Interconnect ........................................................................................................... B-28
Figure B-12 Autopilot/Flight Director Interconnect - Bendix .............................................................. B-29
Figure B-13 Autopilot/Flight Director Interconnect - Century............................................................. B-31
Figure B-14 Autopilot/Flight Director Interconnect - Cessna .............................................................. B-38
Figure B-15 Autopilot/Flight Director Interconnect - Collins .............................................................. B-43
Figure B-16 Autopilot/Flight Director Interconnect - Garmin GFC 600.............................................. B-45
Figure B-17 Autopilot/Flight Director Interconnect - Honeywell (Bendix/King)................................ B-46
Figure B-18 Autopilot/Flight Director Interconnect - S-TEC............................................................... B-56
Figure B-19 Autopilot/Flight Director Interconnect - Sperry ............................................................... B-60
Figure B-20 External Switches and Annunciators ................................................................................ B-62
Figure B-21 GDL 69 Series Interconnect ............................................................................................. B-64
Figure B-22 Radar Altimeter Interconnect ........................................................................................... B-65
Figure B-23 Serial Altitude Output Interconnect.................................................................................. B-66
Figure B-24 Stormscope Interconnect .................................................................................................. B-67
Figure B-25 Traffic Advisory System Interconnect.............................................................................. B-68
Figure B-26 GSB 15 Interconnect......................................................................................................... B-71
Figure B-27 ARINC 429 Course Select Interconnect........................................................................... B-72
Figure B-28 GDU 620 ARINC 429 Interface ....................................................................................... B-73
Figure E-1 Advanced Airspeed Configuration Pages ........................................................................... E-2
Figure E-2 Airspeed Tape Arc Range Diagrams .................................................................................. E-5
Figure E-3 Beechcraft Bonanza A36 Current ASI and Tape Markings ............................................. E-10
Figure E-4 Beechcraft Bonanza A36 Equivalent IAS Tape and Airspeed Configuration.................. E-11
Figure E-5 Columbia 400 Current ASI and Tape Markings............................................................... E-12
Figure E-6 Columbia 400 Equivalent IAS Tape and Airspeed Configuration ................................... E-13
Figure F-1 Example Main EIS Page ......................................................................................................F-2
Figure F-2 Top Full-Time Gauge Examples .........................................................................................F-2

Rev. 13 Page xxiii
Figure F-3 Bottom Full-Time Gauge Examples....................................................................................F-3
Figure F-4 CHT/EGT Graph Examples.................................................................................................F-4
Figure F-5 Strip Gauge Examples .........................................................................................................F-4
Figure F-6 Strip Gauge Priority Examples ............................................................................................F-5
Figure F-7 Strip Gauge Diagram ...........................................................................................................F-6
Figure F-8 Left Side Aux Gauges Examples.........................................................................................F-7
Figure F-9 Right Side Aux Gauges Examples.......................................................................................F-7
Figure F-10 Bottom AUX Gauges Examples..........................................................................................F-7
Figure F-11 CHT/EGT Page Examples...................................................................................................F-8
Figure F-12 Fuel Page without GPS Source............................................................................................F-9
Figure F-13 Fuel Page with GPS Source.................................................................................................F-9
Figure F-14 Summary Page – Aircraft Timers ......................................................................................F-10
Figure F-15 Summary Page – RPM and Temp Data.............................................................................F-10
Figure F-16 Summary Page – Fuel and Lean Data................................................................................F-10
Figure F-17 Caution Alert (Flashing and Acknowledged) ....................................................................F-11
Figure F-18 Warning Alert (Flashing and Acknowledged)...................................................................F-11
Figure F-19 Caution and Warning Alerts (Flashing and Acknowledged).............................................F-11
Figure F-20 New Caution Alert with Ongoing Warning Alert..............................................................F-12
Figure F-21 Varying Gauge Arc............................................................................................................F-12
Figure G-1 Shielded Wire Splice ..........................................................................................................G-2
Figure G-2 Lightning Zoning Legend ...................................................................................................G-3
Figure G-3 Zoning for Wingtips on Aircraft Not Limited to VFR Operation ......................................G-4
Figure G-4 Zoning for Wingtips on Aircraft Limited to VFR Operation .............................................G-6
Figure G-5 Zoning for Wings Affected by Landing Gear..................................................................... G-7
Figure G-6 Zoning for a Single Propeller (Low- or High-Wing)..........................................................G-8
Figure G-7 Zoning for a Low- or High-Wing Canard with a Rear-Mounted Propeller........................ G-9
Figure G-8 Zoning for a Low- or High-Wing Aircraft with a Curved Lower Fuselage .....................G-10
Figure G-9 Zoning for a Single, Rear-Mounted Prop above Fuselage ...............................................G-11
Figure G-10 Zoning for Front-Mounted Twin Propellers (Low- or High-Wing) ................................. G-12
Figure G-11 Zoning for Rear-Mounted Twin Propellers (Low- or High-Wing) ..................................G-13
Figure G-12 Zoning for Front- and Rear-Mounted Propellers (Low- or High-Wing)..........................G-14
Figure G-13 Zoning for High-Wing with Front and Rear Propellers Mounted Above Fuselage .........G-15
Figure G-14 Zoning for Low- or High-Wing Canard with Twin Jet Engines ......................................G-16
Figure G-15 Zoning for Low or High Wing Canard with Twin Rear-Facing Props.............................G-16
Figure G-16 Zoning for Single-Propeller Biplane ................................................................................G-17
Figure G-17 Single Jet Engines with Two Inlets Zoning, Low or High Wing .....................................G-17
Figure G-18 Zoning for Empennage .....................................................................................................G-18
Figure G-19 Example Lightning Zoning for Single-Engine Aircraft....................................................G-19
Figure G-20 Example Lightning Zoning for Twin-Engine Aircraft .....................................................G-20

Rev. 13 Page xxiv
1 GI 275 DESCRIPTION
1.1 STC Applicability .............................................................................................................................1-2

1.2 System Overview ..............................................................................................................................1-3
1.2.1 Hardware Variants......................................................................................................................1-6
1.2.2 Functions ....................................................................................................................................1-7
1.3 Equipment.......................................................................................................................................1-20
1.3.1 Display Sensors ........................................................................................................................1-20
1.3.2 Engine Sensors .........................................................................................................................1-22
1.3.3 Other Equipment ......................................................................................................................1-25
1.4 System Architecture Examples.......................................................................................................1-26
This installation manual is intended for use by those authorized to perform maintenance and/or avionics
installations on approved aircraft. It includes installation data and checkout procedures for the GI 275
Multi-Function Instrument and refers to standards described in Title 14 CFR Part 43. Installation personnel
must be familiar with the contents of this manual prior to performing modifications to the aircraft.
Terms frequently used in this manual include:
• GI 275: Unless otherwise specified, refers equally to all variants of the GI 275
• References made to HSDB and Ethernet are used interchangeably.
• Standalone EIS: GI 275 EIS with no HSDB network connection to a GI 275 ADI.
• Metal aircraft: Aircraft with an aluminum (metallic) airframe, including exterior skin
• Non-metal aircraft: Aircraft with an airframe constructed from wood or composite, including
exterior skin, or aircraft with metal tubular truss airframe and fabric or composite exterior skin
• Primary EGT: Is the exhaust gas temperature that is displayed independently from the exhaust gas
temperature associated with each cylinder. This is typically a probe installed downstream in the
exhaust to detect temperature from multiple cylinders and is used for EGT limitations in some
aircraft
• X: An “X” denotes variations of LRUs. Examples include:
◦ “GTN 6XX” refers to the GTN 625/635/650“GTX 33X” refers to the GTX 33/33D/330/
330D/335
• ( ): Parenthesis denote an undetermined value. Examples include:
◦ “GI ( )” refers to GI 1, GI 2, etc. depending on the context
◦ “AHRS ( )” refers to AHRS 1, AHRS 2, or AHRS 3 depending on the context
• Throughout this manual references will be made to aircraft class. With regards to usage in this
manual, the classes are defined as follows:
◦ Class I: Single reciprocating engine airplane with GTOW of 6,000 lbs or less
◦ Class II: Multi reciprocating engine or turbine engine airplane with GTOW of 6,000 lbs or
less
◦ Class III: Airplane with GTOW of more than 6,000 lbs
◦ Class IV: Commuter category aircraft
Refer to AC 23.1309-1E for more information on airplane classes
• “Standby ADI” refers to any GI 275 configured as a Standby per Section 5.3.4 (i.g., MFD/Standby
ADI and HSI/Standby ADI) or a GI 275 configured as a secondary ADI for another system per
Section 3.2.2.

Rev. 13 Page 1-1
1.1 STC Applicability
This manual defines aircraft modifications required to install the GI 275 Multi-Function Instrument under
the GI 275 Part 23 AML STC. It is only applicable to aircraft models listed on the Approved Model List.
Aircraft modifications per this STC involve the installation of components and LRUs specified in the STC
Equipment List, which include sensors common for engine parameters. Installation of components and
LRUs not included in the STC Equipment List require a separate airworthiness approval.
The GI 275 Multi-Function Instrument is approved for installation in Class I-IV aircraft, with certain
limitations; refer to Section 2.
Applicability of this STC for a particular aircraft must be verified before the modification based on the data
contained in this manual. Some aircraft may have been modified or equipped with systems in which the
GI 275 interface is not defined nor approved. The installer must make the final determination if this STC is
applicable to a given aircraft.
The installation of the GI 275 Multi-Function Instrument in accordance with this STC is a major alteration
to the aircraft. Following a major alteration, the aircraft must be returned to service in a means acceptable
to the cognizant aviation authority. An example would be compliance with 14 CFR 43.9, 14 CFR 91.417,
and submission of an FAA Form 337 “Major Repair and Alteration Airframe, Powerplant, Propeller, or
Appliance” completed in accordance with AC43.9-1F Instructions for Completion of FAA Form 337.
Consistent with FAA Order 8110.4B and AC 21-40, a permission letter to use this STC data is available for
download from the Garmin Dealer Resource Center.

Rev. 13 Page 1-2
1.2 System Overview
The GI 275 is a multi-function electronic instrument display capable of operating as a standalone display.
It features a bright, sunlight readable, 3⅛-inch diameter color display that is sized to fit in a standard
instrument cutout.
The GI 275 Multi-Function Instrument can be configured as the following indicator types:
• Primary Attitude Display Indicator (attitude, altitude, airspeed, and heading)
• Standby Attitude Display Indicator (attitude, altitude, airspeed, and heading)
• Horizontal Situational Indicator (HSI) and Enhanced Horizontal Situational Indicator (EHSI)
• Engine Instrument System Indicator (EIS)
• Multi-Function Display Indicator (MFD)
The following dedicated pages are available on a GI 275 MFD or MFD/Standby ADI:
• CDI (MFD only)
• ADI (MFD/Standby ADI only)
• HSI
• Stormscope
• Terrain
• Moving Map
• Radar Altimeter
• Traffic
• Weather
• Transponder
If the GI 275 is configured as a Primary ADI, no other pages can be displayed.
Primary instruments, such as the Standard Turn Rate Indicator, must be retained unless a Standby ADI is
installed. A GTP 59 OAT probe is required to be installed to display standard turn rate indices on the ADI.
Refer to Section 2 for limitations.
When the GI 275 provides altitude, airspeed, attitude, or heading, the internal ADAHRS is required as the
primary sensor. The backup battery is available for all GI 275 units as an option, and is required for
standby displays that are powered by the aircraft’s primary electrical power source.
The GI 275 EIS uses the GEA 24 or the GEA 110 adapter and sensors to replace various engine
instruments and provide indication of engine parameters. For a single engine, a single GI 275 with multiple
pages can be used; however, all alerting gauges must fit on the primary gauge page. If a GEA 110 is
installed as part of the GI 275 system, the -01 model of the GEA 110 must be used.
For twin-engine EIS, each engine must have a dedicated GEA 24/110 and each engine must have separate
GI 275 indicators. Only one indicator is permitted per engine. If multiple indicators are needed to display
all primary alerting gauges, then certain existing gauges must be retained instead.
EIS units may not share a GEA 110/24 interface with G500/600 TXi or G3X systems, respectively. If using
a GI 275 for EIS, then the EIS interface may only be connected and displayed on the GI 275 system, and
may not be connected or displayed on TXi or G3X systems.

Rev. 13 Page 1-3
A typical modification to an aircraft instrument panel to install the GI 275 system is shown in Figure 1-1,
which illustrates a Primary ADI, HSI, MFD/Standby ADI, and EIS installation.
Figure 1-1 GI 275 System Installation (Before and After Example)

Rev. 13 Page 1-4
Additional information on the GI 275 system can be found in the Garmin documents listed in Table 1-1.
Additional information on Garmin equipment that can be interfaced to the GI 275 system can be found in
the Garmin documents listed in Table 1-2. Technical information applicable to the GI 275 system
installation can be found in the public documents listed in Table 1-3.
Table 1-1 Garmin Manuals and References for GI 275 System

Document Title Garmin P/N
GI 275 Part 23 AML STC Maintenance Manual/ICA 190-02246-11
GI 275 Part 23 AML STC Airplane Flight Manual Supplement 190-02246-12
GI 275 TSO Installation Manual 190-02246-00
GI 275 Pilot’s Guide 190-02246-01
GSB 15 TSO Installation Manual 190-00303-A3
GEA 110 TSO Installation Manual 190-01825-00
GMU 44B Installation Manual 190-02129-00
AHRS / Magnetometer Installation Considerations 190-01051-00
Table 1-2 Garmin Installation Manuals for Other Systems

Document Title Garmin P/N
G500/G600 TXi Part 23 AML STC Installation Manual 190-01717-B3
G500/G600 Part 23 AML STC Installation Manual 190-00601-06
G3X Touch EFIS Part 23 AML STC Installation Manual 190-02472-01
GTN 6XX/7XX AML STC Installation Manual 190-01007-A3
GTN Xi Part 23 AML STC Installation Manual 190-01007-C0
400W Series Installation Manual 190-00356-02
500W Series Installation Manual 190-00357-02
GNS 480 Installation Guide 190-00504-00
GTX 3XX Part 23 AML STC Installation Manual 190-00734-10
GTS 8X5 Part 23 AML STC Installation Manual 190-01279-00
GTS 8X0 / GPA 65 Installation Manual 190-00587-00
GFC 600 Automatic Flight Control System Part 23 AML STC Installation Manual 190-01937-00
GDL 69/69A Installation Manual 190-00355-02
GPS 175 Part 23 AML STC Installation Manual 190-02207-A1
GNX 375 Part 23 AML STC Installation Manual 190-02207-A4
GNC 355 Part 23 AML STC Installation Manual 190-02207-A5
GTR 225/GNC 255 TSO Installation Manual 190-01182-02
Garmin Pilot for iOS User’s Guide 190-01501-00
Garmin Pilot for Android User’s Guide 190-01532-00

Rev. 13 Page 1-5
Table 1-3 Technical References
Document Title Document Number
FAA Advisory Circular, Powerplant Guide for Certification of Part 23 Airplanes
FAA AC 23-16A
and Airships
FAA Advisory Circular, Installation of Electronic Display in Part 23 Airplanes FAA AC 23.1311-1C
FAA Advisory Circular, Acceptable Methods, Techniques, and Practices - Aircraft
FAA AC 43.13-1B
Inspection and Repair
FAA Advisory Circular, Acceptable Methods, Techniques, and Practices - Aircraft
FAA AC 43.13-2B
Alterations
Aerospace Systems Electrical Bonding and Grounding for Electromagnetic
SAE ARP1870
Compatibility and Safety
Standard Guide for Aircraft Electrical Load and Power Source Capacity Analysis ASTM F2490-05
1.2.1 Hardware Variants

The GI 275 is available in three hardware variants: Base, ADAHRS, and ADAHRS+AP. All three variants
use the same touchscreen display, control knob, main control board, and metal casing. The backup battery
is optional for the GI 275 Base and standard for the GI 275 ADAHRS and ADAHRS+AP variants.
GI 275 Base
The GI 275 Base unit has one 78-pin D-sub connector and is capable of functioning as an MFD or EIS unit.
If a GI 275 Base is configured in a system with a GI 275 ADAHRS or ADAHRS+AP unit, it may be
configured as an HSI.
GI 275 ADAHRS
The GI 275 ADAHRS unit includes all the functionality of the GI 275 Base unit with an additional 78-pin
D-sub connector, internal ADAHRS circuit board, and pitot/static port fittings. This allows the added
functionality of a Primary ADI, MFD/Standby ADI, HSI, or HSI/Standby ADI, excluding non-Garmin
autopilot outputs.
GI 275 ADAHRS+AP
The GI 275 ADAHRS+AP unit includes all the functionality of the GI 275 ADAHRS unit in addition to an
internal autopilot control/interface circuit board. This allows it to drive an approved non-Garmin autopilot
when configured as a Primary ADI or HSI. Garmin autopilots require only a GI 275 ADAHRS unit.
Table 1-4 GI 275 Variant Functionality
GI 275 GI 275
Function GI 275 Base
ADAHRS ADAHRS+AP
Primary ADI  
MFD/Standby ADI  
MFD   
EIS   
HSI *  
HSI/Standby ADI  
Autopilot Interface 
*Requires interface to another GI 275 with an internal ADAHRS configured

Rev. 13 Page 1-6
1.2.2 Functions
1.2.2.1 Primary Attitude and Direction Indicator (ADI)
Figure 1-2 shows the GI 275 configured as a Primary ADI. The GI 275 ADAHRS or ADAHRS+AP
provides 4-in-1 display of attitude, altitude, airspeed, and heading.
If desired, the Primary ADI can be configured as a basic attitude indicator 3-in-1 display of attitude,
altitude, and airspeed only. In this case, the primary heading indicator must be retained or replaced with a
GI 275 HSI.
The GI 275 ADAHRS and ADAHRS+AP variants contain an integrated ADAHRS (Air Data and Attitude
Heading Reference System), which provides the primary display of attitude, altitude, airspeed, and
optional heading data. The attitude data is displayed in the form of a virtual blue sky and brown ground
with a white horizon line. Airspeed and altitude data are displayed as tapes vertically along the outer
portion of the display. The heading data is displayed horizontally along the bottom of the display.
Required and
installed per STC
GTP 59 Pitot/Static
Analog Mechanical
Optional and OAT Probe Plumbing
installed per STC [5] [6]
Not installed per

STC
Internal ADAHRS
[ADAHRS or ADAHRS+AP units]
Backup GPS
Coaxial
Antenna
[2]
GMU 44B RS‐232 (GMU 44B) GI 275

RS‐485 (GMU 44B)
OR OR
GMU 11 RS‐232 (GMU 11)
Magnetometer LRU Power
ADI
[3]
[Attitude, Altitude, Airspeed, and Heading]
USB
GSB 15
Backup Battery
(Optional)
[1]….GI 275 ADAHRS+AP required to drive the

autopilot if equipped. GPS #1‐2 HSDB or HSDB or SVT
[2]….GPS source is required. Either backup [2] RS‐232 & ARINC 429 Traffic
antenna or external GPS source ARINC 429
[3]....Required if used as compensated heading
source for HSI functionality. HSDB or Analog or Analog External Flight
[4]….Reserved. NAV #1‐2 RS‐232 or
[5]….The OAT sensor is not a required interface Director
ARINC 429
for Primary ADI units unless the aircraft is
IFR and the turn coordinator is removed or
there is not a third source of attitude. Radar ARINC 429 HSDB or Autopilot
[6]….Required connection for aiding AHRS. Altimeter Discrete & ARINC 429 [1]
Figure 1-2 GI 275 Primary ADI

Rev. 13 Page 1-7
Table 1-5 Primary ADI Features by Unit Selection
Hardware Variant
GI 275 Function Description
ADAHRS ADAHRS+AP
Terrain Alerting  
Connext and LRU status  
Radar altitude  
4-in-1 primary ADI  
Secondary heading  
Legacy autopilot and flight director interfaces 
An internal backup battery is available for all GI 275 ADAHRS and ADAHRS+AP units. With the backup
battery installed, if the aircraft loses power, the battery is capable of providing power to the GI 275, backup
GPS antenna, GTP 59 OAT Probe, and magnetometer for at least 60 minutes.
In addition to the Primary ADI, the following additional information can be shown:
• Flight director
• Synthetic Vision Terrain
◦ Requires: Heading (ARINC label 320), GPS, Terrain database, Obstacle database, SVT
Enablement, and the GI 275 Terrain to be configured as Terrain-FLTA
• Standard turn rate indices (requires OAT interface)
• Slip/skid
• Vertical speed/tape/bug
• Altitude baro setting/bug/trends
• Airspeed bugs/trends
• Vertical and Lateral deviations
• Radar altimeter (for minimums)
Attitude
The GI 275 calculates aircraft attitude using information from its built-in inertial sensors and GPS data. If
the GI 275 senses that the attitude solution is valid, but not yet within the internal accuracy limits,
“ALIGNING” is displayed. The primary GI 275 attitude functions are comprised of pitch and roll.
Standard Turn Rate Indices

The standard turn rate indicator is displayed at the top of the display on the roll indicator when the requisite
airspeed is reached. A standard-rate turn (3° per second) is shown on the indicator by the airplane shaped
markers on the roll indicator. The GTP 59 Outside Air Temperature Probe is required for this functionality.
Slip/Skid
The slip/skid information is located near the top of the display under the roll pointer and is indicated by the
small white trapezoid.

Rev. 13 Page 1-8
Air Data
Air data information is provided by the GI 275 unit when it is connected to the aircraft pitot/static system.
The functions provided by the air data are shown below:
• Airspeed indicator
• Barometric altimeter
• Selected altitude setting, bug, and visual altitude alerting
• Secondary vertical speed with references
• AHRS aiding
Heading
The GI 275 can provide stabilized heading based on ADAHRS and magnetometer data, which is displayed
as a linear scale along the bottom of the ADI display with a digital readout of the current heading in
degrees. Labels on the linear scale denote increments of 30°, with white markings indicating smaller
increments for increased awareness.
GPS
The GI 275 requires GPS for attitude aiding. The indicator contains an internal GPS receiver that can be
connected to a GPS antenna mounted on the glareshield, or it can receive an input from an external GPS, if
available. As installed in this STC, the GI 275 receives the GPS data for aiding via the following methods:
• Glareshield GPS antenna
• GTN 6XX/7XX or GTN Xi series navigator
• GNS 4XXW/5XXW series navigator
• GNS 480 series navigator
• GTX 3X5 transponder with internal GPS receiver (software v3.00 or later)
• GPS 175/GNX 375/GNC 355
Deviations
The GI 275 Primary ADI can display vertical and lateral deviations from a compatible GPS and/or NAV. If
an external GPS or NAV is not available, the internal VFR GPS (with installed glareshield antenna) can
display lateral deviations for VFR Direct-To navigation only.

Rev. 13 Page 1-9
1.2.2.2 Horizontal Situation Indicator (HSI)
The GI 275 is designed to replace an existing DG/HSI as a drop-in replacement. The GI 275 HSI provides
magnetically stabilized heading based on GMU 11/44B data. The GI 275 HSI can also provide display of
course and deviation information from compatible VHF NAV and GPS sources. Air data information is
provided by the GI 275 unit when it is connected to the aircraft pitot/static system. The HSI can also be
used for heading and course deviations for an autopilot.
The GI 275 HSI provides the option of an enhanced EHSI page with a map underlay, which can display
ownship data on a moving map, as well as a CDI/VDI, which shows lateral and vertical course deviations.
Both the HSI and EHSI pages can be configured on an MFD or MFD/Standby ADI unit for added
versatility. In certain aircraft, the HSI can be installed as a standby indicator. The HSI/Standby ADI must
be a GI 275 ADAHRS or ADAHRS+AP unit and will auto-revert to the ADI page in the event a
miscompare or no compare occurs between the Primary ADI and the standby. If configured as an HSI/
Standby ADI, a backup battery may be required. Refer to Section 1.2.2.4 and Section 2.1.4 for more
information on requirements for standby indicators.
Required and
installed per STC GTP 59 Analog Pitot/Static
Mechanical
OAT Probe Plumbing
Optional and [6]
installed per STC
Not installed per

STC Internal ADAHRS
[ADAHRS or ADAHRS + AP units]
Backup GPS
Coaxial
Antenna
[4]
GI 275
RS‐232 (GMU 44B)
GMU 44B RS‐485 (GMU 44B)
OR OR
GMU 11
RS‐232 (GMU 11) HSI
[3]
GSB 15 USB
Backup Battery
(Optional)
[1].…GI 275 ADAHRS+AP required to drive

autopilot, if equipped. Refer to
Section 3 for AP limitations. GPS #1‐2 HSDB HSDB
[2]….For applicable units only. or or Traffic
[4]
[3]….GI 275 Base unit can be used but requires RS‐232 & ARINC 429 ARINC 429
interface to another GI 275 with an
integrated ADAHRS. Discrete &
[4]….GPS interface is required. Either Backup Autopilot ARINC 429 HSDB or Analog or NAV #1‐2
antenna or external GPS source. [1] or RS‐232 or ARINC 429 [5]
[5]….Each GI275 only supports one analog Nav Analog
interface.
[6]….Required connection for AHRS Aiding if HSDB
used as a heading source with an or Weather
interfacing GMU . RS‐232
Figure 1-3 GI 275 Horizontal Situation Indicator

Rev. 13 Page 1-10
Table 1-6 HSI Features by Unit Selection
Hardware Variant Requires Full
Base ADAHRS ADAHRS+AP Time Display
Electronic Horizontal Situation Indicator,
*   Yes
EHSI with optional map underlay
Weather (FIS-B, SXM)    N/A
Moving map with direct to navigation, terrain,
   N/A
traffic, and weather overlay
Terrain Alerting    N/A
Direct-to nearest airport with internal GPS    N/A
Connext and LRU status    N/A
Legacy autopilot and flight director interfaces  N/A
*Requires interface to another GI 275 with internal ADAHRS

Rev. 13 Page 1-11
1.2.2.3 Multifunction Flight Display (MFD)
The GI 275 can function as a MFD with configurable pages to show information from other interfaced
LRUs. MFD pages may be displayed on a MFD/Standby ADI unit for added versatility.
Required and
installed per STC
Optional and
installed per STC
Not installed per

STC GI 275
Backup GPS Coaxial Multi‐Function Display

Antenna
(MFD)
USB
GSB 15
Backup Battery
(Optional)
[1]....Each GI 275 only supports one analog RS‐232 ARINC 429

Stormscope Radar Altimeter
Nav interface.
HSDB
HSDB or
Traffic or
GPS #1‐2
RS‐232 &
ARINC 429 ARINC 429
Weather HSDB HSDB or Analog or NAV #1‐2

RS‐232 or ARINC 429 [1]
Figure 1-4 GI 275 Multi-Function Display Indicator

Rev. 13 Page 1-12
Table 1-7 MFD Features by Unit Selection
Hardware Variant
Base ADAHRS ADAHRS+AP
Configurable Multi-function Display (MFD)   
Electronic Horizontal Situation Indicator, EHSI with map underlay [1]  
Electronic Course Deviation Display, ECDI with map underlay   
MFD Data Display   
Traffic (ADS-B, TCAS with control)   
Weather (FIS-B, SXM)   
Moving map with direct-to navigation, terrain traffic, and weather
  
overlay
Query map items (limited to waypoint information)   
Nearest airport information   
Terrain display   
Direct-to nearest airport with internal GPS   
Connext and LRU status   
Radar Altitude   
Supplemental EIS display (only the Fuel page for installations with
  
multiple primary EIS displays)
Transponder Control [2]   
Notes:
[1] Requires interface to GI 275 with internal ADAHRS.
[2] Only compatible with GTX 345 series transponders.
The configurable MFD pages that show the information listed in Table 1-7 can be independently enabled
or disabled to show applicable data from connected LRUs, which include:
• HSI (requires GPS or NAV source)
• CDI (requires GPS or NAV source)
• Traffic display (requires traffic source)
• Moving map with weather, terrain, and traffic overlays
• MFD data page with waypoint information (requires GPS/NAV)
• Secondary EIS display (only the Fuel page for installations with multiple primary EIS displays)
• Radar Altitude digital gauge display (requires radar altimeter)
• Transponder Control page (requires GTX 345 series transponder)

Rev. 13 Page 1-13
1.2.2.3.1 Standalone Course Deviation Indicator (CDI)
The Electronic Course Deviation Indicator provides a display for lateral and vertical deviations and can be
configured on any GI 275 variant. The CDI page is displayed on a GI 275 configured as an MFD.
NOTE
When the GI 275 is configured as a standalone CDI, the HSI and Enhanced HSI pages
must be configured Off.
Required and
installed per STC
Optional and
installed per STC
Not installed per

STC GI 275
Backup GPS Coaxial CDI

Antenna [2]
GSB 15 USB
Backup Battery
(Optional)
[1]….Each GI 275 only supports one HSDB or HSDB or Analog or NAV #1‐2
analog NAV. GPS #1‐2
RS‐232 & ARINC 429 RS‐232 or ARINC 429 [1]
[2]….Supported on MFD
configuration.
Figure 1-5 GI 275 Course Deviation Indicator
Table 1-8 CDI Features by Unit Selection

Base ADAHRS ADAHRS+AP Time Display
Electronic Course Deviation Indicator    No
Direct-to nearest airport with internal GPS    N/A
Connext and LRU status    N/A

Rev. 13 Page 1-14
1.2.2.4 Standby Indicator
The GI 275 in a standby configuration displays the same information as the Primary ADI and has the same
requirements as the Primary ADI. A display backup switch is required if installed as an MFD/Standby ADI
or HSI/Standby ADI. Refer to Section 3.2.2 for information.
The Standby ADI will automatically revert to display secondary ADI data in the case of a Primary ADI
failure. The MFD/Standby ADI can display MFD pages and the HSI/Standby ADI can display HSI pages
under normal operating conditions (i.e., when the Primary ADI is functional) in certain aircraft. Refer to
Section 2 for limitations.
NOTE
When the Standby ADI is in reversionary mode, all previously configured MFD or HSI
pages are unavailable. Only the ADI page will be displayed.
The Standby ADI monitors the primary indicator during normal operation. When the standby indicator
senses a discrepancy, it automatically reverts to displaying its secondary ADI data within 1 second.
Additionally, a display backup switch may be required to be installed. When this switch is set to AUTO, the
standby display functions as outlined above. When the switch is set to ON, the standby display will always
display the aircraft’s secondary ADI data whether or not there is a miscompare between the Primary ADI
and standby indicator. MFD/HSI pages are disabled when the switch is set to ON.
Required and installed per
STC
Optional and installed per GTP 59 Pitot/Static
Analog Mechanical
STC OAT Probe Plumbing
[7] [2]
Not installed per STC
Internal ADAHRS
[ADAHRS]
Backup GPS PFD
Coaxial HSDB
Antenna [1]
[3]
RS‐232 (GMU 44B) GI 275

OR
Standby
OR
GMU 11
RS‐232 (GMU 11)
MFD/Standby ADI Instrument
[1]
Reversionary
Discrete
Magnetic
Switch
[6] Backup Battery Compass
(Required) [8] [4]
USB
GSB 15
[1]….Refer to Section 2 for limitations.
[2]….Required connection for aiding AHRS.
[3]….GPS interface is required. Either Backup
antenna or external GPS source. Radar ARINC 429 RS‐232
[4].…Must be retained. Stormscope
[5]….Reserved Altimeter
[6]….Required when Standby is configured with
MFD pages.
[7]….The OAT sensor is not a required interface GPS #1‐2 HSDB or HSDB or ARINC 429 Traffic/
for Standby ADI units. [3] RS‐232 SVT Traffic
[8]…..A backup battery is required for Standby
GI 275 units that do not utilize an
electrical power source that is HSDB or Analog or
independent from the aircraft’s primary RS‐232 or ARINC 429
NAV # 1‐2
electrical power source.
Figure 1-6 GI 275 Standby Indicator

Rev. 13 Page 1-15
Table 1-9 Standby Indicator Features by Unit Selection
Hardware Variant Requires Full Time
ADAHRS ADAHRS+AP Display
Terrain Alerting   No
Connext and LRU status   No
Multi-function Display (MFD)  [1]  N/A
4-in-1 Standby ADI No
 
Attitude, Altitude, Airspeed, and Heading (Yes in reversionary mode)
Notes:
[1] Exclusions exist. Refer to Section 2.1.4 for limitations and Section 3.2.2 for standby requirements.
1.2.2.5 Engine Indication System (EIS)

The GI 275 provides EIS display for four- and six-cylinder reciprocating engines. EIS does not include
turbine engines. An EIS installation consists of one GEA 110 or GEA 24 per engine and one GI 275 per
engine.
The EIS display can drive caution and warning lights that may be required for installation when the
indicator is not installed in the primary field-of-view.
The EIS display collects powerplant data and utilizes an automatic monitoring system that interprets and
reports the data to the pilot in the form of an alert. The crew can acknowledge the alert, which prompts the
indicator to display page one, which contains the data parameter in question. This reduces the amount of
information displayed at a given time to the crew, allowing the EIS indicator to work for the pilot by
monitoring engine data and notifying the crew with an alert.
The EIS has the capability to configure up to five pages. Each configured parameter with alerting markings
on page one is tied to an alert that will be displayed across the bottom of the screen when an exceedance
occurs. Additionally, critical performance data is displayed on every page: fuel quantity, RPM, and if
applicable, manifold pressure.
GI 275 with EIS offers three aircraft timers: Flight Hours, Hobbs Timer, and Tach Timer. Flight Hours
accrue in-air, as the status is derived from weight-on-wheels, GPS speed, or engine RPM. The Hobbs
Timer is activated by engine oil pressure (was Engine Time in software v2.11 or earlier). Tach Time
(software v2.20 or later) accrues relative to engine cruise RPM.
In addition to this section, the following sections provide information that must be considered for EIS
installations:
• Section 2.1.5 - EIS limitations
• Section 3.2.3 - Minimum EIS requirements and available EIS gauges
• Section 3.4.3 - Sensor selection criteria
• Section 5.7.4.2 - Gauge markings and configuration requirements
• Appendix Section C.19 - Approved sensor interface or installation, includes configuration
• Appendix D - Model-Specific Info to determine if a Fuel Pressure Test is required
• Appendix F - EIS gauge layouts

Rev. 13 Page 1-16
Table 1-10 EIS Features by Unit Selection
Base Time Display
Primary EIS (per engine)  Yes
Supplemental/additional EIS display  No
Engine RPM Voltmeter

Required and
installed per STC
Oil Temperature Ammeter
Optional and
installed per STC Turbine Inlet Temp
Oil Pressure
(TIT)
Not installed per
STC Manifold Pressure Carb/Engine Inlet Air
[1] Temp
Cylinder Head Temp Comp Discharge

(CHT) Probes Temp (CDT)
[5]
Exhaust Gas Temp

(EGT) Fuel Pressure
[2] [5]
Fuel Flow Fuel Quantity

[2] Sensor(s)
Various Analog/Digital
Outside Air Temp
(GTP 59)
Backup GPS
Antenna
Coaxial HSDB GI 275
[ADI/HSI/MFD]
[4]
RS‐232 (GEA 24)

GSB 15 USB or GEA 24/110
RS‐485 (GEA 110) [3]
GI 275
Base Unit
EIS #1
Single Engine
[1]….If equipped.
[2]….Required sensor for Lean Assist.
[3]….Refer to Section 2 for limitations.
[4]….Used for fuel distance estimations.
GPS HSDB
[5]….Required interface for GI 275
[4] or
RS‐232 software v2.40 or later.
Figure 1-7 GI 275 Single-Engine EIS Interfaces

Rev. 13 Page 1-17
Engine #1 Engine #2
Engine RPM Voltmeter Engine RPM Voltmeter

Required and
installed per STC
Oil Temperature Ammeter Oil Temperature Ammeter
Optional and
Turbine Inlet Temp installed per STC Turbine Inlet Temp
Oil Pressure Oil Pressure
(TIT) (TIT)
Not installed per

Manifold Pressure Carb/Engine Inlet Air Manifold Pressure Carb/Engine Inlet Air
[1] Temp STC [1] Temp
Cylinder Head Temp Comp Discharge Cylinder Head Temp Comp Discharge
(CHT) Probes Temp (CDT) (CHT) Probes Temp (CDT)
[6] [1]….If equipped. [6]
[2]….Required sensor for Lean Assist.
Exhaust Gas Temp Exhaust Gas Temp
(EGT) Fuel Pressure [3]….Refer to section 2 for limitations. (EGT) Fuel Pressure
[2] [6] [2] [6]
[4]….Used for fuel distance estimations.
Fuel Flow Fuel Quantity [5]….Connect the GTP 59 to either EIS #1 Fuel Flow Fuel Quantity
[2] Sensor(s) or EIS #2, but not both. [2] Sensor(s)
[6]….Required interface for GI 275

Outside Air Temp software v2.40 or later.
(GTP 59) [5]
/Digital
Analog
/Digital
Analog
RS‐232 (GEA 24) GEA 24/110

OR [3]
GEA 24/110 RS‐232 (GEA 24) OR HSDB GI 275 RS‐485 (GEA 110)
[3] RS‐485 (GEA 110) ADI/HSI/MFD
Backup GPS Coaxial

Antenna [4]
USB
GSB 15
GI 275 GI 275
Base Unit Base Unit
GPS HSDB or HSDB

[4] RS‐232 EIS EIS
#1 Engine #2 Engine
Figure 1-8 GI 275 Twin-Engine EIS Interfaces

Rev. 13 Page 1-18
1.2.2.6 Wireless Connectivity
With the Garmin Pilot application (iOS and Android) installed on a personal electronic device, users can
update databases (refer to Section 5.15 for procedures), sync flight plans to an installed GPS 175,
GNX 375, or GNC 355, log flight data, and review traffic, weather, and location data from externally
connected LRUs. When paired to the GI 275, the Garmin D2 Delta Pilot watch can display key flight
information, such as position, airspeed, and altitude.
NOTE
Updating databases is disabled in flight. Databases must be updated while the aircraft is
on the ground. The GI 275 is capable of “Fast Syncing” databases only when the aircraft
is stationary.
NOTE
Visit flyGarmin.com to purchase flight databases. The GI 275 System ID is required when
purchasing databases from Garmin. Refer to Section 5.3.2 for instructions on obtaining
the System ID.

Rev. 13 Page 1-19
1.3 Equipment
Equipment installed by this STC is grouped into three categories:
1. Display Sensors
2. Engine Sensors
3. Other Equipment
1.3.1 Display Sensors

1.3.1.1 VFR GPS
The GI 275 contains a VFR GPS that can be used as a backup GPS or as a restricted primary GPS source.
NOTE
Credit is not taken for the GI 275 internal GPS for GPS navigation (NAV) in IFR flight;
the equipment and operational requirements for IFR must be met by other navigation
source(s) in the aircraft.
The VFR GPS will be capable of displaying moving map functions depicting ownship position, velocity,
ground speed, ground track, traffic overlay, weather, stormscope, and direct-to only functions in certain
instances.
The internal VFR GPS interfaces to a glareshield-mounted GPS antenna, which can be used in the event of
a failure of the primary GPS source or to provide VFR only situational information. Only one VFR GPS
antenna is needed for all GI 275s. The GPS data will be used by the interfacing GI 275 and it will forward
the data to any GI 275 configured to receive the data.
Figure 1-9 VFR GPS Antenna
1.3.1.2 Internal ADAHRS

The GI 275 ADAHRS and ADAHRS+AP variants contain an integrated ADAHRS. The internal
ADAHRS units require the pitot/static lines to be connected. Additionally, either the VFR GPS or a GPS
source approved by this STC is required.

Rev. 13 Page 1-20
1.3.1.3 GMU 44B
The GMU 44B Magnetometer senses magnetic field and provides data to the ADAHRS to determine
aircraft magnetic heading. The GMU 44B receives power directly from the GI 275 and communicates with
the ADAHRS via RS-485 and RS-232. The GMU 44B is applicable for Class I through IV aircraft. Refer
to Section 1 of definition of aircraft classes.
Figure 1-10 GMU 44B Magnetometer
1.3.1.4 GMU 11
The GMU 11 Magnetometer senses magnetic fields and provides data to the ADAHRS to determine
aircraft magnetic heading. The GMU 11 receives power directly from the GI 275 and communicates with
the ADAHRS via RS-232. The GMU 11 is applicable for Class I & II aircraft only. Refer to Section 1 of
definition of aircraft classes.
Figure 1-11 GMU 11 Magnetometer
1.3.1.5 GTP 59
The GTP 59 Outside Air Temperature (OAT) Probe is a remote-mounted sensor that interfaces to an ADC
or EIS adapter for OAT display and computations. OAT is used to produce true airspeed for AHRS aiding
as well as providing standard turn rate indices on the ADI. OAT is used to produce supplemental percent
power for the powerplant on EIS units. When interfaced to an ADC, Static Air Temperature (SAT) or Total
Air Temperature (TAT) can be displayed. When interfaced to a GEA, only Total Air Temperature (TAT) is
displayed as “OAT (EIS)”.
Figure 1-12 GTP 59 OAT Probe

Rev. 13 Page 1-21
1.3.2 Engine Sensors
Each engine requires a single GEA 24 or GEA 110 adapter. The GEA 24 or GEA 110 is mounted remotely.
Refer to Section 4.7.1 (GEA 24) or Section 4.7.2 (GEA 110) for installation instructions.
1.3.2.1 GEA 24 Engine Adapter

The GEA 24 is an engine interface and monitoring module that collects signals from the engine sensors
and communicates the engine parameters to the GI 275 via RS-232. The GEA 24 is approved for single
and multi-engine aircraft with a gross takeoff weight of 6000 lbs or less (i.e., Class I & II aircraft). Refer to
Section 1 of definition of aircraft classes.
Figure 1-13 GEA 24 Engine Adapter
1.3.2.2 GEA 110 Engine Adapter

The GEA 110 is an engine interface and monitoring module that collects signals from the engine sensors
and communicates the engine parameters to the GI 275 via RS-485. The GEA 110 is approved for
installation in all aircraft that are approved for EIS under this STC (i.e., Class I, II & III reciprocating
engine aircraft). Refer to Section 1 of definition of aircraft classes.
Figure 1-14 GEA 110 Engine Adapter

Rev. 13 Page 1-22
1.3.2.3 EIS Annunciator
EIS annunciation can be provided by a single warning (red)/caution (yellow) indicator (Figure 1-15) or
separate warning and caution lamps (Figure 1-16), which is required for EIS installations when the EIS
display is located outside the pilot’s maximum field-of-view. Refer to Section 4.4 for field-of-view
requirements.
Figure 1-15 EIS Annunciator (Single)
Figure 1-16 EIS Annunciator (Separate)
1.3.2.4 Miscellaneous Engine Sensors

The carburetor temperature probe is a K-Type thermocouple.
Figure 1-17 Carburetor Temperature Probe
The oil temperature probe is a K-Type thermocouple.
Figure 1-18 Oil Temperature Probe

Rev. 13 Page 1-23
There are two options for fuel flow transducers; refer to Section 3.4.3 for descriptions and restrictions.
The fuel flow transducers are installed in-line with the engine fuel delivery system. The display of fuel
flow under the GI 275 STC supports the following engines:
1. Fuel injected engines with and without the fuel servo return line (systems with return line will
require two fuel flow transducers).
2. Carbureted engines with a fuel pump, without the carburetor return line, and with the carburetor
return line (will require two fuel flow transducers).
3. Carbureted engines with gravity-fed fuel delivery system.
Figure 1-19 Fuel Flow Transducer FT-60 (Left) and FT-90 (Right)
The Garmin GPT and brass pressure sensors have NPT pressure ports and Packard style electrical
connectors. They are interchangeable, however the sensor configuration must be updated if they are
swapped. The mil-spec style sensors are a durable all-metal design featuring a 37 degree flared fitting and
round electrical connector.
Refer to Section 3.2.3 and Section 3.4.3 for more information.
Figure 1-20 Pressure Sensors

Rev. 13 Page 1-24
1.3.3 Other Equipment
1.3.3.1 Backup Battery
The backup battery is a lithium-iron battery that is required when the GI 275 is used as a standby indicator
that does not utilize an electrical power source that is independent from the aircraft’s primary electrical
power source. The battery will power the essential display sensors for a minimum of 60 minutes. The
battery is charged by the aircraft electrical system when not in use. The backup battery is optional for the
GI 275. The backup battery does not backup EIS sensors and displays.
Figure 1-21 Backup Battery
1.3.3.2 GSB 15
The GSB 15 is an optional LRU that mounts into the instrument panel and provides two USB connections
to a GI 275 unit. Variants include dual USB Type-A ports, dual USB Type-C ports, and single USB
Type-A/single USB Type-C ports. Each variant also has the option to have the connector on the rear or side
of the unit.
The USB ports can be used in place of a USB dongle to update the software on the GI 275 system and to
charge devices while in-flight.
A decorative cover can optionally be installed.
Figure 1-22 GSB 15 Variants

(Left: Dual Type-A, Center: Single Type-A/Single Type-C, Right: Dual Type-C)

Rev. 13 Page 1-25
1.4 System Architecture Examples
The GI 275 can be interfaced with other existing aircraft systems. Refer to Appendix C for equipment compatible with the GI 275. Example installation block
diagrams are shown in Figure 1-23 through Figure 1-28.
Pitot/Static
Mechanical Engine #1 Engine #2
Plumbing
[8] Inputs [2] Inputs [2]
Digital
Digital
Analog
Analog
RS‐232 (GEA 24) RS‐232 (GEA 24)
GTP 59 OR GEA 24/110 OR GEA 24/110
Analog RS‐485 (GEA 110) RS‐485 (GEA 110)
OAT Probe
[2] Internal ADAHRS
Backup GPS
Coaxial
Antenna GI 275 GI 275
[5] Base Unit
Base Unit
GMU 44B RS‐232 (GMU 44B) GI 275
RS‐485 (GMU 44B)
OR HSDB HSDB
GMU 11
OR
RS‐232 (GMU 11)
EIS EIS
Primary ADI #1 Engine #2 Engine
[3]
USB
GSB 15
Backup Battery
(Optional)
GPS #1‐2 HSDB or HSDB or SVT Standby Instruments

[5] RS‐232 & ARINC 429 Traffic
ARINC 429
NAV #1‐2
HSDB or Analog Analog External Flight Standby Standby
or RS‐232 or Director
ARIN 429 [1]….GI 275 ADAHRS+AP required to drive the
Attitude Airspeed
autopilot if equipped.
[2].…GTP 59 interface is optional but recommended. [6] [6]
Radar ARINC 429 HSDB or Autopilot If the system includes a GI 275 ADI(s), the GTP
Altimeter Discrete & ARINC 429 [1] 59 MUST ONLY be connected to the GI 275
ADI(s). For standalone GI 275 EIS installations,
connect the GTP 59 to the GEA 24/110. If
connected to EIS adapter in twin‐engine
aircraft, only connect to one, not both.
[3]....Required if used as compensated heading
Required and installed per STC source for HSI. Magnetic Standby
[4]….Reserved.
[5].…GPS source is required. Either backup
Compass Altimeter
Optional and installed per STC antenna or external GPS source. [7] [6]
[6]….Standby instrument not required for VFR
only aircraft.
Not installed per STC [7]….Must be retained.
Figure 1-23 GI 275 Primary ADI and Twin-Engine EIS

Rev. 13 Page 1-26
RS‐232 (GMU 44B) Pitot/Static
GMU 44B Mechanical
RS‐485 (GMU 44B) Plumbing
OR OR
[7]
GMU 11 RS‐232 (GMU 11)
Backup GPS Coaxial Reversionary
Antenna Switch
[5] [3]
GTP 59
OAT Probe
Analog Internal ADAHRS Internal ADAHRS
[2] [ADAHRS or ADAHRS + AP units] [ADAHRS]
USB GI 275 GI 275 GI 275

GSB 15
Base Unit
HSDB HSDB
Primary ADI HSI/Standby ADI
[3] #1 EIS
Backup Battery Backup Battery

(Optional) (Required) [8]
Engine Inputs
RS‐232 (GEA 24) GEA 24/110
[2]
OR
RS‐485 (GEA 110) Analog
Autopilot HSDB or GPS #2 HSDB or HSDB or
[1] Discrete & [5]
Traffic Digital
RS‐232 & ARINC 429
ARINC 429 ARINC 429
[1]….GI 275 ADAHRS+AP required to drive the autopilot if equipped.
External Flight Analog HSDB or Analog or ARINC 429 Radar [2].…GTP 59 interface is optional but recommended. If the system
NAV #2 includes a GI 275 ADI(s), the GTP 59 MUST ONLY be connected
Director RS‐232 or ARINC 429 Altimeter
to the GI 275 ADI(s). For standalone GI 275 EIS installations,
connect the GTP 59 to the GEA 24/110. If connected to EIS Standby
adapter in twin‐engine aircraft, only connect to one, not both.
GPS #1
[5]
HSDB or
RS‐232 &
[3]....MFD pages limited to Class I‐II aircraft. Reversionary switch Instrument
required when Standby ADI has MFD pages. See section 3 for
ARINC 429
restrictions.
[4].…Nav can be connected to any unit.
Required and installed per STC
HSDB or Analog or [5].…GPS source is required. Either backup antenna or external GPS
NAV #1 RS‐232 or ARINC 429 source. Magnetic
Optional and installed per STC [6]….Must be retained.
Compass
[8]….A backup battery is required for Standby GI 275 units that do not [6]
utilize an electrical power source that is independent from the
aircraft’s primary electrical power source.
Figure 1-24 GI 275 Primary ADI, Reverting HSI/Standby ADI, and EIS

Rev. 13 Page 1-27
Pitot/Static
Mechanical
GTP 59 Plumbing
Analog [7]
OAT Probe
[2]
HSDB [4]
Internal ADAHRS
Backup GPS
Coaxial
Antenna GI 275 GI 275
[5]
Base Unit Base Unit
RS‐232 (GMU 44B) GI 275
OR OR Primary ADI HSDB HSI HSDB
MFD
RS‐232 (GMU 11)
GMU 11
[Attitude, Altitude, Airspeed, and Heading} Backup Battery Backup Battery
(Optional) (Optional)
USB
GSB 15
Backup Battery
(Optional)
Autopilot HSDB or RS‐232 RS‐232

HSDB or
GPS #2 Stormscope
[1]
Discrete & ARINC 429
Standby Instruments Analog External Flight HSDB or Analog or

NAV #2
ARINC 429 Radar
Director RS‐232 or ARINC 429 Altimeter
Standby HSDB or RS‐232 GPS #1 HSDB or

Standby [5] ARINC 429
Traffic
Attitude Airspeed
[3] [3]
HSDB or Analog or HSDB
RS‐232 or ARINC 429
NAV #1 Weather
[1]….GI 275 ADAHRS+AP required to drive the autopilot

if equipped.
[2].…Optional but recommended.
[3]....Standby instruments not required for VFR only
Magnetic Standby Required and installed per STC aircraft.
[4].…If HSDB ports are available, this connection is
Compass Altimeter optional as an HSDB failure redundancy.
[6] [3] Optional and installed per STC [5].…GPS source is required. Either backup antenna or
external GPS source.
[6]….Must be retained.
Not installed per STC [7]….Required connection for aiding AHRS.
Figure 1-25 GI 275 Primary ADI, HSI, and MFD

Rev. 13 Page 1-28
RS‐485 (GMU 44B)
Pitot/Static
OR Mechanical
OR Plumbing
GMU 11 RS‐232 (GMU 11) Backup GPS Reversionary [7]
Magnetometer Antenna
Coaxial
Switch
LRU Power
[5] [3]
GTP 59
OAT Probe
Analog Internal ADAHRS Internal ADAHRS
[2] [ADAHRS or ADAHRS + AP units] [ADAHRS]
GSB 15 USB
GI 275 GI 275 GI 275
Base Unit
HSDB HSDB
Primary ADI MFD/Standby ADI

[3] HSI

Backup Battery (Optional)
HSDB [4]
Autopilot HSDB or GPS #2 HSDB or RS‐232

[1] [5] RS‐232 & Stormscope
Discrete &
ARINC 429 ARINC 429
External Flight Analog HSDB or Analog HSDB or

NAV #2 Traffic
Director or RS‐232 or ARINC 429
ARINC 429
Standby
GPS #1 [1]….GI 275 ADAHRS+AP required to drive the autopilot
[5]
HSDB or
RS‐232 &
Radar
Altimeter
ARINC 429 if equipped. Instrument
[2].…Optional but recommended.
ARINC 429
[3]....MFD pages limited to Class I‐II aircraft.
Reversionary switch required when Standby ADI
HSDB or Analog or has MFD pages. See section 3 for restrictions.
NAV #1
RS‐232 or ARINC 429 [4].…If HSDB ports are available, this connection is Magnetic
optional as an HSDB failure redundancy.
[5].…GPS source is required. Either backup antenna or
Compass
external GPS source. [6]
Optional and installed per STC
Not installed per STC [8]….A backup battery is required for Standby GI 275 u
nits that do not utilize an electrical power source
that is independent from the aircraft’s primary
Figure 1-26 GI 275 Primary ADI, Reverting MFD/Standby ADI, and HSI

Rev. 13 Page 1-29
RS‐232 (GEA 24)
OR
RS‐485 (GEA 110) GEA 24/110
GI 275 GI 275
Analog
Digital
Base Unit Base Unit
RS‐232 or HSDB [4]
GPS/NAV ARINC 429 or
Engine Inputs
Analog HSI EIS #1 [2]
Backup Battery
(Optional)
Pitot/Static
Mechanical Mechanical
HSDB Plumbing
HSDB [7]
GMU 44B RS‐232 (GMU 44B) Backup GPS Reversionary

Coaxial
OR RS‐485 (GMU 44B) Antenna Switch
OR Internal ADAHRS [5] Internal ADAHRS [3]
GMU 11 RS‐232 (GMU 11)
[ADAHRS or ADAHRS + AP units] [ADAHRS]
Magnetometer
LRU Power
GTP 59
OAT Probe
Analog GI 275 GI 275 ARINC 429 Radar
[2] Discrete Altimeter
HSDB
Primary ADI MFD/Standby ADI RS‐232
[3] Stormscope
[Attitude, Altitude, Airspeed, and Heading] [Attitude, Altitude, Airspeed, and Heading]
GSB 15 USB
HSDB Weather
[1]….GI 275 ADAHRS+AP required to drive the autopilot

if equipped.
HSDB or [2].…GTP 59 interface is optional but recommended. If
Autopilot HSDB or GPS #1 GPS #2 HSDB or the system includes a GI 275 ADI(s), the GTP 59
[1] Discrete & RS‐232 & [5] [5] RS‐232 & MUST ONLY be connected to the GI 275 ADI(s). For
ARINC 429 ARINC 429 ARINC 429 standalone GI 275 EIS installations, connect the
External Flight Analog HSDB or Analog HSDB or Analog

GTP 59 to the GEA 24/110. If connected to EIS
adapter in twin‐engine aircraft, only connect to
Standby
NAV #1 NAV #2
Director or RS‐232 or
ARINC 429
or RS‐232 or
ARINC 429
one, not both.
[3]....HSI/Standby limited to Class I‐II aircraft.
Instrument
Reversionary switch required when Standby ADI is
an HSI. See section 3 for restrictions.
[4].…If HSDB ports are available, this connection is
optional as an HSDB failure redundancy. Magnetic
Optional and installed per STC external GPS source. Compass
[6]….Must be retained. [6]
[8]….A backup battery is required for Standby GI 275
units that do not utilize an electrical power source
Figure 1-27 GI 275 Primary ADI, Reverting MFD/Standby ADI, HSI, and Single-Engine EIS

Rev. 13 Page 1-30
Radar ARINC 429
Altimeter
GI 275 GI 275 RS‐232 (GEA 24)

OR GEA 24/110
RS‐232
Stormscope Base Unit Base Unit RS‐485 (GEA 110)
HSDB [4]
Analog
Digital
HSDB MFD EIS #1
Weather Engine Inputs
[2]
Backup Battery
Analog or RS‐232 or (Optional)
GPS/NAV
ARINC 429 or HSDB
Mechanical HSDB Pitot/Static

HSDB Mechanical
Plumbing
[7]
Discrete Reversionary
USB Internal ADAHRS Internal ADAHRS Switch
GSB 15 [ADAHRS] [3]
GTP 59
Analog GI 275 GI 275
OAT Probe Required and installed per STC
[2]
HSDB
Backup GPS Primary ADI HSI/Standby ADI Optional and installed per STC
Coaxial
Antenna [3]
[5]
[Attitude, Altitude, Airspeed, and Heading] Not installed per STC
GMU 44B LRU Power
OR Backup Battery
GMU 11 RS‐232 (GMU 44B)
Backup Battery
RS‐485 (GMU 44B) (Optional) (Required) [8]
Magnetometer [1]….GI 275 ADAHRS+AP required to drive the autopilot
OR
if equipped.
RS‐232 (GMU 11)
[2].…GTP 59 interface is optional but recommended. If
the system includes a GI 275 ADI(s), the GTP 59
MUST ONLY be connected to the GI 275 ADI(s). For
standalone GI 275 EIS installations, connect the
Autopilot HSDB or HSDB or GPS #1 GPS #2 HSDB or GTP 59 to the GEA 24/110. If connected to EIS
[1] Discrete & ARINC 429 RS‐232 & [5] [5] RS‐232 & adapter in twin‐engine aircraft, only connect to
ARINC 429 ARINC 429
Standby one, not both.
[3]....HSI/Standby limited to Class I‐II aircraft.
NAV #1
HSDB or Analog or
Analog External Flight NAV #2
HSDB or Analog or
Instrument Reversionary switch required when Standby ADI is
an HSI. See section 3 for restrictions.
Director [4].…If HSDB ports are available, this connection is
optional as an HSDB failure redundancy.
Magnetic external GPS source.
Compass [7]….Required connection for aiding AHRS.
[6] [8]….A backup battery is required for Standby GI 275
units that do not utilize an electrical power source
Figure 1-28 GI 275 Primary ADI, Reverting HSI/Standby ADI, MFD, and EIS

Rev. 13 Page 1-31
KI 256 Replacement KI 525 Replacement
Internal ADAHRS + AP Internal ADAHRS + AP

Unit Unit
GI 275 GI 275
Primary ADI HSI


(Optional) (Optional) HDG Sel / CRS Dat
Lateral/Vertical
Pitch/Roll Attitude
Analog Flight Director
Independent ADI /
Flight Computer
Analog Flight Director Flight Command Flight Computer
Indicator
Pitch/Roll Attitude
HDG Sel / CRS Dat

Note: The GI 275 is capable of also outputting Lateral
Independent HSI and Vertical Deviations to the Flight Computer in any of
Lateral/Vertical
the shown configurations if the data is available on the
GI 275 and the system is wired as such (See APPENDIX B).
Refer to Section 5.4 for configuration details when
interfacing the GI 275 with third‐party Flight Computers.
KI 256 & KI 525 Replacement Note: The Primary ADI and HSI units are not shown with
interfaces to typical LRUs. Refer to the previous figures
for typical installations of Primary ADI and HSI units.
Internal ADAHRS + AP
Unit Base Unit
GI 275 GI 275
HSDB
Primary ADI HSI


(Optional) (Optional)
Analog Flight Director
AP Outputs to
Servos &
Pitch/Roll Attitude
HDG Sel / CRS Dat Annunciator
Flight Computer
Lateral/Vertical
Figure 1-29 KI 256 and KI 525 Replacement

Rev. 13 Page 1-32
2 LIMITATIONS
2.1 Installation Limitations .....................................................................................................................2-2

2.1.1 System ........................................................................................................................................2-2
2.1.2 General Installation ....................................................................................................................2-2
2.1.3 Primary Attitude Direction Indicator (ADI)...............................................................................2-2
2.1.4 Standby Indicator .......................................................................................................................2-3
2.1.5 EIS ..............................................................................................................................................2-3
2.1.6 GMU Restrictions ......................................................................................................................2-5
2.1.7 GPS Source Limitations .............................................................................................................2-5
2.1.8 Autopilot Interface .....................................................................................................................2-5
2.1.9 VFR GPS....................................................................................................................................2-5
2.1.10 Transponder Control ..................................................................................................................2-5
2.1.11 USB Connection.........................................................................................................................2-5
2.1.12 Display of Mach Number...........................................................................................................2-5
2.1.13 Class IV Aircraft ........................................................................................................................2-6
2.1.14 Part 121/135 Operations.............................................................................................................2-6
2.2 Operational Limitations ....................................................................................................................2-7

Rev. 13 Page 2-1
2.1 Installation Limitations
2.1.1 System
Only the equipment or aircraft systems with interface(s) approved by this STC can be connected to the
GI 275. Installation of equipment that is not on the STC Equipment List but is interfaced to a GI 275
requires separate airworthiness approval.
Configuration and number of GI 275 displays installed under this STC is limited to a maximum of:
• Six displays total
• Two EIS displays
The GI 275 system is limited to a maximum of three ADAHRS or AHRS/ADC sensors installed under this
STC. If multiple ADC/AHRS sensors are interfaced to a single GI 275, the internal sensor must be
configured as the default sensor (refer to Section 5.6.4).
CAUTION
The total weight of new equipment installed in the instrument panel must not exceed the total
weight of equipment removed from the panel, unless the total weight of all the equipment installed
in the instrument panel is within the weight limits established by the aircraft manufacturer.
The aircraft’s magnetic compass must be retained for all GI 275 installations.
2.1.2 General Installation

The GI 275 is designed to replace existing 3⅛-inch gauges. Therefore, minimum modification of the panel
will be necessary.
For GI 275 system components that are mounted outside the pressure vessel of pressurized aircraft, wires
that penetrate the pressure vessel must use aircraft type design provisions such as spare pins in existing
bulkhead connectors or existing cutouts in the aircraft pressure bulkheads. Substantiation for additional
holes or cutouts in the aircraft pressure vessel are beyond the scope of the GI 275 AML STC and require
separate airworthiness approval.
2.1.3 Primary Attitude Direction Indicator (ADI)

The GI 275 must be configured such that its airspeed tape conveys all operating limitations that were
previously conveyed to the pilot by the approved type design airspeed indicator and limitations published
in the aircraft POH/AFM.
The Primary ADI must be installed in the primary field-of-view of the pilot (±15° from centerline). Refer
to Section 4.4 for additional guidance.
The Primary ADI requires one of the following combinations of standby information:
• Standby display of attitude, altitude, and airspeed
• Standby display of altitude, airspeed, stabilized heading, and standard turn-rate coordination
(existing instruments may be retained)
The pitot-static system must be connected to the Primary ADI. This includes installations with the ADI as
a basic, 3-in-1, or 4-in-1 display. A GPS source must be interfaced to the Primary ADI. Approved GPS
sources are listed in Appendix Section C.4.

Rev. 13 Page 2-2
2.1.4 Standby Indicator
The standby indicator must be installed within ±35° from the centerline of the pilot’s primary field-of-
view. Refer to AC 23.1311-1C for additional guidance.
Refer to Section 2.1.8 for limitations regarding autopilot interface with GI 275 standby attitude indicators.
If the original airspeed indicator is part of an aural airspeed warning system, it may have to be retained to
continue to generate warnings. It can only be removed when it is possible to configure GI 275 airspeed
discrete outputs to trigger aural airspeed warnings when paired with external devices. The airspeed
warning system must continue to operate after the installation of the GI 275 system.
If the original airspeed indicator had variable operating limits that change based on aircraft altitude (e.g.,
barber pole type airspeed indicators), the original pneumatic airspeed indicator, or an electronic standby
capable of replicating the variable limit, must be used.
A GI 275 configured as a standby indicator must have a backup battery installed and maintained per
GI 275 Part 23 AML STC Maintenance Manual (P/N 190-02246-11) unless the standby GI 275 unit is
powered by an electrical source that is independent from the aircraft’s primary electrical power system. A
display backup switch may be required. Refer to Section 3.2.2 for more information and requirements for
configuring a GI 275 as a standby to various systems.
2.1.5 EIS
The existing engine gauges can be replaced by an EIS display only if the functionality, markings, and
operational limits of the original gauges are capable of being replicated on the EIS display. The original
gauge must not be removed if any operating parameter, marking, or annunciation required by aircraft type
design, engine type design, or aircraft POH/AFM (or similar) cannot be replicated on the display or an
appropriate placard cannot be installed.
GI 275 EIS is limited to one EIS display for single-engine aircraft and one EIS display per engine for
twin-engine aircraft. In twin-engine aircraft with two GI 275 EIS displays and GI 275 MFD, the Fuel page
is the only EIS page approved to be displayed on the MFD. All other EIS pages must be disabled on the
MFD.
EIS is only approved for air-cooled 4- and 6-cylinder reciprocating engine equipped aircraft. Select aircraft
models on the AML have EIS limitations. Refer to notes in Table D-1.
All gauges with red and/or yellow markings, if intended to be replaced by a GI 275 EIS display, must be
identically configured on the Main EIS page. In some cases, one GI 275 will not have enough available
spaces for gauges on the Main EIS page. Any of the following cases will require the retention of the
original gauge(s):
• Three or more of the following gauges have red or yellow marks: Fuel Flow, Fuel Pressure, CDT,
IAT, Carb Temp, and CDT/IAT Diff
• Two of the following gauges have red or yellow marks: Fuel Flow, Fuel Pressure, CDT, IAT, Carb
Temp, and CDT/IAT Diff, and one of the following is true:
◦ Dual Aux Fuel Tanks are configured and one or more electrical gauges have a red or yellow
marking
◦ A Single Aux Fuel Tank is configured and two or more electrical gauges have a red or
yellow marking
• More than two electrical gauges have a red or yellow marking

Rev. 13 Page 2-3
The Main EIS page can display up to four strip gauges along with a CHT/EGT/TIT graph and two digital
readout gauges. Refer to Section 5.7.4 and Appendix F for more information on gauge layout
requirements.
If an oil temperature, oil pressure, or fuel pressure sensor is being replaced, the GI 275 sensor must use the
same port(s) as the original sensor, unless otherwise specified.
The GI 275 EIS does not currently support aircraft with:
• Turbine engines
• Radial engines
• Engines with FADEC or electronic ignition systems
• CDT, IAT, DIFF engine indications for more than one inter-cooler per engine
• Indications for more than two ammeters per engine (alternator amps, battery charge/discharge)
• Indications for more than two voltmeters per engine (bus volts, battery volts)
• Engine turbochargers that have an oil system separate from the engine oil system and have
turbocharger oil pressure or temperature gauge(s)
The Prop Sync Wheel is limited to conventional twin-engine aircraft and prohibited in centerline thrust
aircraft (e.g., Cessna Skymaster).
The GI 275 Percent Power display is prohibited from replacing the Cirrus SR22 horsepower display in all
models where the existing horsepower gauge is used to control the engine per the POH.
2.1.5.1 Engine Adapter

Only one engine adapter per engine may be installed.
GEA 24 installations are limited to single and twin reciprocating engine aircraft with a gross takeoff
weight of 6,000 lbs or less and a service ceiling of 32,000 feet or less (Class I & II). The GEA 24 must be
mounted remotely and cannot be installed within the engine compartment or areas with water or fluids.
The GEA 24 cannot be interfaced to resistive fuel quantity floats in twin-engine aircraft (i.e., Class II) in
some installations. Refer to the aircraft model notes in Table D-1.
GEA 110 installations are limited to single and twin reciprocating engine aircraft with a gross takeoff
weight of 12,500 lbs or less and a service ceiling of 41,000 feet or less (Class I, II & III). Refer to
Section 4.7.2 for possible installation locations for GEA 110.
EIS units may not share a GEA 110/24 interface with G500/600 TXi or G3X systems, respectively. If using
a GI 275 for EIS, then the EIS interface may only be connected and displayed on the GI 275 system, and
may not be connected or displayed on TXi or G3X systems.
2.1.5.2 Pressure Sensors

Brass body pressure sensors are not approved for installation in aircraft that have an operational ceiling
greater than 32,000 feet. Refer to Figure 1-20 for image and Table C-20 for part numbers.

Rev. 13 Page 2-4
2.1.6 GMU Restrictions
The GMU 11 Magnetometer is limited to single and multi-engine aircraft with a gross takeoff weight of
6000 lbs or less (i.e., Class I & II aircraft). The GMU 44B Magnetometer is approved for all aircraft on the
STC AML.
2.1.7 GPS Source Limitations

A GPS source is required to be interfaced to GI 275 ADAHRS and ADAHRS+AP units. Approved internal
and external GPS sources are listed in Appendix Section C.4.
2.1.8 Autopilot Interface

The GI 275 analog attitude output and flight director input must be connected to a pilot-side GI 275 that is
configured to display the ADI full-time. The autopilot heading error, course error, and lateral/vertical
deviation signals must be connected to a pilot-side GI 275 that is configured as either an ADI capable of
displaying course deviations or an HSI.
If the GI 275 is interfaced with the GFC 500, a TSO approved GPS source is required for the GFC to
utilize NAV modes; the GI 275 VFR GPS does not provide NAV modes with the GFC 500.
2.1.9 VFR GPS

The VFR GPS can be used with an installed glareshield antenna as a backup GPS source in Class I - IV
aircraft or in an aircraft without a primary GPS source. If the aircraft is IFR rated, the aircraft must
maintain its equipment for IFR requirements (i.e., NAV sources). The display of primary VFR GPS is for
situational awareness only and is not approved for IFR navigation credit.
2.1.10 Transponder Control

The Transponder Control function is only provided when the GI 275 is interfaced to a GTX 345 series
transponder. If configured, the Transponder Control page must be set as the final page on an MFD or
MFD/Standby ADI unit.
The GI 275 must be the only control source for the GTX 345 if used for the transponder control function;
control using another source, such as a GTN, is outside the scope of this STC.
2.1.11 USB Connection

Each installed GI 275 unit must have a dedicated USB connection. This can be accomplished with either
the USB pigtail (P/N 325-00238-02) that is included in each GI 275 connector kit or with the optional
GSB 15.
The USB pigtail is for maintenance purposes only and is prohibited from being used while in-flight. The
USB pigtail must be capped and stowed prior to returning the aircraft to service. The GSB 15 is capable of
powering PEDs using its USB ports while in-flight.
2.1.12 Display of Mach Number

The GI 275 Display of Mach Number on the ADI page is prohibited from replacing or duplicating an
existing primary Mach Number gauge.

Rev. 13 Page 2-5
2.1.13 Class IV Aircraft
For installations in Class IV aircraft (refer to Section 1 for definition), this STC only approves installation
of the following: GI 275 ADAHRS (P/N 011-04489-30) configured as a full-time, dedicated standby, a
GMU 44B, a GTP 59, or a GI 275 Base (P/N 011-04489-00) configured as an MFD with the following
pages: Traffic, SXM or FIS-B Weather, Terrain, Map, Stormscope and Rad Alt. Additionally, only the
following GI 275 interfaces are approved in Class IV aircraft. GI 275 pins not listed below must remain
unconnected. Aircraft identified in Table D-1 as “Limited to MFD or Standby ADI” are restricted to these
pins only.
• Aircraft Power (connector P2751 – pins 2, 3)
• Aircraft Ground (connector P2751 – pins 41, 61)
• Configuration Module (connector P2751 – pins 1, 21, 40, 60)
• USB pigtail (P/N 325-00238-02) (connector P2751 – pins 39, 58, 59, 78) OR
GSB 15 (connector P2751 – pins 39, 58, 59)
• Lighting Bus (connector P2751 – pins 22, 42)
• GMU 44B (connector P2751 – pins 19, 20, 49, 69, [18 or 38])
• GTP 59 (connector P2752 – pins 21, 60, 62)
• GPS source wiring shown in Figure B-4 (connector P2751 only)
• ARINC 429 and RS-232 wiring shown in Figure B-5 (connector P2751 only)
• Backup GPS Antenna (BNC connector)
• HSDB Traffic (connector P2751 – pins 8, 9, 27, 28, 46, 47, 65, 66) OR
ARINC 429 Traffic Input or Radar Altimeter Input (connector P2751 – pins 14, 15, 33, 34, 52, 53,
72, 73)
2.1.14 Part 121/135 Operations

Aircraft requiring a third attitude instrument for operations under 14 CFR Part 121 or 135 must still
comply with the GI 275 standby instrument requirements. Consequently, one additional attitude indicator
is required for the co-pilot's position. Aircraft that require the third attitude source are described in
14 CFR §121.2, 14 CFR §135.2, and 14 CFR §121.305(j). The third attitude indication may be a traditional
gyro, GI 275, or G500/G600 TXi system.
Single-engine aircraft operated under 14 CFR Part 135 must have two independent electrical sources or a
standby battery or generator/alternator capable of supplying 150% of the electrical loads of all required
instruments and equipment necessary for safe emergency operations of the aircraft for 60 minutes in
accordance with 135.163(f).
For multi-engine aircraft operated under 14 CFR Part 135, the electrical load of all required instruments
and equipment necessary for emergency operations must not be greater than one-half of the total generated
power in accordance with 14 CFR 135.163(g). List of required instruments and equipment necessary for
safe emergency operations must be expanded to include the pilot's PFD, AHRS, ADC, and standby attitude
indicator (if installed) when evaluating aircraft electrical loads.

Rev. 13 Page 2-6
2.2 Operational Limitations
All functions of the GI 275 system meet the appropriate design assurance qualifications for primary flight
displays in all aircraft listed on the AML. References listed in Table 1-1 provide a comprehensive list of
TSO authorizations by function. The instructions in this manual must be followed in order to ensure an
airworthy installation for aircraft operating under Title 14 CFR Parts 91, 121, and 135 with the limitations
of those installations listed here.

Rev. 13 Page 2-7
3 PREPARATION
3.1 Materials and Parts............................................................................................................................3-2

3.1.1 Garmin........................................................................................................................................3-2
3.1.2 Commercial ................................................................................................................................3-4
3.1.3 Special Tools Required ..............................................................................................................3-6
3.2 GI 275 Installation Requirements .....................................................................................................3-7
3.2.1 Power Distribution .....................................................................................................................3-7
3.2.2 Standby Instruments.................................................................................................................3-10
3.2.3 Engine Indication System (EIS)...............................................................................................3-12
3.2.4 GPS Requirements ...................................................................................................................3-15
3.2.5 Display Lighting Control .........................................................................................................3-15
3.2.6 HSDB Architecture ..................................................................................................................3-15
3.3 Interfaces to Other Equipment........................................................................................................3-20
3.3.1 GPS Source ..............................................................................................................................3-20
3.3.2 Navigation Receiver.................................................................................................................3-20
3.3.3 Radar Altimeter ........................................................................................................................3-20
3.3.4 Traffic.......................................................................................................................................3-20
3.3.5 Data Link..................................................................................................................................3-21
3.3.6 WX-500 Stormscope® .............................................................................................................3-21
3.3.7 Audio Panel ..............................................................................................................................3-21
3.3.8 Transponder Control ................................................................................................................3-21
3.3.9 Autopilot...................................................................................................................................3-21
3.3.10 External TAWS ........................................................................................................................3-23
3.4 Selection of GI 275 System Components ......................................................................................3-24
3.4.1 Aircraft Eligibility Checklist....................................................................................................3-24
3.4.2 Attitude and Air Data ...............................................................................................................3-26
3.4.3 EIS Equipment .........................................................................................................................3-26
3.5 Electrical Load Analysis.................................................................................................................3-29
3.5.1 Measurement of Electrical Loads.............................................................................................3-30
3.5.2 Battery Capacity Analysis........................................................................................................3-37

Rev. 13 Page 3-1
3.1 Materials and Parts
Equipment must be sourced from both Garmin and commercial vendors for installation of the GI 275. This
section provides a description of the equipment and the installation kits available from Garmin and also
commercially available parts and their requirements.
3.1.1 Garmin
GI 275 components and applicable installation kits are supplied by Garmin. Refer to the Aviation Price
Catalog on flyGarmin.com for details once the selection for a particular aircraft installation is determined.
Refer to the latest revision of GI 275 Part 23 AML STC Equipment List (P/N 005-01208-42) for the
approved Mod Status of equipment. Engine sensors with Garmin part numbers listed in Table C-20 are
available from Garmin.
Table 3-1 GI 275 Units

Part Number
Unit
Unit Catalog
GI 275 Base 011-04489-00 010-01912-00
GI 275 ADAHRS, Class I & II 011-04489-10 010-01912-10
GI 275 ADAHRS, Class III & IV 011-04489-30 010-01912-30
GI 275 ADAHRS+AP, Class I & II 011-04489-20 010-01912-20
GI 275 ADAHRS+AP, Class III & IV 011-04489-40 010-01912-40
GI 275 Base NVIS 011-04489-60 010-01912-60
GI 275 ADAHRS NVIS 011-04489-70 010-01912-70
Table 3-2 GI 275 Connector Kits

Connector Kit Part Number
GI 275 connector kit (GI 275 Base units) 011-04809-00
GI 275 connector kit 2 (GI 275 ADAHRS & AP units) 011-04809-01 [1]
Configuration Module 011-04038-00 [2]
KI 256 Adapter Kit 011-05285-00 [3]
Notes:
[1] The -01 connector kit includes the same parts as the -00 kit, but has additional quantities for the
second connector present on the ADAHRS and ADAHRS+AP models.
[2] Included with -00 and -01 connector kits. Listed for reference only.
[3] Optional adapter for installing a GI 275 in a cutout for a Bendix/King KI 256.

Rev. 13 Page 3-2
Table 3-3 GI 275 LRUs
Part Number
Unit
Unit Catalog
GEA 110 011-03454-01 010-01329-01
GEA 24 011-02848-01 010-01042-01
Backup Battery 011-04528-00 010-02304-00
GSB 15, Dual Type-A, Rear 011-04937-00 010-02201-00
GSB 15, Type-A & Type-C, Rear 011-04937-20 010-02201-20
GSB 15, Dual Type-C, Rear 011-04937-40 010-02201-40
GSB 15, Dual Type-A, Side 011-04937-01 010-02201-01
GSB 15, Type-A & Type-C, Side 011-04937-30 010-02201-30
GSB 15, Dual Type-C, Side 011-04937-50 010-02201-50
GMU 11 011-04349-01 010-01788-01
GMU 44B 011-04201-00 010-01708-00
GTP 59 011-00978-00 011-00978-00
Backup GPS Antenna 011-04036-10 010-12444-10
Table 3-4 LRU Installation Kits

Remote LRU Connector Kit Part Number
GEA 110 connector kit 011-03527-50
GEA 110 sealed connector/configuration module kit 011-03527-51
GEA 110 installation tray 011-03941-00
GEA 24 connector kit 011-02886-01
GSB 15, 2.25-inch mounting kit 011-05043-00
GSB 15 decorative cover kit, unfinished [1] 011-05291-00
GSB 15 decorative cover kit, black powder coat [1] 011-05291-01
GSB 15, 3.125-inch mounting kit 011-05043-01
GSB 15 connector kit 011-05044-00
GMU 44B Universal Mount kit 011-01779-01
GMU 44B install rack 125-00437-00
GMU 11 installation kit 011-04349-90
Notes:
[1] The GSB 15 decorative cover is optional and is for aesthetic purposes only.

Rev. 13 Page 3-3
3.1.2 Commercial
The GI 275 equipment is designed to be installed using standard commercially available parts and
accessories. The following may be required for the installations:
1. Display backup switch comprised of MS27719-22-1 miniature toggle switch and Aircraft Spruce
P/N 11-00815 red toggle switch cover.
2. MS26574 or MS22073 push-pull manually resettable circuit breakers or other trip-free, push-pull
circuit breaker type as specified in the aircraft manufacturer’s parts catalog.
3. MIL-W-22759/16 or MIL-W-22759/18 electrical wire.
NOTE
MIL-W-22759/18 wire is recommended due to the insulation diameter being more
compatible with high-density connectors.
4. MIL-C-27500 shielded cable with M22759/16 wire (TE) or M22759/18 wire (TG) and ETFE
jacket (14).
5. MS25036 or MS20659 ring terminals.
6. M83519/2-X shield terminators.
7. A-A-59163 (MIL-I-46852C) silicone fusion tape.Wire bundle routing, securing, and management
supplies, as required.
8. 2024-T3 aluminum per AMS-QQ-A-250/5, or 6061-T6 aluminum per AMS 4025, AMS 4027, or
AMS-QQ-A-250/11, varying thickness.
9. Line and fittings, including 1/8-27ANPT male fitting for pitot and static connection and pneumatic
line. Refer to aircraft-specific parts catalog for approved pitot and static connector part numbers.
10. TSO-C53a Type C or D hose (e.g., Aeroquip 303 hose with AE102 sleeve and 900591B clamps or
Aeroquip AE466) for installation of fuel flow transducers and pressure sensors.
11. 22 or 24 AWG stranded thermocouple extension wire to match K-Type or J-Type probe, with a
minimum continuous temperature rating of 400 °F and ASTM E230 Standard Limits or NIST ITS
90 electrical qualifications (e.g., Watlow SERV-RITE P/Ns K24-3-507 and J24-3-507).
12. Ethernet cable, aircraft grade category 5 (required only for HSDB interfaces). Only Ethernet
cables listed in Table 3-5 can be used. 24 AWG is preferred.
Table 3-5 HSDB Cables
Manufacturer Cable Part Number Gauge
E10422 [1] 22 AWG
PIC WIRE AND CABLE E10424 24 AWG
E12424 24 AWG
EMTEQ D100-0824-100 24 AWG
THERMAX MX100Q-24 24 AWG
CARLISLE IT 392404 24 AWG
Notes:
[1] E10422 cable is not recommended because of the larger insulation diameter,
making it very hard to work with in the high density connectors. E1042x cable is
also not recommended due to insulation shrinkage that can occur.

Rev. 13 Page 3-4
13. EIS annunciator indicator(s) capable of displaying warning (red) and caution (yellow)
annunciations.
Table 3-6 EIS Annunciator
Aircraft System
Manufacturer Annunciation
14V 28V
Applied Avionics Caution/Warning 95-40-17-B4-E1WPN LED-40-17-BA2-E1WP6 [1]
MS25041-4 Cap MS25041-4 Cap
Caution
MS25237-330 Lamp MS25237-327 Lamp
Mil-Spec (Various)
MS25041-2 Cap MS25041-2 Cap
Warning
MS25237-330 Lamp MS25237-327 Lamp
Notes:
[1] Requires two 47Ω, 1/4 WATT -55 C to +125 C resistors. Refer to Figure B-20.
14. For resistive fuel probe connection with GEA 24 EIS adapter: 2.2k Ω (± 1%), 0.25W (or
greater) resistors qualified to retain power rating at 70 °C and qualified to MIL-R-10509.
Acceptable resistors include:
• RN60D2201FB14 (ref. Garmin Kit P/N 011-05829-00)
• RN60C2201DB14
• RN65E2201FB14
15. Standard heat shrink tubing (M23053/5, X = color)
• M23053/5-104-X for single conductor wire
• M23053/5-105-X for insulating twisted-pair wire
• M23053/5-106-X for insulating triple conductor wire or RG-400 coax

Rev. 13 Page 3-5
3.1.3 Special Tools Required
The following tools are required for building the wire harness.
Milliohm Meter
A milliohm meter with an accuracy of ±0.1 milliohm (or better) to perform continuity and power/ground
checks.
Crimp Tool
A crimp tool meeting MIL specification M22520/2-01 and a positioner/locator are required to ensure
consistent, reliable crimp contact connections for the rear D-sub connectors. Refer to Table 3-7.
Table 3-7 Recommended Crimp Tools

Hand 22-28 AWG 22-24 AWG
Manufacturer Crimping Insertion/ Insertion/
Tool Positioner [1] Positioner
Extraction Tool Extraction Tool
Military P/N M22520/2-01 M22520/2-09 M81969/14-01 M22520/2-08 M81969/1-02
ITT Cannon 995-0001-584 995-0001-739 N/A N/A N/A
Positronic 9507 N/A N/A 9502-5 M81969/1-02
AMP 601966-1 601966-6 91067-1 601966-5 91067-2
Daniels AFM8 K42 N/A K13-1 M81969/1-02
Astro 615717 615725 N/A 615724 M81969/1-02
Non-Garmin part numbers shown are not maintained by Garmin and are subject to change without notice.
Notes:
[1] For configuration module pins, verify the crimp tool is set to crimp 28 AWG wire.
GSB 15 Installation
A crimp tool is required for the GSB 15 installation. The recommended crimp tool is Molex Hand Crimp
Tool (P/N 638190000). For other options, refer to GSB 15 Installation Manual (P/N 190-00303-A3).

Rev. 13 Page 3-6
3.2 GI 275 Installation Requirements
This section provides installation requirements for the GI 275 system.
3.2.1 Power Distribution

GI 275 LRUs cannot share circuit breakers or ground return wires with each other or with other equipment.
For the purpose of the GI 275 system installation, the “essential bus” is a bus that receives power when the
battery master is switched on and is not automatically shed with the loss of a generator or alternator. Power
distribution requirements are summarized in Table 3-8.
NOTE
The primary display (i.e., GI 275 Primary ADI or G500/G600 TXi) cannot share a
grounding location with the standby indicator.
Table 3-8 Power Distribution

LRU BUS Requirement
• GI 275 with ADAHRS on essential bus
• No. 1 GI 275 with ADAHRS on the essential bus
Primary ADI • No. 2 PFD with ADAHRS on the avionics bus
• If dual essential busses are available, connect No. 2 PFD with ADAHRS to
the separate essential bus
HSI • Avionics bus
HSI/Standby ADI • Essential bus
MFD/Standby ADI • Essential bus
MFD • Avionics bus
• No. 1 EIS display on essential bus
• No. 2 EIS display on essential bus
EIS Display
• If dual essential busses are available, connect each EIS display to a separate
essential bus
• No. 1 GEA 24 on essential bus
GEA 24
• If dual essential busses are available, connect each GEA 24 to a separate
essential bus
GEA 110
• If dual essential busses are available, connect each GEA 110 to a separate
essential bus. It is acceptable to connect each GEA 110 to both busses
• If connected to a GI 275, connect GSB 15 to same bus as GI 275
GSB 15
• If not connected to GI 275, connect GSB 15 to avionics bus

Rev. 13 Page 3-7
Circuit breakers and switches added as part of GI 275 system installation must be labeled as shown in
Table 3-9 (switch), Table 3-10 (single bus), and Table 3-11 (independent buses). Labels must be readable in
all lighting conditions. Ambient flood lighting is acceptable. The labeling for each LRU denotes the
following where applicable:
• Number designation – LRUs of same type/function in the system.
• A/B designation – Differentiates the essential bus
Table 3-9 Switch Labels

Description Label
DISPLAY BACKUP
Display backup switch Position 1: ON
Position 2: AUTO
Table 3-10 Circuit Breaker Labels - Single Essential Bus

Label CB Value
Description
Single LRU Dual LRU 14V / 28V System
GI 275 configured as Primary Attitude ATT 1
ATT 5A
only indicator (Basic) ATT 2
GI 275 configured as ADI PFD 1
PFD 5A
(3-in-1 or 4-in-1) PFD 2
MFD 1 [3]
GI 275 configured as MFD MFD [3] 5A
MFD 2 [3]
STBY ADI [1]
GI 275 configured as MFD/Standby ADI 5A
MFD/STBY ADI [2]
HSI 1 [3]
GI 275 configured as HSI HSI [3] 5A
HSI 2 [3]
GI 275 configured as HSI/Standby ADI HSI/STBY ADI 5A
EIS 1
GI 275 configured as EIS EIS 5A
EIS 2
ENG SNSR L
GEA 110 ENG SNSR 5A
ENG SNSR R
ENG SNSR L
GEA 24 ENG SNSR 5A
ENG SNSR R
USB 1
GSB 15 USB 5A or 7.5A [4] [5]
USB 2
Notes:
[1] Label as “STBY ADI” if the GI 275 is configured as a Standby ADI and no MFD pages are
configured.
[2] Label as “MFD/STBY ADI” if the GI 275 is configured as an MFD/Standby ADI and MFD
pages are configured.
[3] Not connected to essential bus. Refer to Table 3-8.
[4] It is acceptable to use a fuse in lieu of a circuit breaker for the GSB 15.
[5] If a GSB 15 Type-C unit (P/Ns 011-04937-20, -30, -40, -50) is installed in a 14V electrical
system, a 7.5A breaker or fuse is required.

Rev. 13 Page 3-8
Table 3-11 Circuit Breaker Labels - Independent Essential Busses
Label CB Value
Description
Single LRU Dual LRU 14V / 28V System
ATT 1A
GI 275 configured as Primary Attitude ATT A ATT 1B
5A
only indicator (Basic) ATT B ATT 2A
ATT 2B
PFD 1A
GI 275 configured as ADI PFD A PFD 1B
5A
(3-in-1 or 4-in-1) PFD B PFD 2A
PFD 2B
MFD 1 [4]
GI 275 configured as MFD MFD [4] 5A
MFD 2 [4]
STBY ADI A [1]
STBY ADI B [1]
GI 275 configured as MFD/Standby ADI 5A
MFD/STBY ADI A [2]
MFD/STBY ADI B [2]
HSI 1 [4]
GI 275 configured as HSI HSI [4] 5A
HSI 2 [4]
HSI/STBY ADI A
GI 275 configured as HSI/Standby ADI 5A
HSI/STBY ADI B
EIS L A
EIS A EIS L B
GI 275 configured as EIS 5A
EIS B EIS R A
EIS R B
ENG SNSR L A
ENG SNSR A [3] ENG SNSR L B
GEA 110 5A
ENG SNSR B [3] ENG SNSR R A
ENG SNSR R B
ENG SNSR L
GEA 24 ENG SNSR 5A
ENG SNSR R
USB 1
GSB 15 USB 5A or 7.5A [5] [6]
USB 2
Notes:
[1] Label as “STBY ADI A” and “STBY ADI B” if the GI 275 is configured as a Standby ADI
and no MFD pages are configured.
[2] Label as “MFD/STBY ADI A” and “MFD/STBY ADI B” if the GI 275 is configured as an
MFD/Standby ADI and MFD pages are configured.
[3] It is not required to connect each GEA 110 to both essential busses (refer to Figure B-9). If
it is desired to connect each GEA 110 to only one essential bus, label similarly to GEA 24
in the above table.
[4] Not connected to essential busses. Refer to Table 3-8.
[5] It is acceptable to use a fuse in lieu of a circuit breaker for the GSB 15.
[6] If a GSB 15 Type-C unit (P/Ns 011-04937-20, -30, -40, -50) is installed in a 14V electrical
system, a 7.5A breaker or fuse is required.

Rev. 13 Page 3-9
3.2.2 Standby Instruments
Installations of a GI 275 in aircraft approved for IFR operations require standby attitude, airspeed, and
altimeter instruments. The existing pneumatic instruments can be retained for use as standby instruments;
however, they must be located next to the pilot’s PFD. Standby instruments are not required for aircraft
limited to VFR-only operations. Refer to Section 2.1.3 for additional Standby and Primary ADI guidance.
The existing non-stabilized magnetic compass must be retained. The magnetic compass must be
re-calibrated once the GI 275 is installed and configured.
GI 275 standby instruments must have a backup battery unless powered by an electrical source
independent of the aircraft’s primary electrical power source. Additionally, a display backup switch may be
required to be installed if the GI 275 is configured as an HSI/Standby ADI or a MFD/Standby ADI. Refer
to Table 3-12 and Table 3-13 for switch requirements.
Table 3-12 and Table 3-13 outline aircraft class restrictions and Instrument Type configurations of the
standby display when the GI 275 is used as a standby for various systems. MFD pages are not configurable
when the indicator is configured as ADI on the Unit Configuration page unless the Standby selection is
enabled.
Per this STC, the GI 275 is approved as a standby to the G500/G600 and G500/G600 TXi systems.
CAUTION
Some installations do not permit MFD pages to be displayed on the standby. Refer to Table 3-12.
Table 3-12 GI 275 Standby ADI Restrictions per System

Aircraft Class Instrument Function Display Backup Switch
System
Restriction [1] [2] Required [3]
CLASS I & II MFD/STANDBY ADI YES
GI 275
CLASS III ADI ONLY NO
G500/G600 TXi CLASS I & II MFD/STANDBY ADI YES
w/GSU 75 or GRS 79 & GDC 72
or internal ADAHRS CLASS III & IV ADI ONLY [4] NO
G500/G600 TXi
CLASS I - IV ADI ONLY [4] NO
w/GRS 77 & GDC 74
G500/G600 (GDU 620) CLASS I - IV ADI ONLY NO
GX000 CLASS I - IV ADI ONLY NO
THIRD-PARTY CLASS I - IV ADI ONLY NO
Notes:
[1] Refer to Section 1 for aircraft class designations.
[2] Refer to Section 5.3.4 for Instrument Type configuration instructions. MFD pages are only
configurable when the Standby selection is enabled.
[3] The display backup switch is only required when MFD pages are configured for normal operation.
[4] An “ADI Only” GI 275 interfaced with the G500/G600 TXi system must be configured with the
Standby button enabled, but all MFD pages must be disabled, with only the ADI page configured.
Refer to Section 5.3.4 and Section 5.6.3.

Rev. 13 Page 3-10
Table 3-13 GI 275 HSI/Standby ADI Restrictions
Display Backup Switch
System Aircraft Class Restriction [1] Instrument Type [2]
Required
GI 275 CLASS I & II HSI/STANDBY ADI YES
Notes:
[1] Refer to Section 1 for aircraft class designations.
[2] Refer to Section 5.3.4 for Instrument Type configuration instructions.
The markings on the standby airspeed indicator must match the TCDS, POH/AFM, or an applicable STC
AFMS for the specific aircraft. Verify that the existing airspeed indicator is correctly marked per the
applicable documents. The units on the standby altimeter (Hg or millibars) must match those on the current
altimeter in the aircraft.

Rev. 13 Page 3-11
3.2.3 Engine Indication System (EIS)
Installation of the EIS must maintain compliance with the minimum number of gauges required by
14 CFR 91.205 for the type of flight allowed by the aircraft’s Type Certificate. The following must be
considered for an EIS installation:
CAUTION
Engine damage may occur if length of the oil temp probe is incorrect. Refer to Section 4.7.4.
1. Only install EIS in aircraft that comply with all limitations in Section 2.1.5.
2. Engine RPM, Oil Temperature, Oil Pressure, EGT, CHT, and Manifold Pressure (if installed) must
be displayed on the EIS display.
3. Optional EIS gauges listed in Table 3-15 that are not currently installed in the aircraft may be
added as approved in this STC.
4. No indication/parameter on the EIS display(s) can be duplicated by any other installed indicator
that is not connected to the GEA.
5. Ensure engine sensors can be installed and the corresponding gauges can be displayed. Refer to
Appendix F, Table 3-14, and Table 3-15 for gauge layout information. Depending on the number
of gauges, a second EIS display may be required (only permitted in single-engine aircraft). Refer
to Section 2.1.5.
6. Some turbocharged aircraft require a differential pressure sensor for fuel pressure. This STC
provides electrical interface for select differential pressure sensors (refer to Appendix Section
C.19), however installation approval is not provided and must be obtained separately.
7. Do not replace an existing gauge if the GI 275 will not provide the functions and markings
required by the POH/AFM, TCDS, or other aircraft model-specific data. Refer to Section 5.7.4.2
for available EIS gauge markings. If the EIS gauges cannot be configured as noted in the POH/
AFM, the installation does not qualify for EIS unless alternate airworthiness approval is obtained.
8. Annunciator lights, including alternator/generator annunciators operated by a sensor or switch
independent of the existing gauge, must remain operative and independent from the GI 275 EIS. If
an annunciator is operated by a gauge that might be replaced by the GI 275 EIS, the associated
annunciator can be deactivated only if the GI 275 Caution/Warning alert activates for the same
condition as the original. The GI 275 Caution/Warning alert is provided on the display or an
independent annunciator(s). However, if the new GI 275 EIS gauge does not support a Caution/
Warning alert for the same condition, the existing gauge and annunciator must remain installed.
9. If an annunciator is replaced by the GI 275 EIS display, deactivate the existing annunciator so it
does not illuminate and then install a placard over the deactivated lens or as close as practical
within view of the pilot that states: “X ANNUN DISABLD”, with “X” being the deactivated
annunciator(s). Modification of the existing annunciator panel is outside the scope of this STC.
10. All placards that were associated with any/all gauges being replaced (non-limitation data) must
remain in the proximity of the EIS display.
11. Reused sensors must function through the sensor’s entire range. For example, fuel tank floats may
have worn resistive elements that will result in performance issues with the gauge display.
12. If the aircraft POH or AFM has a fuel flow limit (i.e., red line), the installer must verify fuel flow
accuracy ±10% of the full scale range and adjust the K-Factor if necessary. Obtain the correct fuel
flow value using the engine or aircraft manufacturer manuals. If that data is not available, perform
a pre-installation static RPM ground check and document the pre-installation fuel flow using the
existing fuel flow indicator. Refer to Section 6.8.4 for post-installation K-Factor adjustment.
13. A single display that is a standalone EIS allows for the GPS connection to be optional. Standalone
EIS displays that do not have a GPS source connected will display dashes (---) for Fuel Endurance.

Rev. 13 Page 3-12
For cases where the standard gauge marking configuration cannot be used, aircraft-specific solutions for
unique gauge markings are provided in Appendix Section F.6.2.
Table 3-14 Required Gauges for EIS
Indicator Notes
RPM
Oil Pressure
Oil Temperature
EGT
CHT
Manifold Pressure If applicable.
Table 3-15 Additional Gauges
Indicator [1] Notes
Flow check may be required prior to de-modification; refer
Fuel Flow
to Appendix D.
Primary EGT [2]
Turbo/Turbine Inlet Temperature (TIT) [2]
Carburetor Temperature Only required if existing gauge had colored markings,
Inlet Air Temperature (IAT) alerts, and/or associated POH/AFM limitations.
Compressor Discharge Temperature (CDT)
IAT/CDT Differential (DIFF)
Fuel Quantity (Main) AUX fuel quantity can only be displayed when main fuel
quantity is also displayed. GI 275 interface to fuel quantity
Fuel Quantity (Aux) sensors is not approved in certain aircraft models. Refer to
Appendix D for model-specific information.
Amps/Volts
Only two of the four parameters may be gauges with
• load meter
colored markings, alerts, and/or associated POH/AFM
• battery charge/discharge
limitations (the same parameter cannot be displayed
• bus voltmeter
twice).
• battery voltmeter
Configure if replacing an existing indicator. Optional if not
Prop Sync Wheel
previously installed.
Percent Power indication can be provided when a
Manifold Pressure, RPM, OAT, and Fuel Flow sensor are
all installed and interfaced with the GI 275 EIS. Percent
Percent Power [3] Power cannot be configured on the Main EIS page if a
Prop Sync Wheel is shown on the other EIS gauge.
Percent Power can be configured on the AUX EIS page if
a Prop Sync is present.
Notes:
[1] Gauges in this table are required if the existing aircraft gauge had colored markings, alerts, and/or
associated POH/AFM limitations. If the number or required gauges exceeds the available space
on the display, a second primary EIS display is required. Refer to Appendix F for gauge layouts.
[2] Primary EGT and TIT cannot both be indicated on the GI 275. Only one TIT or Primary EGT
sensor can be displayed on the GI 275 EIS.
[3] If there is an existing percent power gauge with colored markings, alerts, and/or associated POH/
AFM limitations, then the existing percent power gauge must be retained and percent power must
not be configured or displayed on the GI 275.

Rev. 13 Page 3-13
All EIS sensors approved to interface with the GI 275 are listed in Appendix Section C.19.
Compare the range, markings, and colors in Table 3-16 to the required aircraft parameters. Ensure sensor
range is wide enough for each planned gauge. This STC requires that all lines/ranges that are red or yellow
generate an alert. Blue, green, and white markings do not generate alerts. If there was no alert associated
with the red or yellow line/radials on the original gauge, this STC approves the addition of an alert to the
associated line/radial.
The sensor ranges in Table 3-16 are only for reference to help determine if EIS is compatible with the
aircraft; specific approved sensors may have different ranges than those shown. If an aircraft gauge has
markings outside the available sensor range, but the sensor range includes all limits for the gauge specified
by the POH/AFM, TCDS, or other aircraft model-specific data, the gauge may be replaced by the GI 275
EIS per this STC.
Table 3-16 Available EIS Parameters
Available Gauge Available Marking Approved
Display Display Range
Markings Colors Units
Tachometer (RPM) 0 – 4000 RPM Arc R, Y, B, G, W RPM
Manifold Pressure 0 – 60 in Hg Arc R, Y, B, G, W in Hg, PSI
Oil Pressure 0 – 150 PSI Line/Range R, Y, B, G, W PSI
Oil Temperature -24 – 300° F Line/Range R, Y, B, G, W °C, °F
Main Fuel Quantity 0-2980 Gallons Line/Range R, Y, B, G, W GAL
Aux Fuel Quantity 0-2980 Gallons Line/Range R, Y, B, G, W GAL

GAL/HR,
Fuel Flow 0 – 80 GPH Line/Range R, Y, B, G, W
Pounds/HR
Fuel Pressure 0 – 75 PSI Line/Range R, Y, B, G, W PSI
CHT (1 probe per cyl) 0 – 900° F Line/Range R, Y, B, G, W °C, °F

EGT (1 probe per cyl) 0 – 1800° F None N/A °C, °F
Primary EGT
0 – 1800° F Line/Range R, Y, B, G, W °C, °F
(1 probe per engine)
TIT #1 0 – 1800° F Line/Range R, Y, B, G, W °C, °F
TIT #2 0 – 1800° F Line/Range R, Y, B, G, W °C, °F
Carb Temperature -24 – 34° C Line/Range R, Y, B, G, W °C
CDT 32 – 1800° F Line/Range R, Y, B, G, W °C, °F
IAT -100 – 1800° F Line/Range R, Y, B, G, W °C, °F

Line/Range
CDT/IAT Diff Temp -100 – 1800° F R, Y, B, G, W °C, °F
(Max of 2 Ranges)
Load Meter (alternator current) or
-150 – 150 A Line/Range R, Y Amps
Ammeter (charge/discharge)
Battery Voltage / Bus Voltage -80 – 80 VDC Line/Range R, Y Volts
Prop Sync Wheel N/A N/A N/A N/A
OAT -125 – 175° C N/A N/A °C, °F
Percent Power 0-100% N/A N/A N/A

Rev. 13 Page 3-14
3.2.4 GPS Requirements
The GI 275 can be interfaced with up to two independent GPS sources and/or the internal VFR GPS.
Minimum GPS requirements are based on the configuration. Refer to Section 2 for limitations.
Refer to Appendix Section C.4 for approved GPS sources. A GPS source is optional unless the indicator is
internally equipped with an ADAHRS.
3.2.5 Display Lighting Control

Lighting on the GI 275 display can be controlled by either the lighting bus or the built-in photocell. The
photocell can be used for lighting control for all installations.
If there is a significant reduction in lighting bus load due to the GI 275 system installation, it is
recommended that the photocell be used to control the lighting.
3.2.6 HSDB Architecture

The HSDB architecture allows for many connection possibilities. The Ethernet architecture limitations/
options shown in this section are used as a guide for common LRU combinations. Block diagrams are
illustrated in Figure 3-2 through Figure 3-8. A summary of Garmin LRUs with HSDB capability and
available ports is shown in Table 3-17.
Table 3-17 Garmin LRU HSDB Port Summary

Number of
LRU
HSDB Ports
GI 275 2
GTN 6XX/7XX 4
GTN Xi 4
GTS 8XX 1
GDL 69 series 4
GTX 345 2
GFC 600 2
GPS 175/GNX 375/GNC 355 1
G500/G600 TXi 4
The following steps/figures are used as a guide in making HSDB connections (not all possibilities are
included):
1. The Primary ADI and the display with the second ADAHRS or standby (if applicable) must be
directly connected.
2. When multiple GI 275 indicators are installed, they must be connected to each other directly in
series.
3. The GTN 6XX/7XX, GTN Xi, GPS 175, GNX 375, or GNC 355, if installed, must be connected
directly to a GI 275 or a GMC 605 (GFC 600) that is directly connected to a GI 275.
4. LRUs not installed under this STC must still meet the installation requirements that are applicable
to those LRUs.
5. Choose the figure that most closely represents the aircraft’s equipment and cross out any LRUs not
installed. Apply the rules above to complete the HSDB connections, if necessary.

Rev. 13 Page 3-15
GI 275 STC Optional connection
1 HSDB port 1 if specific LRUs are present
2 HSDB port 2
OTHER STC Required connection

if specific LRUs are present
Figure 3-1 HSDB Architecture: Legend
NOTE
The orientation of LRUs and HSDB ports in the following diagrams do not represent the
actual orientation of the installation in the aircraft.
GI 275 1 GPS Source

ADI
Traffic Source
Figure 3-2 HSDB Architecture: Primary ADI
GI 275 1 GPS Source

ADI
Traffic Source
GFC 600
Figure 3-3 HSDB Architecture: Primary ADI with GFC 600 Autopilot

Rev. 13 Page 3-16
GI 275 GI 275
1 2 1 GPS Source
EIS EIS
Figure 3-4 HSDB Architecture: EIS
GI 275 1 GPS Source #1

MFD
Traffic Source
GPS Source #2
Figure 3-5 HSDB Architecture: MFD
GI 275
GI 275
1 1 HSI/ 2 GPS Source
ADI
Standby ADI
Traffic Source
GMC 605
Figure 3-6 HSDB Architecture: Primary ADI with GFC 600 and HSI/Standby ADI

Rev. 13 Page 3-17
GI 275 GI 275
1 GMC 605 GPS Source
ADI EIS
2 1
Traffic Source
2 2
GI 275
GI 275
HSI/ 1 1
EIS
Standby ADI
Figure 3-7 HSDB Architecture: Primary ADI with GFC 600, HSI/Standby ADI, and EIS
GI 275
GI 275 GI 275
1 1 MFD/ 2 2
ADI EIS
Standby ADI
2 1
2
1
GI 275 GI 275
1 GPS Source
HSI EIS
Traffic Source
Figure 3-8 HSDB Architecture: Primary ADI, MFD/Standby ADI, HSI, and EIS

Rev. 13 Page 3-18
Pilot’s Pilot’s
Primary 1 1 Standby ADI
ADI (MFD)
2 2
2 1
Pilot’s Co-Pilot’s
HSI ADI
1 2
GPS Source
Pilot’s Pilot’s
2 1
EIS EIS
Traffic Source
Figure 3-9 HSDB Architecture: Primary ADI, MFD/Standby ADI, HSI, EIS, Co-Pilot ADI

Rev. 13 Page 3-19
3.3 Interfaces to Other Equipment
Information in this section provides details for interfacing to equipment not installed by the GI 275 STC.
The information provided must be reviewed when these interfaces are considered.
3.3.1 GPS Source

The GI 275 has a built-in VFR GPS source that can be used with the backup GPS antenna installed. Up to
two additional external GPS sources can be interfaced to the GI 275.
3.3.2 Navigation Receiver

The GI 275 attitude display uses data from a navigation receiver to display VOR and ILS information on
the HSI. Up to two independent navigation receivers can be interfaced to a display. The third-party
composite NAV connection must be directly connected to a GI 275 display when present.
3.3.3 Radar Altimeter

The GI 275 can receive data from a digital radar altimeter system to provide the display of radar altitude.
The display can also be configured to allow for the initiation of the radar altimeter self-test for certain radar
altimeter models. Radar altimeters must be wired to a discrete output from the GI 275 to enable self-test.
3.3.4 Traffic
The GI 275 can receive data from an ADS-B/TIS/TAS/TCAS I traffic system to display traffic.
Table 3-18 Traffic Interface
Source Interface Details
The heading source for existing traffic systems can be the GI 275 (via ARINC 429) or from
Heading
another approved heading source in accordance with the traffic system installation guidance.
The altitude source for existing traffic systems can be the GI 275 (via ARINC 429) or from another
Altitude
approved altitude source in accordance with the traffic system installation guidance.
3.3.4.1 TIS-A
Traffic Information Service-equipped aircraft receive limited traffic information from nearby ground radar
uplinks. The GI 275 can interface with a GTX 33X to provide TIS-A. The traffic data can be crossfilled to
display on other GI 275 units.
3.3.4.2 TAS / TCAS

The GI 275 can interface with a number of traffic sources that function as Traffic Advisory Systems (TAS)
or Traffic Alert and Collision Avoidance Systems (TCAS). The traffic data can be crossfilled to display on
other GI 275 units.
3.3.4.3 TIS-B / FIS-B / ADS-B

TIS-B/FIS-B/ADS-B In-equipped aircraft receive traffic information from nearby ADS-B ground stations
and ADS-B Out-equipped aircraft. The GI 275 can receive and display weather and traffic services with
compatible equipment installed. The traffic data can be displayed on all GI 275 units capable of displaying
traffic data. Refer to Appendix Section C.13 for compatible equipment.

Rev. 13 Page 3-20
3.3.5 Data Link
The GI 275 can interface to a GDL 69/69A SXM to receive SiriusXM weather service with a valid
subscription. It does not provide control for music.
3.3.6 WX-500 Stormscope®

The GI 275 can receive data from the WX-500 Stormscope® system to provide the display of lightning
data. The GI 275 cannot be used to control the Stormscope® system. A controlling display (e.g., GDU 620,
GDU 700/1060, or GTN 6XX/7XX) must be present in the system to display Stormscope data on the
GI 275.
3.3.7 Audio Panel

The GI 275 can be interfaced to an audio panel for audio alerting. An interfaced audio panel cannot be
controlled via the GI 275.
3.3.8 Transponder Control

The GI 275 can interface to GTX 345 series transponders to provide a Transponder Control page when
configured as an MFD or Standby ADI/MFD. This allows the GI 275 to control transponder code, the
IDENT function, and the mode of operation for up to two interfaced GTX 345 transponders.
3.3.9 Autopilot
Various autopilot systems can be interfaced to the GI 275. Compatibility of the autopilot system with the
GI 275 system must be verified before installation. This STC does not include data for autopilot system
installation. The autopilot must be installed per aircraft (or autopilot system) manufacturer data.
The GI 275 ADAHRS + AP can provide AC or DC heading and course datum (error) outputs based on the
HSI heading bug and course pointer setting. When enabled, the GI 275 ADAHRS + AP can drive the
heading datum output based on GPS steering (GPSS) from the selected navigator, acting as a roll steering
converter. The GI 275 will provide analog deviation, associated flags, and ARINC 429 GPSS information
based on the navigation source currently selected on the HSI.
Except when interfaced to Garmin autopilots, the GI 275 does not provide altitude preselect functionality.
Any existing altitude preselector must be retained and any altitude source being provided to the preselector
must also be retained.

Rev. 13 Page 3-21
Table 3-19 Autopilots and Interfaces
PFD Native GPSS HDG Flight GYRO BARO
Make and Model Yaw Rate
HSI GPSS Emulation Director (attitude) Correction
M4C  
BENDIX
M4D   
II / III [3] [4] [7]   
IV AC, IV DC   
CENTURY 21,31   
41    
2000    
400B   
300 IFCS,
400 IFCS,  
800 IFCS
CESSNA
300B IFCS,
400B IFCS,    
800B IFCS
1000 IFCS    
COLLINS AP-106/107   
GFC 500 [5]   
GARMIN [6]
GFC 600 [1] [2]   
KAP 100   
KAP 140   
KAP 150     
KAP 200    
HONEYWELL
KFC 150      
(BENDIX/KING)
KFC 200     
KFC 225     
KFC 250     
KFC 300     
SPERRY SPZ-200A/500   
20, 30, 40, 50,
 
60-1
60-2, 65   
S-TEC 60 PSS
55X   
55   
Notes:
[1] Garmin autopilots support ALT Preselect.
[2] Garmin autopilots can interface to an ADAHRS unit (-10/-30). They do not require an
ADAHRS+AP unit.
[3] If the aircraft has a 1C388-2 or 1C388-3 Radio Coupler, two GI 275 ADAHRS+AP units are
required to provide the HSI and GYRO interfaces. Refer to Figure B-13 to ensure the correct
combination of GI 275 equipment given the interfacing Radio Coupler.
[4] If the GI 275 is used to provide attitude to the Century II/III autopilot, the GI 275 hardware must be
MOD 1 or later.

Rev. 13 Page 3-22
[5] For interface approval with GFC 500, refer to GFC 500 STC SA01866WI. The GI 275 hardware
must be MOD 1 or later.
[6] The GI 275 is capable of displaying mode annunciations for the GFC 500 interface only.
Annunciations for the GFC 600 interface are not provided on the GI 275.
[7] The Century II/IIB autopilot is equivalent to the Piper AutoControl III and IIIB autopilots, and the
Century III autopilot is equivalent to the Piper Altimatic III, IIIB, and IIIC autopilots.Refer to
Appendix Section C.8 for specific autopilot interface capabilities and version-specific limitations.
3.3.9.1 Autopilot Turn Coordinator

A turn coordinator that interfaces to the existing autopilot must be retained. If the turn coordinator is
relocated, the indicator incline must remain the same; otherwise, the autopilot performance will be
incorrect. Refer to the turn coordinator installation manual for details. In some circumstances, the turn
coordinator may have to be blind-mounted, which requires separate installation approval.
3.3.10 External TAWS

Only one TAWS that generates aural and visual annunciations is permitted in the aircraft. If the aircraft has
a TAWS installed, and SVT is enabled on the pilot’s Primary ADI, the GI 275 must be configured to
prevent conflicting aural and visual annunciations. Combinations of external TAWS sources, GI 275
settings, and the resulting alert sources are shown in Table 3-20.
The GI 275 provides the terrain alerting from a GTN 6XX/7XX, GTN Xi, or GNS 400W/500W; however,
the GI 275 does not provide all of the necessary annunciations and therefore the GTN or GNS may still
require an external TAWS annunciator panel.
Table 3-20 External TAWS Setup with GI 275

Aircraft Setup LRU Alert Source
Terrain/ PFD SVT MFD Map MFD Aural
External PFD
TAWS External Terrain & Impact Area/ Terrain Callouts
TAWS SVT Annunciation
Mode TAWS Obstacle Pop-up Proximity from
System Text Source
[2] Shading Alerts Shading LRU
Installed Terrain GTN
Enabled External GTN TAWS GTN TAWS GTN TAWS
GTN (HSDB) page TAWS
TAWS [1] Installed Terrain GTN
Disabled External GTN TAWS N/A GTN TAWS
(HSDB) page TAWS
Installed Terrain GNS
Enabled External GNS TAWS None None
GNS (MapMX) page TAWS
TAWS [1] Installed Terrain GNS
Disabled External GNS TAWS N/A None
(MapMX) page TAWS
Non-
Installed Terrain
Enabled External None None None Garmin
Non- (Other) page
TAWS
Garmin
TAWS Non-
Installed Terrain
Disabled External None N/A None Garmin
(Other) page
TAWS
Notes:
[1] If GNS/GTN TAWS becomes unavailable, the display will revert to Terrain Proximity.
[2] The Terrain Mode is automatically configured to External when any External TAWS setting
is configured to anything other than Not Installed.

Rev. 13 Page 3-23
3.4 Selection of GI 275 System Components
3.4.1 Aircraft Eligibility Checklist
The aircraft must meet the requirements for the GI 275 system installation set forth by this STC. The
following checklist is used as a guide to identify if those requirements are satisfied. Complete the checklist
before the aircraft is modified.
Table 3-21 Aircraft Eligibility Checklist

Completed Item Reference
GENERAL
 Verify the aircraft is on the Approved Model List. Appendix D
 Appendix
Verify an approved external GPS/navigation data source is installed.
Section C.4
 Select the GI 275 equipment that will be installed. Section 3.4
 Identify the equipment that will be interfaced, and verify each interface is approved. Appendix C
 Determine if the STC limitations applicable to the aircraft are acceptable. Section 2
 Determine if the aircraft electrical system is adequate. Section 3.5
 Obtain the current aircraft weight and balance data. POH/AFM
 Complete baseline flight check of the existing autopilot, if autopilot interface is

Section 6.8.6
planned.
INSTRUMENT PANEL
Section 3.2.3
 Select the standby instrument(s) and their location(s), if used.
Section 4.4
 Determine the location of each display. Section 4.4
 Determine the location of the display backup switch, if used. Section 4.4.1
 Determine the location for each circuit breaker and its placard. Section 3.2
 Verify the total mass of equipment being installed in the instrument panel is not more
Section 4.4
than the total mass of the equipment being removed from the panel.
EQUIPMENT
Determine the GMU 11/44B location, if used, and complete the magnetometer Section 4.6.2

survey. Section 6.4.1
 Determine the GTP 59 OAT Probe location(s), if used. Section 4.6.2
 Determine if the backup battery is required and installed. Section 4.4.2
EIS
 Perform Fuel Flow Baseline Check, if required. Section 3.2.3
Determine which parameters will be displayed on the EIS, and verify they can be Section 3.2.3

displayed. Appendix F
 Determine the location of all gauges that must be retained and verify the operating
Section 3.2.3
limits for each.
Section 4.7.1
 Determine the GEA 24/110 location(s).
Section 4.7.2
 Select engine sensors for parameters determined to be displayed on the EIS. Section 3.4.3

Rev. 13 Page 3-24
Table 3-22 is provided to assist with the selection of GI 275 components. Mark the applicable entry based
on the criteria given in the section. Review the relevant wiring diagram(s) to determine the installation.
Table 3-22 GI 275 System Components

Equipment Selection Notes Location
Backup Battery  GI 275 BB (Optional for GI 275 Base)
USB  GSB 15  Dongle
 Integrated (GI 275 ADAHRS and

ADAHRS+AP units)
 GSU 75 [1]
ADAHRS #1
 GRS 79 and GDC 72 [1]
 GRS 77 and GDC 74 [1]
 Integrated (GI 275 ADAHRS and

ADAHRS+AP units)
 GSU 75 [1]
ADAHRS #2
 GRS 79 and GDC 72 [1]
 GRS 77 and GDC 74 [1]
Backup GPS  Backup GPS antenna
 GTP 59 #1
OAT Probe
 GTP 59 #2
 GMU 44B #1
 GMU 44B #2
Magnetometer
 GMU 11 #1
 GMU 11 #2
 GEA 110 #1
 GEA 110 #2
(required for twin-engine aircraft)
Engine Adapter
 GEA 24 #1
 GEA 24 #2
(required for twin-engine aircraft)
Engine Annunciation  GI 275  Annunciator(s) Section 4.4.3
 EGT probe for each cylinder [1]
 Single EGT probe (i.e., Primary EGT) [1]
 CHT probe for each cylinder [1]
 Turbine Inlet Temp Sensor [1]
 Induction Air Temp Sensor [1]
Engine Sensors [2]
 Compressor Discharge Temp Sensor [1]
 Manifold Pressure Sensor
 Oil Pressure Sensor
 Oil Temp Sensor
 RPM Sensor

Rev. 13 Page 3-25
Equipment Selection Notes Location
 Carb Temp Sensor
 Fuel Pressure Sensor
 Fuel Flow
Engine Sensors
(continued) [2]  Fuel Quantity [1]
 Shunt (Amperage) [1]
 OAT [3]
Notes:
[1] Not installed under this STC.
[2] Refer to Appendix Section C.19 for STC compatibility.
[3] Interface a single OAT probe to one GEA Engine Adapter for standalone EIS installations only.
External data sources intended for use with the GI 275 must be checked for compatibility before
installation. These checks must be accomplished in accordance with procedures and data furnished by the
equipment manufacturer.
3.4.2 Attitude and Air Data

ADAHRS is required for ADI and standby functionality. The GTP 59 OAT is optional; however, without
the installation of the GTP 59, standard rate turn indicators and outside air temperature will not be present.
It is recommended to install a GTP 59 with a GI 275 displaying attitude information. A separate GMU 11
or GMU 44B Magnetometer is required to take credit for the compensated heading.
3.4.3 EIS Equipment

A GEA 24 or GEA 110 is required for each aircraft engine if EIS is installed. EIS sensor options and
configurations are presented in Appendix Section C.19. Select the sensors required to support the EIS
gauges determined in Section 3.2.3. Specific sensors are discussed below.
1. EGT/TIT and CHT

The number of probes required for aircraft installation is shown in Table 3-23. The Primary EGT/TIT
and CHT indication, if applicable, must be retained. The primary EGT/TIT probe can be changed, but
the installed location must remain the same.
Table 3-23 EGT and CHT Probe Quantity

Aircraft Engines Single Twin
Cylinders per engine 4 6 4 6
EGT 4 6 8 12
PROBE QTY CHT 4 6 8 12
PRIMARY AS REQUIRED
All thermocouple lead wires must match the thermocouple type (K- or J-Type). Do not crimp
connector pins to a single-strand thermocouple wire, as the wire is too thick; only use a multi-strand
lead wire for connector pins. Copper wire must never be used for thermocouples.
2. Oil Pressure Sensor

Select the most suitable sensor from Table C-20.

Rev. 13 Page 3-26
3. Oil Temperature Sensor
Use the engine manufacturer’s guidance for probe length/location.
CAUTION
Ensure the oil temperature probe is the correct length. Installation of the incorrect probe
may result in engine damage.
4. Manifold Pressure Sensor

5. Fuel Pressure Sensor

Some fuel injected engines use a fuel pressure sensor to indicate fuel flow. This STC requires that
when replacing such a sensor, individual EIS sensors for both fuel flow and fuel pressure must be
installed.
Some turbocharged aircraft use a differential pressure sensor. Refer to Section 3.2.3 for more
information.
6. Fuel Quantity Sensor

The fuel quantity sensors must be either resistive float sensors with a resistance range between
25-620 Ω or CiES CC Series Fuel Senders. It is permissible to re-use existing fuel quantity wiring.
Extension splices are permissible. This STC does not approve alteration of the fuel tank wiring, fuel
tank equipment, or grounding provisions for the fuel system. For resistive fuel quantity sensors, the
maximum resistance of the tank must be no more than 620Ω, and the resistive range from full to empty
must be at least 25Ω. For resistive float sensors interfaced to the GEA 24, parallel resistors spliced
from the fuel excitation pin are required, and the sensor configuration must be set as 0-5 Volt sensors.
Refer to Appendix B for wiring diagrams and Appendix C for compatible part numbers. All CiES CC
Series Fuel Quantity Senders approved in STC SA02511SE are compatible.
7. Fuel Flow Sensor(s)

Select a fuel flow sensor that is approved under this STC listed in Appendix Section C.19 and suitable
for the engine horsepower and aircraft fuel supply type:
i. Electronics International FT-60 (Red Cube) - For aircraft with up to 350 HP and an engine-
driven fuel pump.
ii. Electronics International FT-90 (Gold Cube) - For aircraft with 350-550 HP or with gravity-
fed fuel systems.
The fuel flow sensor will introduce a small pressure drop. Refer to Appendix D to determine if a fuel
pressure test is required for a specific aircraft model. If required, the installer must perform the
Minimum Inlet Pressure Test as documented in AC 23-16 to ensure the minimum inlet fuel pressure
and a safety margin are available. Refer to AC 23-16, paragraph 23.955(a) for additional information
and procedures. If the AFM/POH has an operating limitation based only on fuel flow, the fuel flow
must be accurate within 10% to ensure the limitation is maintained. Refer to Section 6.5.3.2.6 for the
fuel flow check procedure, if it is required.

Rev. 13 Page 3-27
8. RPM Sensor
Methods for RPM sensing appropriate to the engine should be selected as follows:
1. P-lead sensor – One per magneto or two per dual magneto. Resistors must be installed in
accordance with Figure B-8 and Figure B-10.
2. Magneto vent mounted sensor – Not compatible with geared engines. One sensor for each
engine on non-pressurized magnetos only (e.g., Bendix -20, -21, -200, 1200 series, and Slick
6000, 4000 series).
9. Shunt
Compatible shunts are listed in Appendix Section C.19. The EIS configuration setting must match the
shunt rating and type. The shunt rating is the maximum current and is typically marked on the shunt.
The type is the voltage between the shunt posts at maximum current rating. The shunt rating and type
may also be found in the aircraft data.
If the shunt rating cannot be determined by part markings or the aircraft data, the following procedure
may be used for 50 mV shunts:
1. With the aircraft power ON, no ground-power applied, and a minimal electrical load ON,
measure the millivolts between the shunt terminals using a calibrated voltmeter. Record the
millivolt measurement (V1).
2. Apply an electrical load (L1) as follows:
a. If an alternator load meter is installed, the shunt will measure the charging current from
the alternator to the main bus. With the engine running, apply an electrical load and
measure the current (L1) from the alternator using a calibrated ammeter. Measure and
record the new shunt millivolt value (V2).
b. If a battery ammeter is installed, the shunt will measure the current from the battery to the
main bus. Without the engine running, apply an electrical load and measure the current
(L1) from the battery using a calibrated ammeter. Measure and record the new shunt
millivolt value (V2).
3. Record the millivolt change (Vchange) between steps 1 and 2. Vchange = V2 - V1.
4. Determine the shunt rating using the following calculation.
L1 (Amps) x 50mV
Shunt Rating (Amps) =
Vchange (mV)
If the shunt value cannot be determined, retain the existing gauge(s) or install an appropriately rated
compatible 50 mV shunt. Shunt installation is outside the scope of this STC and must be approved
using other means.
10. Outside Air Temperature (OAT)

For standalone EIS installations that display horsepower but do not have an air data computer in the
system, an OAT probe can be connected to the GEA 24/110 as an EIS sensor. Refer to Appendix
Section C.19 for sensor compatibility.

Rev. 13 Page 3-28
3.5 Electrical Load Analysis
An Electrical Load Analysis (ELA) must be completed before the GI 275 is installed to verify that the
aircraft electrical system is adequate. The purpose of the ELA is to show compliance with 14 CFR 23.1351
and 23.1353(h) by demonstrating that the maximum electrical system demand does not exceed 80% of the
alternator data plate rating and the aircraft battery is capable of providing electrical power to equipment
essential for continued safe flight and landing in the event of a complete loss of the primary electrical
system. Satisfactory completion of the ELA must be recorded on FAA Form 337.
NOTE
Certain operating requirements (e.g., 14 CFR Part 135) may impose additional requirements in
the event of electrical power loss. It is the installer’s responsibility to ensure that the aircraft meets
the additional requirements if used for these operations.
Typical current draw of all GI 275 system components is summarized in Table 3-24.
Table 3-24 LRU Current Draw

Current Draw [1]
LRU 14V System 28V System
Typical Maximum Typical Maximum
GI 275 Base (without battery) 0.65 A 0.75 A 0.32 A 0.40 A
GI 275 Base (with battery) 0.65 A 1.70 A 0.32 A 0.80 A
GI 275 ADAHRS (without battery) 0.75A 0.90 A 0.35 A 0.50 A
GI 275 ADAHRS (with battery) 0.75A 2.00 A 0.35 A 1.00 A
GI 275 ADAHRS+AP (without battery) 0.80 A 1.10 A 0.40 A 0.65 A
GI 275 ADAHRS+AP (with battery) 0.80 A 2.00 A 0.40 A 1.00 A
GEA 110 0.30 A 0.60 A 0.15 A 0.30 A
GEA 24 0.20 A 0.40 A 0.10 A 0.20 A
GSB 15 Dual Type-A
Varies 2.86 A Varies 1.43 A
(charging from both ports)
GSB 15 Type-A & C and Dual Type-C
Varies 4.86 A Varies 2.43 A
(charging from both ports)
Notes:
[1] All GI 275 current draws include the GMU 11/44B and GTP 59.

Rev. 13 Page 3-29
Net change to the electrical load with the GI 275 installed must be determined. Net decrease in electrical
load requires no further analysis, assuming that the electrical system is within limits. This is likely to occur
when existing equipment is removed or older systems are replaced with newer equipment that requires less
power to operate. The amended electrical load calculation documenting load reduction should be filed with
other aircraft permanent records. A sample net electrical load calculation is shown for a 14V aircraft in
Table 3-25.
Table 3-25 Net Electrical Load Change Calculation Example (14 VDC Aircraft)
Equipment Removed Equipment Added
Item Load [A] Item Load [A]
Garmin GI 275 ADAHRS+AP (PFD),
KI 227 ADF Indicator [1] 0.00 2.00
GMU 11, GTP 59
KI 525A Pictorial NAV Indicator (HSI) 0.36 Garmin GI 275 ADAHRS (HSI) 2.00
KA 51B Slaving Accessory [2] 0.00
KI 256 Horizon Indicator (ADI) 0.76
Mid-Continent MD 200-206 VOR/LOC/GS
0.30
Indicator
KG 102A Directional Gyro 3.00
Shadin ADC 200 1.30
SUBTOTAL 5.72 SUBTOTAL 4.00
NET CHANGE -1.72
Notes:
[1] Received power from ADF receiver, which was left in the aircraft.
[2] Received power from KG 102A, which was also removed. The load for the KA 51B is
included as part of the KG 102A load.
A complete Electrical Load Analysis must be performed to show adequate capacity of the alternator/
generator if the electrical load is increased with GI 275 installed. ASTM F 2490-05 Standard Guide for
Aircraft Electrical Load and Power Source Capacity Analysis offers guidance on preparing an ELA.
Alternatively, electrical loads under different operating conditions can be measured (refer to Section 3.5.1).
3.5.1 Measurement of Electrical Loads

It must be shown that the maximum electrical demand for each alternator does not exceed 80% of the
alternator data plate rating. Discussed in this section is the ELA for a single alternator/single battery
electrical system determined by load measurement. It must be modified accordingly for aircraft with
multiple batteries or alternators. During measurement, applied electrical system loads must account for
combinations and durations for probable aircraft operations.
NOTE
Class IV aircraft cannot measure the electrical loads and must perform an ELA.
NOTE
Circuits must be protected and LRU circuit breaker ratings must meet specifications in Section 3.2.
Additionally, follow guidelines in AC 43.13-1B, Chapter 11, Section 4.
CAUTION
To avoid damage to equipment, the ammeter must be capable of handling the anticipated load.

Rev. 13 Page 3-30
The current measurement is best accomplished with an in-circuit or clamp-on calibrated ammeter with
0.5 A or better precision. Continuous rate, as indicated on the alternator and the battery data plate/
nameplate, must be noted.
1. The tabulated form provided in Figure 3-11 can be used to compile a list of electrical loads on the
aircraft. Typically, the list is comprised of existing circuit breakers and circuit breaker switches as
shown by the example in Figure 3-12. Continuous (e.g., GPS) or intermittent (e.g., stall warning
horn, landing gear) loads must be identified.
2. Use the worst-case flight condition and identify which phase of flight each particular load is used
in for normal flight operation. Certain loads are mutually exclusive and will not be turned on at the
same time (e.g., pitot heat and air conditioning). Use only the worst-case load conditions for each
phase of flight.
NOTE
Normal operation is when the primary electrical power generating system is operating
normally. Emergency operation is when the primary electrical power generating system is
inoperative.
3. Use the worst-case flight condition and identify which phase of flight each load is used in for
emergency flight operation. At a minimum, the list of equipment must include:
a. GI 275 ADI (includes GMU 44B or GMU 11 Magnetometer)
b. GI 275 HSI (if applicable)
c. GI 275 EIS (if applicable)
d. AHRS #1 (GRS 77/79) (includes GMU 44B Magnetometer)
e. COM radio #1
f. GPS #1
g. Audio panel [1]
h. Stall warning system (if applicable)
i. Pitot heat
j. Landing light (switched on during landing only)
k. Instrument panel lighting
l. Landing gear indication lights
m. Navigation lights
n. Strobe lights
Notes:
[1] If the landing gear warning or stall warning audio requires the audio panel, then the audio
panel must be included; otherwise, the audio panel is not essential for continued safe
flight/landing and may be omitted.
CAUTION
The pitot heat must be switched on long enough to take the current measurement and then
switched off. Since the pitot probe may get hot, ensure the probe cover is removed. Care
must be taken to avoid burns or damage to the unit.
4. The ammeter must be connected in line between the external power source and the master relay
circuit, as shown in Figure 3-10. This will eliminate errors due to the charging current drawn by
the battery.

Rev. 13 Page 3-31
$00(7(53/$&(0(17
(,7+(56,'($&&(37$%/(
'2(6127,1&/8'(%$77(5<&+$5*,1*&855(17
$ $ (/(&75,&$/%86

0$67(55(/$< *
$/7(51$725

(;7(51$/
32:(5
Figure 3-10 Ammeter Placement for Current Measurement

5. With all circuit breakers closed, external power must be applied to the aircraft and voltage set to
the nominal alternator voltage (usually 13.8 VDC or 27.5 VDC).
6. The battery master switch must be turned on. Do not measure intermittent electrical loads. It is
assumed if any additional current is required beyond the alternator capability, this short-duration
demand will be supplied by the battery.
7. The following lighting settings must applied during the entire electrical load measurement:
a. All instrument panel and flood lights set to maximum brightness.
b. The GI 275 backlight set to 50% brightness.
c. All other backlit displays, including GPS navigator, set to 50% brightness.
8. Switch on all continuous electrical loads that are used for the taxiing phase of flight and record the
current that is measured by the ammeter (tabulated ELA form in column 1, Figure 3-11). The
autopilot circuit breaker must be closed, but the autopilot must not be engaged during the
measurement.
9. Switch on all continuous electrical loads that are used for the normal takeoff/landing phase of
flight and record the current that is measured by the ammeter (tabulated ELA form in column 2,
Figure 3-11). Measurements must be taken with the landing lights ON and OFF. The autopilot
circuit breaker must be closed and the autopilot must be engaged.
10. Switch on all continuous electrical loads that are used for the normal cruise phase of flight and
record the current that is measured by the ammeter (tabulated ELA form column 3, Figure 3-11).
The autopilot circuit breaker must be closed and the autopilot must be engaged.
11. Switch on all continuous electrical loads that are used for the emergency cruise phase of flight and
record the current that is measured by the ammeter (tabulated ELA form column 4, Figure 3-11).
Measurements must be taken with the landing lights ON and OFF.
12. Switch on all continuous electrical loads that are used for the emergency landing phase of flight
and record the current that is measured by the ammeter (tabulated ELA form column 5,
Figure 3-11). Measurements must be taken with the landing lights ON and OFF.
The aircraft electrical system is capable of supporting the GI 275 system if the maximum electrical system
demand, as documented on the tabulated ELA form, does not exceed 80% of the alternator capacity. It is
permissible for the electrical load to exceed 80% of the alternator capacity when the pitot heat and landing
light are both switched on during the takeoff/landing phase of flight. In this case, the electrical load must
not exceed 95% of the alternator capacity. If the pitot heat is on and the landing light is off, the electrical
load may not exceed 80% of the alternator capacity.
NOTE
The Electrical Load Analysis for this installation is only valid for modifications performed
under this STC. Subsequent changes to the aircraft electrical system will require a new
load analysis.

Rev. 13 Page 3-32
Date: Tail Number: Phase(s) of flight during which circuit/system is used
Normal Operation Emergency Operation
Circuit
Breaker Operating Taxiing TO/Land Cruise Cruise Land
Circuit/System Number Time 10 min 10 min 60 min (Calculated) 10 min
Figure 3-11 Tabulated Electrical Load Form

Sheet 1 of 2

Rev. 13 Page 3-33
Date: Tail Number: Phase(s) of flight during which circuit/system is used
Circuit
Ldg Lt ON
(b1)
Total current used (amps):
(a) (c) (d) (e)
Ldg Lt OFF
(b2)
÷ Alternator rating (amps):
%
Ldg Lt ON
(< 95%)
x 100% = Percent of alternator capacity used: % % N/A N/A
(< 80%) (< 80%)
%
Ldg Lt OFF
(< 80%)
Pass/Fail:
Notes:
Figure 3-5 Tabulated Electrical Load Form

Sheet 2 of 2

Rev. 13 Page 3-34
Date: //201 Tail Number: N5272K Phase(s) of flight during which circuit/system is used
Circuit
Alternator Field A1 Continuous

Annunciator Panel C1 Continuous
Vacuum Warning C2 Intermittent
Stall Warning C3 Intermittent
Gear Warning C4 Intermittent
Gear Actuator C5 Intermittent
Cluster Gauge D1 Continuous
Ignition D2 intermittent
*,$'$+56 D3 Continuous
Turn Coordinator D4 Continuous
Gear Relay D5 Intermittent
Panel Lights E2 Continuous
Glareshield Lights E3 Continuous
Flap Actuator E5 Intermittent
COM 1 F1 Continuous
GPS/NAV 1 F2 Continuous
COM 2 F3 Continuous
GPS/NAV 2 F4 Continuous
Autopilot [1] F5 Continuous
Audio Panel G1 Continuous
Radio Blower G2 Continuous
ADF G3 Continuous
Transponder G4 Continuous
GDL 69 H1 Continuous
TCAD H2 Continuous
JPI Engine Monitor H3 Continuous
Bose Headsets H5 Continuous
Altitude Encoder J1 Continuous
Strobe Light SW1 Continuous
Nav Lights SW2 Continuous
Pitot Heat SW5 Continuous
Elevator Trim SW6 Intermittent
Boost Pump SW7 Intermittent
Figure 3-12 Example of Completed Tabulated Electrical Load Form

Sheet 1 of 2

Rev. 13 Page 3-35
Date: //201 Tail Number: N5272K Phase(s) of flight during which circuit/system is used
Circuit
60.0
Ldg Lt ON
(b1)
Total current used (amps): 45.7 43.5 34 48.1
(a) 44.7 (c) (d) (e)
Ldg Lt OFF
(b2)
÷ Alternator rating (amps): 70
86 %
Ldg Lt ON
(< 95%)
x 100% = Percent of alternator capacity used: 68 % 62 % N/A N/A
(< 80%) 64 (< 80%)
%
Ldg Lt OFF
(< 80%)
Pass/Fail: PASS PASS PASS
Notes:
[1] Duringtaxiphase,Dutopilotcircuitbreakerisclosedbutautopilotisnotengaged.
Figure 3-6 Example of Completed Tabulated Electrical Load Form

Sheet 2 of 2

Rev. 13 Page 3-36
3.5.2 Battery Capacity Analysis
NOTE
A Battery Capacity Analysis is not required if only installing the GI 275 as an MFD.
The capacity of the aircraft battery must be verified if the GI 275 installation increases the electrical load
on the system. The capacity of the existing battery is adequate if it supports loads essential to the continued
safe flight and landing for a minimum of 30 minutes. For aircraft with a maximum service ceiling greater
than 25,000 feet and certified with FAR 23.1353(h) at amendment 23.62, the battery must support
60 minutes of continued safe flight. Otherwise, the battery must be replaced with a battery that has
sufficient capacity.
Refer to ASTM F 2490-05 Standard Guide for Aircraft Electrical Load and Power Source Capacity
Analysis for more information.
Verification of the battery capacity can be accomplished following these steps:
1. Battery Capacity (de-rated) – 75% of the battery capacity (as indicated on battery nameplate) is
assumed available (this value has units of Amp Hrs). Ensure the value is converted to Amp Mins.
2. Normal Operation Load – Worst-case cruise condition (cruise at night) during normal operation
is assumed with 5 minutes given to the pilot to shed non-essential loads. Any automatic load
shedding can be considered immediate and does not need to be considered in the calculations.
Multiply the normal operation load (Amps) by t1 (mins) [t1 = 5 min].
3. Emergency Landing Load – Electric load during the approach and landing with failed generator/
alternator. This load is assumed to drain the battery for 10 minutes and needs to be determined.
Multiply the emergency landing operation load (Amps) by t2 (mins) [t2 = 10 min].
4. Emergency Cruise Load – Minimum load necessary to maintain flight in cruise after the
generator/alternator has failed needs to be determined.
The following equation determines the battery capacity for emergency cruise expressed as time (t3):
Battery Capacity - Normal Operation - Emergency Landing (1) - (2) - (3)
t3 = =
Emergency Cruise Load (4)
The duration of the entire emergency flight on battery power is:
t = t1 + t2 + t3
t = 5 min + 10 min + t3
t = 15 min + t3

Rev. 13 Page 3-37
EMERGENCY POWER OPERATION CALCULATION EXAMPLE
Date: 08/04/2017 Registration No.: N5272K
POWER SOURCE QTY. INSTALLED VOLTAGE MANUFACTURER MODEL
ALTERNATOR 1 13.75 VDC PRESTOLITE AL 12-P70
BATTERY 1 12.00 VDC GILL G-35
Assumptions:
1. Most severe operating condition is considered to be night IFR with the pitot heat operating.
2. Load demands are shown for steady state operation and do not include inrush current draw.
3. Load shedding is accomplished manually by the pilot within five minutes of warning
annunciation.
4. Loads measured using a calibrated Extech DC ammeter clamped on the cable between battery
terminal and master relay.
Analysis:
(1) Battery Capacity
0.75×35 Amp hrs = 26.25Ah×60 min = 1575 A-min
(2) Normal Operation Load [t1 = 5 minutes duration]

Current drawn in normal cruise 43.5 A
Load 5 min×43.5 A = 217.5 A-min
(3) Emergency Landing Load [t2 = 10 minutes duration]

Current drawn in emergency landing 48.1 A
Load 10 min×48.1 A = 481 A-min
(4) Emergency Cruise Load.

Current drawn in emergency cruise 34.0 A
(5) Battery capacity for emergency cruise

(1) - (2) - (3) 1575 - 217.5 - 481
t3 = = = 25.8 minutes
(4) 34
(6) Total duration of flight on emergency (battery) power
t = t1 + t2 + t3
t = 5 min + 10 min + 25.8 min = 40.8 min
Results:
The total required flight duration on emergency power is 30 minutes. The existing battery capacity
provides 40.8 minutes for emergency flight duration. The battery is adequate.

Rev. 13 Page 3-38
4 INSTALLATION
4.1 Wire Routing and Installation...........................................................................................................4-2

4.1.1 Shielded Cable Preparation ........................................................................................................4-3
4.2 Pitot-Static Routing...........................................................................................................................4-5
4.3 Equipment Bonding ........................................................................................................................4-10
4.3.1 Vibration Mounts .....................................................................................................................4-11
4.3.2 Aluminum Surface Preparation................................................................................................4-11
4.4 Instrument Panel Installations.........................................................................................................4-12
4.4.1 GI 275 Multifunction Indicator ................................................................................................4-13
4.4.2 Backup Battery .........................................................................................................................4-21
4.4.3 EIS Annunciator.......................................................................................................................4-23
4.4.4 GSB 15 .....................................................................................................................................4-25
4.5 Backshell Assembly........................................................................................................................4-32
4.5.1 Configuration Module Installation ...........................................................................................4-35
4.5.2 GSB 15 Connector Assembly ..................................................................................................4-36
4.6 Display Sensors...............................................................................................................................4-37
4.6.1 GMU 11/44B............................................................................................................................4-37
4.6.2 GTP 59 .....................................................................................................................................4-53
4.6.3 Backup GPS Antenna...............................................................................................................4-57
4.7 Engine Indicating System ...............................................................................................................4-60
4.7.1 GEA 24.....................................................................................................................................4-60
4.7.2 GEA 110...................................................................................................................................4-64
4.7.3 Carburetor Air Temperature.....................................................................................................4-67
4.7.4 Oil Temperature .......................................................................................................................4-68
4.7.5 Pressure ....................................................................................................................................4-69
4.7.6 Fuel Flow..................................................................................................................................4-73
4.7.7 RPM .........................................................................................................................................4-76
4.7.8 CHT, EGT, TIT Probes ............................................................................................................4-77
4.7.9 EIS OAT...................................................................................................................................4-77
4.8 Weight and Balance ........................................................................................................................4-78

Rev. 13 Page 4-1
4.1 Wire Routing and Installation
GI 275 LRU connector definitions and pin functions are defined in Appendix A. System installation
requires fabrication of electrical wire harnesses. When fabricating and installing each harness:
• Reference the aircraft manufacturer (electrical) standard practices manual and equipment
manufacturer documentation for guidance on wire type, gauge, routing, and wire identification.
Methods, techniques, and practices defined in AC 43.13-1B Chapter 11, Aircraft Electrical
Systems, are acceptable
• Refer to the equipment manufacturer for any specific shield requirements, or follow general
practices and guidance in this manual if none exist
• For all existing wiring that is overbraided, the overbraid must be maintained and include the new
wire added between the GI 275 and the existing system. It is acceptable to install new overbraid
containing the new wire provided that the existing wire and overbraid routing is maintained. The
overbraid should be terminated in the same or better manner at each connector. If pigtails are used,
they should be kept as short as possible and no longer than the original overbraid
• Ensure the wiring does not contact sources of heat or RF/EMI interference (power sources) and is
not routed near moving components of aircraft controls or other systems. Wire routing must
preclude accidental impact or damage
• Provide adequate space for the LRU or sensor connector(s). Include additional wire length to
create a service loop for maintenance, where appropriate
• Shield terminations must be as short as possible and not exceed 3.0 inches unless otherwise
specified. Shields may be connected to the metal connector backshell when the backshell is
grounded to the airframe chassis ground, unless otherwise specified by equipment manufacturer.
Alternately, the shield termination may be directly connected to the airframe ground
• The GEA 24/110 wiring must be routed away from any windows. Installed GI 275s must not share
any circuit breakers or ground returns. The standby instruments must not share any circuit breakers
or ground returns with any GI 275
• When installed as a Primary ADI or Standby ADI, the GI 275 wiring should be routed
independently from the PFD or electronic standby instrument
• Intermediate connections must be minimized to maintain certified electromagnetic compatibility.
All shields must have continuity at intermediate connections (e.g., bulkhead connectors, terminal
blocks, splices, etc.). If intermediate connectors are installed, unless otherwise specified, the shield
must be terminated at both sides of the intermediate connector backshells (if metal connector) or to
airframe ground on both sides of the intermediate connectors
NOTE
Interconnect diagrams in this manual only show end-to-end connections and do not show
intermediate connections that may be present in an aircraft.

Rev. 13 Page 4-2
4.1.1 Shielded Cable Preparation
Prepare all of the shielded cables in accordance with Figure 4-1. When terminating shield drains, a
maximum of two shields can be daisy-chained together. The daisy-chaining method may only be used if
the six tapped holes in the shield block are insufficient to ground all shields.
1. At the end of the shielded cable, strip back a 2.5-inch maximum length of the jacket to expose the
braid.
2. Remove this exposed braid.
3. Carefully score the jacket 1/4 to 5/16 inches from the end and remove the jacket to leave the braid
exposed.
NOTE
Solder sleeves with pre-installed shield drains may be used instead of separate shield
terminators and individual wires.
4. Connect a 20 or 22 AWG wire (2) to the exposed shield of the prepared cable assembly. Refer to
Figure 4-1. Refer to AC 43.13-1B for termination techniques.
NOTE
Solder Sleeves with pre-installed lead: A preferred solder sleeve is the Raychem S03
Series with the thermochromic temperature indicator. These solder sleeves come with a
pre-installed lead and effectively take the place of items (2) and (3). For detailed
instructions on product use, refer to Raychem installation procedure.
5. Slide a shield terminator (3) onto the prepared cable assembly.

6. Connect the shield wire (2) to the shield using a heat gun approved for use with solder sleeves. The
chosen size of solder sleeve must accommodate both the number of conductors present in the cable
and the shield wire (2) to be attached.
7. Crimp contacts onto the cable wires.
8. Repeat steps 1 through 7 as needed for the remaining shielded cables.
9. Wrap the cable bundle with silicone fusion tape A-A-59163 (MIL-I-46852C) at the point where
the backshell strain relief and cast housing will contact the cable bundle.
10. Install a ring terminal onto the cable shield termination wires (2), grouping wires as applicable for
the connector.

Rev. 13 Page 4-3
2.5" MAX 3
0.17"
0.31" OF EXPOSED SHIELD
2
SHIELD DRAINS AS SHORT AS PRACTICAL

(NO LONGER THAN 3”)
PREFERRED METHOD
SHIELD DRAIN COMPONENTS AS SHORT

AS PRACTICAL (3" MAX COMBINED)
2
3
2.5" MAX
0.17"
0.31" MAX OF EXPOSED SHIELD
ALTERNATE METHOD (DAISY-CHAIN)
Figure 4-1 Shield Termination Methods

Rev. 13 Page 4-4
4.2 Pitot-Static Routing
The GI 275 Primary ADI and/or standby displays must be connected to the aircraft pitot-static system using
lines and fittings, as specified in the model-specific aircraft parts manual. Lines must be labeled next to the
GI 275. When installing pneumatic lines and fittings:
CAUTION
Check connections for errors before operating the equipment. An incorrect connection can
result in equipment damage.
• Reference the aircraft manufacturer standard practices manual or equipment manufacturer

documentation for guidance. Methods, techniques, and practices defined in AC 43.13-1B
Chapter 12, Section 4, Pitot/Static Systems, are acceptable
• Do not route lines near moving components of the aircraft control systems, other systems with
moving components, or sources of heat, including high temperature lines
• The GI 275 must not be at a low point in the pitot-static system pneumatic lines
• The routing of the pneumatic lines from the GI 275 to the existing pitot-static system must
continuously slope down without low points until they connect to the existing pneumatic system
• If added pneumatic lines cannot be routed to continuously slope down, a “drain” must be installed
at the low point of each pneumatic line. The “drain” can be comprised of a TEE fitting
• Any added “drains” must be opened and discharged at least every 12 calendar months
• The performance of existing drains must remain unaffected by connected equipment
• Pitot and static ports mounted on the aircraft surface must not be changed or relocated. The aircraft
surface where these ports are located must remain undeformed and free from defects
When making pitot-static system connections:
• The GI 275 Primary ADI must be connected to pitot-static lines that were previously connected to
the pilot's instruments (primary source)
• In aircraft with a single pitot-static system:
◦ The standby instruments can be connected to the same pitot-static source as the pilot's
instruments
• For aircraft equipped with a dual pitot-static system:
◦ The standby instruments must be connected to the pitot-static source that is independent
from the pilot’s instruments
Whenever the pitot-static system is modified, a Pitot-Static Leak Test must be performed. To perform the
test, follow the procedure outlined in the relevant aircraft maintenance manual. AC 43-6D, Appendix E, is
an acceptable means of compliance when no other manufacturer data is available.
NOTE
Aircraft must retain the alternate static source selector switch, if it was previously equipped.

Rev. 13 Page 4-5
ANALOG
ALTIMETER
ANALOG
AIRSPEED
INDICATOR
GI 275 UNIT
TO AIRCRAFT TOTAL
PRESSURE SOURCE ;W/dKdͿ
TO AIRCRAFT STATIC
PRESSURE SOURCE
Figure 4-2 Pitot-Static Connections for Single GI 275 Installation

(Aircraft with a Single Pitot-Static System and/or Less than 6,000 lbs MTOW)

Rev. 13 Page 4-6
ANALOG
ALTIMETER
ANALOG
AIRSPEED
INDICATOR
GI 275 UNIT
TO PRIMARY AIRCRAFT TOTAL

PRESSURE SOURCE (PITOT)
TO PRIMARY AIRCRAFT STATIC
PRESSURE SOURCE
TO SECONDARY AIRCRAFT TOTAL
TO SECONDARY AIRCRAFT
STATIC PRESSURE SOURCE
Figure 4-3 Pitot-Static Connections for Single GI 275 Installation

(Aircraft with a Dual Pitot-Static System)

Rev. 13 Page 4-7
ANALOG
ALTIMETER
ANALOG
AIRSPEED
INDICATOR
GI 275 UNIT #2
GI 275 UNIT #1
TO AIRCRAFT TOTAL
TO AIRCRAFT STATIC
PRESSURE SOURCE
Figure 4-4 Pitot-Static Connections for Dual GI 275 Installation

(Aircraft with a Single Pitot-Static System)

Rev. 13 Page 4-8
ANALOG
ALTIMETER
ANALOG
AIRSPEED
INDICATOR
GI 275 UNIT #2
GI 275 UNIT #1
TO PRIMARY AIRCRAFT TOTAL

TO PRIMARY AIRCRAFT STATIC
PRESSURE SOURCE
TO SECONDARY AIRCRAFT TOTAL

TO SECONDARY AIRCRAFT
STATIC PRESSURE SOURCE
Figure 4-5 Pitot-Static Connections for Dual GI 275 Installation

(Aircraft with Dual Pitot-Static System)

Rev. 13 Page 4-9
4.3 Equipment Bonding
All installed items listed in Table 4-1 must be electrically bonded to the same airframe ground plane and
meet the listed milliohm requirement. The GMU 44B and GTP 59 must be either electrically bonded to an
airframe ground plane or electrically isolated per aircraft model-specific requirements in Appendix D.
The resistance must be verified with a calibrated milliohm meter with ±0.1 mΩ (or better) accuracy with
all connector(s) disconnected.
All existing third-party remote equipment interfaced to a GI 275 must be electrically bonded to the
airframe ground. It is not acceptable to interface the GI 275 equipment to existing third-party equipment
that relies only on power ground return wires as an electrical ground.
Electrical bonding can be achieved with mounting hardware (e.g., rivets, bolts, nuts, washers, etc.) or via
bond straps. Bonding surfaces must be clean of any primer, grease, or dirt. If mounting hardware is used to
create the electrical bond, the area under the head of the bolt or washer must be free of primer and a spot
face prepared that is at least 0.125 inches wider than the head of the bolt or the washer. Any exposed area
still visible after the bond is completed must be primed and finished with the original coating or other
suitable film. Rivets used to mechanically attach brackets and shelves provide an inherent electrical bond
through the rivets and require no additional bond preparation. The top or bottom side of the Garmin racks
or equipment flanges do not need any special bond preparations. Reference the aircraft manufacturer
(electrical) standard practices manual for procedures on electrical bond preparation, or follow SAE ARP
1870 Aerospace Systems Electrical Bonding and Grounding for Electromagnetic Compatibility and Safety,
Section 5, Detail Requirements.
Table 4-1 Bonding Requirements
Unit Value
GI 275 Base
GI 275 ADAHRS 2.5 mΩ (from unit to instrument panel)
GI 275 ADAHRS+AP
Engine Annunciator(s) 10 mΩ (from unit to instrument panel)
GEA 110
2.5 mΩ (from unit to local structure)
GEA 24
GTP 59 2.5 mΩ or electrically isolated per Appendix D (from
GMU 44B unit to local structure)
None, except when overbraid is required. Overbraid
GMU 11
bond must meet 2.5 mΩ per Section 4.6.1
2.5 mΩ (from unit to instrument panel or local
GSB 15
structure)
The instrument panel must be metal construction allowing a ground path for instrument panel installations.
For metal and tube-and-fabric aircraft, the ground path is inherently achieved through the metallic airframe
structure. For composite aircraft, a ground plane (or reference) must be used to achieve a comparable
ground.
The face sheet on honeycomb shelves must be metal when equipment is mounted to the shelf. The
honeycomb material between the face sheets is not conductive; therefore, care must be taken to ensure
proper bonding of the equipment. The top and bottom face sheets must be grounded to each other and at
least one of face sheets must be grounded to the airframe.

Rev. 13 Page 4-10
4.3.1 Vibration Mounts
For instrument panels with vibration mounts, verify the mounts are grounded to the metallic airframe
structure with a bonding jumper. Ensure the jumper meets the following specifications:
• The cross-sectional area of the strap is greater than 0.016 square inches (approximately
20,800 circular mils)
• The braid is a 7/16” or wider tubular braid (P/N QQB575R30T437, 24,120 circular mils) or a 3/4”
or wider flat braid (P/N QQB575F36T781, 20,800 circular mils)
• The braid contains a terminal lug (mil-spec MS20659-130) at each end
• The strap length is as short as possible, not exceeding 6 inches
Ensure each terminal lug is secured to its respective mating surface with a #10 steel bolt and one flat
washer (P/N AN970-3). Lugs and washers should be center-aligned and flush on all outside edges. These
components should be in full contact with the mating surface.
4.3.2 Aluminum Surface Preparation

In order to prepare the aluminum surface for proper bonding, the following general steps should be
followed. For a detailed procedure, refer to SAE ARP1870 Sections 5.1 and 5.5.
1. Clean grounding location with solvent.
2. Remove non-conductive films or coatings from the grounding location. When area is cleaned
around fastener heads or washers, the area cleaned should be 0.125 inches wider than the footprint
of the washer or the bolt head.
3. Apply a chemical conversion coat, such as Alodine 1200, to the bare metal.
4. Once the chemical conversion coat is dry, clean the area.
5. Install bonding aluminum tape or equipment at grounding location.
6. After the bond is complete, if any films or coatings were removed from the surface, re-apply a
suitable film or coating to the surrounding area.

Rev. 13 Page 4-11
4.4 Instrument Panel Installations
The GI 275 is primarily designed to replace existing 3-inch diameter flight instruments on the instrument
panel. For all GI 275 installations, the instrument panel must be constructed from metallic materials.
The GI 275 must be electrically bonded to the aircraft instrument panel with a direct current (DC)
resistance specified in Table 4-1. Electrical bond is accomplished through GI 275 surface to backside of
instrument panel surface contact.
The GI 275 display(s) must be located such that it is within the pilot’s field-of-view and also within reach
of the pilot. The GI 275 display(s) must not interfere with the installation of flight control systems or
control lock devices.
FAA AC 23.1311 defines the pilot’s field-of-view as the ability to view the flight instruments with
“minimum head and eye movement”. Figure 4-6 provides an example of the pilot’s field-of-view based on
a distance of 30 inches from the pilot eye to the instrument panel, as recommended in AC 23.1311.
30.0
LEFT
UP EW
VI
F-
IEW D -O
F-V EL
D-O FI 21.0 MAX
IEL UM 35°
UMF XIM
AXIM MA F-V IEW
YM Y LD-O
IMA
R 40° AR ARY
FIE
PR IM PRIM 15° 8.0 MAX
HORIZONTAL PR PILOT
PRIMARY FIELD-OF-VIEW
FIELD-OF-VIEW
CENTERLINE
15°
8.0 MAX
15°
NORMAL 0°
21.0 MAX
20°
RIGHT
DOWN
9(57,&$/),(/' +25,=217$/),(/'
PER AC23.1311-1C , PRIMARY FIELD-OF-VIEW IS BASED ON THE VERTICAL ANDHORIZONTAL VISUAL FIELDS
FROM DESIGN EYE REFERENCE POINT THAT CAN BEACCOMMODATED WITH EYE ROTATION ONLY.THIS
AREA IS NORMALLY RESERVEDFOR PRIMARY FLIGHT INFORMATION AND HIGH PRIORITY ALERTS, E.G. GI
275PRIMARY ADI, GI 275 HSI AND EIS ANNUNCIATOR (IF INSTALLED).
PER AC23.1311-1C PRIMARY MAXIMUM FIELD-OF-VIEW IS BASED ON THE VERTICALAND HORIZONTAL VISUAL
FIELDS FROM DESIGN EYE REFERENCE POINT THAT CANBE ACCOMMODATED WITH EYE ROTATION AND
MINIMAL HEAD ROTATION. THESEAREAS IS NORMALLY USED FOR IMPORTANT AND FREQUENTLY USED
INFORMATION, E.G. GI 275 STANDBY, GI 275 MFD AND GI 275 EIS.
Figure 4-6 Example of Pilot Field-of-View Installation
NOTE
Display location must not affect the readability of any existing or added switches under all
lighting conditions, including switches that maybe blocked from the instrument flood lights.
In Figure 4-6, the pilot’s field-of-view centerline is coincident with:

1. A projection of the centerline of the pilot’s seat onto the instrument panel; or
2. The center of control yoke or stick in neutral position if the control yoke or stick are offset from
the centerline of the pilot’s seat.
3. Per AC 23.1311, it is acceptable for the pilot field-of-view centerline to deviate horizontally from
the actual centerline by ±2.0 inches.

Rev. 13 Page 4-12
NOTE
If the GI 275 EIS is installed outside the pilot’s field-of-view, and a PFD capable of annunciating
EIS warnings and cautions is not installed, a remote annunciator(s) will be required as an engine
caution and warning advisory. The annunciator(s) must be located within the pilot’s primary field-
of-view. Refer to Section 4.4.3.
4.4.1 GI 275 Multifunction Indicator
CAUTION
It must be verified that the original airspeed indicator is not part of an existing airspeed warning
system when considering instrument removal or replacement. If it is part of the airspeed warning
system, this system must continue to operate following the installation of the GI 275 system.
NOTE
If applicable for the installation, ensure the backup battery is installed prior to installation of the
GI 275 unit in the instrument panel. The backup battery is required if the GI 275 is installed as a
primary or standby attitude display. Refer to Section 4.4.2 for battery installation procedure.
When replacing existing “six pack” 3-inch diameter flight instruments, GI 275 displays can be positioned
at any location vacated by the existing instruments except for the GI 275 Primary ADI. The GI 275
Primary ADI must be installed at the top-center of the “six pack” arrangement. For aircraft instrument
panels that do not have a “six pack” type arrangement, the general rule is that the GI 275 ADI should
coincide with the pilot’s point-of-view centerline. The other GI 275 display(s) must be within the pilot’s
field-of-view. AC 23.1311-1C requires that the primary flight information instruments be installed within
the primary field-of-view. GI 275 EIS units in twin-engine aircraft must be located adjacent to each other
and oriented (i.e., vertically or horizontally) the same as the previously approved installation.
If required by the installation (refer to Section 3.2.2), the display backup toggle switch that allows for the
control of reversion between the primary and standby displays must be located in the vicinity of the
reverting display.
PILOT FIELD-OF-VIEW
GI 275 PRIMARY ADI CENTERLINE
GI 275 MFD GI 275 EIS

GI 275 STANDBY ADI
GI 275HSI
8.00 MAX 8.00 MAX
21.00 MAX
PRIMARY MAXIMUM FIELD-OF-VIEW
Figure 4-7 Example of GI 275s in “Six Pack” Instrument Panel (Single-Engine)

Rev. 13 Page 4-13
PILOT FIELD-OF-VIEW
CENTERLINE
GI 275 PRIMARY ADI

GI 275 EIS (ENGINE #1)
GI 275 STANDBY GI 275 MFD
GI 275 EIS (ENGINE #2)
GI 275HSI
8.00 MAX 8.00 MAX
21.00 MAX
PILOT PRIMARY FIELD-OF-VIEW.
PILOT PRIMARY MAXIMUM FIELD-OF-VIEW
Figure 4-8 Example of GI 275s in “Six Pack” Instrument Panel (Multi-Engine)
PILOT FIELD-OF-VIEW
CENTERLINE
GI 275 PRIMARY ADI

GI 275HSI
GI 275 STANDBY
GI 275 MFD
GI 275 EIS
8.00 MAX 8.00 MAX
21.00 (REF) 21.00 (REF)
PRIMARY MAXIMUM FIELD-OF-VIEW
Figure 4-9 Example of GI 275s in Non-“Six Pack” Instrument Panel (Single-Engine)

Rev. 13 Page 4-14
Table 4-2 GI 275 Multifunction Indicator Weight & Size
Weight Dimensions in. (mm)
Item
lb. (kg) Height Width Depth
GI 275 Base
1.9 (0.86) 6.44 (163.5)
(P/N 011-04489-00, -60) 3.25 (82.6) 3.25 (82.6)
GI 275 Base with connector kit 2.19 (0.99) 7.40 (188.0)
GI 275 ADAHRS 2.4 (1.09) [1] 6.44 (163.5)
(P/N 011-04489-10, -30, -70) 3.25 (82.6) 3.25 (82.6)
GI 275 ADAHRS with connector kit 2.88 (1.31) [1] 7.40 (188.0)
GI 275 ADAHRS+AP 2.4 (1.09) [1] 6.44 (163.5)
(P/N 011-04489-20, -40) 3.25 (82.6) 3.25 (82.6)
GI 275 ADAHRS+AP with connector kit 2.88 (1.31) [1] 7.40 (188.0)
Notes:
[1] Includes the weight of the backup battery. If the battery is not installed, subtract 0.32 lbs (0.145 kg).
%$&.6,'(2),167580(17
3$1(/)$&(

;

3,727$,5),77,1* 67$7,&$,5),77,1*
$137 $137
)(0$/(7+5($' )(0$/(7+5($'

Figure 4-10 GI 275 Multifunction Indicator Dimensions

Rev. 13 Page 4-15
In most cases, installation of the GI 275 does not require modification to the existing instrument panel if it
is replacing an existing 3-inch diameter flight instrument. Simply remove the existing 3-inch diameter
flight instrument and install the GI 275 unit as shown in Figure 4-11.
CAUTION
The instrument panel coating that surrounds the fastener holes and contacts directly with
the GI 275 unit must be removed prior to installation in accordance with Section 4.3.2.
If modification is required, typically it will be simply trimming the existing 3-inch cutout on the instrument
panel to accommodate the knob on the unit. It may also be necessary to enlarge the instrument panel
fastener holes. Refer to Figure 4-13 for the recommended fastener hole diameter.

Rev. 13 Page 4-16
%$&.2),167580(173$1(/35(3$5$7,21
INSTRUMENT
PANEL
GI 275FASTENER
HOLE 3 PLACES
,167$//$7,21,1,167580(173$1(/
GI 275 REF
1
INSTRUMENT PANEL
REF
THE AREA ON THE BACK OF THE INSTRUMENT PANEL THAT COMES IN DIRECT CONTACT WITH THE GI 275
1 MUST BE PREPARED FOR ELECTRICAL BOND PER SECTION 4.3.2. PREPARE AREA 0.125 INCHES LARGER
THAN THE GI 275 METAL INSERTS.
ITEM QTY PART NUMBER DESCRIPTION

MS35214-XX SCREW, MACHINE, PAN HEAD, CROSS-RECESSED,
[1] [2] BRASS 0.164-32 UNC-24
1 3 OR
MS24693BB-XX SCREW, MACHINE, FLAT COUNTERSUNK HEAD, 100°,
[1] [2] CROSS-RECESSED, BRASS, #8-32 UNC-2A
Notes:
[1] Screws can be substituted with any suitable pan head or countersink #8-32 UNC-2A
aerospace steel screws.
[2] Torque screws to 8.0 ± 1.0 in-lbf.
Figure 4-11 Installation of GI 275 Display in the Instrument Panel

Rev. 13 Page 4-17
The GI 275 Primary ADI can be installed directly into an existing Bendix/King KI 256 cutout without
modifying the instrument panel using the optional Plate Adapter KI-256 to GI 275 (P/N 117-01484-00).
%$&.2),167580(173$1(/35(3$5$7,21
INSTRUMENT
PANEL

GI 275 ADAPTER
FASTENER HOLE
4 PLACES
,167$//$7,21,1,167580(173$1(/
INSTRUMENT PANEL (REF)
1 GI 275 (REF)
THE AREA ON THE BACK OF THE INSTRUMENT PANEL THAT COMES IN DIRECT CONTACT WITH THE
1 ADAPTER MUST BE PREPARED FOR ELECTRICAL BOND PER SECTION 4.3.2. PREPARE AREA 0.125 INCHES
LARGER THAN THE ADAPTER METAL INSERTS.

1 1 117-01484-00 PLATE, ADAPTER FROM KI-256 TO GI 275
MS24693BB-XXX SCREW, MACHINE, FLAT COUNTERSUNK HEAD 100° CROSS
2 3
[1] [2] RECESSED, BRASS, #8-32 UNC-2A
SCREW, MACHINE, PAN HEAD, PHILLIPS, STAINLESS
211-60337-XX [2]
STEEL, #6-32 UNC-2A
3 2 OR
SCREW, MACHINE, FLAT HEAD, PHILLIPS, 100°,
211-63337-XX [2]
STAINLESS STEEL #6-32 UNC-2A
Notes:
[1] Screws can be substituted with any suitable aerospace steel screws.
[2] Torque screws to 8.0 ± 1.0 in-lbf.
Figure 4-12 Installation of GI 275 with KI 256 Adapter

Rev. 13 Page 4-18
If new cutouts for the GI 275 are required, the dimensions and minimum spacing are shown in Figure 4-13.
;>@
;

>@
; >@

127(6
',0(16,216,1&+(6>PP@0(75,&9$/8(6$5()255()(5(1&(21/< ;5
72/(5$1&(6,1&+(6 PP
;;;
;;;;;
0,1,0805(&200(1'('6(3$5$7,2181,77281,7 &(17(572&(17(5',67$1&(,1$1<',5(&7,21,6>@
Figure 4-13 GI 275 Cutout

Rev. 13 Page 4-19
When fabricating a new instrument panel, it must:
1. Use the same thickness, material type, and corrosion protection as the original instrument panel.
a. If existing instrument panel material isn’t known, 2024-T3 aluminum per AMS-QQ-A-250/5,
6061-T6 aluminum per AMS 4025, AMS 4027, or AMS-QQ-A-250/11 must be used.
b. Corrosion protection must be in accordance with aircraft model-specific standard practices
manual, or alternatively chemical conversion coating per MIL-DTL-5541 Type II, or
MIL-DTL-81706 Type II, and high-solids chemical and solvent resistant epoxy primer per
MIL-PRF-23377, Class N.
2. Be manufactured using methods and procedures defined in an aircraft standard practices manual,
maintenance manual, or structural repair manual. Methods, techniques, and practices defined in
AC 43.13-1B Chapter 4, Section 4, Metal Repair Procedures, are acceptable.
3. Maintain the form of the existing instrument panel, including the location of fasteners, and retain
all elements of the instrument panel structure (if comprised of multiple parts assembled together),
such that every feature of the instrument panel is preserved or duplicated.
a. Multiple individual pieces of instrument panel assembly must not be combined.
b. Single pieces must not be split into smaller components.
4. Remain at the location where it was originally installed in the aircraft, use the same type of
fasteners as specified in the aircraft model-specific parts catalog, and retain the same instrument
panel installation method as defined by aircraft type design.
5. Retain the lighting for all previously installed instrument(s) that will be re-installed.
Installation and placement of the required placards and limitations must be in accordance with the
applicable aircraft data and aircraft type TCDS.
If any placards were relocated as a result of a display installation, verify the following:
• The font size of the new placard is the same as the placard it is replacing
• The color of the new placard is identical to the color of the placard it is replacing
• The text on the new placard is identical to the text on the placard that it is replacing (it can be
arranged differently as required by space constraints, but the wording must be the same)
• The new placard must be legible and not obscured to the pilot by the glareshield, in all flight
control positions, or by any other component in the flight deck
If new switch labels were added as a result of the GI 275 installation, verify the following:
• The font size and label is legible from the pilot’s seat
• The labels are legible in all ambient light conditions. In particular, the labels are legible with
ambient flood lighting in darkness
• The switch label must be legible and not obscured to the pilot by the glareshield, in all flight
control positions, or by any other component to include the switch position
For VFR aircraft, the following is applicable when installing the GI 275:
• Standby instruments are not required
• Electrical bonding and wire routing must be considered for aircraft with non-metallic airframes
No additional placard is required if the aircraft is already limited to VFR operation prior to installation of
the GI 275; otherwise, the installation of the GI 275 must include the following on a placard:
• The text on the placard must read, “AIRCRAFT LIMITED TO VFR”
• The font size must be a minimum of 0.25 inches high (minimum 18 point font)
• The placard must be located in plain view near the pilot’s PFD (pilot-side instrument panel)
Refer to Appendix D for aircraft models limited to VFR operations with the GI 275 system that previously
did not have this limitation.

Rev. 13 Page 4-20
4.4.2 Backup Battery
The backup battery is internal to the GI 275. Captive screws secure a cover plate protecting the battery. The
battery pack will not be vented outside the aircraft. The battery must be installed in the GI 275 unit prior to
installation in the instrument panel.
Table 4-3 Backup Battery Weight and Size
Item
1.13 (28.7) (connector end)
GI 275 Backup Battery 0.32 (0.145) [1] 2.36 (60.0) 2.60 (66.0)
0.85 (21.5) (non-connector end)
Notes:
[1] Weight includes the silicone end cap (seen in Figure 4-15).
Figure 4-14 Backup Battery Dimensions

(Shown without required silicone end cap)

Rev. 13 Page 4-21
To install the backup battery in the GI 275:
1. Remove the four screws and cover plate from the top of the GI 275 unit.
2. Place the two included end caps onto each end of the battery.
CAUTION
The battery end caps are required for installation of the backup battery in the GI 275.
3. Insert the battery into the GI 275 ensuring the battery connector aligns with the GI 275 connector.
4. Press down to fully seat the battery. It should be level with the top of the unit when fully seated.
5. When the battery is installed correctly, the GI 275 will power on. Power off the unit before
continuing with the installation.
6. Replace the cover and torque the screws to 8 ± 1 in-lbf. Ensure the cover is fully seated.
72548(72 ,1/%
Figure 4-15 GI 275 Backup Battery Installation

Rev. 13 Page 4-22
4.4.3 EIS Annunciator
EIS annunciation is required if the GI 275 EIS is located outside the pilot’s maximum field-of-view.
The EIS annunciator(s) must be located within the pilot’s primary field-of-view. Refer to Figure 4-6 for the
definition of the pilot’s field-of-view.
Two types of EIS annunciators are approved for installation.
4.4.3.1 EIS Annunciator

The Applied Avionics EIS annunciator provides a red “ENGINE” warning and yellow “ENGINE” caution.

57<3

5()$,5&5$)7,167580(17
3$1(/
5()02817,1*6/((9(3$57
2)$1181&,$725
3$1(/&87287 5()
7<3,&$/ 3/8*48,&.&211(&79,9,681
%(:31 $1181&,$7259'&,1&$'(&(17&$87,21$1':$51,1*(1*,1(,1',&$7,21$(5263$&(237,&6

/('%$(:3 $1181&,$7259'&/('&$87,21$1':$51,1*(1*,1(,1',&$7,21$(5263$&(237,&6
47< ,7(0 3$57180%(5 '(6&5,37,21
EKd^
ϭ͘ /DE^/KE^Z/E/E,^hE>^^Kd,Zt/^^W/&/͘
Ϯ Z/E/ZdKEddt/d,EEhE/dKZDKhEd/E'^>sdd,<^/K&/E^dZhDEdWE>Dh^dWZWZ
&KZ>dZ/>KEdK,/s/ZdhZZEdZ^/^dE>^^d,EKZYh>dKϭϬD/>>/K,D^^D^hZdtE
EEhE/dKZKzE/ZZ&d/E^dZhDEdWE>͘
Figure 4-16 EIS Caution and Warning Annunciator Installation

Rev. 13 Page 4-23
4.4.3.2 Separate EIS Annunciators
The Mil-Spec annunciators must be installed side-by-side with the caution (yellow) annunciator on the left
and the warning (red) annunciator on the right. Install using the following procedure:
1. Drill the cutouts to the dimensions in Figure 4-17.
2. Insert MS25041 assembly without the lens holder from the forward side of the panel and secure.
3. Install lamp on the lens holder.
4. Install and secure lens holder on the indicator.
5. Install a placard or label as outlined in Section 6.6.
1 2 FOR 28V AIRCRAFT
3 4 FOR 14V AIRCRAFT
%$&.2),167580(173$1(/35(3$5$7,21
7+($5($217+(%$&.2)7+(,167580(173$1(/7+$7&20(6,1',5(&7&217$&7:,7+7+(
$1181&,$7250867%(35(3$5(')25(/(&75,&$/%21'3(56(&7,21,7,65(&200(1'('
7+$77+(35(3$5('$5($%(,1&+(6/$5*(57+$17+(&87287
ITEM OTY PART NUMBER DESCRIPTION
1 1 MS25041-4-327 ANNUNCIATOR, YELLOW, PRESS TO T(67 FOR

28V AIRCRAFT
2 1 MS25041-2-327 ANNUNCIATOR, RED, PRESS TO 7(67 FOR 28V AIRCRAFT
ANNUNCIATOR, YELLOW, PRESS TO 7(67 FOR
3 1 MS25041-4-330
14V AIRCRAFT
4 1 MS25041-2-330 ANNUNCIATOR, RED, PRESS TO 7(67 FOR 14V AIRCRAFT
Figure 4-17 EIS Caution and Warning Annunciators Installation

Rev. 13 Page 4-24
4.4.4 GSB 15
The GSB 15 is a USB database and charging hub. The GSB 15 is designed to be mounted on a vertical
surface, where moisture and fluids are less likely to be trapped inside the USB ports but still be visible and
accessible to the user.
The preferred location for the GSB 15 is the instrument panel. Other locations are acceptable provided that
they do not interfere with the safe operation of the aircraft. Only units installed in the pilot’s side of the
instrument panel are approved for USB connections (refer to Figure B-26). All other installations
(including co-pilot) are limited to power only.
There are six variants of the GSB 15. Variants include dual USB Type-A ports, dual USB Type-C ports,
and single USB Type-A/single USB Type-C ports. Each variant also has the option to have the connector
on the rear or side of the unit.
Table 4-4 GSB 15 Weight and Size

Item
GSB 15 Rear Connector
0.16 (0.07) 1.50 (38.1) 1.50 (38.1) 1.225 (31.1)
(P/N 011-04937-00, -20, -40)
GSB 15 Side Connector 0.16 (0.07) 1.85 (46.99) 1.50 (38.1) 0.844 (21.4)
(P/N 011-04937-01, -30, -50)
2.25” Mounting Kit 0.11 (0.05)
3.125” Mounting Kit 0.20 (0.09)
GSB 15 decorative cover, unfinished 0.03 (0.01)
GSB 15 decorative cover, black 0.03 (0.01)

Rev. 13 Page 4-25
5($5 CONNECTOR (-00), UNIT ONLY 6,'( CONNECTOR (-0), UNIT ONLY
1.50 38.1 .92 23.5 1.50 38.1 .84 21.4
.438±.005 11.11±0.13 .438±.005 11.11±0.13

1.50 38.1
1.55 39.3
0 0.00 0 0.00
.438±.005 11.11±0.13 .438±.005 11.11±0.13

0 0.00
.438±.005 11.11±0.13
.438±.005 11.11±0.13
.4 10
0 0.00
.438±.005 11.11±0.13
.438±.005 11.11±0.13
.4 10
5($5 CONNECTOR (-00), WITH CONNECTOR KIT (011-05044-00) 6,'( CONNECTOR (-0), WITH CONNECTOR KIT (011-05044-00)
1.02 25.9
.64 16.2
.80 20.24
1.85 47.0
BACK OF MOUNTING SURFACE BACK OF MOUNTING SUFACE
NOTES:
1. DIMENSIONS: INCHES[mm]. METRIC VALUES ARE FOR REFERENCE ONLY.
2. DIMENSIONS ARE NOMINAL AND TOLERANCES ARE NOT IMPLIED UNLESS SPECIFICALLY STATED.
Figure 4-18 GSB 15 Dimensions

Rev. 13 Page 4-26
If a new cutout for the GSB 15 is required on the instrument panel, the dimensions of the cutout is shown in Figure 4-19. Note that the location of the GSB 15 on the
instrument panel is not required to meet any particular field-of-view requirements. When installing the decorative cover, the cutout with four screw holes is required.
RECOMMENDED PANEL CUTOUT DIMENSIONS FOR UNIT
+.030 +0.76
1.000 - .005 25.40 - 0.13
2X .129±.003 3.26±0.08
(FOR PAN HEAD SCREWS)
.438±.005 11.11±0.13
STANDARD HOLES
45°
0 0.00
OR OR
.438±.005 11.11±0.13 0 0.00
.438±.005 11.11±0.13
.438±.005 11.11±0.13
(FOR 100° FLAT HEAD SCREWS)
2X .129±.003 3.26±0.08 THRU ALL

.225 5.72 X 100°
COUNTERSUNK HOLES
OR OR
Figure 4-19 GSB 15 Cutout Dimensions

Rev. 13 Page 4-27
CAUTION
the GSB 15 unit must be removed prior to installation.
%$&.2),167580(173$1(/35(3$5$7,21
INSTRUMENT
PANEL
GSB 15 FASTENER HOLE
,167$//$7,21,1,167580(173$1(/
1
INSTRUMENT PANEL
REF.
2
1 GSB 15 MUST BE PREPARED FOR ELECTRICAL BOND PER SECTION 4.3.2. PREPARE AREA 0.125 INCHES
LARGER THAN THE GSB 15 METAL INSERTS.

010-02201-00, -20, -40 GSB 15, REAR CONNECTOR, UNIT
1 1 OR
010-02201-01, -30, -50 GSB 15, SIDE CONNECTOR, UNIT
MS35214-XX SCREW, MACHINE, PAN HEAD, CROSS-
[1] [2] RECESSED, BRASS, 0.112-40 UNC-2A
2 2 OR
MS24693-XX SCREW, MACHINE, FLAT COUNTERSUNK HEAD,
[1] [2] 100°, CROSS-RECESSED, BRASS, #4-40 UNC-2A
Notes:
[1] Screws can be substituted by any other suitable pan head or countersink #4-40 UNC-2A
aerospace steel screws.
[2] Torque 0.112-40 UNC-2A screws to 5.0 ± 1.0 in-lbf.
Figure 4-20 GSB 15 Cutout Installation

Rev. 13 Page 4-28
The GSB 15 can be installed directly into an existing 2-inch diameter flight instrument cutout without
modifying the instrument panel using the GSB 15 2.25” Mounting Kit (P/N 011-05043-00).
CAUTION
the GSB 15 Mounting Kit (Item 2) must be removed prior to installation.
%$&.2),167580(173$1(/35(3$5$7,21
INSTRUMENT
PANEL
GSB 15 MOUNTING KIT

FASTENER HOLE
4 PLACES
,167$//$7,21,1,167580(173$1(/
2
4 INSTRUMENT PANEL
REF.

1 1 OR
2 1 011-05043-00 SUB-ASSY, MOUNTING KIT, 2.25”, GSB 15
MS24693BB-XX SCREW, MACHINE, FLAT COUNTERSUNK HEAD, 100°P,
3 2
SCREW, MACHINE, PAN HEAD, CROSS-
MS35214-XX [1] [3]
RECESSED, BRASS, 0.138-32 UNC-2A
4 4 OR
MS24693BB-XX SCREW, MACHINE, FLAT COUNTERSUNK HEAD,
[1] [3] 100°P, CROSS-RECESSED, BRASS, #6-32 UNC 2-A
Notes:
[1] Screws can be substituted by any other suitable aerospace steel screws.
Figure 4-21 GSB 15 Installation with Mounting Kit (2.25-Inch Cutout)

Rev. 13 Page 4-29
The GSB 15 can be installed directly into an existing 3-inch diameter flight instrument cutout without
modifying the instrument panel using the GSB 15 3.125” Mounting Kit (P/N 011-05043-01).
CAUTION
the GSB 15 Mounting Kit (Item 2) must be removed prior to installation.
%$&.2),167580(173$1(/35(3$5$7,21
INSTRUMENT
PANEL
GSB 15 MOUNTING KIT

FASTENER HOLE
4 PLACES
,167$//$7,21,1,167580(173$1(/
2
4 INSTRUMENT PANEL
REF.

1 1 OR
2 1 011-05043-01 SUB-ASSY, MOUNTING KIT, 3.125”, GSB 15
MS24693BB-XX SCREW, MACHINE, FLAT COUNTERSUNK HEAD, 100°,
3 2
SCREW, MACHINE, PAN HEAD, CROSS-RECESSED
MS35214-XX [1] [3]
BRASS, 0.138-32 UNC-2A
4 4 OR
MS24693BB-XX SCREW, MACHINE, FLAT COUNTERSUNK HEAD,
[1] [3] 100°P, CROSS-RECESSED, #6-32 UNC-2A
Notes:
[1] Screws can be substituted by any other suitable aerospace steel screws.
Figure 4-22 GSB 15 Installation with Mounting Kit (3.125-Inch Cutout)

Rev. 13 Page 4-30
4.4.4.1 GSB 15 Decorative Cover
NOTE
If using the unfinished version of the decorative cover, finishing methods that require less
than 120° C are recommended. If the finishing method (such as powder coating) exceeds
120° C, it is recommended to pre-heat the cosmetic piece to 200° C or greater before
applying a finish in order to prevent cosmetic defects.
Perform the following steps to install the Decorative Cover Kits listed in Table 3-4.
1. Install GSB 15 unit per Section 4.4.4.
2. Install the intermediate piece using the two provided screws.
3. Peel off the tape liners from the intermediate piece.
4. Install the cosmetic piece.
For best results, install the decorative cover as specified below:
• Recommended installation temperature: 70-100°F (21-38°C)
• Minimum installation temperature: 50°F (10°C)
• Recommended screw torque: 4-6 in-lbf
• After removing the tape liners from the intermediate piece, avoid touching the exposed adhesive
• Before installing, clean the inside of the cosmetic piece with a 50-90% isopropyl alcohol and water
mixture. Allow it to fully dry before proceeding
• When installing the decorative cover, apply an evenly distributed minimum force of 7 lbf (3 kgf or
30 N)
• The adhesive will fully cure within 72 hours (90% strength after 24 hours)
Figure 4-23 GSB 15 Decorative Cover Installation

Rev. 13 Page 4-31
4.5 Backshell Assembly
Prepare the shielded cables to be connected to the LRU in accordance with Section 4.1.1, then terminate
the cables to the LRU jackscrew backshell assembly using the following procedure. Refer to Figure 4-24
and Figure 4-25.
1. Terminate the crimped pin/socket contacts (4) in the D-sub connector (7) in accordance with the
aircraft wiring drawings.
2. Place the smooth side of the backshell strain relief clamp (9) across the cable bundle and secure
using three 4-40 x 0.375 pan head screws (10).
CAUTION
Place smooth side of strain relief (9) across cable bundle. DO NOT place grooved side
across cable bundle. Placing the grooved side of the strain relief across the cable bundle
may damage wires.
3. Terminate the ring terminals (6) to the tapped holes on the backshell (8) by placing items on the
8-32 x 0.312 pan head shield terminal screw (13) in the following order before finally inserting the
screw into the tapped holes on the shield block:
a. split washer (14)
b. flat washer (15)
c. first ring terminal (6)
d. second ring terminal (6) (if needed)
NOTE
Each tapped hole on the backshell (8) may accommodate only two ring terminals (6). It is
preferred that a maximum of two wires (2) be terminated per ring terminal. Two wires per
ring terminal will necessitate the use of a ring terminal, #8, insulated, 14-16 AWG
(MS25036-153). If only a single wire is left or if only a single wire is needed for this
connector a ring terminal, #8, insulated, 18-22 AWG (MS25036-149) can accommodate
this single wire. If more wires exist for the connector than two per ring terminal, it is
permissible to terminate three wires per ring terminal.

Rev. 13 Page 4-32
12 [
11
PLACE SMOOTH SIDE OF STRAIN

RELIEF ACROSS CABLE BUNDLE.
DO NOT PLACE GROOVED SIDE
ACROSS CABLE BUNDLE.
10 [
Figure 4-24 Jackscrew Backshell and Shield Block Assembly

Rev. 13 Page 4-33
NOTES
PLACE SMOOTH SIDE OF STRAIN RELIEF ACROSS CABLE BUNDLE. DO NOT PLACE
1
GROOVED SIDE ACROSS CABLE BUNDLE.
2 PREFERRED SHIELD TERMINATION METHOD SHOWN.
Figure 4-25 Shield Block Termination on Jackscrew Backshell Assembly

Rev. 13 Page 4-34
4.5.1 Configuration Module Installation
GI 275 connector assemblies serve as housing for configuration modules. This section lists configuration
module assemblies and installation procedures for installations.
Refer to Figure 4-26 for details and item numbers referenced in the following procedure.
1. Strip back approximately 0.17 inches of insulation from each wire of the 4-conductor wire harness
(3). It is the installer’s responsibility to determine the proper length of insulation to be removed.
2. Crimp a pin (4) to each conductor.
3. Ensure that the wire is visible in the inspection hole, and that the insulation is 1/64 to 1/32 inches
from the end of the contact.
4. Insert newly crimped pins and wires (3, 4) into the connector housing (5) location. For details,
refer to the applicable interconnect drawings.
5. Attach the module (1) to the backshell (6) using a pan head screw (10).
6. Plug the 4-conductor wire harness (3) into the connector on the module (1).
7. Orient the connector housing (5) so that the 4-conductor wire harness (3) is on the same side of the
backshell (6) as the module (1).
8. Attach the cover (7) to the backshell (6) using two screws (8).
Figure 4-26 Jackscrew Backshell Assembly

(Potted Configuration Module)

Rev. 13 Page 4-35
4.5.2 GSB 15 Connector Assembly
Prepare the shielded cables to be connected to the LRU in accordance with Section 4.1.1, then terminate
the cables to the LRU ground lug using the following procedure:
1. Terminate the crimped pin/socket contacts in the locking connector in accordance with the aircraft
wiring drawings.
2. Attach the locking connector to the GSB 15, paying attention to the keying and latching features of
the connector.
3. If the data transfer functionality is intended to be used, terminate the shield drain ring terminal to
the ground lug on the back of the GSB 15 unit using the 4-40 x 0.125 pan head screw. This step is
not required if the GSB 15 will be used for charging only.

Rev. 13 Page 4-36
4.6 Display Sensors
Display sensors consist of GMU 11/44B Magnetometers and GTP 59 OAT Probe. When installed in a
metallic aircraft, the display sensors must be electrically bonded to a nearby metallic structure, with the
exception of the GMU 11 when overbraid is not required. Resistance must be in accordance with
Section 4.3 with the connector disconnected. When installed in a non-metallic aircraft, the display sensors
and display sensor connectors must be separated from any electrically conductive components by a
minimum of 0.5 inches. Non-conductive doublers or barriers may be required to isolate the sensors.
4.6.1 GMU 11/44B

The GMU 11 and GMU 44B are very sensitive magnetic sensors. Before they are installed, their location
must be surveyed to verify that they pass a Magnetic Interference Test (refer to Section 4.6.1.1). Follow the
GMU separation guidelines presented in Table 4-5 when selecting an acceptable location. For aircraft
model-specific GMU 11/44B installation requirements, refer to Appendix D.
NOTE
For metal and tube-and-fabric aircraft, the GMU must be electrically bonded to the
aircraft metallic structure that forms the ground plane, with the exception of the GMU 11
when overbraid is not required.
NOTE
For composite aircraft, the GMU 11/44B must not be electrically bonded to the aircraft
ground plane. If the structure is conductive at the mounting location, provisions must be
made to electrically isolate the GMU from the conductive structure per instructions in this
section.
CAUTION
A Magnetic Interference Survey must be successfully accomplished for locations in which
a flux valve or flux gate was previously installed, as it may not be adequate for the GMU.
Table 4-5 GMU Recommended Distance from Sources of Magnetic Interference

Source of Magnetic Interference Min. Distance
In Order of Importance feet [meters]
1. Electric relays and motors, including servo motors 10.0 [3.0]
2. Ferromagnetic (i.e., iron, steel, or cobalt materials) mass heavier than 1 kg
(e.g. landing gear) 8.2 [2.5]
3. Ferromagnetic mass less than 1 kg total (e.g., control cables) 3.0 [1.0]
4. Electrical devices that draw a current of more than 100 mA 3.0 [1.0]
5. Electrical conductors that pass a current of more than 100 mA 3.0 [1.0]
6. Electrical devices that draw a current of less than 100 mA 2.0 [0.6]
7. Magnetic measuring device other than another GMU (e.g., existing flux gate, even
if not powered) 2.0 [0.6]
8. Electrical conductors passing less than 100 mA current 1.3 [0.4]

Rev. 13 Page 4-37
Aircraft must be leveled for installation of the GMU 11/44B. This is accomplished by following
procedures in the relevant aircraft maintenance manual. After the aircraft is leveled, the GMU 11/44B must
be:
1. Horizontal within 3.0° of the aircraft level reference in pitch and roll.
2. Pointing forward within ±0.5° of the aircraft longitudinal axis (butt line). Alignment within ±2.0°
is acceptable, but requires the post-installation heading compensation.
NOTE
Proper alignment of the GMU installation assures that the sensor points forward as
required.
NOTE
The GMU installation should be located in areas where there is minimal flex from the
installed orientation (e.g. aircraft with large wingspan may have significant wing flex
during flight and thus the wing tip is unsuitable for the GMU installation location).
GMU 11/44B sensitivity requires that:

• Electrical conductors within 3 feet of the GMU 44B or within 10 feet of the GMU 11 are installed
as a twisted shielded pair, not a single-wire conductor, and grounded at both ends, if possible
• Non-magnetic materials are used to mount the GMU 11/44B and that any magnetic fasteners
within 20 inches are replaced with non-magnetic equivalents (e.g., non-magnetic stainless steel or
zinc-plated steel screws). Fastener replacement is outside the scope of this STC; refer to the
aircraft structural repair manual or standard practices manual
The GMU 11/44B must not be mounted on an access panel or inspection cover. The GMU 11/44B can be
installed either in the wing or fuselage.
In general, wing mounting of the GMU is preferred. Fuselage mounting is less desirable because of
numerous potential disturbances that can interfere with the accurate operation of the GMU. To reduce the
effect of electric current in the wing skin:
1. The GMU 11/44B wiring must have a dedicated power ground return as a twisted pair with the
power source back into the fuselage.
2. The wingtip lights must not have a power ground referenced to the chassis of the light assembly
that would then be referenced back to the airframe ground via the light assembly mounting.
Electrically isolated light assembly can only be used if demonstrated to have adequate protection
against direct effects of lightning.
If installed in the fuselage, the preferred location is the fuselage tail section. However, it must maintain a
minimum of 2 feet of separation from the cabin or cargo compartments. Truss-type steel fuselage frames
are a significant source of magnetic interference and, therefore, are not recommended as a GMU 11/44B
installation location.
If the aircraft has wingtip tanks or removable fairings, the GMU 11/44B must be separated by at least a
single intermediate rib from the main fuel tank or tip tank, and the tip tank must be metallic in
construction.
For installations with dual GMU 11s or dual GMU 44Bs, co-locating the two GMUs close to each other in
the tail or in one wing is recommended, as this reduces the likelihood of heading splits or miscompares
when operating on the ground in the vicinity of local magnetic anomalies.

Rev. 13 Page 4-38
4.6.1.1 Magnetic Interference Test
The Magnetic Interference Survey is used to identify an aircraft location with acceptable levels of
magnetic interference to mount the GMU 11/44B. This section describes the materials, precautions, setup,
and procedures required to successfully conduct the magnetic interference survey
Required Materials
1. DC Power Source - A DC power source capable of supplying 7 - 34 VDC/1 A is required to
supply power to the GI 275 and magnetometer during the Magnetic Interference Test.
2. GI 275 - The GI 275 is required to run the Magnetic Interference Test in installations with a
GMU 11 and recommended in installations with a GMU 44B. Installations with a GMU 44B can
use the GMU 44 Location Survey Tool and a PC in lieu of the GI 275 display. Refer to AHRS/
Magnetometer Installation Considerations (P/N 190-01051-00).
3. Stopwatch or Watch with a Second Hand - During the survey test sequence, it is required to use
a stopwatch or watch with a second hand to measure the time for turning equipment on and off.
4. Magnetic Interference Test Cable - In order to perform the magnetic interference survey, it is
required to use a test cable fabricated by the installer. Fabricate a test cable in accordance with
Figure 4-27.
GI 275 w/ ADAHRS Fabricate length as necessary
P2751 P441 GMU 44B

A 49 24 AWG 3 MAGNETOMETER
RS-485
B 69 24 AWG 2
s
1
LRU PWR OUT 20 24 AWG 6
LRU GROUND 19 24 AWG 4
RS-232 OUT 1 38 24 AWG 5
s
OR
P111 GMU 11
OUT 38 24 AWG 4 MAGNETOMETER
RS-232 1 IN 57 24 AWG 5
GND 77 24 AWG 6
s s
LRU PWR OUT 20 24 AWG 7

LRU GROUND 19 24 AWG 9
s s
1
AIRCRAFT POWER 1 2 22 AWG 2
AIRCRAFT GROUND 41 22 AWG
NOTES
POWER AND GROUND WIRES FOR THE GI 275 ARE NOT REQUIRED IF A CHARGED BACKUP BATTERY IS
1 INSTALLED PER SECTION 4.4.2.
THE GI 275 CAN BE CONNECTED TO AIRCRAFT POWER OR AN EXTERNAL DC POWER SOURCE CAPABLE
2 OF SUPPLYING 7 - 34 VDC / 1A.
Figure 4-27 Magnetic Interference Test Harness

Rev. 13 Page 4-39
Performing the Magnetic Interference Test
This section describes the setup and procedure required to successfully complete the GMU location survey
using the GI 275.
Prepare the aircraft and GMU 11/44B for the location survey by completing the following steps:
1. Prepare a detailed Test Sequence List with start and stop times for exercising all aircraft
components and devices that may affect the operation of the GMU through movement of ferrous
metal parts or electrical inductance. Aircraft components included on the list will vary depending
on aircraft model. An example survey sequence is provided in Table 4-6.
2. Position the aircraft in a magnetically quiet area. This step may involve repositioning large metal
objects including aircraft and ground support equipment away from the survey area.
3. Position the GMU in the aircraft location to be surveyed following the guidance in
Section 4.6.1. Secure using non-ferrous material, if necessary.
CAUTION
Do not permanently install the GMU prior to successfully completing the Magnetic
Interference Test. An unsurveyed location may be unsuitable for permanent installation
and cause the GMU to function incorrectly.
Before beginning the survey, ensure that all items listed on the test sequence are in their pre-exercise states
(e.g., control surfaces neutral, flaps up, lights off). Perform the survey by completing the following steps:
1. Connect the test harness to the GI 275 and GMU as shown in Figure 4-27.
2. Power up the aircraft (master switch, avionics bus, etc.).
3. Power on the GI 275 in Configuration mode (refer to Section 5.1.1).
4. If prompted, set the Unit ID per Section 5.3.1.
5. Navigate to the Interfaces page from the Configuration mode home page.
6. Configure AHRS 1 per Section 5.5.4.
7. Perform the Magnetic Interference Test per the instructions in Section 6.4.4.
If the check fails, the installation is considered unreliable until the source of magnetic interference is
identified and fixed. The Magnetometer Interference Test must be repeated until passed. When the
Magnetometer Interference Test fails, record the three magnetometer maximum deviation values and their
corresponding timestamps. A maximum deviation value greater than 5.0 mGauss in either the X or Y axes,
or greater than 8.0 mGauss in the Z axis, indicates a problem that must be resolved. Compare the
corresponding timestamps with the prepared test sequence to identify which action produced the failure.
Contact Garmin Support for assistance.
Three common reasons for a failed Magnetometer Interference Test are:
• Equipment, wiring, or ferro-magnetic items are installed too close to the magnetometer
• An electronic device has become grounded through the aircraft structure instead of the proper
ground wire in a twisted shielded pair, especially if the ground return path through the aircraft
structure passes near the GMU 11/44B
• The Interference Test was not run for a long enough duration. At least 25 seconds are required for
the test to properly complete

Rev. 13 Page 4-40
Table 4-6 Example Magnetic Interference Test Sequence List
A/C Reg.:______________ Survey data file name:________________________________
Elapsed Time Elapsed Time
Action
(sec) (min:sec)
0 0:00 Test begins (calibration period – no activity permitted)
20 0:20 Calibration period ends
30 0:30 Aileron full right
40 0:40 Aileron full left
50 0:50 Aileron level
60 1:00 Rudder full right
70 1:10 Rudder full left
80 1:20 Rudder neutral
90 1:30 Elevators full up
100 1:40 Elevators full down
110 1:50 Elevators neutral
120 2:00 Flaps down
140 2:20 Flaps up
160 2:40 Landing gear up
180 3:00 Landing gear down
190 3:10 Speed brake up
200 3:20 Speed brake down
210 3:30 Navigation lights on
220 3:40 Navigation lights off
230 3:50 Landing lights on
240 4:00 Landing lights off
250 4:10 Taxi lights on
260 4:20 Taxi lights off
270 4:30 Air conditioning on
280 4:40 Air conditioning off
290 4:50 Landing lights and taxi lights on
300 5:00 Landing lights and taxi lights off
310 5:10 Strobes on
320 5:20 Strobes off
330 5:30 Recognition lights on
340 5:40 Recognition lights off
350 5:50 Turn on all wingtip lights simultaneously
360 6:00 Turn off all wingtip lights simultaneously
370 6:10 Beacon on
380 6:20 Beacon off
390 6:30 AP engaged in a pitch and roll made (to engage servo clutches)
400 6:40 AP disengaged
410 6:50 Pitot heat on
420 7:00 Pitot heat off
430 7:10 End of test

Rev. 13 Page 4-41
4.6.1.2 GMU 11 Installation
The GMU 11 must be mounted horizontally. It can be mounted with connector facing forward, aft, left, or
right relative to the aircraft longitudinal axis. The orientation must be configured to match the installation
(refer to Section 5.5.4).
Table 4-7 GMU 11 Weight and Size

Item
GMU 11 unit only 0.16 (0.0725) 0.93 (2.36) 2.74 (6.96) 3.78 (9.60)
Install rack and connector 0.142 (0.0643)
Figure 4-28 GMU 11 Dimensions

Rev. 13 Page 4-42
1 1 011-04349-01 GMU 11 MAGNETOMETER UNIT
MS51957-XX SCREW, MACHINE, PAN HEAD, CROSS-RECESSED
2 4
[1] [2] CORROSION RESISTANT STEEL, 0.138-32 UNC-2A
3 4 NAS1149CN632R WASHER
NUT SELF-LOCKING, HEXAGON REGULAR HEIGHT,
4 4 MS21044C06 [3]
250°F, 125 KSI Ftu AND 60 KSI Ftu
Notes:
[1] MS51957 screws can be substituted by any other equivalent aerospace steel screws.
[2] Torque 0.138-32 UNC-2A screws 8.0 ± 1.0 in-lbf.
[3] Nuts can be substituted by any suitable aerospace steel nutplates.
Figure 4-29 GMU 11 Mounting Hardware

Rev. 13 Page 4-43
4.6.1.2.1 GMU 11 Custom Mounting Shelf
A custom mounting shelf for the GMU 11 can be fabricated from 2024-T3 aluminum per AMS-QQ-A-
250/5 or 6061-T6 per AMS-QQ-250/11, minimum 0.032 inches thick. The mounting shelf shall not span
greater than 12.0 inches in width or length without direct attachment to the structure. If the mounting
platform does span greater than 12.0 inches, add the necessary stringers, doublers, bulkhead flange
reinforcement, etc., to provide adequate support. Existing honeycomb core sandwich panels with
aluminum face sheets are adequate and do not require additional reinforcement. If corrosion protection
methods are not specified by the model-specific aircraft standard practices manual, the shelf must be
conversion coated per MIL-DTL-5541 Type II or MIL-DTL-81706 Type II and primed with high-solids
chemical and solvent resistant epoxy primer per MIL-PRF-23377, Class N. An example of a custom
mounting shelf is shown in Figure 4-30.
NOTE
A minimum of 3.0 inches between the connector end of the GMU 11 and any object must
be maintained to ensure clearance for connector and wire harness.
Ø0.138 (4 PLACES)
1.50 MAX
2.00
2.28
0.50
MS20426AD4
AIRFRAME (REF)
MATERIAL:
2024-T3 PER AMS-QQ-A-250/4 OR 6061-T6
PER AMS-QQ-250/11
THICKNESS: MIN 0.032 IN
NOTE:
1 MINIMUM HEIGHT IS 1.0 INCH
2 MAXIMUM FASTENER SPACING IS 3.5 INCHES
Figure 4-30 Example GMU 11 Mounting Shelf

Rev. 13 Page 4-44
4.6.1.3 GMU 11 Mounting in Non-Metallic Wingtip
4.6.1.3.1 Overview
In some installations, it is desirable to mount the GMU 11 Magnetometer in the wingtip of a metal aircraft
that has non-metallic (e.g., fiberglass) wingtip covers. If this is the case, the following requirements must
be met:
• The aircraft must have wingtip navigation lights installed
• Heavy overbraid must be installed over the wiring from the GMU 11 to where the wiring exits the
wingtip
• The overbraid must be terminated at this wingtip exit point using a #10 terminal lug and stud
• The GMU 11 must be mounted to a metal rib that does not enclose a fuel bay
• There must be at least one intermediate rib between the rib that encloses the fuel bay and the rib on
which the GMU 11 is installed
• The GMU 11 mounting bracket must be electrically bonded to the wing using fasteners or rivets
4.6.1.3.2 Overbraid Fabrication and Installation

The length of overbraid required is approximately equal to the length of the GMU 11 service loop
(measured from the wing rib to the collar of connector P111) plus 4 inches.
Refer to Figure 4-31 and Figure 4-32 while completing the following overbraid installation procedure:
NOTE
It is recommended that this procedure is completed prior to terminating wires to connector
P111. If this procedure is completed before assembly of P111, proceed to step 3.
1. Disconnect P111 from the GMU 11.

2. De-pin wires from P111 to facilitate placing overbraid over wire bundle.
3. Slide the overbraid over wire bundle extending from wing rib.
4. Terminate the end nearest the metal wing rib with the overbraid in accordance with one of the two
methods in Section 4.6.1.3.3 using a #8 terminal lug.
5. Secure the overbraid pigtail to the shield block when assembling P111 (refer to Section 4.5).
6. Terminate the end nearest the GMU 11 with the overbraid in accordance with one of the two
methods in Section 4.6.1.3.3 using a #10 terminal lug.
7. Secure the overbraid pigtail to a #10 terminal stud. Refer to Section 4.6.1.3.4 for stud location
instructions.

Rev. 13 Page 4-45
4.6.1.3.3 Overbraid Termination Methods
Overbraid must be terminated with an appropriate lug by one of the two following approved methods.
Whichever method is used, overbraid pigtail length must not exceed 6 inches. Refer to Figure 4-32.
Method A
1. Carefully separate overbraid wire strands by hand to create an opening in the overbraid for passage
of the GMU 11 connector and cables.
CAUTION
Do not cut an opening in the overbraid strands. Loose overbraid wire ends can chafe the
cable and cause the GMU 11 to malfunction.
2. Trim the overbraid pigtail to a maximum length of 2 inches.

3. Terminate the braid pigtail in an appropriate terminal lug.
Method B
1. Comb out a maximum of 2 inches of overbraid pigtail.
2. Twist the pigtail and terminate it in an appropriate terminal lug.
4.6.1.3.4 Overbraid Terminal Bonding

Electrical bond preparation for all aluminum-to-aluminum interfaces must be done in accordance with
SAE ARP1870A Section 5.1 and re-finished in accordance with Section 5.5. The overbraid terminal lug
must be electrically bonded to a #10 stud installed in accordance with AC 43.13-1B Section 11-189, as
well as the following restrictions:
1. If possible, use an existing tooling hole to install the stud.
2. If no suitable tooling hole exists, use an existing fastener (#10 or larger).
3. If there is no suitable fastener, install a new #10 stud as follows:
a. When adding a new stud hole to the rib, the center of the hole must be located a minimum of
1 inch away from any existing, non-stiffened rib holes.
b. The new stud hole must be located such that the terminal lug face, neck, or attaching hardware
will not intrude into the flange bend radius of any rib edge or stiffened rib hole. Refer to
SAE AS25036 for terminal lug dimensions.
4. Verify overbraid terminal bonding by checking resistance between the overbraid and the rib with
the GMU 11 connector disconnected. Resistance should be less than 2.5 mΩ.
Figure 4-31 GMU 11 Overbraid Installation

Rev. 13 Page 4-46
!(; 6:9;
!(; 7;
!(; 6;
!2$ & ;
6;
NOTES
[1] Install #10 grounding hardware in accordance with AC 43.13-1B Section 11-189. If there is an
existing hole located in an appropriate area it may be utilized for the grounding hardware. If there
is no existing hole usable for this purpose, then drill and de-burr a 0.196-0.206 inch hole.
[2] MS25036-103 terminal lug (or equivalent).
[3] Terminal lug face or connecting hardware must not interfere with bend radius of rib edge or
stiffened holes. Stud hole must be located a minimum of 1 inch from unstiffened holes. Refer to
SAE AS25036 for lug dimensions.
[4] The exposed cable not having overbraid in the wingtip areas must be 6 inches or less.
Figure 4-32 GMU 11 Overbraid Termination

Rev. 13 Page 4-47
4.6.1.4 GMU 44B Installation
When installing the GMU 44B, ensure the bend radius of the pig tail harness must be at least 1.5 inches.
Additionally, there must be at least 3 inches of space above the GMU 44B for removal.
Table 4-8 GMU 44B Weight and Size

Item
lb. (kg) Height Diameter Flange
GMU 44B unit only (P/N 011-04201-00) 0.30 (0.14)
1.49 (37.8) Ø2.27 (57.6) Ø3.30 (83.8)
GMU 44B w/install rack and connector 0.39 (0.18)
Figure 4-33 GMU 44B Dimensions

(shown with rack)
The GMU 44B Universal Mount offers flexibility in installation. Combined with the GMU 44B Install
Rack, it allows for convenient heading and level alignments.
A custom bracket can be fabricated in lieu of using the GMU 44B Universal Mount. The bracket must be
fabricated in accordance with the requirements applicable to the replacement equipment shelf detailed in
Figure 4-35 and be a minimum of 0.032 inches thick. The GMU 44B install rack must be installed
regardless of whether the GMU 44B Universal Mount or custom bracket is used.

Rev. 13 Page 4-48

5()(;,67,1*$,5&5$)76758&785(
,17+,&.0,1,080

'5,//

7<33/&6
'5,//
7<33/&6

5()
%5$&.(70$*1(720(7(581,9(56$/723
3$572),7(0
'5,// 5()
7<33/&6 %5$&.(70$*1(720(7(581,9(56$/
3$572),7(0
06 6&5(:0$&+,1(3$1+($'&52665(&(66('&25526,215(6,67$1767((/81&$/21*
06 6&5(:0$&+,1(3$1+($'&52665(&(66('%5$6681&$,1/21*
06/ 1876(/)/2&.,1*3/$7(7:2/8*5('8&('5,9(763$&,1*/2:+(,*+767((/81-&%
06$' 5,9(762/,'&2817(5681.'(*35(&,66,21+($',12',1/21*
06$' 5,9(762/,'&2817(5681.'(*35(&,6,21+($',12',1/21*
,167$//5$&.*08%
*0881,9(56$/02817$66(0%/<>.,7@
*08%0$*1(720(7(5
47< ,7(0 3$57180%(5 '(6&5,37,21
EKd^
Ϯ &^dEZ,K>^Z>KddKDd,'Dhϰϰ/E^d>>Z</dDϯ͘
ϯ &^dEZ,K>^Z>KddKDd,'DhϰϰhE/sZ^>DKhEd^^D>z/dDϮ͘
ϰ &^dEZ,K>^Z>KddKDd,EhdW>d/dDϲ͘
ϱ Z/sd^Z/E^d>>WZD/>ͲZͲϰϳϭϵϲ;E^DϰϳϭϵϲͿZ/sd͕h<dzW͕WZWZd/KE&KZE/E^d>>d/KE͕KZWZD/>Ͳ^dͲϰϬϯWZWZd/KE&KZ
E/E^d>>d/KEK&Z/sdÊ^Zt^͕ZK<dD/^^/>͕E/Z&ZD^dZhdhZ^͘
ϲ Z^^͘ϭϯϴϬͲϯϮhEͲϮ^Zt^;t/d,Ez>KE>K</E'Wd,ͿZWZdK&ϬϭϭͲϬϰϮϬϱͲϬϬ'DhϰϰKEEdKZ</d͘dKZYh͘ϭϯϴϬͲϯϮhEͲϮZ^^
^Zt^ϳ͘Ϭ Ϭ͘ϱ>&Ͳ/E͘/E^d>>t/d,^dDϱϯϲϯD/hD^dZE'd,d,Z>K<Z/&h^/E'^Zt^t/d,KhdEz>KE>K</E'Wd,͘
ϳ dKZYh͘ϭϯϴϬͲϯϮhEͲϮ^d>^Zt^ϭϭ͘Ϭ ϭ͘Ϭ>&Ͳ/E͘
Figure 4-34 GMU 44B Installation (Universal Mount Example)

Rev. 13 Page 4-49

'5,//

7<33/&6

'5,//
7<33/&6

5()(;,67,1*$,5&5$)76758&785(
,17+,&.0,1,080
)/$1*(0,1

$;
'5,// 0
7<33/&6

%5$&.(7*08
06 6&5(:0$&+,1(3$1+($'&52665(&(66('&25526,215(6,67$1767((/81&$/21*
06 6&5(:0$&+,1(3$1+($'&52665(&(66('%5$6681&$,1/21*
06/ 1876(/)/2&.,1*3/$7(7:2/8*5('8&('5,9(763$&,1*/2:+(,*+767((/81-&%
06$' 5,9(762/,'&2817(5681.'(*35(&,66,21+($',12',1/21*
06$' 5,9(762/,'&2817(5681.'(*35(&,6,21+($',12',1/21*
,167$//5$&.*08%
*08%0$*1(720(7(5
47< ,7(0 3$57180%(5 '(6&5,37,21
EKd^
ϭ /DE^/KE^Z/E/E,^hE>^^Kd,Zt/^^W/&/͘Dy/DhD/^dE&ZKDDKhEd/E'&dKEdZK&'DhϰϰhE/d/^ϱ͘Ϭ/E,^͘
Ϯ &^dEZ,K>^Z>KddKDd,'Dhϰϰ/E^d>>Z</dDϮ͘
ϯ &^dEZ,K>^Z>KddKDd,'DhϰϰZ<d/dDϴ͘
ϰ &^dEZ,K>^Z>KddKDd,EhdW>d/dDϱ͘
ϱ Z/sd^Z/E^d>>WZD/>ͲZͲϰϳϭϵϲ;E^DϰϳϭϵϲͿZ/sd͕h<dzW͕WZWZd/KE&KZE/E^d>>d/KE͕KZWZD/>Ͳ^dͲϰϬϯWZWZd/KE&KZ
E/E^d>>d/KEK&Z/sdÊ^Zt^͕ZK<dD/^^/>͕E/Z&ZD^dZhdhZ^͘
ϲ Z^^͘ϭϯϴϬͲϯϮhEͲϮ^Zt^;t/d,Ez>KE>K</E'Wd,ͿZWZdK&ϬϭϭͲϬϰϮϬϱͲϬϬ'DhϰϰKEEdKZ</d͘dKZYh͘ϭϯϴϬͲϯϮhEͲϮZ^^
^Zt^ϳ͘Ϭ Ϭ͘ϱ>&Ͳ/E͘/E^d>>t/d,^dDϱϯϲϯD/hD^dZE'd,d,Z>K<Z/&h^/E'^Zt^t/d,KhdEz>KE>K</E'Wd,͘
ϳ dKZYh͘ϭϯϴϬͲϯϮhEͲϮ^d>^Zt^ϭϭ͘Ϭ ϭ͘Ϭ>&Ͳ/E͘
Figure 4-35 GMU 44B Installation (Fabricated Bracket Example)

Rev. 13 Page 4-50
GMU 44B installations in a non-conductive (i.e., composite) airframe must maintain a minimum of
0.5 inches of clearance from any conductive structure or component. If the conductive structure in
composite airplanes is the only option for the GMU 44 installation, it must be electrically isolated. This
can be accomplished using the clickbond fixtures.
Refer to the aircraft model-specific maintenance manual, structural repair manual, or standard practices
manual for the selection of materials and processing.
The GMU 44B can be mounted using composite base aluminum threaded studs bonded to the aircraft
structure. CB4000 or CB4017 bonded composite base studs manufactured by Click Bond, Inc. (2151
Lockheed Way, Carson City, NV 89706-0713) are examples of parts that can be used to install the GMU 44
bracket in airplanes with composite airframes. Bond gap must be 0.020 inches minimum.
NOTE
Ensure enough epoxy material is used to assure a minimum puck thickness of 0.02 inches.
In some installations, it is desirable to mount the GMU 44B Magnetometer in the wingtip of a metal
aircraft that has non-metallic (e.g., fiberglass) wingtip covers. If this is the case, the following
requirements must be met:
• The aircraft must have wingtip navigation lights installed
• Heavy overbraid must be installed over the wiring from the GMU 44B to where the wiring exits
the wingtip
• The overbraid must be terminated at this wingtip exit point using a #10 terminal lug and stud
• The resistance between the overbraid and that structure must be 2.5 mΩ or less
• The GMU 44B must be mounted to a metal rib that does not enclose a fuel bay
• There must be at least one intermediate rib between the rib that encloses the fuel bay and the rib on
which the GMU 44B is installed
• The GMU 44B mounting bracket must be electrically bonded to the wing using fasteners or rivets

Rev. 13 Page 4-51

72$,5&5$)7
0(7$//,&
6758&785(

0$;

'(7$,/$
*0829(5%5$,'
),5677,('2:1675$3,167$//$7,21
$
'(7$,/$
*0829(5%5$,'
6(&21'$1'7+,5'7,('2:1675$3

,167$//$7,21
06 6&5(:0$&+,1(3$1+($'&52665(&(66('81)$,1&+/21*
06 :$6+(5/2&.635,1*+(/,&$/5(*8/$56(5,(6
06 675$37,('2:1$'-867$%/(6(/)&/,1&+,1*,1:,'(
06 7(50,1$//8*&5,0367</(&233(581,168/$7('5,1*721*8(12:,5(,1678'
44%57 %5$,':,5(&233(57,1&2$7('78%8/$5,1

44%)7 %5$,':,5(&233(57,1&2$7(')/$7,1:,'(
47< ,7(0 3$57180%(5 '(6&5,37,21
EKd^
Ϯ KsZZ//^Wh^,KtEhEd/>/ddKh,^d,dKW^hZ&K&d,'Dhϰϰ͕d,E^WZKhdEWh^,KtE
&hZd,ZhEd/>d,Z/ÊKh',>E'd,dK<hWϭ͘ϱ/E,^͘&/Z^dd/KtE^dZWtZW^d,KsZZ/>K^dK'Dh
&KZd,KsZZ//^Kh><KE/d^>&Ed,&/Z^dd/KtE^dZW͘ZD/E/E'd/KtE^dZW^tZWd,
KsZZ/&dZ/^,ÊKh><KE/d^>&͘
ϯ KDKhdd,KsZZ//EdK&>dEKDWZ^^/EdK^D>>/DdZhE>͕KZdt/^d/EdK^D>>/DdZ
hE>dK&/d/E^/d,dZD/E>>h'͘
ϰ ^WZd'ZKhW^K&t/Z^dZE^/Ed,KsZZ/dK&KZDt/Zy/d,K>͘KEKdhdd,KsZZ/͘
Figure 4-36 GMU 44 Series Connector Wire Overbraid Installation

Rev. 13 Page 4-52
4.6.2 GTP 59
An effective location for the GTP 59 OAT Probe is on or near an access panel on the bottom of the wing, or
in areas where it would mostly be shaded in straight and level flight.
For composite aircraft, the probe must be mounted on an access panel or inspection cover. A typical
installation example is shown in Figure 4-39. If the access panel or inspection cover is conductive, a non-
conductive doubler must be used and a minimum 0.5 inches of clearance maintained between the GTP 59
probe/terminal lug and any conductive element of aircraft structure. A typical installation example is
shown in Figure 4-40.
For metal and tube-and-fabric aircraft, electrical bond between GTP 59 and nearby aircraft metallic
structure must achieve a direct current (DC) resistance less than or equal to 2.5 mΩ with the connector
disconnected. It may be necessary to use a bonding strap to electrically bond the probe. Bonding strap
must:
1. Have the cross-sectional area greater than 0.016 square inches (approx 20,800 circular mils).
QQB575R30T437 7/16” tubular braid (24,120 circular mils) or QQB575F36T781 3/4” flat braid
(20,800 circular mils) meet this requirement.
2. Be as short as possible, not to exceed 6 inches. When installed, the strap must not loop back on
itself.
3. Use MS20659-130 lug and #10 stud (or larger) attached to local aircraft metallic structure with
minimum thickness of 0.032 inches.
4. Use a 5/16 stud size terminal lug connected directly to GTP 59 probe.
LQ PP
LQ PP 81()$
LQ PP LQ PP LQ PP
LQ PP
Figure 4-37 GTP 59 OAT Probe Dimensions
For metal and tube-and-fabric aircraft, if the GTP 59 is installed in an access panel in Lightning Zone 2A
(refer to Appendix G), the access panel must be at least 0.032-inch thick aluminum or, if the access panel
is less than 0.032-inch thick aluminum, a doubler that is at least 0.032-inch thick aluminum (per
Figure 4-38) must be installed.
For aircraft with metallic airframes, a doubler is required when the GTP 59 probe is installed in the skin.
The doubler must be a minimum of 2 inches and at least one gauge thicker than the skin with a minimum
doubler thickness of 0.032 inches. The doubler material and installation must be provisioned by the aircraft
structural repair manual or standard practices manual, or alternatively:
1. Use the same material as the aircraft skin. If the material used in the construction of the aircraft
skin is not known, 2024-T3 aluminum per AMS-QQ-A-250/5 can be used.
2. If corrosion protection methods are not specified by the model-specific aircraft standard practices
manual, the doubler material must be chemical conversion coated per MIL-DTL-5541 Type II or
MIL-DTL-81706 Type II and primed with a high-solids chemical and solvent resistant epoxy
primer per MIL-PRF-23377, Class N.

Rev. 13 Page 4-53
The GTP 59 probe must not be mounted in a fuel tank area (wet or dry). An air scoop or a ducted inlet are
an adequate location for the GTP 59 probe. The probe must be located no closer to the inlet edge than the
width of its narrowest opening.
The probe has no icing protection. Temperature measurements may be incorrect if ice accumulates on the
probe, which in turn may affect computations of true airspeed, delta-ISA, Engine Percent Power, or other
data that depend on the measurement of air temperature.
It is recommended the GTP 59 probe is installed in Lightning Zone 3, although Zone 2A may be an
acceptable location for certain aircraft.
'28%/(5*732$7352%(
06$' 5,9(762/,'81,9(56$/+($'
*732$7352%(
:$6+(5/2&.6(/)6($/,1*,1
187+(;$*21$/6.,5781()%
47< ,7(0 3$57180%(5 '(6&5,37,21

0,1

5()$,5&5$)7 7<33/&6(9(1/<63$&('
6.,10(7$//,&
57<3

EKd^
Ϯ Ehd/dDϭ͕t^,Z/dDϮ͕EWZK/dDϯZWZdK&'dWϱϵKdWZK^^D>z;</dͿ͕'ZD/EWͬEϬϭϭͲϬϬϵϳϴͲϬϬ͘
ϯ D/E/DhDKh>Z^/^,KtE͘/Zh>Z^,WKWd/KE>͘Kh>Zd,/<E^^/^KE'h'd,/<Zd,E/ZZ&d^</E͘
ϰ ^WKd&dKZDKsKd/E'^ZYh/ZdKD/Ed/E>dZ/>KE͘
ϱ Z/sd^Z/E^d>>WZD/>ͲZͲϰϳϭϵϲ;E^DϰϳϭϵϲͿZ/sd͕h<dzW͕WZWZd/KE&KZE/E^d>>d/KE͕KZWZD/>Ͳ^dͲϰϬϯ
WZWZd/KE&KZE/E^d>>d/KEK&Z/sdÊ^Zt^͕ZK<dD/^^/>͕E/Z&ZD^dZhdhZ^͘
ϲ dKZYh͘ϯϭϮϱͲϯϮhE&ͲϮEhdϭϬϬ͘Ϭ ϮϬ͘Ϭ>&Ͳ/E͘
Figure 4-38 GTP 59 Installation in Metallic Aircraft

Rev. 13 Page 4-54
For composite aircraft, the GTP 59 probe must be installed in Lightning Zone 3 and installed such that it is
electrically isolated. For aircraft model-specific information regarding acceptable lightning zones for the
GTP 59, refer to Table D-1. Refer to Appendix G for lightning zone details. Regardless of its location, the
probe must protrude into the air flow when the aircraft is in flight and be kept away from direct sources of
heat (e.g., engine exhaust, direct sunlight, cabin exhaust, etc.) to provide an accurate air temperature
measurement.
*732$7352%(
:$6+(5/2&.6(/)6($/,1*,1
187+(;$*21$/6.,5781()%
47< ,7(0 3$57180%(5 '(6&5,37,21

5()$&&(663$1(/
121&21'8&7,9( '5,//

EKd^
ϯ dKZYh͘ϯϭϮϱͲϯϮhE&ͲϮEhdϭϬϬ͘Ϭ ϮϬ͘Ϭ>&Ͳ/E͘
Figure 4-39 GTP 59 Installation in Composite Aircraft (Non-Conductive Access Panel)

Rev. 13 Page 4-55
'28%/(5*732$7352%(3+(12/,&:,7+&27721),%5(0,/,6
*732$7352%(
:$6+(5/2&.6(/)6($/,1*,1
187+(;$*21$/6.,5781()%
47< ,7(0 3$57180%(5 '(6&5,37,21

5()$&&(663$1(/
&21'8&7,9(

EKd^
ϯ D/E/DhDKh>Z^/^,KtE͘/Zh>Z^,WKWd/KE>͘Kh>Zd,/<E^^/^Ϭ͘ϬϲϬ/E,D/E/DhD͘
ϰ Kh>Z/^>Kd^h,d,dd,WZK,K>/ÊdZKEd,,K>/E^^WE>͘
ϱ KEKh>ZdK^^WE>h^/E'WZK^ÊDdZ/>^^^W/&//E/ZZ&dD/EdEEDEh>EͬKZ
^dZhdhZ>ZW/ZDEh>&KZEKEͲ^dZhZdhZ>WW>/d/KE^͘
ϲ dKZYh͘ϯϭϮϱͲϯϮhE&ͲϮEhdϭϬϬ͘Ϭ ϮϬ͘Ϭ>&Ͳ/E͘
Figure 4-40 GTP 59 Installation in Composite Aircraft (Conductive Access Panel)

Rev. 13 Page 4-56
4.6.3 Backup GPS Antenna
The backup GPS antenna is designed for installation on top of an existing instrument panel glareshield.
The selected location must offer good visibility of the sky through the windshield.
Installation of the backup GPS antenna is optional. When installed, the antenna cannot obstruct or limit the
pilot’s vision (even though the antenna has a low profile). The optimal antenna position is horizontal or as
close to horizontal as practical given the shape of the glareshield.
Fastener holes for non-removable antenna installation, as depicted in Figure 4-42, must not penetrate
through the ventilation or defrost channels built into the glareshield, if present. If the glareshield is part of
the instrument panel structure, fastener holes may only be drilled if allowed by the aircraft maintenance
manual or structural repair manual.
Table 4-9 Backup GPS Antenna Weight and Size

Item
Backup GPS Antenna 0.20 (0.092) 0.60 (15.2) 2.88 (73.2) 2.22 (56.4)
; LQ PP
LQ PP
LQ PP
LQ PP
LQ PP
LQ PP
LQ PP
LQ PP
Figure 4-41 Backup GPS Antenna Dimensions

Rev. 13 Page 4-57

5()*/$5(6+,(/'
,167580(173$1(/
(;,67,1*
'5,//
7<33/&6

'5,//

7<33/&6

'5,//
7<33/&6
06 6&5(:0$&+,1(3$1+($'&52665(&(66('&$'3/$7('81&$,1/21*

06 6&5(:0$&+,1(3$1+($'&52665(&(66('%/$&.2;,'(),1,6+81&$,1/21*
06/ 1876(/)/2&.,1*3/$7(7:2/8*5('8&('5,9(763$&,1*/2:+(,*+767((/81-&%
06$' 5,9(762/,'&2817(5681.'(*35(&,6,21+($',12',1/21*
3/$7('(7$,/ 6+((77$/,1&+7+,&.3(5$06$06$0644$
%$&.83*36$17(11$
47< ,7(0 3$57180%(5 '(6&5,37,21
EKd^
Ϯ &^dEZ,K>^Z>KddKDd,<hW'WÊdEE/dDϭ͘
ϯ &^dEZ,K>^Z>KddKDd,EhdW>d/dDϰ͘
ϰ Z/sd^Z/E^d>>WZD/>ͲZͲϰϳϭϵϲ;E^DϰϳϭϵϲͿZ/sd͕h<dzW͕WZWZd/KE&KZE/E^d>>d/KE͕KZWZD/>Ͳ^dͲϰϬϯ
WZWZd/KE&KZE/E^d>>d/KEK&Z/sdÊ^Zt^͕ZK<dD/^^/>͕E/Z&ZD^dZhdhZ^͘
ϱ h^&^dEZt/d,><Ky/&/E/^,/&EdEE>Kd/KE/^^h,d,d&^dEZ^Zs/^/>dKd,W/>KdKZKW/>Kd
ED/',dKD^KhZK&/Ed>'>Z͘dKZYh͘ϭϯϴϬͲϯϮhEͲϮ^Zt^,Ed/',d͘
Figure 4-42 Backup GPS Antenna Installation (Non-Removable Installation Example)

Rev. 13 Page 4-58
2.0
REF. GLARE SHIELD,

INSTRUMENT PANEL
EXISTING 1
1
2 2
2 1
3 2
1
3 FASTENER TAPE, SYNTHETIC, ADHESIVE BACKED, A-A-55126 CLASS 1/2, TYPE 1, LOOP 1.0 INCH WIDE
1 A-A-55126 3
2 FASTENER TAPE, SYNTHETIC, ADHESIVE BACKED, A-A-55126 CLASS 1/2, TYPE 1, HOOK 1.0 INCH WIDE
1 1 011-04036-0 BACKUP GPS ANTENNA
QTY ITEM PART NUMBER DESCRIPTION
NOTES
1. DIMENSIONS ARE IN INCHES UNLESS OTHERWISE SPECIFIED.
2 PEEL OFF ADHESIVE PROTECTING FILM AND PRESS THE FASTENER TAPE IN TO BOND. SURFACES MUST BE CLEAN AND FREE
FROM OIL OR OTHER CONTAMINANTS. LOOP FASTENER IS BONDED TO GLARE SHIELD AND HOOK FASTENER IS BONDED TO
ANTENNA. TAPE FASTENER MUST BE 2.0 INCHES OR LONGER.
3 GPS ANTENNA KIT, GARMIN PART NO. 010-12444-00 INCLUDES DUAL LOCK FASTENER, GARMIN PART NO. 252-00433-00
WHICH CAN BE USED INSTEAD OF A-A-55126 FASTENER TAPE.
Figure 4-43 Backup GPS Antenna Installation (Removable Installation Example)

Rev. 13 Page 4-59
4.7 Engine Indicating System
The aircraft must retain all engine indications for engine and aircraft operations within the limits defined in
the Pilot’s Operating Handbook or other approved manual.
Only the GI 275 EIS sensors specified in this section are approved for installation as part of the GI 275
STC. Installation of other sensors requires separate airworthiness approval from the cognizant authority.
The following sections contain information applicable to EIS sensor installation:
• List of compatible sensor interfaces – Appendix Section C.19
• Selection of aircraft specific sensors – Appendix Section C.19
• Sensor configuration – Section 5.7.2 and Appendix Section C.19
• Interconnect diagrams of sensor connections to the GEA 24/110 – Appendix B
NOTE
This STC does not approve any modifications to the engine firewall.
In addition to the data in this manual, the installation of each probe/sensor and wire must be accomplished
in accordance with the sensor manufacturer’s instructions or as recommended by the engine manufacturer.
Wire routing and clamping must follow procedures defined in the aircraft maintenance manual or standard
practices manual. Practices defined in Chapter 11, Electrical Systems, of AC 43.13-1B Aircraft Inspection
and Repair are acceptable.
Sensors must be connected using hoses and fittings approved as part of the aircraft or engine type
certificated design or standard aircraft parts (AN/MS).
Sensors must not be mounted directly to the engine or engine baffle unless otherwise instructed in this
manual.
CAUTION
Check hose routing for sharp bends. Check sensors and fittings for leaks during engine
run-up; correct any leaks prior to flight.
4.7.1 GEA 24
The GEA 24 must be installed in the fuselage cabin environment where it is protected from accidental
damage by occupants and rapid thermal change. It can be mounted directly or indirectly (i.e., via a support
structure) on the aircraft structure. It can be mounted in any orientation, but vertical with the connectors
pointing down is preferred. The unit should be mounted so that the connectors and status LED is viewable
and where it can be inspected and serviced.
CAUTION
The GEA 24 cannot be mounted in the engine compartment or where it could be exposed
to moisture or fluids.
If provisioned by the aircraft structural repair manual or standard practices manual, the GEA 24 can be
mounted on the engine firewall (opposite surface of the powerplant), fuselage frames, or stringers. The
GEA 24 wiring must be routed through existing pass-through holes in the firewall or use existing bulkhead
connectors; otherwise, separate airworthiness approval is required for added holes in the engine firewall.
The GEA 24 must not be placed directly below fluid lines (e.g., fuel lines, oil or hydraulic lines). It also
must be installed as far away as practical from heat sources.

Rev. 13 Page 4-60
If installing the GEA 24 on the avionics shelf or the instrument panel, ensure the new fastener holes
maintain a minimum of 2D edge distance and 3D spacing from existing holes. Additionally, ensure the
combined weight of the GEA 24 and existing equipment remain within the established weight limit of the
shelf or instrument panel.
If an avionics shelf or suitable platform for the GEA 24 is not available, a support structure can be
fabricated. The support structure must:
• Be electrically bonded to the airframe per Section 4.3
• Be made from 2024-T3 aluminum per AMS-QQ-A-250/5, minimum 0.040 inches thick
• Be protected from corrosion by applying conversion coating per MIL-DTL-5541 Type II or
MIL-DTL-81706 Type II and primed with epoxy primer per MIL-PRF-23377, Class N
• Be fabricated in accordance with methods outlined in AC 43.13-2B chapters 1 and 2 and
AC 43.13-1B chapter 4
• Allow a minimum clearance of 3.0 inches between the connector end of the GEA 24 and any
structures for proper wire harness routing
• Maintain a maximum load capacity of 3.0 lbs
An example of the support bracket for a GEA 24 is shown in Figure 4-44.
Figure 4-44 Example Support Structure
Table 4-10 GEA 24 Weight and Size

Item
GEA 24 unit 0.71 (0.322) 3.0 (76.2)
1.9 (48.3) 6.5 (165.1)
GEA 24 with connector 1.6 (0.725) 5.0 (127.0)

Rev. 13 Page 4-61
2X 0.20 5.1 2X 6.40 162.6
NOTE:
1. DIMENSION: INCHES[mm]. METRIC VALUES ARE
FOR REFERENCE ONLY.
2. DIMENSIONS ARE NOMINAL AND TOLERANCES
ARE NOT IMPLIED UNLESS SPECIFICALLY STATED
2.00 50.8
2X 0.42 10.7
4.98 126.6
2.94 74.7
3.4 86 0.2 4
CENTER OF GRAVITY CENTER OF GRAVITY
2.00 50.8
1.1 27
CENTER OF
GRAVITY
6.80 172.7 0.04 1

TYPICAL THICKNESS
BENEATH FASTENER HEAD
Figure 4-45 GEA 24 Dimensions

Rev. 13 Page 4-62
1 1 011-02848-01 GEA 24 REMOTE MOUNTED ENGINE INTERFACE UNIT
MS35207-XX SCREW, MACHINE, PAN HEAD, CROSS-RECESSED,
2 4
[1] [2] CARBON STEEL, CADMIUM PLATED, #10-32 UNF-2A
3 8 NAS1149F0363P WASHER
NUT SELF-LOCKING, HEXAGON REGULAR HEIGHT,
4 4 MS21044N3 [3]
250°F, CADMIUM PLATED, STEEL, #10-32
Notes:
[1] Screws can be substituted by any other equivalent aerospace steel screws.
[2] Torque 0.190-32 UNF-2A screws 13.5 ± 1.0 in-lbf.
[3] Nut can be substituted by any suitable aerospace steel self-locking nuts or nutplates.
Figure 4-46 GEA 24 Mounting Hardware

Rev. 13 Page 4-63
4.7.2 GEA 110
The GEA 110 is mounted directly to the airframe in the aircraft fuselage or the engine compartment with or
without an optional installation tray. If the aircraft does not have any suitable platform for the GEA 110,
the shelf or support structure shown in Figure 4-44 can be used to mount the GEA 110.
Installing the GEA 110 in the fuselage or engine compartment offers the convenience of reduced wire
length when connecting engine sensors. The GEA 110 can be mounted at any orientation, but a vertical
orientation with connectors pointing down is preferred in locations exposed to moisture or fluids. Sealed
connector kit (P/N 011-03527-51) must be used if the GEA 110 can come into contact with fluids or when
mounted in the engine compartment.
The GEA 110 must not be placed directly below fluid lines (e.g., fuel, oil, hydraulic). If it is mounted close
to the aircraft powerplant, the GEA 110 must not block or alter the flow of air required for engine cooling.
It must be installed as far away as practical from heat sources.
If provisioned by the aircraft structural repair manual or standard practices manual, the GEA 110 can be
mounted on the engine firewall or on a bulkhead that is supporting the powerplant installation. The
GEA 110 wiring must be routed through existing pass-through holes in the firewall or use existing
bulkhead connectors. Separate airworthiness approval is required for added holes in engine firewall.
GEA 110 electrical connector screws must be torqued to 5 ± 0.5 in-lbf.
Table 4-11 GEA 110 Weight and Size
Item
GEA 110 unit 1.21 (0.55) 1.63 (41.4)
7.75 (196.8) [1] 4.81 (122.2) [1]
GEA 110 with tray and connector 2.11 (0.96) 2.13 (54.1)
Notes:
[1] Includes tray.
LQ PP LQ PP ; LQ PP
LQ PP
LQ PP
LQ PP
LQ PP LQ PP

LQ PP
LQ PP
LQ PP
Figure 4-47 GEA 110 Dimensions

Rev. 13 Page 4-64
5()
*($
'5,//
7<33/&6
'5,//

7<33/&6

06 6&5(:0$&+,1(3$1+($'&52665(&(66('&$'3/$7('81&$,1/21*
06 6&5(:0$&+,1(3$1+($'&52665(&(66('&$'3/$7('81&$,1/21*
06/ 1876(/)/2&.,1*3/$7(7:2/8*5('8&('5,9(763$&,1*/2:+(,*+767((/81-&%
06$' 5,9(762/,'&2817(5681.'(*35(&,6,21+($',12',1/21*
47< ,7(0 3$57180%(5 '(6&5,37,21
EKd^
Ϯ &^dEZ,K>^Z>KddKDd,'ϭϭϬ͘
ϯ &^dEZ,K>^Z>KddKDd,EhdW>d/dDϮ͘
ϰ Z/sd^Z/E^d>>WZD/>ͲZͲϰϳϭϵϲ;E^DϰϳϭϵϲͿZ/sd͕h<dzW͕WZWZd/KE&KZE/E^d>>d/KE͕KZWZ
D/>Ͳ^dͲϰϬϯWZWZd/KE&KZE/E^d>>d/KEK&Z/sdÊ^Zt^͕ZK< ͕ dD/^^/>͕E/Z&ZD^dZhdhZ^͘
ϱ dKZYh͘ϭϯϴϬͲϯϮhEͲϮ^Zt^ϴ͘Ϭ ϭ͘Ϭ>&Ͳ/E͘
Figure 4-48 GEA 110 Installation (Mounted Directly to Airframe Example)

Rev. 13 Page 4-65
'5,//
7<33/&6
5()
,167$//75$<*($

5()
*($

'5,//
7<33/&6

06 6&5(:0$&+,1(3$1+($'6758&785$/&52665(&(66('81&$,1
06/ 1876(/)/2&.,1*3/$7(7:2/8*5('8&('5,9(763$&,1*/2:+(,*+767((/81-&%
06$' 5,9(762/,'&2817(5681.'(*35(&,6,21+($',12',1/21*
47< ,7(0 3$57180%(5 '(6&5,37,21
EKd^
Ϯ &^dEZ,K>^Z>KddKDd,'ϭϭϬ/E^d>>dZz͘
ϯ &^dEZ,K>^Z>KddKDd,EhdW>d/dDϮ͘
ϰ Z/sd^Z/E^d>>WZD/>ͲZͲϰϳϭϵϲ;E^DϰϳϭϵϲͿZ/sd͕h<dzW͕WZWZd/KE&KZE/E^d>>d/KE͕KZWZ
D/>Ͳ^dͲϰϬϯWZWZd/KE&KZE/E^d>>d/KEK&Z/sdÊ^Zt^͕ZK<d ͕ D/^^/>͕E/Z&ZD^dZhdhZ^͘
ϱ dKZYh͘ϭϲϰϬͲϯϮhEͲϮ^Zt^ϭϯ͘ϱ ϭ͘ϱ>&Ͳ/E͘
Figure 4-49 GEA 110 Installation (Mounted on a Tray Example)

Rev. 13 Page 4-66
4.7.3 Carburetor Air Temperature
The sensor location will vary for different carburetors. This STC provides the basis for airworthiness
approval only for the temperature sensor installed in the existing port with 0.2500-28UNF-2A thread.
Refer to the engine or carburetor manufacturer data for temperature sensor location, if required.
1
4 2
1
2 1
1
3 3
1
4
1
5 REF. EXISTING 0.2500-28UNF-2A

THREADED PORT IN CARBURETOR WALL
1 4 CARBURETOR, EXISTING
1 3 MS35769-2 GASKET, METALLIC, ENCASED, ANNULAR, COPPER, Ø1/4 ID×Ø1/2 OD
1 2 MS20995 WIRE, SAFETY OR LOCK
1 1 T3B10-SG PROBE, CARBURETOR TEMPERATURE
NOTES
WHEN INSTALLED, FACE OF THE SENSOR THREADED BOSS IS FLUSH WITH THE INSIDE OF CARBURETOR BARREL. USE
WASHER(S) IF REQUIRED TO SPACE THE SENSOR ACCORDINGLY.
T3B10-SG TEMPERATURE SENSOR HAS 0.2500-28UNF-2A THREAD. INSTALL WITH MEDIUM STRENGTH THREADLOCKER.
EXERCISE CAUTION TO PREVENT FUEL CONTAMINATION.
SPLIT FACE OF THE GASKET FACES NON-ROTATING SURFACE.
SAFETY WIRE PROBE IN ACCORDANCE WITH SECTION 7, SAFETYING OF CHAPTER 7, AIRCRAFT HARDWARE, CONTROL
CABLES AND TURNBUCKLES OF AC43-13-1B, AIRCRAFT INSPECTION AND REPAIR.
SENSOR INSTALLATION IN EXISTING CARBURETOR PORT ONLY. ADDITION OF NEW TAPPED HOLES TO CARBURETOR
BARREL NOT ALLOWED.
Figure 4-50 Carburetor Temperature Sensor Installation Example
CAUTION
Fuel and air passages must remain free of contaminants during work near and around the
carburetor.

Rev. 13 Page 4-67
4.7.4 Oil Temperature
CAUTION
Severe engine damage may occur if the incorrect probe length or type is installed. Use the
engine manufacturer’s guidance for proper oil temperature probe length and type.
When installing the oil temperature sensor, use the engine manufacturer’s guidance for probe length and
location. The unbroken side of the crush washer must face the sensor flange. The sensor is torqued finger
tight plus one-half turn and safety wired in accordance with practices defined in Section 7, Safetying, of
Chapter 7, Aircraft Hardware, Control Cables and Turnbuckles, of AC 43.13-1B Aircraft Inspection and
Repair.
Figure 4-51 Oil Temperature Sensor Installation Example

Rev. 13 Page 4-68
4.7.5 Pressure
The manifold pressure, oil pressure, and fuel pressure sensors all have similar installation requirements and
processes.
When replacing existing sensors/instruments:
• Do not remove fittings with small orifices that are installed in existing hoses or plumbing. It may
limit fluid loss and fire damage in the event of a hose failure
• If the sensors/instruments were installed on the cold side of the firewall, reuse the lines and
fittings. This STC does not approve the routing of new fuel or oil lines into the cockpit
• Do not remove previously installed devices designed to absorb pressure shock/surge (snubber)
• Reuse manifold tubing if it has a vent hole, and install the manifold pressure sensor so that it is not
at the low point in the line
• Inspect the condition of all existing tubes, hoses, and fittings that are being reused; replace as
necessary
• Replace the fuel and oil hoses with new hoses if they are used by the sensors installed under this
STC and are located in the engine compartment
• Install oil and fuel pressure sensors in the same compartment as the sensor being replaced. This
ensures the same ambient reference pressure is used and the indication is consistent with the
previous gauge
• Verify that the supply voltage and sensor configuration are correct if a different sensor is installed
(e.g., if a brass sensor is replaced by a GPT sensor)
When installing pressure sensors:
• Install sensors in accordance with the applicable installation example. Refer to Figure 4-52 (brass),
Figure 4-53 (mil-spec), and Figure 4-54 (GPT)
• Fuel and oil hoses installed in the engine compartment must meet TSO-C53a Type C or D (fire
resistant). Only use approved aircraft fittings (e.g., AN/AS-spec or Mil-spec) and hoses
(e.g., Aeroquip 303 or Aeroquip AE 466). All hoses must be rated for the pressure and temperature
and be compatible with the fuel or oil
• Do not install sensors directly below fittings or components that may leak flammable fluid
• Thread sealant must be used for the NPT threads. To reduce the risk of system contamination, a
minimal amount of sealant should be applied, leaving at least two threads at the end of the fitting
clear of sealant
• Sensor hoses must be routed as far away from the aircraft exhaust system as practical and no closer
than 6 inches
• Line fittings, routing, alignment, bonding, and support spacing must be installed as defined in the
aircraft maintenance manual or Section 8-31 of AC 43.13-1B Aircraft Inspection and Repair
WARNING
Ensure the pressure sensor installation does not introduce thread sealant or debris into the
aircraft system.

Rev. 13 Page 4-69
10
1
8
1
6
1
1
1

9 11
1 1
4
1 7
12 1

1
5
1
78%(,12'
1$6)3 :$6+(5)/$767((/&$'3/$7(',1&+7+,&.,'2'
06 6&5(:0$&+,1(3$1+($'&52665(&(66('81)$,1&+/21*
06% 6/((9(&2035(66,2178%(),77,1*)/$5('78%(2'
06:'* &/$03/2237<3(&86+,21('78%(
06/ 1876(/)/2&.,1*5('8&('+(;$*215('8&('+(,*+75,1*%$6(81-)%
$1: &283/,1*3,3($137
$1 18778%(&283/,1*6+25778%(2'81-)%
$1 $'$37(5675$,*+73,3(7278%(1377281-)$
$1 $'$37(5(/%2:'(*3,3(7278%(1377281-)$
$1 $'$37(5(/%2:'(*3,3(7278%(1377281-)$
;; 35(6685(6(1625
47< ,7(0 3$57180%(5 '(6&5,37,21
EKd^
dKWZsEd&>h/EdZWDEd͕KZ/Edd,Ê^KZ^K/d/ÊKd^dZ/',dhW͘
WZ^^hZÊ^KZ,^ϭͬϴͲϮϳEWdW/Wd,Z͘^/d/KE>>Kd/KEE/E^d>>d/KE/E&KZDd/KE/E

d,/^^d/KE͘

/&,K^KZdh/E'/^WZs/Kh^>z/E^d>>͕h^WWZKs/ZZ&d&/dd/E'^;Ğ͘Ő͕͘Eͬ^Ͳ^WKZD/>Ͳ^WͿdK
KEEdd,Ê^KZ͘
Figure 4-52 Brass Sensor Installation

(Coupling Mount Example)

Rev. 13 Page 4-70
6
1
1
1
4
1
5
1
2
1
7
1
8
1
3
1
78%(,12'
1$6)3 :$6+(5)/$767((/&$'3/$7(',1&+7+,&.,'2'
06 6&5(:0$&+,1(3$1+($'&52665(&(66('81)$,1&+/21*
06% 6/((9(&2035(66,2178%(),77,1*)/$5('78%(2'
06:'* &/$03/2237<3(&86+,21('78%(
06/ 1876(/)/2&.,1*5('8&('+(;$*215('8&('+(,*+75,1*%$6(81-)%
$1 18778%(&283/,1*6+25778%(2'81-)%
35(6685(75$16'8&(59(17('*$*(
47< ,7(0 3$57180%(5 '(6&5,37,21
EKd^
dKWZsEd&>h/EdZWDEdKZ/Edd,Ê^KZ^K/d/ÊKd^dZ/',dhW͘
WZ^^hZÊ^KZ,^^dEZ&/dd/E';D^ϯϯϲϱϲͿt/d,ϳͬϭϲͲϮϬhE:&Ͳϯd,ZEZYh/Z^ϯϳ
'Z&>ZdhKEEd/KE͘
>DWd,Ê^KZKz;/dDϭͿdKDKhEd͘>DWEKddK>K<sEd,K>^/EÊ^KZKz͕/&WZÊd͘
/&,K^KZdh/E'/^WZs/Kh^>z/E^d>>͕h^WWZKs/ZZ&d&/dd/E'^;Ğ͘Ő͕͘Eͬ^Ͳ^WKZD/>Ͳ^WͿ
dKKEEdd,Ê^KZ͘
Figure 4-53 Mil-Spec Style Sensor Installation

(Housing Mount Example)

Rev. 13 Page 4-71
3 1
1 1
2
1
6
1
7
1
4
8 1 11
1 1
10 5
1 1
$/7(51$7,9(
9
&/$03,1*
1 237,21
1
1
1 11 MS21919WDG1 CLAMP LOOP TYPE, CUSHIONED, SUPPORT, Ø TUBE
1 10 AN818- NUT, TUBE COUPLING, SHORT, Ø0.250 TUBE OD, 81-)%
1 9 MS51533B SLEEVE, COMPRESSION, TUBE FITTING, 37Û FLARED
1 8 TUBE, Ø0.0 IN OD
AN816- ADAPTER, STRAIGHT, PIPE TO TUBE 1/8-27 NPT TO 81-)$
1 7 AN822- ELBOW, PIPE TO TUBE, 90Û-27 NPT TO 81-)$
AN823- ELBOW, PIPE TO TUBE, 45Û, 1/8-27 NPT TO 81-)$
1 6 AN910-1W COUPLING, PIPE, 1/8-27 ANPT
NUT, SELF-LOCKING, 450ÛF, REDUCED HEXAGON, REDUCED HEIGHT, RING
1 5 MS21042L3
BASE, NON-CORROSION RESISTANT STEEL, 0.190-32UNF-3B
1 4 NAS1149F0332P WASHER, FLAT, STEEL, CAD PLATED, 0.032 INCH THICK, ID 0.203, OD 0.438
SCREW, MACHINE PAN-HEAD, CROSS-RECESSED, CORROSION RES,6TING STEEL,
1 3 MS51958-;;
0.190-32UNF-2A
1 2 MS21919WDG9 CLAMP LOOP TYPE, CUSHIONED, SUPPORT, Ø9/16 TUBE
1 1 011-05783-XX PRESSURE SENSOR, GPT
EKd^
dKWZsEd&>h/EdZWDEdKZ/Edd,Ê^KZ^K/d/ÊKd^dZ/',dhW͘
WZ^^hZÊ^KZ,^ϭͬϴͲϮϳW/Wd,Z͘^/d/KE>>Kd/KEE/E^d>>d/KE/E&KZDd/KE/Ed,/^^d/KE͘
>dZEd/sDd,K͕>DWZKhEd,Ê^KZKz;/dDϭͿ͘
/&,K^KZdh/E'/^WZs/Kh^>z/E^d>>͕h^WWZKs/ZZ&d&/dd/E'^;Ğ͘Ő͕͘Eͬ^Ͳ^WKZD/>Ͳ^WͿdK
KEEdd,Ê^KZ͘
Figure 4-54 GPT Sensor Installation

(Housing Mount Example)

Rev. 13 Page 4-72
4.7.6 Fuel Flow
Refer to Figure 4-55 to determine the fuel flow transducer installation for the specific aircraft fuel system.
Fuel Pump / FF Transducer

Fuel Filter Fuel Servo /
OUT Engine
Carburetor
IN
(a) Fuel Injected or Carbureted Engine without a Fuel Return Line
FF Transducer
Fuel Pump / Fuel Flow
Fuel Filter OUT
Divider
Fuel Servo IN
Engine
Fuel Return Line
Fuel
Tank
(b) Fuel Injected Engine with a Fuel Return Line
#1 FF Transducer
Fuel Pump /
OUT
Fuel Filter
Pressure Carburetor Engine
IN
#2 FF Transducer
Fuel
OUT Fuel Return Line
Tank
IN
(c) Pressure Carburated Engine with a Fuel Return Line
Figure 4-55 Fuel Flow Installation Configurations
NOTE
The fuel flow sensor will introduce a small pressure drop. Refer to Appendix D to determine if
a fuel pressure test is required for the aircraft model.

Rev. 13 Page 4-73
The fuel flow transducer can be mounted by clamping the hoses connected to the transducer or by using a
bracket. If mounting with clamps, the unit placement must be no further than 6 inches from the clamp to
the nearest face of the transducer.
• The transducer can be installed in the following orientations:
◦ The wires pointing up
◦ The cap with five bolts pointing up
◦ The output port pointing up
◦ Any combination thereof
• The flow must follow the direction marked on the ports
• The hose connected to the IN port should be straight for a minimum of 4 inches
• The length of hose connected to the OUT port should be level or slope up. It must not slope down
more than 4 inches per foot
If mounting the transducer with a bracket, the bracket must be fabricated. The bracket can be fastened at
the top of the engine using the existing engine crankcase fasteners. The amount of available space between
the top of the engine and the engine cowling needs to be considered in the design of the bracket. The
location of the bracket and position of the fuel flow transducer must result in as few bends in the fuel lines
as possible.
The bracket must be fabricated from 300 series austenitic stainless steel (annealed per AMS 5901 or
½ hard per AMS 5517), sheet thickness 19 gauge minimum (0.044 inches), and installed as provisioned by
the aircraft structural repair manual or standard practices manual. Methods, techniques, and practices
defined in Chapter 4, Metal Structure, Welding and Brazing, of AC 43.13-1B Aircraft Inspection and
Repair are acceptable.
Hoses and fittings connected to fuel flow transducer must meet the following:
• The fuel flow transducer must be connected with new hoses and the hoses must not be subject to
movement that could loosen the fittings
• The hoses must have the same internal diameter as the hose being replaced and meet TSO-C53a
Type C or D (fire-resistant) specifications
• Fuel-compatible thread sealant must be used for the NPT threads. To reduce the risk of fuel system
contamination, a minimal amount of sealant should be applied, leaving at least two threads at the
end of the fitting clear of sealant. Before connecting any hoses, thoroughly clean and flush the
transducer and hoses to ensure they are free of any loose material
• Fitting torque must not exceed 15 ft-lbf or two full turns past finger-tight, whichever occurs first
• The transducer and fuel hoses must be routed as far away from the aircraft exhaust system as
practical. The transducer must be protected with Aeroquip AE102-( ) fire-sleeve if within
6 inches of any exhaust component
• Line fittings, routing, alignment, bonding, and support spacing must be installed as defined in the
aircraft maintenance manual or Section 8-31 of AC 43.13-1B Aircraft Inspection and Repair
WARNING
Ensure the fuel flow transducer installation does not introduce thread sealant or debris into
the fuel system.
CAUTION
Do not blow pressurized air through the flow transducer.

Rev. 13 Page 4-74

5()$1
%2/7(1*,1(%/2&.(;,67,1*

7<33/&6

5()061187(;,67,1*
5()$1&:$6+(5(;,67,1*
7<33/&6
6+,(/')8(/6(1625+$/80,180,17+,&.
%5$&.(7)8(/)/2:6(1625
1$6)3 :$6+(5)/$767((/&$'3/$7(',1&+7+,&.,'2'
06/ 1876(/)/2&.,1*5('8&('+(;$*215('8&('+(,*+75,1*%$6(81-)%
$1 $'$37(5675$,*+73,3(7278%(1377281-)$
$1 %2/70$&+,1($,5&5$)781)$,1*5,3'5,//('6+$1.
)7 )8(/)/2:75$16'8&(538/6(6*$/(/(&7521,&6,17(51$7,21$/
47< ,7(0 3$57180%(5 '(6&5,37,21
EKd^
ϭ ,K>^/E^W/E'dKDd,E'/E^K>d^͘
Ϯ ,K>^/E^W/E'dKDd,&h>&>KtdZE^hZ͘
ϯ dZE^hZ^,/>/^ZYh/ZKE>z/&&h>&>Kt/E/d/KE&/>^D/,<͘
Figure 4-56 Example Fuel Flow Transducer Installation

Rev. 13 Page 4-75
4.7.6.1 Fuel Flow EMI
NOTE
The installation of EI FT-60/90 fuel flow sensors must be checked for EMI in accordance
with the procedure defined in Section 6.7.
If the fuel flow gauge fluctuates during the EMI checkout procedure (refer to Section 6.7), an EI FT-60 or
EI FT-90 fuel flow sensor must be installed with shield bracket and wire overbraid. Refer to Figure 4-56
for the installation that illustrates how the fuel flow sensor cover plates are shielded by the bracket (7). The
overbraid must cover the unshielded portion of the sensor wiring and must be terminated such that the
overbraid is connected to the fuel flow sensor and the shielding of the wire. Refer to Figure 4-57 for
overbraid installation.
GEA 110
Total Length <6"
P2
~ +12V 1 EXCT 69 RED Orientation
FUEL FLOW 1 15 WHT EI optional
GROUND 74 BLK FT-60/90
s
Terminate
overbraid to Bracket
Figure 4-57 Fuel Flow Overbraid
4.7.7 RPM
The GI 275 system can use the electrical signal generated by the primary magneto coils or “P-Lead” to
display RPM. Both magneto P-Lead signals, left and right, must be connected to the GEA 24/110. The
connection is made at the ignition switch if the magneto does not have a ring terminal stud; otherwise, the
connection can be made at the magneto or at the ignition switch, whichever minimizes the length of wire
required to connect the GEA 24/110. The wire length between the P-Lead connection and the resistors
must not exceed 6 inches. Shielded wires must be used as shown in Appendix B.
If the P-Lead on TCM/Bendix magnetos was used, torque the P-Lead nut between 15 and 17 in-lbf. If the
P-Lead on Slick magnetos was used, torque P-Lead nut between 13 and 15 in-lbf.
This STC only provides interface approval to magnetic pickup RPM sensors. It does not provide
installation approval for magnetic pickup sensors. For TCM/Bendix magnetos, the magnetic pickup must
be installed in the vent hole furthest from the distributor cap. Refer to Figure 4-58.
Figure 4-58 TCM/Bendix Magneto Vent Hole

Rev. 13 Page 4-76
For Slick magnetos, the magnetic pickup must be installed in the vent hole furthest from the distributor
cap. Refer to Figure 4-59.
Figure 4-59 Slick Magneto Vent Hole
Following the installation of the P-Lead signal wires, verify the continuity of each magneto P-Lead to
ground while the ignition key is off. If there is evidence of discontinuity in the magneto P-Lead grounding
circuit, it must be corrected before further engine maintenance or checks. Continuity can only be measured
if the magneto points are open or the wire is disconnected from the magneto. Use a magneto timing light to
ensure the ohmmeter will not measure false continuity through the points or coil windings.
CAUTION
Do not turn the propeller and stay clear of the propeller arc when installing the P-Lead
signal wires.
WARNING
The P-Lead sensor wiring must include the resistors as shown in Appendix B. The resistors
prevent magneto shut-off in the event of a shorted RPM P-Lead wire. The resistors must be
installed as close as practical to the P-lead connection, near either the magneto or the
ignition switch.
4.7.8 CHT, EGT, TIT Probes

Garmin stocks certain probes to simplify the EIS sensor ordering process. Sensor part numbers are cross-
referenced with Alcor STC SA522SW part numbers. The GI 275 STC does not provide installation
approval for CHT, EGT, and TIT probes; however, the data in STC SA522SW is adequate for many
installations.
4.7.9 EIS OAT

The GTP 59 OAT probe can be interfaced directly to a GEA engine adapter unit as an EIS sensor in a
standalone EIS configuration. Refer to Section 4.6.2 for installation considerations for the GTP 59 OAT
sensor.

Rev. 13 Page 4-77
4.8 Weight and Balance
The aircraft weight and balance record must be updated after the GI 275 system is installed by following
the procedures typically detailed in Section 8 of the aircraft maintenance manual. Practices defined in
Chapter 10, Section 2, Weighing Procedures, of AC 43.13-1B Aircraft Inspection and Repair are
acceptable.
The aircraft Equipment List must be updated to include items that are added, removed, or relocated. The
updated list must be dated, include the name (and certificate number) of the person that updated the list,
and be retained with aircraft records. A sample calculation is shown in Table 4-12 below.
Table 4-12 Weight and Balance Calculation Example

Empty Useful
Aircraft Weight and Balance
Weight [lb] CG [in] Moment [lb-in] Load [lb]
Calculated: 11/06/2019
2306.70 138.83 320233.96 1093.30
ITEMS REMOVED Weight [lb] Arm [in] Moment [lb-in]
VSI 0.85 116.90 99.37
CDI 1.30 116.60 151.58
Clock and OAT 0.30 117.40 35.22
Sandel HSI 3.60 114.10 410.76
HSI gyro remote 4.90 181.00 886.90
Magnetometer (Old) 0.40 151.00 60.40
Attitude Indicator 2.20 114.50 251.90
Altimeter 1.10 116.10 127.71
Total removed 14.65 2023.84
ITEMS ADDED Weight [lb] Arm [in] Moment [lb-in]
GI 275 ADAHRS (Primary ADI) 2.88 115.80 333.50
GI 275 ADAHRS (HSI/Standby ADI) 2.88 113.10 325.73
GMU 44B, install rack, and universal mount 0.50 146.00 73.00
Total added 6.26 732.23

Change -8.39 -1291.61
Empty Useful
Updated Aircraft Weight and Balance Weight [lb] CG [in] Moment [lb-in] Load [lb]
Calculated: 11/06/2019
2298.31 138.73 318942.35 1084.91

Rev. 13 Page 4-78
5 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION
5.1 System Configuration Preparation....................................................................................................5-3

5.1.1 Entering Configuration Mode ....................................................................................................5-4
5.2 Software / Configuration ..................................................................................................................5-5
5.2.1 Loader Card................................................................................................................................5-5
5.2.2 Config Options ...........................................................................................................................5-6
5.3 Unit Type ..........................................................................................................................................5-7
5.3.1 Unit ID........................................................................................................................................5-7
5.3.2 System ID Source.......................................................................................................................5-8
5.3.3 Airframe Type ............................................................................................................................5-8
5.3.4 Unit Configuration .....................................................................................................................5-8
5.4 Feature Enable ................................................................................................................................5-10
5.5 Interfaces.........................................................................................................................................5-11
5.5.1 GI 275s Installed ......................................................................................................................5-12
5.5.2 Wireless....................................................................................................................................5-12
5.5.3 ADC .........................................................................................................................................5-13
5.5.4 AHRS .......................................................................................................................................5-14
5.5.5 GPS...........................................................................................................................................5-16
5.5.6 VFR GPS..................................................................................................................................5-17
5.5.7 NAV .........................................................................................................................................5-17
5.5.8 Radar Altimeter ........................................................................................................................5-18
5.5.9 Autopilot...................................................................................................................................5-18
5.5.10 AHRS Emulation......................................................................................................................5-29
5.5.11 Transponder..............................................................................................................................5-29
5.5.12 EIS ............................................................................................................................................5-30
5.5.13 Traffic.......................................................................................................................................5-31
5.5.14 GDL 69.....................................................................................................................................5-32
5.5.15 Stormscope ...............................................................................................................................5-33
5.5.16 PFD Sync..................................................................................................................................5-33
5.5.17 General Purpose Discrete In.....................................................................................................5-33
5.5.18 General Purpose Discrete Out ..................................................................................................5-33
5.5.19 General Purpose ARINC 429 (A429) Out ...............................................................................5-34
5.5.20 General Purpose RS-232 Out ...................................................................................................5-34
5.5.21 Airspeed Switches ....................................................................................................................5-34
5.6 Setup ...............................................................................................................................................5-35
5.6.1 Airframe Configuration............................................................................................................5-35
5.6.2 Lighting ....................................................................................................................................5-39
5.6.3 Page Configuration...................................................................................................................5-47
5.6.4 Sensors .....................................................................................................................................5-52
5.6.5 Audio Alert Config...................................................................................................................5-54
5.6.6 Terrain/TAWS..........................................................................................................................5-54
5.6.7 Miscellaneous...........................................................................................................................5-55
5.6.8 Battery ......................................................................................................................................5-56
5.6.9 Ownship Icon Configuration....................................................................................................5-56
5.7 EIS ..................................................................................................................................................5-57
5.7.1 Engine.......................................................................................................................................5-57
5.7.2 Sensors .....................................................................................................................................5-59

Rev. 13 Page 5-1
5.7.3 Pages.........................................................................................................................................5-63
5.7.4 Gauges......................................................................................................................................5-64
5.7.5 Fuel...........................................................................................................................................5-68
5.7.6 Diagnostics ...............................................................................................................................5-68
5.8 Calibration/Checks..........................................................................................................................5-69
5.8.1 Attitude/Heading Calibration Tests..........................................................................................5-69
5.8.2 Autopilot Calibration................................................................................................................5-70
5.8.3 Composite NAV Calibration....................................................................................................5-79
5.8.4 Backup Battery Test .................................................................................................................5-79
5.8.5 Fuel...........................................................................................................................................5-80
5.9 External Systems.............................................................................................................................5-84
5.9.1 Stormscope Config Status ........................................................................................................5-84
5.10 Diagnostics......................................................................................................................................5-85
5.10.1 VFR GPS..................................................................................................................................5-85
5.10.2 AHRS & ADC..........................................................................................................................5-85
5.10.3 Backup Battery Status ..............................................................................................................5-85
5.10.4 HSDB Status ............................................................................................................................5-85
5.10.5 CAN Network ..........................................................................................................................5-85
5.10.6 Temp/Pwr Stats ........................................................................................................................5-85
5.10.7 Discrete Inputs..........................................................................................................................5-85
5.10.8 Discrete Outputs .......................................................................................................................5-85
5.10.9 Analog Inputs ...........................................................................................................................5-86
5.10.10 GDL69 .....................................................................................................................................5-86
5.10.11 ARINC 429 ..............................................................................................................................5-86
5.10.12 RS-232 .....................................................................................................................................5-86
5.10.13 RS-485 .....................................................................................................................................5-86
5.10.14 GFC 500...................................................................................................................................5-86
5.10.15 Clear Config.............................................................................................................................5-86
5.10.16 Factory Reset ...........................................................................................................................5-86
5.11 System Info .....................................................................................................................................5-87
5.11.1 Devices Online .........................................................................................................................5-87
5.11.2 Device Info...............................................................................................................................5-87
5.12 Maintenance....................................................................................................................................5-87
5.13 Restart Options ...............................................................................................................................5-88
5.14 Wireless Connectivity.....................................................................................................................5-89
5.15 Database Loading ...........................................................................................................................5-90
5.15.1 Automatic Database Updates ...................................................................................................5-90
5.15.2 Database Updates via USB ......................................................................................................5-91
5.15.3 Transferring Databases via Database Concierge (Wi-Fi) ........................................................5-91
5.15.4 GI 275 Databases .....................................................................................................................5-91

Rev. 13 Page 5-2
5.1 System Configuration Preparation
Once all GI 275 components are installed in the aircraft, the system must be configured.
Due to the many different layout options of the GI 275, information contained in this section may not be
applicable to every installation. Follow the configuration flow shown in Figure 5-1. A summary of the
steps for system configuration and calibration follows:
1. Assign each GI 275 a unique Unit ID. This must be done prior to configuration of each unit.
2. Verify the GI 275 software level is current with this STC. If necessary, update the software in
accordance with Section 5.2.
3. Configure the GI 275 for the particular installation, as specified in Section 5.2 through Section 5.9.
This includes:
a. Setting the airframe-specific parameters.
b. Configuring interfaces to external systems.
4. Perform necessary system calibrations, as specified in Section 5.8.
5. Load required and optional databases, as specified in Section 5.15.
6. Perform the ground checks applicable to the installation, beginning in Section 6.2.
7. Verify all placards have been relocated, as specified in Section 6.6.
8. Perform the flight checks specified in Section 6.8.
9. Update the aircraft documentation, as specified in Section 6.9.
Figure 5-1 System Configuration Flow

Rev. 13 Page 5-3
5.1.1 Entering Configuration Mode
The Configuration mode of the GI 275 can be accessed by holding down the inner knob, located at the
bottom-left of the unit, upon initial power-up. The knob must be held until the Garmin logo with
“Configuration Mode” below it appears. For installations with multiple GI 275s, all other units can be
easily powered on in Configuration mode by navigating to the Restart Options page from the
Configuration mode home page on one unit and touching the Restart All to Config button.
Figure 5-2 Entering the Configuration Menu
NOTE
When making configuration selections on the GI 275, in many cases, there is no dedicated
Enter selection. The selections made are confirmed by touching the Back button to exit the
particular screen/page.
NOTE
When powering on the GI 275 in Configuration mode for the first time, a Unit ID must be
assigned before any configuration settings can be changed. Refer to Section 5.3.1.

Rev. 13 Page 5-4
5.2 Software / Configuration
The SW/Config page is used to update the software for the GI 275 and any LRUs directly interfaced to the
GI 275. The approved software version and part numbers can be found in the most recent revision of
GI 275 Part 23 AML STC Equipment List (P/N 005-01208-42). The Unit ID must be properly configured
prior to loading software to the GI 275. After loading software to the GI 275, configure all interfaced
LRUs.
NOTE
When connecting a USB drive to the GI 275 (whether via USB dongle or GSB 15), ensure that
the USB icon appears on the left side of the display before proceeding. If the icon doesn’t
appear after 1 minute, remove the drive, re-insert it, and wait for the icon to appear.
5.2.1 Loader Card

Software updates for the GI 275 and external LRUs can be accomplished via USB using the following
procedure:
1. Create a Software Loader Card using the latest software and instructions available on the Garmin
Dealer Resource Center.
2. Power on all GI 275s and all applicable LRUs in the system in Configuration mode.
3. Insert the USB drive into the USB dongle or GSB 15 (if installed).
4. Navigate to the Loader Card page (SW/Config → Loader Card).
5. Select the applicable updates or touch the Select All button.
6. Touch Update Packages ( ) and then Begin Update. A restart is required when completed.
Figure 5-3 Software Update

Rev. 13 Page 5-5
5.2.2 Config Options
5.2.2.1 GFC 500 Manifest
A GFC 500 Software Manifest diagnostic is provided on the GI 275 when interfaced with the GFC 500
system. This allows synchronization of GFC 500 LRU software versions upon a mismatch between the
systems. Refer to the GFC 500 STC for approval and interface information.
5.2.2.2 Summary
A configuration summary can be saved to a USB drive by touching the Save Summary button. The file
will detail configuration settings for all GI 275s in the system and can be viewed on a computer web
browser.
NOTE
Files will be saved to a “aircraft_cfg” folder on the USB drive.
5.2.2.3 Import Configuration

Configuration settings can be imported via USB using the following procedure:
1. Power on the GI 275 and all LRUs in the system in Configuration mode.
NOTE
Unit ID must be set before importing configuration. Refer to Section 5.3.1.
2. Insert the USB drive containing the configuration files into the USB dongle or GSB 15 (if
installed).
3. Navigate to SW/Config → Config Options.
4. Touch the Import Configuration button.
5. Touch the Select Files button and select the configuration file to be imported.
6. Touch the Select Configuration button.
7. Select the applicable configurations and then touch the Back button.
8. Touch the Import Config ( ) button and then touch the Start button.
5.2.2.4 Export Config

Configuration settings can be exported via USB using the following procedure:
1. Power the GI 275 and all LRUs in the system on in Configuration mode.
2. Insert a USB drive into the USB dongle or GSB 15 (if installed).
3. Navigate to SW/Config → Config Options.
4. Touch the Export Configuration button.
5. Touch the Select Name button and enter a name for the saved file.
6. Touch the Export Config button.
NOTE
Files will be saved to a “aircraft_cfg” folder on the USB drive.

Rev. 13 Page 5-6
5.3 Unit Type
The Unit Type page is used to configure the GI 275 unit as a specific type of display. This includes
Unit ID, System ID, Airframe Type, and Unit Configuration.
5.3.1 Unit ID
CAUTION
Failure to follow the procedure to set Unit ID before performing any other configuration
steps may result in configuration errors or configuration settings being overwritten by
another display. Unit IDs must be unique for each unit in the system.
A Unit ID must be assigned to each installed GI 275 prior to configuring the function of each unit.
• Unit ID – A unique ID number between 1 – 6 for each GI 275 installed in the system. Unit ID is
set to a blank default at the factory and must be manually set. For a single GI 275 installation, set
the ID to GI 1. For multiple GI 275s, it is recommended that the Primary ADI (if applicable) be
set to GI 1. Whichever unit is assigned GI 1 should also be set as the Master display (refer to
Section 5.3.2). Each Unit ID must be unique and set using the following procedure:
When the GI 275 is powered on in Configuration mode for the first time (or after configuration settings are
cleared), it will automatically prompt the user to assign a Unit ID. This cannot be skipped.
Alternatively, the Unit ID can be configured by following the steps:
1. Verify all GI 275 units are powered off.
2. Power up a single GI 275 in Configuration mode, as described in Section 5.1.1.
3. From the home page, touch Unit Type → Unit ID → LRU and select a unique Unit ID between
1 and 6.
4. Touch Restart to apply the assignment.
5. Power down the display (do not power back on at this time).
6. Repeat steps 2 through 5 for the remaining installed GI 275s.
7. When all Unit ID assignments have been made, power up all displays in Configuration mode
before moving to the next configuration steps. The Unit ID assigned to each display is shown on
the left side of the display on the Configuration mode home page or on the Unit Type page.
CAUTION
For installations with more than one GI 275, all configuration settings made after the
steps in Section 5.3.1 must be done with all displays powered on and in Configuration
mode.
CAUTION
Once all GI 275s have been configured, the Unit ID should not be changed. Doing so will
result in a loss of configuration settings.

Rev. 13 Page 5-7
5.3.2 System ID Source
The System ID Source page is used to set a GI 275 unit as the Master, which will generate the System ID
for the whole GI 275 system (generally, GI 1 is designated the Master). To set as the Master, touch the
Master button and select Yes to confirm the change. The System ID will display below the button.
CAUTION
Changing the designated Master display will change the GI 275 System ID. This will
cause any previously unlocked features and installed databases to become unavailable.
New feature unlocks will be required for the new System ID. Databases will also have to
be re-installed; a new subscription may be required for some databases.
NOTE
Feature unlocks and databases will not become unavailable until the system is rebooted
after the designation is changed.
5.3.3 Airframe Type

The Airframe Type page is used to configure the GI 275 for a Fixed Wing or Rotorcraft installation. Set
Airframe Type to Fixed Wing per this STC.
5.3.4 Unit Configuration

Instrument Type
NOTE
Verify installation specifications for the instrument type are followed as described in
Section 4.4.
After the Unit ID has been selected, configure the instrument type. Refer to Section 5.6.3 for available
page configurations for each indicator/display type. To set the instrument type, touch the Instrument Type
button and then select the desired indicator/display. The options are:
• ADI
• MFD
• EIS
• HSI
Standby
If the Instrument Type is set to ADI or HSI, then the Standby selection will be available.
If the GI 275 was installed as a standby indicator in accordance with Section 2.1.4, and MFD pages are
desired and approved per Section 3.2.2, configure the unit as an ADI with the Standby selection On (i.e.,
illuminated green). If the GI 275 was installed as a standby indicator, but MFD pages are not desired or not
approved, configure as an ADI and leave the Standby selection configured Off.
If the GI 275 was installed as an “ADI Only” standby (e.g., only displays the ADI page) to a G500/G600
TXi, the GI 275 must be configured with the Standby selection enabled and all MFD pages must be
configured off (refer to Section 5.6.3.5).If the GI 275 was installed as an HSI/Standby ADI in accordance
with Section 2.1.4 and Section 3.2.2, configure as an HSI with the Standby selection On (i.e., illuminated
green).

Rev. 13 Page 5-8
When the GI 275 is configured as a standby with the Standby selection On, additional pages are
configurable on the Page Config page (refer to Section 5.6.3).
Unit Location
Select the location of the display installation. Selections are:
• Pilot
• Co-Pilot
NOTE
When configured for Co-Pilot unit selection, the output of Baro correction is suppressed.

Rev. 13 Page 5-9
5.4 Feature Enable
The GI 275 system capabilities can be further enhanced by feature enablement options.
The system allows Synthetic Vision (SVT) to be enabled on any unit that displays attitude.
Follow these procedures to enable the SVT feature:
1. Obtain the System ID (alphanumeric).
a. In Configuration mode, navigate to the System ID Source (Unit Type → System ID Source).
b. In Normal mode, open the menu, touch System, then touch Info.
2. Log in to the associated flyGarmin.com account.
3. Select the GI 275 SVT feature and enter the System ID to download the enablement to a USB
drive.
4. Power on all GI 275s in Configuration mode.
5. Insert the USB drive into the USB pigtail or GSB 15 (if installed).
NOTE
When connecting a USB drive to the GI 275 (whether via USB dongle or GSB 15), ensure
that the USB icon appears on the left side of the display before proceeding. If the icon
doesn’t appear after 1 minute, remove the drive, re-insert it, and wait for the icon to
appear.
6. On the display connected to the USB drive, navigate to the Features page by touching the Feature
Enable button.
7. Touch the SVT button to enable the feature (it will be illuminated green).
8. A system message will appear alerting the user that SVT has been enabled.
9. Restart all GI 275s for the enablement to take effect.

Rev. 13 Page 5-10
5.5 Interfaces
This section specifies the configuration and setup of the GI 275 in order to interface to all required and
optional equipment allowed by this AML STC. Each display must be individually configured to match all
applicable interconnects (refer to Appendix B) that define each display as either an ADI, HSI, MFD, EIS,
or standby indicator.
The Interfaces page allows the GI 275 display to be configured to interface to LRUs installed as part of the
GI 275 system as well as previously installed equipment that is approved to interface to the GI 275 under
this STC. Refer to Appendix C for equipment compatibility.
The configuration for a particular display will vary based on the following:
• GI 275 unit variant (i.e., Base, ADAHRS, or ADAHRS+AP)
• Instrument Type (e.g., Primary ADI, EIS, etc.)
• Number and type of other GI 275s in the system
Each installed display must be individually configured based on the interfaced equipment.
Depending on the interface that is selected, further actions may be required by selecting the setting, as
shown in Figure 5-4, and configuring them appropriately. Some selections may be grayed out until a
preceding selection has been configured.
Figure 5-4 Interface and Ports/Config Selections
The configuration tables in this section show available interface options as well as available ports. The port
assignments must be made to match the aircraft wiring.
NOTE
The port availability at each LRU configuration will vary depending on previous
configuration actions. If a port was previously configured for another LRU, then that port
will be grayed out and not available for selection.
NOTE
Interfaces not shown in the following tables are not approved per this STC.

Rev. 13 Page 5-11
5.5.1 GI 275s Installed
The GI 275s Installed page is used to identify which GI 275s are installed as part of the system, allowing
data to be crossfilled between units via HSDB.
Verify the following for each installed GI 275:
• The Unit ID must be set and must be unique, as described in Section 5.3.1
• The the current assigned Unit ID for each display is denoted on the GI 275s Installed page by a
grayed out selection
Perform the following steps to configure the GI 275 system:
1. Power on all GI 275s in the system in Configuration mode.
2. Navigate to the GI 275s Installed page (Interfaces → GI 275s Installed).
3. Select the Unit ID for each GI 275 in the system.
4. Repeat step 2 and 3 on each GI 275 unit.
5. Once each unit’s GI 275s Installed page has been configured, navigate to the Devices Online page
(System Info → Devices Online).
6. Ensure each Unit ID in the system shows a green square.
5.5.2 Wireless
The Wireless page allows you to connect the GI 275 unit to a Bluetooth connection or to generate a Wi-Fi
signal. Refer to Section 5.14 or GI 275 Pilot’s Guide for more information on wireless functionality.
The Wi-Fi functionality should only be enabled on one Garmin LRU at a time.

Rev. 13 Page 5-12
5.5.3 ADC
Configure each GI 275 displaying PFD information in either primary or reversionary backup mode for
ADC 1, ADC 2 (if equipped), and ADC 3 (if equipped) per the settings in Table 5-1. There is no
configuration setting for the OAT sensor; if connected, the GI 275 will utilize the OAT data.
Table 5-1 ADC Interfaces and Configuration Settings

Ports/Config -
ADC Interface Port Numbers Notes
Settings
Integrated ADAHRS Internal [1]
Air Data from another
Other GI 275 [1]
GI 275
GSU 75 GSU 75 A429 IN 1 Thru 4 [1] [2]
GDC 72 GDC 72 A429 IN 1 Thru 4 [1] [2]
GDC 74 GDC 74 A429 IN 1 Thru 4 [1] [2]
G500/G600 TXi GX00 TXi [1] [2]
Notes:
[1] External ADCs must be configured before any GI 275 internal ADAHRS. Refer to Table 5-2
for a guidance on the order that ADC sensors should be configured.
[2] The number of GDUs configured to the TXi system must be selected on the GI 275 when
GX00 TXi is selected as a configured ADC.
Filtering Time Constants

Verify that the Filtering Time Constants settings are configured to the default settings (shown below):
• Airspeed Lo: 0.152 SEC • Airspeed Transition to Lo: 999 KT • Vertical Speed: 1.35 SEC
• Airspeed Hi: 0.152 SEC • Airspeed Transition to Hi: 999 KT
Table 5-2 ADC Configuration Priority

Config
Source Interface Notes
Order
GSU 75
GDC 72
1 1st external sensor
GDC 74
GX00 TXi
GSU 75
GDC 72
2 2nd external sensor
GDC 74
GX00 TXi
Internal ADAHRS from Internal [1] Configure as Internal if configuring that unit’s internal
3
GI 275 Primary ADI Other GI 275 sensor. Otherwise, configure as Other GI 275.
4
GI 275 Standby ADI Other GI 275 sensor. Otherwise, configure as Other GI 275.
5
GI 275 HSI Other GI 275 sensor. Otherwise, configure as Other GI 275.
Notes:
[1] If an internal sensor is configured, it must be set as that unit’s default sensor. Refer to
Section 5.6.4 for instructions and example configurations.

Rev. 13 Page 5-13
5.5.4 AHRS
Configure each GI 275 displaying attitude, heading, or CDI information in either primary or reversionary
backup mode for AHRS 1, AHRS 2 (if equipped), and AHRS 3 (if equipped) per the settings in Table 5-3.
Table 5-3 AHRS Interfaces and Configuration Settings

Magnetic Ports/Config -
AHRS Interface Port Numbers Notes
HDG Settings
GMU 11 RS-232 1 or 2 [2] [1]
RS-232 TX 1 or 2
Integrated GMU 44B [1]
Internal RS-485 RX 1
ADAHRS
A429 Heading A429 IN 1 Thru 4 [6] [4] [1]
Primary [5] [1]
AHRS from
Other GI 275 [1]
other GI 275
GSU 75 GSU 75 A429 IN 1 Thru 4 [1]
GRS 77 GRS 77 A429 IN 1 Thru 4 [1]
GRS 79 GRS 79 A429 IN 1 Thru 4 [1]
G500/G600 TXi GX00 TXi [1] [3]
Notes:
[1] External AHRS must be configured before any GI 275 internal ADAHRS. Refer to Table 5-2
for a guidance on the order that ADC sensors should be configured.
[2] The Orientation setting for the GMU 11 must be configured. Select the direction that the
GMU 11’s connector is facing when installed (e.g., if the GMU 11 is mounted with the
connectors facing to the right, select Right Wing).
[3] The number of GDUs configured in the TXi system must be selected on the GI 275 when
GX00 TXi is selected as a configured AHRS.
[4] A429 Heading allows the GI 275 internal AHRS configuration to utilize an A429 input from
an interfaced EFIS for magnetometer data. ARINC label 320 is required. When the GI 275
is installed as the primary heading source and not receiving heading from a primary AHRS
source, a GMU is required.
[5] Primary heading allows a GI 275 internal AHRS configuration to utilize magnetometer data
from the sourced configured as AHRS 1.
[6] Configure the A429 IN Speed to Low for GAD 29 interface.
NOTE
Inertial-Aided Vertical Speed must be disabled per this STC.

Rev. 13 Page 5-14
Table 5-4 AHRS Configuration Priority
Config
Source Interface Notes
Order
GSU 75
GRS 77
1 1st external sensor
GRS 79
GX00 TXi
GSU 75
GRS 77
2 2nd external sensor
GRS 79
GX00 TXi
3
GI 275 Primary ADI Other GI 275 sensor. Otherwise, configure as Other GI 275.
4
GI 275 Standby ADI Other GI 275 sensor. Otherwise, configure as Other GI 275.
5
GI 275 HSI Other GI 275 sensor. Otherwise, configure as Other GI 275.
Notes:
[1] If an internal sensor is configured, it must be set as that unit’s default sensor. Refer to
Section 5.6.4 for instructions and example configurations.

Rev. 13 Page 5-15
5.5.5 GPS
Configure the GPS interfaces for GPS 1 and GPS 2 (if equipped) per the settings in Table 5-5.
Table 5-5 GPS Interfaces and Configuration Settings

Ports/Config - Settings
GPS Interface Notes
Port Number Speed
GTN 625/635/650
GTN 6XX [1]
GTN 625Xi/635Xi/650Xi
GTN 725/750
GTN 7XX [1]
GTN 725Xi/750Xi
GPS 400W / A429 IN 1 Thru 4 High
GNC 420W / GNS 4XXW A429 OUT 1 Thru 2 Low
GNS 430W / RS-232 RX 1 Thru 2
A429 IN 1 Thru 4 High
GPS 500W / GNS 530W GNS 5XXW A429 OUT 1 Thru 2 Low
RS-232 RX 1 Thru 2
A429 IN 1 Thru 4 High
GNS 480 GNS 480 A429 OUT 1 Thru 2 Low
RS-232 RX 1 Thru 2
GPS 175 GPS 175
GNX 375 GNX 375
GTX 3X5 GTX 3X5 RS-232 RX 1 Thru 2
Other GI 275 Other GI 275
GNC 355 GNC 355
Generic MapMX MAPMX RS-232 RX 1 Thru 2 [2]
Notes:
[1] Disabling the Transmit Selected Course to the GTN configuration setting will prevent the course
selected on the GI 275 from crossfilling to the GTN 6XX/7XX or GTN Xi. Disable this setting when
the GI 275 has Course Selection enabled but is not the primary HSI/CDI interfaced to the GTN.
[2] The Generic MAPMX GPS format may be used for Garmin GNS 4XXW/5XXW and GNS 480
interfaces if there are not enough data ports. This interface only requires RS-232 and provides the
GI 275 with GPS position for moving map and AHRS aiding.
TAWS Installations
If a single TAWS-equipped GTN 6XX/7XX, GTN Xi, or GNS 500W unit is installed, it must be
configured as GPS 1. Only TAWS annunciations from GPS 1 are displayed on the GI 275.
GNS 400W/500W Series and GNS 480 Installations

In dual GNS installations, the ARINC 429 OUT port selection is configured the same for both GPS 1 and
GPS 2. The GPS 2 ARINC 429 OUT port is automatically set based on the port selection made on GPS 1,
or vice versa. Changing the port selection on one will automatically change it on the other. Set the
remaining ports for both per the associated aircraft wiring diagram.

Rev. 13 Page 5-16
5.5.6 VFR GPS
The VFR GPS antenna must be installed to enable the VFR GPS per this STC. Set VFR GPS to Internal if
the antenna is directly connected to the unit. Otherwise, set to Other GI 275.
Enable Allow for SVT to allow display of SVT on the ADI when using the VFR GPS, when applicable.
The built-in VFR GPS is only approved for VFR navigation.
5.5.7 NAV
Configure each GI 275 for a NAV source for NAV 1 or NAV 2 (if equipped) per the settings in Table 5-6.
Table 5-6 NAV Interfaces and Configuration Settings

Ports/Config - Settings
NAV Interface Notes
Port Number Speed
Garmin GTN 650
GTN 650 [1] [2]
Garmin GTN 650Xi
Garmin GTN 750
GTN 750 [1] [2]
Garmin GTN 750Xi
Garmin GNS 430W/530W GNS 430/530 A429 IN 1 Thru 4 Low [1]
Garmin GNS 480 GNS 480 A429 IN 1 Thru 4 Low [1]
Garmin GNC 255 GNC 255 RS-232 RX/TX 1 Thru 2 [1]
Garmin SL 30 SL 30 RS-232 RX/TX 1 Thru 2 [1]
Collins VIR-32/33
Discrete In
Honeywell KN-53/KX-155/ Composite ILS Energize 1 Thru 4
Lo
KX-155A/KX-165/KX-165A
NAV from other GI 275 Other GI 275
G500/G600 TXi GX00 TXi
Notes:
[1] If Course Selection is disabled, configure CRS A429 port and speed.
[2] Disabling the Transmit Selected Course to the GTN configuration setting will prevent the course
selected on the GI 275 from crossfilling to the GTN 6XX/7XX or GTN Xi. Disable this setting when
the GI 275 has Course Selection enabled but is not the primary HSI/CDI interfaced to the GTN.
Course Selection
Disabling Course Selection allows the GI 275 to slave to the Selected Course from an external source. Set
the Course Selection to Disabled when an external system is providing the primary Selected Course data.
Set the Course Selection to Enabled when the GI 275 is the primary source for selected course data. The
Pilot Control configuration setting for Course Selection is not currently approved under this STC.

Rev. 13 Page 5-17
5.5.8 Radar Altimeter
Configure the Radar Altimeter per the settings in Table 5-7.
Table 5-7 RAD ALT Interfaces and Configuration Settings

Ports/Config -Settings
Radar Altimeter Interface
Port Number Speed
Garmin
GRA 55/5500 A429 IN 1 Thru 4 Low
GRA 55/5500
Collins A429 IN 1 Thru 4 Low
RAC 870
RAC 870 Rad Alt Test Discrete Out Lo 1 Thru 9
Free Flight
RA 4500 A429 IN 1 Thru 4 Low
RA 4500
Honeywell A429 IN 1 Thru 4 Low
KRA 405B
KRA 405B Rad Alt Test Discrete Out Lo 1 Thru 9
Rad Alt from other
Other GI 275
GI 275
5.5.9 Autopilot
All of the autopilots approved for installation per this STC have a dedicated selection/setting on the
GI 275. Make the applicable selections for autopilots listed in this section (organized in the order of
display presentation). During the GI 275 system configuration, leave the GPSS Scaler to HDG set to the
default value. If unsure whether the Scaler to HDG is set to the default setting, all the settings can be reset
to default by selecting any other autopilot and then re-selecting the installed autopilot.
NOTE
Changing the Autopilot Interface setting will reset all autopilot settings to default.
CAUTION
Only the discrete outputs from the P2752 connector can be connected to the autopilot. The
discrete outputs on the main connector cannot be used.
The followings settings should only be configured on the GI 275 ADAHRS+AP that is directly connected
to a third-party autopilot. All other GI 275s in the system should select Other GI 275 as the autopilot
interface. If a GFC 600 is installed, all GI 275s in the system must be configured to GFC 600.

Rev. 13 Page 5-18
5.5.9.1 Garmin
Garmin autopilots can interface to a GI 275 ADAHRS unit; a GI 275 ADAHRS+AP unit is not required.
Table 5-8 Garmin GFC 500 Autopilot Configuration
Autopilot Interface Ports/Config - Settings Value / Port Numbers Speed Notes
AUTOPILOT GFC 500
Roll Only
Settings
Pitch + Roll
GFC 500 GFC 500 [1]
GFC 500 OUT 1 Thru 2 Low
A429 EFIS IN 1 Thru 4 Low
NAV IN 1 Thru 4 Low
Notes:
[1] Refer to GFC 500 STC SA01866WI for interface approval with the GI 275. If two GI 275s
are both interfaced to a GFC 500, both units must configure the Autopilot interface to
GFC 500. The second unit will default as “Backup 1”.
Table 5-9 Garmin GFC 600 Autopilot Configuration

Autopilot Interface Ports/Config - Settings Value / Port Numbers Notes
GFC 600 GFC 600 AUTOPILOT GFC 600
5.5.9.2 Bendix
The autopilot computer must be configured for a Collins PN-101 (FD-112C/V) HSI in order to have the
correct heading and course error (datum) signals; otherwise, additional adjustments will be required. Refer
to Bendix I.B. 20004 M-4D AFCS Installation Manual Section II, paragraph 7, Flight Check and
Calibration, for adjustments that can be made in the 5487G or 5485A flight controller. Refer to Bendix I.B.
20004 Section II, paragraph 5, Post Installation Check-Out, for additional information.
Table 5-10 Bendix M-4C/M-4D Autopilot Configuration

Autopilot Interface Ports/Config - Settings Value / Port Numbers
HSI Type Collins PN 101
None [1]
Flight Bendix FD Discrete
Director DH-841 [2] Enabled
Bendix Bendix Other GI 275
M-4C/M-4D M-4C/M-4D Button Scaler to HDG 1.0
GPSS GPSS Discrete Discrete In 1 Thru 6
Discrete
Scaler to HDG 1.0
ILS/GPS
Discrete Out Lo 4 Thru 9
Approach
Notes:
[1] For Bendix M-4C, set to None.
[2] For Bendix M-4D, set to Bendix DH-841.

Rev. 13 Page 5-19
5.5.9.3 Century
Configuration values for all Century autopilots connected with radio couplers will vary based on which
radio coupler is used.
Table 5-11 Century 2000 Autopilot Configuration

Autopilot Interface Ports/Config - Settings Value/Port Numbers
HSI Type NSD 360 DC
Flight Century FD
Director Other GI 275
Button Scaler to HDG 1.0
Century 2000 Century 2000 GPSS GPSS Discrete Discrete In 1 Thru 6
Discrete
Scaler to HDG 1.0
Gyro
Century 2000
Emulation
ILS/GPS
Approach
Table 5-12 Century 21/31 Autopilot Configuration

HSI Type NSD 360 DC
Century Discrete
Century Scaler to HDG 1.0
21/31 21/31 Gyro
Century 2000
Emulation
ILS/GPS
Approach
Table 5-13 Century 41 Autopilot Configuration

HSI Type NSD 360 DC
Century FD
Flight Director
Other GI 275
Century 41 Century 41 GPSS GPSS Discrete Discrete In 1 Thru 6
Discrete
Scaler to HDG 1.0
Gyro
Century 2000
Emulation
ILS/GPS
Approach

Rev. 13 Page 5-20
Table 5-14 Century II/III Autopilot Configuration
Century 1C388C / 1C388MC
Century 1C388/M
HSI Type [1]
Century 1C388-2
Century 1C388-3
Century II / III Century II / III Button Scaler to HDG 1.0
Discrete
Scaler to HDG 1.0
Gyro
Century 52D66/67 [2]
Emulation
Notes:
[1] Set the HSI Type based on the corresponding installed radio coupler.
[2] Set to None if the GI 275 is not providing attitude to the autopilot.
Table 5-15 Century IV AC Autopilot Configuration

Collins PN 101
HSI Type [1]
Narco HSI 100
Century FD
Flight Director
Other GI 275
Century IV AC Century IV AC Button Scaler to HDG 1.0
Discrete
Scaler to HDG 1.0
ILS/GPS
Approach
Notes:
[1] Set the HSI Type to Collins PN 101 if a Collins PN 101 was previously installed; otherwise,
select the Narco HSI 100.
Table 5-16 Century IV DC Autopilot Configuration

Century IV
HSI Type [1]
NSD 360 DC
Flight Century FD
Director Other GI 275
Century IV DC Century IV DC Button Scaler to HDG 1.0
Discrete
Scaler to HDG 1.0
ILS/GPS
Approach
Notes:
[1] Set the HSI Type to NSD 360 DC if a Century NSD 360 was previously installed;
otherwise, select Century IV.

Rev. 13 Page 5-21
5.5.9.4 Cessna
Select Cessna AC or Cessna DC based upon whether the autopilot is strapped for AC or DC course/
heading error inputs.
The NAV 1/NAV 2 lighted switch legend must be obliterated from view so that any NAV source indication
on the autopilot mode controller is hidden from view.
Table 5-17 Cessna AC Autopilot Configuration

HSI Type Cessna G-502A/B
Cessna
300 IFCS
400 IFCS Cessna AC Discrete
Scaler to HDG 1.0
400B
800 IFCS ILS/GPS
Approach
Table 5-18 Cessna DC Autopilot Configuration (1000 IFCS)

HSI Type Cessna G-504A
Cessna FD Discrete
Flight 1000 IFCS Enabled
Director
Other GI 275
Cessna
Cessna DC GPSS GPSS Discrete Discrete In 1 Thru 6
1000 IFCS Discrete
Scaler to HDG 1.0
Gyro Cessna/ARC G519
Emulation [1] Sperry VG-14A
ILS/GPS
Approach
Notes:
[1] Configure Gyro Emulation with the following considerations:
• For 1000A Series Computer Amplifier P/Ns 46210-0001, -0002, and -0102 (i.e., for
installations that previously utilized a panel mount gyro, such as a G-895B, G-1050A, G-550A,
or G-519B), select Cessna/ARC G519.
• For 1000A Series Computer Amplifier P/Ns 46210-0004, -0005, and -0105 (i.e., installations
that previously utilized a remote mount gyro, such as a VG-14(A)), select Sperry VG-14A.

Rev. 13 Page 5-22
Table 5-19 Cessna DC Autopilot Configuration
HSI Type Cessna G-504A
Cessna
FD Discrete
Flight 400B/800B
Enabled
Director IFCS
Cessna Other GI 275
300B IFCS Button Scaler to HDG 1.0
Cessna DC
400B IFCS GPSS GPSS Discrete Discrete In 1 Thru 6
Discrete
800B IFCS Scaler to HDG 1.0
Gyro
Cessna/ARC G519
Emulation
ILS/GPS
Approach
5.5.9.5 Collins
Table 5-20 Collins AP-106/107 Autopilot Configuration
HSI Type Collins PN 101
Collins FD Discrete
Flight Director FD-106 Enabled
Other GI 275
Collins Collins Button Scaler to HDG 1.0
AP-106/107 AP-106/107 GPSS GPSS Discrete Discrete In 1 Thru 6
Discrete
Scaler to HDG 1.0
Yaw Rate Yaw Rate (mV/deg/sec) None
ILS/GPS
Approach

Rev. 13 Page 5-23
5.5.9.6 Honeywell (Bendix/King)
Table 5-21 Honeywell (Bendix/King) KAP 150/KFC 150 Autopilot Configuration
HSI Type King KI 525
FD Discrete
Flight King KI 256
Enabled
Director
Other GI 275
Honeywell GPSS GPSS Discrete Discrete In 1 Thru 6
Discrete
(Bendix/King) KAP 150/ Scaler to HDG 1.0
KAP 150 KFC 150 Gyro King KI 256
KFC 150 Emulation Heading Only [1]
Yaw Rate Yaw Rate (mV/deg/sec) 200
ILS/GPS
Approach
HDG/CRS
Datum Valid
Notes:
[1] Set to “Heading Only” if the GI 275 is not supplying attitude to the KAP/KFC 150.
Table 5-22 Honeywell (Bendix/King) KAP 100/200 Autopilot Configuration

Discrete
Scaler to HDG 1.0
Honeywell
KAP 100/ Gyro
(Bendix/King) King KI 256
KAP 200 Emulation
KAP 100/200
ILS/GPS
Approach
HDG/CRS
Datum Valid
Table 5-23 Honeywell (Bendix/King) KAP 140 Autopilot Configuration

Discrete
Honeywell Scaler to HDG 1.0
(Bendix/King) KAP 140 ILS/GPS
KAP 140 Discrete Out Lo 4 Thru 9
Approach
HDG/CRS
Datum Valid
GPS Select Discrete Out Lo 4 Thru 9

Rev. 13 Page 5-24
Table 5-24 Honeywell (Bendix/King) KFC 225 Autopilot Configuration
Autopilot Interface Ports/Config - Settings Port Numbers
A429 OUT Low 1 Thru 2
King FD Discrete
Flight KFC 225 Enabled
Director
Other GI 275
Honeywell
(Bendix/King) KFC 225 Gyro
King KI 256
KFC 225 Emulation
ILS/GPS
Approach
HDG/CRS
Datum Valid
Table 5-25 Honeywell (Bendix/King) KFC 250-4” HSI Autopilot Configuration

King KPI 552
HSI Type [1]
King KI 525
FD Discrete
Flight King KCI 310
Enabled
Director
Other GI 275
Honeywell Button Scaler to HDG 1.0
(Bendix/King)
KFC 250 KFC 250 Discrete
w/065-5015- (4in) Scaler to HDG 1.0
XX Adapter Gyro
King KVG 350
Card (4" inst.) Emulation
ILS/GPS
Approach
HDG/CRS
Datum Valid
Notes:
[1] Set the HSI Type to King KI 525, if the King autopilot is installed with a KA 52 or KA 57
autopilot adapter; otherwise, set to King KPI 552.

Rev. 13 Page 5-25
Table 5-26 Honeywell (Bendix/King) KFC 200/250-3” HSI Autopilot Configuration
FD Discrete
Flight King KI 256
Enabled
Director [1]
Other GI 275
Honeywell
(Bendix/King) Button Scaler to HDG 1.0
KFC 200 GPSS GPSS Discrete Discrete In 1 Thru 6
Discrete
KFC 250 KFC Scaler to HDG 1.0
w/065-5016- 200/250 (3in) Gyro
XX Adapter King KI 256
Emulation
Card
(3" inst.) Yaw Rate Yaw Rate (mV/deg/sec) 200
ILS/GPS
Approach
HDG/CRS
Datum Valid
Notes:
[1] Set the Flight Director to King KI 256, if the KI 255/256/258 ADI was previously installed.
Table 5-27 Honeywell (Bendix/King) KFC 300 Autopilot Configuration

Collins PN 101
HSI Type [1]
King KPI 552
FD Discrete
Flight King KCI 310
Enabled
Director
Other GI 275
Honeywell GPSS GPSS Discrete Discrete In 1 Thru 6
(Bendix/King) KFC 300 Discrete
Scaler to HDG 1.0
KFC 300
Gyro
King KVG 350
Emulation
ILS/GPS
Approach
AP
Backcourse
Notes:
[1] Set the HSI Type to King KPI 552 if a King KPI 552 was previously installed; otherwise, set
it to Collins PN 101.

Rev. 13 Page 5-26
5.5.9.7 Sperry
Table 5-28 Sperry SPZ-200A/500 Autopilot Configuration
HSI Type Sperry RD-550
Sperry
FD Discrete
Flight SPZ-200A/
Enabled
Director 500
Other GI 275
Sperry Button Scaler to HDG 1.0
SPZ-200A/
SPZ-200A/
500 GPSS GPSS Discrete Discrete In 1 Thru 6
500 Discrete
Scaler to HDG 1.0
Gyro
None
Emulation
ILS/GPS
Approach
5.5.9.8 S-TEC
If the autopilot has been previously configured to operate with the NSD 360, the HSI Type must be set to
NSD 360 DC and not King KI 525. If the autopilot is configured to operate with any other heading system,
it must be configured to either NSD 360 or KI 525 (KCS-55) in order to be compatible with the GI 275.
Table 5-29 S-TEC 20/30/40/50/60-1 Autopilot Configuration

NSD 360 DC
HSI Type [1]
King KI 525
S-TEC
S-TEC 20/30/ GPSS GPSS Discrete Discrete In 1 Thru 6
20/30/40/50/ Discrete
40/50/60-1 Scaler to HDG 1.0
60-1
ILS/GPS
Approach
Notes:
[1] Set the HSI Type to NSD 360 DC if the autopilot was previously configured with a
NSD-360. Set the HSI Type to King KI 525 if the autopilot was previously configured with a KI 525.

Rev. 13 Page 5-27
Table 5-30 S-TEC 60-2/65/60 PSS Autopilot Configuration
NSD 360 DC
HSI Type [1]
King KI 525
S-TEC FD Discrete
Flight ST-670 Enabled
S-TEC S-TEC Director [2]
Other GI 275
60-2/65/60 60-2/65/60
PSS PSS Button Scaler to HDG 1.0
GPSS [2] GPSS Discrete Discrete In 1 Thru 6
Discrete
Scaler to HDG 1.0
ILS/GPS
Approach
Notes:
[1] Set the HSI Type to NSD 360 DC if the autopilot was previously configured with a NSD-360. Set
the HSI Type to King KI 525 if the autopilot was previously configured with a KI 525.
[2] Flight director and GPSS functionality is not supported by the 60 PSS.
Table 5-31 S-TEC 55X Autopilot Configuration

A429 OUT Low 1 Thru 2
NSD 360 DC
HSI Type [1]
King KI 525
FD Discrete
Flight S-TEC 55X
Enabled
Director
S-TEC 55X S-TEC 55X Other GI 275
ILS/GPS
Approach
GPS
Annunciate
Notes:

Rev. 13 Page 5-28
Table 5-32 S-TEC 55 Autopilot Configuration
NSD 360 DC
HSI Type [1]
King KI 525
FD Discrete
Flight S-TEC 55X
Enabled
Director
Other GI 275
S-TEC 55 S-TEC 55 Button Scaler to HDG 1.0
Discrete
Scaler to HDG 1.0
ILS/GPS
Approach
Notes:
5.5.10 AHRS Emulation

Configure the AHRS Emulation interface per the settings in Table 5-33. The Gyro Emulation setting will
be disabled if Gyro Emulation is configured for the autopilot.
Table 5-33 AHRS Emulation Configuration Settings

Gyro Emulation Ports/Config - Settings Port Numbers
None
Heading Only
Century 2000
Cessna/ARC G519 HDG Valid Discrete Out Lo 4 Thru 9
King KI 256
King KVG 350
Sperry VG-14A
5.5.11 Transponder
Configure the available interfaces for Transponder 1 and Transponder 2 per Table 5-34 to provide the
Transponder Control page. Only the GTX 345 series transponder is compatible for the Transponder
Control feature. Refer to the GTX 345 Installation Manual for configuration details for the GTX 345 unit.
Table 5-34 Transponder Configuration Settings

Transponder Interface Ports/Config - Settings
Mode 1 Code 4 Digit
Garmin GTX 345 GTX 345
VFR Code Recall Enabled/Disabled [1]
Notes:
[1] With VFR Code Recall enabled, touching the VFR button on the XPDR page in Normal
mode a second time will revert to the previously entered code.

Rev. 13 Page 5-29
5.5.12 EIS
Configure the EIS per the settings for EIS 1 or EIS 2 (if equipped) in Table 5-35. For twin-engine EIS,
EIS 1 must be configured as left or front engine and EIS 2 must be configured as right or rear engine.
For twin-engine EIS, the first GI 275 display should have EIS 1 configured according to Table 5-35 and
EIS 2 configured as Other GI 275. The second GI 275 display should have EIS 1 configured as Other
GI 275 and EIS 2 configured according to Table 5-35.
Table 5-35 EIS/GEA Configuration Settings

EIS Interface Ports/Config - Settings Port Numbers
RS-485 RX/TX 1
GEA 110 GEA 110
Annunciations [1]
RS-232 1 Thru 2
GEA 24 GEA 24
Annunciations [1]
EIS from
Other GI 275 Annunciations [1]
other GI 275
Notes:
[1] Annunciations are required if the GI 275 EIS is installed outside of 35° of the centerline. Refer to
Section 4.4.3 for installation information. Refer to Table 5-36 for configuration settings.
5.5.12.1 Engine Annunciator

Configure the Engine Annunciator Interface per the settings in Table 5-36. In multi-engine aircraft and in
single-engine aircraft with two EIS displays, only configure the annunciator discretes on EIS 1. Configure
the annunciator discretes on EIS 2 as None.
Table 5-36 Engine Annunciator Configuration Settings

Aircraft
Engine Annunciator Engine Caution Engine Warning
System
LED-40-17-BA2-E1WP6
28V
MS25041 Discrete Out Lo Discrete Out Lo
95-40-17-B4-E1WPN 1 Thru 9 1 Thru 9
14V
MS25041

Rev. 13 Page 5-30
5.5.13 Traffic
Configure the available Traffic interface to match the particular installation per Table 5-37. Refer to the
appropriate Garmin ADS-B STC installation manual for more information on installation and
configuration requirements for systems with multiple traffic systems. When configuring the traffic
interface, first select the type of traffic system installed. Then select the appropriate interface and configure
per the settings in Table 5-37.
Table 5-37 Traffic System Configuration Settings

Traffic Interface
Type Ports/Config - Settings Port Numbers
Source (Type)
Traffic Active
from other Traffic/ Other GI 275
GI 275 TIS-A
A429 IN [1] 1 Thru 4
De-select
L-3
Active Discrete
Avionics SKY497 TAS STBY/ON 1 Thru 9
Traffic Control Traffic Out Lo
SKY497 Select
Discrete
TAS TEST 1 Thru 9
Out Lo
A429 IN [1] 1 Thru 4
De-select
L-3
Active Discrete
Avionics SKY899 TAS STBY/ON 1 Thru 9
Traffic Control Traffic Out Lo
SKY899 Select
Discrete
TAS TEST 1 Thru 9
Out Lo
A429 IN [1] 1 Thru 4
L-3 De-select
Avionics Active SKY899 Discrete
SKY899 Traffic TCAS I TAS STBY/ON 1 Thru 9
Control Traffic Out Lo
TCAS I Select
Discrete
TAS TEST 1 Thru 9
Out Lo
A429 IN [1] 1 Thru 4
Bendix/ De-select
King
Active KTA 870/ Discrete
Honeywell TAS STBY/ON 1 Thru 9
Traffic KMH 820 Control Traffic Out Lo
KTA 870 Select
KMH 820 Discrete
TAS TEST 1 Thru 9
Out Lo
A429 IN [1] 1 Thru 4
Bendix/ De-select
King
Active KTA 970/ Discrete
Honeywell TAS STBY/ON 1 Thru 9
Traffic KMH 920 Control Traffic Out Lo
KTA 970 Select
KMH 920 Discrete
TAS TEST 1 Thru 9
Out Lo

Rev. 13 Page 5-31
Traffic Interface
Type Ports/Config - Settings Port Numbers
Source (Type)
GTS (HSDB)
A429 IN [1] 1 Thru 4
De-select
Active
Traffic GTS 8XX Discrete
GTS 8XX TAS STBY/ON 1 Thru 9
(A429) Control Traffic Out Lo
Select
Discrete
TAS TEST 1 Thru 9
Out Lo
ADS-B GTS ADS-B
Avidyne
(Ryan) Active TAS 6XX/
A429 IN [1] 1 Thru 4
TAS 6XX/ Traffic TCAD
TCAD
GTX 345 ADS-B GTX 345 Active Traffic TAS/TCAS
GNX 375 ADS-B GNX 375
A429 IN [1] 1 Thru 4
GTX 33X TIS-A GTX 33X Discrete
TIS STBY/ON 1 Thru 9
Out Lo
Notes:
[1] Refer to Section 5.5.19 to configure the ARINC 429 OUT port to provide data to the traffic
system, if applicable.
5.5.14 GDL 69
Configure the data link interface per the settings in Table 5-38.
Table 5-38 GDL 69 Configuration Settings

Data Link Interface Ports/Config - Settings Port Numbers Notes
GDL 69/69A GDL 69 [1] [3]
SXM GDL 69A [1] [2] [3]
Notes:
[1] The GI 275 will only display data from the GDL 69/69A SXM. Another LRU must be used
to configure the GDL 69/69A SXM. Refer to GDL 69/69A Installation Manual (P/N 190-
00355-02) for more information.
[2] If a GDL 69A SXM is installed, it is permissible to configure it as a GDL 69. In this case,
the XM weather from the GDL 69A SXM will be displayed on the GI 275 MFD, but no
audio control will be available on the display.
[3] Only second generation GDL 69/69A SXM models are compatible with the GI 275.

Rev. 13 Page 5-32
5.5.15 Stormscope
Configure the Stormscope interface per the settings in Table 5-39.
Table 5-39 Stormscope Configuration Settings

Stormscope Interface Ports/Config - Settings Port Numbers
WX-500 WX-500 RS-232 RX 1 Thru 3
Wired to other
Other GI 275
GI 275
5.5.16 PFD Sync

Configure PFD Sync as HSDB if interfaced to a G500/G600 TXi system via HSDB. PFD Sync allows the
TXi GDUs and GI 275 displays to sync the heading bug, course bug, and baro correction.
Table 5-40 PFD Sync Configuration Settings

Interface Ports/Config - Settings Port Numbers
HSDB GDUs Installed
5.5.17 General Purpose Discrete In

Configure the General Purpose Discrete In ports and speeds per the settings in Table 5-41.
Table 5-41 General Purpose Discrete In Settings

General Purpose Discrete In Ports/Config - Settings Port Numbers
Audio Inhibit Discrete In Lo 1 Thru 6
Discrete In
Display Backup Discrete In Lo 5 Thru 6
5.5.18 General Purpose Discrete Out

Configure the General Purpose Discrete Out ports and speeds per the settings in Table 5-42.
Table 5-42 General Purpose Discrete Out Settings

General Purpose Discrete Out Ports/Config - Settings Port Numbers
On Ground
Discrete Out Discrete Out Lo 1 Thru 9
Terrain Aud Actv

Rev. 13 Page 5-33
5.5.19 General Purpose ARINC 429 (A429) Out
Configure the General Purpose ARINC 429 port(s) and speeds per the settings in Table 5-43. The A429
Out from the GI 275 may be provided to the following LRUs. Refer to Appendix C for required
information on each LRU settings.
Table 5-43 General Purpose A429 Output Settings

General Purpose A429 Out Interface Ports/Config - Settings Port Numbers
Low
General Purpose 1 #1 1 Thru 2
High
Low
High
A429 Out Present
Low
High
Low
High
Notes:
• GTX 33/330/335/345 - GP 1 A429 Low Speed OR GP 2 A429 Low Speed
• GTS 8XX - GP 1 A429 Low Speed or High Speed
• TAS 6XX/9900BX - GP 1 A429 Low Speed or High Speed
• TRC 497/899 - GP 1 A429 Low Speed OR GP 2 A429 Low Speed
• KTA 810/910, KMH 820/920 - GP 2 A429 Low Speed AND Integrated AHRS/ADAHRS High
Speed OR GP2 A429 High Speed
• ART 2000/2100 - GP 2 A429 High Speed OR Integrated AHRS/ADAHRS High Speed
5.5.20 General Purpose RS-232 Out

Configure the General Purpose serial port per the settings in Table 5-44.
Table 5-44 General Purpose Serial Port Setting

General Purpose RS-232 Out Ports/Config - Settings Port Numbers Notes
Altitude Format 3 RS-232 Out 1 Thru 3
5.5.21 Airspeed Switches

These settings are not approved per this STC.

Rev. 13 Page 5-34
5.6 Setup
This section describes the setup for airframe, lighting, page configuration, sensors, audio alerts, Terrain/
TAWS, backup battery, and other miscellaneous settings. Ensure all interfaces necessary in Section 5.5
have been successfully configured prior to continuing with setup. Some pages contained in this section
may not be applicable to every installation or may not be available.
5.6.1 Airframe Configuration

The vertical speed, altitude, and airspeed units must be configured to match the instruments currently
installed in the airplane and designated in the POH/AFM.
Figure 5-5 Airframe Config Page

Roll Pointer
Configures pointer direction. Configure as Fixed (down) or Sky (up) per the POH/AFM.
The Roll Pointer setting must be configured to match the installed ADI. The attitude indicator on the
Primary ADI includes two pointers (on the Roll Pointer). When banking, one pointer indicates the aircraft
bank angle and the other pointer remains stationary. The pointer that indicates bank angle can either point
up (sky pointer) or down (fixed pointer).
ADI Style
Configures the layout of the ADI. Choose between Basic, 3-in-1, or 4-in-1. If Basic is selected, the
following settings are not available.
Basic 3-in-1 4-in-1

Figure 5-6 ADI Styles

Rev. 13 Page 5-35
NOTE
Recommended settings for the following features are provided in feet per minute (fpm),
which is the default. If indicated by the AFM/POH to be in meters per second, the units
can be changed in the ALT/VS Units menu. The GI 275 automatically converts the settings
in fpm to the equivalent meters per second setting when switched from Feet to Meters.
FD Format
Sets the type of aircraft symbol displayed on the ADI page in Normal mode. The options are Chevron,
Standard, or Pilot Control, with Chevron being the default. If Pilot Control is selected, the symbol can be
changed in Normal mode.
If the GI 275 is interfaced to a non-GFC 500 autopilot, Chevron must be configured. Standard and Pilot
Control are only approved for installations without an autopilot or with a GFC 500 autopilot.
Figure 5-7 ADI Aircraft Symbols

(Left: Chevron, Right: Standard)
ADI Direction Bug

Sets what is displayed in the ADI Direction Bug in the bottom-left of the ADI page. The options are HDG/
TRK, CRS, or Off. Selections vary depending on ADI Style.
Altitude Bug
When enabled, allows an altitude bug (alert) to be set while in Normal mode. Enabled by default.
VS Min
Sets the minimum vertical speed. Not configured per this STC.
VS Max
Sets the maximum vertical speed. Not configured per this STC.
VS Range
Sets the range of the vertical speed tape. The vertical speed range must be set to match the range on the
V/S indicator that was previously installed. The V/S tape range can be configured for ±2000 fpm,
±3000 fpm, or ±4000 fpm. If a V/S indicator was not previously installed, and a V/S range is not specified
in the POH/AFM, set the vertical speed tape range to ±2000 fpm.
ALT/VS Units
Configures the units for altitude and vertical speed. Choose between Feet (feet per minute for VS) or
Meters (meters per second for VS) as indicated by the POH/AFM.
IAS Units
Configures the units for indicated airspeed. Choose between KPH (kilometers per hour), KT (knots), or
MPH (miles per hour) as indicated by the POH/AFM.
Airspeed Bug
When enabled, allows an airspeed bug (alert) to be set while in Normal mode. Disabled by default.

Rev. 13 Page 5-36
5.6.1.1 Airspeed Configuration
Airspeeds used to configure the IAS tape must be taken from the AFM/POH, aircraft TCDS, or other
approved STC applicable to the specific aircraft being modified.
Information and settings available on the Airspeeds pages (shown in Figure 5-8) for a GI 275 will vary
depending on whether the Mode field on the Airspeed Configuration page is set to Basic or Advanced
(Setup → Airframe Configuration → Airspeed Configuration).
Figure 5-8 Basic (Left) and Advanced (Right) Airspeed Configuration Type Settings
The Basic setting values are generally found in the AFM/POH for each aircraft. Refer to Table 5-45 for
detailed information on obtaining Basic setting airspeed values. Refer to Appendix E for information on
obtaining advanced setting airspeed values.
With GI 275 software v2.11 and later, ten additional user-configurable airspeed markings are available
(default C0 through C9). All user-configurable markings must be at least 5 mph/kts apart from any other
airspeed marking.
Figure 5-9 User-Configurable Airspeed Markings
CAUTION
The Mode field on the Airspeed Configuration page must be set to “Advanced” for
aircraft that have an altitude-variable maximum airspeed limitation.
NOTE
If the AFM or POH lists both indicated airspeed (IAS) and calibrated airspeed (CAS), use
IAS values.

Rev. 13 Page 5-37
Table 5-45 Airframe-Specific Configuration Data – Configuration Type Basic Setting
AFM/POH
Item Description Notes
Ref. Section
VS0 Stall speed in landing configuration 2 - Limitations Bottom of white arc on ASI.
Stall speed in a specific flight
VS1 2 - Limitations Bottom of green arc on ASI.
configuration
Top of white arc on ASI; if more than one
Vfe Maximum flap extended speed 2 - Limitations
flap speed is given, use the lowest speed.
Top of green arc/bottom of yellow arc on
ASI; if the aircraft has no yellow arc but has
Vno Normal operating speed 2 - Limitations
a green arc that extends to the red radial, set
Vno to the same value as Vne.
Vne Never exceed speed 2 - Limitations Red radial on ASI.
3 - Emergency Optional.
GLIDE Glide speed
Procedures Set to 0 kt (off) if not listed in the AFM/POH.
Optional.
4 - Normal
Vr Rotation speed Typically set to rotation speed.
Procedures
Set to 0 kt (off) if not listed in the AFM/POH.
Optional.
There are speeds listed for GEAR UP and
4 - Normal
Vx Best angle of climb speed GEAR DOWN; use the speed listed for
Procedures
GEAR DOWN.
Set to 0 kt (off) if not listed in AFM/POH.
Optional.
There are speeds listed for GEAR UP and
4 - Normal
Vy Best rate of climb speed GEAR DOWN; use the speed listed for
Procedures
GEAR UP.
Set to 0 kt (off) if not listed in the AFM/POH.
Maximum landing gear extended
Vle 2 - Limitations Set to 0 kt (off) for fixed gear aircraft.
speed
Minimum controllable airspeed for Lower red radial on ASI of light twins.
Vmca twin-engine aircraft with only one 2 - Limitations
Set to 0 kt (off) for single engine aircraft.
engine operational
3 - Emergency
Procedures Blue radial on ASI of light twins.
Single engine best rate of climb
Vyse OR
speed for a twin-engine aircraft Set to 0 kt (off) for single engine aircraft.
4 - Normal
Procedures
Vne
Applicable to rotary wing aircraft only N/A Set to OFF.
(Pwr Off)
Mach Settings
Used to configure display of Mach speed. Set Display to Secondary Display or None. If Activation is set to
Mach Threshold, configure On and Off settings. If Activation is set to Crossover ALT, configure Altitude
setting. Set Format to either M.000 or M0.00.
Mach Number display is not available if a GFC 500 is interfaced to the GI 275. Mach Number display is
for supplemental flight information only. It may not replace or duplicate existing Mach Number display
gauges and must be configured Off in such installations.

Rev. 13 Page 5-38
5.6.2 Lighting
This section outlines the preferred method for configuring the GI 275 lighting in the aircraft. The GI 275
STC allows display/knob lighting control with or without the Enhanced Lighting mode selection. The
Enhanced Lighting mode allows a more customized lighting curve.
Configure Day Mode Curve is the only setting available for configuration when Enhanced Lighting mode
is selected. Figure 5-10 shows the Lighting page.
NOTE
All lighting conditions must be considered when configuring the display for photocell only. If the
aircraft is equipped with an instrument panel flood or wash lighting, the installation must be
evaluated to verify the flood/wash lighting does not affect the GI 275 lighting level. If the display
lighting level is adversely affected by the flood/wash lighting, then the GI 275 must be connected
to a lighting bus to control the display brightness.
Figure 5-10 Lighting Page
To accurately configure the lighting, the ability to adjust ambient light conditions is required. The installer
must have the means to simulate complete darkness in the cockpit. Simply covering the photocells may not
allow the installer’s eye to properly judge whether the display brightness is too bright or too dim for night
use.
The following tables must be used for lighting configuration:
• Table 5-46 - Photocell for display/knob (Enhanced Lighting mode de-selected)
• Table 5-47 - Lighting bus for display/knob (Enhanced Lighting mode de-selected)
• Table 5-48 - Photocell for display/knob (Enhanced Lighting mode selected)
• Table 5-49 - Lighting Bus for display (Enhanced Lighting mode selected)
• Table 5-50 - Lighting Bus for knob (Enhanced Lighting mode selected)

Rev. 13 Page 5-39
Photocell Configuration - Enhanced Lighting De-selected
The Display Lighting and the Knob Lighting curves must be set individually as noted per Table 5-46.
Table 5-46 Photocell Configuration Procedure

Photocell Curve
Step
Display Knob
Under Source Selection, set Photocell as the source Under Source Selection, set Photocell as the source
1
for Display Source. for Knob Source.
Under the Photocell Configuration, set the Photocell - Response Time to a low level (e.g., 2 sec) to allow the
2
display to adjust more quickly to light conditions.
Touch Lighting Curve Configure and then Knob
Touch Lighting Curve Configure and then Display
Lighting. It is recommended to start configuration
Lighting. It is recommended to start configuration
3 with a Slope of 50%. This can be done by selecting
with a Slope of 50%. This can be done by selecting
Slope and entering the value (similar to Figure 5-11
Slope and entering the value (refer to Figure 5-11).
for display lighting).
4 Turn on all instrument panel and cockpit lighting.
Minimize photocell input levels by simulating night conditions in the cockpit. Complete steps 6 - 11 with the
5
goal of achieving consistency between all cockpit lighting.
If the display is too bright, lower the Min Level and/or If the keys are too bright, lower the Min Level and/or
6 adjust the lighting Slope to achieve the desired adjust the lighting Slope to achieve the desired
brightness. brightness.
If the display is not bright enough, raise the Min Level If the keys are not bright enough, raise the Min Level
7
to the desired brightness. to the desired brightness.
8 Simulate direct maximum sunlight in the cockpit.
Verify that the display produces maximum brightness Adjust the Cutoff percentage as shown in
9 on the backlight output level. Adjust Max Level if Figure 5-12, such that the key backlighting is
needed. switched off in bright light.
10 Simulate average sunlight conditions/average input conditions in the cockpit (average Source Input Level%).
If the display is too bright or too dim, vary the Slope If the key is too bright or too dim, vary the Slope
11 and/or Offset percentage to achieve desired and/or Offset percentage to achieve desired
brightness at mid-range lighting input levels. brightness at mid-range lighting input levels.
Verify that the lighting Slope, Offset, and Min Level still maintain the low-light visibility requirements achieved
12
in previous steps. Repeat any steps necessary to re-adjust night lighting settings.
13 Adjust the Response Time to smooth changes to brightness, as required.
14 Verify that adjustments made in the preceding steps are appropriate for all expected lighting conditions.

Rev. 13 Page 5-40
Figure 5-11 Lighting Curve Slope Configuration
Figure 5-12 Cutoff Percentage Configuration

Rev. 13 Page 5-41
Lighting Bus Configuration - Enhanced Lighting De-selected
The Display Lighting and the Knob Lighting curves must be set individually as noted in Table 5-47.
Table 5-47 Lighting Bus Configuration Procedure

Lighting Bus Curve
Step
Display Knob
Under Source Selection, set Lighting Bus as the Under Source Selection, set Lighting Bus as the
1
source for Display Source. source for Knob Source.
Under Lightning Bus Configuration, set the Input Type to match the aircraft lighting bus voltage and the
2 Response Time to a low level (e.g., 0 sec) to allow the display to adjust more quickly to dimmer bus input
changes.
Follow steps 4 - 12 to achieve consistency between all cockpit lighting. Figure 5-13 shows the primary
3
settings on both the display lighting and the keys lighting curves.
4 Simulate night conditions in the cockpit.
Set the Transition to 5%. Below this source input
value, the photocell will override the dimmer bus for
5 display backlighting control.
NOTE: This also allows the photocell to function as a
backup in the event of a lighting bus failure.
Turn the dimmer bus knob to its minimum setting or
below the transition % value.
6 NOTE: Steps 7 - 9 and 11 will set the photocell Turn the dimmer bus knob to its minimum setting.
functionality when the lighting bus is below the
transition % value.
If the display is too bright, lower the Min Level and/or If the knob is too bright, lower the Min Level and/or
7
adjust the Slope to achieve the desired brightness. adjust the Slope to achieve the desired brightness.
If the display is too dim, increase the Min Level to If the knob is too dim, increase the Min Level to
8
achieve desired levels. achieve desired levels.
With the dimmer bus still off or below the transition %
With the dimmer bus still off, adjust the Offset such
9 value, adjust the Offset such that the display remains
that the bezel key remains visible.
readable.
Slowly move the dimmer bus knob towards its Slowly move the dimmer bus knob towards its
maximum setting. Observe the rate of change maximum setting. Observe the rate of change
between the display lighting, bezel key lighting, and between the display lighting, bezel key lighting, and
10
any other cockpit illuminated information over the full any other cockpit illuminated information over the full
range above transition % value of the dimmer bus. range of the dimmer bus. Adjust the Slope and/or
Adjust the Slope and/or Offset to obtain consistency. Offset to obtain consistency.
With the dimmer bus off, simulate direct sunlight
conditions in the cockpit. If the brightness is below
11
the desired level, adjust the Slope setting to achieve
maximum desired brightness.
Adjust the Response Time to smooth changes to brightness, as required. This can be done from the Lighting
12 Bus Configuration page (Setup → Lighting → Lighting Bus Configuration). You will need to save your
configuration when exiting the Lighting Curve Configuration page.
Verify that adjustments made in the preceding steps are appropriate and functional for all expected lighting
13
conditions.

Rev. 13 Page 5-42
Figure 5-13 Display Lighting (Left) and Knob Lighting (Right) Curves
Enhanced Lighting Mode Configuration

The Enhanced Lighting mode can be used to better control the display and knob lighting to match varying
lighting conditions. When the lighting bus is selected as the source for the display lighting control, a
backup photocell curve will be configured in the event of lighting bus failure.
Configure the Enhanced Lighting function using the instructions contained in Table 5-48, Table 5-49, and
Table 5-50.
Table 5-48 Photocell Configuration Procedure - Enhanced Lighting

Step Display Keys
1 Under Source Selection, set Photocell as the input source for both the Display Source and/or Keys Source.
2 Under Photocell Configuration, set the Response Time to a level between 2 - 7 seconds.
3 Touch Enhanced Lighting Mode on. The button should be highlighted green.
Touch Lighting Curve Configuration → Knob Lighting
4 Day Mode and adjust the Cutoff percentage. This allows for
the key backlighting to be switched off in bright light.
5 Simulate night conditions in the cockpit by using blankets or a similar method, such that the cockpit can be
made progressively brighter for steps 6 and 7.
Under Lighting Curve Configuration → Display/Knob Lighting Day Mode, set the Min Level and
Vertex 1 while the panel is experiencing night conditions. The level adjustments can be made by selecting
6 Vertex ( ) and changing the values (refer to Figure 5-17). Seek consistency between all cockpit lighting.
NOTE: A vertex represents a specific output value based on a given input value, where the goal is to
customize the lighting curve by manipulating the vertices
Set the remainder of the vertices while progressively introducing light to the interior of the aircraft. Set the
7 Max Level as desired. It is recommended to configure the curve to such that the display reaches the
desired max output level (%) prior to 100% input. A linear curve for the photocell typically works well (refer
to Figure 5-14).

Rev. 13 Page 5-43
Figure 5-14 Enhanced Lighting Mode Example Photocell
Display (Left) and Knob (Right)
Table 5-49 Lighting Bus Configuration Procedure - Enhanced (Display)

Step Lighting Bus Day Mode Curve - Display
1 Under Source Selection, set Display Source to Lighting Bus.
Under Lightning Bus Configuration, set the Input Type to match the aircraft lighting bus voltage, and set
2
the Response Time to a value between 0 - 7 seconds.
Touch Lighting Curve Configuration → Display Lighting Day Mode and set the Transition percentage
4 to 5% (refer to Figure 5-15). Below this set value, the display brightness will be controlled by the
photocell.
Set the dimmer knob to the off position. The Source Input level (%) must be below the transition point set
5
previously.
Touch the Curve button to change it to the Photocell Backup option (refer to Figure 5-16).
6 NOTE: The Max Level and the Min Level set in the next steps will also set the max and min levels for the
dimmer mode operation curve.
Simulate night conditions in the cockpit by using blankets or a similar method, such that the cockpit can
7
be made progressively brighter for steps 8 and 9.
Set the Min Level and Vertex 1 while the panel is experiencing night conditions. The level adjustments
can be made by selecting Vertex ( ) and changing the values (refer to Figure 5-17). Seek consistency
8 between all cockpit lighting.
customize the lighting curve by manipulating the vertices.
9 Max Level as desired. It is recommended to configure this curve to make sure the display reaches the
desired max output level (%) prior to 100% input. A linear curve for the photocell typically works well.
Touch the Curve button to change it to the Lighting Bus option (refer to Figure 5-16). This sets the curve
10
for the dimmer bus functionality.
11 Verify functionality of dimmer knob. Re-adjust Transition point if/as required.

Rev. 13 Page 5-44
Figure 5-15 Enhanced Lighting Mode Example Lighting Bus - Display
Figure 5-16 Selection Between Lighting Bus and Photocell Backup Curves

Rev. 13 Page 5-45
Table 5-50 Lighting Bus Configuration Procedure - Enhanced (Knob)
Step Lighting Bus Day Mode Curve - Knob
1 Under Source Selection, set Knob Source to Lighting Bus.
Set the Lighting Bus - Input Type to match the aircraft lighting bus voltage, and set the Response Time to
2
a value between 0 - 7 seconds.
4 Touch Lighting Curve Configuration → Knob Lighting Day Mode.
Simulate night conditions in the cockpit by using blankets or a similar method, such that the cockpit can
5
be made progressively brighter for steps 6 and 8.
Set the Min Level and Vertex 1 while the panel is experiencing night conditions. The level adjustments
can be made by selecting Vertex ( ) and changing the values (refer to Figure 5-17). Seek consistency
6 between all cockpit lighting.
customize the lighting curve by manipulating the vertices.
Max Level as desired. It is recommended to configure this curve to make sure the display reaches the
7
desired max output level (%) prior to 100% input. A linear curve for the photocell typically works well (refer
to Figure 5-17).
8 Verify functionality of dimmer knob. Re-adjust Transition point if/as required.
Figure 5-17 Vertex Adjustment Dialog Box
CAUTION
The display must be viewable under all anticipated lighting conditions, including:
• When the display is in direct sunlight
• When the cockpit is bright but the photocell is in heavy shadow (such as flight into a
setting sun)
• When the cockpit is very dim, the display must not be excessively bright

Rev. 13 Page 5-46
5.6.3 Page Configuration
The Page Config page contains options that determine which pages will display in Normal mode based on
the primary function(s) of the specific display as configured on the Unit Configuration page (refer to
Section 5.3.4). Refer to Section 5.6.3.7 for an example of each page displayed in Normal mode.
In Configuration mode, navigate to the Setup → Page Config page, as shown in Figure 5-18. Some
instrument types contain optional pages that can be toggled on and off or pages that can be rearranged.
Instrument types that do not have configurable pages (i.e., Primary ADI) will have the Page Config button
grayed out.
Figure 5-18 Page Config Page - MFD/Standby ADI (Left) and EIS (Right)
5.6.3.1 Primary ADI Page Options

When a unit is configured as a Primary ADI, the ADI page must be displayed at all times; therefore, the
Page Config page will be grayed out. Figure 5-19 depicts possible ADI page styles as configured from the
Airframe Configuration page (refer to Section 5.6.1).
Attitude information is displayed in the form of a virtual blue sky and brown ground with a white horizon
line. The attitude indicator displays pitch, roll, and slip/skid information. The airspeed tape will be located
vertically on the left side of the display and the altitude tape will be located on the right side if configured
as a 3-in-1 or 4-in-1 ADI. Magnetic heading will be displayed horizontally on the bottom of display if
configured as a 4-in-1 ADI.
Figure 5-19 Primary ADI Page – Basic, 3-in-1, 4-in-1

Rev. 13 Page 5-47
5.6.3.2 HSI Page Options
The HSI has two selectable pages that can be toggled on or off.
• Standard HSI page — Provides magnetically stabilized primary heading.
• Enhanced HSI page — Provides map underlay capable of displaying ownship on a moving map
with traffic and weather overlays.
5.6.3.3 MFD Page Options

The MFD configuration contains configurable pages from 1 - 17. To configure a page as a certain function,
touch the Page ( ) button and select the desired page from the list. The GI 275 will automatically populate
the maximum number of pages based on the interfaced equipment. To limit the number of displayed pages
in Normal mode, configure unwanted pages to None.
• CDI page — Displays lateral and vertical deviations.
• Traffic page [1] — Provides depiction of traffic (ADS-B, TIS-A, TCAS).
• SXM Weather page [1] — Provides depiction of SXM weather (with valid subscription).
• FIS-B Weather page [1] — Provides depiction of FIS-B weather.
• Stormscope page [1] — Provides depiction of lightning strikes.
• Terrain page — Provides depiction of terrain.
• Map page — Displays moving map with ownship icon.
• Gauges Main page [2] [3] — Displays required EIS gauges (Main EIS page in Normal mode).
• Gauges AUX page [2] [3] — Displays additional EIS gauges (AUX EIS page in Normal mode).
• CHT/EGT page [2] [3] — Displays a graph depicting cylinder head temperature and exhaust gas
temperature for each cylinder
• Fuel page [2] [3] — Displays additional fuel data.
• Summary page [2] — Displays supplementary EIS data, such as flight/engine timers and max
temperatures.
• MFD Data page — Displays configurable navigation information. Requires interface to external
navigator to populate information.
• Radio Altimeter page [1] — Displays altitude above terrain.
• Transponder page [1] [4] — Provides control and display of GTX 345 transponders.
Notes:
[1] Page only available when the GI 275 is interfaced to an applicable LRU.
[2] EIS pages only available when fully configured in accordance with Section 5.7.
[3] GI 275 MFDs must not display any EIS pages other than the Summary page in twin-
engine EIS installations or installations with more than one primary EIS display.
[4] The Transponder page must be set as the final page, if configured.

Rev. 13 Page 5-48
5.6.3.4 EIS Page Options
• Gauges Main page — Displays required EIS gauges (Main EIS page in Normal mode).
• Gauges AUX page — Displays additional EIS gauges (AUX EIS page in Normal mode).
• CHT/EGT page — Displays a graph depicting cylinder head temperature and exhaust gas
temperature for each cylinder.
• Fuel page — Displays additional fuel data.
• Summary page — Displays supplementary EIS data, such as flight/engine timers and max
temperatures.
5.6.3.5 MFD/Standby ADI Page Options

The MFD/Standby ADI contains configurable pages from 1 - 18. To configure a page as a certain function,
touch the Page ( ) button and select the desired function from the list. The GI 275 will automatically
populate the maximum number of pages based on the interfaced equipment. To limit the number of
displayed pages in Normal mode, configure unwanted pages to None.
NOTE
When configured as a MFD/Standby ADI, the ADI page will be the configured as Page 1.
CAUTION
If the GI 275 is configured as a standby for a system that is not approved for MFD pages
per Table 3-12, ensure that all MFD pages are configured off.
• ADI page [3] — Displays pitch, roll, slip/skip, airspeed tape, altitude tape, and optional heading.
• CDI page — Displays lateral and vertical deviations.
• Traffic page [1] — Provides depiction of traffic (ADS-B, TIS-A, TCAS).
• SXM Weather page [1] — Provides depiction of SXM weather (with valid subscription).
• FIS-B Weather page [1] — Provides depiction of FIS-B weather.
• Stormscope page [1] — Provides depiction of lightning strikes.
• Terrain page — Provides depiction of terrain.
• Map page — Displays moving map with ownship icon.
• Gauges Main page [2] [4] — Displays required EIS gauges (Main EIS page in Normal mode).
• Gauges AUX page [2] [4] — Displays additional EIS gauges (AUX EIS page in Normal mode).
• CHT/EGT page [2] [4] — Displays a graph depicting cylinder head temperature and exhaust gas
temperature for each cylinder.
• Fuel page [2] [4] — Displays additional fuel data.
• Summary page [2] — Displays supplementary EIS data, such as flight/engine timers and max
temperatures.
• MFD Data page [2] — Displays configurable navigation information. Requires interface to
external navigator to populate information.
• Radio Altimeter page [1] — Displays altitude above terrain.
• Transponder page [1] [5] — Provides control and display of GTX 345 transponders.
Notes:
[1] Page only available when the GI 275 is interfaced to an applicable LRU.

Rev. 13 Page 5-49
[2] EIS pages are only available when fully configured in accordance with Section 5.7.
[3] The ADI style is configured on the Airframe Configuration page (refer to Section 5.6.1).
[4] GI 275 MFDs must not display any EIS pages other than the Summary page in twin-
engine EIS installations or installations with more than one primary EIS display.
[5] The Transponder page must be set as the final page, if configured.
5.6.3.6 HSI/Standby ADI Page Options

The HSI/Standby ADI has selectable pages that can be toggled on or off.
NOTE
When configured as a HSI/Standby ADI, the ADI page is always configured on.
• ADI page [1] — Displays pitch, roll, slip/skip, airspeed tape, altitude tape, and optional heading.
Notes:
[1] The ADI style is configured on the Airframe Configuration page (refer to Section 5.6.1).
5.6.3.7 GI 275 Normal Mode Page Options
ADI page CDI page Standard HSI page
Enhanced HSI page Traffic page SXM Weather page

Rev. 13 Page 5-50
FIS-B Weather page Stormscope page Terrain page
Map page Main EIS page AUX EIS page
CHT/EGT page Summary page Fuel page
MFD Data page Radar Altimeter page Transponder page

Figure 5-20 GI 275 Normal Mode Pages

Rev. 13 Page 5-51
5.6.4 Sensors
This page configures the default ADC and AHRS sensors as the GI 275 allows up to three ADC and three
AHRS sensors to be interfaced for the entire system, which includes the GI 275 internal sensors.
Auto Revert is not approved as part of this STC and must be disabled.
Each GI 275 with an internal ADAHRS must have the default sensor match the ADC/AHRS ID assigned
to its internal source per Section 5.5.3 and Section 5.5.4. This allows the specific GI 275 to consume its
own internal sensors first. For example:
• For a single GI 275, GI 1 sensors are assigned as follows:
◦ ADC 1: Internal
◦ AHRS 1: Internal
◦ Default sensors are set to ADC 1 and AHRS 1
• For a dual GI 275 system, GI 1 sensors are assigned as follows:
◦ ADC 1: Internal
◦ ADC 2: Other GI 275
◦ AHRS 2: Other GI 275
GI 2 sensors are assigned as follows:
◦ ADC 2: Internal
When an external ADC/AHRS is configured as part of the GI 275 system, such as G500/G600 TXi, the
external ADC/AHRS must be assigned as ADC 1 and AHRS 1 on all GI 275s in the system that use ADC
and AHRS data. For example:
• For a TXi/single GI 275 system, GI 1 sensors are assigned as follows:
◦ ADC 1: GX00 TXi
◦ ADC 2: Internal
◦ AHRS 1: GX00 TXi
• For a TXi/dual GI 275 system, GI 1 sensors are assigned as follows:
◦ ADC 1: GX00 TXi
◦ ADC 2: Internal
GI 2 sensors are assigned as follows:
◦ ADC 1: GX00 TXi
◦ ADC 3: Internal

Rev. 13 Page 5-52
• For a dual TXi/GI 275 system, GI 1 sensors are assigned as follows:
◦ ADC 1: GX00 TXi
◦ ADC 2: GX00 TXi
◦ ADC 3: Internal
Figure 5-21 shows an example configuration of an external ADC/AHRS and two GI 275s with internal
ADAHRS.
GI 1 GI 2
Figure 5-21 External ADC/AHRS Sensor Configuration Example

Rev. 13 Page 5-53
5.6.5 Audio Alert Config
Audio Out
This determines which GI 275 unit will produce audio. Must be set to the unit with Terrain Alerting
enabled, if applicable. The default is GI 1.
Voice Type
This makes the selection between Male and Female voices for alerts. The default is Female.
Alert Volume
This sets the audio level. Audio alerts must be loud, attention-getting, and clearly intelligible under all
cockpit noise conditions. Audio alerts should be set slightly louder than the normal volume of COM and
intercom transmissions. The default is 50%.
Audio Test
This allows the testing of associated audio clips. Touch the icon on any/all annunciations to verify
volume audibility set in the previous step. Adjust the Alert Volume as desired to match audio levels of
other systems installed in the aircraft.
5.6.6 Terrain/TAWS
If the GI 275 system does not have TAWS B enabled, then configure the Terrain/TAWS per Table 5-51.
When SVT is enabled, the GI 275 must have Terrain-FLTA configured. If the aircraft has multiple systems
capable of Terrain Alerting, such as a GTN Xi or GNS 5XXW, only one system can be set to generate the
Terrain Alert. Set Terrain Mode to Terrain-FLTA and set External TAWS to Installed (HSDB) for a GTN
6XX/7XX or GTN Xi interface or Installed (MapMx) for a GNS 4XXW/5XXW interface.
Table 5-51 Terrain/TAWS Setting

External TAWS Terrain Mode
Terrain-FLTA
Not Installed
Terrain-Proximity (Off)
Installed (MapMX)
Installed (Other) External
Installed (HSDB)
The GI 275 is capable of producing aural and visual TAWS alerts. The alerting algorithm relaxes the
terrain alerting criteria at nearby airports. An airport is considered to be a “nearby airport” if the runways at
the airport meet certain criteria. Select the runway Surface Type and Minimum Length for the aircraft, as
described in Table 5-52.
Table 5-52 TAWS Airframe-Specific Configuration Data

Selection Description Notes
Required runway surface Set the type of runway surface for which the aircraft is
Runway Surface
type authorized.
Set the shortest distance required for takeoff and
Runway Minimum runway length for
landing (typically the distance given for sea level using
Min Length TAWS/Terrain Alerting
the coldest temperature given in the POH/AFM).

Rev. 13 Page 5-54
5.6.7 Miscellaneous
Traffic Color
Must be set to White. This color designates the base color for traffic targets.
Altitude Alerter
When an altitude bug is configured, this sets the distance at which the GI 275 will flash when approaching
the altitude bug. Audio alerts require an interface to a compatible audio panel. Choose from 200 FT Chime,
1000 FT Chime, or OFF.
Database Sync
GI 275 and GTN 6XX/7XX or GTN Xi units synchronize databases using Database Sync in order to
minimize user effort when loading/updating databases. The user only has to insert an SD card with
databases to be loaded into the GTN 6XX/7XX or GTN Xi and the databases will be updated on all
connected LRUs for all displays with Database Sync enabled rather than having to update each unit
individually. The GI 275 system and GTN 6XX/7XX or GTN Xi will have different system IDs. The
databases being synchronized must be enabled for both system IDs in order to allow the Database Sync to
take place. Refer to Section 5.2 for more information on acquiring and loading databases.
The following databases are synchronized:
• Airport directory
• Aviation
• Obstacle
• SafeTaxi
• Basemap
The following databases are not synchronized:
• Terrain
Make the desired selection between Pilot Control and Disabled for Database Sync functionality. Selecting
Pilot Control enables Database Sync functionality.
CDI & BARO Side SYNC

With this setting enabled, changing the CDI source or BARO setting on an interfaced PFD or another
GI 275 will also change it on the GI 275. Choose from Always On or Pilot Control. The default is Pilot
Control.
Outside Air Temp

This sets how the outside air temperature is referenced in Normal mode on an ADI. The options are OAT,
SAT, or None. Selecting None will disable display of outside air temperature in Normal mode on an ADI.
This setting does not affect OAT in a standalone EIS configuration where the OAT probe is interfaced to a
GEA 24 or GEA 110. Outside Air Temp, when connected directly to a GEA in a standalone EIS
configuration, will always be shown as OAT(EIS), which represents Total Air Temperature.

Rev. 13 Page 5-55
5.6.8 Battery
This configures whether a backup battery is installed in the GI 275. The backup battery is optional in all
installations except for a Standby ADI that does not utilize an electrical power source that is independent
from the aircraft’s primary electrical power source. This should only be enabled if the GI 275 backup
battery is installed per Section 4.4.2.
When toggled from disabled to enabled (illuminated green), the GI 275 will trigger a requirement to
perform a Battery Rundown Test (refer to Section 5.8.4). Until this test is completed, the GI 275 will
produce an annunciation in Normal mode.
5.6.9 Ownship Icon Configuration

• Icon – Select one of the following appropriate icons to match the aircraft type:
◦ Low Wing Prop
◦ High Wing Prop
◦ Turboprop
◦ Twin Engine Prop
◦ Arrow
◦ Basic Aircraft
• Color – Select White as the display option

Rev. 13 Page 5-56
5.7 EIS
This section provides data for the configuration of a GI 275 EIS. Prior to beginning EIS configuration, an
EIS data source (GEA 24/110) must be configured via the Interfaces page, per the directions found in
Section 5.5.12. Refer to Section 2.1.5.1 for limitations and guidance on selection of engine adapter(s). The
GI 275 must be configured as either an EIS, MFD/Standby ADI, or MFD in order for the EIS page to be
available.
There are six subsections of the EIS configuration. The subsections must be completed in the following
order:
1. Engine – Enter single- or multi-engine, number of cylinders, engine power settings, flight hours,
HOBBS hours, and Tach hours.
2. Sensors – Select the sensors that are installed in the aircraft for EIS 1 or EIS 2 (if applicable).
3. Pages – Configure Full Time Gauges, Full Time Extra Info, CHT/EGT page extra info, and lean
parameters.
4. Gauges – Configure the gauge markings and layout.
5. Fuel – Enter fuel tank specifications and fuel type, and perform a Quantity Calibration.
6. Diagnostics – View the status of the engine sensors and GEA.
The sections below outline the data required and the data entry procedure for the first three subsections.
Fuel Quantity Calibration is outlined in Section 5.8.5.1. Procedures begin assuming the GI 275 is powered
on in Configuration mode.
5.7.1 Engine
Configure the EIS as a Single- or Multi-engine system, with a 4- or 6-cylinder engine, depending on the
aircraft.
Set the Engine Power parameters for supplemental Percent Engine Power indication if desired. The
following items under Engine Power must be configured for engine power to be available:
• Maximum Rated Engine Horsepower
• Maximum Manifold Pressure
◦ If normally-aspirated, defaulted to 29.92 in-Hg
• RPM at Maximum Rated Engine Horsepower
• Verify configured RPM value type matches the display RPM type (i.e., engine RPM vs propeller
RPM)
• Minimum Brake Specific Fuel Consumption
◦ Defaulted to 0.39 lb/hr/BHP
NOTE
Minimum BSFC should not be changed from the default value unless an alternate value
can be identified in a specific installation’s engine operator’s manual. Some engine
operator’s manuals graphically depict minimum BSFC on engine performance curves.
Refer to the aircraft time meter(s), tachometer, and the aircraft records to ensure the times are entered in
the correct field and are accurate.
Flight Hours accumulate when the aircraft is in the air. The EIS will increment this value when the engine
exceeds 1250 RPM. HOBBS Hours accumulate when the engine is running and the oil pressure exceeds
5 psi. Tach Hours increment at a normal rate when the RPM is equal to cruise RPM, slower when RPM is
less than cruise RPM, and faster when RPM is above cruise RPM.

Rev. 13 Page 5-57
Table 5-53 EIS Configuration - Engine
Engine Number of Cylinder
Engine Single Engine or 4 cylinders or
Multi Engine 6 cylinders
Flight Hours HOBBS Hours Tach Hours Cruise RPM [1]
Acft/Eng Time
Notes:
[1] Set Cruise RPM based on the removed tachometer. Refer to Table 5-54.
Obtain the required information for the Engine subsection using Table 5-53, and populate all fields on the Engine page.
Table 5-54 Cruise RPM Setting

GI 275
Removed Tachometer
Config
Example Aircraft, Reference Only
Cruise Stewart
IFR Mitchell AC Type
Setting Warner
Commander 112, 114; Grumman/American AA-1, AA-1A; Beech C35, D35,
E35, F35; Bellanca/Champion 7EC, 7FC, 7GC, 7HC,7GCB, 7ECA, 7GCAA,
2300 55-35-7 D1-112-5023 P-551-AZ RT-7 7GCBC, 7KCAB, 8KCAB, 14-19; Cessna 120, 140, 170, 180, 182, 185 (with IO-
470 eng); Lake Aircraft C-1, C-2, L-4; Mooney M20, M20A, M20D; Piper PA-12,
PA-18, PA-20, PA-22, PA-23, PA-24, PA-28, PA-30, PA-32, PA-39
2050 55-35-8 D1-112-5122 P-551-AYZ RT-8 Beech 35, A35, B35, 35R
2300 55-35-9 D1-112-5030 P-551-AZH RT-9 Aeronca Champion, Chief (early models); Piper PA18 (w/TCM eng)
2050 55-35-10 D1-112-5124 P-551-AZJ RT-10 Aeronca Champion, Chief (late models), 7AC, 11AC; Beech Musketeer
Bonanza: G35, H35, J35, K35, M35, N35, P35, S35, V35, 36, A36, 95, B95,
2566 55-35-11 D1-112-5025 P-551-TA RT-11 B95A, D95A; Cessna 150, 152, 172, 177, 185, 188 (with IO-520 eng), 206, 207,
210, 310, 320; Helio H250, H391, H395; Navion E, F, G
2566 55-35-12 D1-112-5032 P-551-AZK RT-12 Bellanca Champion: 7AC
1800 55-35-14 D1-112-5028 P-551-AZA RT-14
3000 55-35-15 D1-112-5034 P-551-AZB RT-15 Cessna 175
1800 55-35-16 D1-112-5029 P-551-AZL RT-16
2400 55-35-17 D1-112-5024 N/A RT-17 Maule M5/6/MX7-180, M5/6/7/MX7-235
If the Cruise RPM cannot be determined from Table 5-54 or from markings on the original tachometer, use the POH or AFM to find the cruise RPM for 65% HP,
6000 ft PA, Standard Temperature, at 21 in. Hg (if applicable). Verify the Cruise RPM value type matches the display RPM type (i.e. engine RPM or propeller
RPM).

Rev. 13 Page 5-58
5.7.2 Sensors
Configure each connected EIS sensor as shown in Appendix Section C.19. The following steps are required
for this section:
1. Determine all installed EIS sensors that interface to the GI 275 system.
2. Navigate to the System Info → Devices Online page and verify that EIS 1/2 has a green
checkmark.
3. Navigate to EIS → Sensors.
4. Select the Sensor Model configuration shown in Appendix Section C.19 for each sensor.
Figure 5-22 Sensor Menu Example
a. Touch File Location and then select the source.

b. Select the wired GEA port, if applicable, via the Port Select field. If not applicable, there will
be no Port Select field.
c. Touch Model and then select the installed sensor. A silver checkmark will appear if the
configuration is valid. A yellow triangle will appear if the configuration is not valid.
d. Touch Enter.
An example configuration of a TIT sensor is shown in Figure 5-23. The selection sequence is highlighted.

Rev. 13 Page 5-59
1 2 3
4 6
7 8 9
Figure 5-23 TIT Sensor Configuration Example

Rev. 13 Page 5-60
Additional specific sensor configurations are as follows:
RPM
• The RPM must display the originally intended RPM based on the aircraft/engine performance. The
following information can be found either on the engine TCDS or Operator’s Manual. Only the
P-Lead can be used for geared engines
• Select the RPM sensor type:
◦ P-Lead - select configuration to match the engine magneto type, two single magnetos or one
dual-magneto. Select the engine reduction gear ratio (if applicable) to ensure the RPM gauge
displays the AFM/POH values
◦ Mag Vent Pickup
Shunt - Alternator Load

1. Select the model.
2. The shunt can be calibrated only if it is out of tolerance. For calibration:
a. With the aircraft alternator OFF, select the installed shunt.
b. Reselect the Shunt - Alternator Load.
3. Touch Calibrate to zero the indication.
The displayed shunt value is a static value captured upon entering the Shunt page; if the electrical load
changes, the page must be reloaded to display the new value.
Manifold Pressure
1. Select the sensor (Sensor→ Manifold PRESS).
2. For the Garmin 011-04202-00 and 011-05783-00 sensor configurations, if the displayed manifold
pressure value is incorrect, perform the calibration.
a. Reselect the manifold pressure sensor model, then touch the Calibration. button.
b. Enter the local Barometric Pressure, then touch the Current BARO button.
c. Enter the local field elevation, then touch the Field Elevation button.
d. Touch the Calibrate button.
Fuel Quantity
Select the fuel quantity sensor model (refer to Section 3.4.3 and Appendix C for sensor selection details).
Refer to Section 5.8.5.1 for the calibration procedure.

Rev. 13 Page 5-61
Fuel Flow
1. Select the sensor model. Most aircraft will use Low for less filtering with a more responsive gauge.
Select Hi if the fuel flow gauge is unsettled (e.g., to smooth carburetor float surges).
2. Enter the nominal fuel flow sensor K-Factor. Use the Floscan 201B-6 sensor configuration for a
JPI P/N 700900-1. Use the Floscan 231 sensor configuration for a JPI P/N 700900-2.
For all aircraft with an existing fuel flow limitation, the EIS fuel flow must be within 10% of actual; refer
to the fuel flow check in Section 6.5.3.2.6. The pilot can make adjustments in Normal mode, which is
limited to 15%.
Refer to Table 5-55 for the nominal K-factor values.
CAUTION
K-Factor must be in units of pulses per gallon. Different units will result in inaccurate fuel
flow and fuel computer results.
Table 5-55 Fuel Flow K-Factor

Sensor K-Factor
EI FT-60 (Red Cube) (Hi or Low) 68,000
EI FT-90 (Gold Cube) 33,800
Floscan 201B-6 (Hi or Low) [1]
Floscan 231 (Hi or Low) [1]
JPI 700900-1 (201) [1]
JPI 700900-2 (231) [1]
Beech 102-389012-11 (Hi or Low) 84,949
Notes:
[1] Use the tag attached to transducer for K-Factor value. Data must be entered as XX,XXX.
For example, if the value is XY.XX, multiply the K-factor value from the tag by 1000 and
enter XY,XXX. If there is no K-factor available on the attached tag, use a K-factor value of
29000.

Rev. 13 Page 5-62
5.7.3 Pages
5.7.3.1 All Pages
Full Time Gauges
Configures which gauges will display as half-arc gauges at the top of every EIS page (from left to right).
RPM and Manifold Pressure (if applicable) must be selected as full time gauges per this STC. The order
that they are displayed (left or right) must be configured so that the RPM gauge is the same orientation (left
or right) as the aircraft’s throttle control.
Full Time Extra Info

Configures which extra information will display on each EIS page above the full time gauges. Select from
the following options:
• Percent Power (requires RPM, MAP, Fuel Flow, and OAT)
• Prop Sync (limited to conventional twin-engine aircraft; prohibited in centerline thrust aircraft,
such as Cessna 337)
• Off
NOTE
Prop Sync will only display on one of the two EIS displays in a conventional twin-engine
installation. Percent Power must be configured off if the other EIS has Prop Sync
configured.
5.7.3.2 CHT/EGT Page

Leaning Source
Configures which temperature sensor is used as the source for Lean Assist. The options are EGT and TIT.
Using TIT as the Leaning Source is not approved for aircraft with multiple TIT sensors.
Advanced
Configures Lean Assist settings. Configure the settings per Table 5-56.
Table 5-56 CHT/EGT Page Advanced Settings

Setting Description
Lean – Temp Incr Select the temperature increase threshold. The default is 14°F.
Lean – Temp Drop Select the temperature drop threshold. The default is 7.2°F.
Lean – Use FFlow? [1] Enable or Disable the use of fuel flow sensor data for lean assist aiding.
Lean – FFlow Hyst Select the fuel flow hysteresis threshold. The default is 0.2 gal/hr
Notes:
[1] When the use of Fuel Flow sensor data is disabled, only Rich of Peak Lean Assist is available.

Rev. 13 Page 5-63
5.7.4 Gauges
If configured for twin-engine EIS, a Source button will be selectable at the top of the Gauges page. The
GI 275 that is directly interfaced to the GEA connected to Engine 1 (i.e., EIS 1) must have Engine 1
selected as the Source per this STC. The GI 275 that is directly interfaced to the GEA connected to
Engine 2 (i.e., EIS 2) must have Engine 2 selected as the Source per this STC.
5.7.4.1 Gauge Layout

Refer to Appendix F for gauge layout information.
5.7.4.2 Gauge Markings and Ranges

Obtain the AFM/POH or other approved data to set the gauge markings and gauge ranges. If the existing
aircraft gauges that are being replaced do not match the AFM/POH or other approved data, the installer
must resolve the discrepancy. Prior modifications may have altered the aircraft limitations and operating
parameters.
WARNING
Gauge markings, limitations, and units present in the AFM/POH, this manual, or other
approved data must be represented on the EIS gauge. No additional markings are permitted
on required gauges.
NOTE
The GI 275 EIS typically utilizes bar gauges instead of full radial gauges. Because of this,
colored “arcs” listed in the POH/AFM should be configured as colored “ranges” on the
GI 275 instead.
NOTE
Only red or yellow colors are capable of alerting. A red range will alert and can be used
for items such as low fuel quantity alerting. Refer to Appendix Section F.6.1.
Gauge markings are not approved for the following gauges:

• EGT

Rev. 13 Page 5-64
If replacing an existing gauge, all markings will need be replicated on the EIS display. Use Table 5-57 to
gather the marking and range information for each gauge specified in the AFM/POH or other approved
data.
If configuring a new EIS gauge, only configure the Units and the Gauge Range. All units must match the
AFM/POH, if applicable, and values selected must be appropriate for the gauge function.
Table 5-57 Original Gauge Settings

Attribute Data
Gauge Type
Units
Color:
Arc(s) Min:
Max:
Color
Minimum Line
Min:
(minimum safe operating limit)
Max:
Color:
Maximum Line
Min:
(maximum safe operating limit)
Max:
Color:
Line/Radial(s) Min:
Max:
Minimum (lowest value on gauge):
Gauge Range
Maximum (highest value on gauge):
Other Markings
Include the settings in Table 5-58 for the specific gauge. If the markings in Table 5-58 conflict with AFM/
POH or other approved data, use the AFM/POH or other approved data.
Table 5-58 Additional Gauge Settings

Gauge Marking
Carb Temp Blue range from -15°C to 5°C
Fuel Quantity Red line at 0 (usable fuel)

Rev. 13 Page 5-65
As an example only, the configuration of a pressure gauge is shown in Figure 5-24.
a. b. c.
a. Select Gauges from the
EIS page.
b. Select the gauge type to be
configured.
c. Configure the gauge units
and Gauge Range.
d. Select Marks.
e. Select New Range to add a
range.
f. Configure color, range
minimum, and range
maximum. Select Enter to
confirm. Repeat as
d. e. f. necessary to configure
markings.
g. Select New Line to add a
line.
h. Configure line color, value,
and as a minimum or
maximum. Select Enter to
confirm. Repeat as
necessary to configure
markings.
i. Verify final gauge
presentation.
g. h. i.
Figure 5-24 Gauge Configuration Example
Use the following procedure for gauge configuration:

1. Complete Table 5-57 for each gauge specified in the AFM/POH or other approved data, and refer
to Table 5-58 for additional settings.
2. Using the information gathered in step 1, configure each gauge as shown in the example in
Figure 5-24. The EIS gauge settings must accurately convey the limitations in the AFM/POH or
other approved data.
3. Use Table 5-59 as an additional guide to set the gauge ranges. When setting the gauge range, verify
the minimum and maximum values are captured within the physical markings of the gauge. It may
be necessary to adjust the minimum and maximum gauge range so that the gauge needle has a
value represented. Refer to Figure 5-25 for an example.
4. When configuring gauge ranges that include red line markings, the total gauge range must be
configured so that the pilot can identify an exceeded value if the gauge passes the redline marking.

Rev. 13 Page 5-66
a. The range markings of 5 PSI b. To capture the range between
and 110 PSI are not captured 5 PSI and 110 PSI, it may be
within gauge presentation. necessary to extend the range.
Figure 5-25 Gauge Range Marking Example
If a gauge range is not specified by the AFM/POH or other approved data, an appropriate range must be
defined based on the gauge function, as specified in Table 5-59.
Table 5-59 Gauge Minimum and Maximum Ranges
Gauge Guidelines
If a new gauge is being added, configure the gauge range for the functional range of the parameter
General (refer to Figure 5-25).
Unless noted below, the gauge range must include all markings.
Configure the gauge range minimum and maximum based on the range of the tachometer being
Tachometer
replaced.
Manifold The minimum value must be the lower of the following: 10 inHg or 1 inch below the lowest range
Press marking. Use 1 inch above the highest marking as the maximum value.
Oil Press Use 0 psi as the range minimum. Use 5-10 psi above the highest marking as the range maximum.
Oil Temp Use 0°F as the range minimum. Use 10°F above the redline as the range maximum.
Fuel Use 0 as the range minimum. Use the same range maximum as the fuel indicator being replaced. It
(Main/Aux) is common for the fuel tank to hold more fuel than the system can measure.
Use 0 GPH as the range minimum. Use +10% of the highest marking or +10% of the highest takeoff
Fuel Flow
fuel flow at sea level as the range maximum.
Fuel Press Use 0.0 psi as the range minimum. Use +10% above the highest marking as the range maximum.
Use 25°F below the lowest marking as the range minimum. Use 25°F above the highest marking as
CHT
the range maximum. If no markings are present, use a range of 200°F-500°F.
Use 1000°F as the range minimum. Use 50°F above the redline as the range maximum. If no
Primary EGT
markings are present, use a range of 1000°F-1700°F.
Carb The range must be set to -24°C to 34°C.

Rev. 13 Page 5-67
Side Text
The GI 275 EIS provides the Side Text feature for twin-engine aircraft. Side Text allows each gauge to be
labeled L, R, or F to more easily differentiate between EIS 1 and EIS 2 in left/right twin-engine aircraft as
well as centerline thrust (forward/rear) twin-engine aircraft. In single-engine aircraft, this feature should
remain set to the default None.
Figure 5-26 Side Text Example
5.7.5 Fuel
Main Tank
Configure to Single Main or Left & Right for the aircraft main tank.
AUX Tank
Configure to None, Single AUX/Tip, or Left & Right for the aircraft auxiliary tank.
AUX Label
Configure to AUX or Tip for the auxillary tank label.
Fuel Type
Configure to Avgas, Jet A, or Jet B for the aircraft fuel type.
Quantity Calibration
Refer to Section 5.8.5.1 for the Fuel Quantity Calibration procedure.
Full Capacity
Configure the full capacity of the main tank.
Tab Capacity
Configure the tab capacity of the main tank.
5.7.6 Diagnostics
Sensor Status
Displays information on installed GEAs, including temperature and port configurations. Select between
EIS 1 and EIS 2 (if applicable) in the Selected Unit field.
GEA Status
Displays status of configured EIS sensors.

Rev. 13 Page 5-68
5.8 Calibration/Checks
This section provides guidance for calibrating the GI 275 system after the configuration steps have been
completed.
5.8.1 Attitude/Heading Calibration Tests

The connected AHRS will not provide valid outputs until the calibration procedures in this section are
completed. Prior to completing the Pitch/Roll Offset Compensation (Section 5.8.1.2) and Magnetometer
Calibration (Section 6.4.1) procedures, the annunciation “CALIBRATE AHRS/MAG” will be displayed
on the ADI, and the attitude and heading will be displayed. Once the aircraft is moved, the attitude and
heading display will show a red “X”. This condition is normal and will automatically clear when the two
aforementioned calibration procedures are completed.
5.8.1.1 Calibrate Yaw Offset

If required for the installation, set the yaw offset. The range is -15.0 and 15.0 and the default is 0.
5.8.1.2 Calibrate Pitch/Roll Offset

This procedure must be completed on each GI 275 with an integrated ADAHRS. This procedure can be
conducted for each AHRS simultaneously on each display. The aircraft must be leveled to within 0.25° of
zero pitch and zero roll using the procedures in the aircraft maintenance manual or AFM/POH. The
following procedures must be completed with the engine off:
1. Navigate to the Calibrate Pitch/Roll page (Calibration/Test → Attitude/Heading → Calibrate
Pitch/Roll).
2. Complete the steps listed on the display. Touch the Start button to begin the calibration procedure.
3. Follow the on-screen command prompts.
The magnetometer calibration and compass swing are completed after the initial Engine Run-up Test has
been completed. Refer to Section 6.4.1.
5.8.1.3 Manual Pitch/Roll

Allows the pitch and roll values to be set manually.
5.8.1.4 Engine Vibration Test

Refer to Section 6.4.3 for test procedure.
5.8.1.5 Interference Test

Refer to Section 6.4.4 for test procedure.
5.8.1.6 Calibrate Magnetometer

Refer to Section 6.4.1 for the magnetometer calibration procedure and Section 6.4.5 for guidance on site
evaluation of magnetic disturbances

Rev. 13 Page 5-69
5.8.2 Autopilot Calibration
5.8.2.1 Garmin GFC 600 Autopilot
The autopilot interface to a Garmin GFC 600 must be verified. The following calibration procedure is used
to ensure that autopilot information is correctly displayed on the GI 275 Primary ADI.
Complete the following procedure:
1. Power on the aircraft avionics.
2. Engage the autopilot by pressing the AP button on the GMC 605.
3. Verify ROL and PIT ALTS are displayed, green lights next to AP, FD, and YD are illuminated on
the GMC 605.
NOTE
“YD” is only displayed if the aircraft has a yaw damper installed and configured.
4. Verify that the magenta flight director bars are displayed on the GI 275.
a. Move the pitch wheel on the GMC 605 and verify that the flight director bars displayed on the
GI 275 update accordingly.
5. Adjust the altitude bug on the GI 275.
6. Verify that the ALTS value in the armed section on the GMC 605 updates to the altitude bug value
on the GI 275.

Rev. 13 Page 5-70
5.8.2.2 Honeywell (Bendix/King) KFC/KAP 150, KAP 100 Autopilot
The following procedure requires a temporary test harness to be installed as shown in Figure 5-27. The
parts required for the test harness installation are listed in Table 5-60. A voltmeter accurate to ±1mV at a
5 VDC range is also required.
TOP TEST A4 Test Pin 1
ROLL ATT X FEED Test Pin 2
SIGNAL GROUND Test Pin 3

5 KC 19X
2 TC101
A4 TOP TEST A4
4 1 19X1
22 22 ROLL ATT X FEED
Z Z VG REF
Y Y PITCH ATTITUDE HI
21 21 ROLL ATTITUDE HI
To KC 19X
mounting tray 4 1 P19X2
10 10 SIGNAL GROUND
A A CHASIS GROUND
B B AP DISCONNECT
2 2 POWER 14/28VDC
C C VG EXCITATION
1 1 POWER REF
NOTES
THE KC19X CARD EDGE CONNECTORS ARE BOTH ORIENTED SO THE LETTERED SIDE OF THE
1 CONNECTORS FACE UP.
A4 IS THE FOURTH CONNECTOR FROM THE LEFT ON THE TOP WHEN VIEWED FROM THE FRONT. TC101 IS
2 NOT APPLICABLE TO THE KC 190/KAP 100.
Figure 5-27 KAP 100 & KFC/KAP 150 Test Harness

Table 5-60 Extension Harness Parts
Name Description Manufacturer Manufacturer P/N Qty
Main connectors 19X1/ Dual edge TE Connectivity
1 583617-1 2
19X2 female 44- position AMP Connectors
Top side connector Dual edge TE Connectivity
2 583861-7 1
TC101 female 20- position AMP Connectors
Female crimp Terminal edge TE Connectivity
3 61668-2 Varies
connectors crimp AMP Connectors
Main connectors 19X1/ Dual edge Sullins Connector
4 EBM22MMWD 2
19X2 male 44- position Solutions
Connector tip jack, Cinch Connectivity
5 Tip jack [1] 105-0602-001 3
red Solutions Johnson
Notes:
[1] Only required to access the signals on the indicated wires with a voltmeter; therefore, any
other equivalent option is acceptable.

Rev. 13 Page 5-71
Gyro Alignment Procedure
1. Remove the KC 19X computer from the mounting rack.
2. Connect the test harness as shown in Figure 5-27 to allow access to the adjustment pots (one on the
front and three on the side) and the three signal test pins.
3. Power the GI 275 in Configuration mode.
4. Navigate to the Gyro Output Test page (Calibration/Test → Autopilot → Gyro Output Test).
5. Verify that the internal AHRS test values are 0° pitch and 0° roll and are valid (ie., Attitude Valid
button illuminated green).
6. Measure the voltage from test pin 2 (J19x1-22) to test pin 3 (J19x2-10) with a digital voltmeter.
7. Adjust the RN potentiometer to obtain a voltmeter reading of 0.0 VDC.
8. Measure the voltage from test pin 1 (TC101-A4) to test pin 3 (J19x2-10) with a digital voltmeter.
9. Adjust the PDN potentiometer to obtain a voltmeter reading of 0.0 VDC. This step is not
applicable to the KC 190/KAP 100.
10. Set the internal AHRS Output to 25° RT using the right ROLL arrow.
11. Use a digital voltmeter to measure the voltage (+) at test pin 2 (J19x1-22) with reference to test
pin 3 (J19x2-10).
12. Adjust the RDG potentiometer to obtain a voltmeter reading of -5 ± 0.1 VDC.
13. Set the internal AHRS Output to 25° LT using the left ROLL arrow.
14. Verify that the voltmeter reading is now +5 ± 0.1 VDC.
15. Set the internal AHRS Output to 0° RT using the right ROLL arrow.
16. Set the internal AHRS Output to 10° DN using the down PITCH arrow.
17. Use a digital voltmeter to measure the voltage (+) at test pin 1 (TC101-A4) with reference to test
pin 3 (J19x2-10).
18. Adjust the PDG potentiometer to obtain a voltmeter reading of +2 ± 0.1 VDC. This step is not
applicable to the KC 190/KAP 100.
19. Set the internal AHRS Output to 10° UP using the up PITCH arrow.
20. Verify that the voltmeter reading is now -2 ± 0.1 VDC. This step is not applicable to the KC 190/
KAP 100.
21. When the testing is complete, remove the test harness.
Re-insert and secure the KC 19X computer into the rack.

Rev. 13 Page 5-72
5.8.2.3 Honeywell (Bendix/King) KFC 200 Autopilot
The autopilot interface must be configured for a King KFC 200. The following procedure may be used in
place of the KC 295 calibration instructions in Bendix/King KFC 200 IM/MM (P/N 006-05134-0002,
Rev 2) when using the GI 275 for gyro emulation. If all prerequisites are not met, or all steps are unable to
be completed, then this procedure is not authorized for use. The prerequisites are as follows:
• GI 275 is installed for gyro emulation
• Flight Director Type setting KI 256 is being used
• Maintenance test port is installed per Figure 5-28
• A calibrated voltmeter accurate to 1mV at a 5 VDC range
1. Power the GI 275 in Configuration mode.
2. Power on the KFC 200 system.
3. KC 290 mode controller adjustments:
a. Using the Gyro Output Test page (Calibration/Test → Autopilot → Gyro Output Test), verify
the internal AHRS Pitch/Roll Outputs are zero and valid (i.e., Attitude Valid button is
illuminated green).
b. Loosen the KC 290 mode controller from its mount to gain access to the pitch/roll adjustment
pots on the bottom of the mode controller.
c. Connect the voltmeter to pins 6 and 1 on the maintenance port.
d. Adjust the Pitch Adjust pot on the KC 290 until the voltmeter reads 0.0 ± 0.3 VDC.
e. Connect the voltmeter to pins 5 and 4 on the maintenance port.
f. Adjust the Roll Adjust pot on the KC 290 until the voltmeter reads 0.0 ± 0.3 VDC.
4. Roll gyro calibration:
a. Remove the dust cover on KC 295 to gain access to adjustment pots.
b. Verify the internal AHRS Roll Output is zero and valid.
c. Connect the voltmeter to pins 3 and 4 on the maintenance port.
d. Adjust the Gyro Roll Zero pot on the KC 295 computer until the voltmeter reads
0.0 ± 0.05 VDC.
e. Set the internal AHRS Roll Output to 25° RT using the right ROLL arrow.
f. Adjust the Gyro Roll Gain pot on the KC 295 computer until the voltmeter reads as close to
+5 VDC as possible.
g. Set the internal AHRS Roll Output to 25° LT using the left ROLL arrow.
h. Verify the voltmeter reads as close to -5 VDC as possible.
5. Pitch gyro calibration:
a. Connect the voltmeter to pins 2 and 1 on the maintenance port.
b. Verify that the internal AHRS Pitch Output is zero and valid.
c. Adjust the Gyro Pitch Zero pot on the KC 295 computer until the voltmeter reads
0.0 ± 0.15 VDC.
d. Set the internal AHRS Pitch Output to 10° UP using the up PITCH arrow.
e. Adjust the Gyro Pitch Gain pot on the KC 295 computer until the voltmeter reads as close to
6 VDC as possible.

Rev. 13 Page 5-73
6. Flight Director calibration:
a. Verify that the internal AHRS Pitch/Roll Outputs are zero and valid.
b. Navigate to the Flight Director Calibration page on the GI 275 (Calibration/Test →
Autopilot → Flight Director).
c. Disengage all AP/FD modes, then re-engage the FD only by pressing the FD button. The flight
director data on the GI 275 must be valid.
d. Adjust the Roll Command Bar Zero pot on the KC 295 computer until the FD Roll command
on the GI 275 is as close to 0.00° as possible.
e. Adjust the Pitch Command Bar Zero pot on the KC 295 computer until the FD Pitch command
on the GI 275 is as close to 0.00° as possible.
330-00360-00 CONNECTOR
(Tyco 206485-1)
<4"
PITCH REF 1
VERTICAL GYRO PITCH T.P. 2
GYRO ROLL CROSSFEED 3
LAT REF 4
ROLL ADJ 5 KC 295
PITCH ADJ 6 P2952
L PITCH REF
IF CONNECTED
P VERTICAL GYRO PITCH T.P.
KC 296
(YAW COMPUTER) P2961
GYRO ROLL CROSSFEED H X GYRO ROLL CROSSFEED
LAT REF F f LAT REF
KC 290
(MODE CONTROLLER) P2902
ROLL ADJ F K ROLL ADJ
PITCH ADJ A b PITCH ADJ
Figure 5-28 KFC 200 Test Port

Rev. 13 Page 5-74
NOTE
The following procedure is only required if the GI 275 is used to provide analog attitude to
the autopilot.
NOTE
The Honeywell KFC 225 Flight Control System Installation and Maintenance Manual
specific to the aircraft being modified must be used whenever making flight director
adjustments.
The autopilot interface must be configured for a KFC 225. A voltmeter, accurate to 1 mV at a 5 VDC
range, is required for the procedure.
1. Power on the GI 275 the Configuration mode.
3. Perform the Attitude Gyro Calibration Procedure using KI 256 gyro emulation.
a. Use an extender harness for the KC 225 to gain access to the PIT/ROL adjustment
potentiometers on the side of the KC 225 as specified in Honeywell KFC 225 Flight Control
System Installation Manual.
b. Touch the Set Installation Offsets page on the KC 225 Remote Terminal Interface (RTI).
c. Refer to Honeywell KFC 225 Flight Control System Installation Manual for instructions
regarding how to connect and use the KC 225 RTI.
d. Verify that the internal AHRS test values are 0° UP for pitch, 0° RT for roll, and are valid
(i.e., Attitude Valid button is illuminated green).
e. Record the values for Pitch and Roll attitude that are displayed on the KC 225 RTI. These are
the Pitch/Roll Offset values.
Pitch Offset Roll Offset
f. Set the internal AHRS Output to 10° UP using the up PITCH arrow.
g. Adjust the PIT potentiometer on the side of the KC 225 until the Pitch value on the KC 225
RTI is equal to 10° plus the Pitch Offset value (tolerance ±0.5°). Refer to the example pitch
adjustment shown below.
h. Set the internal AHRS Output to 0° UP using the down PITCH arrow.
i. Set the internal AHRS Output to 20° RT using the right ROLL arrow.
j. Adjust the ROL potentiometer on the side of the KC 225 until the Roll value on the KC 225
RTI is equal to 20° plus the Roll Offset value (tolerance ±0.5°). Refer to the example roll
adjustment shown below.
k. Set the internal AHRS Output to 0° RT using the left ROLL arrow.
l. Engage the autopilot in the default modes (PIT and ROL).
m. On the KC 225 RTI, touch 3. Pitch Attitude.
n. To store the pitch attitude calibration, touch ENTER.
o. With the autopilot still engaged in the default modes, adjust the potentiometer on the front of
the KC 225 until the Roll value on the KC 225 RTI is equal to 0°.

Rev. 13 Page 5-75
p. Disengage the autopilot.
q. Verify the roll attitude calibration:
i. Set the internal AHRS Output to 0° UP and 20° RT.
ii. Verify that the Roll value on the KC 225 RTI is 20° (±0.5°).
iii. Set the internal AHRS Output to 0° UP and 20° LT.
iv. Verify that the Roll value on the KC 225 RTI is -20° (±0.5°).
v. If both Roll attitude values are not within tolerance, adjust the ROL potentiometer on the
side of the KC 225 until both Roll attitude values are within tolerance.
r. At the completion of test, remove the KC 225 extender harness.
Example Adjustment:
Pitch Offset: 0.67° Roll Offset: -0.34°
With 10°U pitch, adjust the PIT potentiometer With 20°R roll, adjust the ROL potentiometer
until the displayed Pitch value is between until the displayed Roll value is between 19.16°
10.17° and 11.17°. and 20.16°.
(This range is equal to [10° + 0.67°] ±0.5°) (This range is equal to [20° + (-0.34°)] ±0.5°)
Heading and Course Pointer Calibration

1. Navigate to the Autopilot Test page (Calibration/Test → Autopilot → Test).
2. Activate the HDG/CRS Valid discrete.
3. Set the Heading Datum (HDG) and Course Datum (CRS) to 360°.
4. On the KC 225 RTI, select the Installation Offset function.
a. Touch 1. Heading on the Set Installation Offsets page and then touch ENTER.
b. Touch 2. Course on the Set Installation Offsets page and then touch ENTER.
Touch ENTER to exit the page.
FD Alignment
1. Verify that the attitude input to the autopilot is level (i.e., zero pitch/roll).
a. If using the GI 275, verify that the output test values are 0° UP, 0° RT, and Attitude Valid on
the Gyro Output Test page (Calibration/Test → Autopilot → Gyro Output Test).
b. If using an analog gyro, verify the gyro is operational and level. This may require an extender
harness and tilt table.
2. Navigate to the GI 275 Flight Director Calibration page to view the FD Pitch and FD Roll values
(Calibration/Test → Autopilot → Flight Director).
3. Align FD Pitch as follows:
a. Verify the FD is engaged, and that the autopilot is not engaged.
b. Press and hold CWS.
c. Adjust the potentiometer on the front of the KC 225 until the FD Pitch value is as close to zero
as possible.
4. Align FD Roll as follows:
a. Verify the autopilot and flight director are disengaged.
b. Press and hold the FD button on the KC 225.
c. Adjust potentiometer on the KC 225 until the FD Roll value is as close to zero as possible.

Rev. 13 Page 5-76
Flight Director Gain Adjustment Procedure
The following adjustment is required for all KFC 225 installations displaying the flight director on the
GI 275.
1. Verify that the attitude input to the autopilot is level (i.e., zero pitch/roll).
a. Using the GI 275, verify that the output test values are 0° UP, 0° RT, and Attitude Valid on the
Gyro Output Test page (Calibration/Test → Autopilot → Gyro Output Test).
b. Using an analog gyro, verify that the gyro is operational and level (may require an extender
harness and tilt table).
2. Navigate to the Flight Director Calibration page to view the FD Pitch value (Calibration/Test →
Autopilot → Flight Director).
3. Press and hold the GA button.
4. Adjust potentiometer on the front of the KC 225 until the FD Pitch value matches the pitch value
specified in the autopilot installation data for go-around mode (e.g., 6.00°) as closely as possible.
5. Verify the FD Gain adjustment.
a. Press CWS. The FD Pitch value should be approximately zero.
b. Make five discrete clicks using the UP keys on the KC 225. The FD Pitch value should be
approximately +2.5° Up.
Altimeter Calibration Procedure

The following calibration is required if the GI 275 is used to provide analog baro-correction to the
autopilot:
1. Power on the GI 275 in Normal mode and set Barometric setting to 29.92 IN.
2. Perform the Altimeter Calibration Procedure as specified in Honeywell KFC 225 Flight Control
System Installation Manual, with the following difference:
a. When instructed to set the barometric setting to 29.92 inches, set the Barometric setting on the
GI 275 to 29.92 IN.

Gyro Alignment Procedure
1. Power on the GI 275 in Configuration mode.
3. Set the Attitude Valid selection to valid (i.e., touch the Attitude Valid button so that it is
illuminated green).
4. Perform the alignment procedure as specified in the King installation manual, with the following
difference:
a. It is not necessary to remove the AHRS from the aircraft. To set pitch and roll as directed in
the procedure, use the Gyro Output Test page to set the pitch angle and roll angle to the
desired values.

Rev. 13 Page 5-77
5.8.2.6 Cessna 300B/400B/800B Autopilots
The following steps outline the alignment procedure:
3. Verify that the internal AHRS test values are valid (i.e., Attitude Valid button is illuminated
green).
4. Perform the Roll Error Output Null Adjustment, Roll Gyro Gain Adjustment, Pitch Error Output
Null Adjustment, and the Pitch Gyro Gain Adjustment as described in Cessna autopilot system
service manual, with the following difference:
desired values.
5.8.2.7 Cessna 1000A Autopilots

The following steps outline the alignment procedure:
3. Verify that the internal AHRS test values are valid (i.e., Attitude Valid button is illuminated
green).
4. Perform Attitude Gyro System Interface Adjustments as described in the Cessna autopilot system
service manual, with the following difference:
desired values.
5.8.2.8 Century II/III Autopilots

The following steps outline the gyro alignment procedure:
2. Navigate to the test page (Calibration/Test → Autopilot → Gyro Output Test).
3. Set the Relays selection to Attitude Valid.
4. Perform the Ground Setup Procedures as described in the Century IIB & III Autopilot Service
Manual (Section VIII steps 1 to 14) with the following differences:
NOTE
It is not necessary to use a Gyro Substitute Box as directed in the procedure.
a. To set the HDG Bug as directed in the procedure, use the AP Test page (Calibration/Test →
Autopilot → Test).
b. To set roll as directed in the procedure, use the Gyro Output Test page.

Rev. 13 Page 5-78
5.8.3 Composite NAV Calibration
If a Composite NAV connection is interfaced to a GI 275, the displays must be calibrated to each
individual NAV radio using the following procedure:
1. Power on the GI 275 in Configuration mode and then power on NAV1.
2. Navigate to the Analog NAV Calibration page (Calibration/Test → Analog NAV).
3. Touch the Localizer button.
4. Use an appropriate NAV tester to generate a localizer signal with 0.155 DDM left or right, and
tune the NAV radio to the test frequency.
5. Touch the Calibrate button and then the OK button.
6. Wait for the calibration to complete (approximately 6 seconds) and touch the OK button.
7. Verify that the DDM readout is 0.155 ± 0.010.
8. If the DDM readout is not within the specified value, adjust the Gain value manually so that the
readout is 0.155 ± 0.010 DDM.
9. Touch the Back button and then the VOR button.
10. Use a NAV radio tester to generate a 0° FROM radial VOR signal, and tune the NAV radio(s) to
the test frequency.
11. Press the Calibrate button and then the OK button.
5.8.4 Backup Battery Test

This procedure will analyze the voltage and discharge qualities of the installed backup battery. The
procedure is required to be completed when a backup battery is installed in the system. A fault indication
message will be displayed in Normal mode until this procedure is completed. The Backup Battery Test
page will only be available if a backup battery is configured on the Battery page (refer to Section 5.6.8).
NOTE
The Battery Rundown Test may take up to 150 minutes to complete and is reported in UTC.
To complete the Backup Battery Test, complete the following steps:

1. Power on each GI 275 with an installed backup battery in Configuration mode.
2. Navigate to the Backup Battery Test page (Calibration/Test → Backup Battery Test).
3. Touch the Before Test Checklist button.
4. Verify that “Discharging” is not displayed under Battery State.
5. Touch the Test Date button and enter the current date.
6. Complete the on-screen checklist. Touch each checklist item once completed. Once all checklist
items have a green check mark, touch the Back button.
7. Touch the Start Test button and follow the on-screen commands.
8. The GI 275 will power off automatically when the test is complete.
9. Power on the GI 275(s) in Configuration mode and verify a PASS was achieved by navigating to
the Backup Battery Test page and touching the Test Results button and then the Rundown Test
Results button.
10. For aircraft that are approved for flight over 25,000 feet, a rundown time of at least 60 minutes is
required to be considered a PASS. For aircraft that are only approved for flight at 25,000 feet or
less, a rundown time of at least 30 minutes is required to be considered a PASS.

Rev. 13 Page 5-79
5.8.5 Fuel
5.8.5.1 Fuel Quantity Calibration
The Fuel Quantity Calibration is performed in Configuration mode (EIS → Fuel → Quantity Cal or
Calibration/Test → Fuel → Quantity Cal). Ensure the settings on the Fuel page are configured.
CAUTION
Ensure the correct Fuel Quantity sensor configuration before calibration. If using a
GEA 24 with resistive fuel probes, the fuel quantity sensor must be configured as 0-5 Volt.
Refer to Appendix C.
This procedure is used to calibrate the GI 275 fuel quantity gauges. It begins with drained fuel tanks, then
unusable fuel is added, and then fuel is added in specified quantities during the fueling process. Tank
calibration takes time and cannot be interrupted once initiated. The Fuel Quantity Calibration procedure is
not required to be performed immediately following the setup of the fuel quantity gauge; however, it must
be completed before flight.
When determining the number of calibration points and amount of fuel to add at each, it is recommended
to take the total usable fuel capacity of each tank and divide it by a number of points that results in an
easily measurable amount of fuel to be added at each point (e.g., for a 24 GAL (of usable fuel) tank, divide
24 (gallons of usable fuel) by 6 (calibration points) to equal 4 (gallons of fuel to be added at each point).
Take that number of points (6 in this example) and add 1 more for the unusable fuel (Point 1). So, a tank
that holds 24 gallons of usable fuel could perform the calibration with 7 points, adding 4 gallons at each
point after the unusable fuel is added in the first point.
5.8.5.2 Required Information and Equipment

A calibrated/verified fueling system is required to add known quantities. The aircraft manufacturer’s
information for aircraft leveling requirements/procedures and the unusable fuel quantity is required.
Table 5-61 is used as a guide to calibrate the fuel quantity gauge(s). If the installation does not include
auxillary tanks, set the Aux Tank field to None. Table 5-62 describes each of the settings during the
calibration of the fuel quantity.
Table 5-61 Fuel Page Settings

Setting Options
Single Main
Main Tank
Left & Right
None
AUX Tank Single AUX/Tip
Left & Right
AUX
AUX Label
Tip
Avgas
Fuel Type Jet A
Jet B
Full Capacity Refer to AFM/POH
Tab Capacity Refer to AFM/POH

Rev. 13 Page 5-80
Table 5-62 Fuel Quantity Calibration Settings
Setting Options Notes
Set to match the maximum range from the
Main Gauge Maximum
Gauge Max Main gauge being removed. This is configured on
(0-2980 GAL) the EIS → Gauges → Fuel (Main) page.
Set to match the maximum range from the
AUX Gauge Maximum
Gauge Max AUX gauge being removed. This is configured
(0-2980 GAL) under the EIS → Gauges → Fuel (Aux).
The accuracy of the fuel quantity indication
will increase with more calibration points. It is
recommended to use at least the same
Num Points 5 to 16 points
number of points as graduations on the
gauge being replaced. Refer to Section
5.8.5.1 for details.
Single Main
Single AUX/Tip Main L & R and Aux/Tip L & R procedures
Main L & R (Recom.) alternate left then right calibration points to
keep the aircraft balanced. These are
AUX/Tip L & R (Recom.)
Procedure recommended if the aircraft has left and right
Main L
tanks. The available options are dependent
Main R on “Main Tank” and “Aux Tank” settings on
AUX/Tip L the Fuel page.
AUX/Tip R

Rev. 13 Page 5-81
5.8.5.3 Fuel Quantity Calibration Procedure
Complete the following procedure using a calibrated fueling system:
1. Drain the fuel from the aircraft in accordance with the aircraft manufacturer’s instructions.
2. Level the aircraft in accordance with the aircraft manufacturer’s instructions.
3. Navigate to the Fuel page (Calibration/Test → Fuel).
4. Configure the fuel tank settings using Table 5-61.
5. Touch the Quantity Cal button.
6. Verify the Gauge Max Main and Gauge Max Aux settings are correct using Table 5-62.
7. Touch the Check gauge max button. A green checkmark will appear.
8. Touch the Drain fuel button if step 1 was completed. A green checkmark will appear.
9. Touch the Level aircraft button if step 2 was completed. A green checkmark will appear.
10. Touch the Num Points button and enter the number of calibration points to be performed. Refer to
Table 5-62 and Section 5.8.5.1 for guidance in determining the number of calibration points.
11. Touch the Select num points button. A green checkmark will appear.
12. Touch the Procedure button and select the procedure using Table 5-62.
13. Touch the Select procedure button. A green checkmark will appear.
14. When all steps are checked, the Begin button will be available. Touch it to begin.
15. Add the amount of unusable fuel determined from the aircraft manufacturer or other approved data
using a calibrated/verified fueling system.
16. Touch the corresponding button once the fuel has been added to check it off (refer to Figure 5-30).
17. Once the sensor readout has stabilized in the tenths place, touch the corresponding button to check
it off (refer to Figure 5-30).
a. It may be required to manually vibrate the area near the fuel sensor to prevent the float from
sticking and to improve the sensor response during each calibration point.
18. Touch the Calibrate button to set the first point with 0.0 GAL of usable fuel (i.e., tank only has the
required amount of unusable fuel).
19. If the Left & Right procedure was selected, repeat steps 15 through 18 for the other tank.
20. Fill the indicated tank with the specified amount of usable fuel using a calibrated fueling system.
a. The GI 275 will calculate an estimated amount of fuel to be added based on the number of
calibration points and the gauge max.
b. If more than the indicated amount of fuel was added, touch the Add Fuel Amount button and
enter the actual amount of fuel that was added. The GI 275 will automatically compensate for
the difference during the next calibration point for that tank.
21. Touch the corresponding button on the display once the fuel has been added to check it off.
22. Once the sensor readout has stabilized in the tenths place, touch the corresponding button.
23. Touch Calibrate to accept that value.
24. Repeat steps 20 through 23 for any other tanks included in the calibration and for each remaining
calibration point.
a. Touch the View ( ) tank status button at any point to view a graphical representation of the
process (refer to Figure 5-30).
b. Do not add more fuel than the maximum gauge range. The manual entry field will not allow
more fuel than the maximum to be entered.

Rev. 13 Page 5-82
c. It is common for fuel tanks to hold more fuel than shown on the fuel indicator; however, the
indicator will not show fuel above the maximum gauge range.
d. Some fuel tank designs can hold more fuel when the aircraft is not level, so the maximum
gauge range may not be obtainable. Fill the tank as much as possible and enter the actual
amount that was added. The final fill point must be within 10% of the gauge range (e.g., if the
gauge range is 50 gallons, the final calibration point for that tank must fall between 45 and
50 gallons).
25. Repeat the Fuel Quantity Calibration for any remaining fuel tanks not included in this calibration
(e.g., auxillary tank).
Figure 5-29 Fuel Quantity Calibration Page
Enter the
ACTUAL
amount of fuel
added this point
Wait until this

value stabilizes
at the tenths
place before
continuing
Figure 5-30 Fuel Quantity Calculation Procedure
NOTE
It is recommended that the display configuration be saved to a USB drive immediately
after the Fuel Quantity Calibration is completed.

Rev. 13 Page 5-83
5.9 External Systems
5.9.1 Stormscope Config Status
The Stormscope Config Status page provides a means to view the configuration status and system
information of a configured WX-500 Stormscope. Instructions for configuration of the Stormscope
interface are contained in Section 5.5.15.

Rev. 13 Page 5-84
5.10 Diagnostics
The Diagnostics page provides additional information useful for installation and configuration
troubleshooting.
5.10.1 VFR GPS

GPS Signal Strength
This displays information on the VFR GPS, including whether the antenna is connected, GPS signal
strength, and GPS coordinates.
5.10.2 AHRS & ADC

The AHRS/ADC page shows the values for the configured ADC and AHRS sensors. It also allows the
Flight Log to be downloaded to a connected USB drive.
5.10.3 Backup Battery Status

This displays the charge, temperature, and cell voltage of an installed backup battery.
Rundown Test Results

This displays the most recent Battery Rundown Test results.
Clear Test Results

This clears the most recent Battery Rundown Test results.
5.10.4 HSDB Status

The HSDB Status page shows the status of both GI 275 HSDB connections.
5.10.5 CAN Network

The CAN page provides CAN bus error and warning information for any devices connected on the CAN
bus network.
5.10.6 Temp/Pwr Stats

The Temp/Pwr Stats page shows the total number of power ups, operating hours, and CPU temperatures.
5.10.7 Discrete Inputs

The Discrete In page shows the status (Active/Inactive) of each Discrete Input and how it is configured.
5.10.8 Discrete Outputs

The Discrete Out page shows the status (Active/Inactive) of each Discrete Output. Connected and
configured outputs can be toggled Active and Inactive by touching the associated button. Active outputs
say “Active” in green lettering, while inactive or not configured outputs say “Inactive” in gray lettering.

Rev. 13 Page 5-85
5.10.9 Analog Inputs
The Analog In page shows the voltage of each Analog Input.
5.10.10 GDL69
The GDL 69 page shows information for a configured GDL 69/69A SXM.
5.10.11 ARINC 429

The ARINC 429 page shows the status of each ARINC 429 port.
5.10.12 RS-232
The RS-232 page shows the status (Active/Inactive) of each RS-232 connection. Yellow indicates that the
port is not actively receiving or transmitting data.
5.10.13 RS-485
The RS-485 page shows the status (Active/Inactive) of the RS-485 connection. Yellow indicates that the
port is not actively receiving or transmitting data.
5.10.14 GFC 500

The GFC 500 page shows the Autopilot Disconnect Input status for the GFC 500 roll, pitch, and yaw
servos, as well as the manual pitch trim switch status.
5.10.15 Clear Config
CAUTION
Touching the Clear Config button will erase all configuration settings.
5.10.16 Factory Reset
CAUTION
Touching the Factory Reset button will restore the unit to its factory defaults, including
reseting calibration results. It is not recommended to select this option when
troubleshooting.

Rev. 13 Page 5-86
5.11 System Info
This provides the option to review a configured device’s detailed information, such as serial number, part
number, and software versions. LRUs must be configured in order for their data to be displayed.
5.11.1 Devices Online

The Devices Online page reports the status of installed LRUs. The icon next to each LRU reports one of
three colored symbols to indicate the status of each LRU, as described in Table 5-63. Verify that all LRUs
connected or configured to each display have a green checkmark.
Table 5-63 LRU Status Indicators

Status Color LRU Condition
Green Checkmark The LRU is online. No faults are detected.
Yellow Question Mark The LRU is configured, but the GI 275 is not receiving data.
Red X The LRU is configured, but a warning is present.
(Empty) The LRU is not configured.
5.11.2 Device Info

The Device Info page provides information for each configured LRU in the GI 275 system. Touch the
Device button and select an LRU to view information such as serial number, part number, and software
version.
5.12 Maintenance
Config Mode Fast Sync
Configure this setting on to expedite maintenance log downloads to a USB drive.
Export Logs
The GI 275 has maintenance and error logs that can be downloaded to a USB drive with the following
procedure:
2. Insert a USB drive into the USB dongle or optional GSB 15 and wait for the GI 275 to recognize
the drive (a USB icon will appear in the bottom-left of the screen).
3. Navigate to the Maintenance page.
4. Touch the Export Logs button.
5. Touch the Download Log button and select the log type to download: Assert, Flight Data, Aircraft
Report, or Fault Log.
a. If Flight Data was selected, touch the Download Log Style button and select All or From
Date. If From Date was selected as the Log Style, enter the date in the fields below.
6. Touch the Start Download button and then the Begin Download button.

Rev. 13 Page 5-87
Export Config
Export configuration settings via USB. Refer to Section 5.2.2.4 for procedure.
Export External LRU Logs

2. Power on all LRUs in the system.
3. Insert a USB drive into the USB dongle or optional GSB 15 and wait for the GI 275 to recognize
the drive (a USB icon will appear in the bottom-left of the screen).
4. Navigate to the Maintenance page.
5. Touch the Export External LRU Logs button. The available logs will automatically download.
Exported logs can be viewed and printed using a computer’s web browser.
Logging Options
This gives the option to enable or disable the logging of flight data during operation. The default is
Enabled.
Clear Assert Logs

This clears the Assert Logs. This cannot be undone.
Clear Databases
This clears all flight databases. This cannot be undone.
View Event Log

This allows all events to be displayed and reviewed based on configurable filters. Select the number of
power cycles to be included in the log, a specific Event ID (optionally select All), and a date range to be
included. Touch View events to view a list of events. Select each event to view additional information.
5.13 Restart Options

Restart All to Config
Restarts all GI 275s in the system in Configuration mode.
Restart All to Normal

Restarts all GI 275s in the system in Normal mode.
GI ( )
Select restart options for the GI 275 unit. Options are Do Not Restart, Normal Mode, and Config Mode.
Restart
Restarts the GI 275 according to the above selection. If Do Not Restart is selected, the unit will not restart.

Rev. 13 Page 5-88
5.14 Wireless Connectivity
The GI 275 has built-in Wi-Fi and Bluetooth capabilities. Garmin Connext allows for a wireless
connection between the GI 275 and a personal electronic device (PED) running the Garmin Pilot
application to update flight databases (refer to Section 5.15) and other functions (refer to Section 1.2.2.6).
Only one Wireless source can be configured in the system at a time.
If a Flight Stream is installed as part of the system, the GI 275 wireless setting must be set to Other LRU. If
the cockpit has an ADS-B source with Bluetooth (e.g., GTX 345), a GI 275 should be configured as the
wireless source, and the Bluetooth should be deactivated on the ADS-B source.
To configure a wireless connection:
2. Navigate to the Wireless page (Interfaces → Wireless).
3. Wait until the Continue button becomes selectable (up to 2 minutes).
4. Select the device for the wireless source:
◦ This LRU – the specific GI 275 being configured
◦ GI ( ) – a different GI 275 with that Unit ID
◦ Other LRU – disables the wireless functionality
SSID
Enter the built-in Wi-Fi SSID. A maximum of eight characters is allowed.
The built-in Wi-Fi is used to transfer databases via Database Concierge. Refer to Section 5.15.
Password
Enter the Wi-Fi password. The password must be eight characters.
The built-in Wi-Fi is used to transfer databases via Database Concierge. Refer to Section 5.15.
Connext Features
• Database Update – Allows flight databases to be updated via the Bluetooth from Garmin Pilot. The
default is enabled
• Flight Plan Import – Allows flight plans to be synced from a GPS 175, GNX 375, or GNC 355.
The default is disabled
Pair a Device
Connect to a Bluetooth-enabled PED with the Garmin Pilot application. Refer to Garmin Pilot for iOS
User’s Guide or Garmin Pilot for Android User’s Guide for more information on the Garmin Pilot
application. To pair a device:
1. Open the Garmin Pilot application on the PED and follow in the instructions in the applicable
user’s guide to enable Bluetooth connectivity.
2. On the GI 275, touch the Pair a Device button.
3. Touch the Bluetooth Name button and select the device.
4. Touch the Pair button. The GI 275 can store up to 13 paired devices. Once a device is paired, it
can be connected to automatically in Normal mode to initiate database uploads.
Bluetooth Devices
Manage and delete paired devices. Auto-Reconnect can be enabled from this menu.

Rev. 13 Page 5-89
5.15 Database Loading
NOTE
When updating databases on the GI 275, ensure the aircraft has been on the ground since
the unit was powered on, otherwise certain database update options are disabled.
The GI 275 system uses several databases depending on its configuration. These databases (and database
updates) are available for purchase at flyGarmin.com. Databases are locked to a System ID and cannot be
used in more than one system. The system ID is the same for each GI 275 installed in the system.
Databases are typically updated using a portable electronic device (PED) with the Garmin Pilot
application.
After obtaining the appropriate databases from flyGarmin.com, they can be loaded to the GI 275 system by
USB drive, another Garmin LRU via Database Sync, or through the Database Concierge feature (Wi-Fi).
5.15.1 Automatic Database Updates

The GI 275 will automatically prompt the user to update databases on startup in Normal mode if the
following conditions are met:
• A newer database is detected in the standby queue (refer to GI 275 Pilot’s Guide for details) or on
a connected compatible Garmin LRU
• The newer database is within its effective dates
• The aircraft is on the ground
Follow the on-screen prompts to update a database. A dedicated page will display during this process.
NOTE
The Basemap and Terrain databases will automatically update when the above conditions
are met without user input. In this case, a unit restart is not required.
NOTE
The GI 275 can receive database updates from other compatible LRUs, but it can only
provide database updates to GPS 175, GNX 375, GNC 355, and other GI 275 units.
Load Databases via Database Sync

If Database Sync is enabled on the GI 275 (refer to Section 5.6.7), then databases on each GI 275 in the
system can be synchronized by the following procedure:
1. Power on all GI 275s in the system in Normal mode.
2. Databases will synchronize automatically in the background. A “Database sync transfer in
progress” message will appear.
a. Selecting the Fast Sync button to increases the transfer speed, but disables screen use until the
transfers are complete
3. When the sync is done, a “Database Sync Complete Activate Now?” prompt will appear.
4. Touch the Yes button and then the Update Selected button.
5. When all the database updates are complete, touch the Restart Unit button.
If a GTN 6XX/7XX or GTN Xi with a Flight Stream 510 is installed in the system, then it can also be used
to update all GI 275s in the system using the above procedure.

Rev. 13 Page 5-90
5.15.2 Database Updates via USB
1. Download appropriate databases from flyGarmin.com onto a USB drive.
3. On the display connected to the USB dongle or GSB 15, hold the knob or swipe up from the
bottom of the screen to open the menu.
4. Touch the System button.
5. Touch the Databases (or DB) button.
6. Verify the listed databases that show out-of-date (amber) have updated versions on the USB drive.
7. Touch the Update button.
8. Insert the USB drive into the USB dongle or optional GSB 15 and wait for the GI 275 to recognize
the drive (USB status will change from “Not Connected” to “Connected” at the top of the screen).
9. Touch the USB button.
10. Select the individual databases to update and then touch the Update Selected button or touch the
Update All button.
11. When the databases have finished updating, touch the Restart Unit button and remove the drive.
5.15.3 Transferring Databases via Database Concierge (Wi-Fi)

Database Concierge allows wireless transfer of databases from a PED with the Garmin Pilot application
via Wi-Fi while the aircraft is on the ground using the following procedure:
1. Download the appropriate databases onto a PED with the Garmin Pilot application.
3. Touch the System button, then the Databases (or DB) button.
4. Touch the Update button. The GI 275 internal Wi-Fi will now be available to be connected with a
PED.
5. Connect the PED to the GI 275’s Wi-Fi network. The SSID and password can be set or viewed on
the Wireless page.
6. Follow the on-screen prompts.
NOTE
New databases with current effective dates will replace expired databases on the GI 275,
and databases with future effective dates will be added to the internal standby queue for
automatic updates in the future.
5.15.4 GI 275 Databases

Table 5-64 Database Summary
Database Update Rate
Navigation Database 28 Days
Basemap Database Periodic (when available)
Obstacle Database with Hotlines 56 Days
Terrain Database Periodic (when available)
SafeTaxi Database 56 Days

Rev. 13 Page 5-91
6 SYSTEM CHECKOUT
6.1 Checkout Log....................................................................................................................................6-2

6.2 Configuration Ground Checks ..........................................................................................................6-5
6.2.1 LRU Status Check......................................................................................................................6-5
6.2.2 Device Info.................................................................................................................................6-5
6.2.3 GSB 15 Connection Check ........................................................................................................6-5
6.3 Interfaced Equipment Ground Checks..............................................................................................6-6
6.3.1 GPS Ground Checks...................................................................................................................6-7
6.3.2 NAV Ground Checks .................................................................................................................6-8
6.3.3 Traffic Ground Checks.............................................................................................................6-10
6.3.4 Terrain Checks .........................................................................................................................6-12
6.3.5 Weather Ground Checks ..........................................................................................................6-13
6.3.6 WX-500 Stormscope Interface Check......................................................................................6-14
6.3.7 Radar Altimeter Check (ARINC 429)......................................................................................6-14
6.3.8 Transponder Control Check .....................................................................................................6-15
6.3.9 Autopilot Ground Checks.........................................................................................................6-16
6.3.10 Flight Databases Check............................................................................................................6-21
6.4 AHRS Ground Checks....................................................................................................................6-22
6.4.1 Magnetometer Calibration........................................................................................................6-22
6.4.2 Compass Swing ........................................................................................................................6-23
6.4.3 Engine Vibration Test ..............................................................................................................6-25
6.4.4 Magnetometer Interference Test ..............................................................................................6-27
6.4.5 Site Evaluation of Magnetic Disturbances ...............................................................................6-28
6.5 Indicator-Specific Checks...............................................................................................................6-29
6.5.1 Attitude and Direction Indicator (ADI) Checks.......................................................................6-29
6.5.2 Multifunction Display (MFD) Ground Checks ........................................................................6-32
6.5.3 Engine Indication System (EIS) Checks ..................................................................................6-33
6.5.4 Standby Indicator Check ..........................................................................................................6-36
6.6 Placards and Switch Labeling Check..............................................................................................6-37
6.7 Electromagnetic Interference (EMI) Check....................................................................................6-38
6.8 Flight Checks ..................................................................................................................................6-40
6.8.1 ADI Flight Checks ...................................................................................................................6-40
6.8.2 HSI Flight Checks ....................................................................................................................6-40
6.8.3 MFD Flight Checks..................................................................................................................6-40
6.8.4 EIS Flight Checks.....................................................................................................................6-41
6.8.5 Standby Flight Checks .............................................................................................................6-41
6.8.6 Autopilot Flight Checks ...........................................................................................................6-41
6.9 Documentation Checks ...................................................................................................................6-45
6.9.1 Airplane Flight Manual Supplement ........................................................................................6-45
6.9.2 Instructions for Continued Airworthiness ................................................................................6-45
6.9.3 Return to Service ......................................................................................................................6-45

Rev. 13 Page 6-1
6.1 Checkout Log
Refer to GI 275 Part 23 AML STC Maintenance Manual/ICA (P/N 190-02246-11) for configuration, serial
number, and LRU location documentation procedures.
Complete all relevant checks as described in the following section using the checkout log as a guide.
GI 275 Checkout Log

Date:_____________Completed by:______________________
Table 6-1 Checkout Log

Check Task Section Reference
Calibration Checkout
AHRS / GMU Calibration
 Section 5.8.1
Pitch / Roll offset
Autopilot Calibration (if applicable)
Honeywell (Bendix/King) Section 5.8.2.2

Cessna 300B/400B/800B Section 5.8.2.6
Cessna 1000A Section 5.8.2.7
 Analog NAV Calibration (if applicable) Section 5.8.3
 EIS Fuel Calibration (if applicable) Section 5.8.5.1
 Backup Battery Test (if applicable) Section 5.8.4
Ground Checkout
Configuration Ground Check
 LRU status check Section 6.2
Device Info
ADI Ground Check (complete all applicable checks)
GPS Section 6.3.1
NAV Section 6.3.2
SVT Traffic Section 6.3.3.4
Autopilot Section 6.3.9
 Databases Section 6.3.10
ADI-Specific Section 6.5.1
Airspeed Tape Section 6.5.1.1
Altimeter Section 6.5.1.1.3
OAT Section 6.5.1.3
SVT Section 6.5.1.4

Rev. 13 Page 6-2
HSI Ground Check (complete all applicable checks)
GPS Section 6.3.1
NAV Section 6.3.2

Traffic Section 6.3.3
Weather Section 6.3.5
Databases Section 6.3.10
MFD Ground Check (complete all applicable checks)
GPS Section 6.3.1
NAV Section 6.3.2
Traffic Section 6.3.3
Weather Section 6.3.5
 Stormscope Section 6.3.6
Radar Altimeter Section 6.3.7
Transponder Control Section 6.3.8
Databases Section 6.3.10
MFD-Specific Section 6.5.2
OAT Section 6.5.2.1
EIS Ground Check (complete all applicable checks)
EIS-Specific Section 6.5.3
Temperature sensor Section 6.5.3.1
EIS gauge layout and markings Section 6.5.3.2
Manifold pressure Section 6.5.3.2.1
Oil pressure Section 6.5.3.2.2
 Fuel pressure Section 6.5.3.2.3
Tachometer Section 6.5.3.2.4
Fuel quantity Section 6.5.3.2.5
Fuel flow Section 6.5.3.2.6
Shunt/Voltage Section 6.5.3.2.7
(OAT) EIS Check Section 6.5.3.2.8
EIS engine run-up Section 6.5.3.3
 Standby Indicator Check Section 6.5.4
AHRS Calibration Checks
Magnetometer calibration Section 6.4.1
Compass swing Section 6.4.2

Engine run-up vibration Section 6.4.3
Magnetometer interference Section 6.4.4
Site evaluation Section 6.4.5
Autopilot Ground Check (complete all applicable checks)
Autopilot engagement Section 6.3.9.1
Flight director Section 6.3.9.2

Heading and Course error Section 6.3.9.3
VOR /ILS/GS Section 6.3.9.4
GPS roll steering Section 6.3.9.5
 Placards, Switches, and Labels Section 6.6

Rev. 13 Page 6-3
 EMI/RFI Checks Section 6.7
Flight Checkout
 Attitude Flight Check Section 6.8.1
 HSI Flight Check Section 6.8.2
 MFD Flight Check Section 6.8.3
 EIS Flight Check Section 6.8.4
 Standby Indicator Flight Check Section 6.8.5
Autopilot Flight Check (if applicable) Section 6.8.6

Autopilot Performance Checkout Log Figure 6-7
Documentation
 AFMS filled in Section 6.9.1
 ICA filled in Section 6.9.2

Rev. 13 Page 6-4
6.2 Configuration Ground Checks
These ground check procedures are intended to verify that each LRU and interface in the GI 275 system
has been properly configured. Complete these checks before continuing with further ground checks.
NOTE
Throughout the configuration ground check section, references are made to particular
functions and screens. If a function or screen is not available, ensure that the system has
been configured correctly.
These ground checks must be performed on every GI 275. Before starting the checkout, ensure:
1. All GI 275 displays in the system are powered on in Configuration mode.
2. All system LRUs are be powered on.
3. All installed LRUs have been configured per Section 5.5.
6.2.1 LRU Status Check

The Devices Online page (System Info → Devices Online) reports the status of installed LRUs. The icon
next to each LRU reports one of three colored symbols to indicate the status of each LRU, as described in
Table 5-63. Verify that all LRUs connected or configured have a green checkmark indicator.
6.2.2 Device Info

The Device Info page (System Info → Device Info) provides information for each configured LRU as part
of the system.
1. Touch the Device button and select an interfaced LRU.
2. Verify that all software versions are up-to-date for the interfaced LRU.
3. Repeat for each LRU.
6.2.3 GSB 15 Connection Check

This check is required to test the connection if a GSB 15 is installed.
2. Follow the Export Configuration procedure in Section 5.2.2.4 using the GSB 15.
3. When completed, remove the USB drive.
4. Insert a charging cable into the GSB 15 and connect it to a device. Ensure the device shows
charging.

Rev. 13 Page 6-5
6.3 Interfaced Equipment Ground Checks
Table 6-2 shows all compatible LRUs that can be installed in the GI 275 system and have required ground
checks. Cross-reference each configured LRU with the installed GI 275 indicator type for a list of required
ground checks. Additionally, each indicator type may have specific checks associated with it that must also
be completed (these checks are listed on the bottom row of the table). Not all checks in a section may be
applicable to a particular installation. It is the installer’s responsibility to complete all applicable checks for
the installation.
CAUTION
Units configured as a standby indicator (ADI or HSI) must perform all applicable ADI ground
checks listed in Table 6-2, including indicator-specific checks. Additionally, the standby
checks in Section 6.5.4 must be completed.
Table 6-2 Interfaced Equipment Ground Check Section Reference

Indicator Type
Interfaced
LRU Standby
ADI HSI MFD EIS
ADI
GPS source 6.3.1 6.3.1 6.3.1 6.3.1.3 6.3.1
NAV source 6.3.2.1 6.3.2 6.3.2 [1] 6.3.2
Traffic source 6.3.3.4 [2] 6.3.3 6.3.3 [3] 6.3.3
Terrain 6.3.4 6.3.4 6.3.4
Weather source 6.3.5 6.3.5 [3] 6.3.5 [3]
Stormscope 6.3.6 [3] 6.3.6 [3]
Radar altimeter 6.3.7 [3] 6.3.7 [3]
Transponder 6.3.8 6.3.8
Autopilot/flight director 6.3.9 6.3.9
AHRS 6.4 6.4 6.4
Other Checks
Database checks 6.3.10 6.3.10 6.3.10 6.3.10
6.5.1
Indicator-specific checks 6.5.1 6.5.2 6.5.3
6.5.4
Notes:
[1] Only required if the CDI, Standard HSI, or Enhanced HSI pages are configured on the MFD.
[2] Only required if SVT is enabled.
[3] Only required if the applicable page is configured on the MFD, MFD/Standby ADI, or HSI/Standby
ADI. Refer to Section 5.6.3 for page options.
Checks that are specific to the Primary ADI must also be completed by GI 275 standby indicators on their
ADI page.

Rev. 13 Page 6-6
6.3.1 GPS Ground Checks
6.3.1.1 GPS Receiver Interface Check
This check is required for units configured as a Primary ADI, Standby ADI, HSI, and MFD with the CDI
page configured on.
NOTE
GPS satellite reception is required for the following steps.
1. Power on the GI 275 system in Normal mode.

2. Select GPS (or GPS1) as the CDI source.
a. ADI: Open the menu. Touch the System button, then the CDI button until “GPS” is displayed
in magenta.
b. HSI: Touch the CDI button until “GPS” is displayed in the top-left of the display.
c. MFD CDI: Touch the CDI button until “GPS” is displayed on the left side of the display.
3. ADI: Enable deviations (Menu → Options → Devs).
4. Verify the external GPS1 navigator is powered on and, if dual GPS navigators are installed, ensure
the second GPS navigator (GPS2) is powered off.
a. For a GNS 4XXW/5XXW series, GTN 6XX/7XX series, or GTN Xi series navigator, while
on the Power-up Self-test page, verify that the ADI displays the correct lateral and vertical
deviation information.
b. For a GNS 480 unit, while it is going through its power-up sequence, verify that the ADI
displays the correct lateral and vertical deviation information.
5. Continue in Normal mode after the self-test and wait until the navigator acquires a position before
proceeding.
6. Review the active alerts on the display (if any) and verify that there are no alerts, service soon, or
service required alerts associated with the GPS unit.
7. Create/activate a flight plan on the GPS navigation source.
8. ADI: Verify that the magenta diamond displays on the lateral deviation.
HSI: Verify that the magenta deviation bar displays in the center of the display.
MFD CDI: Verify that the magenta deviation bar displays in the center of the display.
a. If the MFD Data page is configured, navigate to it and verify that the waypoint in the Active
WPT field is the same as the one on the GPS navigator.
9. On the GPS navigator, enter OBS mode.
10. ADI: On the GI 275, access the course selection bug (Menu → Options → NAV Options → CRS
Options) and adjust the course using the inner knob.
HSI: On the GI 275, touch the Course button on the bottom-right of the display of the GI 275
(will illuminate cyan when selected) and adjust the course using the inner knob.
11. ADI: Verify that the course to the active waypoint changes as the display course pointer is rotated.
HSI: Verify that the course to the active waypoint changes as the display course pointer is rotated.
12. Exit OBS mode on the navigator.
13. If dual GPS receivers are installed, power off GPS1 and power on GPS2.
14. Select GPS2 as the CDI source and repeat steps 4 through 12.

Rev. 13 Page 6-7
6.3.1.2 Backup GPS Signal Check
This check is required for units configured as a Primary ADI, Standby ADI, HSI, and MFD (with the CDI
page) only if the VFR GPS is enabled and the antenna installed.
1. Power on the GI 275 system in Normal mode and verify that the aircraft has an unobstructed view
of the sky (or GPS repeater coverage).
2. Verify GPS1 and GPS2 (if equipped) are powered on.
3. Wait at least 5 minutes to allow GPS1, GPS2, and the VFR GPS to acquire a position.
4. Power off GPS1 and GPS2 (if equipped).
5. Verify message icon is annunciated on the top-left of the display.
6. Open the menu and touch Messages (Msgs). Verify that the message “VFR GPS is being used” is
present.
7. Verify ownship symbol is displayed on the map.
6.3.1.3 Fuel Computer Check (GPS)

This check is required if the Fuel page is intended to be configured on an EIS display and a GPS source is
configured.
1. Power on the GI 275 system in Normal mode and verify that the aircraft has an unobstructed view
of the sky (or GPS repeater coverage).
2. Verify GPS1 is powered on and, if dual GPS navigators are installed, verify GPS 2 is powered off.
3. Wait approximately 5 minutes to allow the GPS navigator to acquire a position.
4. Navigate to the Fuel page (Menu → Select Page → Fuel or turn the outer knob).
5. Verify that all “Current” information on the display populates.
6. Create/activate a flight plan on the GPS navigator.
7. Verify that all “At Dest” information on the display populates.
6.3.2 NAV Ground Checks

6.3.2.1 NAV Receiver Check – ARINC 429
This check is required for units configured as a Primary ADI, Standby ADI, HSI, and MFD with the CDI
page configured on.
2. Verify the NAV1 receiver is powered on and, if dual NAV receivers are installed, verify the second
NAV receiver (NAV2) is powered off.
3. Select the NAV receiver as the CDI source.
a. ADI: Open the menu. Touch the System button, then the CDI button until “VOR” is displayed
in green.
b. HSI: Touch the CDI button until “VOR” is displayed in the top-left of the display.
c. MFD CDI: Touch the CDI button until “VOR” is displayed on the left side of the display.
4. Tune the NAV receiver to a localizer frequency (it is not necessary that a valid localizer signal is
being received).
5. Verify that the CDI on the GI 275 displays “LOC” (or “LOC1”/“LOC2” for installations with dual
navigators).

Rev. 13 Page 6-8
6. If dual navigation receivers are installed, power off NAV 1 and power on NAV 2.
7. Select NAV2 as the CDI source and repeat steps 3 and 5.
6.3.2.2 NAV Receiver Check – Analog

This check is required for units configured as an HSI, HSI/Standby ADI, MFD (with the CDI page), and
MFD/Standby ADI (with the CDI page). Prior to conducting this check, ensure that the GI 275 has been
calibrated to the NAV receiver in accordance with Section 5.8.3.
1. Verify the NAV1 receiver is turned on and, if dual NAV receivers are installed, ensure the second
NAV receiver (NAV2) is powered off.
2. Select the NAV receiver as the CDI source by touching the CDI button until “VOR” is displayed
in green on the left side of the screen.
3. Tune the NAV receiver to a VOR frequency (it is not necessary that a valid VOR signal is being
received).
4. Using a VOR/ILS test set, generate a 0° FROM radial VOR signal and tune the NAV receiver to
the test frequency.
5. Adjust the course pointer until the deviation is centered and FROM is indicated.
6. Verify that the course pointer setting is 0 ± 4°.
7. Repeat the above steps using VOR FROM signals at 90°, 180°, and 270°. Verify that the course
pointer is within 4° of the simulated VOR bearing.
8. Tune the navigation receiver to a localizer frequency (it is not necessary that a valid localizer
signal is being received).
9. Verify that “LOC” (or “LOC1”/“LOC2” for installations with dual navigators) is displayed.
10. Set the course pointer to the current heading (i.e., straight up on the GI 275 CDI or HSI).
11. Using a VOR/ILS test set, generate a localizer and glideslope signal as specified in Table 6-3.
12. Verify that the course pointer deviation bar and glideslope indications are as specified in
Table 6-3.
13. If dual NAV receivers are installed, power off NAV1 and power on NAV2.
14. Select NAV 2 on the CDI. Repeat the NAV receiver check.
Table 6-3 Localizer/Glideslope Checks

Test Set Setting (DDM) PFD Indication
Localizer Glideslope Localizer Glideslope
Centered Centered
0.000 0.000
(within fuselage on aircraft symbol) (covering horizontal white line)
Half-scale right Half-scale down
0.078 Right 0.088 Down
(dev bar inside of first dot) (first dot covered by diamond)
Full-scale right Full-scale down
0.155 Right 0.175 Down
(dev bar inside of second dot) (second dot covered by diamond)
Half-scale left Half-scale up
0.078 Left 0.088 Up
(dev bar inside of first dot) (first dot covered by diamond)
Full-scale left Full-scale up
0.155 Left 0.175 Up
(dev bar inside of second dot) (second dot covered by diamond)

Rev. 13 Page 6-9
6.3.3 Traffic Ground Checks
6.3.3.1 ADS-B In Interface Check
This check is required for units configured as an HSI (with Enhanced HSI page), HSI/Standby ADI (with
Enhanced HSI page), and MFD (with Traffic page).
If the installed system is configured to receive ADS-B In data through an interface with an ADS-B In
capable unit (e.g., GTX 345, GTS ADS-B, or GNX 375), the interface is verified as follows:
NOTE
The following steps may be performed as a ground check as long as the aircraft is within
range of an FAA ground station with available targets of opportunity. If this is not the
case, it is recommended that these checks be performed in-flight within range of an FAA
ground station.
1. Power on the GI 275 in Normal mode.

2. HSI: Navigate to the HSI Map page.
MFD: Navigate to the Traffic page.
3. Turn on the interfacing ADS-B In capable equipment.
a. If the installation includes TAS/TCAS correlated traffic, turn on the TAS/TCAS source.
4. Verify an amber “NO DATA” message is not displayed over the ownship icon.
5. HSI: Verify there are no “FAIL” annunciations in traffic status window.
a. If the installation includes TAS/TCAS correlated traffic, verify that the TAS/TCAS status is
either “OPER” or “STBY”.
6. Observe targets of opportunity from ADS-B equipped aircraft or an FAA ground station.
6.3.3.2 TAS/TCAS Traffic Interface Check

Enhanced HSI page), and MFD (with Traffic page).
NOTE
If the GI 275 system is configured for an external control (i.e., a display other than the MFD is
controlling the traffic system), then the Standby/Operate testing does not have to be completed.
If the interfaced traffic system is any of the following, then verify the interface per the instructions
included in this section:
• L3 Communications SKY497/SKY899 SkyWatch®
• Honeywell (Bendix/King) KTA 870/KMH 820, KTA 970/KMH 920
• Avidyne TAS 6XX (Ryan 9900BX TCAD)
• GTS 8XX
3. Verify that no TAS/TCAS failure annunciations (e.g., “NO DATA”, “TRFC FAIL”, “NO TRFC
DATA”, “DATA FAILED”, “FAILED”) are shown on the traffic map.
a. HSI: This completes the check.

Rev. 13 Page 6-10
4. In the upper-left corner of the Traffic page, verify that the Traffic Status is either “TAS/TCAS:
OPER” or “TAS/TCAS: STBY” (i.e., “TIS: FAIL” or “TAS/TCAS: FAIL” must not be displayed).
5. Change the Traffic Status mode between Operate and Standby (Menu → Traffic Options).
6. Verify that the mode of the traffic system is updated accordingly (“STBY” will be annunciated
above ownship icon when in Standby mode; “TRAFFIC” will be annunciated at the top of the
screen in Operate mode).
7. Put the traffic system in Standby mode and initiate a traffic system self-test by selecting the Test
button (“TEST MODE” will annunciate at the top of the screen for approximately 5 seconds).
8. Verify that the traffic system runs a self-test and the self-test traffic pattern is displayed.
6.3.3.3 TIS-A Traffic Interface Check

Enhanced HSI page), and MFD (with Traffic page) only if a Garmin GTX 33X Transponder is connected
to the GI 275 system, and no other traffic systems covered in Section 6.3.3.1 or Section 6.3.3.2 are
installed.
3. Power on the GTX 33X by pressing ALT on the GTX 33X.
4. On the GI 275, verify that the Traffic Status is not “TIS Fail” (i.e., no fail annunciations).
5. Verify that the amber “NO DATA” is not displayed over the ownship symbol.
a. HSI: This completes the check.
6. Verify that the Traffic Status is in Standby mode (Menu → Traffic Options).
7. Attempt to place the system in Operate mode. If the aircraft is within TIS-A coverage, the system
will display “TRAFFIC”. If the aircraft is not within TIS-A coverage, the unit will display
“Unavailable”.
6.3.3.4 SVT Traffic Check

This check is required if Synthetic Vision is enabled and a traffic source is interfaced to a Primary ADI.
NOTE
It may take up to a minute for the synthetic terrain data to be displayed on the ADI. Until
SVT is active, the horizon display will be the standard blue over brown.
1. Power on all GI 275s in Normal mode.

2. Wait for the GPS signal to be acquired and the TAWS system check to report “OK”.
3. From the menu, select TAWS Test and verify that the GI 275 displays “TAWS Test”.
4. Once the test is complete, select TAWS Inhibit and verify that the GI 275 displays “TAWS
Inhibit”.
5. De-select TAWS Inhibit.

Rev. 13 Page 6-11
6.3.4 Terrain Checks
6.3.4.1 External TAWS Check
This check is required if the GI 275 MFD or Primary ADI is configured for External TAWS.
2. Power on the External TAWS source (GNS 400W/500W, GTN 6XX/7XX, or GTN Xi).
3. Wait for the GPS signal to be acquired and the TAWS system check to report “OK”.
4. Once the test is complete, select TAWS Inhibit and verify that the GI 275 displays “TAWS
Inhibit”.
5. De-select TAWS Inhibit.
6.3.4.2 Terrain Display

This check is required for an MFD displaying the Terrain page.
2. Navigate to the Terrain page (Menu → Select Page → Terrain or turn the outer knob).
3. Verify the display shows a red background (indicating surrounding terrain is 100 feet below the
aircraft and above).
4. Touch the radius button on the left side of the screen and adjust the radius wider with the inner
knob until an obstacle (tower figure) is displayed on the screen.
5. Change the view from 360° to Arc (Menu → Terrain Options → View) and verify that the view
on the display changes.
6. Perform a Terrain Test (Menu → Terrain Options → Terrain Test). “TER TEST” will display in
white at the bottom of the screen.

Rev. 13 Page 6-12
6.3.5 Weather Ground Checks
6.3.5.1 FIS-B Weather (ADS-B In)
This check is required for units intending to display weather on an HSI or HSI/Standby ADI with
Enhanced HSI page or on an MFD or MFD/Standby ADI with FIS-B Weather page only if a compatible
ADS-B traffic source (GTX 345, GTS ADS-B, GNX 375) is configured.
NOTE
The following steps may be performed as a ground check as long as the aircraft is within
range of an FAA ground station. If this is not the case, it is recommended that these checks
be performed in-flight within range of an FAA ground station.

2. Verify the GPS navigator and GDL 69/69A are in Normal mode.
3. Allow up to 5 minutes for the GPS navigator to obtain a position.
4. HSI: Navigate to the HSI Map page (turn the outer knob).
MFD: Navigate to the FIS-B Weather page (Menu → Select Page → Weather or turn the outer
knob).
5. Verify there are no warnings displayed.
6. MFD: Press the knob until the menu displays, touch FIS-B WX Options → Layers and then
select several FIS-B weather products to display.
NOTE
It may take up to 10 minutes after power-on for the system to begin receiving FIS-B
weather products.
7. MFD: Verify at least one of the selected products displays a valid time stamp by selecting the
Time Stamps button on the bottom of the display.
8. Verify there are no status fail messages regarding FIS-B weather.
6.3.5.2 GDL 69 Series Weather

This check is required for units intending to display weather on an HSI or HSI/Standby ADI with
Enhanced HSI page or on an MFD or MFD/Standby ADI with the SXM Weather page only if a GDL 69/
69A is configured and a valid Sirius XM subscription is obtained.
This procedure does not activate the GDL 69 series XM data link radio. The instructions for activating the
GDL 69 series XM data link radio can be found in GDL 69 Series SiriusXM Satellite Radio Activation
Instructions (P/N 190-00355-04).
1. Position the aircraft where there is a clear view of the southeastern or southwestern sky (XM
Satellite Radio satellites are located above the equator over the eastern and western coasts of the
continental United States).
3. Verify the GPS navigator and GDL 69/69A are in Normal mode.
4. Allow up to 5 minutes for the GPS navigator to obtain a position and the GDL 69/69A to obtain
data.

Rev. 13 Page 6-13
5. HSI: Navigate to the HSI Map page (turn the outer knob).
MFD: Navigate to the SXM Weather page (Menu → Select Page → Weather or turn the outer
knob).
7. MFD: Hold the knob to display the menu, then touch SXM WX Options, then Datalink Status.
a. Verify the Data ID field has a valid value and is not blank.
b. Verify the Data and Audio signal bars are in the green and that the displayed subscription level
is accurate.
6.3.6 WX-500 Stormscope Interface Check

This check is required for units intending to display Stormscope (lightning) on an MFD or MFD/Standby
ADI.
2. Power on the LRU controlling the Stormscope.
3. Allow up to 5 minutes for the GPS navigator to obtain a position.
4. Navigate to the Lightning page (Menu → Select Page → Lightning or turn the outer knob).
6. Press the knob until the menu displays, then touch the Lightning Opts button.
7. Toggle between Cell and Strike modes and verify that the corresponding mode is displayed on the
bottom of the MFD.
8. Toggle between 360° and Arc views and verify the image switches between a 360° view
surrounding the aircraft icon to an arc placed in front of the aircraft icon.
6.3.7 Radar Altimeter Check (ARINC 429)

This check is required for units intending to display radar altitude on an MFD or MFD/Standby ADI.
NOTE
The GRA 55/5500 and FreeFlight RA4500 radar altimeters provide an automated self-test
during power cycles; therefore, no pilot-initiated self- test is required. After the power-up
sequence, verify that no faults are detected, “RA FAIL” is not displayed, and the RA value
displays “0” after the self-test is complete.

2. Navigate to the Rad Alt page (Menu → Select Page → Rad Alt or turn the outer knob).
3. Initiate a radar test (Menu → Rad Alt Options → Test).
a. Verify that the radar altimeter increases to an altitude of 50 feet before decreasing to 0 feet.

Rev. 13 Page 6-14
6.3.8 Transponder Control Check
This check is required for units configured as an MFD or an MFD/Standby ADI (with the Transponder
page configured on) that is interfaced to a GTX 345R remote transponder or a GTX 345 configured as a
remote transponder.
2. Navigate to the Transponder page (it must be configured as the last page per Section 5.6.3).
3. With the GTX 345 transponder powered on, verify that there is not a yellow “X” over the XPDR
field.
4. Enter a code into the XPDR field using the keypad and press Enter.
CAUTION
When entering a code to check the transponder, do not enter a code that begins with a “7”
to avoid accidentally triggering an alarm at an ATC facility.
5. Verify that the code that was entered is now displayed in the XPDR field.
6. If dual transponders are installed, select XPDR 2 as the active transponder and repeat steps 3
through 5.
7. If dual transponders are installed, with XPDR 1 set as the active transponder, pull the #1
transponder circuit breaker and verify that XPDR 1 shows a yellow “X”. Select XPDR 2 as the
active transponder and verify that it does not show a yellow “X”. If the behavior above does not
occur, verify that the wiring is correct.

Rev. 13 Page 6-15
6.3.9 Autopilot Ground Checks
Before proceeding with the autopilot interface tests, verify the display has been properly configured for the
autopilot (and flight director, if applicable) that is installed. For configuration instructions, refer to
Appendix C. Only those interfaces that are directly affected by the GI 275 STC are covered by this manual;
if any other autopilot modifications have been made, those changes are outside the scope of this STC and
must be checked in accordance with the autopilot installation manual.
WARNING
It is important the display be properly configured to prevent damage to the autopilot computer.
6.3.9.1 Autopilot Engagement Check

This section verifies that the autopilot can be engaged.
1. Power on the GI 275 system in Normal mode. Allow the PFD to obtain a valid heading, attitude,
altitude, and GPS location (from the navigator).
2. Verify the GPS navigator is in Normal mode.
3. Engage the autopilot. If the autopilot cannot be engaged, troubleshoot using the instructions in the
autopilot installation manual.
4. For installations utilizing the GI 275 to provide attitude information to the autopilot, verify that the
autopilot disconnects and the servos disengage (Menu → Test → AP DISC).
5. For all other installations, disengage the autopilot using regular means.
6.3.9.2 Flight Director Check

This section verifies that the flight director interface between the autopilot computer and the display is
functional. This test only needs to be performed if:
• Analog flight director outputs are being sent to the display
• The GI 275 is configured to display the flight director
1. Power on the GI 275 PFD in Normal mode.
2. Activate the flight director with the autopilot in Pitch/Roll or Heading/Altitude mode (it is not
necessary for the servos to be engaged for this test).
3. Verify that the flight director is displayed on each applicable display. If the flight director is not
displayed, troubleshoot using the guidelines in the GI 275 maintenance manual.
4. Command the flight director to pitch up.
5. Verify that the command bars move up.
• If the flight director response is opposite (i.e., the command bars move down rather than up),
the Pitch Polarity can be changed in Configuration mode (Calibration/Test → Autopilot →
Flight Director → Pitch Polarity).
6. Command the flight director to pitch down.
7. Verify that the command bars move down.
8. Command the flight director to roll right.
9. Verify that the command bars move to the right.
• If the flight director response is opposite, the Roll Polarity can be changed in Configuration
mode (Calibration/Test → Autopilot → Flight Director → Roll Polarity).
10. Command the flight director to roll left.

Rev. 13 Page 6-16
11. Verify that the command bars move to the left.
12. Touch Go Around, if equipped.
13. Verify that the command bars center laterally and move to command a climb.
6.3.9.3 Heading and Course Error Check

This section verifies that the heading and course error interface between the GI 275 and autopilot computer
is functional.
1. Power on the GI 275 system in Configuration mode.
2. Navigate to the AP Test page (Calibration/Test → Autopilot → Test).
3. Engage HDG/CRS Valid (if HDG/CRS valid discrete is not configured, then continue to step 4).
4. On the autopilot, engage in HDG mode.
5. Change HDG Datum to 10°RT.
6. Verify that the control yoke or stick moves to the right.
7. Change HDG Datum to -10°LT.
8. Verify that the control yoke or stick moves to the left.
9. Change HDG Datum to 0°RT.
NOTE
If the control yoke or stick moves in the opposite direction of what is expected, reverse the Left/
Right HDG Polarity on the Autopilot Calibration page and continue the checkout process.
10. Put the autopilot in NAV mode.

11. Change CRS Datum to 20°RT.
12. Verify that the control yoke or stick moves to the right.
13. Change CRS Datum to -20°LT.
14. Verify that the control yoke or stick moves to the left.
15. Change CRS Datum to 0°RT.
16. Disengage the autopilot.
NOTE
If the control yoke or stick moves in the opposite direction of what is expected, reverse the Left/
Right Course Polarity on the Autopilot Calibration page and continue the checkout process.
Figure 6-1 Autopilot Test Page

Rev. 13 Page 6-17
6.3.9.4 VOR/Localizer and Glideslope Deviation Checks
This test verifies that the lateral deviation, vertical deviation, lateral flag/superflag, and vertical flag/
superflag interfaces between the GI 275 and autopilot are correct.
NOTE
Setting lateral and vertical flags will set both the low-level and superflag outputs simultaneously.

2. Navigate to the Deviations page (Calibration/Test → Autopilot → Test → Deviations).
3. Engage HDG/CRS Valid.
4. On the autopilot, engage in HDG mode.
5. On the GI 275, activate the Lateral Flag.
6. On the autopilot, engage in APR mode.
7. On the GI 275, set the Lateral Deviation (Lat) to 30% RT.
8. Verify that the autopilot moves the control yoke or stick to the right.
9. Set the Lateral Deviation (Lat) to -30% LT.
10. Verify that the autopilot moves the control yoke or stick to the left.
11. Set the Lateral Deviation (Lat) to 0%.
12. De-select the Lateral Flag on the Deviations page.
13. On the autopilot, verify that it exits APR mode.
14. On the GI 275, active the Lateral Flag.
15. On the autopilot, re-engage APR mode, if necessary.
16. Go to the Autopilot Test page and activate ILS/GPS Approach (Back → ILS/GPS Approach).
17. On the Deviations page, activate the Vertical Flag and set Vertical Deviation (Vert) to -30% DN.
18. Verify that the autopilot indicates that it is capturing or tracking the glideslope.
19. Verify that the autopilot moves the control yoke or stick forward.
20. Set the Vertical Deviation to 30% UP.
21. Verify that the autopilot moves the control yoke or stick aft.
22. De-select the Vertical Flag on the Deviations page.
23. Verify that the autopilot indicates that it is no longer capturing or tracking the glideslope.
24. Set the Vertical Deviation to 0% and verify the Vertical Flag and the Lateral Flag are de-selected.
25. Disengage the autopilot.
Figure 6-2 Autopilot Test Page - Deviation

Rev. 13 Page 6-18
6.3.9.5 GPS Roll Steering Check
GPS roll steering is handled in one of three ways:
1. If the autopilot has an ARINC 429 roll steering input, the GI 275 can provide ARINC 429 roll
steering directly to the autopilot.
2. If an external roll steering converter has been installed, the GI 275 can provide ARINC 429 roll
steering to the converter, which then outputs an analog heading error signal to the autopilot.
3. The GI 275 can provide the roll steering via the heading error output, taking the place of a separate
roll steering converter. The autopilot is left in Heading mode, and the GI 275 varies the heading
error output to steer the autopilot.
6.3.9.5.1 ARINC 429 GPS Roll Steering Check

This test verifies that the GPS roll steering interface between the GI 275 and the autopilot is functional.
2. Navigate to the GPSS page (Calibration/Test → Autopilot → Test → A429 Output).
3. Engage GPS Annunciate discrete output (if configured) and GPS Select discrete output (if
configured).
4. Engage the autopilot in GPSS mode. If an external roll steering converter is used, engage the
autopilot in Heading mode and set the roll steering converter to roll steering.
5. Set the Roll angle to 10°RT.
6. Set GND Speed to 50 KT.
7. Touch GPSS Valid (i.e., illuminated green).
8. Verify that the autopilot rolls the control yoke or stick to the right.
10. Verify that the autopilot rolls the control yoke or stick level.
11. Set the Roll angle to 10°LT.
12. Verify that the autopilot rolls the control yoke or stick to the left.
14. Set GND Speed to 0 KT.
15. Deselect GPSS Valid.
16. Disconnect the autopilot.
Figure 6-3 GPSS Page

Rev. 13 Page 6-19
6.3.9.5.2 Analog GPS Roll Steering Check
This check verifies that the GPSS/HDG Control selection is configured correctly and also verifies the
operation of the analog GPS roll steering interface between the GI 275 and the autopilot.
NOTE
The Heading and Course Error Check in Section 6.3.9.3 must be successfully completed
prior to checking the operation of the GI 275 Analog GPS roll steering.

2. Use the CDI button to select GPS as the navigation source on the HSI.
3. Pull up the menu and touch HSI Options → HDG Options menu and change the AP HDG REF to
GPSS.
4. Verify that “GPSS” is displayed.
5. Verify the cyan heading bug is hollowed out.
6. Pull up the menu and touch HSI Options → HDG Options menu and change the AP HDG REF to
HDG Bug.
7. Verify that “GPSS” is no longer displayed.
Figure 6-4 GPSS Selection
GNS 4XXW/5XXW Series, GTN 6XX/7XX Series, and GTN Xi Series Units
The following steps are not required if the Heading Error Test has been successfully completed. Due to the
nature of the GNS 4XXW/5XXW, GTN 6XX/7XX, and GTN Xi self-test operation, it may be difficult to
observe the self-test response. It is recommended that the Heading Error Test be used in place of self-test
operation. Perform the following check for the GPS source that is providing navigation data to the HSI:
1. Power on the GPS unit is in Normal mode.
2. Proceed to the Instrument Panel Self-Test page.
3. Ensure that “GPSS” is displayed on the GI 275 (refer to Figure 6-4).
4. Engage the autopilot in HDG mode. If possible, engage only the flight director and not the
autopilot servos.
5. If available, verify that the flight director slowly moves back and forth between a right bank and
wings level. If the flight director is not available, verify that the autopilot rolls the control yoke or
stick to the right if AP is engaged.
GNS 480 Navigator

For the GPS source that is providing navigation data to the HSI, do the following:
1. Power on the GNS 480 is in Ground Maintenance mode and navigate to the Autopilot Test page.
2. Ensure that “GPSS” is displayed on the GI 275.
3. Set the ROLL/STEER to 10°R.
4. Verify that the autopilot rolls the control yoke or stick to the right.
5. Set the ROLL/STEER to 0°.
6. Verify that the autopilot rolls the control yoke or stick level.

Rev. 13 Page 6-20
7. Set the ROLL/STEER to 10°L.
8. Verify that the autopilot rolls the control yoke or stick to the left.
9. Disconnect the autopilot.
6.3.10 Flight Databases Check

This section verifies that all databases are up-to-date.
2. Navigate to the Database menu (Menu → System → Databases (DB)).
3. Verify that all databases are up-to-date. Outdated databases will be in amber.
4. If any databases are out-of-date, follow the instructions in Section 5.15.
NOTE
The Basemap and Terrain databases do not have expiration dates.

Rev. 13 Page 6-21
6.4 AHRS Ground Checks
These checks must be performed on each GI 275 unit with an internal ADAHRS that is configured on
(i.e., AHRS configured to Internal). The following section completes the required AHRS calibration and
compass swing checks/adjustments.
6.4.1 Magnetometer Calibration

Use the compass rose or a calibrated magnetic sight compass to calibrate the magnetometer. Ensure the
aircraft and compass is located away from magnetic buildings, materials, and other structures. The
accuracy of the AHRS cannot be guaranteed if the calibration is not performed in an area that is free of
metallic structure or objects. Refer to Section 6.4.5 for guidance in evaluating a site for magnetic
disturbances.
NOTE
The Pitch/Roll Offset Compensation Procedure in Section 5.8.1.2 must be completed prior
to performing this procedure.
Performing the magnetometer calibration removes any previously stored heading offset values. For
multiple AHRS installations, the calibration can be done simultaneously using multiple displays.
1. Start the aircraft engine per the POH/AFM.
2. Taxi the aircraft to a desired calibration area.
3. Power on the GI 275(s) in Configuration mode.
4. Navigate to the test page (Calibration/Test → Attitude/Heading → Calibrate Magnetometer).
5. Complete the Before Calibration steps listed on the display; touch Next after completing each step
to move to the next step.
6. Touch the Start button when it becomes available to start the calibration procedure.
7. Follow the on-screen commands to complete the calibration.
8. Repeat the steps 4 - 7 for each installed AHRS unit if not completed simultaneously.
A successful heading calibration point is a full 18-second countdown followed by instruction to move. Due
to the difficulties in executing smooth, accurate turns, the display may incorrectly interpret the approach
heading point and instruct to “HOLD POSITION” prior to full completion of a 36° turn. If this condition is
encountered, use outside references to complete the approximate 36° turn, instead of using the display
instructions of when to complete the turn (use the compass rose radial to make the 36° (±5°) turn
increments). Accurately completing each 36° heading point for the required time as instructed will result in
a successful calibration.
Due to high winds or excessive airframe vibration, the operator may encounter a condition where the
18-second countdown is restarted without full completion of the previous countdown. If this is experienced
more than once for a given heading point, the operator should begin turning to the next station
(approximately 36°). A minimum of two successful heading points per quadrant is required. It may
sometimes be required to hold at a station after a countdown restart. A maximum of 20 heading points are
allowed for the entire calibration procedure. If too many countdown restarts are encountered, the
calibration will fail with the message, “TOO MANY STATIONS”.

Rev. 13 Page 6-22
6.4.2 Compass Swing
After the Magnetometer Calibration Procedure is completed, a compass swing must be performed to verify
the AHRS heading accuracy.
1. With all of the aircraft and avionics systems powered on and operating normally, position the
aircraft on a compass rose at a heading 360° (Magnetic North) or select a level and magnetically
clean location and use a calibrated sight compass.
2. With the GI 275 in Normal mode, hold the knob in to open the menu.
3. Navigate to the Units page (System → Units).
4. Toggle the Nav Angle field to Magnetic.
5. Close the menu.
6. Record the HDG value displayed on the display as indicated in Table 6-4.
7. Record the heading displayed on the standby compass and non-stabilized compass. Verify or
correct the standby compass deviation card.
8. Calculate the heading errors by subtracting the displayed (B) value from the actual (A) value for
each of the headings. If each heading displayed on the display (or display #1 and display #2) is at
or within ±3° of the actual heading, no further adjustments are necessary. If one or more of the
displayed heading values are outside this range, further calibration is needed.
9. If all calculated heading errors are between -5° and +5° inclusive, the heading offset procedure can
be used for the Heading Offset Compensation Procedure. Proceed to Section 6.4.2.1.
NOTE
If at least one Heading Error (A-B) is greater than 5°/less than –5°, DO NOT perform the
Heading Offset Procedure in Section 6.4.2.1 until the GMU 11/44B installation has been
physically corrected.
10. If at least one Heading Error (A-B) is greater than 5°/less than -5°, calculate the average error by
adding all errors and dividing by 12. This is the angle by which the GMU 11/44B must be
physically rotated to correct the installation.
11. Modify the installation to rotate the GMU 11/44B by the amount calculated in the previous step.
When looking down at the GMU 11/44B, rotate clockwise for positive values and
counterclockwise for negative values.
12. After physically correcting the GMU 11/44B installation, repeat the procedures in Section 6.4.1
and Section 6.4.2.

Rev. 13 Page 6-23
Table 6-4 Heading Verification AHRS
AHRS #1 (For Dual Installations)
Displayed AHRS Standby Compass
Heading (A) Heading Error (A-B)
or AHRS #1 Heading (B) Heading
360° (North)
30°
60°
90°(East)
120°
150°
180°(South)
210°
240°
270°(West)
300°
330°
AHRS #2 (For Dual Installations Only)

Displayed AHRS Standby Compass
Heading (A) Heading Error (A-B)
or AHRS #2 Heading (B) Heading
360° (North)
30°
60°
90°(East)
120°
150°
180°(South)
210°
240°
270°(West)
300°
330°

Rev. 13 Page 6-24
6.4.2.1 Heading Offset Compensation
NOTE
This procedure is only needed when the GI 275 is interfaced to an external AHRS source.
The Heading Offset Compensation Procedure is not required if it was determined in Section 6.4.2 that all
calculated heading errors are between -3° and +3° inclusive. If at least one heading error was greater than
3° or less than -3°, but all heading errors were between - 5° and +5° inclusive, use the Heading Offset
Compensation Procedure to correct the errors. Otherwise, physically correct the appropriate GMU 11/44B
installation before performing the Heading Offset Compensation Procedure.
NOTE
If the Heading Offset Compensation Procedure must be performed on both AHRS #1 and
AHRS #2, it is permitted to run the procedure below simultaneously on two displays.
The Magnetometer Calibration Procedure must be performed before the Heading Offset Compensation
Procedure. Performing the magnetometer calibration removes any stored heading offset values.
1. Start the aircraft engine in accordance with the aircraft AFM/POH.
2. Power the displays on in Configuration mode.
3. Touch Heading Offset from the Procedure menu (Calibration/Test→ Attitude/Heading).
4. Select the desired AHRS unit to calibrate from the AHRS Unit selection.
5. Complete the Before Calibration steps listed on the display; touch each step when complete so that
a green check mark appears next to the selection.
6. Touch the Calibrate button when it becomes active to start the calibration procedure.
7. Follow the on-screen commands to complete the calibration.
6.4.3 Engine Vibration Test

The calibration procedures in Section 5.8.1.1 through Section 6.4.2.1 do not have to be completed prior to
performing this procedure.
For dual AHRS installations, the following procedure must be performed for each AHRS on the display it
is wired to. The procedure can be done simultaneously on each display. Follow the prompts on each
display. Initiate the Engine Vibration Test by performing the following steps:
1. Start the aircraft engine in accordance with the aircraft AFM/POH.
2. Power on the display(s) in Configuration mode.
3. Navigate to the test page (Calibration/Test → Attitude/Heading → Engine Vibration Test).
5. Touch Start to begin the procedure.
6. Gradually increase the engine throttle in small increments from idle to full and back to idle over a
period of approximately 1 minute.
7. Observe the readout on the display while performing the engine run-up. The values shown during
the test must not exceed 100 in order for the test to be considered a pass. Values in excess of 100
will cause the display to indicate a failure.
8. Select DONE when finished.

Rev. 13 Page 6-25
If failures are indicated, the engine run-up check may be repeated up to two more times. If the check does
not pass after three attempts, the installation cannot be considered reliable until the source of the vibration
problem is identified and fixed. In the event of repeated failures during the engine run-up check, record the
values that are reported to be out of range for future reference.
The following are potential causes for a failure of the engine run-up check:
• Vibration motion of AHRS and/or GMU 11/44B caused by neighboring equipment and/or
supports
• Mounting screws and other hardware for AHRS and/or GMU 11/44B are not firmly attached
• AHRS connector is not firmly attached to unit
• Wiring connected to the remotely mounted AHRS or GMU 11/44B is not firmly secured to
supporting structure
• An engine/propeller is significantly out of balance
• GI 275 does not have up-to-date software
• A connector is inadequately torqued (loose connectors can affect the Acceleration and Gyro data
very easily)
• Harnesses are inadequately secured (if there is a ‘pre-load’ from the harness or P/S lines, this can
cause a specific axis to fail)
• Batteries are not properly installed with dampers
• Mounting hole and screws are not properly torqued (verify the seating of the GI 275)
• The panel mounting provisions are inadequate:
◦ The panel thickness is inadequate
◦ Adjacent instrumentation insecurely mounted (any external mounted items, such as an iPad
attached to the panel, can result in issues)
◦ Pull the power to any other instrument on the panel that might have a gyro, such as the Turn
Coordinator
After the AHRS calibration is complete, the AHRS attitude and heading information displayed will
become valid within 1 minute of power-up in Normal mode.

Rev. 13 Page 6-26
6.4.4 Magnetometer Interference Test
For dual AHRS installations, the following procedure must be performed on each AHRS through the
display it is directly wired to. The test can be done simultaneously on each display. Follow the display
prompts.
1. Power on the display(s) in Configuration mode.
2. Navigate to the test page (Calibration/Test → Attitude/Heading → Interference Test).
NOTE
The second item on the checklist instructs the operator to “prepare a detailed test sequence”.
An example sequence is listed in Section 4.6.1.1 and Garmin document AHRS/Magnetometer
Installation Considerations (P/N 190-01051-00).
4. Touch Start to start the procedure.

5. Perform each action on the Test Sequence List at its specified elapsed time and duration. This will
help ensure correct identification of magnetic field deviation sources after the survey is complete.
The Magnetometer Interference Test must be run for a duration of at least 25 seconds to properly
complete.
6. Monitor the magnetic field deviation percentage throughout the survey. If deviation levels exceed
thresholds, mark the survey sequence exercises during which these deviations occurred.
7. Touch Done when the test sequence is completed. The GI 275 will display a test Pass or Fail, the
worst-case percentage of magnetic interference, and the time stamp at which it occurred.
8. Repeat the procedure for each installed AHRS unit if they were not completed simultaneously.
9. If the check passes, no further action is required.
If the check fails, the installation is considered unreliable until the source of magnetic interference is
identified and fixed. The Magnetometer Interference Test must be repeated until passed. When the
Magnetometer Interference Test fails, record the three magnetometer maximum deviation values and their
corresponding timestamps. A maximum deviation value greater than 5.0 mGauss in either the X or Y axes,
or greater than 8.0 mGauss in the Z axis, indicates a problem that must be resolved. Compare the
corresponding timestamps with the prepared test sequence to identify which action produced the failure.
Contact Garmin Support for assistance.
Three common reasons for a failed Magnetometer Interference Test are:
• Equipment, wiring, or ferro-magnetic items are installed too close to the magnetometer
• An electronic device has become grounded through the aircraft structure instead of the proper
ground wire in a twisted shielded pair, especially if the ground return path through the aircraft
structure passes near the GMU 11/44B
• The Interference Test was not run for a long enough duration. At least 25 seconds are required for
the test to properly complete

Rev. 13 Page 6-27
6.4.5 Site Evaluation of Magnetic Disturbances
Typically, a compass rose is an acceptable location to perform the Magnetometer Calibration Procedure.
However, even an existing compass rose can be evaluated to determine if it is free of magnetic
disturbances. If the evaluation of an existing compass rose indicates that magnetic disturbances are present,
an alternative location must be found to perform the Magnetometer Calibration Procedure.
A GI 275-equipped aircraft can be used to evaluate a candidate site for magnetic disturbances and
determine whether it is a suitable location to perform the Magnetometer Calibration Procedure. The
Magnetometer Calibration Procedure itself contains the logic to simultaneously survey the location for
magnetic cleanliness while it is computing the magnetometer calibration parameters.
The GI 275-equipped aircraft used to evaluate the site must have already completed the Pitch/Roll Offset
Compensation Procedure (Section 5.8.1.2). The completion of the Magnetometer Calibration Procedure
(Section 6.4.1) is not required. In order to evaluate a site, the Magnetometer Calibration Procedure must be
performed twice: once turning clockwise around the site and once turning counterclockwise. Both times,
the procedure should be conducted as described in Section 6.4.1, with the exception of the direction of
turns around the site.
If, upon completion of the Magnetometer Calibration Procedure in each clockwise and counterclockwise
direction, the GI 275 displays the “CALIBRATION SUCCESSFUL/SITE IS CLEAN” message, then the
candidate site is sufficiently free of magnetic disturbances and is acceptable for performing the
Magnetometer Calibration Procedure. It is important to obtain successful results in both the clockwise and
counterclockwise directions.
If, upon completion of the Magnetometer Calibration Procedure in either of the two directions, the GI 275
displays either the “MAG FIELD AT SITE NOT UNIFORM” or “MAG FIELD AT SITE DIFFERS
FROM IGRF MODEL” message, then the site contains magnetic disturbances that are too large, and an
alternate site should be used for the AHRS magnetic calibration.

Rev. 13 Page 6-28
6.5 Indicator-Specific Checks
6.5.1 Attitude and Direction Indicator (ADI) Checks
The ADI Checkout Procedure, contained in the following subsections, must be conducted on each Primary
ADI and Standby ADI in the GI 275 system.
6.5.1.1 Pitot-Static and Airspeed Tape Settings Checks

The following section verifies the correct operation of the GI 275 altitude and airspeed tapes, standby
altimeter, and standby airspeed indicator using a pitot-static ramp tester. When using a pitot-static ramp
tester, only simulate normal aircraft operating conditions as defined in the aircraft Type Data (POH/AFM)
or other approved STC in order to avoid component damage.
NOTE
The ADC may require a warm-up period of 15 minutes to reach full accuracy; however,
30 minutes may be required if the environmental temperature is below 0º C.
The airspeed tape display and settings must be verified using Section 6.5.1.1.1 or Section 6.5.1.1.2
depending on the airspeed tape configuration (Basic or Advanced, respectively). The airspeeds referenced
in the following sections were configured per the instructions in Section 5.6.1.1.
6.5.1.1.1 Basic Airspeed Tape Setting

If the Airspeed Configuration Type is set to Basic, verify correct operation of the ADC as follows. The
Airspeed Configuration Type is set on the Airspeed Configuration page (Setup → Airframe
Configuration → Airspeed Configuration).
NOTE
If the ADC and standby airspeed indicator are on separate pitot-static systems, it is
recommended to set up the test set so that both systems can be tested at the same time, or
separate tests must be completed for each system.

2. Using a pitot-static test set, increase the airspeed until the airspeed tape pointer is at the bottom of
the white band (Vs0).
3. Verify that the bottom of the white arc/band on the standby ASI and ADI airspeed tape are at the
same airspeed value.
4. For twin-engine aircraft with a minimum control speed: Increase the airspeed to the lower red
radial (Vmca). Verify that the red radial on the standby ASI and ADI airspeed tape are at the same
airspeed value.
5. Change the airspeed until the ADI airspeed tape pointer is at the bottom of the green band (Vs1).
6. Verify that the bottom of the green arc/band on the standby ASI and ADI airspeed tape are at the
7. For twin-engine aircraft only: Increase the airspeed to the blue radial (Vyse). Verify that the blue
radial on the standby ASI and ADI airspeed tape are at the same airspeed value.
8. Change the airspeed until the ADI airspeed tape pointer is at the top of the white band (Vfe).
9. Verify that the top of the white arc/band on the standby ASI and ADI airspeed tape are at the same
airspeed value.

Rev. 13 Page 6-29
10. Change the airspeed until the ADI airspeed tape pointer is at the top of the green band/bottom of
the yellow band (Vno).
11. Verify that the top of the green arc/band on the standby ASI and ADI airspeed tape are at the same
airspeed value.
12. Increase the airspeed to the upper red radial/top of yellow arc (Vne).
13. Verify that the red radial on the standby ASI and ADI airspeed tape are at the same airspeed value.
14. Starting at the current airspeed, decrease the airspeed to zero, stopping at each of the airspeeds
listed in Table 6-5 (airspeeds above Vne should not be checked), verifying that the ADI and
standby ASI airspeed values are within the tolerances indicated in Table 6-5.
Table 6-5 Airspeed Test Points

Test Set Airspeed (kt) ADI Allowed Tolerance (kt)
50 ±5.0
80 ±3.5
100 ±2.0
120 ±2.0
150 ±2.0
180 ±2.0
210 ±2.0
250 ±2.0
290 ±3.0
6.5.1.1.2 Advanced Airspeed Tape Setting

If the Airspeed Configuration Type is set to Advanced, refer to Appendix E. Set the Airspeed
Configuration Type on the Airspeed Configuration page (Setup → Airframe Configuration → Airspeed
Configuration). Verify correct operation of the ADC as follows.
NOTE
If the ADC and standby airspeed indicator are on separate pitot-static systems, it is
recommended to set up the test set so that both systems can be tested at the same time, or
separate tests must be completed for each system.

2. Using a pitot-static test set, increase the airspeed until the ADI airspeed tape pointer is at the
bottom of the white band (Vs0).
3. Verify that the bottom of the white arc/band on the standby ASI and ADI airspeed tape are at the
4. Increase the IAS throughout the range of the ASI. Stop at the limits of all Arc Ranges and at all
Marking values configured per the instructions in Table E-1 and Table E-4.
5. Verify that the ranges and markings on the standby ASI and ADI are located at the same airspeed
values. The last value verified should be the beginning of the red overspeed range (Vne/Vmo/
Mmo).

Rev. 13 Page 6-30
6. The following applies to Variable Vne/Vmo/Mmo aircraft only:
a. Decrease the IAS to 25 knots below the barber pole on the ADI. Increase the indicated altitude
to the maximum operating altitude or service ceiling. Verify that the red overspeed range on
the ADI and barber pole on the standby ASI are at the same airspeed (±5 knots). Decrease the
airspeed as needed to ensure the IAS does not exceed the overspeed range during the
simulated climb.
b. Decrease the indicated altitude (do not exceed vertical speed limitations) back to ambient
static pressure.
7. Starting at the current airspeed, decrease the airspeed to zero, stopping at all of the relevant
airspeeds listed in Table 6-5 (airspeeds above Vne should not be checked). Verify that the ADI and
standby ASI values are within the tolerances indicated.
6.5.1.1.3 Altimeter Check

The GI 275 and standby altitude displays must be verified per Title 14 of the CFR 91.411 and Part 43
Appendix E, with the following exception to 14 CFR Part 43 Appendix E, paragraph (b)(1):
• The tests of sub-paragraphs iv (Friction) and vi (Barometric Scale Error) are not applicable to the
GI 275 due to the ADC interface and instrument display being digital.
6.5.1.2 ADI OAT Check

1. Power on all GI 275s in the system in Normal Mode.
2. On the ADI page, navigate to the Misc. Field menu page (ADI Options → Misc. Field).
3. Touch the button that displays temperature and select OAT. Touch the OAT button to enable it.
4. Exit the menu and verify that OAT is displayed in the bottom-left of the ADI page.
6.5.1.3 Standard Turn Rate Indicator Check

Standard turn rate indicators require an interfaced OAT probe.
2. Use a pitot/static test set to increase the airspeed to 70 kts.
3. Verify that the standard turn rate indicators are displayed at the top of the page (refer to
Figure 6-5). If they are not displayed, then the ADI is not receiving outside air temperature data
from the GTP 59.
Figure 6-5 ADI Standard Turn Rate Indicators

Rev. 13 Page 6-31
6.5.1.4 Synthetic Vision Check
Complete this section if SVT is enabled.
NOTE
It may take up to a minute for the synthetic terrain data to be displayed on the display.
Until SVT is active, the horizon display will be the standard blue over brown.

2. Wait for the GI 275 to initialize (i.e., attitude, heading, airspeed, altitude, and GPS position
become valid).
3. On the display, navigate to the synthetic vision options (Menu → Options → Terrain SVT).
4. Toggle on Synthetic Terrain (i.e., illuminated green).
5. Verify that there are no SVT alerts.
6. Verify that synthetic terrain data is displayed on the display.
6.5.2 Multifunction Display (MFD) Ground Checks

The MFD checkout procedures must be conducted on every MFD installed in the GI 275 system. The
following sections must be completed as part of the MFD checkout process.
6.5.2.1 MFD OAT Check

2. Navigate to the MFD Data page (Menu → Select Page → MFD Data or turn the outer knob).
3. Navigate to the MFD Data Options menu (Menu → MFD Data Options) and select the desired
air temperature reference units page to match the type specified in the AFM or POH of the aircraft:
a. OAT (Static) (static air temperature)
b. OAT (Total) (total air temperature)
4. Verify the correct units (Celsius or Fahrenheit) and temperature reference (static or total) are
displayed in the field.

Rev. 13 Page 6-32
6.5.3 Engine Indication System (EIS) Checks
This section contains procedures to verify proper installation, operation, and gauge markings of the EIS.
Begin with the engine off and at ambient temperature.
6.5.3.1 Temperature Sensor Checks

This check applies to all temperature sensors interfaced to the EIS.
1. Power on each EIS display in Normal mode.
2. Navigate to the CHT/EGT page (Menu → Select Page → CHT/EGT or turn the outer knob).
3. Verify the temperatures being displayed are within ± 2°C of the ambient temperature.
NOTE
If the engine has not had sufficient time to reach ambient temperature, it is necessary to
verify each temperature source independently.
4. Verify each CHT, EGT, TIT, and TIT2 (if installed) probe is wired to the corresponding cylinder
number by applying heat to each sensor and monitoring the temperature rise on the EIS display.
NOTE
If the temperature decreases when heat is applied, the wire polarity may be reversed.
6.5.3.2 EIS Gauge Layout and Marking Checks

2. Verify that no or marks are present on any EIS gauge.
3. Verify the gauges on each EIS display match the required layout per the POH/AFM. Refer to
Appendix F for details on EIS gauge layouts.
4. Verify that the instrument gauge markings and ranges match the aircraft data gathered in
Section 5.7.4.2, Table 5-57, and Table 5-58.
WARNING
Failure to properly configure the EIS gauges per the POH/AFM and other approved data
could result in serious injury, damage to equipment, or death.
6.5.3.2.1 Manifold Pressure Sensor Check

In Normal mode, verify that the gauge reads ambient pressure ±1 inHg (inches of mercury).
NOTE
Estimate the ambient pressure by subtracting 1 inHg for every 1,000 ft of field elevation
from the current barometric pressure.
6.5.3.2.2 Oil Pressure Sensor Check

In Normal mode, verify that the gauge reads 0 ±1 psi.

Rev. 13 Page 6-33
6.5.3.2.3 Fuel Pressure Sensor Check
1. In Normal mode, verify that the gauge reads 0 ±1 psi. It may be necessary to manipulate the
throttle/mixture to reduce residual fuel pressure.
2. If installed, turn on the fuel boost pump and verify the fuel pressure increases. Turn off the boost
pump.
6.5.3.2.4 Tachometer Check

In Normal mode, verify that the gauge indicates 0 RPM.
6.5.3.2.5 Fuel Quantity Check

1. In Normal mode, verify the indicated fuel quantities are accurate for each tank (Main and AUX).
2. Verify that the unusable fuel quantity established by the aircraft manufacturer is the zero reading
and a red line is present at zero.
6.5.3.2.6 Fuel Flow Sensor Check

In Normal mode, verify that the gauge reads 0 GPH.
6.5.3.2.7 Shunt and Voltage Sensor Checks

1. In Normal mode, verify all intended gauges are available.
2. Verify that the gauge(s) show the correct aircraft voltage and amperage with the engine off.
NOTE
An alternator load meter may indicate a small current if the alternator field is on.
6.5.3.2.8 OAT (EIS) Check

This check only applies to standalone GI 275 EIS units with an interfaced OAT sensor.
NOTE
If the GI 275 EIS is interfaced to a PFD, the OAT sensor must be interfaced to that PFD
and not to a GEA.
1. In Normal mode, navigate to the AUX EIS page and touch a configurable field button.
2. Select OAT(EIS) and verify that the field displays the correct outside air temperature.

Rev. 13 Page 6-34
6.5.3.3 EIS Engine Run-up Checks
An Engine Run-up Check must be performed to ensure proper installation and configuration of the EIS
sensors and gauges. Always follow engine start-up procedures as provided in the aircraft POH.
CAUTION
If the engine indications are not within operating specifications shortly after starting,
IMMEDIATELY shut down the engine and troubleshoot the problem. Failure to do so may
cause engine damage.
1. Obtain an optical tachometer to monitor propeller RPM.

2. Place the aircraft in an open and clear area appropriate for an extended engine run-up.
3. Follow the engine start-up procedure as outlined in the aircraft POH. Adhere to the required
observations immediately following the start, such as oil pressure within 30 seconds.
4. For twin-engine aircraft, verify the appropriate engine gauges respond corresponding to the correct
side (left/right or front/rear).
5. Verify the EIS RPM gauge(s) match the optical tachometer reading ±50 RPM.
6. Allow the engine to warm-up and oil temperature to increase to at least 100°F.
7. Verify the engine oil pressure gauge is reading within the green arc.
8. Verify the EIS RPM gauge matches the optical tachometer reading ±50 RPM during all phases of
the engine run-up.
9. Verify the alternator load meter (if installed) and battery charge/discharge ammeter (if installed)
indicate a positive load.
10. Perform individual magneto checks as specified by the aircraft POH. If the RPM does not drop as
expected when switching from both magnetos to one, the P-lead, ignition switch wiring, or
magneto timing is incorrect. Discontinue the test immediately and repair the ignition system.
11. Perform the engine pre-takeoff run-up checklist in accordance with the aircraft POH.
12. Verify all EIS readings are consistent with normal operation performance.
13. Verify all installed sensors and fittings are free of leaks.
6.5.3.4 EIS Annunciator Light Check

If an EIS annunciator(s) is installed, perform the following procedure:
1. In Configuration mode, navigate to the Discrete Outputs page (Diagnostics → Discrete Outputs).
2. Toggle the discrete labeled as “Engine Warning” (as configured in Section 5.5.12.1) to Active and
verify that the red engine annunciator lamp illuminates. Toggle back to Inactive.
3. Toggle the discrete labeled as “Engine Caution” (as configured in Section 5.5.12.1) to Active and
verify that the yellow engine annunciator lamp illuminates. Toggle back to Inactive.
NOTE
For separate annunciators, if the annunciator lights do not illuminate, verify the lamp
operation by pressing on the lens holder. If the lamp does not illuminate, inspect and/or
replace the lamps and repeat the check.
4. If the annunciator(s) do not illuminate, remove power from the aircraft and inspect the wiring.

Rev. 13 Page 6-35
6.5.4 Standby Indicator Check
This check verifies the configuration of the MFD/Standby ADI and HSI/Standby ADI automatic reversion
and backup battery. Aircraft not configured for auto-reversionary standby instruments do not need to
perform the following check.
2. Verify that no amber or red battery icon is displayed on the GI 275 standby display and that no
messages annunciate.
3. Verify that attitude, heading, altitude, and airspeed are displayed normally on the standby display’s
ADI page and on the primary display (i.e., no warnings, cautions, or advisories related to these
functions).
4. Verify that the additional configured pages display information on the standby display (i.e., the
standby should not be in reversionary mode).
5. Power off the primary display.
6. The standby display should revert to the ADI page within 1 second. Ensure that the attitude,
heading, altitude, and airspeed are displayed normally on the GI 275 standby display (i.e., no
warnings, cautions, or advisories related to these functions).
7. Power back on the primary display.
8. Verify that the primary display returns to Normal mode (may take up to 2 minutes for AHRS to
align after restoring power).
9. Turn off the aircraft master switch and verify that all displays not equipped with a backup battery
have powered off.
10. Touch Stay On on the dialog box that appears on the standby display. If any other display has the
backup battery installed, touch Turn Off.
11. Verify that attitude, heading, altitude, and airspeed are displayed on the standby display.
12. Turn back on the aircraft master switch.
13. Verify that all displays in the system return to Normal mode (may take up to 2 minutes for AHRS
to align).

Rev. 13 Page 6-36
6.6 Placards and Switch Labeling Check
If any placards were replaced or relocated as a result of a display installation, verify the following:
• The font size of the new placard is the same as the old placard it is replacing
• The color of the new placard is identical to the color of the placard it is replacing
• The text on the new placard is identical to the text on the placard it is replacing (it can be arranged
differently as required by space constraints, but the wording must be the same)
• The placard must be legible and not obscured to the pilot by the glareshield, in all flight control
positions, or by any other component in the flight deck
If the new switch labels were added as a result of the GI 275 installation, verify the following:
• The font size and label is legible from the pilot’s seat
• The labels are legible in all ambient light conditions. In particular, the labels are legible with
ambient flood lighting in darkness
• The switch label must be legible and not obscured to the pilot by the glareshield, in all flight
control positions, or by any other component to include the switch position
If the GI 275 installation is limited to VFR operation only, and the criteria in Section 2.2 determined a
placard is required, verify the following:
• The text on the placard reads: “AIRCRAFT LIMITED TO VFR”
• The font is at least 0.25 inches high
• The placard is legible from the pilot’s seat
If separate EIS annunciators were installed, a placard or label is required. Verify the following:
• The text on the placard reads: “ENGINE”
• The font is at least 0.125 inches high and easily readable with sufficient contrast from the
surroundings
• The text must be displayed in a conspicuous place so that it cannot be obscured to the pilot by the
glareshield or any other component and remains visible in all flight control positions
• The text is legible in all ambient light conditions, particularly with ambient floodlighting in
darkness
Aircraft with an existing Operating Airspeed Placard, which includes information such as maneuvering
speed, landing gear operating speed, and multi-engine aircraft operating speeds, that was relocated as the
result of installation of the GI 275 system must have the new placard installed as close to the airspeed
display as practical.

Rev. 13 Page 6-37
6.7 Electromagnetic Interference (EMI) Check
An EMC check must be conducted once the GI 275 system is installed and all interfaces to external
equipment are verified to be working correctly. The EMC check verifies that the GI 275 is not producing
unacceptable interference in other avionics systems and other avionics systems are not producing
unacceptable interference in the unit.
1. Enter equipment installed in the aircraft into the Source row and Victim column of the form.
2. Apply power to all avionics systems except for the components that are considered to be part of the
GI 275 system.
3. Verify all existing avionics systems are functioning properly.
4. Apply power to the GI 275 system components.
5. Remove power from all other avionics systems.
Before applying power to the next system, wait for the current system start-up sequence to finish.
6. Apply power and/or operate the systems listed on the fillable form, one system at a time.
7. Verify the GI 275 system functions properly. Verify there are no related messages displayed.
8. Verify each radio is functioning properly by completing the following:
a. For each VHF COM radio, monitor one local frequency, one remote (far field) frequency, and
one unused frequency.
a. Verify no unintended squelch breaks or audio tones interfere with communications.
b. For each VHF NAV radio, monitor one local frequency, one remote (far field) frequency, and
one unused frequency.
c. Verify there are no guidance errors.
d. Verify no audio tones interfere with the station ID.
9. If an EI FT-60 or an EI FT-90 fuel flow sensor is installed, verify the fuel flow indication is
accurate and the indication does not fluctuate or invalidate the display.
a. Transmit various modulating tones on each COM radio (e.g., whistling).
b. Refer to Section 4.7.6.1 for details if the fuel flow indication fluctuates.
10. Verify all other avionic systems are functioning properly.

Rev. 13 Page 6-38
‫‪VICTIM‬‬
‫)‪Communication Radio(s‬‬
‫‪Power Plant Instruments‬‬
‫‪Turn and Bank Indicator‬‬
‫‪Vertical Speed Indicator‬‬
‫‪Gov RPM Incr / Decr‬‬

‫)‪Navigation Radio(s‬‬
‫‪Magnetic Compass‬‬
‫‪Airspeed Indicator‬‬
‫‪Heading Indicator‬‬
‫‪Attitude Indicator‬‬
‫‪Radar Altimeter‬‬
‫‪Autopilot / SAS‬‬
‫‪Engine Relight‬‬
‫‪OAT Indicator‬‬
‫‪Transponder‬‬
‫‪Audio Panel‬‬
‫‪Eng Deicing‬‬
‫‪Hyd System‬‬
‫‪Pulse Light‬‬
‫‪TAS/TCAS‬‬
‫‪Anti Coll Lt‬‬
‫‪Fuel Valve‬‬
‫‪Generator‬‬
‫‪Pitot Heat‬‬
‫‪Altimeter‬‬
‫‪Ldg Lts‬‬
‫‪G,‬‬
‫‪Pos Lt‬‬
‫‪Clock‬‬
‫‪Attitude Indicator‬‬ ‫܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆‬
‫‪Airspeed Indicator‬‬ ‫܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆‬
‫‪Altimeter‬‬ ‫܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆‬
‫‪Vertical Speed‬‬
‫܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆‬
‫‪Indicator‬‬
‫‪Turn and Bank‬‬
‫܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆‬
‫‪Indicator‬‬
‫‪Heading Indicator‬‬ ‫܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆‬
‫‪Magnetic‬‬
‫܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆‬
‫‪Compass‬‬
‫‪Clock‬‬ ‫܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆‬
‫‪OAT Indicator‬‬ ‫܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆‬
‫‪Power Plant‬‬
‫܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆‬
‫‪Instruments‬‬
‫‪SOURCE‬‬
‫‪Autopilot / SAS‬‬ ‫܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆‬
‫‪Navigation‬‬
‫܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆‬
‫)‪Radio(s‬‬
‫‪Communication‬‬
‫܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆‬
‫)‪Radio(s‬‬
‫‪Engine Relight‬‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬
‫‪Fuel Valve‬‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬
‫‪Pitot Heat‬‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬
‫‪Pulse Light‬‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬
‫‪Generator‬‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬
‫‪Pos Lt‬‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬
‫‪Anti Coll Lt‬‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬
‫‪Ldg Lts‬‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬
‫‪Gov RPM Incr /‬‬
‫܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆‬
‫‪Decr‬‬
‫‪Eng Deicing‬‬ ‫܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬
‫‪Hyd System‬‬ ‫܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬
‫‪Radar Altimeter‬‬ ‫܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬
‫‪TAS/TCAS‬‬ ‫܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬
‫‪Transponder‬‬ ‫܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬
‫‪Audio Panel‬‬ ‫܆܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬
‫‪G,‬‬ ‫܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬
‫܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬
‫܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬
‫܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬
‫܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬
‫܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬
‫܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬
‫܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬
‫‪Figure 6-6 EMI Victim/Source Matrix‬‬
‫‪190-02246-10‬‬ ‫‪GI 275 Part 23 AML STC Installation Manual‬‬

‫‪Rev. 13‬‬ ‫‪Page 6-39‬‬
6.8 Flight Checks
All checks contained in the previous sections must be completed prior to performing the following flight
checks.
6.8.1 ADI Flight Checks

The following items (applicable to the installation) must be verified during flight:
• Display of attitude, airspeed, altitude, and heading on the GI 275 while maneuvering
• Display of attitude, airspeed, altitude, and heading on the standby instruments
• Navigation using each GPS and VLOC source on the CDI. For navigation receivers, both VOR
and ILS must be verified
• Audibility of the altitude alerter chime
• Display of traffic from any interfaced traffic system
6.8.2 HSI Flight Checks

• Navigation using each GPS and VLOC source on the CDI. For navigation receivers, both VOR
and ILS must be verified
• Display of weather from the GDL 69/69A SXM or FIS-B source
6.8.3 MFD Flight Checks

• Navigation using each GPS and VLOC source on the MFD CDI. For navigation receivers, both
VOR and ILS must be verified
• Display of radar altitude. The radar altitude display must be verified at several heights AGL
throughout the operating range of the radar altimeter
• Display of weather from the GDL 69/69A SXM or FIS-B source
• All applicable EIS flight checks in Section 6.8.4

Rev. 13 Page 6-40
6.8.4 EIS Flight Checks
• All gauges/markings clearly convey the respective engine parameters
• All EIS gauges are within their normal operating range
• No “Caution” or “Warning” indications are present
• Gauge indications are appropriate for all flight regimes
• Post-flight check of installed sensors and fittings for leaks
If the AFM/POH has an operating limitation based only on fuel flow, the fuel flow must be accurate within
10% to ensure the limitation is maintained. If the recorded fuel flow and measured fuel flow are out of
tolerance, the K-factor must be adjusted in Configuration mode. Perform the following:
1. Ensure the fuel lines are purged of air.
2. Record the displayed fuel flow and the measured fuel flow at the same engine settings.
• Example: Displayed value is 20 GPH, measured value is 24 GPH
3. Determine the offset ratio: Measured / Displayed.
• Example: Measured / Displayed = 24 / 20 = 1.2
4. Inverse the ratio.
• Example: 1 / 1.2 = 0.8333
5. Multiply the inverse by the currently used K-factor in Configuration mode.
• Example: Current K-factor 68000, adjusted K-factor is 68000 * 0.8333 = 56667
6. Enter the adjusted K-factor and reload the sensor.
6.8.5 Standby Flight Checks

Complete all checks in Section 6.8.1 and Section 6.8.3 for an MFD/Standby ADI. Complete all checks in
Section 6.8.1 and Section 6.8.2 for an HSI/Standby ADI.
6.8.6 Autopilot Flight Checks
NOTE
This section applies only to installations in which the GI 275 ADAHRS+AP interfaces to
an autopilot.
Once the configuration and ground checks are performed, the autopilot system must be flight tested and
adjusted for the particular airframe, if necessary. This section provides general guidelines for verifying the
autopilot, flight director performance, and any necessary adjustments.
Use the Autopilot Performance Checkout Log in Figure 6-7 to document the autopilot performance before
and after the installation of the GI 275.
If the autopilot performance does not adhere to the criteria listed in the Autopilot Performance Checkout
Log, the autopilot must be serviced in order to meet these criteria or customer acknowledgment of the
performance must be obtained prior to proceeding with the installation.

Rev. 13 Page 6-41
6.8.6.1 Autopilot Performance
The autopilot performance can be adjusted by changing the settings on the Autopilot Calibration page
(Calibration/Test → Autopilot → Calibration) while in Configuration mode.
1. To evaluate the autopilot heading performance, center the heading bug and engage the autopilot in
HDG mode. Change the heading bug by at least 45°. The autopilot must follow the heading bug
and roll out smoothly, without undershooting or overshooting the selected heading.
2. To evaluate the autopilot course performance, engage the autopilot in NAV mode. Tune to a NAV
frequency that is out of range and select the corresponding NAV on the CDI. The GI 275 will
invalidate the lateral deviation signal. Change the course by at least 45°. The autopilot must turn to
the new course and roll out smoothly without undershooting or overshooting the selected course.
6.8.6.2 Roll Steering Performance

GPS roll steering is handled in one of three ways:
1. If the autopilot has an ARINC 429 roll steering input, the GI 275 provides ARINC 429 roll
steering directly to the autopilot.
2. If an external roll steering converter has been installed, the GI 275 provides ARINC 429 roll
steering to the converter, which then outputs an analog heading error signal to the autopilot.
3. The GI 275 can provide the roll steering via its heading error output, taking the place of a separate
roll steering converter. In this case, the autopilot is left in Heading mode, and the GI 275 varies the
heading error output to steer the autopilot.
In order to evaluate roll steering performance, perform the following:
1. Set up a GPS flight plan that includes at least two legs with an angle between them.
2. Set the CDI to display the active GPS.
3. Engage the autopilot in GPS Roll Steering mode.
4. If the autopilot uses the heading error input for roll steering, engage the autopilot in HDG mode.
5. Activate GPSS (HDG → AP HDG REF → GPSS or by using the discrete switch).
6. A “GPSS” annunciation will appear on the display.
7. Verify that the autopilot flies the airplane smoothly through the turn between the two legs.
NOTE
If the Analog Roll Steering function is utilized, the scaling of the output can be adjusted
using the Analog Roll Steering Scaling setting on the Autopilot Test page. If the autopilot
does not turn sharp enough while in Roll Steering mode, increase the GPSS Scaler to
HDG value. If the autopilot turns too sharp while in Roll Steering mode, decrease the
GPSS Scaler to HDG value.
6.8.6.3 Yaw Damper Operation

This check is only required if the GI 275 is used to replace an existing yaw rate sensor to provide yaw rate
information to the autopilot. During flight, verify that the yaw damp function operates correctly.

Rev. 13 Page 6-42
6.8.6.4 GI 275 Autopilot Performance Checkout Log
Completion of this form is required only for installations interfacing to an autopilot.
Aircraft Make and Model: Aircraft Registration Number:

Autopilot Make and Model:
Autopilot Serformance Srior to G,LQVWDOODWLRQ
Date: By:
Function/Mode Criteria Notes

Selected pitch attitude held within ±2°.
Pitch Attitude Hold
Pitch attitude should not oscillate continuously.
Selected roll attitude held within ±3°.

Roll Attitude Hold
Roll attitude should not oscillate continuously.
Selected heading held within ±3°.

Heading Bug Coupling
Heading should not oscillate continuously.
Altitude held within ±100 feet.

Altitude Hold
Altitude should not oscillate continuously.
Selected Altitude Capture Overshoot during altitude capture should not

(Altitude Preselect) exceed 100 feet.
Selected vertical speed held within ±200 FPM.

Vertical Speed Hold
Vertical speed should not oscillate continuously.
Selected airspeed held within ±5 KIAS.

Airspeed Hold Indicated airspeed should not oscillate
continuously.
Lateral deviation from course remain withLQ
VOR Tracking 25% of full scale deflection once established on
course.
Lateral and vertical deviations from course/
ILS/LPV Approach glidepath remain withLQ 25% of full scale
deflection once established.
925/2&*6Fapture performancePXVW
VOR/LOC/GS Capture IXQFWLRQDVLQWHQGHGEHIRUHDQGDIWHUWKH
*,installation
Pitch and roll attitude held as specified by WKH

Go-around
autopilot PDQXIDFWXUHVGDWD
F' commands satisfy selected modes and do

Flight Director
not display excessive jitter or oscillation.
YaZ dampening performance PXVW

Yaw Damp IXQFWLRQDVLQWHQGHGEHIRUHDQGDIWHUWKH
*,installation
General Notes
Figure 6-7 Autopilot Performance Checkout Log

Sheet 1 of 2

Rev. 13 Page 6-43
G, AUTOPILOT PERFORMANCE CHECKOUT LOG (CONTINUED)
Completion of this form is required only for installations interfacing to an autopilot.
Autopilot Serformance Iollowing G, Lnstallation

By: Date:
Function/Mode Criteria Notes

Selected pitch attitude held within ±2°.
Pitch Attitude Hold
Pitch attitude should not oscillate continuously.
Selected roll attitude held within ±3°.

Roll Attitude Hold
Roll attitude should not oscillate continuously.
Selected heading held within ±3°.

Heading Bug Coupling
Heading should not oscillate continuously.
Altitude held within ±100 feet.

Altitude Hold
Altitude should not oscillate continuously.
Selected Altitude Capture Overshoot during altitude capture should not

(Altitude Preselect) exceed 100 feet.
Selected vertical speed held within ±200 FPM.

Vertical Speed Hold
Vertical speed should not oscillate continuously.
Selected airspeed held within ±5 KIAS.

Airspeed Hold Indicated airspeed should not oscillate
continuously.
Lateral deviation from course remain withLQ
VOR Tracking 25% of full scale deflection once established on
course.
Lateral and vertical deviations from course/
ILS/LPV Approach glidepath remain withLQ 25% of full scale
deflection once established.
925/2&*6Fapture performancePXVW
VOR/LOC/GS Capture SHUIRUPDVLQWHQGHGEHIRUHDQGDIWHUWKH
*,LQVWDOODLWRQ
Pitch and roll attitude held as specified by

Go-around
autopilot PDQXIDFWXUHVGDWD.
F' commands satisfy selected modes and do

Flight Director
not display excessive jitter or oscillation.
Yaw dampening performance PXVWIXQFWLRQ

Yaw Damp DVLQWHQGHGEHIRUHDQGDIWHUWKH*,
installation
General Notes
Figure 6-7 Autopilot Performance Checkout Log

Sheet 2 of 2

Rev. 13 Page 6-44
6.9 Documentation Checks
All checks contained in the previous sections must be completed prior to performing the following checks.
6.9.1 Airplane Flight Manual Supplement

Ensure that the AFMS is completed and inserted in the AFM or POH.
1. Fill in the specific airplane information on the AFMS cover sheet.
2. In AFMS Sections 1.5, 2.2, 2.8, 2.28, 4.2.4, 7, 7.3, 7.10, and 7.15, fill in all applicable check
boxes. More than one box may be checked, depending upon the installation.
6.9.2 Instructions for Continued Airworthiness

Ensure that the appropriate aircraft information in Appendix A of GI 275 Part 23 AML STC Maintenance
Manual/ICA (P/N 190-02246-11) is filled in completely and inserted into the aircraft permanent records.
6.9.3 Return to Service

Complete the return-to-service in a means acceptable to the cognizant aviation authority. An example
would be compliance with 14 CFR 43.9, 14 CFR 91.417 and submission of an FAA Form 337 “Major
Repair and Alteration Airframe, Powerplant, Propeller, or Appliance” completed in accordance with
advisory circular AC43.9-1F, Instructions for Completion of FAA Form 337.
If a GEA 24 P/N 011-02848-01 is connected to resistive fuel quantity probe(s), verify the interface is
installed in accordance with revision 8 or later of this installation manual (refer to Section 3.4.3,
Figure B-8, and Appendix Section C.19). If the interface does not comply, refer to Garmin Service Bulletin
SB2135 for additional information. Once complete, make the following entry in the aircraft maintenance
record (i.e. airframe logbook):
The GI 275 installation in this aircraft complies with Garmin Service Bulletin SB2135,
Modification of GEA 24 Resistive Fuel Probe Interface.

Rev. 13 Page 6-45
7 TROUBLESHOOTING
7.1 Troubleshooting Flowcharts .............................................................................................................7-2

Figure 7-1 GI 275 Alert Message Troubleshooting .......................................................................7-2
Figure 7-2 Battery Alert Message Troubleshooting ......................................................................7-4
Figure 7-3 AHRS Alert Message Troubleshooting .......................................................................7-8
Figure 7-4 ADC Alert Message Troubleshooting ..........................................................................7-9
Figure 7-5 Terrain/TAWS Alert Message Troubleshooting ........................................................7-10
Figure 7-6 Traffic Alert Message Troubleshooting .....................................................................7-11
Figure 7-7 Audio and Weather Alert Message Troubleshooting .................................................7-13
Figure 7-8 NAV Alert Message Troubleshooting .......................................................................7-14
Figure 7-9 Autopilot Alert Message Troubleshooting .................................................................7-15
Figure 7-10 Miscellaneous GI 275 Alert Message Troubleshooting .............................................7-16
Figure 7-11 External LRU Alert Message Troubleshooting ..........................................................7-17
7.2 Additional Troubleshooting............................................................................................................7-18
This section provides troubleshooting flow charts for most system failures and alert messages. It is
recommended that system troubleshooting and repair only be completed by a Garmin authorized repair
facility. If a specific alert or fault condition is not listed, or the fault still exists after completing the given
corrective action, contact Garmin Aviation Technical Support at the number listed for your specific region
on the “Support” tab of the flyGarmin.com website.

Rev. 13 Page 7-1
7.1 Troubleshooting Flowcharts
GI 275 Alert Messages
Demo mode, Main touch screen Key stuck: Key knob Main board system
Backlight Service error is stuck fault
do not use in
calibration lost required
flight
Maintenance Maintenance Maintenance Maintenance Maintenance

Log Message Log Message Log Message Log Message Log Message
Main Board Touch System detects Main Board SFD Corrupt

Unit in demo mode GDU software mismatch Screen Error stuck unit knob
Main Board Boot Block Corrupt
Main Board Key Region Corrupt
Main Board Key Region Missing
Cause Cause Cause Cause Cause
One or more GI 275 Touch screen is not The display knob has been
Unit is in demo mode LRU in the system have responding pushed for more than
different software 30 seconds Corrupt software
versions image
Display knob is stuck in the
pushed position
Corrective Corrective Corrective Corrective Corrective Corrective

Action Action Action Action Action Action
Set unit to normal mode by Return GI 275 to Garmin Ensure all GI 275 units Return GI 275 to Release display knob Reload GI 275
deselecting “Simulate Inputs” for service are loaded with the Garmin for service software
from the main menu in same software version
configuration mode Free display knob from the
pushed position
If fault persists,
contact Garmin.
Figure 7-1 GI 275 Alert Message Troubleshooting

Sheet 1 of 2

Rev. 13 Page 7-2
GI 275 Alert
Messages Cont’d
LRU replacement Expansion board: Internal comm. fault Expansion board Max temperature LCD board system
error Invalid config. system fault exceeded fault

LRU replacement Expansion board Expansion Board Expansion Board LCD Board System
error configuration error System Error Temp Error
Cause Cause Cause Cause Cause Cause
Error between Incorrect expansion Internal hardware Bad expansion Expansion Board Missing LCD
GI 275 config board configuration failure system data has exceeded software region
module and temperature
installed GI 275 Failed expansion threshold LCD Board software
calibration CRC failure

Verify accuracy of Verify expansion Verify system Reload expansion Remove GI 275 from Reload LCD
configuration settings on board configuration configuration board software extreme temperature software
GI 275 environment
Clear configuration and

Return GI 275 to Return GI 275 to Shut down GI 275
reconfigure
Garmin for service Garmin for service for at least 30 min
Replace configuration
module
If fault persists,
contact Garmin.
Figure 7-1 GI 275 Alert Message Troubleshooting

Sheet 2 of 2

Rev. 13 Page 7-3
Battery Alert
Messages
Invalid battery Battery operation Battery unavailable: Battery unavailable: Battery unavailable: Non-Garmin battery
detected warning Capacity test Capacity test Communication lost detected
Maintenance Maintenance Maintenance Maintenance Maintenance Maintenance

Log Message Log Message Log Message Log Message Log Message Log Message
Battery is not sealed Battery charge FET

permanent fail fault
Battery discharge FET Battery capacity test Battery capacity test Communication was Battery
permanent fail failed failed lost with the battery authentication failed
Battery safety cell

overvoltage permanent fail
GI 275's battery Battery has Battery capacity test Battery capacity test Battery not properly seated Non-Garmin battery
internal permanently failed failed has not been run for is installed
configuration is 392 days Battery is configured but not
corrupted installed

Replace battery Replace battery Replace battery Run battery Ensure battery is Replace battery with
capacity test properly installed authentic Garmin
battery
If fault persists,
contact Garmin.
Figure 7-2 Battery Alert Message Troubleshooting

Sheet 1 of 4

Rev. 13 Page 7-4
Battery Alert
Messages Cont’d
Battery operation Battery operation Battery warning: Battery warning:

warning warning Charge inhibited Charge inhibited
Maintenance Maintenance Maintenance Maintenance

Log Message Log Message Log Message Log Message
Battery overcurrent Battery overcurrent Battery cell Battery cell

during charge during discharge overvoltage undervoltage
protection fault protection fault protection fault protection fault
Cause Cause Cause Cause
Battery circuitry Battery short circuit Battery circuitry Battery charge was
failure failure failure low and left to
discharge further
GI 275 charging GI 275 charging GI 275 charging
circuitry failure circuitry failure circuitry failure
Corrective Corrective Corrective Corrective

Action Action Action Action
If error self clears, perform If error self clears, perform If error self clears, perform Ensure battery warmed to
battery rundown test, then battery rundown test, then battery rundown test, then room temperature
fully charge battery, ensure fully charge battery, ensure fully charge battery, ensure environment, attempt
alert does not reoccur alert does not reoccur alert does not reoccur charging
Replace battery Replace battery Replace battery Replace battery
Return GI 275 to Return GI 275 to Return GI 275 to

Garmin for service Garmin for service Garmin for service
If fault still exists,
contact Garmin.

Sheet 2 of 4

Rev. 13 Page 7-5
Battery Alert
Messages Cont’d
Battery operation Battery operation Battery warning: Battery warning: Battery operation
warning warning Charge inhibited Charge inhibited warning

Battery Battery Battery Battery Battery overload

overtemperature undertemperature overtemperature undertemperature during discharge
during discharge during discharge during charge during discharge protection fault
protection fault protection fault protection fault protection fault
Battery internal temperature Battery internal temperature Battery internal temperature Battery internal temperature Battery current overdraw
exceeds 80°C during below -20°C during exceeds 80°C during below -20°C during
Partial short in battery circuitry
discharge discharge discharge discharge
Partial short in GI 275 circuitry
Battery temperature sensor Battery temperature sensor Battery temperature sensor Battery temperature sensor
has failed has failed has failed has failed External LRU excessive current
draw with GI 275 overcurrent
circuitry failure
Corrective Corrective Corrective Corrective Corrective

Action Action Action Action Action
Allow battery to cool, remove Allow battery to warm up, Allow battery to cool, remove Allow battery to warm up, Replace battery
exposure to extreme remove exposure to extreme exposure to extreme remove exposure to extreme
temperature environment temperature environment temperature environment temperature environment
Return GI 275 to
Replace battery Replace battery Replace battery Replace battery Garmin for service
If fault still exists,

contact Garmin.

Sheet 3 of 4

Rev. 13 Page 7-6
Battery Alert
Messages Cont’d
Battery operation Battery operation Battery operation Battery operation Battery operation
warning warning warning warning warning

Battery short circuit Battery short circuit Battery pre-charge Battery fast-charge Battery pack voltage
during discharge during charge timeout fault timeout fault out of range
protection fault protection fault
Battery circuitry failure Battery circuitry failure Battery charge extremely low; Too much time spent in fast Battery voltage is
led to additional time in charge mode before reaching full below 1.0V or
GI 275 charger circuitry GI 275 charger circuitry pre-charge mode charge above 3.9V
failure failure
Battery / GI 275 circuitry Battery / GI 275 circuitry
failure failure

Replace battery Replace battery Ensure GI 275 is at room Perform battery rundown Perform battery
temperature, re-attempt test; recharge fully rundown test;
charging (may take several recharge fully
attempts)
Replace battery
Return GI 275 to Return GI 275 to Replace battery
Garmin for service Garmin for service Perform battery rundown
test; recharge fully Return GI 275 to Garmin for
service
Replace battery
Return GI 275 to Garmin for

service
If fault persists,
contact Garmin.

Sheet 4 of 4

Rev. 13 Page 7-7
AHRS Fault
Messages
AHRS <1/2/3> AHRS <1/2/3> AHRS <1/2/3>: AHRS <1/2/3> not AHRS <1/2/3> Service required Magnetic variance Magnetic variance
MISSING MISCOMPARE Magnetic model receiving GPS reports service inaccurate unavailable
-or- -or- AHRS outdated aiding required
AHRS MISSING MISCOMPARE
Maintenance Maintenance
Maintenance Maintenance Maintenance Maintenance Maintenance Log Message Log Message
AHRS <1/2/3> data is AHRS <1/2/3> does not

match other senosrs
AHRS <1/2/3> AHRS <1/2/3> not <AHRS>
missing and cannot be ADB and IOP ADB is unavailable
compared Magnetic Model receiving GPS configuration does
packet magnetic for magnetic
All AHRS sensors do not out of date aiding not match what the
variances differ variance
Not enough AHRS sensors match unit expected
to perform a comparison
Cause Cause Cause Cause Cause Cause Cause Cause
Multiple AHRS are Multiple AHRS are configured, a Magnetic model is Not receiving GPS Bad AHRS calibration AHRS LRU is not
configured in the reported AHRS heading out of date data from a configured correctly
difference of 6 degrees or more No data from ADC Aviation database Aviation database is missing
system and the configured GPS out-of-date on
reported AHRS is not is detected
source GI 275 / Navigator Navigator / GPS source
detected unavailable
Multiple AHRS are configured, a
reported AHRS pitch or roll of
5 degrees or more is detected
Corrective Corrective
Action Action
Ensure the missing Determine if pitch, Update the IGRF Verify GPS Ensure ADC is Ensure aviation Ensure aviation
AHRS is powered roll or heading is out Magnetic Field configurations powered on database is up-to- database is loaded
of tolerance Model date on GI 275 and and up-to-date
Verify AHRS configured navigator
Ensure the missing Verify GPS antenna has a Perform AHRS configuration
AHRS configuration clear view of the sky and calibration settings
Heading out of Pitch or roll out of GPS source has a valid fix Verify GPS source
is correct
tolerance: perform tolerance: perform online
magnetic calibration pitch-roll offset Verify connections
Verify wiring is on all configured calibration on all Verify connections and wiring
correct heading sources configured sources and wiring
If fault persists,
contact Garmin.
Figure 7-3 AHRS Alert Message Troubleshooting

Rev. 13 Page 7-8
ADC Fault Messages
ADC <1/2/3> ADC <1/2/3> ADC <1/2/3> ADC <1/2/3> Service required
MISSING MISCOMPARE reports service reports service
-or- -or- ADC required required
ADC MISSING MISCOMPARE

ADC <1/2/3> data is ADC <1/2/3> does not ADC <1/2/3> <AHRS>
missing and cannot be match other senosrs
reports configuration does
compared
All ADC sensors do not configuration error not match what the
Not enough ADC sensors to match unit expected
perform a comparison
Multiple ADCs are Multiple ADCs are configured, a ADC internal ADC is reporting a
configured in the reported ADC pressure altitude calibration configuration error AHRS LRU is not
system and the difference of 200ft or more is mismatch configured correctly
reported ADC is not detected
detected
Multiple ADCs are configured, a
reported ADC airspeed
difference of 7kts or more is
detected

Ensure the missing Ensure the altitude Perform ADC Verify ADC Verify AHRS
ADC is powered and airspeed units calibration configuration configuration
of measure are the procedure settings settings
same for all
Ensure the missing configured ADCs
ADC configuration
is correct
Ensure there are no

Verify wiring is leaks in the pitot
correct static system
If fault persists,
contact Garmin.
Figure 7-4 ADC Alert Message Troubleshooting

Rev. 13 Page 7-9
Terrain/TAWS
Alert Messages
SVT could not be Obstacle database Obstacle database SVT not available Terrain not available Service TAWS.
TER FAIL TER N/A
enabled not yet effective expired due to databases due to databases Invalid Config

SVT could not be Obstacle database Obstacle database SafeTaxi database Terrain database Terrain/TAWS
enabled not yet effective expired unavailable unavailable alerting
configuration not
selected
Cause Cause Cause Cause Cause Cause Cause Cause
Terrain database Preloaded database Obstacle database Database Database No valid GPS position
Database corrupted
missing or is not yet activated has expired out-of-date or out-of-date or
or missing Terrain data not available TAWS not properly
out-of-date on the system corrupted corrupted (out of coverage area)
configured
Bad feature GPS vertical position error
Internal failure
enablement estimate over max allowed
Corrective Corrective Corrective Corrective Corrective Corrective Corrective Corrective

Action Action Action Action Action Action Action Action
Verify Terrain Activate databases: Update to the Reload or update Reload or update Verify Terrain Verify GPS is
Check TAWS/Terrain
database is installed follow system current database database database database is loaded powered and has a
config settings
and up-to-date prompts version and current clear view of sky
Re-download and Reload Terrain Verify Terrain Verify External

install SVT feature database database coverage TAWS and
enablement GI 275 have the
Inspect GPS antenna same aircraft type
and wiring configured
If fault persists,
contact Garmin
Figure 7-5 Terrain/TAWS Alert Message Troubleshooting

Rev. 13 Page 7-10
ADS‐B Traffic
Alert Messages
UAT traffic/data 1090ES traffic ADS traffic alerting ADS-B In traffic TAS/TCAS function ADS traffic function
UAT fault
receiver fault receiver fault inoperative source mismatch inoperative inoperative
Maintenance Maintenance Maintenance Maintenance Maintenance Maintenance Maintenance

Log Message Log Message Log Message Log Message Log Message Log Message Log Message
ADS-B LRU reports UAT LRU reports ADS-B LRU reports ADS-B LRU reports ADS-B In traffic ADS-B LRU reports ADS-B LRU reports
UAT traffic/data low WAAS battery 1090ES traffic CSA/TSAA failure source does not TAS/TCAS ADS-B Traffic In
receiver fault fault receiver fault match configuration inoperative or has failed
connection lost
Cause Cause
ADS-B In external ADS-B traffic format

LRU traffic receiver does not match the
has failed external LRU
configuration
Corrective Corrective Corrective Corrective Corrective Corrective Corrective

Action Action Action Action Action Action Action
Troubleshoot device Troubleshoot device Refer to ADS-B Refer to ADS-B Troubleshoot device Troubleshoot device
LRU manual for LRU manual for Verify configuration
in accordance with in accordance with in accordance with in accordance with
ADS-B LRU UAT LRU troubleshooting troubleshooting ADS-B LRU ADS-B LRU
maintenance maintenance maintenance maintenance
manual manual manual manual
If fault persists,
contact Garmin
Figure 7-6 Traffic Alert Message Troubleshooting

Sheet 1 of 2

Rev. 13 Page 7-11
Traffic
Alert Messages
Traffic/FIS-B TAS/TCAS function Traffic function

inoperative inoperative inoperative
Log Message Log Message
Traffic device Transponder device

reported failure reported failure
Corrective Corrective Corrective

Action Action Action
Troubleshoot device Troubleshoot device

Troubleshoot device
in accordance with in accordance with
in accordance with
TAS/TCAS LRU TIS-A LRU
LRU maintenance
maintenance maintenance
manual
manual manual
If fault persists,
contact Garmin
Figure 7-6 Traffic Alert Message Troubleshooting

Sheet 2 of 2

Rev. 13 Page 7-12
Audio & Weather
Alert Messages
SiriusXM receiver Stormscope

Audio inoperative Service Soon
inoperative inoperative

Audio clip failed to SiriusXM receiver Stormscope is Communication lost Stormscope is not
Audio device failed
play has failed reporting invalid with Stormscope configured or
heading operating properly
Audio clip failed to GDL 69/69A has Stormscope’s The GI 275 has lost Stormscope is
Audio device failed
play lost communication heading source is communication with reporting failed
with GI 275 or is missing the Stormscope
reporting a failed
condition

Verify audio device Verify audio device Ensure all LRUs in Verify control Verify power to Verify Stormscope
is online is online the system are source heading is Stormscope configuration
online valid settings
Inspect audio Inspect audio Inspect Stormscope
device connection device connection Verify configuration wiring and Inspect Stormscope
and wiring and wiring settings connections wiring and
connections
Troubleshoot in Troubleshoot in Inspect GDL 69/69A
accordance with accordance with wiring and
audio device audio device connectors
maintenance maintenance
manual manual
If fault persists,
contact Garmin
Figure 7-7 Audio and Weather Alert Message Troubleshooting

Rev. 13 Page 7-13
NAV/GPS Alert
Messages
NAV <1/2> Navigation Navigation database not Navigation GPS <1/2>

inoperative database mismatch yet effective database expired inoperative

NAV <1/2> interface/unit Navigation Navigation Navigation GPS <1/2> interface

failed. Check NAV unit or database mismatch database not yet database expired failed
wiring. effective
NAV source has lost NAV source is Multiple GI 275 units Preloaded database Navigation GPS source has
communication reporting failed have different NAV is not activated on database has lost communication
database expirations the system expired
GPS source is
reporting failed

Verify NAV source Troubleshoot in Update databases Activate databases: Update to the Verify GPS source is ON and
is on and not accordance with across all units to Follow system current database has a clear view of the sky
reporting failed NAV unit the same date prompts version
maintenance
manual Verify configuration settings
Verify configuration
settings Verify configuration Inspect GPS antenna, wiring
settings and connections
Inspect NAV wiring Inspect NAV wiring

and connections and connections
If fault persists,
contact Garmin.
Figure 7-8 NAV Alert Message Troubleshooting

Rev. 13 Page 7-14
Autopilot Fault
Messages
Autopilot fault Servo Clutch Fault Monitor fault AFCS Comm Fault Power fault GMC ESP
inoperative
Maintenance Maintenance Maintenance

Log Message Log Message Log Message
Autopilot reference Unit lost GMC electronic

monitor communication to stability protection
AFCS failed
Configured autopilot GFC 500 servo GI 275 Commanded GI 275 GI 275 internal Refer to Section 5.2
reference voltage clutch monitor has Pitch/Roll voltage communication with autopilot voltage of the GFC 600
does not match tripped does not match the the Autopilot has output is below AFCS Part 23 AML
actual voltage expected Autopilot failed threshold voltage STC Maintenance
voltage Manual

Verify GI 275 Use GFC 500 Verify Autopilot Verify Autopilot Ensure GI 275 is Refer to Section 5.2
reference voltage Diagnostics page to configuration interface wiring is not on backup of the GFC 600
matches the clear fault settings are correct correct battery power AFCS Part 23 AML
required autopilot STC Maintenance
reference voltage Manual
Verify GI 275 and Clear autopilot

Autopilot interface configuration
wiring is correct settings and
reconfigure
If fault persists,
contact Garmin.
Figure 7-9 Autopilot Alert Message Troubleshooting

Rev. 13 Page 7-15
Miscellaneous Alert
Messages
SafeTaxi database SafeTaxi database

expired not yet effective
Log Message Log Message
SafeTaxi database SafeTaxi database

expired is not yet effective
Cause Cause
SafeTaxi database Preloaded database

has expired is not activated on
the system
Corrective Corrective
Action Action
Update database to Activate databases:

the current version follow system
prompts
If fault persists,
contact Garmin.
Figure 7-10 Miscellaneous GI 275 Alert Message Troubleshooting

Rev. 13 Page 7-16
External LRU
Alert Messages
Crosstalk error <External LRU> Service required Service soon Service soon
service required

GEA <1/2/3/4> did not GTX 345 reports System configuration module
Crosstalk Error
accept configuration config module has failed or is missing
needs service
Cause Cause Cause Cause
Interfacing LRU is not powered System ID set on GI 275 GEA configuration Configuration module
is different from that on settings were not not installed correctly
Interfacing LRU not configured
the external LRU accepted
properly Configuration module
Interfacing LRU does not have has failed
compatible software version
Incorrect wiring

Verify power to unit Ensure configured Verify GEA Troubleshoot in Verify configuration
System ID on GI 275 configuration accordance with the module wiring
and external LRU are settings GTX 3X5
Verify configuration settings the same maintenance
manual Replace
configuration
module
Verify proper software version
Verify wiring
If fault persists,
contact Garmin.
Figure 7-11 External LRU Alert Message Troubleshooting

Rev. 13 Page 7-17
7.2 Additional Troubleshooting
If necessary, perform the following troubleshooting steps:
1. The GI 275 air/ground logic must be on-ground when making any configuration changes or
attempting to load software. If the system is in-air while attempting system configuration changes
or software loads, system failures will occur. For example, an air data test set can trigger an
unexpected in-air state. Ensure:
a. Airspeed is less than 30kts – Pitot input can cause inadvertent airspeed inputs causing
unintended inputs.
b. GPS ground speed must be less than 30kts. – Using a GPS repeater can create issues with the
GPS system switching between satellite acquisition from an outside signal and the repeater
signal causing false GPS ground speed readings.
c. For units with EIS, the RPM readings must be 0 RPM while entering Configuration mode.
2. Ensure every GI 275 is in Configuration mode prior to making any configuration change.
3. Ensure every unit in the system has matching software.
4. For AHRS and autopilot configuration issues, ensure the above steps are completed and attempt to
reset the expansion board configuration using the following procedure in Configuration mode:
a. From the Interfaces page, configure the AHRS and ADC sensors as None on all units.
b. From the Interfaces page, configure the Autopilot configuration as None on all units.
c. If an ADI is configured, from the Unit Configuration page, change the Instrument Type to
MFD and then back to ADI.
d. If an HSI is configured, from the Unit Configuration page, change the Instrument Type to
MFD and then back to HSI (re-select the Standby selection if it appropriate).
e. From the Interfaces page, reconfigure AHRS and ADC sensors on all units as appropriate.
f. From the Interfaces page, reconfigure the Autopilot on all units as appropriate.
g. Reconfigure the Discrete In “Display Backup” discrete on the unit configured as the
standby, if appropriate.
h. Cycle system power by removing power from the GI 275 units.
5. GFC 500 servo faults can be cleared by completing the following procedure:
a. On the GI 275 in Configuration mode, navigate to the GFC 500 page (Config →
Diagnostics → GFC 500).
b. From this page, the servo fault can be cleared. Once the faults are cleared, the GFC 500
configuration must be synchronized.
c. Navigate to the GFC 500 Settings page (Config → Interfaces → Autopilot → Settings).
d. From this page, scroll to the bottom and touch Copy Config From GI 275 to GFC 500.
e. Cycle power to the GI 275(s) and the GFC 500.
6. For GFC 500 configuration issues, ensure the following steps have been completed:
a. The GI 275 Internal AHRS/ADC is configured (Config → Interfaces → ADC or AHRS).
b. GFC 500 interface is properly configured (Config → Interfaces → Autopilot).
c. The Copy Config From GI 275 to GFC 500 has been performed (Config → Interfaces →
Autopilot → Settings).
d. Ensure the Manifest has been synced.
e. Minimum approved SW on the GMC 507 and the GSAs has be installed.
f. Autopilot Calibration has been performed (without the above steps completed, this
calibration will not be available).

Rev. 13 Page 7-18
APPENDIX A CONNECTORS AND PIN FUNCTION
A.1 GI 275 ..............................................................................................................................................A-2

A.2 GEA 24 ............................................................................................................................................A-6
A.3 GEA 110 ........................................................................................................................................A-10
A.4 GMU 44B ......................................................................................................................................A-13
A.5 GMU 11 .........................................................................................................................................A-14
A.6 GTP 59........................................................................................................................................... A-15
A.7 GSB 15........................................................................................................................................... A-15
This appendix contains connector information and a description of pin functions for all LRUs installed as
part of the GI 275 STC, with exception of the EIS sensors.
Refer to the LRU TSO installation manuals listed in Table 1-1 for more detailed signal information on each
LRU and manufacturer documentation for EIS sensor information.
All D-sub connectors follow a similar pin numbering scheme. Numbered layouts (as seen while looking at
the LRU) are provided for each connector in the orientation that it appears on the unit. Because
installations can vary, ensure the correct orientation of the connector and pins.

Rev. 13 Page A-1
A.1 GI 275
The GI 275 has up to two D-sub connectors and one BNC connector. The J2752/P2752 connector and pitot
and static fittings are only present on GI 275 ADAHRS and ADAHRS+AP models. Pins relating to
autopilot functionality are not present in the J2752/P2752 connector on the GI 275 ADAHRS
(P/N 011-04489-10 and -30); however, all other pin functions are identical between GI 275 ADAHRS and
ADAHRS+AP models. Refer to Table A-3 for pin function differences between the two models.
The mating designators, part numbers, and associated connector kits are listed in Table A-1.
Table A-1 GI 275 Unit Connectors

Ref. Des. Description Connector P/N Kit P/N
J2751 Conn, Female, HD D-Sub, 78 Ckt 330-00366-78 011-04809-00
J2752 Conn, Female, HD D-Sub, 78 Ckt 330-00366-78 011-04809-01 [1]
GPS BNC, Male Supplied with antenna
Notes:
[1] P/N 011-04809-01 kit includes connectors for both J2751 and J2752.
Figure A-1 GI 275 Connectors

(GI 275 ADAHRS shown)

Rev. 13 Page A-2
60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 70 71 72 73 74 75 76 77 78
40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59
21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20
Figure A-2 GI 275 J2751/P2751 Connector (Looking at Unit)
Table A-2 J2751/P2751 Connector

Pin Function I/O Pin Function I/O
1 CONFIG MODULE GROUND -- 40 CONFIG MODULE DATA I/O
2 AIRCRAFT POWER 1 IN 41 AIRCRAFT GROUND --
3 AIRCRAFT POWER 2 IN 42 LIGHTING BUS LO IN
4 DISCRETE OUT 1 LO OUT 43 DISCRETE OUT 2* OUT
5 VOR/LOC COMPOSITE LO IN 44 VOR/LOC COMPOSITE HI IN
6 GLIDESLOPE DEVIATION +UP IN 45 GLIDESLOPE DEV +DOWN IN
7 LATERAL -FLAG IN 46 ETHERNET OUT 1A OUT
8 ETHERNET OUT 2A OUT 47 ETHERNET OUT 1B OUT
9 ETHERNET OUT 2B OUT 48 ALERT AUDIO OUT LO OUT
10 OBS STATOR F OUT 49 RS-485 A I/O
11 GLIDESLOPE +FLAG IN 50 TO/FROM +FLAG IN IN
12 DISCRETE IN 4 LO IN 51 SPARE GROUND --
13 OBS ROTOR H IN 52 ARINC 429 IN 1A IN
14 ARINC 429 IN 2B IN 53 ARINC 429 IN 3A IN
15 ARINC 429 IN 4B IN 54 SPARE GROUND --
16 ARINC 429 OUT 1A OUT 55 ARINC 429 OUT 1B OUT
17 SPARE GROUND -- 56 SPARE GROUND --
18 RS-232 OUT 2 OUT 57 RS-232 IN 1 IN
19 LRU GROUND -- 58 USB DATA HI I/O
20 LRU POWER OUT 59 USB GROUND --
21 CONFIG MODULE POWER OUT 60 CONFIG MODULE CLOCK OUT
22 LIGHTING BUS HI IN 61 AIRCRAFT GROUND --
23 DISCRETE IN 1 LO IN 62 DISCRETE IN 2 LO IN
24 DISCRETE OUT 3 LO OUT 63 DISCRETE IN 3 LO IN
25 LATERAL DEVIATION +LEFT IN 64 LATERAL DEVIATION +RIGHT IN
26 LATERAL +FLAG IN 65 ETHERNET IN 1A IN
27 ETHERNET IN 2A IN 66 ETHERNET IN 1B IN
28 ETHERNET IN 2B IN 67 OBS STATOR G IN
29 OBS STATOR D OUT 68 OBS STATOR E OUT
30 ALERT AUDIO OUT HI OUT 69 RS-485 B I/O
31 GLIDESLOPE -FLAG IN 70 SPARE GROUND --
32 TO/FROM -FLAG IN 71 OBS ROTOR C IN
35 ARINC 429 OUT 2A OUT 74 ARINC 429 OUT 2B OUT
36 SPARE GROUND -- 75 SPARE GROUND --
37 RS-232 IN 2 IN 76 RS-232 2 GROUND --
38 RS-232 OUT 1 OUT 77 RS-232 1 GROUND --
39 USB DATA LO I/O 78 USB VBUS POWER OUT

Rev. 13 Page A-3
20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
39 38 37 36 35 34 33 32 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21
59 58 57 56 55 54 53 52 51 50 49 48 47 46 45 44 43 42 41 40
78 77 76 75 74 73 72 71 70 69 68 67 66 65 64 63 62 61 60
Figure A-3 GI 275 J2752/P2752 Connector (Looking at Unit)
CAUTION
Pins highlighted in gray are not present in GI 275 ADAHRS units (P/Ns 011-04489-10 and
011-04489-30) and should be treated as Not Connected. All pins listed in Table A-3 are
present in GI 275 ADAHRS+AP units (P/Ns 011-04489-20 and 011-04489-40).

1 DISCRETE OUT 7 LO OUT 40 DISCRETE OUT 8 LO OUT
2 SPARE -- 41 AP INTERLOCK RELAY COM IN
3 GYRO VALID COMMON -- 42 GYRO VALID RELAY NC OUT
4 DISCRETE IN 5 LO IN 43 DISCRETE IN 6 LO IN
5 VERTICAL -FLAG OUT OUT 44 VERTICAL SUPERFLAG OUT
6 PITCH AC OUT HI OUT 45 ROLL AC OUT LO --
7 26 VAC REF LO IN 46 10 VAC REF LO IN
8 HEADING SYNCRO X OUT 47 HEADING SYNCHRO Z --
9 VERTICAL +UP OUT OUT 48 LATERAL +LEFT OUT OUT
10 LATERAL +RIGHT OUT OUT 49 TO/FROM -FLAG OUT OUT
11 RADAR ROLL HI OUT 50 RADAR ROLL LO --
12 CAN LO I/O 51 CAN TERMINATION A I/O
13 A/P HEADING ERROR HI OUT 52 A/P HEADING ERROR LO OUT
14 DISCRETE OUT 5 LO OUT 53 SPARE --
15 YAW RATE HI OUT 54 BARO CORRECTION LO IN
16 HEADING SYNCRO Y OUT 55 PITCH DC OUT OUT
17 DISCRETE OUT 9 LO OUT 56 RS-232 IN 3 IN
18 FD ENABLE HI IN 57 SPARE --
19 FD PITCH UP IN 58 FD PITCH DOWN IN
20 DISCRETE OUT 6 LO OUT 59 SPARE GROUND --
21 OAT PROBE IN LO IN 60 OAT PROBE IN HI IN
22 AP INTERLOCK RELAY NC -- 61 AP INTERLOCK RELAY NO OUT
23 GYRO VALID RELAY NO OUT 62 OAT PROBE POWER OUT
24 VERTICAL +FLAG OUT OUT 63 LATERAL +FLAG OUT OUT
25 LATERAL SUPER FLAG OUT 64 PITCH AC OUT LO OUT
26 ROLL AC OUT HI OUT 65 26 VAC REF HI IN
27 10 VAC REF HI IN 66 LATERAL -FLAG OUT OUT
28 SPARE -- 67 SPARE GROUND --
29 TO/FROM +FLAG OUT 68 VERTICAL +DOWN OUT OUT
30 RADAR PITCH LO -- 69 RADAR PITCH HI OUT
31 CAN HI I/O 70 CAN TERMINATION B I/O
32 A/P COURSE ERROR HI OUT 71 A/P COURSE ERROR LO OUT
33 SPARE -- 72 DISCRETE OUT 4 LO OUT
34 ROLL DC OUT OUT 73 YAW RATE LO --
35 BARO CORRECTION HI OUT 74 SPARE GROUND --

Rev. 13 Page A-4
36 RS-232 3 GROUND -- 75 RS-232 OUT 3 OUT
37 DC REF IN IN 76 SPARE GROUND --
38 FD ROLL RIGHT IN 77 FD ROLL LEFT IN
39 TIME MARK A IN 78 TIME MARK B IN
The Active-Low discrete outputs shall provide a connection to ground with a resistance of no more than
25Ω when in the active state.

Rev. 13 Page A-5
A.2 GEA 24
The GEA 24 has four connectors. The mating designators, part numbers, and associated connector kits are
listed in Table A-4.
Table A-4 GI 275 - GEA 24

J241 Conn, Male, D-Sub, 9 Ckt 330-00625-09 011-01855-00
J242 Conn, Female, D-Sub, 25 Ckt 330-00624-25 011-01855-02
GEA 24 UNIT
011-02848-00
J243
J242
J244
J241
Figure A-4 GEA 24 Connectors

Rev. 13 Page A-6
Figure A-5 GEA 24 J241/P241 Connector (Looking at Unit)

Pin Function I/O
1 CAN HI I/O
2 CAN LO I/O
3 RESERVED --
4 RS-232 RX IN
5 RS-232 TX OUT
6 GROUND --
7 AIRCRAFT POWER 1 IN
8 AIRCRAFT POWER 2 IN
9 GROUND --

1 RESERVED -- 14 CHT 6 HI / CHT 2 RESIST HI IN
2 CHT 6 LO / CHT 2 RESIST LO IN 15 EGT 6 HI IN
3 EGT 6 LO IN 16 CHT 5 / CHT 1 RESISTIVE HI IN
4 CHT 5 LO / CHT 1 RESIST LO IN 17 EGT 5 HI IN
5 EGT 5 LO IN 18 CHT 4 HI IN
6 CHT 4 LO IN 19 EGT 4 HI IN
13 EGT 1 LO IN

Rev. 13 Page A-7

1 FUEL PRESS GROUND -- 20 FUEL XDCR GROUND_1 --
FUEL RETURN (shared w/Pin 37,
2 FUEL PRESS IN 21 IN
J244 connector)
3 FUEL PRESS XDCR +12V OUT 22 FUEL XDCR GROUND_2
FUEL FLOW (shared w/Pin 36,
4 FUEL PRESS XDCR +5V OUT 23 IN
J244 connector)
5 RPM XDCR GROUND_2 -- 24 FUEL XDCR +12V_1 OUT
6 RPM 2 IN 25 FUEL XDCR +12V_2 OUT
7 RPM XDCR GROUND_1 -- 26 GP +5V_1 OUT
8 RPM 1 IN 27 GP GROUND_1 --
9 RPM XDCR +12V_1 OUT 28 POS 7 / MISC TEMP 2 LO IN
10 RPM XDCR +12V_2 OUT 29 POS 7 / MISC TEMP 2 HI IN
11 RESERVED / SPARE IN 30 POS 6 / MISC TEMP 1 LO IN
12 MANIFOLD PRESS GROUND -- 31 POS 6 / MISC TEMP 1 HI IN
13 MANIFOLD PRESS IN 32 OIL TEMP LO IN
14 MANIFOLD PRESS XDCR +12V OUT 33 OIL TEMP HI IN
SHUNT 2 LO (shared w/Pin 47,
15 MANIFOLD PRESS XDCR +5V OUT 34 IN
J244 connector)
SHUNT 2 HI (shared w/Pin 46,
16 OIL PRESS GROUND -- 35 IN
J244 connector)
17 OIL PRESS HI IN 36 SHUNT 1 LO IN
18 OIL PRESS XDCR +12V OUT 37 SHUNT 1 HI IN
19 OIL PRESS XDCR +5V OUT

Rev. 13 Page A-8

1 SYSTEM ID 1A* IN 26 GP GROUND_2 --
2 SYSTEM ID 1B / GROUND -- 27 GP +5V_3 OUT
3 RESERVED -- 28 VOLTS 2 IN
4 RESERVED -- 29 GP GROUND 3 --
5 FUEL QTY +5V_1 OUT 30 POS 5 HI / +5V OUT
6 FUEL QTY 1 IN 31 POS 5 / MISC PRESS IN
7 FUEL QTY 1 GROUND -- 32 POS 5 LO / GROUND --
8 FUEL QTY +5V_2 OUT 33 CAN2_L I/O
9 FUEL QTY 2 IN 34 FUEL QTY +12V 1 OUT
10 FUEL QTY 2 GROUND -- 35 FUEL QTY +12V 2 OUT
11 POS 3 HI / +5V_3 OUT 36 RESERVED IN
12 POS 3 / GP 3 / FUEL QTY 3 IN 37 RESERVED IN
13 POS 3 LO / GROUND -- 38 RESERVED --
14 POS 4 HI / +5V_4 OUT 39 RESERVED --
15 POS 4 / GP 4 / FUEL QTY 4 IN 40 DISCRETE IN 1** IN
16 POS 4 LO / GROUND -- 41 DISCRETE IN 2** IN
17 CAN2_H I/O 42 DISCRETE IN 3** IN
18 GP1 HI / +5V OUT 43 DISCRETE IN 4** IN
DISCRETE OUT 1* /
19 GP1 / POS 1 IN 44 IN
MASTER WARNING
DISCRETE OUT 2* /
20 GP1 LO / GROUND -- 45 IN
MASTER CAUTION
SHUNT 2 HI
21 GP2 HI / +5V OUT 46 IN
(shared w/Pin 35, J243 connector)
SHUNT 2 LO
22 GP2 / POS 2 IN 47 IN
(shared w/Pin 34, J243 connector)
23 GP2 LO / GROUND -- 48 RESERVED / SPARE 1 IN
24 GP +5V_2 OUT 49 RESERVED / SPARE 2 IN
25 VOLTS 1 IN 50 GP +12V OUT
*Indicates Active-Low
**Can be configured as Active-High or Active-Low

Rev. 13 Page A-9
A.3 GEA 110
The GEA 110 has two connectors. The mating designators, part numbers, and associated connector kits are
Table A-9 GI 275 - GEA 110 Connectors
Conn, Female, Hi Dens, D-Sub, Mil Crmp, 15 Ckt 330-00185-15 011-03527-50
P1101 Conn, HD D-Sub, Male, Str, Mil Crp contacts
330-01384-00 011-03527-51
included, sealed, 15 Pin
Conn, Female, Hi Dens, D-Sub, Mil Crp, 78 Ckt 330-00185-75 011-03527-50
P1102 Conn, HD D-Sub, Male, Str, Mil Crp, Sealed,
330-00776-78 011-03527-51
w/ GND Indents, 78 Pin
CAUTION
Ensure the 15 pin HD D-Sub connector is orientated properly; if the connector is installed
upside down, it can cause damage to the GEA 110.
Figure A-9 GEA 110 Connectors

Rev. 13 Page A-10
5 4 3 2 1
10 9 8 7 6
15 14 13 12 11

Pin Function I/O
1 AIRCRAFT PWR 1 IN
2 RESERVED IN
3 DISCRETE OUT 1 OUT
4 RS-485 2A I/O
5 RS-485 1A I/O
6 AIRCRAFT PWR 2 IN
7 RESERVED OUT
8 DISCRETE OUT 2 OUT
9 RS-485 2B I/O
10 RS-485 1B I/O
11 DISCRETE IN 5 IN
12 SYS ID #1 IN
13 SYS ID #2 IN
14 POWER GND --
15 POWER GND --
20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
39 38 37 36 35 34 33 32 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21
59 58 57 56 55 54 53 52 51 50 49 48 47 46 45 44 43 42 41 40
78 77 76 75 74 73 72 71 70 69 68 67 66 65 64 63 62 61 60
Figure A-11 GEA 110 J1102/J1102 Connector (Looking at Unit)

1 CHT 1 (+) IN 40 EGT 1 (+) IN
2 CHT 2 (+) IN 41 EGT 2 (+) IN
3 CHT 3 (+) IN 42 EGT 3 (+) IN
4 CHT 4 (+) IN 43 EGT 4 (+) IN
5 CHT 5 (+) IN 44 EGT 5 (+) IN
6 CHT 6 (+) IN 45 EGT 6 (+) IN
7 GENERAL PURPOSE 1 (+) IN 46 CARB TEMP (+) IN
8 GENERAL PURPOSE 2 (+) IN 47 OIL TEMP (+) IN
9 +10 VDC OUT 48 OIL PRESSURE (+) IN

Rev. 13 Page A-11
10 FUEL PRESSURE (+) IN 49 SIGNAL GND --
11 DISCRETE IN 1 IN 50 MANIFOLD PRESSURE (+) IN
FUEL QUANTITY 1 /
12 IN 51 DISCRETE IN 3 IN
GENERAL PURPOSE 3 (+)
FUEL QUANTITY 3 / FUEL QUANTITY 2 /
13 IN 52 IN
GENERAL PURPOSE 5 (+) GENERAL PURPOSE 4 (+)
FUEL QUANTITY 4 /
14 SIGNAL GND IN 53 IN
GENERAL PURPOSE 6 (+)
15 FUEL FLOW 1 IN 54 SIGNAL GND --
16 FUEL FLOW 2 IN 55 SHUNT 1 (-) IN
17 +12 VDC OUT 56 SHUNT 2 (-) IN
18 RPM IN 1 (+) IN 57 BUS 1 IN
19 RPM IN 2 (+) IN 58 BUS 2 IN
20 CONFIG. MODULE PWR OUT 59 CONFIG MODULE CLOCK OUT
21 CHT 1 (-) IN 60 EGT 1 (-) IN
22 CHT 2 (-) IN 61 EGT 2 (-) IN
23 CHT 3 (-) IN 62 EGT 3 (-) IN
24 CHT 4 (-) IN 63 EGT 4 (-) IN
25 CHT 5 (-) IN 64 EGT 5 (-) IN
26 CHT 6 (-) IN 65 EGT 6 (-) IN
27 GENERAL PURPOSE 1 (-) IN 66 CARB TEMP (-) IN
28 GENERAL PURPOSE 2 (-) IN 67 OIL TEMP (-) IN
29 +5 VDC OUT 68 OIL PRESSURE (-) IN
30 FUEL PRESSURE (-) IN 69 +12 VDC OUT
31 DISCRETE IN 2 IN 70 MANIFOLD PRESSURE (-) IN
FUEL QUANTITY 1 /
32 IN 71 DISCRETE IN 4 IN
GENERAL PURPOSE 3 (-)
FUEL QUANTITY 3 / FUEL QUANTITY 2 /
33 IN 72 IN
GENERAL PURPOSE 5 (-) GENERAL PURPOSE 4 (-)
FUEL QUANTITY 4 /
34 SIGNAL GND -- 73 IN
GENERAL PURPOSE 6 (-)
35 SHUNT 1 (+) IN 74 SIGNAL GND --
36 SHUNT 2 (+) IN 75 RESERVED --
37 RPM IN 1 (-) IN 76 +5 VDC OUT
38 RPM IN 2 (-) IN 77 BUS 3 IN
39 CONFIG MODULE DATA I/O 78 CONFIG MODULE GND --

Rev. 13 Page A-12
A.4 GMU 44B
The GMU 44B has one connector. The mating designator, part number, and associated connector kit are
Table A-12 GI 275 - GMU 44B Connectors
P442 6 Pin Rectangular Connector 330-01430-01 011-04205-00
Figure A-12 GMU 44B J442/P442 Connector

Pin Function I/O
1 SHIELD GROUND --
2 RS-422 OUT B OUT
3 RS-422 OUT A OUT
4 POWER GROUND --
5 RS-232 IN IN
6 MAG POWER INPUT IN

Rev. 13 Page A-13
A.5 GMU 11
The GMU 11 has one connector. The mating designator, part number, and associated connector kit are
Table A-14 GI 275 - GMU 11 Connectors

J111 Conn, Circular, Male, 9 Ckt 011-03002-00 011-04349-90
Figure A-13 GMU 11 J111/P111 Connector (Looking at Unit)

Pin Function I/O
1 CAN BUS HI I/O
2 CAN BUS LO I/O
3 UNIT ID 1 IN
4 RS-232 IN IN
5 RS-232 OUT OUT
6 SIGNAL GROUND --
7 AIRCRAFT PWR 1 IN
8 AIRCRAFT PWR 2 IN
9 POWER GROUND --

Rev. 13 Page A-14
A.6 GTP 59
The GTP 59 Temperature Probe does not have a connector. Rather, a 3-conductor shielded cable extends
from the sensor for interface with the GI 275.
Table A-16 3-Conductor Shielded Cable

Conductor Color Name I/O
WHITE PROBE POWER LEAD IN
BLUE RESISTIVE ELEMENT HI OUT
ORANGE RESISTIVE ELEMENT LO OUT
A.7 GSB 15
The GSB 15 has a 6-pin connector in either a vertical or horizontal position. The connector designation
(P201 or P202) is dependent on the part number but the pin numbers and functions are identical (refer to
Table A-17.
P201, GSB 15 Rear Unit P202, GSB 15 Side Unit

P/N 011-04937-00/-20/-40 P/N 011-04937-01/-30/-50
Figure A-14 GSB 15 Connectors
Table A-17 J201/P201 & J202/P202

Pin Function I/O
1 AIRCRAFT POWER IN
2 USB DN I/O
3 USB DP I/O
4 USB GND --
5 BACKLIGHT ENABLE IN
6 POWER GROUND --

Rev. 13 Page A-15
APPENDIX B INTERCONNECT DIAGRAMS
Figure B-1 GI 275 - Power, Lighting, Configuration Module, HSDB, USB Interconnect ................. B-3
Figure B-2 Attitude and Air Data Interconnect.................................................................................... B-5
Figure B-3 External Attitude and Air Data .......................................................................................... B-7
Figure B-4 GPS Interconnect ............................................................................................................... B-8
Figure B-5 NAV Interconnect.............................................................................................................. B-9
Figure B-6 Analog CDI Interconnect................................................................................................. B-11
Figure B-7 GEA 24 Power Interconnect ............................................................................................ B-13
Figure B-8 GEA 24 Sensor Interconnect ........................................................................................... B-14
Figure B-9 GEA 110 Power, Config Module Interconnect ............................................................... B-21
Figure B-10 GEA 110 Sensor Interconnect ......................................................................................... B-22
Figure B-11 Audio Interconnect .......................................................................................................... B-28
Figure B-12 Autopilot/Flight Director Interconnect - Bendix ............................................................. B-29
Figure B-13 Autopilot/Flight Director Interconnect - Century............................................................ B-31
Figure B-14 Autopilot/Flight Director Interconnect - Cessna ............................................................. B-38
Figure B-15 Autopilot/Flight Director Interconnect - Collins ............................................................. B-43
Figure B-16 Autopilot/Flight Director Interconnect - Garmin GFC 600............................................. B-45
Figure B-17 Autopilot/Flight Director Interconnect - Honeywell (Bendix/King)............................... B-46
Figure B-18 Autopilot/Flight Director Interconnect - S-TEC.............................................................. B-56
Figure B-19 Autopilot/Flight Director Interconnect - Sperry .............................................................. B-60
Figure B-20 External Switches and Annunciators ............................................................................... B-62
Figure B-21 GDL 69 Series Interconnect ............................................................................................ B-64
Figure B-22 Radar Altimeter Interconnect .......................................................................................... B-65
Figure B-23 Serial Altitude Output Interconnect................................................................................. B-66
Figure B-24 Stormscope Interconnect ................................................................................................. B-67
Figure B-25 Traffic Advisory System Interconnect............................................................................. B-68
Figure B-26 GSB 15 Interconnect........................................................................................................ B-71
Figure B-27 ARINC 429 Course Select Interconnect.......................................................................... B-72
Figure B-28 GDU 620 ARINC 429 Interface ...................................................................................... B-73

Rev. 13 Page B-1
GENERAL NOTES
[1] ALL WIRES 24 AWG OR LARGER UNLESS OTHERWISE SPECIFIED.
[2] AT GI 275, CONNECT SHIELD GROUNDS TO THE CONNECTOR BACKSHELL. THE
SHIELD LEADS MUST BE LESS THAN 3.0 INCHES. OTHER SHIELD GROUNDS
GOING TO AIRCRAFT GROUND MUST BE LESS THAN 3.0 INCHES UNLESS
OTHERWISE SPECIFIED.
[3] USE APPROVED ETHERNET CABLES LISTED IN SECTION 3.1.2 FOR ALL HSDB
CONNECTIONS.
[4] PINS OR PORTS THAT ARE MARKED WITH “x” OR “X” INDICATE THERE IS NO
SINGLE RECOMMENDED CONNECTION, FIND AN AVAILABLE PORT/PIN TO USE.
PIN/PORT CONNECTIONS WILL VARY DEPENDING ON INSTALLATION.
[5] THE UNSHIELDED PORTION OF ALL SHIELDED WIRES AT THE CONNECTORS
MUST BE 2.5 INCHES OR LESS IN TOTAL LENGTH, UNLESS OTHERWISE NOTED.
LEGEND
~ REPRESENTS INTERCHANGEABLE PIN OR PORT WITH SIMILAR FUNCTIONING PIN OR
PORT. SEE APPENDIX A FOR PIN DESCRIPTION. PINS OR PORTS WITHOUT ~ MUST BE
CONNECTED AS SHOWN.
EXAMPLES INCLUDE:
~ DISCRETE IN 7* → INDICATES ANY AVAILABLE ‘DISCRETE IN’ CAN BE USED.
~ RS-232 6 → INDICATES ANY AVAILABLE RS-232 PORT CAN BE USED.
~ GEN PURP → INDICATES ANY AVAILABLE GENERAL PURPOSE PORT CAN BE USED.
* REPRESENTS ACTIVE-LOW PIN.
s SHIELD GROUND BLOCK DESIGNATOR.
AIRFRAME GROUND DESIGNATOR.

Rev. 13 Page B-2
GI 275
P2751 1
CONFIG MODULE PWR 21 28 AWG RED 4
CONFIG MODULE GND 1 28 AWG BLK 1 CONFIG
CONFIG MODULE DATA 40 28 AWG YEL 3 MODULE
CONFIG MODULE CLOCK 60 28 AWG WHT 2
LIGHTING BUS HI 22
LIGHTING BUS LO 42 2
OUT A 46
OUT B 47
~ETHERNET 1 IN A 65 5
IN B 66
s 3
AIRCRAFT POWER 2 3 22 AWG
AIRCRAFT POWER 1 2 22 AWG 4
3
AIRCRAFT GND 41 22 AWG
AIRCRAFT GND 61 22 AWG
DATA HI 58 GRN
DATA LO 39 WHT
USB USB
VBUS POWER 78 RED
GROUND 59 BLK 6 7
s
Figure B-1 GI 275 - Power, Lighting, Configuration Module, HSDB, USB Interconnect
Sheet 1 of 2

Rev. 13 Page B-3
NOTES
CONFIGURATION MODULE IS MOUNTED IN THE BACKSHELL OF THE P1 CONNECTOR USING 28 AWG
1 WIRES. CONTACTS SUPPLIED WITH THE CONFIGURATION MODULE MUST BE USED FOR CONNECTING
CONFIGURATION MODULE HARNESS TO P1.
2 OPTIONAL LIGHTING BUS CONNECTION (28 VDC, 14 VDC, 5 VDC, OR 5 VAC).
WIRE GAUGE SHOWN FOR POWER AND GROUND LENGTH LESS THAN 20 FEET. FOR POWER AND
3 GROUNDS GREATER THAN 20 FEET, REFER TO AC 43.13-1B, CHAPTER 11 TO DETERMINE THE
APPROPRIATE WIRE GAUGE.
AIRCRAFT POWER 2 IS USED FOR WIRING WITH INDEPENDENT POWER BUSSES AND IS NOT REQUIRED.
4 REFER TO SECTION 3.2.1 FOR BREAKER SIZING, BUSSING, AND LABELING.
5 REFER TO SECTION 3.2.6 FOR HSDB ARCHITECTURE.
P/N 325-00238-02 CABLE ASSY, USB-A RECPT TO PIGTAIL, 48” INCLUDED WITH GI 275 CONNECTOR KIT.
THE USB CONNECTOR IS FOR MAINTENANCE PURPOSES ONLY AND MUST BE CAPPED AND STOWED
6 PRIOR TO RETURNING THE AIRCRAFT TO SERVICE. PROTECT THE USB CONNECTOR SUCH THAT THE
USB CONNECTOR OPENING IS COMPLETELY COVERED. THEN SECURE THE USB CONNECTOR FOR
FUTURE MAINTENANCE ACCESS.
A GSB 15 USB DATABASE AND CHARGING HUB CAN BE INSTALLED IN PLACE OF THE USB PIGTAIL. REFER
7 TO FIGURE B-26.
Figure B-1 GI 275 - Power, Lighting, Configuration Module, HSDB, USB Interconnect
Sheet 2 of 2

Rev. 13 Page B-4
ADAHRS
GI 275
w/ ADAHRS
P2751 P441 GMU 44B
A 49 3 MAGNETOMETER
RS-485
B 69 2
s
1
LRU PWR OUT 20 6
LRU GROUND 19 4
2
RS-232 OUT 1 38 5
s
OR
P111 GMU 11
OUT 38 4 MAGNETOMETER
RS-232 1 IN 57 5
2 3
GND 77 6
s s
LRU PWR OUT 20 7

LRU GROUND 19 9
s s
4 Supplemental Heading Source
GI GAD Heading Source

275 29 4
A 72 16 24 A ARINC 429 OUT~

~ARINC 429 IN 2 B 14 55 12 B
s s
OR
IN A 27
IN B 28
~HSDB 2 OUT A 8 5
OUT B 9
P2752
OAT POWER 62 WHT 1

OAT PROBE IN HI 60 BLU GTP 59
OAT PROBE IN LO 21 ORN OAT PROBE
s
Figure B-2 Attitude and Air Data Interconnect

Sheet 1 of 2

Rev. 13 Page B-5
NOTES
THE WIRING SUPPLIED WITH THE GTP 59 MAY BE EXTENDED IF THE SUPPLIED WIRE LENGTH IS NOT
1 SUFFICIENT FOR A PARTICULAR INSTALLATION.
THE GMU MUST BE CONNECTED TO RS-232 PORT 1 OR PORT 2 ONLY (CONNECTOR 1 ON THE MAIN
2 BOARD).
3 THE GMU 11 IS RESTRICTED TO CLASS I & II AIRCRAFT.
WHEN THE GI 275 IS NOT THE PRIMARY HEADING INDICATOR, AN ARINC 429 INPUT FOR HEADING MAY BE
UTILIZED IN CLASS I - III AIRCRAFT FOR SUPPLEMENTAL DISPLAY/USE OF HEADING. THIS MUST BE
4 SOURCED FROM THE AIRCRAFT HEADING SOURCE WHICH MUST BE AN FAA APPROVED OR TSO-C201
APPROVED SYSTEM CAPABLE OF PROVIDING ARINC 429 LABEL 320 FOR MAGNETIC HEADING.
THE GI 275 HAS THE CAPABILITY TO CONSUME THE MAGNETIC HEADING DATA FROM THE SOURCE
CONFIGURED AS AHRS #1 IF THAT SOURCE HAS MAGNETIC HEADING DATA AVAILABLE. CONFIGURE
5 AHRS #2 OR #3 MAGNETIC HEADING INTERFACE FOR “PRIMARY” TO PROVIDE MAGNETIC HEADING DATA
FROM AHRS #1.
Figure B-2 Attitude and Air Data Interconnect

Sheet 2 of 2

Rev. 13 Page B-6
1
GI 275 GSU GDC GDC GARMIN ADC
TXi
75 72 74
P2751 P2 P751 P721 P741
A 52 - 27 27 26 A
~ARINC 429 IN 1 ARINC 429 OUT
B 33 - 7 7 27 B
s s
OUT A 46 16 - - - IN A
OUT B 47 31 - - - IN B
~ETHERNET 1 ETHERNET 1 ~
IN A 65 17 - - - OUT A
IN B 66 32 - - - OUT B
s s
1 2
TXi GSU GRS GRS GARMIN AHRS
75 79 77
P4 P751 P791 P771
A 72 - - 27 14 A
~ARINC 429 IN 2 ARINC 429 OUT
B 14 - - 7 29 B
s s
NOTES
ETHERNET CONNECTION MUST BE DIRECTLY CONNECTED WITH TXi. ANY PORT MAY BE USED.
1 ETHERNET INTERFACE PROVIDES ADC/AHRS/PFD SYNC.
2 CONNECTIONS TO THE GSU 75 USE ADAHRS ARINC 429 SO ONLY ONE CONNECTION IS REQUIRED.
Figure B-3 External Attitude and Air Data

Rev. 13 Page B-7
GPS SOURCE
GARMIN 4
GI 275
GPS 400W
GNX 375 GPS 175 GTX GTN 6XX/7XX GNS 480 GNC 420W GPS 500W
GNC 355 3X5 GTN Xi GNS 430W GNS 530W
P2751 2 P3751 P3752 PXX51 P3251 P1001 P1002 P1 P5 P4001 P5001
OUT A 46 - 4 11 - - 15 - - - - ETHERNET IN A
OUT B 47 - 19 33 - - 16 - - - - ETHERNET IN B
~ETHERNET 1 IN A 65 - 3 10 - - 17 - - - - ETHERNET OUT A
IN B 66 - 18 32 - - 18 - - - - ETHERNET OUT B
s s
IN 57 - - - 7 - - 5 - 56 56 RS232 OUT (MAPMX)

~RS-232 1 GROUND 1
GND 77 - - - 50 - - 23 - GND GND
s
3
A 52 - - - - - - - 4 46 46 GPS 429 OUT A (GAMA 429/
~ARINC 429 IN 1 GPS 429 OUT B 429 NO FP)
B 33 - - - - - - - 24 47 47
s
A 16 - - - - - - - 8 48 48 GPS 429 IN A (GARMIN

~ARINC 429 OUT 1 GPS 429 IN B
B 55 - - - - - - - 28 49 49 GDU)
s
BACKUP
BNC CONNECTOR GPS ANTENNA
NOTES
1 FOR PINS IDENTIFIED WITH “GND”, CONNECT WIRE TO GROUND AT THE REAR OF THE UNIT.
3 SPLICES AT THE NAVIGATOR MAY BE REQUIRED FOR RS-232 AND ARINC 429 LINES.
IF NOT ENOUGH ARINC 429 CONNECTIONS ARE AVAILABLE IN THE SYSTEM, THE GENERIC MAPMX FORMAT MAY BE USED WITH ONLY THE RS-232 CONNECTION FROM
4 THE GNS 4XXW/5XXW OR GNS 480. REFER TO SECTION 5.5.5.
Figure B-4 GPS Interconnect

Rev. 13 Page B-8
GI 275 NAVIGATOR
GARMIN HONEYWELL (BENDIX/KING) COLLINS
GTN 6XX/7XX GNS 480 GNS 430W GNS 530W SL30 KN 53 KX 170B KX 155A/165A KX 155/165 VIR-32/33
GTN Xi GNC 255() KX 175B
P1002 P5 P4006 P5006 P2001 37-Pin P532 P171 P155A1 P155A2 P401 P901 P1 P2
P2751
1 P165A1 P165A2
A 72 - 6 5 24 24 - - - - - - - - - - VOR/ILS 429 OUT A
~ARINC 429 IN 2
B 14 - 25 23 23 - - - - - - - - - - VOR/ILS 429 OUT B
s
OUT 18 - - - - 16 4 - - - - - - - - RXD1
~RS-232 2 IN 37 - - - - 1 5 - - - - - - - - TXD1
GND 76 - - - - 31 3 - - - - - - - - SERIAL GROUND
s
VOR/LOC COMPOSITE HI 44 - - - - - - B 3 H - H - - 24 VOR/LOC COMPOSITE OUT
VOR/LOC COMPOSITE LO 5 - - - - - - 15 GND GND - GND - - 26 VOR/LOC COMPOSITE OUT LO
s
2 2 2
GLIDESLOPE DEV +UP 6 - - - - - - P - - 15 / S - 15 / S 5 - GS DEVIATION +UP
5 GLIDESLOPE DEV +DOWN 45 - - - - - - 14 - - 16 / T - 16 / T 1 - GS DEVIATION + DOWN
s
3
GLIDESLOPE +FLAG 11 - - - - - - 13 - - 17 / U - 17 / U 17 - GS +FLAG
5 GLIDESLOPE -FLAG 31 - - - - - - R - - 14 / R - 14 / R - - GS -FLAG
s
4 4
DISCRETE IN 4 LO 12 - - - - - - 12 4 8 - 8 - - 40 ILS ENERGIZE
- - - - - - - 19 - - - - - - ILS COMMON
Figure B-5 NAV Interconnect

Sheet 1 of 2

Rev. 13 Page B-9
NOTES
1 FOR GNC NAVIGATORS, CONNECT ALL SHIELDS TO SHIELD BLOCK GROUND, NOT AIRFRAME GROUND.
THE NAV RECEIVER DOES NOT PROVIDE A VLOC COMPOSITE LO PIN. CONNECT THE VLOC COMPOSITE
2 LO WIRE FROM THE GDU TO GROUND AT THE NAV RECEIVER.
KX 170B / KX 175B DO NOT HAVE A GLIDESLOPE OUTPUT. USE A SEPARATE GLIDESLOPE RECEIVER TO
3 DRIVE THESE INPUTS ON THE GDU.
KX155/165 NAV UNITS HAVE DUAL GLIDESLOPE OUTPUTS. USE “NUMBERED” OR LETTERED PINS, NOT
4 BOTH. WHENEVER POSSIBLE, USE AN UNUSED SET OF PINS.
GLIDESLOPE CONNECTIONS ARE ONLY REQUIRED IF THE NAV RECEIVER CONTAINS THE OPTIONAL
5 GLIDESLOPE RECEIVER.
THE GTN 6XX/7XX AND GTN Xi UTILIZE THE SAME INTERFACE SHOWN IN THE GPS INTERCONNECT;
6 THEREFORE, NOT SHOWN IN THE NAV INTERCONNECT.
Figure B-5 NAV Interconnect

Sheet 2 of 2

Rev. 13 Page B-10
GI 275 NAVIGATOR
Garmin
1
GTN 6XX/7XX GNS 5XX GNS 4XX
GTN Xi
P2751 P1004 P5006 P4006
LATERAL DEVIATION +LEFT 25 5 5 5 LATERAL +LEFT

LATERAL DEVIATION +RIGHT 64 6 6 6 LATERAL +RIGHT
s
LATERAL +FLAG 26 3 3 3 LATERAL +FLAG
LATERAL -FLAG 7 4 4 4 LATERAL -FLAG
s
TO/FROM +FLAG 50 1 1 1 +TO
TO/FROM -FLAG 32 2 2 2 +FROM
s
GLIDESLOPE DEVIATION +UP 6 34 32 32 GS DEVIATION +UP
GLIDESLOPE DEV +DOWN 45 55 31 31 GS DEVIATION + DOWN
s
GLIDESLOPE +FLAG 11 32 30 30 GS +FLAG
GLIDESLOPE -FLAG 31 53 31 31 GS -FLAG
s
OBS STATOR D 29 13 13 13 OBS RESOLVER D
OBS STATOR E 68 11 11 11 OBS RESOLVER E
s
OBS STATOR F 10 12 12 12 OBS RESOLVER F
OBS STATOR G 67 14 11 11 OBS RESOLVER G
s
OBS ROTOR C 71 9 9 9 OBS RESOLVER C
OBS ROTOR H 13 10 10 10 OBS RESOLVER H
s
Figure B-6 Analog CDI Interconnect

Sheet 1 of 2

Rev. 13 Page B-11
NOTES
THIS INTERCONNECT SHOWS ANALOG NAVIGATION CONNECTIONS. THIS ANALOG INTERCONNECT IS
1 NOT USED IF THE NAVIGATOR IS WIRED USING COMPOSITE OR DIGITAL NAV AS SHOWN IN FIGURE B-5.
IF THE GI 275 IS CONNECTED TO AN AUTOPILOT FOR HEADING AND COURSE ERROR, THE ANALOG
2 NAVIGATION SOURCE CANNOT BE USED. INTERFACE METHODS LISTED IN FIGURE B-5 MUST BE USED.
Figure B-6 Analog CDI Interconnect

Sheet 2 of 2

Rev. 13 Page B-12
GI 275 GEA 24
P2751 P241
OUT 38 4 IN
RS-232 1 IN 57 5 OUT RS-232 1
GND 77 9 GND
s s
1 7 POWER IN 1
6 GROUND
NOTES
1 REFER TO SECTION 3.2.1 FOR BREAKER SIZING, BUSSING, AND LABELING.
Figure B-7 GEA 24 Power Interconnect

Rev. 13 Page B-13
(494-70008-00)
GEA 24
NIST ITS-90
NIST ITS-90
K TYPE
J TYPE
ALCOR
86252
3 3 4
P242
2 CHT 1 HI 24 YEL YEL WHT
CHT 1 LO 12 RED RED RED
(494-70001-00)
NIST ITS-90
K TYPE
ALCOR
86255
3 3
EGT 1 HI 25 YEL YEL

2 EGT 1 LO 13 RED RED
(494-30029-03) or
(011-04202-20 /
(011-04202-10 /
(494-30029-01)
011-05783-20)
011-05783-10)
T1EU70D-CS
T1EU70G-CS
T1EU35G-CS
GARMIN
GARMIN
UMA
UMA
P243
7 12
FUEL PRESS XCDR +5V 4 - - RED RED
FUEL PRESS XCDR +12V 3 RED RED - -
FUEL PRESS RX 2 WHT WHT GRN GRN
FUEL PRESS GND 1 BLK BLK BLK BLK
s
(011-04202-00 /
(494-30029-02)
011-05783-00)
T1EU50A-CS
GARMIN
UMA
MAN PRESS XCDR +5V 15 - RED

MAN PRESS XCDR +12V 14 RED -
MANIFOLD PRESS RX 13 WHT GRN
MAN PRESS GND 12 BLK BLK
s
(011-04202-30 /
(494-30029-04)
T1EU150G-CS
011-05783-30)
102-389017-3
GARMIN
BEECH
UMA
OIL PRESS XCDR +5V 19 - RED -

OIL PRESS XCDR +12V 18 RED - -
OIL PRESS RX 17 WHT GRN HI
OIL PRESS GND 16 BLK BLK LO
s
11
Figure B-8 GEA 24 Sensor Interconnect

Sheet 1 of 7

Rev. 13 Page B-14
CARB
GEA 24 TEMP
TIT 1 CDT IAT PRIMARY EGT
(494-70002-00)
(494-70001-00)
(494-70010-00)
NIST ITS-90
NIST ITS-90
NIST ITS-90
NIST ITS-90
NIST ITS-90
NIST ITS-90
T3B10-SG
ALCOR
ALCOR
K TYPE
K TYPE
K TYPE
K TYPE
K-TYPE
J TYPE
86245
86255
MS28034
UMA
3 3 3 3 3 3 4 3 3
15 P243
GP 6 / MISC TEMP 1 HI 31 YEL A YEL YEL YEL YEL YEL WHT YEL WHT
GP 6 / MISC TEMP 1 LO 30 RED B RED RED RED RED RED RED RED RED
~GP GROUND 1 27
5
OAT
Garmin
GTP 59
18
15
GP 6 / MISC TEMP 1 HI 31 BLU

GP 6 / MISC TEMP 1 LO 30 ORG
s
CAP AND WHT
STOW
(494-70009-00)
NIST ITS-90
T3B3-2.5G
K-TYPE
MS28034
UMA
3 3
OIL TEMP HI 33 YEL YEL A

OIL TEMP LO 32 RED RED B
~GP GROUND 1 27
5
(494-10001-00)
(494-10001-01)
102-389012-11
FLOSCAN
FLOSCAN
BEECH
201B-6
FT-60
FT-90
231
EI
EI
12
~FUEL XDCR +12V 1 24 RED RED RED RED A
~FUEL FLOW RX 23 WHT WHT WHT WHT B
~FUEL XDCR GND 1 20 BLK BLK BLK BLK C
s
(494-10001-00)
(494-10001-01)
102-389012-11
FLOSCAN
FLOSCAN
BEECH
201B-6
FT-60
FT-90
231
EI
EI
12
~FUEL XDCR +12V 2 25 RED RED RED RED A
~FUEL RETURN RX 21 WHT WHT WHT WHT B
~FUEL XDCR GND 2 22 BLK BLK BLK BLK C
s
T1A9-1
T1A9-2
UMA
UMA
1
12
~RPM XDCR +12V 1 9 ORG/WHT ORG/WHT
~RPM 1 RX 8 WHT WHT
~RPM XDCR GND 1 7 BLU/WHT BLU/WHT
s
OR
RPM 1 RX 8 10 (LEFT MAG P-LEAD)
s
9
8
RPM 2 RX 6 10 (RIGHT MAG P-LEAD)

s
9
8

Sheet 2 of 7

Rev. 13 Page B-15
GEA 24
P243 ALT
1A B G
ALT LOAD - SHUNT 1 HI 37
13
1A
ALT LOAD - SHUNT 1 LO 36 AIRCRAFT BUS
OR
MASTER
SOLENOID
1A + -
BATT - SHUNT 2 LO 34
13
1A
BATT - SHUNT 2 HI 35 BATTERY BUS
P244
1A
VOLTS 1 25 BUS VOLTS
1A
VOLTS 2 28 BATT VOLTS
AT TANK MASTER
SENDER
20
0-5V ANALOG
CC284022
CC284022
DIGITAL
CiES
CiES
2 FUEL QTY 1 GND 7 BLK BLK

FUEL QTY 1 6 BLUE GREEN
s

Sheet 3 of 7

Rev. 13 Page B-16
GEA 24
P244
LEFT MAIN /
19 SINGLE MAIN
16 FUEL +12V 1 34 RESISTIVE
FLOAT
14 6
FUEL QTY 1 HI (0-5 VOLT) 6 HI
s
FUEL QTY 1 LO 7 LO
s
RIGHT MAIN
FUEL +12V 2 35 RESISTIVE

FLOAT
14 6
s
FUEL QTY 2 LO 10 LO
s
LEFT AUX /
SINGLE AUX
RESISTIVE
FLOAT
14 6
s
FUEL QTY 3 LO 13 LO
s
RIGHT AUX
GP +12V 50 17
RESISTIVE
FLOAT
14 6
s
FUEL QTY 4 LO 16 LO
s

Sheet 4 of 7

Rev. 13 Page B-17
NOTES
THERE ARE LIMITED PINS AVAILABLE FOR +5V, +10V, AND +12V TRANSDUCER EXCITATION. DEPENDING
ON HOW MANY SENSORS ARE CONNECTED TO THE GEA, SPLICING SENSORS TO THE SAME EXCITATION
1
VOLTAGE PIN MAY BE REQUIRED. USE ALL IDENTICAL FUNCTIONING PINS BEFORE SPLICING.
SINGLE CHANNEL SHOWN. IDENTICAL WIRING FOR OTHER CHANNELS.

2
USE K-TYPE THERMOCOUPLE WIRE FOR EXTENSIONS.

3
USE J-TYPE THERMOCOUPLE WIRE FOR EXTENSIONS.

4
GEA GROUND PIN ONLY REQUIRED FOR MS28034 CARB TEMP SENSOR AND GARMIN GTP 59 OAT
5 SENSOR.
EXISTING FUEL QTY WIRING MAY BE RE-USED. USE A STANDARD ENVIRONMENTAL CRIMP SPLICE TO
EXTEND THE SIGNAL TO THE GEA, IF REQUIRED. ALL ADDITIONAL WIRING MUST BE SHEILDED AND BOTH
6
SHEILD ENDS TERMINATED. THE SHEILD DRAIN LENGTH MUST BE AS SHORT AS PRACTICAL.
MATCH SHIELDING AS SHOWN. SELECT WIRE BASED ON CONDUCTORS REQUIRED AT TRANSDUCER.

7
USE TWO 820 KΩ, 1/4 WATT, -55 C TO +125 C RESISTORS. TWIST PARALLEL RESISTOR LEADS TOGETHER,
SPLICE TO WIRES WITH ENVIRONMENTAL SPLICES, AND ENCAPSULATE SPLICES AND RESISTORS WITH
8
ADHESIVE LINED POLYOLEFIN HEAT-SHRINKABLE TUBING.
DO NOT EXCEED 6-INCH LENGTH BETWEEN END OF RESISTOR AND CONNECTION TO MAGNETO OR
9 IGNITION SWITCH.
CONNECT TO THE MAGNETO P-LEAD LUG. PERMISSIBLE TO USE IGNITION SWITCH INPUTS IF MAGNETO
10 USES COMPRESSION TYPE CONNECTORS.
AIRCRAFT GROUND --- PIN ONLY REQUIRED FOR BEECH 102-389017-3.

11
DO NOT EXCEED 6-INCH LENGTH OF EXPOSED CORE WIRES BETWEEN END OF SHIELD AND
TRANSDUCER. THE LENGTH OF NON-METALLIC TRANSDUCER DISCONNECTS, IF INSTALLED, MUST BE
12
INCLUDED IN THIS LENGTH.
BOTH FUSES MUST BE THE SAME TYPE AND RATING.

13

Sheet 5 of 7

Rev. 13 Page B-18
NOTES CONTINUED
RE
WI
OF
EN
D
N CH
)I CH
-0 IN
25/ .5)
+ 0. (±0
CONTACT 0 0( 3.5
2.
(P/O GEA24 CONNECTOR KIT)
JUMPER (22 AWG)

RESISTOR 1.75(+0.25/-0) INCH
14
SOLDER SLEEVE (REF SECTION 4)
RING TERMINAL
BRAID MAX 4 INCH
HARNESS BUILDUP PROCEDURE

1. BUILD RESISTOR ASSEMBLIES AS SHOWN IN NOTE 18.
2. COMPLETE RESISTOR ASSEMBLY AS SHOWN IN ABOVE FIGURE (I.E. CRIMP CONTACTS TO WIRES, TERMINATE SHIELD, ETC.).
2.1. REFERENCE FIGURE B-8 SHEET 4 FOR COMPLETE FUEL QUANTITY WIRING CONNECTIONS.
3. SEE NOTE 18 FOR CABLE TIE PLACEMENT TO AVOID COMPONENT STRAIN.
USE EITHER GP 6/MISC TEMP 1 OR GP 7/MISC TEMP 2 PORTS FOR TIT, CDT, IAT, OAT, AND PRIMARY EGT
15 SENSORS. CARB TEMP SENSOR MUST BE CONNECTED TO GP 6/MISC TEMP 1.
WHEN USING THE DUAL 2.2K RESISTOR WIRING CONFIGURATION SHOWN IN THIS FIGURE, THE
RESISTIVE FUEL PROBE MUST BE CONFIGURED AS A 0-5 VOLT SENSOR. THE RESISTIVE SENSOR
16
CONFIGURATION MUST NOT BE USED. REFER TO APPENDIX C.
SPLICE OF THE +12V OUTPUT IS ONLY REQUIRED FOR INSTALLATIONS INTERFACING TO TWO AUX TANKS
WITH RESISTIVE PROBES.
RE
WI
OF
EN
D
N CH
)I CH
-0 IN
.2 5/ .5)
+0 (±0
(
.00 3.5
2
CONTACT
(P/O GEA24 CONNECTOR KIT)
JUMPER (22 AWG)
1.75(+0.25/-0) INCH
JUMPER (22 AWG)

RESISTOR 1.75(+0.25/-0) INCH

JUMPER (22 AWG)
17
RESISTOR
1.75(+0.25/-0) INCH
BRAID MAX 4 INCH
RING TERMINAL
RING TERMINAL
BRAID MAX 4 INCH
HARNESS BUILDUP PROCEDURE

1. BUILD RESISTOR ASSEMBLIES AS SHOWN IN NOTE 18.
2. COMPLETE RESISTOR ASSEMBLY AS SHOWN IN ABOVE FIGURE (I.E. CRIMP CONTACTS TO WIRES, TERMINATE SHIELD, ETC.).
2.1. REFERENCE FIGURE B-8 SHEET 4 FOR COMPLETE FUEL QUANTITY WIRING CONNECTIONS.
3. SEE NOTE 18 FOR CABLE TIE PLACEMENT TO AVOID COMPONENT STRAIN.

Sheet 6 of 7

Rev. 13 Page B-19
NOTES CONTINUED
FUEL QUANTITY RESISTOR BUILDUP PROCEDURE

STEP 1-2
WIRE(S) WIRE(S)
PREPARE IAW STEP 3
NOTE 1: FOR POTENTIAL FUEL QUANTITY RESISTORS P/N REFERENCE SECTION 3.1.2. ALL RESISTORS ARE REQUIRED TO BE THE SAME PART NUMBER.
NOTE 2: SAE AS4461 REVISION C OR A LATER APPROVED VERSION IS TO BE USED IN THIS PROCEDURE.
1. TRIM RESISTOR LEADS TO 0.25±(0.063) INCH.

2. CREATE A HOOK IN THE REMAINING LEAD ON THE RESISTOR. REFERENCE FIGURE 9 IN AS4461 FOR HOOK CREATION.
3. PREPARE RESISTOR LEAD AND STRANDED WIRE IAW AS4461 SECTION 4.8.
STEP 4-6
WIRE(S) WIRE(S)
4. USE PROCEDURE IN AS4461 SECTION 5.1.6.1 ALONG WITH FIGURE 8 AND 9 GUIDANCE TO SOLDER RESISTOR LEAD TO STRANDED WIRE(S) AS
SHOWN ABOVE. ACCEPTABLE SOLDER TYPES ARE Sn60 OR Sn63.
5. CLEAN FLUX RESIDUES IAW AS4461 SECTION 4.11.2.
6. INSPECT SOLDER JOINT IAW AS4461 SECTION 5.1, JOINT CAN BE REWORKED IAW AS4461 SECTION 4.11.1. IF REWORK IS REQUIRED, INSPECT
JOINT AGAIN IAW AS4461 SECTION 5.1.
STEP 7
WIRE(S) WIRE(S)
0.5(±0.1) 0.5(±0.1)
INCH INCH
19
NOTE: DURING THE HEAT SHRINKING PROCESS ENSURE THE RESISTOR IS MINIMALLY EXPOSED TO DIRECT HEAT.
7. COVER SOLDER JOINTS IN 0.5(±0.1) INCH STANDARD HEAT SHRINK, REFERENCE SECTION 3.1.2 FOR P/N OF HEAT SHRINK. ENSURE THE HEAT
SHRINK CONSTRICTS AROUND THE SOLDER JOINT AND CONNECTING WIRE.
STEP 8
WIRE(S) WIRE(S)
1.25(+0.25/-0.00) INCH
NOTE: DURING THE HEAT SHRINKING PROCESS ENSURE THE RESISTOR IS MINIMALLY EXPOSED TO DIRECT HEAT.
8. COVER ASSEMBLY IN 1.25(+0.25/-0.00) INCH STANDARD HEAT SHRINK, CENTER HEAT SHRINK ON RESISTOR PRIOR TO SHRINKING. REFERENCE
SECTION 3.1.2 FOR P/N OF STANDARD HEAT SHRINK. ENSURE THE HEAT SHRINK CONSTRICTS AROUND THE HEAT SHRINK INSTALLED ON THE
SOLDER JOINTS.
GEA24 P244 CABLE TIE PLACEMENT
4.5(±0.50)
2.00(±0.50) INCH
INCH
ROUTE WITH EXISTING WIRING IN

ACCORDANCE WITH SECTION 4.1
INSTALL CABLE TIES AS SHOWN

TO AVOID COMPONENT STRAIN BACK OF P244 CONNECTOR (REF)
CABLE CLAMP (REF)

RESISTOR BUILDUPS
(TOTAL NUMBER OF RESISTORS MAY VARY BACK OF P244 BACKSHELL (REF)
PER INSTALLATION, SEE FIGURE B-8 SHEET 4)
IN TANKS WHERE TWO OR MORE SENSORS ARE REQUIRED, THE MOST INBOARD SENSOR IS THE
MASTER, AND THE OTHER SENDERS ARE SLAVES. SEE APPLICABLE CiES STC FOR MULTI-PROBE AND
20
PWR/GND WIRING.

Sheet 7 of 7

Rev. 13 Page B-20
GEA 110
P1102
CONFIG
MODULE 4 RED 20 CONFIG MODULE PWR
1 BLK 78 CONFIG MODULE GND
3 YEL 39 CONFIG MODULE DATA
2 WHT 59 CONFIG MODULE CLK
MULTI 3
SINGLE
#1 #2
P1101
GI 275 - GND - 12 SYS ID #1

- - GND 13 SYS ID #2
P2751
A 49 5 A
RS-485 RS-485 1
B 69 10 B
s s
1 POWER IN 1
1 2
6 POWER IN 2
14 GND
NOTES
1 REFER SECTION 3.2.1 FOR BREAKER SIZING, BUSSING, AND LABELING.
IT IS NOT REQUIRED TO CONNECT POWER IN 1 AND POWER IN 2 TO SEPARATE ESSENTIAL BUSSES. IF

2 ONLY ONE ESSENTIAL BUS IS UTILIZED, THEN CONNECT BOTH TO THE ESSENTIAL BUS.
ENSURE THE 15 PIN D-SUB CONNECTOR IS ORIENTATED PROPERLY, DAMAGE WILL OCCUR IF THE
3 CONNECTOR IS INSTALLED UPSIDE DOWN.
Figure B-9 GEA 110 Power, Config Module Interconnect

Rev. 13 Page B-21
P1102
(494-30029-03) or
(011-04202-20 /
(011-04202-10 /
(494-30029-01)
011-05783-20)
011-05783-10)
T1EU70D-CS
T1EU70G-CS
T1EU35G-CS
GEA 110
GARMIN
GARMIN
UMA
UMA
7 12
1 ~ +5V 1 EXCT 29 - - RED RED
+10V EXCT 9 RED RED - -
FUEL PRESS (+) (80V) 10 WHT WHT GRN GRN
GROUND 34 BLK BLK BLK BLK
s
(011-04202-00 /
(494-30029-02)
011-05783-00)
T1EU50A-CS
GARMIN
UMA
7 12
1 ~ +5V 2 EXCT 76 - RED
+10V EXCT 9 RED -
MAN PRESS (+) (80V) 50 WHT GRN
GROUND 54 BLK BLK
s
20GX-1000-150G
(011-04202-30 /
(494-30029-04)
(494-30032-00)
T1EU150G-CS
011-05783-30)
GARMIN
KULITE
UMA
7 12
1 ~ +5V 2 EXCT 76 - RED A
+10V EXCT 9 RED - -
OIL PRESS (+) (5/80V) 48 WHT GRN C
OIL PRESS (-) (5/80V) 68 - - D
GROUND 34 BLK BLK B
s
(494-70001-00)
NIST ITS-90
ALCOR
K TYPE
86255
3 3
EGT 1 (+) 40 YEL YEL

2 EGT 1 (-) 60 RED RED
(494-70008-00)
NIST ITS-90
NIST ITS-90
ALCOR
J TYPE
K TYPE
86252
3 3 4
CHT 1 (+) 1 YEL YEL WHT

2 CHT 1 (-) 21 RED RED RED

Sheet 1 of 6

Rev. 13 Page B-22
GEA 110 P1102
3 3
(494-70010-00)
NIST ITS-90
T3B10-SG
MS28034
K-TYPE
UMA
CARB TEMP (+) (5/80V) 46 YEL YEL A
CARB TEMP (-) (5/80V) 66 RED RED B
5
3 3
(494-70009-00)
NIST ITS-90
T3B3-2.5G
MS28034
K-TYPE
UMA
OIL TEMP (+) (5V) 47 YEL YEL A
OIL TEMP (-) (5V) 67 RED RED B
(494-10001-00)
(494-10001-01)
102-389012-11
FLOSCAN
FLOSCAN
BEECH
201B-6
FT-60
FT-90
231
EI
EI
12
1 ~ +12V 1 EXCT 69 RED RED RED RED A
FUEL FLOW 1 15 WHT WHT WHT WHT B
GROUND 74 BLK BLK BLK BLK C
s
102-389012-11
(494-10001-00)
(494-10001-01)
FLOSCAN
FLOSCAN
BEECH
201B-6
FT-60
FT-90
231
EI
EI
12
1
~ +12V 2 EXCT 17 RED RED RED RED A
FUEL FLOW 2 16 WHT WHT WHT WHT B
GROUND 14 BLK BLK BLK BLK C
s
T1A9-1
T1A9-2
UMA
UMA
12
1 ~ +12V 2 EXCT 17 ORG/WHT ORG/WHT
RPM 1(+) 18 WHT WHT
GROUND 74 BLU/WHT BLU/WHT
s
OR
9
RPM 1(+) 18 10 (LEFT MAG P-LEAD)
s
9
RPM 2(+) 19 10 (RIGHT MAG P-LEAD)
s

Sheet 2 of 6

Rev. 13 Page B-23
GEA 110
SHUNT
P1102
ALT
5A B G
ALT LOAD – SHUNT 1 HI 35
13
5A
ALT LOAD – SHUNT 1 LO 55 AIRCRAFT BUS
OR
MASTER
SHUNT
SOLENOID
5A + -
BATTERY – SHUNT 2 LO 56
13
5A
BATTERY – SHUNT 2 HI 36 BATTERY BUS
5A
BUS 1 57 BUS VOLTS
5A
BUS 2 58 BATT. VOLTS
3 3 3 4 3 3 3
TIT IAT CDT PRIMARY EGT

(494-70002-00)
(494-70001-00)
NIST ITS-90
NIST ITS-90
NIST ITS-90
NIST ITS-90
NIST ITS-90
ALCOR
ALCOR
K TYPE
K TYPE
K TYPE
K TYPE
J TYPE
86245
86255
(+) 7 YEL YEL YEL WHT YEL YEL YEL
~ GEN PURP
(-) 27 RED RED RED RED RED RED RED
OAT
Garmin
GTP 59
15
16
(+) 8 BLU
~ GEN PURP
(-) 28 ORG
s
CAP AND WHT
STOW
OIL
MAP FUEL PRESSURE
PRESS.
20GX-1000-50G
20GX-1000-15G
20GX-1000-25A
(494-30030-00)
(494-30031-00)
(494-30029-00)
102-389017-3
KULITE
KULITE
KULITE
BEECH
7 12
1 ~ +5V EXCT 29 - A A A
(+) 8 HI C C C
~ GEN PURP
(-) 28 LO D D D
~ GROUND 34 - B B B
s
11

Sheet 3 of 6

Rev. 13 Page B-24
GEA 110 AT TANK MASTER SENDER
P1102
CC284022
CC284022
(0-5 Volt)
(Digital)
CiES
CiES
17
6
FUEL QUANTITY 1 / (+) 12 BLUE GREEN
DIGITAL FUEL 1 (-) 32 BLACK BLACK
s
OR
LEFT MAIN /
SINGLE MAIN
6 RESISTIVE FLOAT
(+) 12 HI
FUEL QUANTITY 1 s
(-) 32 14 LO
s
RIGHT MAIN
RESISTIVE FLOAT
6
(+) 52 HI
FUEL QUANTITY 2 s
(-) 72 14 LO
s
LEFT AUX /
SINGLE AUX
6 RESISTIVE FLOAT
(+) 13 HI
FUEL QUANTITY 3 s
(-) 33 14 LO
s
LEFT MAIN /
SINGLE MAIN
6 RESISTIVE FLOAT
(+) 53 HI
FUEL QUANTITY 4 s
(-) 73 14 LO
s

Sheet 4 of 6

Rev. 13 Page B-25
NOTES
THERE ARE LIMITED PINS AVAILABLE FOR +5V, +10V, AND +12V TRANSDUCER EXCITATION. DEPENDING
1 ON HOW MANY SENSORS ARE CONNECTED TO THE GEA, SPLICING SENSORS TO THE SAME EXCITATION
VOLTAGE PIN MAY BE REQUIRED. USE ALL IDENTICAL FUNCTIONING PINS BEFORE SPLICING.
2 SINGLE CHANNEL SHOWN. IDENTICAL WIRING FOR CHANNELS 2-6.
3 USE K-TYPE THERMOCOUPLE WIRE FOR EXTENSIONS.
4 USE J-TYPE THERMOCOUPLE WIRE FOR EXTENSIONS.
5 AIRCRAFT GROUND ON GEA --- PIN ONLY REQUIRED FOR MS28034.
EXISTING FUEL QTY WIRING MAY BE RE-USED. USE A STANDARD ENVIRONMENTAL CRIMP SPLICE TO
6 EXTEND THE SIGNAL TO THE GEA, IF REQUIRED. ALL ADDITIONAL WIRING MUST BE SHEILDED AND BOTH
SHEILD ENDS TERMINATED. THE SHEILD DRAIN LENGTH MUST BE AS SHORT AS PRACTICAL.
7 MATCH SHIELDING AS SHOWN. SELECT WIRE BASED ON CONDUCTORS REQUIRED AT TRANSDUCER.
USE TWO 820 KΩ, 1/4 WATT, -55 C TO +125 C RESISTORS. TWIST PARALLEL RESISTOR LEADS TOGETHER,
8 SPLICE TO WIRES WITH ENVIRONMENTAL SPLICES, AND ENCAPSULATE SPLICES AND RESISTORS WITH
ADHESIVE LINED POLYOLEFIN HEAT-SHRINKABLE TUBING.
DO NOT EXCEED 6 INCHES OF LENGTH BETWEEN END OF RESISTOR AND CONNECTION TO MAGNETO OR
9 IGNITION SWITCH.
CONNECT TO THE MAGNETO P-LEAD LUG. PERMISSIBLE TO USE IGNITION SWITCH INPUTS IF MAGNETO
10 USES COMPRESSION TYPE CONNECTORS.
AIRCRAFT GROUND ON GENERAL PURPOSE --- PIN ONLY REQUIRED FOR BEECH 102-389017-3 OIL
11 PRESSURE SENSOR AND GARMIN GTP 59 OAT SENSOR. BEECH OIL PRESSURE AND GARMIN OAT
SENSORS MUST USE GENERAL PURPOSE PORT 1 AND/OR 2.
DO NOT EXCEED 6 INCHES OF LENGTH OF EXPOSED CORE WIRES BETWEEN END OF SHIELD AND
12 TRANSDUCER. THE LENGTH OF NON-METALLIC TRANSDUCER DISCONNECTS, IF INSTALLED, MUST BE
INCLUDED IN THIS LENGTH.
13 BOTH FUSES MUST BE THE SAME TYPE AND RATING.

Sheet 5 of 6

Rev. 13 Page B-26
NOTES CONTINUED
IF THE EXISTING FUEL PROBE INCLUDES A LO (-) OUTPUT WIRE, CONNECT TO THE RESPECTIVE
GEA LO (-) INPUT.
LEFT MAIN /
P1102 SINGLE MAIN
14 GEA 110 RESISTIVE FLOAT
(+) HI HI
FUEL QUANTITY X
(-) LO LO
s
16 EITHER GP 1 OR GP 2 ON THE GEA 110 MAY BE USED FOR OAT.
IN TANKS WHERE TWO OR MORE SENSORS ARE REQUIRED, THE MOST INBOARD SENSOR IS THE
17 MASTER, AND THE OTHER SENDERS ARE SLAVES. SEE APPLICABLE CIES STC FOR MULTI-PROBE AND
PWR/GND WIRING.

Sheet 6 of 6

Rev. 13 Page B-27
GI 275 AUDIO PANEL
1
6 P2751
AUDIO INHIBIT IN X 2 GARMIN PS Engineering Bendix/King
(~DISCRETE IN X*)
AUDIO ACTIVE OUT X GMA 342 GMA 35(c) SL15 PAR PMA6000 PMA KMA 24
(~DISCRETE OUT X*)
3 GMA 345 GMA 350(c) SL15M GMA 340 GMA 347 200 PMA7000 8000 KMA 28 KMA 26 KMA 30
P3401 P3501 Bottom J1 J3471 J1 Bottom J1 Bottom P261 J1
HI 30 31 31 T 31 54 31 T 31 T 14 31 HI UNSWITCHED
AUDIO OUT AUDIO IN
LO 48 32 32 Gnd Lug 32 55 32 Gnd Lug 32 Gnd Lug 31 32 LO
s
4 5
NOTES
FOR MULTIPLE GI 275 INSTALLATIONS, ONLY CONNECT THE AUDIO OUTPUT AND ASSOCIATED DISCRETE FROM ONE GI 275. LEAVE THE AUDIO OUTPUT AND DISCRETES
1 FROM OTHER GI UNITS UNCONNECTED.
2 USE THE AUDIO INHIBIT IN DISCRETE INPUT TO INHIBIT GDU GI 275 AURAL ALERTS WHEN A HIGHER PRIORITY SYSTEM IS PLAYING AUDIO MESSAGES.
3 USE THE AUDIO ACTIVE OUT DISCRETE OUTPUT TO INHIBIT AURAL ALERTS FROM LOWER PRIORITY SYSTEMS WHENEVER THE GI 275 IS PLAYING AUDIO MESSAGES.
IT IS ACCEPTABLE TO USE OTHER AVAILABLE UNSWITCHED, UNMUTED PORTS. IF AUDIO PANEL DOES NOT HAVE AN AVAILABLE UNSWITCHED INPUT, AUDIO FROM GI 275
4 MUST BE MIXED WITH AN EXISTING AUDIO SOURCE USING RESISTORS TO ISOLATE THE AUDIO OUTPUT FROM EACH LRU. A TYPICAL VALUE FOR MIXING RESISTORS IS
390Ω 1/4 W. THE AUDIO LEVELS OF EXISTING AUDIO SOURCES WILL HAVE TO BE RE-EVALUATED AFTER MIXING RESISTORS ARE INSTALLED.
5 SHIELDING BETWEEN THE GI 275 AND AUDIO PANEL SHOULD ONLY BE GROUNDED AT THE GI 275. DO NOT GROUND THE SHIELD AT THE AUDIO PANEL.
6 WHEN INSTALLING THE GI 275 WITH A G500/G600 TXi, LEAVE THE GI 275 AUDIO AND AUDIO DISCRETES UNCONNECTED.
Figure B-11 Audio Interconnect

Rev. 13 Page B-28
GI 275 BENDIX AUTOPILOT
(Pilot s Primary ADI
M-4C 3 M-4D 4
or Pilot s HSI)
5536E-2 5536F 5485A
P2752 Comp. Amp. Comp. Amp. 5487G
P1 P2 P1 P2 P4
LATERAL +LEFT OUT 48 1 - 1 - - VOR/LOC +LT IN
LATERAL +RIGHT OUT 10 5 - 5 - - VOR/LOC +RT IN
s
VERTICAL +UP OUT 9 34 - 34 - - GS + UP

VERTICAL +DN OUT 68 35 - 35 - - GS + DN
s
A/P HEADING ERROR HI 13 6 - - - 6 HDG DAT H
A/P HEADING ERROR LO 52 - 34 - 34 - HDG DAT C

s T1
10k:10k 5
A/P COURSE ERROR HI 32 - 48 - - 8 CRS DAT H
A/P COURSE ERROR LO 71 - 29 - 27 - CRS DAT C

s T1
10k:10k 5
+28 VDC 6
N/C
- 51 - 51 - LOC + 28
ILS/GPS APPROACH
(~DISCRETE OUT 7 LO) 1
LOC RELAY
26 VAC REF HI 65 AIRCRAFT 26 VAC 400 HZ

7 REFERENCE VOLTAGE
26 VAC REF LO 7
s
FD ROLL RIGHT 38 - - - 35 - FD ROLL CMD + RT

FD ROLL LEFT 77 - - - 36 - FD ROLL CMD + LT
9 s
FD PITCH UP 19 - - - 38 - FD PITCH CMD + UP
FD PITCH DOWN 58 - - - 37 - FD PITCH CMD + DN
s
FLIGHT
DIRECTOR
ON
FD ENABLE HI 18 28VDC
OFF
1 ADI 2 8
(on copilot s side) Collins
FD-112V
P1 P2
FD PITCH DOWN - k
FD PITCH UP - F
FD ROLL LEFT - T
FD ROLL RIGHT - U
-
OFF MODE + Z - - 39 - - FD ENG
Figure B-12 Autopilot/Flight Director Interconnect - Bendix

Sheet 1 of 2

Rev. 13 Page B-29
NOTES
FLIGHT DIRECTOR WIRING TO EXISTING ADI MUST BE DISCONNECTED IF THIS INDICATOR IS USED AS A
STANDBY INSTRUMENT FOR THE GI 275. THIS ADI MUST BE LOCATED IN ACCORDANCE WITH SECTION 3.2.
1 IF THIS INDICATOR IS BEING RELOCATED TO THE CO-PILOT’S SIDE, WIRING MAY BE CONNECTED IN
PARALLEL TO THIS ADI AND MUST BE CONNECTED IN ACCORDANCE WITH THE MANUFACTURER’S
INSTRUCTIONS.
IF THE FLIGHT DIRECTOR IS BEING DISPLAYED ON THE CO-PILOT’S ADI, THIS FLIGHT DIRECTOR
2 ALIGNMENT MUST BE CORRECTLY ADJUSTED IN ACCORDANCE WITH THE MANUFACTURER’S
INSTRUCTIONS PRIOR TO MAKING ANY ADJUSTMENTS TO THE GI 275.
ADDITIONAL DROP DOWN RESISTORS MAY BE REQUIRED TO ENSURE THAT THE HEADING AND COURSE
ERROR SIGNALS TO THE 5536E( ) COMPUTER-AMPLIFIER ARE WITHIN THE CORRECT OPERATING RANGE.
3 REFER TO BENDIX “I.B. 2004 PART 1 INSTALLATION MANUAL M-4C AFCS PARAGRAPH 2-5
“TROUBLESHOOTING PROCEDURES FOR PREFLIGHT CHECKOUT.”
THE AUTOPILOT COMPUTER MUST BE CONFIGURED FOR A COLLINS PN-101 (FD-112C/V) HSI IN ORDER TO
HAVE THE CORRECT HEADING AND COURSE ERROR (DATUM) SIGNALS; OTHERWISE, ADDITIONAL
ADJUSTMENTS WILL BE REQUIRED. REFER TO BENDIX “I.B. 20004 M-4D AFCS INSTALLATION MANUAL”
4 SECTION II PARAGRAPH 7 “FLIGHT CHECK AND CALIBRATION” FOR ADJUSTMENTS THAT CAN BE MADE IN
THE 5487G OR 5485A FLIGHT CONTROLLER. REFER TO I.B. 20004 PARAGRAPH 5 “POST-INSTALLATION
CHECK OUT.” FOR ADDITIONAL INFORMATION.
USE TRIAD TRANSFORMER P/N TY-141P OR EQUIVALENT. IN SOME INSTALLATIONS, EXISTING

5 TRANSFORMERS (COLLINS P/N 677-9020-00) MAY BE USED.
IT IS NECESSARY TO INSTALL A RELAY TO INVERT THE POLARITY OF THE “ILS/GPS APPROACH” SIGNAL
6 FROM ACTIVE-LOW TO ACTIVE-HIGH FOR INPUT INTO THE 5536E/F COMPUTER AMPLIFIER.
THE 115VAC 400 Hz EXCITATION FOR THE AUTOPILOT (P2-40) AND THE 26VAC 400 Hz REFERENCE
7 VOLTAGE FOR THE GI 275 (P2752-65), MUST BE IN PHASE WITH EACH OTHER FOR PROPER FEEDBACK
OF THE HEADING AND COURSE ERRORS TO THE AUTOPILOT COMPUTER.
8 ORIGINAL SWITCH AND WIRING MUST BE RETAINED.
9 CONNECTIONS MUST BE MADE TO THE PILOT’S PRIMARY ADI ONLY.
10 AUTOPILOT MUST BE INTERFACED TO A GI 275 ADAHRS + AP UNIT.
Figure B-12 Autopilot/Flight Director Interconnect - Bendix

Sheet 2 of 2

Rev. 13 Page B-30
Century II/IIB/III (with 1C388, 1C388M, 1C388C or 1C388MC Radio Coupler)
GI 275 27 CENTURY AP
(Pilot’s Primary ADI ) II/IIB III
P2752 CD-18 CD-18
(to horizon) (to horizon)
1 SP-13 4
PITCH AC OUT LO 64 - H PITCH HORIZON SIGNAL
2.2k
12 25
½W
PITCH AC OUT HI 6 - F PITCH MOTOR/COMMON
s 3 20k:800 6
1 SP-13 4
ROLL AC OUT LO 45 C C ROLL HORIZON SIGNAL
2.2k
12 25 ½W
ROLL AC OUT HI 26 D D ROLL MOTOR/COMMON
s 3 20k:800 6
NC 42
GYRO VALID (see autopilot disconnect
COM 3 options on following pages)
RELAY
NO 23
RADIO COUPLER
1C388 1C388C
1C388M 1C388MC
TO CONSOLE/AMPLIFIER/ CD 33
ARTIFICIAL HORIZON CD 33 TO DG CD33 TO DG
(EXISTING WIRING RETAINED) TO AMP (pigtail) (pigtail)
1 SP-66 4
10 VAC REF HI 27 C - D ROLL EXCITATION
10k 24 1
10 VAC REF LO 46 F - E ROLL EXCITATION
s 3 T1 6
10k:10k
1 SP-13 4
A/P HEADING ERROR HI 13 - A A HEADING SIGNAL
12 24 10k
A/P HEADING ERROR LO 52 - B B ROLL COMMON

s 3 T1 6
20k:800
18 mH .047µF
A/P COURSE ERROR HI 32 N/C
- D - DG EXCITATION
A/P COURSE ERROR LO 71 N/C
- E - DG EXCITATION
26
Figure B-13 Autopilot/Flight Director Interconnect - Century

Sheet 1 of 7

Rev. 13 Page B-31
Century II/IIB/III (with 1C388-2, or 1C388-3 Radio Coupler)
27
GI 275 II/IIB III CENTURY AP
(Pilot’s Primary ADI)
CD-18 CD-18
(to horizon) (to horizon)
1 SP-13 4
PITCH AC OUT LO 64 - H PITCH HORIZON SIGNAL
2.2k
12 25
½W
PITCH AC OUT HI 6 - F PITCH MOTOR/COMMON
s 3 20k:800 6
1 SP-13 4
ROLL AC OUT LO 45 C C ROLL HORIZON SIGNAL
2.2k
12 25 ½W
ROLL AC OUT HI 26 D D ROLL MOTOR/COMMON
s 3 20k:800 6
1 SP-66 4
10 VAC REF HI 27 A A ROLL EXCITATION
10k
½W 24 1
10 VAC REF LO 46 B B ROLL EXCITATION
s 3 T1 6
10k:10k
NC 42
GYRO VALID
COM 3 (see autopilot disconnect
RELAY options on following pages)
NO 23
RADIO COUPLER
GI 275 1C388-2 1C388-3
(Pilot’s HSI)
CD 33 CD 33
(Must be -20 GI 275) CD33 TO DG
TO AMP TO DG
1 SP-66 4
10 VAC REF HI 27 - D E ROLL EXCITATION
10k
½W 24 1
10 VAC REF LO 46 - E D ROLL EXCITATION
s 3 T1 6
10k:10k
1 SP-66 4
- A A HEADING SIGNAL
1 2 10k
A/P HEADING ERROR HI 13 24 ½W
A/P HEADING ERROR LO 52 B - F ROLL COMMON
s 3 T1 6
10k:10k 11
1 SP-66 4
- B B COURSE SIGNAL
1 10k
2
A/P COURSE ERROR HI 32 24 ½W
A/P COURSE ERROR LO 71 B - C ROLL COMMON
s 3 T1 6
10k:10k
11

Sheet 2 of 7

Rev. 13 Page B-32
Century II/III (Autopilot Disconnect)
GI 275 CENTURY II/III

21
(Console)
(Pilot’s Primary ADI)
DISENG
19 CD-20
P2752 TO AUTOPILOT C/B 22
1 AP A+ IN
NC 42 ENG
GYRO VALID 23 TO GI 275 C/B
COM 3
RELAY
NO 23 AP DISC
RELAY
(EXTERNAL)
Century II/III (No Automatic Trim System)

OR
TO AUTOPILOT C/B
(existing wire – no change)
GI 275 1A526 Relay Box
21
(Type 17 Trim System)
(Pilot’s Primary ADI) CD-76
DISENG
To CD-27 of 30D207 20
P2752 CABLE ASSY 22 A AP A+ IN
B CONSOLE POWER
NC 42 ENG
GYRO VALID 23 TO GI 275 C/B C TRIM ENABLE / AP DISC
COM 3
RELAY
NO 23 AP DISC
RELAY
(EXTERNAL)
TO TRIM ENABLE/AP DISC SW (S3)
(existing wire – no change)
Century II/III (Type 17 Automatic Trim System)
Century II/III (Deviations)
GI 275 CENTURY AP
(Pilot’s Primary ADI II III
or Pilot’s HSI (-20 unit only))
CD-34 CD-34 CD-58
P2752
LATERAL +LEFT OUT 48 B B - LAT DEV +LT
LATERAL +RIGHT OUT 10 A A - LAT DEV +RT
s
VERTICAL +UP OUT 9 - - B GS DEV +UP
VERTICAL +DOWN OUT 68 - - A GS DEV +DOWN
s
18 - K C LOC NORMAL

Sheet 3 of 7

Rev. 13 Page B-33
GI 275 CENTURY AP
(Pilot’s Primary ADI
or Pilot’s HSI) 21 31 41
CD194 CD186 CD189 CD200 CD189 CD184
P2752
PITCH DC OUT 55 - - - 22 - 36 PITCH SIG
ROLL DC OUT 34 - 11 - 24 - 42 ROLL SIG
17 - 5 - 23 - 27 ROLL REF
DC REF IN 37
s
15 15
NO 61 11 - 3 - 3 - A/P DISC SW
AP INTERLOCK
NC 22 N/C
RELAY COM 41 12 - 5 - 5 - A/P DISC GND
TRIM CMD A/P DISC SW
A/P DISC (OPT. EXIST.)
(EXIST.) IV 21 31 5 41 5
13
16 CD66 CD194 CD175 CD191 CD175 CD191 CD175 CD184
14
A/P HEADING ERROR HI 13 49 - 17 - 17 - 17 - DC HDG DATUM HI
A/P HEADING ERROR LO 52 - - - - - - - - DC HDG/CRS DATUM LO
s
A/P COURSE ERROR HI 32 48 - 2 - 2 - 2 - DC COURSE DATUM HI
A/P COURSE ERROR LO 71 - - - - - - - - COURSE DATUM LO
s
LATERAL +FLAG OUT 63 - 2 - 7 - 7 - - LAT DEV FLAG +
LATERAL -FLAG OUT 66 - 3 - 8 - 8 - - LAT DEV FLAG -
s
VERTICAL +FLAG OUT 24 - - - 2 - 2 - - GS DEV FLAG +
VERTICAL -FLAG OUT 5 - - - 1 - 1 - - GS DEV FLAG -
s
LATERAL +LEFT OUT 48 32 4 - 6 - 6 - - LAT DEV +LT
LATERAL +RIGHT OUT 10 31 5 - 5 - 5 - - LAT DEV +RT
s
VERTICAL +UP OUT 9 45 - - 4 - 4 - - GS DEV +UP
VERTICAL +DOWN OUT 68 46 - - 3 - 3 - - GS DEV +DOWN
s
ILS/GPS APPROACH
(~DISCRETE OUT 7 LO) 1 44 1 - 9 - 9 - - LOC SWITCH
7
10 VAC REF HI 27 39 - - - - - - - 5 kHz EXCITATION
10 10 VAC REF LO 46 40 - - - - - - - 5 kHz EXCITATION
s
FD ENABLE HI 18 NC
FD ROLL RIGHT 38 21 - - - - - - 40 ROLL STEERING

FD ROLL LEFT 77 8 24 - - - - - - 28 ROLL COMMON
s
3 9
17 FD PITCH UP 19 20 AWG 20 AWG 20 - - - - - - 29 PITCH STEERING
FD PITCH DOWN 58 20 AWG 20 AWG 17 - - - - - - 17 STEERING COMMON

s
6
ADI
52C77/-2/-3/-4
(optional install on copilot’s side)
( )/-2 -3/-4
CD64 CD144
2 3 4
STEERING COMMON F 12
PITCH STEERING J 11
ROLL COMMON E 28 20 AWG

ROLL STEERING H 10 20 AWG

Sheet 4 of 7

Rev. 13 Page B-34
GI 275 CENTURY AP
(Pilot’s Primary ADI
or Pilot’s HSI) 2000
CD189 CD220
(To flight
P2752 computer)
PITCH DC OUT 55 - 32 PITCH SIG

ROLL DC OUT 34 - 44 ROLL SIG
17 - 17 ROLL REF
DC REF IN 37
s
15
NO 61 3 - A/P DISC SW
AP INTERLOCK
NC 22 N/C
RELAY COM 41 TO CD221-9 11 - A/P DISC GND
15
2000
CD191 CD175 CD220
A/P HEADING ERROR HI 13 - 17 - DC HDG DATUM HI

A/P HEADING ERROR LO 52 - 20 - DC HDG/CRS DATUM LO
s
A/P COURSE ERROR HI 32 - 2 - DC COURSE DATUM HI
A/P COURSE ERROR LO 71 - - - COURSE DATUM LO
s
LATERAL +FLAG OUT 63 7 - - LAT DEV FLAG +
LATERAL -FLAG OUT 66 8 - - LAT DEV FLAG -
s
VERTICAL +FLAG OUT 24 2 - - GS DEV FLAG +
VERTICAL -FLAG OUT 5 1 - - GS DEV FLAG -
s
LATERAL +LEFT OUT 48 6 - - LAT DEV +LT

LATERAL +RIGHT OUT 10 5 - - LAT DEV +RT
s
VERTICAL +UP OUT 9 4 - - GS DEV +UP
VERTICAL +DOWN OUT 68 3 - - GS DEV +DOWN
s
ILS/GPS APPROACH
(~DISCRETE OUT 7 LO) 1 9 - - LOC SWITCH
10 VAC REF HI 27 - - - 5 kHz EXCITATION

10 10 VAC REF LO 46 - - - 5 kHz EXCITATION
s
FD ENABLE HI 18 NC
FD ROLL RIGHT 38 - - 6 ROLL STEERING

FD ROLL LEFT 77 - - 7 ROLL COMMON
s
3
17 FD PITCH UP 19 20 AWG 20 AWG - - 5 PITCH STEERING
FD PITCH DOWN 58 20 AWG 20 AWG - - 30 STEERING COMMON

s
6
ADI
52C77/-2/-3/-4
(optional install on copilot’s side)
( )/-2 -3/-4
CD64 CD144
2 3 4
STEERING COMMON F 12
PITCH STEERING J 11
ROLL COMMON E 28 20 AWG

ROLL STEERING H 10 20 AWG

Sheet 5 of 7

Rev. 13 Page B-35
NOTES
1 USE MIL-T-27 TYPE TF5S21ZZ TRANSFORMER TRIAD MAGNETICS P/N SP-66.
STANDBY INSTRUMENT FOR THE GI 275. IF THIS INDICATOR IS BEING RELOCATED TO THE
2 CO-PILOT’S SIDE, WIRING MAY BE CONNECTED IN PARALLEL TO THIS ADI. THE WIRING TO THIS ADI MUST
BE CONNECTED IN ACCORDANCE WITH THE MANUFACTURER’S INSTRUCTIONS.
IF THE 52C77/-2/-3/-4 ADI IS CONNECTED WITH THE GI 275, THE 18.0 OR 30.0 Ω RESISTOR MUST NOT BE
3 INSTALLED.
ENSURE ANY JUMPERS AT CD185 PINS 8, 9, AND 17 ARE REMOVED TO CONFIGURE COMPUTER FOR
5 NSD 360A.
USE RESISTOR P/N RE65G() OR RE65N() (PER MIL-PRF-18546) CHASSIS MOUNT POWER RESISTOR
MEETING THE FOLLOWING SPECIFICATIONS:
• 18.0 Ω FOR CENTURY IV AND 14 VDC SYSTEMS WITH CENTURY 41 AND 2000, OR
30.0 Ω FOR 28 VDC SYSTEMS USING THE CENTURY 41 OR 2000 AUTOPILOTS
6 • MINIMUM POWER RATING OF 10 WATTS
• MAXIMUM TOLERANCE OF ± 5%
LOCATE RESISTOR ON METALLIC SECONDARY STRUCTURE WITHIN INSTRUMENT PANEL AREA NEAR
GI 275.
7 DIODE INSTALLED FOR CENTURY IV SYSTEM ONLY. USE 1N4444 OR EQUIVALENT.
8 FOR CENTURY 41 SYSTEMS ONLY.
9 FOR CENTURY IV SYSTEMS ONLY.
10 THE 5 kHz SIGNAL IS ONLY REQUIRED FOR AC AUTOPILOTS.
11 SPLICE BOTH WIRES TOGETHER INTO PIN B OF CD33 TO AMP.
12 USE MIL-T-27 TYPE TF5S21ZZ TRANSFORMER TRIAD MAGNETICS P/N SP-13.
FOR CENTURY 21 AUTOPILOT: IF OPTIONAL AP DISC SWITCH IS INSTALLED, REMOVE THE EXISTING
13 CONDUCTOR FROM CD194 – 11. CONNECT CD194 – 11 TO THE GI 275 RELAY WIRING AS SHOWN.

Sheet 6 of 7

Rev. 13 Page B-36
NOTES CONTINUED
FOR CENTURY 21 AUTOPILOT: IF OPTIONAL AP DISC SWITCH IS NOT INSTALLED, REMOVE THE EXISTING
14 CONDUCTOR FROM CD194 PINS 11 AND 12. INSTALL WIRING TO THE GI 275 RELAY (WITHOUT SWITCHES)
AS SHOWN. THIS STC DOES NOT AUTHORIZE INSTALLATION OF AP DISC SWITCH.
REMOVE THE EXISTING CONDUCTOR FROM CD189-3 ON FLIGHT COMPUTER SIDE, AND CONNECT
15 CD189-3 TO THE GI 275 RELAY AS SHOWN.
16 USED FOR CENTURY 31, 41, AND 2000 INSTALLATIONS ONLY.
18 RETAIN EXISTING WIRE FROM CD-34 PIN K TO CD-58 PIN C.
19 RELOCATE EXISTING WIRE FROM CD-20 PIN 1 TO NEW AP DISC RELAY AS SHOWN.
RELOCATE EXISTING WIRE FROM CD-76 PIN B TO NEW AP DISC RELAY AS SHOWN. EXTEND EXISTING
20 WIRE IF NECESSARY.
INSTALL EXTERNAL AP DISCONNECT RELAY INTO AP DISCONNECT CIRCUIT AS SHOWN. EXTERNAL AP

21 DISC RELAY CONTACTS MUST SUPPORT THE MAXIMUM CURRENT THROUGH THE AP DISCONNECT
WIRING.
ALL WIRES FROM RELAY TO AP DISC INPUT MUST BE OF THE SIZE SPECIFIED IN THE AUTOPILOT
22 INSTALLATION MANUAL TO SUPPORT THE CURRENT LOAD FROM THE DISCONNECT CIRCUIT.
AP DISC RELAY MUST BE CONNECTED TO THE CIRCUIT BREAKER FOR THE GI 275 THAT IS PROVIDING
23 ATTITUDE TO THE AUTOPILOT.
24 USE 10.0 KOHM, ½ W RESISTOR SUCH AS P/N RN65E1002FB14.
25 USE 2.2 KOHM, ½ W RESISTOR SUCH AS P/N RN65E2201FB14.
26 FOR NEW INSTALLATIONS, USE INDUCTOR P/N 5800-183-RC AND CAPACITOR P/N M39014/05-2273.
27 USE CD-18 THAT WAS DIRECTLY CONNECTED TO THE HORIZON INDICATOR BEING REPLACED.

Sheet 7 of 7

Rev. 13 Page B-37
GI 275 CESSNA
(Pilot s Primary ADI 300/400/800 AUTOPILOT
or Pilot s HSI) IFCS
S530A CA530FD 2
P2752 J3/P18 J1/P5
LATERAL +LEFT OUT 48 T - NAV 1 +L
LATERAL +RIGHT OUT 10 U - NAV 1 +R
s
Z - NAV 2 +L
LATERAL +FLAG OUT 63 N/C a - NAV 2 +R
LATERAL -FLAG OUT 66 N/C
VERTICAL +UP OUT 9 N - NAV 1 GS +UP

VERTICAL +DN OUT 68 P - NAV 1 GS +DN
s
d - NAV 2 GS +UP
VERTICAL +FLAG OUT 24 N/C f - NAV 2 GS +DN
VERTICAL -FLAG OUT 5 N/C
AUTOPILOT 28VDC R - NAV 1 VOR/LOC RY
X - NAV 2 VOR/LOC RY
ILS/GPS APPROACH
(~DISCRETE OUT 7 LO) 1 S - NAV 1 VOR/LOC RY RTN*
Y - NAV 2 VOR/LOC RY RTN*
10 VAC REF HI 27 - E 10 VAC 400 HZ

10 VAC REF LO 46 - F 10 VAC 400 HZ RETURN
s
A/P HEADING ERROR HI 13 E - HDG ERROR 1 HI

1
A/P HEADING ERROR LO 52 C - HDG ERROR 1 LO
s
A/P COURSE ERROR HI 32 V - NAV 1 CRS DATUM HI
A/P COURSE ERROR LO 71 k - NAV 1 CRS DATUM LO
s
b - NAV 2 CRS DATUM HI
3
T1 m - NAV 2 CRS DATUM LO
10k:10k
Figure B-14 Autopilot/Flight Director Interconnect - Cessna

Sheet 1 of 5

Rev. 13 Page B-38
GI 275 MODE CONTROLER
(Pilot s Primary ADI 300B/400B/800B IFCS 400B
or Pilot s HSI)
S-550A CA550A/FD CA550A/FD 2
P2752 J1 J2 J3 J1 J2 J1/P4 J2/P5
LATERAL +LEFT OUT 48 - - 5 - - - 5 VOR/LOC SIGNAL (+LT)
LATERAL +RIGHT OUT 10 - - 22 - - - 2 VOR/LOC SIGNAL (+RT)
s
- - 16 - - - - NAV #2 VOR/LOC (+LT)

LATERAL +FLAG OUT 63 N/C
- - 4 - - - - NAV #2 VOR/LOC (+RT)
LATERAL -FLAG OUT 66 N/C
VERTICAL +UP OUT 9 - - 1 - - 18 - G/S SIGNAL (+UP)

VERTICAL +DN OUT 68 - - 6 - - 17 - G/S SIGNAL (+DN)
s
- - 15 - - - - NAV #2 G/S SIG (+UP)
VERTICAL +FLAG OUT 24 N/C - - 14 - - - - NAV #2 G/S SIG (+DN)
VERTICAL -FLAG OUT 5 N/C
A/P HEADING ERROR HI 13 12 - - - - 24 - DC HDG GYRO IN

A/P HEADING ERROR LO 52 13 - - - - - - #2 DC HDG GYRO IN
s
A/P COURSE ERROR HI 32 - - 21 - - - 17 DC COURSE DATUM IN

A/P COURSE ERROR LO 71 - - 24 - - - - #2 DC COURSE SIG IN
s
- - - 15 - 15 - AC COURSE DATUM
6 - - - - 20 - 20 AC HDG GYRO IN
ILS/GPS APPROACH
(~DISCRETE OUT 7 LO) 1 - - - - - - 9 VOR/LOC RELAY RTN*
- 10 - - - - - NAV #1 LOC GND
- 19 - - - - - NAV #2 LOC GND 7
5
FD ENABLE HI 18 19 - - - - - - FD COMPUTER ON
FD ROLL RIGHT 38 - 11 - - - - - ADI ROLL BAR

13
FD ROLL LEFT 77 - 1 - - - - - SIGNAL COM/ROLL +LT
s
FD PITCH UP 19 - 22 - - - - - ADI PITCH BAR

FD PITCH DOWN 58 - 1 - - - - - ADI PITCH + DN
s
4
ADI
(on copilot s side) CESSNA
G-1050A G-550A
P1 J1
CMD BAR N VIEW 24 8
CMD BAR +RT 26 9

CMD BAR +LT/REFERENCE 27 26
CMD BAR +UP 28 10

CMD BAR +DN 29 -
GI 275 CESSNA
300B/400B/800B IFCS 400B AF AUTOPILOT
8
S-550A CA550A/FD CA550A/FD C-530A
J1 J2 J3 J1 J2 J1/P4 J2/P5 J1 J2
P2752 ATTITUDE
TEST SWITCH
PITCH AC OUT HI 6
NC C
PITCH AC OUT LO 64 - - - - 15 - - L - PITCH IN
s
NO
- - - 7 - 7 - - - PITCH/ROLL TEST
ROLL AC OUT HI 26 - - - - 4 - 4 - - ROLL IN

ROLL AC OUT LO 45
s
10 VAC REF HI 27 - - - 33 - 33 - - - 400 HZ REF

10 VAC REF LO 46 - - - 19 - 19 - - - 400 HZ RETURN
s
13
NO 23 - 3 - - - - - - A A/P DISABLE IN
GYRO
VALID RELAY
COM 3 9
10 N/C - - - - 32 - 32 - - 400 Hz EXT OSC

Sheet 2 of 5

Rev. 13 Page B-39
GI 275 1000 IFCS
(Pilot s Primary ADI CA-1050A 2
or Pilot s HSI)
P2752 PK41 PK42 PK43 PK44
LATERAL +LEFT OUT 48 - - - 5 NAV 1 +L
LATERAL +RIGHT OUT 10 - - - 3 NAV 1 +R
s
- - - 4 NAV 2 +L
- - - 2 NAV 2 +R
VERTICAL +UP OUT 9 - - - 24 NAV 1 G/S +UP

VERTICAL +DN OUT 68 - - - 23 NAV 1 G/S +DN
s
- - - 22 NAV 2 G/S +UP
- - - 21 NAV 2 G/S +DN
VERTICAL SUPERFLAG 44 16 - - - G/S 1 SUPERFLAG

18 - - - G/S 2 SUPERFLAG
LATERAL SUPERFLAG 25 12 - - - NAV 1 SUPERFLAG
14 - - - NAV 2 SUPERFLAG
ILS/GPS APPROACH
(~DISCRETE OUT 7 LO) 1 4 - - - NAV 1 VOR/LOC RY RTN*
3 - - - NAV 2 VOR/LOC RY RTN*
A/P HEADING ERROR HI 13 - - 28 - HDG ERROR 1 HI DC
A/P HEADING ERROR LO 52
s
- - 30 - HDG ERROR 2 HI DC
A/P COURSE ERROR HI 32 - - 27 - NAV 1 CRS DATUM HI DC

A/P COURSE ERROR LO 71
s
- - 29 - NAV 2 CRS DATUM HI DC
LATERAL -FLAG OUT 66 N/C - - 2 - HDG ERROR 1 HI AC
- - 23 - HDG ERROR 2 HI AC
VERTICAL +FLAG OUT 24 N/C - - 1 - NAV 1 CRS DATUM HI AC
VERTICAL -FLAG OUT 5 N/C - - 24 - NAV 2 CRS DATUM HI AC
5
FD ENABLE HI 18 - 37 - - FD COMPUTER ON
FD ROLL RIGHT 38
FD ROLL LEFT 77 - - 22 - SIGNAL COM/ROLL +LT
13 s
FD PITCH UP 19 - - 33 - ADI PITCH BAR

FD PITCH DOWN 58
s
ADI
4 (on copilot s side)
CESSNA
G-1050A G-550A
P1 J1
CMD BAR N VIEW 24 8
CMD BAR +RT 26 9

CMD BAR+LT/REFERENCE 27 26
CMD BAR +UP 28 10

CMD BAR +DN 29 -

Sheet 3 of 5

Rev. 13 Page B-40
GI 275 1000 IFCS
(Pilot s Primary ADI only) -0001 -0002, -0102 -0004 -0005, -0105
CA-1050A C-1050A AC-1050A CA-1050A C-1050A AC-1050A CA-1050A C-1050A AC-1050A CA-1050A C -1050A AC-1050A
13 Com puter Control Unit Air Data Com puter Control Unit Air Data Com puter Control Unit Air Data Com puter Control Unit Air Data
PK42 PK43 PK44 PK40 PK39 PK42 PK43 PK44 PK40 PK39 PK42 PK43 PK44 PK40 PK39 PK42 PK43 PK44 PK40 PK39
P2752
PITCH AC OUT HI 6 - 16 - - - - - - 11 - - 16 - - - - - - 11 - PITCH IN
PITCH AC OUT LO 64 - GND - - - - - - GND - - GND - - - - - - GND -
s
- 3 - 13 - - 16 - 12 - - 3 - 13 - - 16 - 12 - PITCH/ROLL TEST**
ROLL AC OUT HI 26 - - - 11 - - 3 - - - - - - 11 - - 3 - - - ROLL IN

ROLL AC OUT LO 45 - - - GND - - GND - - - - - - GND - - GND - - -
s
26 VAC REF HI 65 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 23 - - - - 23 26 V, 400 Hz

26 VAC REF LO 7 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 25 - - - - 25 26 V, 400 Hz RTN
s
12
10 VAC REF HI 27 - - - - 24 - - - - 24 - - - - - - - - - - 10 V, 400 Hz

10 VAC REF LO 46 - - - - 25 - - - - 25 - - - - - - - - - - 10 V, 400 Hz RTN
s
11
GYRO VALID NO 23 22 AW G 18 - - - - 18 - - - - 18 - - - - 18 - - - - ENGAGE INTLK
RELAY COM 3 22 AW G - - 37 - - - - 37 - - - - 37 - - - - 37 - - GYRO VALID
ACTUATOR
INTERLOCK
CIRCUIT

Sheet 4 of 5

Rev. 13 Page B-41
NOTES
TUNE RESISTANCE POTS ON HEADING ERROR HI AND COURSE ERROR HI TO END OF TRAVEL IN ORDER
1 NOT TO AFFECT THE HEADING AND COURSE ERROR SIGNALS.
THE NAV1/NAV2 LIGHTED SWITCH LEGEND MUST BE OBSCURED SUCH THAT ANY NAV SOURCE
2 INDICATION ON THE AUTOPILOT MODE CONTROLLER IS HIDDEN FROM VIEW.
3 INSTALL TRANSFORMER P/N TY-141P OR EQUIVALENT.
STANDBY INSTRUMENT FOR THE GI 275. THIS INDICATOR MUST BE LOCATED IN ACCORDANCE WITH
4 SECTION 3.2. IF THIS INDICATOR IS BEING RELOCATED TO THE CO-PILOT’S SIDE, WIRING MAY BE
CONNECTED IN PARALLEL TO THIS ADI AND MUST BE CONNECTED IN ACCORDANCE WITH THE
MANUFACTURER’S INSTRUCTIONS.
5 MAINTAIN EXISTING CONNECTION BETWEEN AUTOPILOT COMPUTER AND MODE SELECTOR.
6 JUMPER IS REQUIRED FOR DC HEADING/COURSE ERROR SIGNALS.
THE ILS/GPS APPROACH DISCRETE OUTPUT MUST ALSO BE CONNECTED TO THE BACK COURSE RELAY –
7 REFER TO MANUFACTURER’S DOCUMENTATION FOR ADDITIONAL DETAILS.
ATTITUDE TEST SWITCH NOT USED IN ALL INSTALLATIONS. FOR INSTALLATIONS THAT USE AN
8 ACCELERATION SENSOR TEST SWITCH CIRCUIT, THE GI 275 “PITCH AC OUT HI” PIN (P2752-6) MUST BE
DIRECTLY CONNECTED TO THE DEPICTED “PITCH INPUT” PIN ON THE AUTOPILOT.
REMOVE EXISTING WIRING FROM THE “A/P DISABLE IN” PIN AND CONNECT THIS REMOVED WIRING TO
9 THE GI 275 “GYRO VALID COMMON” PIN (P2752-3).
PIN 32 MUST BE UNCONNECTED FOR ALL INSTALLATIONS. IF A G-895A INDICATOR WAS PREVIOUSLY
10 INSTALLED, VERIFY THAT WIRING ON PIN 32 IS REMOVED.
GI 275 GYRO VALID RELAY BECOMES PART OF EXISTING INTERLOCK CIRCUIT AS DEPICTED. SPLICE INTO
EXISTING ACTUATOR INTERLOCK WIRING AS DEPICTED. GI 275 GYRO VALID RELAY IS REQUIRED FOR ALL
11 INSTALLATIONS, EVEN IF PREVIOUS GYRO DID NOT UTILIZE GYRO VALID CIRCUIT (I.E., G-519/550). REFER
TO AIRCRAFT WIRING DIAGRAMS TO ENSURE THAT ACTUATOR INTERLOCK CIRCUIT IS PROPERLY
RETAINED.
12 MAINTAIN EXISTING CONNECTION BETWEEN AUTOPILOT COMPUTER AND AIRCRAFT WIRING.

Sheet 5 of 5

Rev. 13 Page B-42
AUTOPILOT
AP-106/107 COMPUTER
GI 275
(Pilot s Primary ADI 161H-1 913K-1/1A
or Pilot s HSI) P2752
J1 J1 J2
s
VERTICAL +UP OUT 9 7 - - GS DEV +UP

VERTICAL +DN OUT 68 11 - - GS DEV +DN
s
LATERAL +FLAG OUT 63 30 - 23 NAV LL FLAG +
5
LATERAL -FLAG OUT 66 34 - 20 NAV LL FLAG -
s
VERTICAL +FLAG OUT 24 - 1 - GS HL FLAG +
VERTICAL -FLAG OUT 5 - 2 - GS HL FLAG -
s
A/P HEADING ERROR HI 13 - 24 - HDG ERROR HI

A/P HEADING ERROR LO 52 - 25 - HDG ERROR LO
s
A/P COURSE ERROR HI 32 37 22 - CRS DATUM HI
A/P COURSE ERROR LO 71 41 21 - CRS DATUM LO
s
ILS/GPS APPROACH
(~DISCRETE OUT 7 LO) 1 2 27 - LOC FREQ GND 6
- - - 26 VAC 400 HZ REF I

26 VAC REF HI 65 - 29 - 26 VAC 400 HZ REF II
26 VAC REF LO 7 - 26 - 26 VAC IN LO
s
AIRCRAFT 26 VAC 400 HZ AC
7 REFERENCE VOLTAGE
3 4
+28 VDC
8 FD ENABLE HI 18
N/C
P/N 1N4007 OR
EQUIVALENT
- - 33 OUT OF VIEW+
OUT OF VIEW+
RELAY
FD ROLL RIGHT 38 - - 28 ROLL STEER +RT

FD ROLL LEFT 77 28 - - SIG COM (K-1)
8 s
FD PITCH DOWN 58 52 20 - SIG COM (K-1)
FD PITCH UP 19 - 8 - PITCH STEER +DN
s
ADI
(on copilot s side) COLLINS
FD-112 C/V
1 2
P2
(OPTIONAL)
OFF MODE + Z
ROLL CMD +RIGHT U

ROLL CMD +LEFT T
PITCH CMD +UP F

PITCH CMD +DOWN k
Figure B-15 Autopilot/Flight Director Interconnect - Collins

Sheet 1 of 2

Rev. 13 Page B-43
NOTES
STANDBY INSTRUMENT FOR THE GI 275. THIS ADI MUST BE LOCATED IN ACCORDANCE WITH SECTION 3.2.
2 IF THIS INDICATOR IS BEING RELOCATED TO THE CO-PILOT’S SIDE, WIRING MAY BE CONNECTED IN
PARALLEL TO THIS ADI AND MUST BE CONNECTED IN ACCORDANCE WITH THE MANUFACTURER’S
INSTRUCTIONS.
IT IS NECESSARY TO INSTALL A RELAY TO INVERT THE POLARITY OF THE “OUT OF VIEW+” SIGNAL FROM
3 ACTIVE-LOW TO ACTIVE-HIGH FOR INPUT INTO THE GI 275. USE M39016/6-204M OR 207M OR EQUIVALENT.
RELAY COIL MUST NOT DRAW MORE THAN 50 mA.
IF THE OPTIONAL CO-PILOT’S ADI IS INSTALLED, THE “OFF MODE+” SIGNAL MUST BE DISCONNECTED
4 FROM THE AUTOPILOT (J2-33) AND ISOLATED USING A RELAY AS SHOWN.
5 CONNECT LATERAL + FLAGS FROM 161H-1 TO 913K-1A FOR 913K-1A SYSTEMS ONLY.
REFER TO STRAPPING INFORMATION IN INSTALLATION BOOK 523-0764806, PAGE 4 (REVISED 27 JUNE 1984
- 913K-1/1A STRAPPING OPTIONS) AND PAGE 11 (REVISED 1 MARCH 1977 - 161H-1 STRAPPING OPTIONS).
6 STRAP FOR NEGATIVE-LOGIC LOCALIZER FREQUENCY SIGNAL INPUT. ALTERNATIVELY, CONNECT A
RELAY TO INVERT THE SIGNAL FROM THE GI 275 FOR ACTIVE-HIGH OUTPUT.
26 VAC 400Hz REFERENCE POWER FOR THE GI 275 AND AUTOPILOT MUST BE FROM THE SAME SOURCE
7 AND IN PHASE.
Figure B-15 Autopilot/Flight Director Interconnect - Collins

Sheet 2 of 2

Rev. 13 Page B-44
GI 275 P2751 P6051 GMC 605
IN A 65 46 OUT A
1 IN B 66 47 OUT B
~HSDB 1 44 HSDB 1
OUT A 46 IN A
OUT B 47 45 IN B
s s
NOTES
1 ANY AVAILABLE ETHERNET PORT MAY BE USED.
THE GMC 605 CAN BE INTERFACED TO A GI 275 ADAHRS UNIT; IT DOES NOT REQUIRE A GI 275
2 ADAHRS+AP UNIT.
IF THE GMC 605 IS NOT INSTALLED WITHIN THE FIELD-OF-VIEW REQUIREMENTS, THE GI 285 MUST BE
3 USED FOR AUTOPILOT MODE ANNUNCIATIONS. REFER TO GI 285 INSTALL MANUAL (P/N 190-00303-98).
IF THE GI 275 IS INSTALLED WITH AND INTERFACED TO A GFC 600, THEN A THIRD PARTY HSI CANNOT
4 PROVIDE THE HEADING AND COURSE ERROR DATA TO THE GFC 600.
Figure B-16 Autopilot/Flight Director Interconnect - Garmin GFC 600

Rev. 13 Page B-45
3
GI 275 AUTOPILOT
(Pilot s Primary ADI KAP 100 KAP 150 / KFC 150
or Pilot s HSI) P2752 KAS
KC 190 KC 191/192 KC 296
297B
LATERAL -FLAG OUT 66 N/C P1901 P1902 P19X1 P19X2 P2961 P2962 P297B1
LATERAL +LEFT OUT 48 U - U - - - - LAT DEV +LT

LATERAL +RIGHT OUT 10 17 - 17 - - - - LAT DEV +RT
s
VERTICAL +UP OUT 9 - - - V - - - GS DEV +UP
VERTICAL +DN OUT 68 - - - 19 - - - GS DEV +DOWN
s
A/P HEADING ERROR HI 13 X - X - - - - HDG DATUM HI
A/P HEADING ERROR LO 52 20 - 20 - - - - HDG DATUM LO
s
A/P COURSE ERROR HI 32 W - W - - - - CRS DATUM HI
A/P COURSE ERROR LO 71 19 - 19 - - - - CRS DATUM LO
s
VERTICAL +FLAG OUT 24 - - - 21 - - - GS DEV FLAG +
VERTICAL -FLAG OUT 5 - - - Y - - - GS DEV FLAG -
s
GPS SELECT
(~DISCRETE OUT 8 LO) 40 - - - - - - - GPS SELECT (GND=GPS)
ILS/GPS APPROACH
(~DISCRETE OUT 7 LO) 1 B - B - - - - ILS ENERGIZE (A/P IN)
HDG/CRS DATUM VALID
(~DISCRETE OUT 4 LO) 72 1 - 1 - - - - COMPASS VALID
PITCH AC OUT HI 6 Y - Y - - - - PITCH ATTITUDE HI

PITCH AC OUT LO 64
s
ROLL AC OUT HI 26 21 - 21 - - - - ROLL ATTITUDE HI
20 ROLL AC OUT LO 45
s
10VAC REF IN HI 27 - C - C - - - VG EXCITATION
10VAC REF IN LO 46 Z - Z - - - - VG REF
s - 1 - 1 - - - PWR REF
6
20 TO A/P DISC RELAY

(EXISTING) 5 TO A/P (TRIM)
AUTOPILOT WARNING
C/B SONALERT
AP DISC
NO NC NO NC
RELAY
(EXTERNAL)
A/P DISC SW C C DISENG
(EXISTING)
9 - B - B - - - AP DISC
12 ENG
NO 23
GYRO VALID 8
NC 42 N/C 18 TO GI 275 C/B
RELAY
COM 3
OR
20 TO TO A/P (TRIM)
AUTOPILOT WARNING 5
C/B A/P DISC / SONALERT
TRIM INTR DISENG
(EXISTING)
9 - B - B - - - AP DISC
12 ENG
NO 23
GYRO VALID 8
NC 42 N/C
RELAY 18 TO GI 275 C/B
COM 3 AP DISC
RELAY
(EXTERNAL)
20 YAW RATE HI 15 - - - - 2 - - YAW RATE (HIGH)

YAW RATE LO 73 - - - - C - - YAW RATE (LOW)
s REPLACES KRG 331
- - - - - 7 - YAW ANNUNCIATE
10 - - 15 - - - - YD ANNUNCIATE
20 11 N/C - - - - - - 4 BARO EXCITATION

REPLACES KEA 130A 13
BARO CORRECTION HI 35 - - - - - - 7 BARO SET (IN)
BARO CORRECTION LO 54 - - - - - - 3 BARO/XPDR REF
s
FD ENABLE HI 18 - - 16 - - - - CMD BAR RETRACT
FD ROLL RIGHT 38 - - C - - - - ROLL CMD BAR OUT

20 FD ROLL LEFT 77
s
FD PITCH UP 19 - - E - - - - PITCH CMD BAR OUT
FD PITCH DOWN 58 - - - A - - - CMD BAR REF
s
FLIGHT DIRECTOR FOR KFC 150 ONLY

KI 256 ADI
(copilot s side) KI 256
1 2 P2561
CMD BAR RETRACT P

ROLL CMD BAR IN M
PITCH CMD BAR IN L

CMD BAR REF N
Figure B-17 Autopilot/Flight Director Interconnect - Honeywell (Bendix/King)

Sheet 1 of 10

Rev. 13 Page B-46
GI 275 AUTOPILOT
(Pilot’s Primary ADI KAP 140
or Pilot’s HSI)
KC 140
P2752 P1401 P1402
LATERAL +LEFT OUT 48 24 - LAT DEV +LT

LATERAL +RIGHT OUT 10 25 - LAT DEV +RT
s
VERTICAL +UP OUT 9 - 9 GS DEV +UP
VERTICAL +DN OUT 68 - 10 GS DEV +DOWN
s
A/P HEADING ERROR HI 13 2 - HDG DATUM HI
A/P HEADING ERROR LO 52 27 - CRS/HDG DATUM LO
s
A/P COURSE ERROR HI 32 - 17 CRS DATUM HI
A/P COURSE ERROR LO 71
s
LATERAL +FLAG OUT 63 22 - LAT DEV FLAG +
LATERAL -FLAG OUT 66 23 - LAT DEV FLAG -
s
VERTICAL +FLAG OUT 24 - 31 GS DEV FLAG +
VERTICAL -FLAG OUT 5 - 12 GS DEV FLAG -
s
GPS SELECT
(~DISCRETE OUT 8 LO) 40 - 26 GPS SELECT (GND=GPS)
ILS/GPS APPROACH
(~DISCRETE OUT 7 LO) 1 7 - ILS ENERGIZE (A/P IN)
HDG/CRS DATUM VALID

(~DISCRETE OUT 4 LO) 72 11 - COMPASS VALID
11 20 REPLACES KEA 130A 13 N/C - 37 BARO EXCITATION

BARO CORRECTION HI 35 - 16 BARO SET (IN)
BARO CORRECTION LO 54 - 35 BARO/XPDR REF
s

Sheet 2 of 10

Rev. 13 Page B-47
GI 275 Bendix King
(Pilot s Primary ADI Autopilot
or Pilot s HSI) KAP 200 KFC 200 KFC 225
KC 295 KC290 KC 290 KC 295 KC 296 KC 225
P2751 P2951 P2952 P2902 P2901 P2902 P2951 P2952 P2961 P2251 P2252
A 16 - - - - - - - - 46 - A
~ARINC 429 OUT 1 ARINC 429 IN (GPS)
B 55 - - - - - - - - 47 - B
s
P2752
LATERAL +LEFT OUT 48 - C - - - - C - 25 - LAT DEV +LT
LATERAL +RIGHT OUT 10 - A - - - - A - 26 - LAT DEV +RT
s
VERTICAL +UP OUT 9 M - - - - M - - - 12 GS DEV +UP

VERTICAL +DN OUT 68 K - - - - K - - - 52 GS DEV +DOWN
s
A/P HEADING ERROR HI 13 - H - - - - H - 2 - HDG DATUM HI
s
A/P COURSE ERROR HI 32 - W - - - - W - - 16 CRS DATUM HI

A/P COURSE ERROR LO 71 - M - - - - M - 28 - CRS/HDG DATUM LO
s
LATERAL +FLAG OUT 63 - - - - - - - - 23 - LAT DEV FLAG +
LATERAL -FLAG OUT 66 - - - - - - - - 24 - LAT DEV FLAG -
s
VERTICAL +FLAG OUT 24 C - - - - C - - - 14 GS DEV FLAG +
VERTICAL -FLAG OUT 5 D - - - - D - - - 15 GS DEV FLAG -
s
GPS SELECT
(~DISCRETE OUT 8 LO) 40 - - - - - - - - - 34 GPS SELECT (GND=GPS)
ILS/GPS APPROACH
(~DISCRETE OUT 7 LO) 1 AA - - - - AA - - 7 - ILS ENERGIZE (A/P IN)
HDG/CRS DATUM VALID
(~DISCRETE OUT 4 LO) 72 c - - - - c - - 11 - COMPASS VALID
PITCH AC OUT HI 6 - y
_ - - - - _y - 50 - PITCH ATTITUDE HI
PITCH AC OUT LO 64 - - - - - - - - 52 - PITCH/ROLL ATTD LO
s
ROLL AC OUT HI 26 - CC - - - - CC - 51 - ROLL ATTITUDE HI
20 ROLL AC OUT LO 45
s
10VAC REF HI 27 - w - - - - w - 38 - VG EXCITATION
10VAC REF LO 46 - s - - - - s - 39 - VG REF
s
A/P DISC /
TO A/P C/B TRIM ARM
(EXISTING)
NC A/P DISC RELAY
C (EXISTING)
NO
12 NO
C
DISENG NC
NO
C
20 9 TO GI 275 ENG
NC
- - D - D - - - - - AP DISC
18 C/B
NO 23 8
GYRO VALID
RELAY NC 42 N/C
AP DISC TO OPTIONAL
COM 3 RELAY YAW AXIS
(EXTERNAL)
TO A/P TO
SERVOS C/B SERVOS
A/P DISC /TRIM 12

INTER SW DISENG
(EXISTING)
8
20 9 - - - - - - - - 9 - AP DISC
TO GI 275 ENG
18 C/B
GYRO VALID NO 23
RELAY NC 42 N/C AP DISC
COM 3 RELAY
(EXTERNAL)
20
REPLACES KRG 331
YAW RATE HI 15 - - - - - - - 2 - - YAW RATE (HIGH)
YAW RATE LO 73 - - - - - - - C - - YAW RATE (LOW)
s
20 11
REPLACES KEA 130A 13 N/C - - - - - - - - - 36 BARO EXCITATION
BARO CORR. HI 35 - - - - - - - - - 35 BARO SET (IN)
BARO CORR. LO 54 - - - - - - - - - 29 BARO/XPDR REF
s
FD ENABLE HI 18 - - - - - - p - - 48 CMD BAR RETRACT
FD ROLL RIGHT 38 - - - - - - EE - - 49 ROLL CMD BAR OUT

FD ROLL LEFT 77
20 s
FD PITCH UP 19 - - - - - - BB - - 50 PITCH CMD BAR OUT
FD PITCH DOWN 58 - - - - - F - - - 51 CMD BAR REF
s
21
KI 256 ADI
(copilot s side) KI 256
1 2 P2561
CMD BAR RETRACT P

ROLL CMD BAR IN M
PITCH CMD BAR IN L

CMD BAR REF N

Sheet 3 of 10

Rev. 13 Page B-48
GI 275 BENDIX KING
(Pilot’s Primary ADI KFC 250 (3" INSTRUMENTS) AUTOPILOT
or Pilot’s HSI) KCP 299
w/ 065-5016-XX KA141 KC290
Adapter Card
P2752 P2991 P2992 P141 J2901
LATERAL +LEFT OUT 48 - C - - LAT DEV +LT
LATERAL +RIGHT OUT 10 - A - - LAT DEV +RT
s
VERTICAL +UP OUT 9 M - - - GS DEV +UP
VERTICAL +DN OUT 68 K - - - GS DEV +DOWN
s
A/P HEADING ERROR HI 13 - H - - HDG DATUM HI

A/P HEADING ERROR LO 52 - M - - HDG DATUM LO
s
A/P COURSE ERROR HI 32 - W - - CRS DATUM HI
KFC 250 (3" Instruments) – Basic
A/P COURSE ERROR LO 71 - S - - CRS DATUM LO

s
LATERAL +FLAG OUT 63 NC
(cont’d on following page)
LATERAL -FLAG OUT 66 NC
VERTICAL +FLAG OUT 24 C - - - GS DEV FLAG +

VERTICAL -FLAG OUT 5 D - - - GS DEV FLAG -
s
ILS/GPS APPROACH
(~DISCRETE OUT 7 LO) 1 AA - - - ILS ENERGIZE (A/P IN)
HDG/CRS DATUM VALID
(~DISCRETE OUT 4 LO) 72 c - - - COMPASS VALID
FD ENABLE IN HI 18 - p
_ - CMD BAR RETRACT
FD ROLL RIGHT 38 - EE - - ROLL CMD BAR OUT

20 FD ROLL LEFT 77
s
FD PITCH UP 19 - BB - - PITCH CMD BAR OUT
FD PITCH DOWN 58 F - 3 A CMD BAR REF
s 17
ADI
(copilot’s side)
KI 256
1 2
P2561
CMD BAR RETRACT P
ROLL CMD BAR IN M
PITCH CMD BAR IN L
CMD BAR REF N

Sheet 4 of 10

Rev. 13 Page B-49
GI 275 KFC 250
(Pilot s Primary ADI only) W/ KA 141 W/O KA 141 (3" INSTRUMENTS)
KCP 299 KCP 299
20 W/ 065-5016-XX KA 141 W/ 065-5016-XX
ADAPTER CARD ADAPTER CARD
P2752 P2991 P2992 P141 P2991 P2992

PITCH AC OUT HI 6 - - - - y
_ PITCH ATTITUDE HI
PITCH AC OUT LO 64 - - - - s GYRO COMMON
W/O KA 141
s
ROLL AC OUT HI 26 - - - - CC ROLL ATTITUDE HI

ROLL AC OUT LO 45 - - - - HH GRYO COMMON
s
10VAC REF HI 27 - - - - w VG EXCITATION
10VAC REF LO 46 - - - F - VG (PWR) REF
s
PITCH AC OUT HI 6 - - 12 - - PITCH ATTITUDE HI
PITCH AC OUT LO 64 - - N - - PITCH/ROLL ATTD LO
s NC - y
_ 13 - - PITCH GRYO (H) RTN
KFC 250 (3" Instruments) – Attitude
W/ KA 141
NC - HH P - - PITCH/ROLL REF
ROLL AC OUT HI 26 - - 10 - - ROLL ATTITUDE HI
(cont d from previous page)
ROLL AC OUT LO 45 NC - CC 11 - - ROLL GYRO(H) RTN

s
10VAC REF HI 27 - w F - - VG EXCITATION
10VAC REF LO 46 F - - - - VG (PWR) REF
s
YAW RATE HI 15
REPLACES KRG 331 - X - - X YAW RATE (HIGH)
YAW RATE LO 73 - Z - - Z YAW RATE (LOW)
s
KA 136
P1362 TRIM ADAPTER
6 EMERG AP/YD DISC
A/P DISC COPILOT

TO AUTOPILOT C/B
SWITCH(ES)
(EXISTING)
PILOT
18 12 8
DISENG
TO GI 275 C/B
ENG
9
GYRO VALID NO 23
RELAY COM 3 AP DISC
RELAY
(EXTERNAL)

Sheet 5 of 10

Rev. 13 Page B-50
4" ADI Replacement – Basic
GI 275 BENDIX KING
(cont d on Attitude page)
(Pilot s Primary ADI KFC 250 (4" INSTRUMENTS) KFC 300 AUTOPILOT
or Pilot s HSI) KCP 299
w/ 065-5015-XX KA141 KC290 KCP 320
Adapter Card
P2752 P2991 P2992 P141 J2901 J1 J2TP J2BP
LATERAL +LEFT OUT 48 - C - - 2 - - LAT DEV +LT
LATERAL +RIGHT OUT 10 - A - - 1 - - LAT DEV +RT
s
VERTICAL +UP OUT 9 M - - - 3 - - GS DEV +UP
VERTICAL +DN OUT 68 K - - - 4 - - GS DEV +DOWN
s
A/P HEADING ERROR HI 13 - H - - 12 - - HDG DATUM HI

A/P HEADING ERROR LO 52 - M - - 13 - - HDG DATUM LO
s
A/P COURSE ERROR HI 32 - W - - 14 - - CRS DATUM HI
A/P COURSE ERROR LO 71 - S - - 15 - - CRS DATUM LO
s
LATERAL +FLAG OUT 63 - - - - - 30 - LAT DEV FLAG +
LATERAL -FLAG OUT 66 - - - - - 31 - LAT DEV FLAG -
s
VERTICAL +FLAG OUT 24 C - - - - 24 - GS DEV FLAG +
VERTICAL -FLAG OUT 5 D - - - - 25 - GS DEV FLAG -
s
ILS/GPS APPROACH
(~DISCRETE OUT 7 LO) 1 AA - - - - 29 - ILS ENERGIZE (A/P IN)
HDG/CRS DATUM VALID 72 c - - - - - - COMPASS VALID
(~DISCRETE OUT 4 LO)
TO GI 275 CIRCUIT
BREAKER 18
- - - - 17 - - COURSE DATUM COS-
- - - - 16 - - COURSE DATUM COS+
2 M,
¼ WATT
H - - - 19 - - 26 VAC 400 HZ REF HI

26 VAC 400 REF - - - - - - 5 26 VAC 400 HZ REF LO
A/P BACKCOURSE (SEE ATTITUDE PAGE)
(~DISCRETE OUT 5 LO) 14
BACKCOURSE
RELAY
TO
NC NC KAC 325 TP-43
4 AND
KDC 380 J1-R
TO GI 275 - - - - - 40 - PRE-FLT TEST SWITCH
C/B NO NO
AP TEST
18
ONLY REQUIRED
WHEN KCI 310 IS NOT
CONNECTED
TO AUTOPILOT
CIRCUIT BREAKER
14 15 16
FUSE, 5A
OR LESS
100 K , ¼ WATT
FD ENABLE IN HI 18 - p
_ - 9 - - CMD BAR RETRACT
FD ROLL RIGHT 38 - EE - - 30 - - ROLL CMD BAR OUT

20 FD ROLL LEFT 77
s
FD PITCH UP 19 - BB - - 29 - - PITCH CMD BAR OUT
FD PITCH DOWN 58 F - 3 A - - 10 CMD BAR REF
s 17
ADI
(copilot s side)
KCI 310
1 2
P1
CMD BAR RETRACT R
ROLL CMD BAR IN T
PITCH CMD BAR IN P
CMD BAR REF W

Sheet 6 of 10

Rev. 13 Page B-51
GI 275 KFC 250
(Pilot s Primary ADI only) W/ KA 141 W/O KA 141 (4" INSTRUMENTS)
20 KCP 299 KCP 299

W/ 065-5015-XX KA 141 W/ 065-5015-XX
ADAPTER CARD ADAPTER CARD
P2752 P2991 P2992 P141 P2991 P2992

PITCH AC OUT HI 6 - - 12 - y
_ PITCH AC HI
PITCH AC OUT LO 64 - - R - s PITCH AC LO
KFC 250 (4" Instruments) – Attitude
s NC - y
_ 13 - - PITCH GYRO (H) RTN
NC - s S - - PITCH GYRO (C) RTN
ROLL AC OUT HI 26 - - 10 - CC ROLL AC HI

ROLL AC OUT LO 45 - - N - HH ROLL AC LO
s - CC 11 - - ROLL GYRO (H) RTN
NC
NC - HH P - - ROLL GYRO(C) RTN
26 VAC REF HI 65 H w F H w 26VAC REF HI

26 VAC REF LO 7
s
26 VAC 400 Hz
Source
26 VAC HI
19
26 VAC LO
9
COM 3 BB - - BB - VG VALID
GYRO VALID
NC 42 NC
RELAY
NO 23 GI 275 C/B 18
YAW RATE HI 15
REPLACES KRG 331 - X - - X YAW RATE (HIGH)
YAW RATE LO 73 - Z - - Z YAW RATE (LOW)
s

Sheet 7 of 10

Rev. 13 Page B-52
GI 275 KFC 300
(Pilot s Primary ADI only) W/ KA 141 W/O KA 141
KAC 325
20 KCP 320 KA 141 KCP 320
P2752 TP BP J1 J2TP J2BP P141 J1 J2TP J2BP
PITCH AC OUT HI 6 - - - - - 12 21 - - PITCH AC HI
PITCH AC OUT LO 64 - - - - - R 20 - - PITCH AC LO
s NC - - 21 - - 13 - - - PITCH GYRO (H) RTN**
NC - - 20 - - S - - - PITCH GYRO (C) RTN**
ROLL AC OUT HI 26 - - - - - 10 23 - - ROLL AC HI

ROLL AC OUT LO 45 - - - - - N 22 - - ROLL AC LO
s NC - - 23 - - 11 - - - ROLL GYRO (H) RTN**
NC - - 22 - - P - - - ROLL GYRO(C) RTN**
- - 24 - - F 24 - - 26VAC REF HI (ATTD)

26 VAC REF HI 65 - - 19 - - - 19 - - 26VAC REF HI (HDG)
26 VAC REF LO 7 - 5 - - 5 - - - 5 26VAC REF LO

s
KFC 300 – Attitude
AIRCRAFT 400 HZ 26 VAC HI

AC REFERENCE 26 VAC LO
9
COM
GYRO VALID 3 13 - - 15 - - - 15 - VG VALID
NC
RELAY 42 NC
NO
23 GI 275 C/B 18
YAW RATE HI REPLACES KRG 331

15 - 43 - - - - - - - YAW RATE (HIGH)
YAW RATE LO
73 - 44 - - - - - - - YAW RATE (LOW)
s
NO
AP INTERLOCK 61 10 - - - - - - - - AP INTERLOCK
NC
22 NC
RELAY COM
41
9
REPLACES KSG 105

X 8 - - 25 - - - 25 - - HDG SYNCHRO X
HDG SYNCHRO Y 16 - - 26 - - - 26 - - HDG SYNCHRO Y
Z 47 - - 27 - - - 27 - - HDG SYNCHRO Z
s
HDG VALID OUT*
20 - - - 16 - - - 16 - HDG VALID
(~DISCRETE OUT 6 LO)

Sheet 8 of 10

Rev. 13 Page B-53
NOTES
STANDBY INSTRUMENT FOR THE GI 275. THIS ADI MUST BE LOCATED IN ACCORDANCE WITH
3 EFIS-ENABLED KC 19X COMPUTER (P/N 065-0042-16) IS NOT SUPPORTED.
THE KCI 310 INDICATOR CONTAINS A TEST KEY THAT IS USED TO INITIATE THE KFC 300 SELF-TEST. IF THE
4 KCI 310 INDICATOR IS REMOVED, AN EXTERNAL MOMENTARY SWITCH MUST BE INSTALLED TO REPLACE
THE FUNCTION OF THE KCI 310 TEST SWITCH. THE SWITCH SHOULD BE LABELED “AP TEST.”
5 POWER TO THE SONALERT MUST NOT BE INTERRUPTED BY THE EXTERNAL GI 275 AP DISC RELAY.
IF THE GI 275 IS USED TO REPLACE THE ADI AND THE WIRING TO THE EXISTING ADI IS REMOVED,
6 ENSURE THAT GROUND REFERENCE PINS REMAIN JUMPERED AS SHOWN.
IF THE MODE CONTROL PANEL DOES NOT SUPPORT THE NAV FLAG, THESE OUTPUTS FROM THE GI 275
7 MAY BE LEFT UNCONNECTED.
ALL WIRES FROM RELAY TO AP DISC INPUT MUST BE OF THE SIZE SPECIFIED IN THE AUTOPILOT
8 INSTALLATION MANUAL TO SUPPORT THE CURRENT LOAD FROM THE DISCONNECT CIRCUIT.
RELAY CONTACTS SUPPORT A MAXIMUM OF 2 AMPERES SWITCHING AND 2 AMPERES CONTINUOUS

9 CURRENT.
WHEN THE KRG 331 RATE GYRO IS REMOVED AND REPLACED BY THE GI 275, P2962-7 MUST BE
10 CONNECTED DIRECTLY TO P19X1-15 AS SHOWN.
IF THE GI 275 IS USED TO PROVIDE BARO-CORRECTION TO THE AUTOPILOT, THE AUTOPILOT MUST BE
11 RECALIBRATED TO THE ALTITUDE SOURCE. REFER TO SECTION 5.5.9.
INSTALL EXTERNAL AP DISCONNECT RELAY INTO AP DISCONNECT CIRCUIT AS SHOWN. EXTERNAL AP

12 DISC RELAY CONTACTS MUST SUPPORT THE MAXIMUM CURRENT THROUGH THE AP DISCONNECT
WIRING.
IF THE ENCODING ALTIMETER IS BEING REPLACED, A BLIND ENCODER MUST BE USED TO SUPPLY GRAY
13 CODE ALTITUDE TO THE AUTOPILOT.
GI 275 FD ENABLE INPUT MUST BE PULLED UP TO THE SAME CIRCUIT BREAKER AS THE AUTOPILOT
14 COMPUTER IN ORDER TO ENSURE THAT THE COMMAND BARS ARE REMOVED WHEN TH AUTOPILOT
COMPUTER IS NOT POWERED UP.

Sheet 9 of 10

Rev. 13 Page B-54
NOTES CONTINUED
IF THE RATING OF THE AUTOPILOT CIRCUIT BREAKER IS GREATER THAN 5A, AN IN-LINE FUSE WILL BE
REQUIRED TO PROTECT THE WIRING TO THE GI 275. THE FUSE MUST BE INSTALLED AT THE POINT THAT
15 POWER IS PICKED OFF FOR THE PULL-UP RESISTOR. IF THE RATING OF THE AUTOPILOT CIRCUIT
BREAKER IS 5A OR LESS, NO FUSE IS REQUIRED.
16 ONLY IF ORIGINAL AUTOPILOT HAD 4-INCH INSTRUMENTS.
17 IF KA 141 IS INSTALLED.
AP DISC RELAY MUST BE CONNECTED TO THE CIRCUIT BREAKER FOR THE GI 275 THAT IS PROVIDING
18 ATTITUDE TO THE AUTOPILOT.
IF THE KVG 350 IS REMOVED, AN ALTERNATE 26 VAC 400 Hz SOURCE MUST BE UTILIZED. IF ONE DOESN’T
19 EXIST IN THE AIRCRAFT, IT MUST BE INSTALLED.
PIN F IS WIRED TO OTHER KFC 200 COMPONENTS (CONNECTOR J2901 PIN A) THAT USE THE LO
21 REFERENCE FOR OTHER AP FUNCTIONS. DO NOT INTERRUPT THE AP CIRCUIT OR CONNECTIONS WHEN
SPLICING TO THIS WIRE.

Sheet 10 of 10

Rev. 13 Page B-55
GI 275 AUTOPILOT
or Pilot s HSI) S-TEC S-TEC S-TEC
20/30 40/50 60-1
P2752
P1 P1 RFGC
LATERAL +LEFT OUT 48 9 14 23 LAT DEV +LT
LATERAL +RIGHT OUT 10 10 13 21 LAT DEV +RT
s
LATERAL +FLAG OUT 63 - - 24 LAT DEV FLAG +

LATERAL -FLAG OUT 66 - - 6 LAT DEV FLAG -
s
A/P HEADING ERROR HI 13 8 31 19 HDG DATUM HI
A/P HEADING ERROR LO 52 7 29 13 HDG DATUM LO
s
A/P COURSE ERROR HI 32 - - 20 CRS DATUM HI
A/P COURSE ERROR LO 71 - - 13 CRS DATUM LO
s
GPS SELECT
(~DISCRETE OUT 8 LO) 40 42 26 - GPS TRACK GAIN
ILS/GPS APPROACH
(~DISCRETE OUT 7 LO) 1 - - 16 LOC SWITCH
N/C - - 18 DG GROUND STRAP

4 N/C - - 34 GROUND
N/C 20 23 - NO HEADING SYSTEM A

5 N/C 21 39 - NO HEADING SYSTEM B
Figure B-18 Autopilot/Flight Director Interconnect - S-TEC

Sheet 1 of 4

Rev. 13 Page B-56
GI 275 AUTOPILOT
or Pilot s HSI) S-TEC 55 S-TEC 55X
P2752
P1 P2 P1 P2
FD ENABLE HI 18 - 4 - 4 FD LOGIC OUT 1
FD ROLL RIGHT 38 - 12 - 12 ROLL STEERING SIG
7 FD ROLL LEFT 77 - 29 - 29 SIG REF
s
FD PITCH UP 19 - 13 - 13 PITCH STEERING SIG
FD PITCH DOWN 58 - 30 - 30 SIG REF
s
N/C - 10 - 10 10 VDC PARALLAX POT**

2 N/C - 11 - 11 PITCH STR CENTERING**
N/C - 44 - 44 FD POT GROUND**
A/P HEADING ERROR HI 13 28 - 28 - HDG DATUM HI

A/P HEADING ERROR LO 52 29 - 29 - HDG DATUM LO
s
A/P COURSE ERROR HI 32 11 - 11 - CRS DATUM HI
A/P COURSE ERROR LO 71 12 - 12 - CRS DATUM LO
s
LATERAL +FLAG OUT 63 13 - 13 - LAT DEV FLAG +
LATERAL -FLAG OUT 66 14 - 14 - LAT DEV FLAG -
s
VERTICAL +FLAG OUT 24 - 1 - 1 GS DEV FLAG +
VERTICAL -FLAG OUT 5 - 2 - 2 GS DEV FLAG -
s
GPS ANNUNCIATE
(~DISCRETE OUT 9 LO) 17 - - - 38 GPSS STEERING
GPS SELECT
(~DISCRETE OUT 8 LO) 40 - - 49 - GPS TRACK GAIN
ILS/GPS APPROACH
(~DISCRETE OUT 7 LO) 1 32 - 32 - LOC SWITCH
VERTICAL +UP OUT 9 - 18 - 18 GS DEV +UP

VERTICAL +DOWN OUT 68 - 19 - 19 GS DEV +DOWN
s
LATERAL +LEFT OUT 48 31 - 31 - LAT DEV +LT
LATERAL +RIGHT OUT 10 s
30 - 30 - LAT DEV +RT
P1
A 16 - - - 36 A
~ARINC 429 OUT 1 429 GPSS DATA IN
B 55 - - - 37 B
s
N/C 9 - 9 - DG GROUND STRAP

ADI 4 N/C 10 - 10 - GROUND
(on copilot s side)

Sheet 2 of 4

Rev. 13 Page B-57
GI 275 AUTOPILOT
(Pilot s Primary ADI S-TEC S-TEC
or Pilot s HSI) 60 PSS 60-2/65
P2752 PFGC ST-670 PFGC RFGC

FD ENABLE IN HI 18 - 13 - - FD LOGIC OUT 6
FD ROLL RIGHT 38 - 1 - - ROLL STEERING SIG

7 FD ROLL LEFT 77 - - - - SIG REF
s
FD PITCH UP 19 - 9 - - PITCH STEERING SIG
FD PITCH DOWN 58 - - - - SIG REF
s
N/C - - 62 - 10 VDC PARALLAX POT
2 N/C - - 61 - PITCH STR CENTERING
N/C - - 63 - FD POT GROUND
A/P HEADING ERROR HI 13 - - - 19 HDG DATUM HI

A/P HEADING ERROR LO 52 - - - 13 HDG DATUM LO
s
A/P COURSE ERROR HI 32 - - - 20 CRS DATUM HI
A/P COURSE ERROR LO 71 - - - - CRS DATUM LO
s
LATERAL +FLAG OUT 63 - - - 24 LAT DEV FLAG +
LATERAL -FLAG OUT 66 - - - 6 LAT DEV FLAG -
s
VERTICAL +FLAG OUT 24 77 - 77 - GS DEV FLAG +
VERTICAL -FLAG OUT 5 58 - 58 - GS DEV FLAG -
s
ILS/GPS APPROACH
(~DISCRETE OUT 7 LO) 1 9 - - 16 LOC SWITCH
N/C - - - 18 DG GROUND STRAP
4 N/C - - - 34 GROUND
LATERAL +LEFT OUT 48 - - - 23 LAT DEV +LT

LATERAL +RIGHT OUT 10 - - - 21 LAT DEV +RT
s
VERTICAL +UP OUT 9 46 - 46 - GS DEV +UP
VERTICAL +DN OUT 68 45 - 45 - GS DEV +DOWN
s

Sheet 3 of 4

Rev. 13 Page B-58
NOTES
FLIGHT DIRECTOR LOGIC OUTPUT FROM THE 55/55X (P2-4) MUST NOT BE CONNECTED TO ST-645
1 REMOTE ANNUNCIATOR (P1-20). IF THE ST-645 WAS PREVIOUSLY INSTALLED, THE WIRE CONNECTING
THE 55/55X COMPUTER P2-4 TO ANNUNCIATOR P1-20 MUST BE REMOVED OR CAPPED AND STOWED.
TO SUPPORT THE FLIGHT DIRECTOR INTERFACE WITH THE GI 275, THE PILOT-ACCESSIBLE PARALLAX
2 POT CONNECTIONS MUST BE REMOVED.
THE FLIGHT DIRECTOR CANNOT BE DISPLAYED ON AN ADI ON THE CO-PILOT’S SIDE BECAUSE THERE IS
3 NO WAY TO ADJUST THE FLIGHT DIRECTOR OFFSET FOR THIS ADI AFTER THE PARALLAX POT IS
REMOVED.
IF THE GI 275 IS REPLACING A DIRECTIONAL GYRO, ENSURE THE “DG GROUND STRAP” JUMPER IS
4 REMOVED.
IF THE GI 275 IS BEING INSTALLED IN AN AIRCRAFT THAT HAD NO HEADING SYSTEM, ENSURE THAT THE
5 “NO HEADING SYSTEM” JUMPER IS REMOVED.
THE ST-670 (P/N 01180 FOR THE KI-256) IS REQUIRED TO SUPPORT THE FLIGHT DIRECTOR DISPLAY FROM
6 THE S-TEC 60-2 AND 65 AUTOPILOTS.

Sheet 4 of 4

Rev. 13 Page B-59
GI 275 1 AUTOPILOT
(Pilot s Primary ADI SPZ-200A/-500
or Pilot s HSI)
FZ-500 SP-200
P2752 J1A J1B J1B
s
VERTICAL +UP OUT 9 - 16 - GS DEV +UP
VERTICAL +DN OUT 68 - 17 - GS DEV +DN
s
A/P HEADING ERROR HI 13 36 - - HDG ERROR HI
s
A/P COURSE ERROR HI 32 41 - - CRS DATUM HI
A/P COURSE ERROR LO 71 37 - - HDG/CRS DATUM LO
s
LATERAL SUPERFLAG 25 16 - - LAT SUPERFLAG
VERTICAL SUPERFLAG 44 - 7 - G/S SUPERFLAG

ILS/GPS APPROACH
(~DISCRETE OUT 7LO) 1 22 - - LOC FREQ GROUND
TO OTHER AVIONICS
s
26 VAC REF HI 65 - - 7 26 VAC OUTPUT

26 VAC REF LO 7 - - 5 AC POWER GROUND
FD ENABLE HI
18 - 47 - +28 FDC VALID
3 FD ROLL LEFT 77 29 - - ROLL FD COMMAND +

FD ROLL RIGHT 38 30 - - ROLL FD COMMAND -
s
FD PITCH DOWN 58 - 30 - PITCH FD COMMAND +

FD PITCH UP 19 - 31 - PITCH FD COMMAND -
s
- 48 - LOW LEVEL FDC VALID

1 - - SIGNAL GROUND
ADI
(copilot s side) SPERRY
2 HZ-444 2 - - +V OUTPUT
P1 31 - - ROLL BIAS OUT OF VIEW
ROLL CMD PTR (+) s 5 - - -V OUTPUT

ROLL CMD PTR (-) t - 29 - PITCH BIAS OUT OF VIEW
PITCH CMD PTR (+) p N/C 60 - - HI

ROLL PTR
PITCH CMD PTR (-) q 61 - - LOW GAIN SEL
62 - - COMM
FD WARN FLAG (+) GG
FD WARN FLAG (-) HH N/C - 11 - HI
PITCH PTR
- 12 - LOW GAIN SEL
- 13 - COMM
Figure B-19 Autopilot/Flight Director Interconnect - Sperry

Sheet 1 of 2

Rev. 13 Page B-60
NOTES
EXISTING ACTIVE-HIGH HDG VALID SIGNAL FROM HSI TO FD COMPUTER MUST BE SUPPLIED DIRECTLY
1 FROM DG ONCE EXISTING HSI IS REMOVED.
STANDBY INSTRUMENT FOR THE GI 275. THIS ADI MUST BE LOCATED IN ACCORDANCE WITH
Figure B-19 Autopilot/Flight Director Interconnect - Sperry

Sheet 2 of 2

Rev. 13 Page B-61
DISPLAY BACKUP SWITCH
GI 275 ON
P2752
DISCRETE IN 6 LO 43
(DISPLAY BACKUP)
AUTO
AP HDG DATUM SWITCH

GI 275 2 GPSS
P2751
~DISCRETE IN 1 LO 23
HDG
ENGINE ANNUNCIATOR (14 VDC)

GI 275 95-40-17-B4-E1WPN
EIS #1
P2751
~DISCRETE OUT 1 LO
4 B ENGINE WARN 1
(ENGINE WARNING)
C ENGINE WARN 1
~DISCRETE OUT 2 LO
43 A ENGINE CAUTION 1
(ENGINE CAUTION)
D ENGINE CAUTION 1
TO EIS DISPLAY
G POWER
BREAKER
GI 275 EIS #1 TO EIS DISPLAY

P2751 BREAKER 22 AWG 1 MS25041-2 (RED)
~DISCRETE OUT 1 LO WITH LAMP
4 22 AWG 2
(ENGINE WARNING) MS25237-330 or -8918
22 AWG 3
TO EIS DISPLAY
BREAKER 22 AWG 1 MS25041-4 (YEL)
~DISCRETE OUT 2 LO 22 AWG 2 WITH LAMP
43
(ENGINE CAUTION) MS25237-330 or -8918
22 AWG 3
ENGINE ANNUNCIATOR (28 VDC)

GI 275 LED-40-17-BA2-E1WP6
EIS #1
P2751
~DISCRETE OUT 1 LO
4 B ENGINE WARN 1
(ENGINE WARNING)
1
~DISCRETE OUT 2 LO
43 A ENGINE CAUTION 1
(ENGINE CAUTION)
TO EIS DISPLAY
G POWER
BREAKER
GI 275 EIS #1 TO EIS DISPLAY

P2751 BREAKER 22 AWG 1 MS25041-2 (RED)
~DISCRETE OUT 1 LO WITH LAMP
4 22 AWG 2
(ENGINE WARNING) MS25237-327
22 AWG 3
TO EIS DISPLAY
BREAKER 22 AWG 1 MS25041-4 (YEL)
~DISCRETE OUT 2 LO 22 AWG 2 WITH LAMP
43
(ENGINE CAUTION) MS25237-327
22 AWG 3
Figure B-20 External Switches and Annunciators

Sheet 1 of 2

Rev. 13 Page B-62
NOTES
1 USE 47Ω, 1/4 WATT RESISTOR.
IF AN AP HDG DATUM SWITCH IS INSTALLED, THE SWITCH MUST BE LOCATED AS NEAR AS PRACTICAL TO
2 THE AUTOPILOT MODE CONTROL PANEL.
IF AN ENGINE ANNUNCIATOR IS REQUIRED FOR INSTALLATION IN A MULTI-ENGINE AIRCRAFT, MAKE THE

3 CONNECTIONS TO EIS #1 ONLY. THE LEFT-MOST ENGINE (FROM THE PILOT’S POINT-OF-VIEW) SHOULD BE
CONFIGURED AS EIS #1.
Figure B-20 External Switches and Annunciators

Sheet 2 of 2

Rev. 13 Page B-63
GI 275 P2751 P691 GDL 69 SERIES
2
OUT A 46 25 OUT A
OUT B 47 24 OUT B
~ETHERNET 1 1 ETHERNET 1
IN A 65 23 IN A
IN B 66 22 IN B
s s
29 OUT A
28 OUT B
1 ETHERNET 2
27 IN A
26 IN B
s
33 OUT A
32 OUT B
1 ETHERNET 3
31 IN A
30 IN B
s
59 OUT A
58 OUT B
1 ETHERNET 4
57 IN A
56 IN B
s
NOTES
1 REFERENCE SECTION 3.2.6 FOR HSDB ARCHITECTURE.
2 ONLY THE SECOND GENERATION GDL 69/69A SXM MODELS ARE COMPATIBLE WITH THE GI 275.
Figure B-21 GDL 69 Series Interconnect

Rev. 13 Page B-64
GI 275 RADAR
FREE
ALTIMETER
GARMIN COLLINS HONEYWELL
FLIGHT
GRA 55/ RA-4500 RAC 870 KRA 405B
5500
P1 P1 P1 P4051
P2751
~DISCRETE OUT 2*
43 - - 40 U PUSH-TO-TEST IN
(RAD ALT SELF TEST OUT)
A 73 52 12 2 B ARINC 429 OUT A
~ARINC 429 IN 4
B 15 55 11 3 C ARINC 429 OUT B
s
Figure B-22 Radar Altimeter Interconnect

Rev. 13 Page B-65
GI 275 TRANSPONDER
GARMIN
GTX 32
GTX 327
P2751 J1
OUT 38 2 ~RS-232 IN
~RS-232 1
GND 77 -
s
Figure B-23 Serial Altitude Output Interconnect

Rev. 13 Page B-66
DISPLAY ONLY
WX-500
GI 275
P2751 P2 STORMSCOPE
GND 76 5 RS-232 GND
~RS-232 2 IN 37
OUT 18 s
P3
20 RS-232 TX
8 RS-232 RX
TO STORMSCOPE
CONTROL AND DISPLAY
Figure B-24 Stormscope Interconnect

Rev. 13 Page B-67
GI 275 TRAFFIC SYSTEM
GARMIN 12 12 13 12 12
P2751 L3 COMM HONEYWELL
~DISCRETE OUT 2* 18 GARMIN AVIDYNE
(TAS TEST) 43
2 GTX 33 TAS 6xx KTA 810 KTA 910
GNX 375 GTX 345 GTX 335 GTS 8XX TRC 497 TRC 899
~DISCRETE OUT 1* GTX 330 9900BX KMH 820 KMH 920
(TIS/TAS STANDBY) 4
P3752 P3252 P3251 P3301 P8001 P8002 P1 P1 P1 J10 J10
3 6 - - 52 - - - - - - ETHERNET OUT A
GI 275 18 1 - - 53 - - - - - - ETHERNET OUT B
4 4 7 - - 54 - - - - - - ETHERNET IN A
19 2 - - 55 - - - - - - ETHERNET IN B
P2751 s
~DISCRETE OUT 2*
(TAS TEST) 43 - - - - - 74 - 85 19 2 2 FUNCTIONAL TEST
2 ~DISCRETE OUT 1* 1
(TIS/TAS STANDBY) 4 - - 15 46 - 75 - 82 21 23 23 STANDBY / OPERATE
A 73 - - 5 30 14 - 8 34 42 54 54 A
~ARINC 429 IN 4 11 11 15 15 ARINC 429 OUT
B 15 - - 6 28 - 9 33 43 55 55 B
s 3
(OPTIONAL)
A 35 - - 27 32 16 - 10 45 54 60 60 A ARINC 429 IN
~ARINC 429 OUT 2 9 9 3 11 7 8
B 74 - - 28 35 17 - 44 55 61 61 B (ALTITUDE/HEADING)
s
17 - - - - - - - 69 - - - STEPPER IN
16 - - - - - - - 70 - - - SYNCRO IN
(OPTIONAL) - - - - - - - 13 - - - CONFIG GND
AHRS SOURCE
5
GDU 700/1060
GI275
GRS 77 GRS 79 GSU 75 INTEGRATED
ADAHRS
ADAHRS
P771 P791 P751 P4 P1
(OPTIONAL)
A 13 49 49 77 16 - - 48 - - - - - - 62 62 A ARINC 429 IN
~ ARINC 429 OUT 8
B 28 50 50 78 55 - - 49 - - - - - - 63 63 B (ATTITUDE/HEADING)
s
14
ADC SOURCE
6
GDC 74 GDC 72 GSU 75
P771 P791 P751

(OPTIONAL)
A 29 21 21 - - 48 33 - - - - - - - A ARINC 429 IN
~ ARINC 429 OUT 10 49 10 36
B 30 22 22 - - - - - - - - - B (ALTITUDE)
s
Figure B-25 Traffic Advisory System Interconnect

Sheet 1 of 3

Rev. 13 Page B-68
NOTES
1 FOR HONEYWELL TRAFFIC SYSTEMS, DO NOT SPLICE “TAS TEST” OR “TIS/TAS STANDBY”.
TAS TEST AND TIS/TAS STANDBY DISCRETE CONNECTIONS ARE ONLY REQUIRED IF THE GI 275 IS
2 INTERFACED USING ARINC 429 AND CONFIGURED FOR “CONTROL TRAFFIC”. DISCRETE CONNECTIONS
ARE NOT REQUIRED FOR HSDB INTERFACE.
FOR THE TCAD TO ACCEPT ARINC 429 HEADING AND ALTITUDE, PROCESSOR P/N 70-2420-5 OR LATER IS
3 REQUIRED. THE BUS SPEED MUST BE THE SAME FOR ARINC 429 RX 1 AND RX 2.
5 USE ONLY AHRS OR ADAHRS OUTPUT OF GSU 75.
6 USE ONLY ADC OUTPUT OF THE GSU 75.
IF DESIRED, ALTITUDE AND HEADING MAY BE PROVIDED BY THE GI 275 TO THE SKYWATCH SYSTEM. ANY
AVAILABLE ARINC 429 INPUTS ON THE TRAFFIC COMPUTER MAY BE USED IF THOSE SHOWN ARE
7 ALREADY USED. THE TRAFFIC SYSTEM MAY HAVE TO BE CONFIGURED TO ACCEPT ALTITUDE AND
HEADING VIA ARINC 429 (LOW-SPEED). REFER TO THE MANUFACTURER’S INSTALLATION MANUAL FOR
ADDITIONAL INFORMATION.
IF DESIRED, ALTITUDE, ATTITUDE, AND HEADING MAY BE PROVIDED BY THE GI 275 TO THE HONEYWELL
TRAFFIC SYSTEM. THE HONEYWELL TRAFFIC SYSTEM WILL NOT ACCEPT HEADING/ATTITUDE AND
ALTITUDE ON A SINGLE ARINC 429 INPUT. CONSEQUENTLY, HEADING/ATTITUDE (HIGH-SPEED) AND
8 ALTITUDE (LOW-SPEED) MUST BE PROVIDED TO SEPARATE INPUTS. THE TRAFFIC SYSTEM MUST BE
CONFIGURED TO ACCEPT ARINC 429 ALTITUDE, HEADING, AND ATTITUDE. REFER TO THE
MANUFACTURER’S INSTALLATION MANUAL FOR ADDITIONAL INFORMATION.
IF DESIRED, ALTITUDE, TEMPERATURE, HEADING, SPEED, AND SELECTED COURSE INFORMATION MAY
9 BE PROVIDED BY THE GI 275 TO THE TRANSPONDER.
IF THE GI 275 IS THE ONLY ALTITUDE SOURCE FOR THE GTX, IT IS RECOMMENDED THAT THE GTX ALSO
10 BE CONNECTED DIRECTLY TO AN EXTERNAL AIR DATA SOURCE SO THAT THE TRANSPONDER WILL
CONTINUE REPORTING ALTITUDE IN THE EVENT OF A GI 275 FAILURE.
IF ANOTHER TRAFFIC SOURCE IS WIRED TO THE GI 275, DO NOT WIRE THE GTX ARINC OUTPUT TO THE
11 GI 275.
DO NOT WIRE TO THE GI 275 IF A GTX 345 IS INSTALLED. THESE TRAFFIC SYSTEMS MUST BE WIRED IN
12 ACCORDANCE WITH THE GTX 345 INSTALLATION MANUAL FOR PROPER CORRELATION AND DISPLAY.
13 TRC 497 SOFTWARE v1.6 OR HIGHER IS REQUIRED.

Sheet 2 of 3

Rev. 13 Page B-69
NOTES CONTINUED
14 SPLICE WITH WEATHER RADAR STABILIZATION OUTPUT (IF INSTALLED) IS ALLOWED.
15 ARINC OUT TO THE GI 275 IS NOT USED IF CONNECTED VIA ETHERNET.
THESE STRAPS SET THE HEADING INPUT SOURCE TO ARINC 429. REFER TO THE MANUFACTURER’S
16 INSTALLATION MANUAL FOR ADDITIONAL STRAPPING INFORMATION.
17 SPLICE WITH GPS NAVIGATOR ARINC OUTPUT (IF INSTALLED) IS ALLOWED.
THE HSDB CONNECTION TO THE GTX 345 SHOWN HERE ALSO PROVIDES THE TRANSPONDER CONTROL
18 INTERFACE, IF APPLICABLE.

Sheet 3 of 3

Rev. 13 Page B-70
P201/
GI 275 P202
GSB 15
P2751
USB DATA HI 58 3 USB DP

USB DATA LO 39 5 2 USB DN
USB GROUND 59 4 USB GND
4 s
6
1 AIRCRAFT POWER
2
1 5 BACKLIGHT ENABLE 3
6 POWER GROUND
NOTES
• GSB 15 DUAL TYPE-A UNITS (P/Ns 011-04937-00, -01) USE 20 OR 22 AWG FOR POWER AND POWER
GROUND WIRES, 25 FT MAX.
• GSB 15 TYPE-A & TYPE-C (P/Ns 011-04937-20, -30) AND GSB 15 DUAL TYPE-C (P/Ns 011-04937-40, -50)
UNITS INSTALLED IN 28V AIRCRAFT, USE 20 OR 22 AWG FOR AIRCRAFT POWER AND POWER GROUND
WIRES, 25FT MAX.
1
• GSB 15 TYPE-A & TYPE-C (P/Ns 011-04937-20, -30) AND GSB 15 DUAL TYPE-C (P/Ns 011-04937-40, -50)
UNITS INSTALLED IN 14V AIRCRAFT, USE 20 AWG FOR AIRCRAFT POWER AND POWER GROUND
WIRES, 8FT MAX. IF LONGER WIRE LENGTH IS NEEDED, USE 16 AWG FOR AIRCRAFT POWER AND
GROUND WIRES, 13FT MAX, SPLICED TO 2FT MAX 20 AWG POWER AND GROUND WIRES AT GSB 15
CONNECTOR.
THE GSB 15 IS APPROVED TO UTILIZE A 5 AMP FUSE OR CIRCUIT BREAKER OR A 7.5 AMP FUSE OR
2 CIRCUIT BREAKER. REFER TO SECTION SECTION 3.2.1 FOR BREAKER AND FUSE SIZING, BUSSING, AND
LABELING.
3 TO DISABLE BACKLIGHT, GROUND THE BACKLIGHT ENABLE PIN. USE 22 AWG WIRE.
PIN 78 ON CONNECTOR P2751 SHOULD NOT BE CONNECTED. WHEN REPLACING A USB PIGTAIL WITH THE
4 GSB 15, LEAVE THE PIN NOT CONNECTED.
5 MUST USE ETHERNET CABLE. REFER TO TABLE 3-5 FOR APPROVED CABLES.
TERMINATE SHIELDING 2.5 INCHES FROM THE GSB 15 CONNECTOR. GROUND GSB 15 SIDE TO RING
6 TERMINAL PER SECTION 4.5.2.
7 USB DATA CABLES MUST BE 10 FEET LONG OR LESS.
Figure B-26 GSB 15 Interconnect

Rev. 13 Page B-71
EFIS
GI 275 Garmin Sandel Sandel Avidyne Bendix/King
GDU 620 SN3308 SN3500/4500 EXP5000 EFS 40/50
P2751 P6202 P3 P2 J732 P4652B
A 72
~ARINC 429 IN 2 3 11 30 22 47 A
B 14 ~ARINC 429 OUT
s 20 29 15 21 20 B
NOTES
ARINC 429 COURSE SELECT INTERFACE ALLOWS THE GI 275 TO SLAVE THE SELECTED COURSE FROM AN EXTERNAL SOURCE WHEN COURSE SELECTION IS DISABLED.
1 REFER TO SECTION 5.5.7 FOR CONFIGURING COURSE SELECTION.
Figure B-27 ARINC 429 Course Select Interconnect

Rev. 13 Page B-72
GI 275 P2751 GDU 620
P6203
~A429 OUT 1A 16 4 A429 IN 7A

~A429 OUT 1B 55 26 A429 IN 7B
s s
~A429 IN 1A 52 1 A429 OUT 2A
~A429 IN 1B 33 23 A429 OUT 2B
s s
1
~A429 IN 2A 72 2 A429 OUT 3A
~A429 IN 2B 14 24 A429 OUT 3B
s s
NOTES
SPLICING THE ARINC 429 CONNECTIONS WHEN NO OTHER ARINC 429 CHANNELS ARE AVAILABLE FOR
1 THE SYSTEM WIRING/CONFIGURATION IS ACCEPTABLE PROVIDED THE WIRE SHIELD CONTINUITY IS
MAINTAINED AS SHOWN.
DO NOT CONNECT THE ARINC 429 COURSE SELECT WIRING SHOWN IN FIGURE B-27 IF CONNECTING
2 ARINC 429 USING THE WIRING SHOWN HERE.
3 A GFC 500 INTERFACED TO THE GI 275 IS REQUIRED FOR THIS CONNECTION.
ENSURE THERE ARE AN ADEQUATE NUMBER OF ARINC 429 PORTS FOR INTERFACING SYSTEMS
4 (i.e. A DUAL GNS 4XX/5XX INTERFACE REQUIRES AN ADDITIONAL GI 275 TO PROVIDE THE REQUIRED
AMOUNT OF ARINC 429 PORTS).
Figure B-28 GDU 620 ARINC 429 Interface

Rev. 13 Page B-73
APPENDIX C EQUIPMENT COMPATIBILITY AND CONFIGURATION
C.1 Electronic Standby Indicators ........................................................................................................ C-3

C.2 ADC ............................................................................................................................................... C-4
C.3 AHRS ............................................................................................................................................. C-5
C.4 GPS Source .................................................................................................................................... C-6
C.5 VHF Navigation Receiver .............................................................................................................. C-8
C.6 Analog Navigation Receiver ........................................................................................................ C-10
C.7 Radar Altimeter ............................................................................................................................ C-11
C.8 Autopilot ...................................................................................................................................... C-12
C.9 External Flight Director ............................................................................................................... C-15
C.10 EIS ................................................................................................................................................ C-16
C.11 Transponder Control .................................................................................................................... C-16
C.12 Serial Altitude (RS-232) .............................................................................................................. C-16
C.13 Traffic Source ............................................................................................................................... C-17
C.14 Weather Source ............................................................................................................................ C-19
C.15 Lightning/Electrical Discharge Source ........................................................................................ C-19
C.16 GFC 500 PFD Sync ...................................................................................................................... C-20
C.17 External TAWS ............................................................................................................................ C-20
C.18 Audio Panel .................................................................................................................................. C-21
C.19 EIS Sensors .................................................................................................................................. C-22
The equipment listed in this appendix is compatible with the GI 275 system when configured as described
in the following sections. For GI 275 configuration information, refer to Section 5.5.

Rev. 13 Page C-1
Table C-1 LRU Interface Summary
Min. Software
Interfaced LRU Primary Functions
Needed
• Provides PFD bug sync
G500/G600 (GDU 620) v7.40
• Crossfill of GFC 500 display data
G500/G600 TXi v3.02 [1] • Provides air data and heading via crossfill
GDL 69/69A SXM v5.51 • Weather data
• ADS-B GPS position
GPS 175 v2.02
• GPS NAV source
GNX 375 v2.02 • Traffic and weather data
• GPS NAV source
GNC 355 v3.01
• GPS NAV source
GTN 6XX/7XX v6.70
• GPS/VHF NAV source
GTN Xi v20.10
• GPS/VHF NAV source
GTS 8X5 v3.13
• TAS traffic source
GTS 8X0 v4.13
• TAS traffic source
GTX 33X v2.52 • TIS-A traffic source
• Serial altitude
Main: v2.52
GTX 3X5 • ADS-B traffic source
ADS-B: v3.12
• Weather data (GTX 345 only)
• Mode 3 transponder control (GTX 345 only) [2]
L-3 Communications
v1.6 • TAS traffic source
SKY 497
GEA 24 v3.60 • EIS
GEA 110 v2.10 [3] • EIS
GMC 605 v2.31 • GFC 600 Autopilot
GMC 507 v2.90
• GFC 500 Autopilot
GSA 28 v4.70
Notes:
[1] G500/G600 TXi software v3.11 or later requires GI 275 software v2.11 or later.
[2] GTX 345 Main v2.60 and ADS-B v3.21 software versions are required for Transponder
Control functionality.
[3] GI 275 software v2.42 or later requires GEA 110 software v2.21 or later.

Rev. 13 Page C-2
C.1 Electronic Standby Indicators
The electronic standby indicators listed in Table C-2 are compatible with the GI 275. For instrument requirements, refer to the following sections:
• Standby instruments Section 3.2.2
• Power distribution Section 3.2.1
• Pitot-static plumbing Section 4.2
• Location and mounting Section 4
Table C-2 Electronic Standby Indicator

Manufacturer Model Interfacing Equipment Configuration Information Notes
G5 [1] [2]
Garmin Refer to Section 2.1.4 for limitations.
GI 275
Refer to Section 3.2.2 for installation and display requirements.
Notes:
[1] Installation approval for this indicator is not provided by this STC and must be obtained separately. This STC only approves compatibility of the
indicator as a standby instrument for the GI 275 system.
[2] Must be installed per the requirements in this manual and G5 AML STC SA0181WI.

Rev. 13 Page C-3
C.2 ADC
The air data computers listed in Table C-3 are compatible with the GI 275.
Table C-3 Compatible Air Data Computers

Mfr Model Data Format Interfacing Equipment Configuration Information Notes
If another ADC is configured, the internal ADC must be configured as Only available on GI 275 ADAHRS
Internal
ADC 2 and must be set as the default. Refer to Section 5.6.4. and ADAHRS+AP units.
Crossfills data from a different
Other GI 275 HSDB
GI 275 interfaced to an ADC.
GSU 75 ARINC 429
GDC 72 ARINC 429
Garmin
GDC 74 ARINC 429
TXi software v3.02 or later is
required for GI 275 software v2.05
or earlier.
G500/G600 TXi HSDB Interfaces page Standby Instrument: GI 275
or later.

Rev. 13 Page C-4
C.3 AHRS
The attitude and heading reference systems listed in Table C-4 are compatible with the GI 275.
Table C-4 Compatible Attitude and Heading Reference Systems

If another AHRS is configured, the internal AHRS must be configured as Only available on GI 275 ADAHRS
Internal
AHRS 2 and must be set as the default. Refer to Section 5.6.4. and ADAHRS+AP units.
Other GI 275 HSDB
GI 275 interfaced to an AHRS.
GSU 75 ARINC 429
GRS 77 ARINC 429
GRS 79 ARINC 429
Garmin TXi software v3.02 or later is
or earlier.
G500/G600 TXi HSDB Interfaces page Standby Instrument: GI 275
or later.
The GI 275 can receive
ARINC 429 Configuration magnetometer data from a G5.
GAD 29 ARINC 429 OUTPUT ( ): EFIS/AIRDATA 1 (SDI 1)
page Refer to Section 5.5.4 for
configuration information.

Rev. 13 Page C-5
C.4 GPS Source
The GPS position sources listed in Table C-5 are compatible with the GI 275.
Table C-5 Compatible GPS Position Source

Crossfills data from a different GI 275
Other GI 275 HSDB
interfaced to a GPS source.
Internal Internal VFR GPS must install antenna
Interfaces page VFR GPS: Internal
VFR GPS per Section 4.6.3. [1]
IN 1: Low, Garmin GDU
OUT: High, GAMA 429 If a GNS 500W TAWS unit is installed,
Main ARINC 429 Config page SDI: LNAV 1 (for GPS 1) it must be connected as GPS 1.
ARINC 429 LNAV 2 (for GPS 2)
GNS 4XXW Main CDI/OBS Config page is only
VNAV: Enable Labels
GNS 5XXW RS-232 available on GNS 430W/430AW and
CHNL 1: INPUT: Off GNS 530W/530AW.
Main RS-232 Config page
OUTPUT: MapMX Main software v3.30 or later is required.
Main CDI/OBS Config page Menu key > Ignore CDI Key? > Yes
CH 1: RX: MapMX
Serial Setup page
TX: MapMX
Garmin
CH 2 IN: SEL: Garmin GDU
ARINC 429 SPEED: Low GNS 480 can only be connected to
GNS 480
RS-232 ARINC 429 Setup page SDI: Sys 1 (for GPS 1) RS-232 ports 1 or 2 on the GI 275.
Sys 2 (for GPS 2)
CH 1 OUT: SEL: GAMA 429
Miscellaneous Setup page CDI SELECT: IGNORE
Set GDU to Present. Set the format to
Interfaced Equipment page
GTN 6XX GI 275 for each installed GI 275.
HSDB Software v6.70 or later required.
GTN 7XX Main Indicator (Analog)
CDI Key: Disabled
Configuration page
Set GDU to Present. Set the format to
Interfaced Equipment page
GI 275 for each installed GI 275.
GTN Xi HSDB Software v20.10 or later required.
Main Indicator (Analog)
CDI Key: Disabled
Configuration page

Rev. 13 Page C-6
Main SW v2.52 or later required.
GTX 3X5 RS-232 RS-232 Interface page ADS-B + FORMAT2
ADS-B SW v3.12 or later required. [1]
Garmin GPS 175 HSDB Interfaced Equipment page Set GDU to Present. Software v2.02 or later required.
GNX 375 HSDB Interfaced Equipment page Set GDU to Present. Software v2.02 or later required.
GNC 355 HSDB Interfaced Equipment page Set GDU to Present. Software v3.01 or later required.
Notes:
[1] Does not provide precision GPS approach guidance.

Rev. 13 Page C-7
C.5 VHF Navigation Receiver
The VHF navigation receivers listed in Table C-6 are compatible with the GI 275. For a list of analog navigation receivers compatible with the GI 275, refer to
Appendix Section C.6.
Table C-6 Compatible VHF Navigation Receiver

Other GI 275 HSDB GI 275 interfaced to a NAV
source.
Serial Port page IO MODE: NMEA
When GI 275 NAV CDI is desired to be driven by
a “standard CDI” connected to the GNC 255, set
TYPE: RESOLVER.
GNC 255 RS-232 When GI 275 NAV CDI is desired to be set via the Can be NAV 1, NAV 2, or both.
CDI Indicator page
GI 275 interface, set TYPE: SERIAL.
When GI 275 NAV CDI is desired to be set via the
GI 275 interface and/or the GNC 255 display, set
TYPE: NONE.
Garmin
VOR/LOC/GS SPEED: TX: Low
GNS 430W/430AW
ARINC 429 ARINC 429 Config SDI: VOR/ILS 1 (for NAV 1) Can be NAV 1, NAV 2, or both.
GNS 530W/530AW
page VOR/ILS 2 (for NAV 2)
CH OUT 2: SEL: VOR/ILS
ARINC 429 Setup SPEED: Low
GNS 480 (CNX80) ARINC 429 Can be NAV 1, NAV 2, or both.
page SDI: Sys 1 (for NAV 1)
Sys 2 (for NAV 2)
GTN 650 HSDB Port Software v6.70 or later required.

HSDB Ethernet Port ( ): Connected
GTN 750 Utilization page Can be NAV 1, NAV 2, or both.
Software v20.10 or later
GTN 650Xi HSDB Port required.
HSDB Ethernet Port ( ): Connected
GTN 750Xi Utilization page
Can be NAV 1, NAV 2, or both.

Rev. 13 Page C-8
With no external CDI connected to SL30, set INDICATOR HEAD TYPE:
SERIAL.
With external “standard CDI” connected to SL30, set INDICATOR HEAD Software v1.3 or later is required.
Garmin SL30 RS-232
TYPE: RESOLVER. Can be NAV 1, NAV 2, or both.
With external “composite CDI” connected to SL30, set INDICATOR HEAD
TYPE: SERIAL.

Rev. 13 Page C-9
C.6 Analog Navigation Receiver
Interface to analog navigation receivers not listed in Table C-7 can still be approved under the GI 275 if all of the following conditions are met:
• The navigation receiver is approved to TSO C36( ) (Localizer), TSO C40( ) (VOR), and optionally TSO C34( ) (Glideslope) if the glideslope is used
• If the glideslope is being used, the navigation receiver has a glideslope low-level flag output
• The installation of the navigation receiver was previously FAA-approved
• The calibration procedure for the analog navigation receiver described in Section 5.8.3 and the ground check in Section 6.3.2.2 have successfully completed
NOTE
The GI 275 is an EZ zeroed resolver at 0 degrees.
Table C-7 Compatible Analog Navigation Receiver

Composite
Collins VIR-32/33 Can be NAV 1, NAV 2, or both.
Analog
GNS 4XX/5XX Composite
GNS 4XXW/5XXW Analog Can be NAV 1, NAV 2, or both.
This interface only supports
Garmin Composite
GTN 6XX/7XX NAV, not GPS. It is
Analog
recommended to connect and
Composite configure per Table C-6.
GTN Xi
Analog
Composite
KX 155/155A/165/165A
Analog
Honeywell Composite
KN 53 Can be NAV 1, NAV 2, or both.
(Bendix/King) Analog
Composite
KX 170B/175B
Analog

Rev. 13 Page C-10
C.7 Radar Altimeter
The radar altimeter transceivers listed in Table C-8 are compatible with the GI 275.
Table C-8 Compatible Radar Altimeter

This is an analog to digital
Collins RAC-870 ARINC 429 converter specifically for use
with the ALT-55B rad-alt.
FreeFlight RA-4500 ARINC 429
Other GI 275 HSDB GI 275 interfaced to a radar
Garmin altimeter.
GRA 55/5500 ARINC 429
Honeywell
KRA 405B ARINC 429
(Bendix/King)

Rev. 13 Page C-11
C.8 Autopilot
The autopilots listed in Table C-9 are compatible with the GI 275. Refer to Table 3-19 for a list of functions available for each model of autopilot.
NOTE
Refer to the GFC 500 installation manual for GI 275 to GFC 500 interface and configuration data.
NOTE
This section includes compatibility with the basic autopilot computer, but does not include compatibility with the flight director interface to the
autopilot computer. For compatibility with the autopilot computer flight director outputs, refer to Appendix Section C.9.
Table C-9 Compatible Autopilot

Interfacing Equipment Configuration
Mfr Model Data Format Notes
Information
Bendix M-4C/M-4D Analog Any variant of the 5536E/F Computer-Amplifier. Attitude-based autopilot. [2] [6]
2000 Analog Attitude-based autopilot. [2]
21 / 31 / 41 Analog Attitude-based autopilot. [2] [8]
Century Attitude-based autopilot. [2] [15] [16]
II / IIB / III Analog
[17]
IV Analog Attitude-based autopilot. [2]
400 B Analog Attitude-based autopilot. [2]
For 400 IFCS, the mode control panel must be
300 IFCS / 400 IFCS / 800 IFCS Analog adjusted NOT to attenuate the heading or Attitude-based autopilot. [2] [11]
course error signal.
Cessna
G519( ) attitude gyro may replace G550A or
300B IFCS / 400B IFCS /
Analog G1050A ADI to provide attitude information to Attitude-based autopilot. [2] [11]
800B IFCS
the autopilot system.
1000 IFCS Analog Attitude-based autopilot. [2] [11] [12]
Collins AP-106 / 107 Analog Attitude-based autopilot. [2]
GFC 500 CAN Bus Attitude-based autopilot. [13] [18]
Garmin
GFC 600 HSDB Attitude-based autopilot. [13] [14]

Rev. 13 Page C-12
Interfacing Equipment Configuration
Mfr Model Data Format Notes
Information
KAP 100 / 150 / 200
Analog Attitude-based autopilot. [1] [2] [3]
KFC 150 / 200 / 250
KAP 140 Analog Rate-based autopilot. [2] [9]
Analog Attitude-based autopilot.
Honeywell KFC 225
ARINC 429 GPSS [2] [3] [9] [10]
(Bendix/King)
Attitude-based autopilot.
KFC 300 Analog Only KFC 300 autopilots without
VNAV functionality are supported.
[2] [3] [4] [7]
Analog Must be configured to operate with either the
20/30/40/50/60-1/60-2/65 Rate-based autopilot. [2]
Discrete NSD-360 or KI-525 (KCS-55) heading system.
60 PSS Analog Pitch axis only autopilot. [2]
S-TEC Analog
Discrete Must be configured to operate with either the
55 / 55X Rate-based autopilot. [2]
ARINC 429 GPSS NSD-360 or KI-525 (KCS-55) heading system.
RS-485
Sperry SPZ-200A/500 Analog Attitude-based autopilot. [2] [5]

Notes:
[1] For KAP 150/KFC 150, EFIS-enabled KC-19X computer (P/N 065-0042-16) is not supported.
[2] The heading error and course error signal characteristics are determined by the autopilot that is selected in the Interfaces settings.
[3] An attitude source must be provided to the autopilot in order for it to function properly. The KVG 350 gyro or the KI 255/256 ADI may be retained,
or the KG 258 ADI may replace the KI 256 ADI to provide attitude information to the autopilot system. Optionally, the GI 275 may be used instead
of the KI 255/256/KG 258 ADI or the KVG 350 gyro to provide attitude information to the autopilot system.
[4] For the KFC 300 autopilot, a synchro heading input is required. The existing KCS 305 compass system (KSG 105 slaved directional gyro) may be
retained to provide heading information to the autopilot system.
[5] The original attitude and heading system must remain in the aircraft to provide attitude and heading inputs to the autopilot. The original Altitude
Alert Controller must be retained.
[6] The autopilot computer must be configured for a Collins PN-101 (FD-112C/V) HSI. If the autopilot had another HSI prior to the installation of the
GI 275 system, changes to the GDU emulation setting may be required (the installation that was evaluated was an M-4D that had a Collins
FD-112 HSI/ADI in the original configuration).
[7] The KCI 310 indicator contains a Test key that is used to initiate the KFC 300 self-test. If the KCI 310 indicator is removed, an external momentary
switch must be installed to replace the function of the KCI 310 Test switch.

Rev. 13 Page C-13
[8] For the Century 31/41, ensure any jumpers at CD185 pins 8, 9, and 17 are removed to configure computer for an NSD 360A.
[9] For the KAP 140 and KFC 225, the GPS SELECT discrete configuration setting on the GNS 400W/500W must be set to Prompt in accordance
with GNS 400W/500W Series Installation Manual, GTN 6XX/7XX Part 23 AML STC Installation Manual, or GTN Xi Part 23 AML STC Installation
Manual.
[10] The KFC 225 must be configured for DC analog heading and A429 GPS steering.
[11] For Cessna autopilots with NAV 1/NAV 2 source switching on the autopilot mode controller, the NAV 1/NAV 2 source identification (lighted switch
caption) on the mode controller must be obliterated (i.e., hidden from view). All NAV source switching is accomplished on the GI 275.
[12] The CA-1050A autopilot computer must be configured for a Century NSD-360 HSI or equivalent (DC Heading and Course Error signals). The
GI 275 can emulate AC Heading and Course Error (Datum) signals; however, this has currently not been evaluated as part of this STC. Installers
are encouraged to utilize the NSD-360 DC setting to avoid the burden of additional installation approval efforts.
[13] Garmin autopilots can interface to a GI 275 ADAHRS unit (i.e., a GI 275 ADAHRS+AP unit is not required).
[14] If a GI 275 is installed with and interfaced to a GFC 600, then a third party HSI cannot provide the heading and course error data to the GFC 600.
[15] If the GI 275 is used to provide attitude to the Century II/IIB/III autopilot, the GI 275 hardware must be MOD 1 or later.
[16] Two GI 275 ADAHRS+AP units are required for aircraft equipped with a 1C388-2 or 1C388-3 Radio Coupler when the GI 275 installation is
replacing both the ADI and HSI functions.
[17] The Century II/IIB autopilot is equivalent to the Piper AutoControl III and IIIB autopilots, and the Century III autopilot is equivalent to the Piper
Altimatic III, IIIB, and IIIC autopilots.
[18] For interface approval with the GFC 500, refer to GFC 500 STC SA01866WI.

Rev. 13 Page C-14
C.9 External Flight Director
The flight directors listed in Table C-10 are compatible with the GI 275.
Table C-10 Compatible External Flight Director
5536F computer must have 4007463-0501 Flight Director Board
Bendix M-4D Analog
(for Collins 329B7-R, FD-108, and FD112C/V indicators).
Autopilot computer must be previously compatible with the single cue 52C77( )
IV Analog
series indicator.
Century
41 Analog
2000 Analog
300B IFCS/ 400B IFCS/
Analog
Cessna 800B IFCS
1000 IFCS Analog
OUT OF VIEW+ signal from autopilot must be inverted to be Active-High for
Collins AP-106/107 Analog
correct operation with the GI 275.
Garmin GFC 600 HSDB
KFC 150/KFC 200/ For KFC 150, EFIS-enabled KC-19X computer (P/N 065-0042-16) is not
Analog
KFC 225 supported.
Honeywell
(Bendix/King) KFC 250 Analog
KFC 300 Analog
ST-645 Remote Annunciator panel must be installed (or retained) if the flight
director is displayed on GI 275. This will provide the required mode annunciations.
Only flight director pitch/roll outputs directly from 55X computer can be used for
55/55X Analog display on GI 275 (FD pitch/roll outputs from the remote annunciator panel cannot
S-TEC be used).
If FD Logic output from 55X P2-4 is connected to P1-20 input on ST-645, it must
be disconnected.
60-2/65 ST-670 Single Cue FD Interface Unit for King KI 256 (P/N 01180) must be installed
Analog
(with ST-670) or retained to display flight director information on the GI 275.
Sperry SPZ-200A/500 Analog [1]
Notes:
[1] FZ-500 flight director computer must be strapped for low gain pitch/roll steering and pitch/roll bias out of view inputs must be connected.

Rev. 13 Page C-15
C.10 EIS
The engine adapters listed in Table C-11 are compatible with the GI 275.
Table C-11 Compatible Engine Adapters

GI 275 software v2.42 or later requires
GEA 110 RS-485
GEA 110 software v2.21 or later. [1]
Garmin GEA 24 RS-232 [1]
Crossfills data from a different GI 275
Other GI 275 HSDB For twin-engine aircraft, configure EIS 2 as Other GI 275.
interfaced to a GEA 24/110. [1]
Notes:
[1] An external annunciator(s) is required to be configured if the GI 275 EIS is installed outside of 35° of the centerline and is installed as a Primary EIS
display. Refer to Section 4.4.3.
C.11 Transponder Control

The transponders listed in Table C-12 are compatible with the GI 275 for remote transponder control.
Table C-12 Compatible Transponders
GTX 345 Main software v2.60 or

GTX 345R HSDB INTERFACE: SFD later required.
Garmin HSDB HSDB Interface page
GTX 345D PRESENT: YES ADS-B software v3.21 or
GTX 345DR later required.
C.12 Serial Altitude (RS-232)

The GI 275 can provide RS-232 serial altitude, Shadin altitude format, 9600 baud, to the systems listed in Table C-13.
Table C-13 RS-232 Serial Altitude

Set the RS-232 input that is used to
Garmin GTX 3XX RS-232 RS-232 Input and Output page provide altitude to the transponder to
“SHADIN ALT”.

Rev. 13 Page C-16
C.13 Traffic Source
The traffic sources listed in Table C-14 are compatible with the GI 275.
Table C-14 Compatible Traffic Source

Avidyne (Ryan) TAS 6XX / TCAD ARINC 429 TAS
Crossfills data from a
Other GI 275 HSDB different GI 275 interfaced
to a traffic source.
HSDB TCAS I, ADS-B [5]
GTS 800/820/825/ TAS/TCAS I
850/855 (GTS 8XX) The GTS 8XX can receive heading and altitude from the display or
ARINC 429 This interface only displays
directly from the AHRS and ADC.
TAS/TCAS targets. [5]
GTX 33/330
CHANNEL 2: GARMIN W/TIS
ARINC 429 Output page TIS-A
GTX 3X5 Main software
If GTX 33/330 will receive ARINC 429
v2.52 or later required.
GTX 33/330 data from the GI 275:
GTX 33X ARINC 429 The display can control the
ARINC 429 Input page SEL: EFIS w/ALT
Garmin SPEED: LOW TIS state; however, it does
not provide control of the
GTX 335 GTX 33. [1]
A429 OUTPUT: FORMAT 8
A429 Output page
ADS-B/TIS-B
Main software v2.52 or
later required.
HSDB INTERFACE: SFD
GTX 345 HSDB HSDB Interface page ADS-B software v3.12 or
PRESENT: YES
later required.
The GTX 345 can provide
TAS/TCAS. [3] [4]
ADS-B
GNX 375 HSDB Software v2.02 or later
required. [3] [4]

Rev. 13 Page C-17
Intruder File Protocol: ARINC 735
KTA870 / KMH820 ARINC 429 TAS [2]
Honeywell Controller Type: Discrete
(Bendix/King) Intruder File Protocol: ARINC 735
KTA970 / KMH920 ARINC 429 TCAS I [2]
Controller Type: Discrete
TAS
For SKY 497, ARINC 735 Alternate Display type must be set to
L-3 Communications SKY497 ARINC 429 SKY 497 software v1.6 or
“ARINC735 Type 1” (P1-80 must be grounded).
(Goodrich) later required.
SKY899 ARINC 429 TAS/TCAS I
Notes:
[1] The GI 275 provides altitude as part of the data transmitted to the GTX 33( )/330( ); however, it is recommended that a direct connection from the
ADC also be provided so that the GTX 33( )/330( ) will still receive altitude in the event of a GI 275 failure.
[2] Controller type is only required if GI 275 is used to control the traffic system.
[3] Only one ADS-B In source can be configured at a time.
[4] This interface will provide FIS-B weather as well as SXM weather if a GDL 69/69A SXM is also installed.
[5] If the GTS is connected via HSDB, the ARINC 429 interface is not required.

Rev. 13 Page C-18
C.14 Weather Source
The weather transceivers listed in Table C-15 are compatible with the GI 275.
Table C-15 Compatible Weather Radar Sources
The GI 275 cannot control the
GDL 69. A controlling unit (e.g.,
GDU 700/1060 or GTN
6XX/7XX) must be present in the
GDL 69A SXM HSDB Ethernet port that is connected to GI 275 must be enabled. system for the GI 275 to display
Garmin GDL 69 data.
GDL 69/69A SXM requires
minimum software v5.51. [2]
GTX 345 HSDB Refer to the GTX 345 configuration information in Table C-14. [1]
GNX 375 HSDB Refer to the GNX 375 configuration information in Table C-14. [1]
Notes:
[1] Configuring the Traffic Type to ADS-B on the GI 275 automatically enables weather information.
[2] Only the second generation GDL 69/69A SXM models are compatible with the GI 275.
C.15 Lightning/Electrical Discharge Source

The lightning/electrical discharge system listed in Table C-16 is compatible with the GI 275.
Table C-16 Compatible Lightning/Electrical Discharge Source

The GI 275 cannot control the
WX-500 Stormscope. A
controlling unit (e.g., GDU 620,
L-3 Communications WX-500 RS-232 GDU 700/1060, GTN 6XX/7XX)
must be present in the system for
the GI 275 to display Stormscope
data.
Garmin Other GI 275 HSDB GI 275 interfaced to a
Stormscope.

Rev. 13 Page C-19
C.16 GFC 500 PFD Sync
Table C-17 Compatible GFC 500 PFD Sync Interfaces
Autopilot Configuration page Present: GFC 500 GDU 620 software v7.40
or later is required.
Flight Director page Present: ARINC 429
Garmin GDU 620 ARINC 429 If SVT is configured, set
ARINC 429 In 4-8: GFC 500 (low speed) SVT FD Display to
ARINC Port Configuration page ARINC 429 Out 2: GFC 500 (low speed) ENABLED and set SVT FD
ARINC 429 Out 3-4: GFC 500 NAV (low speed) SCALING to 0.76. [1]
Notes:
[1] SVT must be either Enabled or Disabled similarly on each display to prevent Flight Director pitch scaling differences.
C.17 External TAWS

The External TAWS sources listed in Table C-18 are compatible with the GI 275. Refer to Section 3.3.10 for additional details regarding the external TAWS options
and configuration.
Table C-18 Compatible External TAWS Sources

HSDB Port Configuration page Ethernet Port ( ): Connected Software v6.70 or later
GTN 6XX/7XX HSDB
Terrain Configuration page Enable Terrain Alerting required.
HSDB Port Configuration page Ethernet Port ( ): Connected Software v20.10 or later
GTN Xi HSDB
Garmin Terrain Configuration page Enable Terrain Alerting required.
Main RS-232 Config page Out: MapMX

GNS 400W/500W RS-232 Configure: Terrain
Main System Config page
Terrain Type: TAWS

Rev. 13 Page C-20
C.18 Audio Panel
Interfacing the GI 275 to an audio panel is recommended but not required unless TAWS B and/or SVT is enabled.
The audio panels listed in Table C-19 are compatible with the GI 275. However, audio panels not listed below can still be approved under the GI 275 AML STC if
all of the following conditions are met:
• The installation of the audio panel was previously FAA-approved
• The GI 275 audio must be verified as described in Section 5.6.5
For installations using SVT, the audio panel must have an unswitched audio input that is used for the GI 275 audio.
NOTE
Audio alerts must be loud, attention-getting, and clearly intelligible under all cockpit noise conditions. Audio alerts should be slightly louder than
the normal volume of COM and intercom transmissions.
Table C-19 Compatible Audio Panels

GMA 340
GMA 342
GMA 345
GMA 347
Garmin Analog GMA 35(c) requires a control panel, such as a GTN 7XX.
GMA 35(c)
GMA 350(c)
SL 15
SL 15M
KMA 24
Honeywell KMA 26
Analog
(Bendix/King) KMA 28
KMA 30
PMA 6000
PMA 7000 Series
PS Engineering Analog
PMA 8000 Series
PAR 200

Rev. 13 Page C-21
C.19 EIS Sensors
GI 275 EIS gauges display data from the GEA 24/110 when approved sensors are configured in accordance with Table C-20. EIS sensors that are authorized as
“Interface only” require a separate installation approval.
Table C-20 EIS Sensor Compatibility
Function Mfr Garmin P/N Description Sensor Configuration Authorization
Mag P-Lead (v1/v2) or
Dual Mag P-Lead (v1/v2) or
Geared 0.642:1 P-Lead (v1/v2) or
N/A N/A P-lead (w/resistors) [6] Geared 0.667:1 P-Lead (v1/v2/v3) or Interface and installation
RPM Geared 0.750:1 P-Lead (v1/v2) or
Geared 16:25 P-Lead (v1/v2) or
Geared 77:120 P-Lead (v1/v2) [3]
UMA N/A T1A9-1 UMA T1A9-1 Slick (v1)
Interface only
UMA N/A T1A9-2 UMA T1A9-2 Bendix (v1)
Garmin 011-04202-00 Garmin 30 PSIA (Brass) Garmin 011-04202-00 (v1)
Garmin 011-05783-00 GPT 30PSIA (SS) Garmin 011-05783-00 (v2)
Interface and installation
APT-20GX-1000-25A Kulite 20GX-1000-25A (v1) [1] [4] or
Manifold Press Kulite 494-30030-00
(Mil-Spec Style) Garmin 494-30030-00 (v1) [1] [4]
UMA N/A T1EU50A (Absolute) UMA T1EU50A (v1)
Interface only
UMA N/A T1EU50A-CS (Absolute) UMA T1EU50A (v1)
Garmin 011-04202-30 150 PSIG (Brass) Garmin 011-04202-30 (v1)
Garmin 011-05783-30 GPT 150PSIG (SS) Garmin 011-05783-30 (v1)
APT-20GX-1000-150G APT-20GX-1000-150G (v1) [4] or
Kulite 494-30032-00
(Mil-Spec Style) Garmin 494-30032-00 (v1) [4]
Oil Press
Beech N/A 102-389017-1 Beech 102-389017 (v1) [1]
Beech N/A 102-389017-3 Beech 102-389017 (v1) [1]
Interface only
UMA N/A T1EU150G (Gauge) UMA T1EU150G (v1)
UMA N/A T1EU150G-CS (Gauge) UMA T1EU150G (v1)
UMA 494-70009-00 T3B3-2.5G (K Type) UMA T3B3 (v1) Interface and installation
UMA N/A T3B3 UMA T3B3 (v1)
UMA N/A T3B3A UMA T3B3 (v1)
Oil Temp
UMA N/A T3B3-2.5 UMA T3B3 (v1) Interface only
Mil-Spec N/A MS28034 MilSpec MS28034 (v1)
Varies N/A K Type NIST ITS-90 K Type (v1)
Alcor 86252 (v1) or
Alcor 494-70008-00 Alcor 86252 (K Type)
Garmin 494-70008-00 (v1)
CHT Interface only
Varies N/A J Type NIST ITS-90 J Type (v1)

Rev. 13 Page C-22
Alcor 86255 (v1) or
EGT Garmin 494-70001-00 (v1) Interface only
Alcor 86255 [1] (v1) or
Alcor 494-70001-00 86255 (K Type)
Primary EGT Garmin 494-70001-00 (v1) [1] Interface only
Varies N/A K Type NIST ITS-90 K Type (v1) [1]
Alcor 86245 (v1) [1] or
TIT & TIT 2 Garmin 494-70002-00 (v1) [1] Interface only
UMA T3B10-SG (v1) [1] or
UMA 494-70010-00 T3B10-SG (K Type) Interface and installation
Garmin 494-70010-00 (v1) [1]
Carb Temp
Mil-Spec N/A MS28034 Mil-Spec MS28034 (v1)
Interface only
APT-20GX-1000-50G Kulite 20GX-1000-50G (v1) [1] [4] or
Kulite 494-30031-00
APT-20GX-1000-15G Kulite 20GX-1000-15G (v1) [1] [4] or
Fuel Press Kulite 494-30029-00
Interface only
UMA N/A T1EU70D (Differential) UMA T1EU70D (v1)
UMA N/A T1EU70D-CS (Differential) UMA T1EU70D (v1)

Rev. 13 Page C-23
EI FT-60 Hi (v1) or
Garmin 494-10001-00 Hi (v1) [2]
Electronics Intl 494-10001-00 EI FT-60
EI FT-60 Low (v1) or
Garmin 494-10001-00 Low (v1) [2]
EI FT-90 Hi (v1) or
Garmin 494-10001-01 Hi (v1) [2]
Electronics Intl 494-10001-01 EI FT-90
EI FT-90 Low (v1) or
Garmin 494-10001-01 Low (v1) [2]
Fuel Flow & Beech 102-389012-11 Low (v1) or
Beech N/A 102-389012-11
Return Fuel Flow Beech 103-389012-11 Hi (v1) [2]
Floscan 201 B-6 Low (v1) or
Floscan N/A 201 B-6
Floscan 201B-6 Hi (v1) [2]
Floscan 231 Low (v1) or
Floscan N/A 231 Interface only
Floscan 231 Hi (v1) [2]
Floscan 201 B-6 Low (v1) or
JPI N/A 700900-1 (201)
Floscan 201B-6 Hi (v1) [2]
Floscan 231 Low (v1) or
JPI N/A 700900-2 (231)
Floscan 231 Hi (v1) [2]
Varies N/A 30Amps 50mV 30Amps 50mV (v1)
Shunt - Varies N/A 75Amps 50mV 75Amps 50mV (v1)
Alternator Load & Varies N/A 75Amps 100mV 75Amps 100mV (v1)
Interface only
Battery Charge/ Varies N/A 80Amps 50mV 80Amps 50mV (v1)
Discharge Varies N/A 85Amps 50mV 85Amps 50mV (v1)
Bus Volts Varies N/A Aircraft Bus (80V Max) Bus Max 80 Volts DC (v1) Interface only
Batt Volts Varies N/A Aircraft Battery (80V Max) Batt Max 80 Volts DC (v1) Interface only

Rev. 13 Page C-24
Resistive Floats 0-620Ohm Left Main (v1) or
N/A Left/Single Tank
(GEA 110) 0-620Ohm Single Main (v1)
Resistive Floats 0-5 Volt Left Main (v1) or
N/A Left/Single Tank
(GEA 24) 0-5 Volt Single Main (v1)
CiES CC284022-
N/A Left/Single Tank Digital (v1) or 0-5Volt (v1)
XXXX-XXX
Resistive Floats
N/A Right Tank 0-620Ohm Right Main (v1)
(GEA 110)
Resistive Floats
N/A Right Tank 0-5 Volt Right Main (v1)
(GEA 24)
CiES CC284022-
N/A Right Tank Digital (v1) or 0-5Volt (v1)
Fuel Quantity XXXX-XXX
Interface only
(Main & Aux) [5] Resistive Floats 0-620Ohm Left Aux (v1) or
N/A AUX Left/Single Tank
(GEA 110) 0-620Ohm Single Aux (v1)
Resistive Floats 0-5 Volt Left Aux (v1) or
N/A AUX Left/Single Tank
(GEA 24) 0-5 Volt Single Aux (v1)
CiES CC284022-
N/A AUX Left/Single Tank Digital (v1) or 0-5Volt (v1)
XXXX-XXX
Resistive Floats
N/A AUX Right Tank 0-620Ohm Right Aux (v1)
(GEA 110)
Resistive Floats
N/A AUX Right Tank 0-5 Volt Right AUX (v1)
(GEA 24)
CiES CC284022-
N/A AUX Right Tank Digital (v1) or 0-5Volt (v1)
XXXX-XXX
CDT Varies N/A K Type NIST ITS-90 K Type (v1) [1] Interface only
IAT Interface only
Varies N/A J Type NIST ITS-90 J Type (v1) [1]
OAT Garmin 011-00978-00 GTP 59 Garmin GTP 59 (v1) [1] Interface and installation
Notes:
[1] Select the GEA 110 or GEA 24 port that the sensor is connected to in order to access the sensor configuration.
[2] Refer to Section 5.7.2 for fuel flow gauge smoothing filter and K-factor selection.
[3] Refer to Section 5.7.2 for P-lead magneto type and propeller-to-engine gear ratio selection.
[4] Available for GEA 110 only.
[5] GEA 24 EIS systems with resistive fuel probes must be configured with the 0-5 Volt sensor configuration.
[6] GI 275 software v2.42 or later must interface with GEA 110 software v2.21 and use P-Lead version 2 or 3 sensor configurations.

Rev. 13 Page C-25
APPENDIX D MODEL-SPECIFIC DATA
Table D-1 Aircraft Model-Specific Data ...............................................................................................D-2
This appendix provides the following information for every model listed on the AML:
• GI 275 Installation Limited to MFD/Standby ADI: An “X” in this column indicates that only
installations of the GI 275 as an MFD/Standby ADI are approved for this model; refer to
Section 2.1.13 for more information
• Fuel Pressure Check Required: An “X” in this column necessitates a Fuel Pressure Check be
performed per Section 3.4.3, item 7. The Fuel Pressure Check only applies to piston aircraft with
fuel flow transducers installed per this STC
• Lightning Zone Wing, Fuselage, and Empennage: Each column references the lightning zoning
figures from Appendix G that are applicable to a particular aircraft model
• GTP 59 and GMU 11/GMU 44B Location: Each column references the suitable lightning zones
for installation of the GTP 59 Temperature Probe and GMU 11/44B Magnetometer in a particular
aircraft model. For additional information, refer to Section 4.6.2 for GTP 59 and Section 4.6.1 for
GMU 11 and GMU 44B
• Notes: This column includes any notes related to a particular aircraft model
NOTE
Any aircraft model listed in Table D-1 and not explicitly called out as nonmetallic by an
end note should be considered an all-metal aircraft.

Rev. 13 Page D-1
Table D-1 Aircraft Model-Specific Data
[common name or
GI 275 Installation
Limited to MFD or
GTP 59 Location
Check Required
Type Certificate
previous make]
Lightning Zone
Lightning Zone
Lightning Zone
(TCDS Holder)
Aircraft Model
Fuel Pressure
GMU 11 / 44B
Aircraft Make
Standby ADI
Appendix G)
Appendix G)
Appendix G)
Designation
Empennage
Type (Ref.
Type (Ref.
Type (Ref.
Fuselage
Location
Number
Notes
Wing
AERMACCHI S.p.A F.260, F.260B, F.260C, Figure G-3, Zone 2A, Zone 2A,
A10EU Figure G-6 Figure G-18 [1] [2] [5] [7]
(AERMACCHI S.p.A) F.260D, F.260E, F.260F Figure G-5 Zone 3 Zone 3
S.205-18/F, S.205-18/R,
AERMACCHI S.p.A S.205-20/F, S.205-20/R, Figure G-3, Zone 2A, Zone 2A,
(AERMACCHI S.p.A) S.205-22/R, S.208, Figure G-5 Zone 3 Zone 3
S.208A
AERO COMMANDER
(Dynac Aerospace 10, 10A, 100, 100A, 100- Figure G-3, Zone 2A, Zone 2A,
1A21 Figure G-6 Figure G-18 [1] [2] [5] [7]
Corp) 180 Figure G-5 Zone 3 Zone 3
[Volaire]
[1] [2] [5] [7]
PA-60-600 (Aerostar
Ensure compliance
600), PA-60-601
with AD 74-25-02 if
Aerostar (Aerostar 601), PA-60-
Figure G-3, Zone 2A, Zone 2A, applicable.
A17WE (Aerostar Aircraft 601P (Aerostar 601P), Figure G-10 Figure G-18
Figure G-5 Zone 3 Zone 3 The Class I/II
Corporation) PA-60-602P (Aerostar
602P), PA-60-700P GI 275 variants can
(Aerostar 700P) be installed in this
airframe.
[1] [2] [5] [7]
Aircraft may be IFR
or limited to VFR
Figure G-3, per prior
Air Tractor Zone 2A, Zone 2A, certification. For
A17SW AT-401 Figure G-4, Figure G-6 Figure G-18
(Air Tractor, Inc.) Zone 3 Zone 3 IFR aircraft, use
Figure G-5
Wing Figure G-3.
For VFR only
aircraft, use Wing
Figure G-4.

Rev. 13 Page D-2
[common name or
GI 275 Installation
Limited to MFD or
GTP 59 Location
Check Required
Type Certificate
previous make]
Lightning Zone
Lightning Zone
Lightning Zone
(TCDS Holder)
Aircraft Model
Fuel Pressure
GMU 11 / 44B
Aircraft Make
Standby ADI
Appendix G)
Appendix G)
Appendix G)
Designation
Empennage
Type (Ref.
Type (Ref.
Type (Ref.
Fuselage
Location
Number
Notes
Wing
Air Tractor Figure G-4, Zone 2A, Zone 2A,
A17SW AT-502A , AT-502B N/A Figure G-6 Figure G-18 [1] [2] [5] [7]
(Air Tractor, Inc.) Figure G-5 Zone 3 Zone 3
Air Tractor Figure G-4, Zone 2A, Zone 2A,
A19SW AT-602, AT-802, AT-802A N/A Figure G-6 Figure G-18 [1] [2] [5] [7]
(Air Tractor, Inc.) Figure G-5 Zone 3 Zone 3
ALEXANDRIA
AIRCRAFT
17-30A, 17-31A, 17-
A18CE (Alexandria Aircraft Not Allowed Figure G-6 Figure G-18 Zone 2A Zone 2A [1] [3] [5] [8]
31ATC
LLC)
[Bellanca, Inc.]
ALEXANDRIA
AIRCRAFT 14-19, 14-19-2, 14-19-3,
1A3 (Alexandria Aircraft 14-19-3A, 17-30, 17-31, Not Allowed Figure G-6 Figure G-18 Zone 2A Zone 2A [1] [3] [5] [8]
LLC) 17-31TC
[Bellanca, Inc.]
ALPHA AVIATION
CONCEPT LTD
(Alpha Aviation Figure G-4, Zone 2A, Zone 2A,
A48EU R2160 X Figure G-6 Figure G-18 [1] [2] [5] [7]
Concept Limited) Figure G-5 Zone 3 Zone 3
[Alpha Aviation Design
Limited]
American Champion
(American Champion Zone 2A, Zone 2A,
A3CE 402 X Figure G-3 Figure G-10 Figure G-18 [1] [3] [5] [8] [12]
Aircraft Corp.) Zone 3 Zone 3
[Champion]
American Champion
A21CE 8KCAB, 8GCBC Figure G-3 Figure G-6 Figure G-18 [1] [3] [5] [8] [12]
[FRA Enterprises, Inc.]

Rev. 13 Page D-3
[common name or
GI 275 Installation
Limited to MFD or
GTP 59 Location
Check Required
Type Certificate
previous make]
Lightning Zone
Lightning Zone
Lightning Zone
(TCDS Holder)
Aircraft Model
Fuel Pressure
GMU 11 / 44B
Aircraft Make
Standby ADI
Appendix G)
Appendix G)
Appendix G)
Designation
Empennage
Type (Ref.
Type (Ref.
Type (Ref.
Fuselage
Location
Number
Notes
Wing
American Champion
7EC, 7ECA, 7FC, 7GC,
A-759 7GCA, 7GCAA, 7GCB, Figure G-3 Figure G-6 Figure G-18 [1] [3] [5] [8] [12]
7GCBA, 7GCBC, 7KCAB
[FRA Enterprises, Inc.]
APEX Aircraft
(APEX Aircraft) Figure G-3, Zone 2A, Zone 2A,
A66EU R 3000/160 X Figure G-6 Figure G-18 [1] [2] [5] [7]
[AVIONS PIERRE Figure G-5 Zone 3 Zone 3
ROBIN]
Atlantic Coast
Seaplanes LLC
Figure G-3, Zone 2A, Zone 2A,
4A24 (Atlantic Coast G-21C, G-21E, G-21G N/A Figure G-10 Figure G-18 [1] [2] [5] [7]
Figure G-5 Zone 3 Zone 3
Seaplanes LLC)
[Aero Planes, LLC]
Atlantic Coast
Seaplanes LLC
4A24 (Atlantic Coast G-21D X N/A Figure G-10 Figure G-18 [1] [2] [5] [7]
Seaplanes LLC)
[Aero Planes, LLC]
Aviat Aircraft, Inc.
A-1, A-1A, A-1B, A-1C- Zone 2A, Zone 2A,
A22NM (Aviat Aircraft Inc.) Figure G-3 Figure G-6 Figure G-18 [1] [3] [5] [8]
180, A-1C-200 Zone 3 Zone 3
[Sky International, Inc.]
Aviat Aircraft, Inc.
S-1S, S-1T, S-2A, S-2S, Zone 2A, Zone 2A,
A8SO (Aviat Aircraft, Inc.) Not Allowed Figure G-6 Not Allowed [1] [3] [5] [8]
S-2B, S-2C Zone 3 Zone 3
[Sky International, Inc.]
Bellanca
Zone 2A, Zone 2A,
A-773 (Bellanca Aircraft 14-13, 14-13-2, 14-13-3 Not Allowed Figure G-6 Not Allowed [1] [3] [5] [8]
Zone 3 Zone 3
Corporation)

Rev. 13 Page D-4
[common name or
GI 275 Installation
Limited to MFD or
GTP 59 Location
Check Required
Type Certificate
previous make]
Lightning Zone
Lightning Zone
Lightning Zone
(TCDS Holder)
Aircraft Model
Fuel Pressure
GMU 11 / 44B
Aircraft Make
Standby ADI
Appendix G)
Appendix G)
Appendix G)
Designation
Empennage
Type (Ref.
Type (Ref.
Type (Ref.
Fuselage
Location
Number
Notes
Wing
[1] [2] [5] [7]
Fuselage lightning
zone for bottom of
fuselage only.
B-N Group LTD.
(B-N Group Ltd.) BN2A MK. III, BN2A MK. Figure G-3, Zone 2A, Zone 2A, Requires GEA 110
A29EU X X Figure G-10 Not Allowed
[Pilatus Britten-Norman III-2, BN2A MK. III-3 Figure G-5 Zone 3 Zone 3 for interface to
Limited] resistive fuel
quantity sensors.
Cannot mount the
GTP on the
empennage.
BN-2, BN-2A, BN-2A-2,
BN-2A-3, BN-2A-6, BN-
B-N GROUP LTD.
2A-8, BN-2A-9, BN-2A-
(B-N Group Ltd.) Figure G-3, Zone 2A, Zone 2A,
A17EU 20, BN-2A-21, BN-2A-26, Figure G-10 Figure G-18 [1] [2] [5] [7]
[Pilatus Britten-Norman Figure G-5 Zone 3 Zone 3
BN-2A-27, BN-2B-20, BN-
Limited]
2B-21, BN-2B-26, BN-2B-
27
B-N GROUP LTD.
(B-N Group Ltd.) Figure G-3, Zone 2A, Zone 2A,
A17EU BN-2T, BN-2T-4R N/A Figure G-10 Figure G-18 [1] [2] [5] [7]
[Pilatus Britten-Norman Figure G-5 Zone 3 Zone 3
Limited]
BC-1A, AT-6 (SNJ-2), AT-
BOEING 6A (SNJ-3), AT-6B, AT-
A-2-575 (The Boeing Company) 6C (SNJ-4), AT-6D (SNJ- Figure G-6 Figure G-18 [1] [2] [5] [7]
[Rockwell International] 5), AT-6F (SNJ-6), SNJ-7,
T-6G
BOEING
1A18 (The Boeing Company) NOMAD NA-260 (T-28A) N/A Figure G-6 Figure G-18 [1] [2] [5] [7]
[Rockwell International]

Rev. 13 Page D-5
[common name or
GI 275 Installation
Limited to MFD or
GTP 59 Location
Check Required
Type Certificate
previous make]
Lightning Zone
Lightning Zone
Lightning Zone
(TCDS Holder)
Aircraft Model
Fuel Pressure
GMU 11 / 44B
Aircraft Make
Standby ADI
Appendix G)
Appendix G)
Appendix G)
Designation
Empennage
Type (Ref.
Type (Ref.
Type (Ref.
Fuselage
Location
Number
Notes
Wing
[1] [3] [5] [8]
Installation using
CESSNA T-50 (Army AT-17, and Figure G-10 only
A-722 (Cessna Aircraft UC-78 series, and Navy N/A Not Allowed Figure G-10 Not Allowed Zone 2A Zone 2A allowed for tube
Company) JRC-1) and fabric;
otherwise, Not
Allowed
Cirrus Design
A00009C Corporation Figure G-3,
SR20, SR22, SR22T Figure G-6 Figure G-18 Zone 3 Zone 3 [4] [6] [8] [11] [13]
H (Cirrus Design Figure G-5
Corporation)
COMMANDER
112, 112TC, 112B,
(Commander Aircraft Figure G-3, Zone 2A, Zone 2A,
A12SO 112TCA, 114, 114A, Figure G-6 Figure G-18 [1] [2] [5] [7]
Corporation) Figure G-5 Zone 3 Zone 3
114B, 114TC
[CPAC, Inc.]
Costruzioni
Aeronautiche Tecnam
S.P.A.
(Costruzioni
A62CE Aeronautiche Tecnam P2006T N/A Figure G-10 Figure G-18 [1] [2] [5] [7]
S.P.A.)
[Costruzioni
Aeronautiche Tecnam
srl]
[1] [2] [5] [7]
Cougar
(Cougar Aircraft Figure G-3, Zone 2A, Zone 2A, Requires GEA 110
A17SO GA-7 Figure G-10 Figure G-18
Corporation) Figure G-5 Zone 3 Zone 3 for interface to
[SOCATA, S.A.] resistive fuel
quantity sensors.

Rev. 13 Page D-6
[common name or
GI 275 Installation
Limited to MFD or
GTP 59 Location
Check Required
Type Certificate
previous make]
Lightning Zone
Lightning Zone
Lightning Zone
(TCDS Holder)
Aircraft Model
Fuel Pressure
GMU 11 / 44B
Aircraft Make
Standby ADI
Appendix G)
Appendix G)
Appendix G)
Designation
Empennage
Type (Ref.
Type (Ref.
Type (Ref.
Fuselage
Location
Number
Notes
Wing
CUB CRAFTERS Figure G-4, Zone 2A, Zone 2A,
A00053SE CC19-180 Figure G-6 Not Allowed [1] [3] [5] [8]
(Cub Crafters, Inc.) Figure G-5 Zone 3 Zone 3
DAHER AEROSPACE
(DAHER Figure G-3, Zone 2A, Zone 2A,
A60EU TBM 700 (TBM850) N/A Figure G-6 Figure G-18 [1] [2] [5] [7]
AEROSPACE) Figure G-5 Zone 3 Zone 3
[SOCATA]
[4] [6] [8] [11]
Installation
approved for VFR
operation only.
DIAMOND
Figure G-4, Zone 2A, Interface to
TA4CH (Diamond Aircraft DA20-A1, DA20-C1 Figure G-6 Figure G-18 Zone 3
Figure G-5 Zone 3 resistive fuel
Industries Inc.) quantity sensors is
not approved in this
aircraft.
GMU Zone 2A is for
fuselage only.
[4] [6] [8] [11] [13]
Diamond SB OSB
40-004/3
incorporated: use
DIAMOND Figure G-3
(Diamond Aircraft Figure G-3, Absent Diamond
A47CE Industries Inc.) DA 40, DA 40 F Figure G-4, Figure G-6 Figure G-18 Zone 3 Zone 3 SB OSB 40-004/3:
[Diamond Aircraft Figure G-5 use Figure G-4;
Industries GmbH] install limited to
VFR ONLY;
CANNOT interface
to resistive fuel
quantity sensors

Rev. 13 Page D-7
[common name or
GI 275 Installation
Limited to MFD or
GTP 59 Location
Check Required
Type Certificate
previous make]
Lightning Zone
Lightning Zone
Lightning Zone
(TCDS Holder)
Aircraft Model
Fuel Pressure
GMU 11 / 44B
Aircraft Make
Standby ADI
Appendix G)
Appendix G)
Appendix G)
Designation
Empennage
Type (Ref.
Type (Ref.
Type (Ref.
Fuselage
Location
Number
Notes
Wing
DIAMOND [4] [6] [8] [11] [13]
(Diamond Aircraft Must have
Figure G-3,
A47CE Industries Inc.) DA 40 NG N/A Figure G-6 Figure G-18 Zone 3 Zone 3 Diamond SB OSB
Figure G-5
[Diamond Aircraft 40-004/3
Industries GmbH] incorporated.
DISCOVERY
A00008D (Discovery Aviation, Figure G-3,
XL-2 X Not Allowed Figure G-18 Zone 3 Zone 3 [4] [6] [8] [11]
E Inc.) Figure G-5
[Liberty Holdings, LLC]
EADS-PZL "Warszawa-
Okecie"
(EADS-PZL PZL-104 WILGA 80, PZL-
A55EU "Warszawa-Okecie" 104M WILGA 2000, X Figure G-6 Figure G-18 [1] [2] [5] [7]
S.A.) PZL-104MA WILGA 2000
[Panstwowe Zaklady
Lotnicze]
EADS-PZL "Warszawa-
Okecie"
(EADS-PZL
PZL-KOLIBER 150A, Figure G-3, Zone 2A, Zone 2A,
A69EU "Warszawa-Okecie" X Figure G-6 Figure G-18 [1] [2] [5] [7]
PZL-KOLIBER 160A Figure G-5 Zone 3 Zone 3
S.A.)
[Panstwowe Zaklady
Lotnicze]
Embraer S.A.
(Embraer S.A) Figure G-3, Zone 2A, Zone 2A,
A21SO EMB-110P1 X N/A Figure G-10 Figure G-18 [1] [2] [5] [7]
[Empresa Brasileira de Figure G-5 Zone 3 Zone 3
Aeronáutica S.A.]

Rev. 13 Page D-8
[common name or
GI 275 Installation
Limited to MFD or
GTP 59 Location
Check Required
Type Certificate
previous make]
Lightning Zone
Lightning Zone
Lightning Zone
(TCDS Holder)
Aircraft Model
Fuel Pressure
GMU 11 / 44B
Aircraft Make
Standby ADI
Appendix G)
Appendix G)
Appendix G)
Designation
Empennage
Type (Ref.
Type (Ref.
Type (Ref.
Fuselage
Location
Number
Notes
Wing
Embraer S.A. [1] [2] [5] [7]
(Embraer S.A) Figure G-3, Zone 2A, Zone 2A, GTP 59 installation
A59CE EMB-500 X N/A Figure G-17 Figure G-18
[Empresa Brasileira de Figure G-5 Zone 3 Zone 3 on engines is NOT
Aeronáutica S.A.] allowed
Embraer S.A. [1] [2] [5] [7]

(Embraer S.A) Figure G-3, Zone 2A, Zone 2A, GTP 59 installation
A60CE EMB-505 X N/A Figure G-17 Figure G-18
[Empresa Brasileira de Figure G-5 Zone 3 Zone 3 on engines is NOT
Aeronáutica S.A.] allowed
EXTRA [1] [3] [5] [8]

(Extra Interface to
Flugzeugproduktions- EA 300, EA 300/L, EA Zone 2A, Zone 2A, resistive fuel
A67EU Not Allowed Figure G-6 Figure G-18
und Vertriebs - GmbH) 300/S, EA 300/200 Zone 3 Zone 3 quantity sensors is
[Extra Flugzeugbau not approved in this
GmbH] aircraft.
Extra [1] [3] [5] [8]

(Extra Interface to
Flugzeugproduktions- Zone 2A, Zone 2A, resistive fuel
A67EU EA 300/LC X Not Allowed Figure G-6 Figure G-18
und Vertriebs - GmbH) Zone 3 Zone 3 quantity sensors is
[Extra Flugzeugbau not approved in this
GmbH] aircraft.

Rev. 13 Page D-9
[common name or
GI 275 Installation
Limited to MFD or
GTP 59 Location
Check Required
Type Certificate
previous make]
Lightning Zone
Lightning Zone
Lightning Zone
(TCDS Holder)
Aircraft Model
Fuel Pressure
GMU 11 / 44B
Aircraft Make
Standby ADI
Appendix G)
Appendix G)
Appendix G)
Designation
Empennage
Type (Ref.
Type (Ref.
Type (Ref.
Fuselage
Location
Number
Notes
Wing
[4] [6]
Installation
approved for VFR
FFT-GmbH operation only.
(FFT Gesellschaft fur Interface to
SC01 B-160 Gyroflug Figure G-4, Zone 2A, resistive fuel
A58EU Flugzeug - & X Figure G-7 Not Allowed Zone 3
Speed Canard Figure G-5 Zone 3 quantity sensors is
Faserverbund-
Technologie mbH) not approved in this
aircraft. GMU 44B
and GMU 11 may
only be installed in
the fuselage.
FOUND BROTHERS
A13EA (Found Brothers FBA Centennial "100" X Figure G-6 Figure G-18 [1] [2] [5] [7]
Aviation Limited)
Frakes Aviation
G-44 (Army OA-14 Navy
(Frakes Aviation) Figure G-3, Zone 2A, Zone 2A,
A-734 J4F-2), G-44A, SCAN Figure G-10 Figure G-18 [1] [2] [5] [7]
[Gulfstream American Figure G-5 Zone 3 Zone 3
Type 30
Corporation]
FS2003 Corp.
(FS 2003 Corporation) Zone 2A, Zone 2A,
A-780 PA-12, PA-12S Not Allowed Figure G-6 Not Allowed [1] [3] [5] [8]
[The New Piper Aircraft, Zone 3 Zone 3
Inc]
FUJI
FA-200-160 , FA-200-180 Figure G-3, Zone 2A, Zone 2A,
A4PC (Fuji Heavy Industries, Figure G-6 Figure G-18 [1] [2] [5] [7]
, FA-200-180AO Figure G-5 Zone 3 Zone 3
Ltd.)
GA8 Airvan (Pty) Ltd
(GA 8 Airvan (Pty) Ltd) Figure G-3, Zone 2A, Zone 2A,
A00011LA GA8, GA8-TC320 Figure G-6 Figure G-18 [1] [2] [5] [7]
[Gippsland Aeronautics Figure G-5 Zone 3 Zone 3
Pty. Ltd.]

Rev. 13 Page D-10
[common name or
GI 275 Installation
Limited to MFD or
GTP 59 Location
Check Required
Type Certificate
previous make]
Lightning Zone
Lightning Zone
Lightning Zone
(TCDS Holder)
Aircraft Model
Fuel Pressure
GMU 11 / 44B
Aircraft Make
Standby ADI
Appendix G)
Appendix G)
Appendix G)
Designation
Empennage
Type (Ref.
Type (Ref.
Type (Ref.
Fuselage
Location
Number
Notes
Wing
Gomolzig Flugzeug-
und Maschinenbau
GmbH AS 202/15 "BRAVO" , AS
A34EU (Gomolzig Flugzeug- 202/18A "BRAVO" , AS X Figure G-6 Figure G-18 [1] [2] [5] [7]
und Maschinenbau 202/18A4 "BRAVO"
GmbH)
[FFA Aircraft Bravo AG]
[4] [6] [8] [11]
Installation
GROB Aircraft AG approved for VFR
G115, G115A, G115B, operation only.
(GROB Aircraft AG) Figure G-4,
A57EU G115C, G115C2, G115D, Figure G-6 Figure G-18 Zone 3 Zone 3 Interface to
[GROB Aerospace Figure G-5
G115D2 resistive fuel
GmbH i.l.]
quantity sensors is
aircraft.
Grumman
Grumman G-21, Figure G-3, Zone 2A, Zone 2A,
TC 654 (Grumman American N/A Figure G-10 Figure G-18 [1] [2] [5] [7]
Grumman G-21A Figure G-5 Zone 3 Zone 3
Aviation Corporation)
Helio
(Helio Aircraft Figure G-3, Zone 2A, Zone 2A,
3A3 15A , 20 Figure G-6 Figure G-18 [1] [3] [5]
[Taylorcraft]
H-250, H-295 (USAF U-
HELIO
10D), HT-295, H-391
(Helio Aircraft, LLC) Figure G-3, Zone 2A, Zone 2A,
1A8 (USAF YL-24), H-391B, Figure G-6 Figure G-18 [1] [2] [5] [7]
[Alliance Aircraft Group, Figure G-5 Zone 3 Zone 3
H-395 (USAF L-28A or U-
LLC]
10B), H-395A, H-700

Rev. 13 Page D-11
[common name or
GI 275 Installation
Limited to MFD or
GTP 59 Location
Check Required
Type Certificate
previous make]
Lightning Zone
Lightning Zone
Lightning Zone
(TCDS Holder)
Aircraft Model
Fuel Pressure
GMU 11 / 44B
Aircraft Make
Standby ADI
Appendix G)
Appendix G)
Appendix G)
Designation
Empennage
Type (Ref.
Type (Ref.
Type (Ref.
Fuselage
Location
Number
Notes
Wing
[1] [2] [5] [7]
HELIO
(Helio Aircraft, LLC) Figure G-3, Zone 2A, Zone 2A, Neither GMU
1A8 H-800 Figure G-6 Figure G-18
[Alliance Aircraft Group, Figure G-5 Zone 3 Zone 3 11/44B nor GTP 59
LLC] can be mounted on
aircraft wing.
HELIO
(Helio Aircraft, LLC) HST-550, HST-550A Figure G-3, Zone 2A, Zone 2A,
A4EA N/A Figure G-6 Figure G-18 [1] [2] [5] [7]
[Alliance Aircraft Group, (USAF AU-24A) Figure G-5 Zone 3 Zone 3
LLC]
HOWARD DGA-15P (Army UC-70,
(Howard Aircraft Navy GH-1, GH-2, GH-3, Figure G-3, Zone 2A, Zone 2A,
A-717 Figure G-6 Figure G-18 [1] [3] [5] [8]
Foundation) NH-1), DGA-15J (Army Figure G-5 Zone 3 Zone 3
[Jobmaster Co.] UC-70B), DGA-15W
Interceptor
(Interceptor Aviation
200, 200A, 200B, 200C, Figure G-3, Zone 2A, Zone 2A,
3A18 Inc.) Figure G-6 Figure G-18 [1] [2] [5] [7]
200D Figure G-5 Zone 3 Zone 3
[Interceptor Aircraft
Corporation]
Interceptor
(Interceptor Aviation
3A18 Inc.) 400 N/A Figure G-6 Figure G-18 [1] [2] [5] [7]
[Interceptor Aircraft
Corporation]
JET SET AVIATION
HOLDINGS
M.S. 760, M.S. 760 A, Figure G-3, Zone 2A, Zone 2A,
7A3 (Jet Set Aviation N/A Figure G-14 Figure G-18 [1] [2] [5] [7]
M.S. 760 B Figure G-5 Zone 3 Zone 3
Holdings SAS)
[SOCATA]

Rev. 13 Page D-12
[common name or
GI 275 Installation
Limited to MFD or
GTP 59 Location
Check Required
Type Certificate
previous make]
Lightning Zone
Lightning Zone
Lightning Zone
(TCDS Holder)
Aircraft Model
Fuel Pressure
GMU 11 / 44B
Aircraft Make
Standby ADI
Appendix G)
Appendix G)
Appendix G)
Designation
Empennage
Type (Ref.
Type (Ref.
Type (Ref.
Fuselage
Location
Number
Notes
Wing
King's Engineering
Fellowship
(The King’s 4500-300 , 4500-300 Figure G-3, Zone 2A, Zone 2A,
A17CE X Figure G-10 Figure G-18 [1] [2] [5] [7]
Engineering Series II Figure G-5 Zone 3 Zone 3
Fellowship)
[Evangel-Air]
[1] [2] [5]
LEARJET Figure G-3, Zone 2A, Zone 2A, GTP 59 installation
A5CE 23 N/A Figure G-17 Figure G-18
(Learjet Inc.) Figure G-5 Zone 3 Zone 3 on engines is NOT
allowed
Legend Aviation &
Marine
(Legend Aviation & Figure G-3, Zone 2A, Zone 2A,
A6EA UC-1 (Twin-Bee) Figure G-10 Figure G-18 [1] [2] [5] [7]
Marine, LLC) Figure G-5 Zone 3 Zone 3
[STOL Aircraft
Corporation]
LOCKHEED
(Lockheed Martin
A-723 Aeronautics Company) 18 X N/A Figure G-10 Not Allowed [1] [2] [5] [7]
[Lockheed Aircraft
Corporation]
Lockheed
12-A (Army UC-40, UC- Figure G-3, Zone 2A, Zone 2A,
TC 616 (Lockheed Aircraft N/A Figure G-10 Not Allowed [1] [2] [5] [7]
40A; Navy JO-1, JO-2) Figure G-5 Zone 3 Zone 3
Corporation)
Lovaux Ltd
A64EU (FLS Aerospace OA7 Optica Series 300 X Not Allowed Not Allowed [1] [2] [5]
(Lovaux) Ltd.)

Rev. 13 Page D-13
[common name or
GI 275 Installation
Limited to MFD or
GTP 59 Location
Check Required
Type Certificate
previous make]
Lightning Zone
Lightning Zone
Lightning Zone
(TCDS Holder)
Aircraft Model
Fuel Pressure
GMU 11 / 44B
Aircraft Make
Standby ADI
Appendix G)
Appendix G)
Appendix G)
Designation
Empennage
Type (Ref.
Type (Ref.
Type (Ref.
Fuselage
Location
Number
Notes
Wing
LUSCOMBE
(Good Earthkeeping 8, 8A, 8B, 8C, 8D, 8E, 8F, Figure G-3, Zone 2A, Zone 2A,
Organization, Inc.) T-8F Figure G-5 Zone 3 Zone 3
[Team Luscombe, LLC]
M7 Aerospace LLC
A5SW (M7 Aerospace LLC) SA26-AT N/A Figure G-10 Figure G-18 [1] [2] [5] [7]
[M7 Aerospace LP]
M7 Aerospace LLC SA226-T, SA226-AT,
A5SW (M7 Aerospace LLC) SA226-T(B), SA227-AT, X N/A Figure G-10 Figure G-18 [1] [2] [5] [7]
[M7 Aerospace LP] SA227-TT
M7 Aerospace LLC
SA226-TC, SA227-AC (C- Figure G-3, Zone 2A, Zone 2A,
A8SW (M7 Aerospace LLC) X N/A Figure G-10 Figure G-18 [1] [2] [5] [7]
26A), SA227-BC (C-26A) Figure G-5 Zone 3 Zone 3
[M7 Aerospace LP]
M7 Aerospace LLC
A18SW (M7 Aerospace LLC) SA227-DC (C-26B) X N/A Figure G-10 Figure G-18 [1] [2] [5] [7]
[M7 Aerospace LP]

Rev. 13 Page D-14
[common name or
GI 275 Installation
Limited to MFD or
GTP 59 Location
Check Required
Type Certificate
previous make]
Lightning Zone
Lightning Zone
Lightning Zone
(TCDS Holder)
Aircraft Model
Fuel Pressure
GMU 11 / 44B
Aircraft Make
Standby ADI
Appendix G)
Appendix G)
Appendix G)
Designation
Empennage
Type (Ref.
Type (Ref.
Type (Ref.
Fuselage
Location
Number
Notes
Wing
Bee Dee M-4, M-4, M-4C,
M-4S, M-4T, M-4-210, M-
4-210C, M-4-210S, M-4-
210T, M-4-220, M-4-
220C, M-4-220S, M-4-
220T, M-4-180C, M-4-
180S, M-4-180T, M-5-
210C, M-5-220C, M-5-
235C, M-5-180C, M-5-
Maule
210TC, M-6-235, M-6-
(Maule Aerospace
180, M-5-200, M-7-235, Figure G-3, Zone 2A, Zone 2A,
3A23 Technology, Inc.) Figure G-6 Figure G-18 [1] [3] [5] [8]
MX-7-235, MX-7-180, Figure G-5 Zone 3 Zone 3
[Maule Aircraft
MXT-7-180, MT-7-235, M-
Corporation]
8-235, MX-7-160, MXT-7-
160, MX-7-180A, MXT-7-
180A, MX-7-180B, M-7-
235B, M-7-235A, M-7-
235C, MX-7-180C, M-7-
260, MT-7-260, M-7-
260C, MX-7-160C, MX-7-
180AC, M-4-180V, M-9-
235
Maule
(Maule Aerospace
MX-7-420, M-7-420AC, Figure G-3, Zone 2A, Zone 2A,
3A23 Technology, Inc.) X Figure G-6 Figure G-18 [1] [3] [5] [8]
M-7-420A, MT-7-420 Figure G-5 Zone 3 Zone 3
[Maule Aircraft
Corporation]

Rev. 13 Page D-15
[common name or
GI 275 Installation
Limited to MFD or
GTP 59 Location
Check Required
Type Certificate
previous make]
Lightning Zone
Lightning Zone
Lightning Zone
(TCDS Holder)
Aircraft Model
Fuel Pressure
GMU 11 / 44B
Aircraft Make
Standby ADI
Appendix G)
Appendix G)
Appendix G)
Designation
Empennage
Type (Ref.
Type (Ref.
Type (Ref.
Fuselage
Location
Number
Notes
Wing
MICCO Aircraft Co.,
Inc.
(MICCO Aircraft MAC-125C, MAC-145, Figure G-3, Zone 2A, Zone 2A,
3A1 X Figure G-6 Figure G-18 [1] [2] [5] [7]
Company, Inc.) MAC-145A, MAC-145B Figure G-5 Zone 3 Zone 3
[Aero Acquisitions,
LLC]
Mitsubishi MU-2B, MU-2B-20, MU-
A2PC (Mitsubishi Heavy 2B-35, MU-2B-25, MU- X N/A Figure G-10 Figure G-18 [1] [2] [5] [7]
Industries, Ltd.) 2B-36, MU-2B-26
Mitsubishi
MU-2B-25, MU-2B-35,
(Mitsubishi Heavy
MU-2B-26, MU-2B-36, Figure G-3, Zone 2A, Zone 2A,
A10SW Industries, Ltd.) X N/A Figure G-10 Figure G-18 [1] [2] [5] [7]
MU-2B-26A, MU-2B-36A, Figure G-5 Zone 3 Zone 3
[Mitsubishi Aircraft
MU-2B-40, MU-2B-60
International Inc.]
Mooney
A6SW (Mooney Aircraft M22 Figure G-6 Figure G-18 [1] [2] [5] [7]
Corporation)
Mooney M20, M20A, M20B,
(Mooney International M20C, M20D, M20E,
2A3 Corporation) M20F, M20G, M20J, Figure G-6 Figure G-18 [1] [2] [5] [7]
[Mooney Aviation M20K, M20L, M20M,
Company, Inc.] M20R, M20S, M20TN
Nardi Figure G-3, Zone 2A, Zone 2A,
7A5 FN-333 X Figure G-8 Not Allowed [1] [2] [5] [7]
(Nardi S.A.) Figure G-5 Zone 3 Zone 3
Navion (L-17A), Navion A
Navion (L-17B, L-17C), Navion B,
A-782 (Sierra Hotel Aero, Inc.) Navion D, Navion E, Figure G-6 Figure G-18 [1] [2] [5] [7]
[Navion Aircraft LLC] Navion F, Navion G,
Navion H

Rev. 13 Page D-16
[common name or
GI 275 Installation
Limited to MFD or
GTP 59 Location
Check Required
Type Certificate
previous make]
Lightning Zone
Lightning Zone
Lightning Zone
(TCDS Holder)
Aircraft Model
Fuel Pressure
GMU 11 / 44B
Aircraft Make
Standby ADI
Appendix G)
Appendix G)
Appendix G)
Designation
Empennage
Type (Ref.
Type (Ref.
Type (Ref.
Fuselage
Location
Number
Notes
Wing
Pacific Aerospace
Limited
(Pacific Aerospace Figure G-3, Zone 2A, Zone 2A,
A50CE 750XL N/A Figure G-6 Figure G-18 [1] [2] [5] [7]
Limited) Figure G-5 Zone 3 Zone 3
[Pacific Aerospace
Corporation, Ltd.]
Pacific Aerospace
Limited.
FBA-2C, FBA-2C1, FBA- Figure G-3, Zone 2A, Zone 2A,
A7EA (Pacific Aerospace Ltd.) X Figure G-6 Figure G-18 [1] [2] [5] [7]
2C2, FBA-2C3 Figure G-5 Zone 3 Zone 3
[Found Aircraft Canada,
Inc.]
Piaggio
(Industrie Aeronautiche
7A4 e Meccaniche P.166, P.166B Figure G-11 Figure G-18 [1] [2] [5] [7]
Rinaldo Piaggio, S.p.A)
[Piaggio & Co.]
Piaggio
7A4 e Meccaniche P.166C X Figure G-11 Figure G-18 [1] [2] [5] [7]
[Piaggio & Co.]
Piaggio
7A4 e Meccaniche P.166 DL3 N/A Figure G-11 Figure G-18 [1] [2] [5] [7]
[Piaggio & Co.]
Piaggio P.136-L, P.136-L1, P.136- Figure G-3, Zone 2A, Zone 2A,
(Piaggio & C.) L2 Figure G-5 Zone 3 Zone 3

Rev. 13 Page D-17
[common name or
GI 275 Installation
Limited to MFD or
GTP 59 Location
Check Required
Type Certificate
previous make]
Lightning Zone
Lightning Zone
Lightning Zone
(TCDS Holder)
Aircraft Model
Fuel Pressure
GMU 11 / 44B
Aircraft Make
Standby ADI
Appendix G)
Appendix G)
Appendix G)
Designation
Empennage
Type (Ref.
Type (Ref.
Type (Ref.
Fuselage
Location
Number
Notes
Wing
Piaggio
PIAGGIO P-180 Figure G-3, Zone 2A, Zone 2A,
A59EU (Piaggio Aero N/A Figure G-15 Figure G-18 [1] [2] [5] [7]
(PIAGGIO P-180) Figure G-5 Zone 3 Zone 3
Industries S.p.A)
PC-6, PC-6-H1, PC-6-H2,
Pilatus Figure G-3, Zone 2A, Zone 2A,
7A15 PC-6/350, PC-6/350-H1, Figure G-6 Figure G-18 [1] [2] [5] [7]
(Pilatus Aircraft Ltd.) Figure G-5 Zone 3 Zone 3
PC-6/350-H2
PC-6/A, PC-6/A-H1, PC-
6/A-H2, PC-6/B-H2, PC-
PILATUS Figure G-3, Zone 2A, Zone 2A,
7A15 6/B1-H2, PC-6/B2-H2, N/A Figure G-6 Figure G-18 [1] [2] [5] [7]
(Pilatus Aircraft Ltd.) Figure G-5 Zone 3 Zone 3
PC-6/B2-H4, PC-6/C-H2,
PC-6/C1-H2
PILATUS
PC-12, PC-12/45, PC- Figure G-3, Zone 2A, Zone 2A,
A78EU (PILATUS AIRCRAFT N/A Figure G-6 Figure G-18 [1] [2] [5] [7]
12/47, PC-12/47E Figure G-5 Zone 3 Zone 3
LTD.)
PILATUS Figure G-3, Zone 2A, Zone 2A,
A50EU PC-7 N/A Figure G-6 Figure G-18 [1] [2] [5] [7]
(PILATUS Aircraft Ltd.) Figure G-5 Zone 3 Zone 3
PA-18, PA-18S, PA-18
"105" (Special), PA-18S
"105" (Special), PA-18A,
PA-18 "125" (Army L-
Piper Aircraft, Inc.
21A), PA-18S "125", PA-
(Piper Aircraft, Inc.) Figure G-3, Zone 2A, Zone 2A,
1A2 18AS "125", PA-18 "135" Figure G-6 Not Allowed [1] [3] [5] [8]
[The New Piper Aircraft, Figure G-5 Zone 3 Zone 3
(Army L-21B), PA-18A
Inc]
"135", PA-18S "135", PA-
18 "150", PA-18A "150",
PA-18S "150", PA-19
(Army L-18C)

Rev. 13 Page D-18
[common name or
GI 275 Installation
Limited to MFD or
GTP 59 Location
Check Required
Type Certificate
previous make]
Lightning Zone
Lightning Zone
Lightning Zone
(TCDS Holder)
Aircraft Model
Fuel Pressure
GMU 11 / 44B
Aircraft Make
Standby ADI
Appendix G)
Appendix G)
Appendix G)
Designation
Empennage
Type (Ref.
Type (Ref.
Type (Ref.
Fuselage
Location
Number
Notes
Wing
1A4 PA-20, PA-20 "135" Figure G-6 Not Allowed [1] [3] [5] [8]
Inc]
Piper Aircraft, Inc. PA-22, PA-22-108, PA-
(Piper Aircraft, Inc.) 22-135, PA-22S-135, PA- Figure G-3, Zone 2A, Zone 2A,
1A6 Figure G-6 Not Allowed [1] [3] [5] [8]
[The New Piper Aircraft, 22-150, PA-22S-150, PA- Figure G-5 Zone 3 Zone 3
Inc] 22-160
Piper Aircraft, Inc. PA-23, PA-23-160, PA-
(Piper Aircraft, Inc.) 23-235, PA-23-250, PA- Figure G-3, Zone 2A, Zone 2A,
[The New Piper Aircraft, 23-250 (Navy UO-1), PA- Figure G-5 Zone 3 Zone 3
Inc] E23-250
(Piper Aircraft, Inc.) PA-24, PA-24-250, PA- Figure G-3, Zone 2A, Zone 2A,
[The New Piper Aircraft, 24-260, PA-24-400 Figure G-5 Zone 3 Zone 3
Inc]

Rev. 13 Page D-19
[common name or
GI 275 Installation
Limited to MFD or
GTP 59 Location
Check Required
Type Certificate
previous make]
Lightning Zone
Lightning Zone
Lightning Zone
(TCDS Holder)
Aircraft Model
Fuel Pressure
GMU 11 / 44B
Aircraft Make
Standby ADI
Appendix G)
Appendix G)
Appendix G)
Designation
Empennage
Type (Ref.
Type (Ref.
Type (Ref.
Fuselage
Location
Number
Notes
Wing
PA-28-160 (Cherokee),
PA-28S-160 (Cherokee),
PA-28S-180 (Cherokee),
PA-28-235 (Cherokee
Pathfinder), PA-28-140
(Cherokee Cruiser), PA-
28R-180 (Arrow), PA-
28R-200 (Arrow), PA-
28R-200 (Arrow II), PA-
Piper Aircraft, Inc. 28S-180 (Archer), PA-28-
(Piper Aircraft, Inc.) 235 (Cherokee Figure G-3, Zone 2A, Zone 2A,
[The New Piper Aircraft, Pathfinder), PA-28-151 Figure G-5 Zone 3 Zone 3
Inc] (Cherokee Warrior), PA-
28-181 (Archer II), PA-28-
181 (Archer III), PA-28-
161 (Warrior II), PA-28-
161 (Warrior III), PA-28R-
201 (Arrow III), PA-28R-
201T (Turbo Arrow III),
PA-28-236 (Dakota), PA-
28RT-201 (Arrow IV), PA-
28RT-201T (Turbo Arrow
IV), PA-28-201T (Turbo
Dakota)
A18SO PA-38-112 (Tomahawk) Figure G-6 Figure G-18 [1] [2] [5] [7]
Inc]

Rev. 13 Page D-20
[common name or
GI 275 Installation
Limited to MFD or
GTP 59 Location
Check Required
Type Certificate
previous make]
Lightning Zone
Lightning Zone
Lightning Zone
(TCDS Holder)
Aircraft Model
Fuel Pressure
GMU 11 / 44B
Aircraft Make
Standby ADI
Appendix G)
Appendix G)
Appendix G)
Designation
Empennage
Type (Ref.
Type (Ref.
Type (Ref.
Fuselage
Location
Number
Notes
Wing
A32SO PA-42-720R X N/A Figure G-10 Figure G-18 [1] [2] [5] [7]
Inc]
[1] [2] [5] [7]
(Piper Aircraft, Inc.) PA-44-180 (Seminole), Figure G-3, Zone 2A, Zone 2A, Requires GEA 110
A19SO Figure G-10 Figure G-18
[The New Piper Aircraft, PA-44-180T Figure G-5 Zone 3 Zone 3 for interface to
Inc] resistive fuel
quantity sensors.
A1EA PA-30, PA-39, PA-40 Figure G-10 Figure G-18 [1] [2] [5] [7]
Inc]
Piper Aircraft, Inc. PA-31 (Navajo), PA-31-
(Piper Aircraft, Inc.) 300 (Navajo), PA-31-325 Figure G-3, Zone 2A, Zone 2A,
A20SO Figure G-10 Figure G-18 [1] [2] [5] [7]
[The New Piper Aircraft, (Navajo C/R), PA-31-350 Figure G-5 Zone 3 Zone 3
Inc] (Chieftain)
[1] [2] [5] [7]
PA-31P (Pressurized
(Piper Aircraft, Inc.) Figure G-3, Zone 2A, Zone 2A, Requires GEA 110
A8EA Navajo), PA-31P-350 Figure G-10 Figure G-18
[The New Piper Aircraft, Figure G-5 Zone 3 Zone 3 for interface to
(Mojave) resistive fuel
Inc]
quantity sensors.
PA-31T
(Cheyenne/Cheyenne II),
A8EA PA-31T1 (Cheyenne I/IA), N/A Figure G-10 Figure G-18 [1] [2] [5] [7]
PA-31T2 (Cheyenne
Inc]
IIXL), PA-31T3

Rev. 13 Page D-21
[common name or
GI 275 Installation
Limited to MFD or
GTP 59 Location
Check Required
Type Certificate
previous make]
Lightning Zone
Lightning Zone
Lightning Zone
(TCDS Holder)
Aircraft Model
Fuel Pressure
GMU 11 / 44B
Aircraft Make
Standby ADI
Appendix G)
Appendix G)
Appendix G)
Designation
Empennage
Type (Ref.
Type (Ref.
Type (Ref.
Fuselage
Location
Number
Notes
Wing
PA-32-260 (Cherokee Six
260), PA-32-300
(Cherokee Six 300), PA-
32S-300 (Cherokee Six
Seaplane), PA-32R-300
(Lance), PA-32RT-300
(Lance II), PA-32RT-300T
Piper Aircraft, Inc. (Turbo Lance II), PA-32R-
(Piper Aircraft, Inc.) 301 (Saratoga SP), PA- Figure G-3, Zone 2A, Zone 2A,
[The New Piper Aircraft, 32R-301 (Saratoga II HP), Figure G-5 Zone 3 Zone 3
Inc] PA-32R-301T (Turbo
Saratoga SP), PA-32-301
(Saratoga), PA-32-301T
(Turbo Saratoga), PA-
32R-301T (Saratoga II
TC), PA-32-301FT (Piper
6X), PA-32-301XTC
(Piper 6XT)
Piper Aircraft, Inc. PA-34-200 (Seneca), PA-
(Piper Aircraft, Inc.) 34-200T (Seneca II), PA- Figure G-3, Zone 2A, Zone 2A,
[The New Piper Aircraft, 34-220T (Seneca III, IV, Figure G-5 Zone 3 Zone 3
Inc] V)
PA-42 (Cheyenne III), PA-
A23SO 42-720 (Cheyenne IIIA), N/A Figure G-10 Figure G-18 [1] [2] [5] [7]
PA-42-1000
Inc]
Piper PA-46-310P (Malibu), PA-
(Piper Aircraft, Inc.) 46-350P (Malibu Mirage), Figure G-3, Zone 2A, Zone 2A,
[The New Piper Aircraft, PA-46R-350T (Malibu Figure G-5 Zone 3 Zone 3
Inc] Matrix)

Rev. 13 Page D-22
[common name or
GI 275 Installation
Limited to MFD or
GTP 59 Location
Check Required
Type Certificate
previous make]
Lightning Zone
Lightning Zone
Lightning Zone
(TCDS Holder)
Aircraft Model
Fuel Pressure
GMU 11 / 44B
Aircraft Make
Standby ADI
Appendix G)
Appendix G)
Appendix G)
Designation
Empennage
Type (Ref.
Type (Ref.
Type (Ref.
Fuselage
Location
Number
Notes
Wing
Piper
(Piper Aircraft, Inc.) PA-46-500TP (Malibu Figure G-3, Zone 2A, Zone 2A,
A25SO N/A Figure G-6 Figure G-18 [1] [2] [5] [7]
[The New Piper Aircraft, Meridian) Figure G-5 Zone 3 Zone 3
Inc]
Polskie Zaklady
Lotnicze Spolka zo.o
A44CE (Polskie Zaklady PZL M26 01 X Figure G-6 Figure G-18 [1] [2] [5] [7]
Lotnicze Spolka zo.o)
[PZL MIELEC]
QUEST
A00007SE (Quest Aircraft Design, KODIAK 100 N/A Figure G-6 Figure G-18 [1] [2] [5] [7]
LLC)
Reims Aviation SA Figure G-3, Zone 2A, Zone 2A,
A54EU F406 X N/A Figure G-10 Figure G-18 [1] [2] [5] [7]
(Reims Aviation S.A.) Figure G-5 Zone 3 Zone 3
Revo, Inc.
(Revo, Incorporated) Lake LA-4, Lake LA-4- Zone 2A, Zone 2A,
1A13 Figure G-3 Figure G-9 Figure G-18 [1] [2] [5] [7]
[Global Amphibians 200, Lake Model 250 Zone 3 Zone 3
LLC]
RUAG Aerospace
Services GmbH
(RUAG Aerospace Figure G-3, Zone 2A, Zone 2A,
7A13 Do 28 A-1, Do 28 B-1 Figure G-10 Figure G-18 [1] [2] [5] [7]
Services GmbH) Figure G-5 Zone 3 Zone 3
[Fairchild Dornier
GmbH]
RUAG Aerospace
Services GmbH
A16EU Do 28 D, Do 28 D-1 X Figure G-10 Figure G-18 [1] [2] [5] [7]
[Fairchild Dornier
GmbH]

Rev. 13 Page D-23
[common name or
GI 275 Installation
Limited to MFD or
GTP 59 Location
Check Required
Type Certificate
previous make]
Lightning Zone
Lightning Zone
Lightning Zone
(TCDS Holder)
Aircraft Model
Fuel Pressure
GMU 11 / 44B
Aircraft Make
Standby ADI
Appendix G)
Appendix G)
Appendix G)
Designation
Empennage
Type (Ref.
Type (Ref.
Type (Ref.
Fuselage
Location
Number
Notes
Wing
RUAG Aerospace
Dornier 228-100, Dornier
Services GmbH
228-101, Dornier 228-
A16EU 200, Dornier 228-201, X N/A Figure G-10 Figure G-18 [1] [2] [5] [7]
Dornier 228-202, Dornier
[Fairchild Dornier
228-212
GmbH]
RUAG Aerospace
Services GmbH
(RUAG Aerospace
Services GmbH) Figure G-3, Zone 2A, Zone 2A,
A8IN Do 27 Q-6 Figure G-10 Figure G-18 [1] [2] [5] [7]
[Fairchild Dornier Figure G-5 Zone 3 Zone 3
GmbH]
DORNIER
LUFTFAHRT GmbH]
DHC-1 Chipmunk Mk
Rust (de Havilland)
21, DHC-1 Chipmunk Figure G-3, Zone 2A, Zone 2A,
A44EU (Robert E. Rust, Jr.) Figure G-6 Figure G-18 [1] [2] [5] [7]
Mk 22, DHC-1 Chipmunk Figure G-5 Zone 3 Zone 3
[Robert E. Rust]
Mk 22A
[4] [6] [8] [11]
Installation
approved for VFR
operation only.
Slingsby Aviation Ltd.
A73EU T67M260 X Figure G-4 Figure G-6 Figure G-18 Zone 3 Zone 3 Interface to
(Slingsby Aviation Ltd.)
resistive fuel
quantity sensors is
aircraft.

Rev. 13 Page D-24
[common name or
GI 275 Installation
Limited to MFD or
GTP 59 Location
Check Required
Type Certificate
previous make]
Lightning Zone
Lightning Zone
Lightning Zone
(TCDS Holder)
Aircraft Model
Fuel Pressure
GMU 11 / 44B
Aircraft Make
Standby ADI
Appendix G)
Appendix G)
Appendix G)
Designation
Empennage
Type (Ref.
Type (Ref.
Type (Ref.
Fuselage
Location
Number
Notes
Wing
MS 880B (Rallye, Ralley
Club), MS 885 (Super
Rallye), MS 894A, MS
894E (Rallye Minerva
220), MS 892A-150
SOCATA
(Commodore), MS 892E-
(SOCATA) Figure G-3, Zone 2A, Zone 2A,
7A14 150 (Rallye 150GT), MS Figure G-6 Figure G-18 [1] [2] [5] [7]
[S O C A T A - Groupe Figure G-5 Zone 3 Zone 3
893A (Rallye
AEROSPATIALE]
Commodore), MS 893E
(Rallye 180 GT), Rallye
100S, Rallye 150 ST,
Rallye 150 T, Rallye 235
E, Rallye 235C
SOCATA
(SOCATA) TB 9, TB 10, TB 20, TB Figure G-3, Zone 2A, Zone 2A,
[S O C A T A - Groupe 21, TB 200 Figure G-5 Zone 3 Zone 3
AEROSPATIALE]
STOL Figure G-3, Zone 2A, Zone 2A,
A-769 RC-3 (Sea-Bee) Figure G-8 Figure G-18 [1] [2] [5] [7]
(Sky Enterprises, Inc.) Figure G-5 Zone 3 Zone 3
SWIFT
(Swift Museum
A-766 Foundation, Inc) GC-1A, GC-1B Figure G-6 Figure G-18 [1] [2] [5] [7]
[Univair Aircraft
Corporation]
SYMPHONY
AIRCRAFT
INDUSTRIES INC.
A46CE (Symphony Aircraft OMF-100-160, SA 160 X Figure G-6 Figure G-18 [1] [2] [5] [8] [11]
Industries Inc.)
[Ostmecklenburgische
Flugzeugbau GmbH]

Rev. 13 Page D-25
[common name or
GI 275 Installation
Limited to MFD or
GTP 59 Location
Check Required
Type Certificate
previous make]
Lightning Zone
Lightning Zone
Lightning Zone
(TCDS Holder)
Aircraft Model
Fuel Pressure
GMU 11 / 44B
Aircraft Make
Standby ADI
Appendix G)
Appendix G)
Appendix G)
Designation
Empennage
Type (Ref.
Type (Ref.
Type (Ref.
Fuselage
Location
Number
Notes
Wing
200, A200C (UC-12B),
200C, B200, B200C,
B200C (C-12F), B200C
(UC-12F) , B200C (UC-
12M), B200C (C-12R),
A200 (C-12A), A200 (C-
12C), 200T, 200CT,
A200CT (C-12D),
Textron Aviation Inc A200CT (FWC-12D),
(Textron Aviation Inc.) A200CT (C-12F), A200CT Figure G-3, Zone 2A, Zone 2A,
A24CE X N/A Figure G-10 Figure G-18 [1] [2] [5] [7]
[Beechcraft (RC-12G), A200CT (RC- Figure G-5 Zone 3 Zone 3
Corporation] 12H), B200T, B200GT,
A100-1 (U-21J), A200CT
(RC-12K), A200CT (RC-
12P), A200CT (RC-12Q),
1900, 1900C, 1900C (C-
12J), 300, 300LW, B300,
B300C, B300C (MC-
12W), B300C (UC-12W),
1900D
Textron Aviation Inc F172D, F172E, F172F,
(Textron Aviation Inc.) F172G, F172H, F172K, Figure G-3, Zone 2A, Zone 2A,
A4EU X Figure G-6 Figure G-18 [1] [2] [5] [7]
[Cessna Aircraft F172L, F172M, F172N, Figure G-5 Zone 3 Zone 3
Company] F172P, FP172D

Rev. 13 Page D-26
[common name or
GI 275 Installation
Limited to MFD or
GTP 59 Location
Check Required
Type Certificate
previous make]
Lightning Zone
Lightning Zone
Lightning Zone
(TCDS Holder)
Aircraft Model
Fuel Pressure
GMU 11 / 44B
Aircraft Make
Standby ADI
Appendix G)
Appendix G)
Appendix G)
Designation
Empennage
Type (Ref.
Type (Ref.
Type (Ref.
Fuselage
Location
Number
Notes
Wing
210, 210A, 210B, 210C,
210D, 210E, 210F,
T210F, 210G, T210G,
Textron Aviation Inc 210H, T210H, 210J,
(Textron Aviation Inc.) T210J, 210K, T210K, Figure G-3, Zone 2A, Zone 2A,
[Cessna Aircraft 210L, T210L, 210M, Figure G-5 Zone 3 Zone 3
Company] T210M, 210N, P210N,
T210N, 210R, P210R,
T210R, 210-5 (205), 210-
5A (205A)
Textron Aviation Inc.
(Textron Aviation Inc.) Figure G-3, Zone 2A, Zone 2A,
A-768 120, 140 Figure G-6 Figure G-18 [1] [2] [5] [7]
[Cessna Aircraft Figure G-5 Zone 3 Zone 3
Company]
5A2 140A X Figure G-6 Figure G-18 [1] [2] [5] [7]
Company]
150, 150A, 150B, 150C,
150D, 150E, 150F, 150G,
3A19 150H, 150J, 150K, 150L, Figure G-6 Figure G-18 [1] [2] [5] [7]
150M, A150K, A150L,
Company]
A150M, 152, A152
A-799 170, 170A, 170B Figure G-6 Figure G-18 [1] [2] [5] [7]
Company]

Rev. 13 Page D-27
[common name or
GI 275 Installation
Limited to MFD or
GTP 59 Location
Check Required
Type Certificate
previous make]
Lightning Zone
Lightning Zone
Lightning Zone
(TCDS Holder)
Aircraft Model
Fuel Pressure
GMU 11 / 44B
Aircraft Make
Standby ADI
Appendix G)
Appendix G)
Appendix G)
Designation
Empennage
Type (Ref.
Type (Ref.
Type (Ref.
Fuselage
Location
Number
Notes
Wing
172, 172A, 172B, 172C,
Textron Aviation Inc. 172D, 172E, 172F (USAF
(Textron Aviation Inc.) T-41A), 172G, 172H Figure G-3, Zone 2A, Zone 2A,
[Cessna Aircraft (USAF T-41A), 172I, Figure G-5 Zone 3 Zone 3
Company] 172K, 172L, 172M, 172N,
172P, 172Q, 172R, 172S
175, 175A, 175B, 175C,
P172D, R172E (USAF T-
3A17 41B,C,D), R172G (USAF Figure G-6 Figure G-18 [1] [2] [5] [7]
T-41C,D), R172J, R172K,
Company]
172RG
A13CE 177, 177A, 177B Figure G-6 Figure G-18 [1] [2] [5] [7]
Company]
A20CE 177RG Figure G-6 Figure G-18 [1] [2] [5] [7]
Company]
180, 180A, 180B, 180C,
5A6 180D, 180E, 180F, 180G, Figure G-6 Figure G-18 [1] [2] [5] [7]
180H, 180J, 180K
Company]
182, 182A, 182B, 182C,
Textron Aviation Inc. 182D, 182E, 182F, 182G,
(Textron Aviation Inc.) 182H, 182J, 182K, 182L, Figure G-3, Zone 2A, Zone 2A,
[Cessna Aircraft 182M, 182N, 182P, 182Q, Figure G-5 Zone 3 Zone 3
Company] 182R, 182S, 182T, R182,
T182, TR182, T182T

Rev. 13 Page D-28
[common name or
GI 275 Installation
Limited to MFD or
GTP 59 Location
Check Required
Type Certificate
previous make]
Lightning Zone
Lightning Zone
Lightning Zone
(TCDS Holder)
Aircraft Model
Fuel Pressure
GMU 11 / 44B
Aircraft Make
Standby ADI
Appendix G)
Appendix G)
Appendix G)
Designation
Empennage
Type (Ref.
Type (Ref.
Type (Ref.
Fuselage
Location
Number
Notes
Wing
185, 185A, 185B, 185C,
3A24 185D, 185E, A185E, Figure G-6 Figure G-18 [1] [2] [5] [7]
A185F
Company]
Aircraft with
Cessna Airspeed
Indicators P/N
0311015-1 or -3
(Kollsman Type
586CK-0187) are
limited to HSI,
MFD, EIS, and
Attitude-Only ADI.
Textron Aviation Inc. Installations can be
(Textron Aviation Inc.) 190, 195 (LC-126A,B,C), Figure G-3, Zone 2A, Zone 2A, identified by
A-790 Figure G-6 Figure G-18
[Cessna Aircraft 195A, 195B Figure G-5 Zone 3 Zone 3 airspeed indicator
Company] marking or long
straight harpoon-
style pitot probe.
ADI with Airspeed
Display is not
approved for
installation in
aircraft with this
pitot system.
[1] [2] [5] [7]

Rev. 13 Page D-29
[common name or
GI 275 Installation
Limited to MFD or
GTP 59 Location
Check Required
Type Certificate
previous make]
Lightning Zone
Lightning Zone
Lightning Zone
(TCDS Holder)
Aircraft Model
Fuel Pressure
GMU 11 / 44B
Aircraft Make
Standby ADI
Appendix G)
Appendix G)
Appendix G)
Designation
Empennage
Type (Ref.
Type (Ref.
Type (Ref.
Fuselage
Location
Number
Notes
Wing
206, P206, P206A,
P206B, P206C, P206D,
P206E, U206, U206A,
U206B, U206C, U206D,
Textron Aviation Inc. U206E, U206F, U206G,
(Textron Aviation Inc.) TP206A, TP206B, Figure G-3, Zone 2A, Zone 2A,
A4CE Figure G-6 Figure G-18 [1] [2] [5] [7]
[Cessna Aircraft TP206C, TP206D, Figure G-5 Zone 3 Zone 3
Company] TP206E, TU206A,
TU206B, TU206C,
TU206D, TU206E,
TU206F, TU206G, 206H,
T206H
A16CE 207, 207A, T207, T207A Figure G-6 Figure G-18 [1] [2] [5] [7]
Company]
A37CE 208, 208B N/A Figure G-6 Figure G-18 [1] [2] [5] [7]
Company]
[1] [2] [5] [7]
(Textron Aviation Inc.) Figure G-3, Zone 2A, Zone 2A, Requires GEA 110
A34CE T303 (Crusader) Figure G-10 Figure G-18
[Cessna Aircraft Figure G-5 Zone 3 Zone 3 for interface to
Company] resistive fuel
quantity sensors.

Rev. 13 Page D-30
[common name or
GI 275 Installation
Limited to MFD or
GTP 59 Location
Check Required
Type Certificate
previous make]
Lightning Zone
Lightning Zone
Lightning Zone
(TCDS Holder)
Aircraft Model
Fuel Pressure
GMU 11 / 44B
Aircraft Make
Standby ADI
Appendix G)
Appendix G)
Appendix G)
Designation
Empennage
Type (Ref.
Type (Ref.
Type (Ref.
Fuselage
Location
Number
Notes
Wing
310, 310A (USAF U-3A),
310B, 310C, 310D, 310E
(USAF U-3B), 310F,
310G, 310H, E310H,
3A10 310I, 310J, 310J-1, Figure G-10 Figure G-18 [1] [2] [5] [7]
E310J, 310K, 310L,
Company]
310N, 310P, T310P,
310Q, T310Q, 310R,
T310R
320, 320-1, 320A, 320B,
3A25 320C, 320D, 320E, 320F, Figure G-10 Figure G-18 [1] [2] [5] [7]
335, 340, 340A
Company]
A2CE 336 Figure G-12 Not Allowed [1] [2] [5] [7]
Company]
337, 337A (USAF 02B),
337B, T337B, M337B
Textron Aviation Inc. (USAF 02A), 337C,
(Textron Aviation Inc.) T337C, 337D, T337D, Figure G-3, Zone 2A, Zone 2A,
A6CE Figure G-12 Not Allowed [1] [2] [5] [7]
[Cessna Aircraft 337E, T337E, 337F, Figure G-5 Zone 3 Zone 3
Company] T337F, 337G, T337G,
337H, P337H, T337H,
T337H-SP
401, 401A, 401B, 402A,
A7CE 402B, 411, 411A, 421A, Figure G-10 Figure G-18 [1] [2] [5] [7]
421B
Company]

Rev. 13 Page D-31
[common name or
GI 275 Installation
Limited to MFD or
GTP 59 Location
Check Required
Type Certificate
previous make]
Lightning Zone
Lightning Zone
Lightning Zone
(TCDS Holder)
Aircraft Model
Fuel Pressure
GMU 11 / 44B
Aircraft Make
Standby ADI
Appendix G)
Appendix G)
Appendix G)
Designation
Empennage
Type (Ref.
Type (Ref.
Type (Ref.
Fuselage
Location
Number
Notes
Wing
[1] [2] [5] [7]
(Textron Aviation Inc.) 402, 402C, 414, 414A, Figure G-3, Zone 2A, Zone 2A, Requires GEA 110
A7CE Figure G-10 Figure G-18
[Cessna Aircraft 421, 421C Figure G-5 Zone 3 Zone 3 for interface to
quantity sensors.
A7CE 425 N/A Figure G-10 Figure G-18 [1] [2] [5] [7]
Company]
[1] [2] [5] [7]
A25CE 404 Figure G-10 Figure G-18
[Cessna Aircraft Figure G-5 Zone 3 Zone 3 for interface to
quantity sensors.
A25CE 406 X N/A Figure G-10 Figure G-18 [1] [2] [5] [7]
Company]
A27CE 501, 551 X N/A Figure G-10 Figure G-18 [1] [2] [5] [7]
Company]
A28CE 441 N/A Figure G-10 Figure G-18 [1] [2] [5] [7]
Company]

Rev. 13 Page D-32
[common name or
GI 275 Installation
Limited to MFD or
GTP 59 Location
Check Required
Type Certificate
previous make]
Lightning Zone
Lightning Zone
Lightning Zone
(TCDS Holder)
Aircraft Model
Fuel Pressure
GMU 11 / 44B
Aircraft Make
Standby ADI
Appendix G)
Appendix G)
Appendix G)
Designation
Empennage
Type (Ref.
Type (Ref.
Type (Ref.
Fuselage
Location
Number
Notes
Wing
Textron Aviation Inc. [1] [2] [5] [7]
(Textron Aviation Inc.) Figure G-3, Zone 2A, Zone 2A, GTP 59 installation
A00014WI 510 X N/A Figure G-17 Figure G-18
[Cessna Aircraft Figure G-5 Zone 3 Zone 3 on engines is NOT
Company] allowed
A1WI 525, 525A, 525B, 525C N/A Figure G-10 Figure G-18 [1] [2] [5] [7]
Company]
(Textron Aviation Inc.) LC40-550FG, LC41- Figure G-3,
A00003SE Figure G-6 Figure G-18 Zone 3 Zone 3 [4] [6] [8]
[Cessna Aircraft 550FG, LC42-550FG Figure G-5
Company]
(Textron Aviation Inc.) Figure G-3,
A00003SE T240 X Figure G-6 Figure G-18 Zone 3 Zone 3 [4] [6] [8]
[Cessna Aircraft Figure G-5
Company]
Textron Aviation
(Textron Aviation Inc.) 45 (YT-34), A45 (T-34A, Figure G-3, Zone 2A, Zone 2A,
[Beechcraft B-45), D45 (T-34B) Figure G-5 Zone 3 Zone 3
Corporation]
50 (L-23A), B50 (L-23B),
Textron Aviation C50, D50 (L-23E), D50A,
(Textron Aviation Inc.) D50B, D50C, D50E, Figure G-3, Zone 2A, Zone 2A,
[Beechcraft D50E-5990, E50 (L-23D, Figure G-5 Zone 3 Zone 3
Corporation] RL-23D), F50, G50, H50,
J50

Rev. 13 Page D-33
[common name or
GI 275 Installation
Limited to MFD or
GTP 59 Location
Check Required
Type Certificate
previous make]
Lightning Zone
Lightning Zone
Lightning Zone
(TCDS Holder)
Aircraft Model
Fuel Pressure
GMU 11 / 44B
Aircraft Make
Standby ADI
Appendix G)
Appendix G)
Appendix G)
Designation
Empennage
Type (Ref.
Type (Ref.
Type (Ref.
Fuselage
Location
Number
Notes
Wing
[1] [2] [5] [7]
Requires GEA 110
for interface to
Textron Aviation
resistive fuel
A23CE 58P, 58PA, 58TC, 58TCA Figure G-10 Figure G-18 quantity sensors.
[Beechcraft Figure G-5 Zone 3 Zone 3
Corporation] The Class I/II
GI 275 variants can
be installed in this
airframe.
[1] [2] [5] [7]
Textron Aviation
A12CE 60, A60, B60 Figure G-10 Figure G-18
[Beechcraft Figure G-5 Zone 3 Zone 3 for interface to
Corporation] resistive fuel
quantity sensors.
Textron Aviation
TC 779 G17S Figure G-16 Figure G-18 [1] [3] [5] [8]
Corporation]
Textron Aviation
TC 630 18A, S18A Figure G-10 Not Allowed [1] [2] [5] [7]
Corporation]
Textron Aviation
(Textron Aviation Inc.) 18D, A18A, A18D, S18D, Figure G-3, Zone 2A, Zone 2A,
A-684 Figure G-10 Not Allowed [1] [2] [5] [7]
[Beechcraft SA18A, SA18D Figure G-5 Zone 3 Zone 3
Corporation]

Rev. 13 Page D-34
[common name or
GI 275 Installation
Limited to MFD or
GTP 59 Location
Check Required
Type Certificate
previous make]
Lightning Zone
Lightning Zone
Lightning Zone
(TCDS Holder)
Aircraft Model
Fuel Pressure
GMU 11 / 44B
Aircraft Make
Standby ADI
Appendix G)
Appendix G)
Appendix G)
Designation
Empennage
Type (Ref.
Type (Ref.
Type (Ref.
Fuselage
Location
Number
Notes
Wing
3N, 3NM, 3TM, JRB-6,
Textron Aviation D18C, D18S, E18S, RC-
(Textron Aviation Inc.) 45J (SNB-5P), E18S- Figure G-3, Zone 2A, Zone 2A,
A-765 N/A Figure G-10 Not Allowed [1] [2] [5] [7]
[Beechcraft 9700, G18S, H18, C-45G, Figure G-5 Zone 3 Zone 3
Corporation] TC-45G, C-45H, TC-45H,
TC-45J/UC-45J (SNB-5)
Textron Aviation 19A, B19, M19A, 23, A23,
(Textron Aviation Inc.) A23A, A23-19, A23-24, Figure G-3, Zone 2A, Zone 2A,
A1CE Figure G-6 Figure G-18 [1] [2] [5] [7]
[Beechcraft B23, C23, A24, A24R, Figure G-5 Zone 3 Zone 3
Corporation] B24R, C24R
[1] [2] [5] [7]
Textron Aviation
A29CE 76 Figure G-10 Figure G-18
[Beechcraft Figure G-5 Zone 3 Zone 3 for interface to
Corporation] resistive fuel
quantity sensors.
Textron Aviation
A30CE 77 Figure G-6 Figure G-18 [1] [2] [5] [7]
Corporation]
Textron Aviation
A31CE F90 N/A Figure G-10 Figure G-18 [1] [2] [5] [7]
Corporation]
Textron Aviation
99, 99A, 99A (FACH),
A14CE A99, A99A, B99, C99, 100 X N/A Figure G-10 Figure G-18 [1] [2] [5] [7]
(U-21F), A100, B100
Corporation]

Rev. 13 Page D-35
[common name or
GI 275 Installation
Limited to MFD or
GTP 59 Location
Check Required
Type Certificate
previous make]
Lightning Zone
Lightning Zone
Lightning Zone
(TCDS Holder)
Aircraft Model
Fuel Pressure
GMU 11 / 44B
Aircraft Make
Standby ADI
Appendix G)
Appendix G)
Appendix G)
Designation
Empennage
Type (Ref.
Type (Ref.
Type (Ref.
Fuselage
Location
Number
Notes
Wing
Textron Aviation
D17S (Army UC-43,
A-649 UC*43B, Navy GB-1, GB- Figure G-16 Figure G-18 [1] [3] [5] [8]
2), SD17S
Corporation]
Textron Aviation
(Textron Aviation Inc.) 35, A35, B35, C35, D35, Figure G-3, Zone 2A, Zone 2A,
A-777 Figure G-6 Not Allowed [1] [2] [5] [7]
[Beechcraft E35, F35, G35, 35R Figure G-5 Zone 3 Zone 3
Corporation]
Textron Aviation
A26CE T-34C (T-34C-1) (34C) N/A Figure G-6 Figure G-18 [1] [2] [5] [7]
Corporation]
[1] [2] [5] [7]
35-33, 35-A33, 35-B33,
Textron Aviation GMU 11/44B
35-C33, 35-C33A, E33,
(Textron Aviation Inc.) Figure G-3, Zone 2A, Zone 2A, installation in
3A15 E33A, E33C, F33, F33A, Figure G-6 Figure G-18
[Beechcraft Figure G-5 Zone 3 Zone 3 empennage not
F33C, G33, G36, 36, A36,
Corporation] allowed for V-Tail
A36TC, B36TC
models.
[1] [2] [5] [7]
Textron Aviation GMU 11/44B
H35, J35, K35, M35, N35,
(Textron Aviation Inc.) Figure G-3, Zone 2A, Zone 2A, installation in
3A15 P35, S35, V35, V35A, Figure G-6 Not Allowed
[Beechcraft Figure G-5 Zone 3 Zone 3 empennage not
V35B
Corporation] allowed for V-Tail
models.

Rev. 13 Page D-36
[common name or
GI 275 Installation
Limited to MFD or
GTP 59 Location
Check Required
Type Certificate
previous make]
Lightning Zone
Lightning Zone
Lightning Zone
(TCDS Holder)
Aircraft Model
Fuel Pressure
GMU 11 / 44B
Aircraft Make
Standby ADI
Appendix G)
Appendix G)
Appendix G)
Designation
Empennage
Type (Ref.
Type (Ref.
Type (Ref.
Fuselage
Location
Number
Notes
Wing
D55, D55A, E55, E55A,
56TC, A56TC, 58, 58A,
Textron Aviation
G58, 95, B95, B95A,
3A16 D95A, E95, 95-55, 95- Figure G-10 Figure G-18 [1] [2] [5] [7]
A55, 95-B55, 95-B55A,
Corporation]
95-B55B (T-42), 95-C55,
95-C55A
Textron Aviation
65 (L-23F), A65, A-65-
3A20 8200, 65-80, 65-A80, 65- Figure G-10 Figure G-18 [1] [2] [5] [7]
A80-8800, 65-88, 70
Corporation]
Textron Aviation
3A20 65-B80 X Figure G-10 Figure G-18 [1] [2] [5] [7]
Corporation]
Textron Aviation
65-90, 65-A90, 65-A90-2
3A20 (RU-21B), 65-A90-3 (RU- X Figure G-10 Figure G-18 [1] [2] [5] [7]
21C), C90, B90
Corporation]
65-A90-1 (JU-21A, U-
Textron Aviation
21A, RU-21A, RU-21D, U-
3A20 21G, RU-21H), 65-A90-4 X N/A Figure G-10 Figure G-18 [1] [2] [5] [7]
(RU-21E, RU-21H),
Corporation]
C90A, C90GT, C90GTi
Textron Aviation
3A20 E90, H90 (T-44A) N/A Figure G-10 Figure G-18 [1] [2] [5] [7]
Corporation]

Rev. 13 Page D-37
[common name or
GI 275 Installation
Limited to MFD or
GTP 59 Location
Check Required
Type Certificate
previous make]
Lightning Zone
Lightning Zone
Lightning Zone
(TCDS Holder)
Aircraft Model
Fuel Pressure
GMU 11 / 44B
Aircraft Make
Standby ADI
Appendix G)
Appendix G)
Appendix G)
Designation
Empennage
Type (Ref.
Type (Ref.
Type (Ref.
Fuselage
Location
Number
Notes
Wing
F150F, F150G, F150H,
Textron Aviation
F150J, F150K, F150L,
A13EU F150M, F152, FA150K, Figure G-6 Figure G-18 [1] [2] [5] [7]
FA150L, FA150M, FA152,
Company]
FRA150L, FRA150M
Textron Aviation
FR172E, FR172G,
A18EU FR172H, FR172J, Figure G-6 Figure G-18 [1] [2] [5] [7]
FR172K
Company]
Textron Aviation
A26EU F177RG Figure G-6 Figure G-18 [1] [2] [5] [7]
Company]
Textron Aviation
A42EU F182P, F182Q, FR182 Figure G-6 Figure G-18 [1] [2] [5] [7]
Company]
Textron Aviation F337E, FT337E, F337F,
(Textron Aviation Inc.) FT337F, F337G, Figure G-3, Zone 2A, Zone 2A,
A23EU Figure G-12 Not Allowed [1] [2] [5] [7]
[Cessna Aircraft FT337GP, F337H, Figure G-5 Zone 3 Zone 3
Company] FT337HP
THRUSH AIRCRAFT,
INC. 600 S-2D, S2R, S2R- Zone 2A, Zone 2A,
A3SW Figure G-4 Figure G-6 Figure G-18 [1] [2] [5] [7]
(Thrush Aircraft, Inc.) R3S, S2R-R1340 Zone 3 Zone 3
[Quality Aerospace]
THRUSH AIRCRAFT,
INC. S2R-T34, S2R-T15, S2R- Zone 2A, Zone 2A,
A3SW N/A Figure G-4 Figure G-6 Figure G-18 [1] [2] [5] [7]
(Thrush Aircraft, Inc.) T11 Zone 3 Zone 3
[Quality Aerospace]

Rev. 13 Page D-38
[common name or
GI 275 Installation
Limited to MFD or
GTP 59 Location
Check Required
Type Certificate
previous make]
Lightning Zone
Lightning Zone
Lightning Zone
(TCDS Holder)
Aircraft Model
Fuel Pressure
GMU 11 / 44B
Aircraft Make
Standby ADI
Appendix G)
Appendix G)
Appendix G)
Designation
Empennage
Type (Ref.
Type (Ref.
Type (Ref.
Fuselage
Location
Number
Notes
Wing
THRUSH AIRCRAFT,
600 S-2D, S2R-R1340,
INC. Zone 2A, Zone 2A,
A4SW S2R, S2R-R1820, S2R- Figure G-4 Figure G-6 Figure G-18 [1] [2] [5] [7]
(Thrush Aircraft, Inc.) Zone 3 Zone 3
R3S
[Quality Aerospace]
S2R-G10, S2R-G5, S2R-
THRUSH AIRCRAFT, T34, S2R-T65, S2R-G1,
INC. S2R-T15, S2RHG-T65, Zone 2A, Zone 2A,
A4SW N/A Figure G-4 Figure G-6 Figure G-18 [1] [2] [5] [7]
(Thrush Aircraft, Inc.) S2RHG-T34, S2R-T45, Zone 3 Zone 3
[Quality Aerospace] S2R-T660, S2R-T11,
S2R-G6, S2R-H80
[1] [2] [5] [7]
TKEF
(The King’s Figure G-3, Zone 2A, Zone 2A, Requires GEA 110
A2WI 44 Figure G-11 Figure G-18
Engineering Fellowship Figure G-5 Zone 3 Zone 3 for interface to
(TKEF)) resistive fuel
quantity sensors.
TOPCUB AIRCRAFT,
A00006SE INC. CC18-180, CC18-180A Figure G-6 Figure G-18 [1] [3] [5] [8]
(Topcub Aircraft, Inc.)
TRIDENT Figure G-3, Zone 2A, Zone 2A,
A19EA TR-1 X Figure G-8 Figure G-18 [1] [2] [5] [7]
(Viking Air, Ltd) Figure G-5 Zone 3 Zone 3
True Flight Holdings
LLC
AA-1, AA-1A, AA-1B, AA- Figure G-3, Zone 2A, Zone 2A,
A11EA (True Flight Holdings Figure G-6 Figure G-18 [1] [2] [5] [7]
1C Figure G-5 Zone 3 Zone 3
LLC)
[Tiger Aircraft LLC]

Rev. 13 Page D-39
[common name or
GI 275 Installation
Limited to MFD or
GTP 59 Location
Check Required
Type Certificate
previous make]
Lightning Zone
Lightning Zone
Lightning Zone
(TCDS Holder)
Aircraft Model
Fuel Pressure
GMU 11 / 44B
Aircraft Make
Standby ADI
Appendix G)
Appendix G)
Appendix G)
Designation
Empennage
Type (Ref.
Type (Ref.
Type (Ref.
Fuselage
Location
Number
Notes
Wing
True Flight Holdings
LLC
AA-5, AA-5A, AA-5B, AG- Figure G-3, Zone 2A, Zone 2A,
A16EA (True Flight Holdings Figure G-6 Figure G-18 [1] [2] [5] [7]
5B Figure G-5 Zone 3 Zone 3
LLC)
[Tiger Aircraft LLC]
Twin Commander
(Twin Commander 500, 500A, 500B, 500U,
6A1 Aircraft LLC) 500S, 520, 560, 560A, Figure G-10 Figure G-18 [1] [2] [5] [7]
[Twin Commander 560E
Aircraft Corporation]
Twin Commander
(Twin Commander 680, 680E, 720, 680F,
2A4 Aircraft LLC) 560-F, 680FL, 680FL(P), Figure G-10 Figure G-18 [1] [2] [5] [7]
[Twin Commander 685
Twin Commander
680F(P), 680T, 680V,
(Twin Commander
680W, 681, 690, 690A, Figure G-3, Zone 2A, Zone 2A,
2A4 Aircraft LLC) X Figure G-10 Figure G-18 [1] [2] [5] [7]
690B, 690C, 695, 695A, Figure G-5 Zone 3 Zone 3
[Twin Commander
690D, 695B
Twin Commander [1] [2] [5] [7]

(Twin Commander
Figure G-3, Zone 2A, Zone 2A, Requires GEA 110
A12SW Aircraft LLC) 700 Figure G-10 Figure G-18
Figure G-5 Zone 3 Zone 3 for interface to
[Twin Commander resistive fuel
Aircraft Corporation] quantity sensors.
Univair
415-D, 415-E, 415-G, F-1, Figure G-3, Zone 2A, Zone 2A,
A-787 (Univair Aircraft Figure G-6 Not Allowed [1] [2] [5] [7]
F-1A, A-2, A2-A, M10 Figure G-5 Zone 3 Zone 3
Corporation)

Rev. 13 Page D-40
[common name or
GI 275 Installation
Limited to MFD or
GTP 59 Location
Check Required
Type Certificate
previous make]
Lightning Zone
Lightning Zone
Lightning Zone
(TCDS Holder)
Aircraft Model
Fuel Pressure
GMU 11 / 44B
Aircraft Make
Standby ADI
Appendix G)
Appendix G)
Appendix G)
Designation
Empennage
Type (Ref.
Type (Ref.
Type (Ref.
Fuselage
Location
Number
Notes
Wing
Univair
(Univair Aircraft Figure G-3, Zone 2A, Zone 2A,
A-718 415-C, 415-CD Figure G-6 Not Allowed [1] [2] [5] [7]
[Mooney]
Univair
(Univair Aircraft Figure G-3, Zone 2A, Zone 2A,
A-767 108, 108-1, 108-2, 108-3 Figure G-6 Figure G-18 [1] [3] [5] [8]
[Stinson]
Viking Air Limited
DHC-6-1, DHC-6-100, Figure G-3, Zone 2A, Zone 2A,
A9EA (Viking Air Limited) X N/A Figure G-10 Figure G-18 [1] [2] [5] [7]
DHC-6-200, DHC-6-300 Figure G-5 Zone 3 Zone 3
[Bombardier Inc.]
Viking Air Limited
A9EA (Viking Air Limited) DHC-6-400 X N/A Figure G-10 Figure G-18 [1] [2] [5] [7]
[Bombardier Inc.]
Viking Air Limited
A-815 (Viking Air Limited) DHC-3 X Figure G-6 Figure G-18 [1] [2] [5] [7]
[Bombardier Inc.]
Viking Air Limited
DHC-2 Mark I, DHC-2 Figure G-3, Zone 2A, Zone 2A,
A-806 (Viking Air Limited) Figure G-6 Figure G-18 [1] [2] [5] [7]
Mark II Figure G-5 Zone 3 Zone 3
[Bombardier Inc.]
Viking Air Limited
A-806 (Viking Air Limited) DHC-2 Mark III N/A Figure G-6 Figure G-18 [1] [2] [5] [7]
[Bombardier Inc.]
Viking Air Limited
(Viking Air Limited) SC-7 Series 2, SC-7 Figure G-3, Zone 2A, Zone 2A,
A15EU X N/A Figure G-10 Not Allowed [1] [2] [5] [7]
[Short Brothers & Series 3 Figure G-5 Zone 3 Zone 3
Harland Ltd.]

Rev. 13 Page D-41
[common name or
GI 275 Installation
Limited to MFD or
GTP 59 Location
Check Required
Type Certificate
previous make]
Lightning Zone
Lightning Zone
Lightning Zone
(TCDS Holder)
Aircraft Model
Fuel Pressure
GMU 11 / 44B
Aircraft Make
Standby ADI
Appendix G)
Appendix G)
Appendix G)
Designation
Empennage
Type (Ref.
Type (Ref.
Type (Ref.
Fuselage
Location
Number
Notes
Wing
Vulcan Air S.p.A. Figure G-3, Zone 2A, Zone 2A,
A61EU SF600, SF600A N/A Figure G-10 Figure G-18 [1] [2] [5] [7]
(Vulcanair S.p.A.) Figure G-5 Zone 3 Zone 3
[1] [2] [3] [5] [7] [8]
A00075C Vulcanair S.p.A. Figure G-3, Zone 2A, Zone 2A, For main cabin tube
Vulcanair V1.0 X Figure G-6 Figure G-18
E (Vulcanair S.p.A.) Figure G-5 Zone 3 Zone 3 structure, [3]
applies; for other
areas, [2] applies.
P.68, P.68B, P.68C, [1] [2] [5] [7]

Vulcanair S.p.A.
P.68C-TC, P.68
(Vulcanair S.p.A.) Figure G-3, Zone 2A, Zone 2A, Requires GEA 110
A31EU "OBSERVER", P.68TC Figure G-10 Figure G-18
[Partenavia Costruzioni Figure G-5 Zone 3 Zone 3 for interface to
"OBSERVER", P.68 resistive fuel
Aeronautiche S.p.A]
"OBSERVER 2", P.68R quantity sensors.
Vulcanair S.p.A.
AP68TP-300
(Vulcanair S.p.A.) Figure G-3, Zone 2A, Zone 2A,
A31EU "SPARTACUS", AP68TP- N/A Figure G-10 Figure G-18 [1] [2] [5] [7]
[Partenavia Costruzioni Figure G-5 Zone 3 Zone 3
600 "VIATOR"
Aeronautiche S.p.A]
W.Z.D Enterprises Inc.
(W.Z.D Enterprises Figure G-3, Zone 2A, Zone 2A,
A-804 11A, 11E X Figure G-6 Figure G-18 [1] [2] [5] [7]
Inc.) Figure G-5 Zone 3 Zone 3
[JGS Properties, LLC]
WACO Classic Aircraft
Corporation
(WACO Classic Figure G-4, Figure G-6, Zone 2A, Zone 2A,
A18EA 2T-1A , 2T-1A-1 , 2T-1A-2 Figure G-18 [1] [3] [5]
Aircraft Corporation) Figure G-5 Figure G-16 Zone 3 Zone 3
[Great Lakes Aircraft
Company]
WACO
ATC 542 (The WACO Aircraft YMF N/A Figure G-16 Figure G-18 [1] [3] [5] [8]
Company)

Rev. 13 Page D-42
[common name or
GI 275 Installation
Limited to MFD or
GTP 59 Location
Check Required
Type Certificate
previous make]
Lightning Zone
Lightning Zone
Lightning Zone
(TCDS Holder)
Aircraft Model
Fuel Pressure
GMU 11 / 44B
Aircraft Make
Standby ADI
Appendix G)
Appendix G)
Appendix G)
Designation
Empennage
Type (Ref.
Type (Ref.
Type (Ref.
Fuselage
Location
Number
Notes
Wing
WSK "PZL-MIELEC"
OBR
A68EU (WSK PZL MIELEC PZL M20 03 X Figure G-10 Figure G-18 [1] [2] [5] [7]
and OBR SK MIELEC)
[PZL]
Zenair Figure G-3, Zone 2A, Zone 2A,
TA5CH CH2000 Figure G-6 Figure G-18 [1] [2] [5] [7]
(Zenair Ltd.) Figure G-5 Zone 3 Zone 3
ZLIN Aircraft a.s.
A76EU (ZLIN Aircraft a.s.) Z-242L, Z-143L Figure G-6 Figure G-18 [1] [2] [5] [7]
[MORAVAN a.s.]
ZLIN Aircraft a.s.
(ZLIN Aircraft a.s.) Figure G-3, Zone 2A, Zone 2A,
A30EU ZLIN 526L Figure G-6 Figure G-18 [1] [3] [5] [8]
[Moravan National Figure G-5 Zone 3 Zone 3
Corporation]
Notes:
[1] The GTP 59 cannot be installed on Zone 2A composite areas.
[2] The GTP 59 must be bonded to the aluminum skin. For details, refer to Section 4.6.2.
[3] The GTP 59 must be bonded to the metallic tube structure. For details, refer to Section 4.6.2.
[4] The GTP 59 must be isolated from the aircraft ground plane. For details, refer to Section 4.6.2.
[5] The GMU 44B must be bonded to the aircraft ground plane. For details, refer to Section 4.6.1.
[6] The GMU 44B must be isolated from the aircraft ground plane. For details, refer to Section 4.6.1.
[7] The GMU 44B/GMU 11 may be mounted in the wingtip provided that certain criteria are met. For details, refer to Section 4.6.1.
[8] Nonmetallic aircraft.
[9] Reserved.
[10] Reserved.
[11] Remote LRUs must be installed on existing structure designated by aircraft manufacturer for avionics installation.
[12] For wing lightning zones, equipment installation only allowed in aluminum wings. Equipment installation is NOT allowed in wooden wings.
[13] Wires must be routed behind metallic substructure (i.e., routed behind instrument panel/pedestal/circuit breaker panel, along lightning ground
bar/strip, inside lightning ground tube, or along other airframe ground plane).

Rev. 13 Page D-43
APPENDIX E ADVANCED AIRSPEED SETTINGS
E.1 Overview ........................................................................................................................................ E-2

E.2 Configuration Page Layout ............................................................................................................ E-2
E.3 Arc Ranges ..................................................................................................................................... E-3
E.3.1 Configuration ......................................................................................................................... E-3
E.3.2 Airspeed Tape Arc Range Example ....................................................................................... E-5
E.4 Overspeeds ..................................................................................................................................... E-6
E.4.1 Overspeeds Configuration ...................................................................................................... E-6
E.4.2 Overspeeds Configuration Examples ..................................................................................... E-7
E.5 Bugs ................................................................................................................................................ E-8
E.6 Markings ........................................................................................................................................ E-9
E.7 Mach Settings ................................................................................................................................. E-9
E.8 Airspeed Tape Configuration Examples ...................................................................................... E-10
E.8.1 Beechcraft Bonanza A36 (Example) .................................................................................... E-10
E.8.2 Columbia 400 (Example) ..................................................................................................... E-12

Rev. 13 Page E-1
E.1 Overview
The Advanced Configuration Type allows the configuration of the airspeed tape on the GI 275 ADI to
match any airspeed indicator. Color bands, markings, and bugs may all be individually configured. As an
additional option, Vne may be configured as Fixed or Variable with up to ten altitude and IAS level pairs
entered in Variable mode.
E.2 Configuration Page Layout

In Configuration mode, navigate to the Airspeed Configuration page (Setup → Airframe Configuration
→ Airspeed Configuration). Set the Mode to Advanced and touch the Configuration button. The
following settings may be changed in the configuration pages:
• Airspeed Tape Ranges - Set airspeed ranges and overspeed values (if Variable is selected for the
Vne/Vmo/Mmo)
• Bugs - Set bugs as required
• Markings - Set markings as required
Figure E-1 shows a summation of the configuration. Refer to the following sections for more detail.
a. b. c. a. Touch Tape Ranges.
b. Select an applicable
range.
c. Touch Enabled and
configure the Min and
Max per the POH.
Touch Back and
repeat for each
applicable range.
Refer to Appendix
Section E.3.
d. Scroll down and
touch Vne/Vmo/
d. e. f. Mmo.
e. If overspeeds are
fixed, enter Min Vne
speed. If variable, set
Mode to Variable and
select Enter
Overspeeds.
f. Select Mmo or Vne/
Vmo per the POH.
g. Configure Mmo or
Vne/Vmo. Refer to
Appendix Section E.4
h. From the Advanced
g. h. i. Airspeed page,
select Bugs and
configure the bugs
per the POH. Refer to
i. From the Advanced
Airspeed page,
select Markings and
configure the
markings per the
POH. Refer to
Figure E-1 Advanced Airspeed Configuration Pages

Rev. 13 Page E-2
E.3 Arc Ranges
E.3.1 Configuration
The information listed in Table E-1 must be obtained for every installation. Figure E-2 illustrates airspeed
tape arc ranges for the GI 275. The POH/AFM column lists a suggested location for obtaining this
information. Arc ranges are typically shown on the airspeed indicator that is being replaced, but should be
checked for accuracy if records indicate it has been replaced. Vne, whether fixed or variable, will be
displayed as the beginning of the red band at the end of the IAS tape.
Figure E-2 shows a visual correlation between arcs defined in POH/AFM Type Data and those configured
in the GI 275.
NOTE
These ranges must match the Type Data (POH/AFM or aircraft specifications) for the
specific aircraft being modified.
NOTE
If the airspeed values are listed in the Type Data (POH/AFM or aircraft specifications) for
both IAS and CAS, use the IAS values.
NOTE
Do not configure two arc ranges to overlap each other. Gaps are acceptable between
ranges, but overlaps are not.
Table E-1 Advanced Airframe-Specific Configuration Data – Arc Ranges
POH/AFM
Arc Color Description Notes
Section
If the aircraft has a defined WHITE or GREEN arc, set
the RED tape to ON. Set the Max value of the RED
tape to the lowest value of the WHITE or GREEN arc
(Vs0). A RED low-speed awareness tape will appear
RED Low speed below the lowest marked stall speed.
2 - Limitations
(LOW SPEEDS) awareness
If the aircraft does not have a defined WHITE or
GREEN arc, set the RED line to OFF, and enter the
lowest stall speed in the Stall Speed setting at the
bottom of the page.
Set the Min value to the bottom of the POH/AFM
defined range.
If WHITE and GREEN arcs overlap, set the Max value
to the beginning of the WHITE/GREEN arc.
If WHITE and GREEN arcs do not overlap, set the Max
Full flap value to the top of the POH/AFM or aircraft
WHITE 2 - Limitations
operational range specification defined range.
If a WHITE arc is not defined by the AFM/POH or
aircraft specifications, set both the Min and Max values
to the aircraft stall speed in the landing configuration
(Vs0). This setting will not display WHITE arc, but the
system needs it to characterize aircraft performance.
If the HALF WHITE arc range is not defined by the
Standard
HALF WHITE 2 - Limitations AFM/POH or aircraft specification, set to OFF. This
operational range
may sometimes be called a “narrow WHITE arc.”

Rev. 13 Page E-3
Table E-1 Advanced Airframe-Specific Configuration Data – Arc Ranges
POH/AFM
Arc Color Description Notes
Section
Overlap between If a WHITE/GREEN arc is not defined by the AFM/POH
standard or aircraft specification, set to OFF.
WHITE/GREEN operational and 2 - Limitations
flaps operational If WHITE and GREEN arcs overlap, configure to the
ranges range they overlap within.
If the GREEN arc is not defined by the AFM/POH or

aircraft specification, set to OFF.
If WHITE and GREEN arcs overlap, set Min value to
Standard the Max of WHITE/GREEN.
GREEN 2 - Limitations
operational range If the YELLOW arc is defined, set to the Min of the
YELLOW arc (Vno).
If the YELLOW arc is not defined, set Max value to
Vno/Vne.
If the YELLOW arc is defined by the AFM/ POH or
aircraft specification, set Min value equal to Maximum
Caution / smooth structural speed (Vno).
YELLOW air operational 2 - Limitations
Max value should be configured to Vne or the highest
range
value of Vne if variable.
If the YELLOW arc is not defined, set to OFF.
Never exceed If defined as a fixed value, set to Fixed, and enter
speed / max POH/AFM defined Vne/Vmo as the Min value.
Vne/Vmo/Mmo operating speed / 2 - Limitations
max operating If variable with altitude, set to Variable and set
mach number overspeeds in accordance with Appendix Section E.4.

Rev. 13 Page E-4
Airspeed Tape Arc Ranges Airspeed Tape Arc Ranges
For Vne Aircraft For Vmo / Mmo Aircraft
(Not to Scale) (Not to Scale)
Vne Vmo
GI 275 POH / AFM GI 275

YELLOW Defined YELLOW
TAPE RANGE Yellow Arc ARC RANGE
Vno
GI 275 GI 275
GREEN GREEN
TAPE RANGE ARC RANGE
Vfe Vfe
POH / AFM
Defined
INCREASING IAS
INCREASING IAS
Green Arc
GI 275 GI 275 POH / AFM
WHITE/GREEN WHITE/GREEN Defined
TAPE RANGE ARC RANGE Thin White Arc
POH / AFM
Defined
White Arc
Vs1 Vs1
GI 275 GI 275 POH / AFM

WHITE WHITE Defined
TAPE RANGE ARC RANGE White Arc
Vs0 Vs0
GI 275 GI 275
RED RED
TAPE RANGE ARC RANGE
Figure E-2 Airspeed Tape Arc Range Diagrams
E.3.2 Airspeed Tape Arc Range Example

Section 2 (Limitations) of the Beech Bonanza (A36) POH/AFM defines a white arc (61-124 KIAS), green
arc (68-167 KIAS), and a yellow arc (167-205 KIAS). As the white and green arcs overlap, they must be
entered in separately.
• Where there is no overlap in the POH/AFM defined white arc range, configure the WHITE tape to
this range (61-68 KIAS)
• Where there is overlap of the POH/AFM defined white and green arcs, configure the
WHITE/GREEN tape to this range (68-124 KIAS)
• Where there is no overlap in the POH/AFM defined green arc, configure the GREEN tape to this
range (124-167 KIAS)
• Because the POH/AFM defined yellow arc does not overlap any other arcs, configure the
YELLOW tape to this range (167-205 KIAS)

Rev. 13 Page E-5
E.4 Overspeeds
E.4.1 Overspeeds Configuration
NOTE
If the POH/AFM defines multiple Vne points, and the last point defines Vne at the aircraft
operating ceiling, the POH/AFM defined points must be used to configure the GI 275.
NOTE
If the Vne is defined as varying with altitude, and the Vne at the operating ceiling is not
defined, then the last ALT/IAS point entered must be calculated at the aircraft’s operating
ceiling as a linear line from the last ALT/IAS point. In all cases, the last point entered
must define Vne/Vmo at the operating ceiling.
If the aircraft has a designated Mmo and Mmo level, or is specified as having a Vne/Vmo that varies with
altitude, set the Vne/Vmo/Mmo selection to Variable and configure the GI 275 airspeed tape to the aircraft
specifications using the Enter Overspeeds button. If only the Mmo/Mmo Level or the variable Vne is
defined, then those fields that are undefined, respectively, should not be configured.
NOTE
The Enter Overspeeds button does not appear unless Vne/Vmo/Mmo Mode is set to
“Variable”.
NOTE
When Overspeeds are configured, the GI 275 ADI will display a variable red overspeed
range similar to a barber pole.
The Mmo Value and Mmo Level fields define a minimum altitude where Mmo is a limiting factor on
performance. Above the Mmo Level, Mmo may define the start of the red overspeed range. The Vne/Vmo
altitude and IAS section defines limitations on IAS at specified altitudes. The first ALT/IAS point entered
will define Vne/Vmo at all altitudes below the altitude specified.
If Vne/Vmo is only defined once, then this single point should be entered with the ALT field being the
aircraft’s operating ceiling.
However, if Vne/Vmo is defined as varying with altitude, then at least two points will be required – the last
two of which will define a linear line for all altitudes past the last point entered. As such, the last point
entered must define Vne/Vmo at the aircraft’s operating ceiling.
These overspeed configurations must match the Type Data (POH/AFM) for the specific aircraft being
modified.

Rev. 13 Page E-6
E.4.2 Overspeeds Configuration Examples
Example 1
Section 2 (Limitations) of the Columbia 400 POH/AFM defines Vne at 12,000FT as 230 KIAS and at
FL250 as 174 KIAS. As such, the configuration should be entered as follows:
• 12,000FT at 230KT
• 25,000FT at 174KT
Example 2
Hypothetically, if the Vne was not defined at the operating ceiling, the configuration would then rely on the
POH/AFM Section 2 statement that Vne decreases by 4.4 KT per 1,000 feet of altitude above 12,000 feet.
Here the calculation for Vne at the aircraft operating ceiling would be:
Vne= 230 KT – [(25,000FT – 12,000FT) * 4.4 KT / 1,000 FT] = 172.8 KT
As such, the configuration entered would be:
• 12,000FT at 230KT
• 25,000FT at 172KT

Rev. 13 Page E-7
E.5 Bugs
The information obtained in Table E-2 must be obtained for each installation. The POH/AFM column lists
a suggested location for obtaining this information. If a marking is not defined for the aircraft, then it
should be configured as OFF.
NOTE
These markings must match the Type Data (POH/AFM or aircraft specification) for the
NOTE
If the airspeed values are listed in the Type Data (POH/AFM) for both IAS and CAS, use
the IAS values.
Table E-2 Advanced Airframe-Specific Configuration Data – Bugs

POH/AFM
Bug Description Notes
Section
3 – Emergency Optional.
GLIDE Glide speed
Procedures Set to 0 KT if not listed in the POH/AFM.
Optional.
4 – Normal Set to 0 KT if not listed in the POH/AFM.
VX Best angle-of-climb speed
Procedures If there are two speeds listed (gear up/gear
down), use the speed listed for gear down.
Optional.
4 – Normal Set to 0 KT if not listed in the POH/AFM.
VY Best rate-of-climb speed
Procedures If there are two speeds listed (gear up/gear
down), use the speed listed for gear up.
Optional.
4 – Normal
VR Rotation speed Typically set to rotation speed.
Procedures
Set to 0 KT if not listed in the POH/AFM.
Alternately, by pressing the Type buttons, the bugs can be changed to VREF, V1, and V2.
Table E-3 Advanced Airframe-Specific Configuration Data – Alternate Bugs

Bug Description POH/AFM Section Notes
VREF Landing reference speed 4 – Normal Procedures [1]
V1 Commit to fly speed 4 – Normal Procedures [1]
V2 Takeoff safety speed 4 – Normal Procedures [1]
VR Rotation speed 4 – Normal Procedures [1]

Notes:
[1] These speeds generally apply to only high-performance airplanes and must be calculated
before each flight. The recommended default value is 0 KT.

Rev. 13 Page E-8
E.6 Markings
The information obtained in Table E-4 must be obtained for each installation. The POH/AFM column lists
a suggested location for obtaining this information. If a marking is not defined for the aircraft, then it
should be configured as OFF.
NOTE
These markings must match the Type Data (POH/AFM or aircraft specification) for the
NOTE
If the airspeed values are listed in the Type Data (POH/AFM) for both IAS and CAS, use
the IAS values.
Table E-4 Advanced Airframe-Specific Configuration Data – Markings

POH/AFM
Marking Description Notes
Section
Maximum landing gear Set to OFF for fixed gear
Vle 2 – Limitations
extended speed aircraft.
Typically marks the single Blue radial on ASI of light twins.
3 – Emergency
Blue Bar engine best rate-of-climb speed Set to OFF for single-engine
Procedures
for a twin-engine aircraft aircraft.
Typically marks the minimum Lower red radial on ASI of light
controllable airspeed for twin- 3 – Emergency twins.
Red Bar
engine aircraft with only one Procedures Set to OFF for single-engine
engine operational (Vmca) aircraft.
If a fixed Red/White bar (not a
Varies. Sometimes used as a barber pole) is shown in the
Red/White Bar 2 – Limitations
fixed point Vne marking POH/AFM, set to given value.
Otherwise, set to OFF.
If defined in POH/AFM, set to
A small white triangle. Meaning
White Triangle 2 – Limitations given value. Otherwise, set to
varies by airframe
OFF.
E.7 Mach Settings

Used to configure display of Mach speed. Refer to Section 5.6.1.1 for configuration information.

Rev. 13 Page E-9
E.8 Airspeed Tape Configuration Examples
This section compares two examples of GI 275 airspeed tape configuration with their respective existing
ASI configuration and tape definitions.
NOTE
In all cases, the specific aircraft’s Type Data (POH/AFM) must be considered the definitive source
for Arc Range, Marking, and Bug configuration values.
E.8.1 Beechcraft Bonanza A36 (Example)
AFM Definitions
Marking Value AFM Section
White arc 56-123 KIAS
Green arc 62-166 KIAS
2 – Limitations
Yellow arc 166-204 KIAS
Red line 204 KIAS
3 – Emergency
Glide 110 KIAS
Procedures
Vx 78 KIAS
4 – Normal
Vy 96 KIAS
Procedures
Vr 70 KIAS
Vle 153 KIAS 2 – Limitations
CURRENT ASI
Figure E-3 Beechcraft Bonanza A36 Current ASI and Tape Markings

Rev. 13 Page E-10
Figure E-4 Beechcraft Bonanza A36 Equivalent IAS Tape and Airspeed Configuration

Rev. 13 Page E-11
E.8.2 Columbia 400 (Example)
POH/AFM Definitions
POH/AFM
Marking Value
Section
White arc 60-117 KIAS
Green arc 73-181 KIAS
2 – Limitations
Yellow arc 181-230 KIAS
Red line 230 KIAS
230 KIAS
Vne [1]
174 KIAS 2 – Limitations
Vne @ FL250
3 – Emergency
Glide 108 KIAS
Procedures
Vx 82 KIAS
4 – Normal
Vy 110 KIAS
Procedures
Vr 110 KIAS
[1] Decrease 4.4 knots for each 1000 feet
above 12,000 feet (Press. Alt.)
CURRENT ASI
Figure E-5 Columbia 400 Current ASI and Tape Markings

Rev. 13 Page E-12
Vne = 230 KT
@ FL 075
Vne = 213 KT
@ FL 160
Figure E-6 Columbia 400 Equivalent IAS Tape and Airspeed Configuration

Rev. 13 Page E-13
APPENDIX F EIS GAUGE LAYOUT
F.1 Main EIS Page ..................................................................................................................................F-2

F.2 AUX EIS Page ..................................................................................................................................F-7
F.3 CHT/EGT Page.................................................................................................................................F-8
F.4 Fuel Page...........................................................................................................................................F-9
F.5 Summary Page ................................................................................................................................F-10
F.6 Gauge Markings..............................................................................................................................F-11
F.6.1 Caution and Warning Alerts.....................................................................................................F-11
F.6.2 Gauge with Varying Arc Width ...............................................................................................F-12
This appendix provides guidance for configuring EIS gauge layouts for the GI 275 EIS display. Any
deviation from the requirements contained within will require the installer to obtain additional approval.
The gauge layout of the GI 275 may differ between installations due to various factors. Gauge layouts are
generated automatically by the GI 275 depending on the selected engine sensors, specific gauge
configuration and markings, and the number of EIS displays installed. Guidelines for how the EIS gauge
layout is generated are given in the following sections.
Not all aircraft and the engine indications are compatible with the GI 275 EIS due to the installed engine
gauges and the associated markings. For incompatibility cases, the original gauge must be retained. Refer
to Section 2 for limitations.
The GI 275 EIS provides up to five different pages depending on the system configuration: Main EIS
page, AUX EIS page, CHT/EGT page, Fuel page, and Summary page. Each page has three distinct
display sections: top, middle, and bottom.
NOTE
The gauge minimum and maximum limits may be adjusted to optimize pilot interpretation
of the gauge; however, all limitations in the POH/AFM or other approved aircraft data
must be displayed on the gauge.

Rev. 13 Page F-1
F.1 Main EIS Page
The Main EIS page is divided into four sections: top, bottom, middle-left, which contains a CHT/EGT
Graph, and middle-right, which contains strip gauges.
The following is an example of the GI 275 Main EIS page.
Figure F-1 Example Main EIS Page
Top Full-Time Gauges

The GI 275 EIS provides a section at the top to display specific gauge information on all pages. This
includes RPM and Manifold Pressure (if applicable). Additionally, a Prop Sync Wheel (conventional twin-
engine only) or Percent Power can be configured to be displayed.
Percent Power requires the following gauge inputs: RPM, Manifold Pressure, Fuel Flow, and OAT, as well
as inputting the Max Rated Horsepower, Max MAP, RPM at Max HP, and the Minimum Brake Specific
Fuel Consumption (BSFC). Refer to Section 5.7.1 for engine configuration settings.
The Manifold Pressure gauge can be configured to show on the left side or on the right side of the RPM
gauge. Refer to Figure F-2 for examples.
Figure F-2 Top Full-Time Gauge Examples
Bottom Full-Time Fuel Gauges

The GI 275 EIS provides a section at the bottom to display specific gauge information on all pages. If Main
Fuel is configured, the Main Fuel Quantity beakers will be shown on every page in the bottom center
(single or Left/Right). If Fuel Quantity is not configured, Outside Air Temperature will be displayed in this
location. If Fuel Quantity and OAT are not configured, Time (UTC) will be displayed full-time in the
bottom center position.

Rev. 13 Page F-2
Bottom Full-time AUX/Tip Fuel Quantity and Electrical Gauges
If AUX/Tip tanks are configured, AUX/Tip Fuel beaker gauges will be displayed to the left and right of the
Main Fuel Quantity beaker gauges. If AUX/Tip tanks are not configured but digital gauges (e.g.,
Alternator, Battery, Bus - Volts/AMPS) are configured, up to two digital gauges will be displayed in the
bottom left and right corners. If a single AUX gauge is configured, its fuel beaker gauge will be displayed
in the lower left corner. Additionally, if a single AUX gauge and only one digital gauge are configured, the
digital gauge will also populate next to the AUX gauge in the lower right position. Refer to Figure F-3 for
examples.
The priority for populating bottom left and bottom right full-time gauges is as follows:
(With Red or Yellow Markings)
1. AUX/Tip Fuel (left/right center) – always highest priority over any digital gauge
2. Alternator Amps
3. Battery Volts
4. Bus Volts
5. Battery Amps
(Without Red or Yellow Markings)
6. Alternator Amps
7. Battery Volts
8. Bus Volts
9. Battery Amps IAT
Figure F-3 Bottom Full-Time Gauge Examples

For twin-engine aircraft, the Fuel Quantity gauge must only be shown on one EIS unit. Toggle the Show
button in the EIS Gauges menu on one of the two EIS displays so that the Fuel Quantity gauge is only
shown on one unit.

Rev. 13 Page F-3
Middle Left CHT/EGT Graph
The GI 275 EIS provides a 4 or 6-cylinder CHT/EGT graph in the middle left of the Main EIS page. This
section displays CHT, EGT, and if configured, Primary EGT or TIT (single or dual) in a bar graph layout
with digital readouts above the graph for the hottest cylinder or the user-selected cylinder. Refer to Figure
F-4 for examples.
Figure F-4 CHT/EGT Graph Examples
Middle Right Strip Gauges

The GI 275 EIS provides a section in the middle right of the display that arranges up to four strip gauges or
up to three strip gauges with two digital gauges. This section layout will differ depending on the displayed
gauges and the alerting lines configured with the corresponding gauge. Refer to Figure F-5 for layout
examples.
Figure F-5 Strip Gauge Examples

The gauges in the middle right of the Main EIS page follow a gauge priority scheme as shown below.
Number 1 is the highest priority gauge and number 17 is the lowest priority gauge. The section populates
the gauge layout from top to bottom following the prioritization scheme listed below.
The following are exceptions to the priority list:
• If AUX/Tip tanks are configured and at least one digital gauge is configured with a red/yellow
alert, this gauge will take the top slot
• The Fuel Flow gauge will always be placed in the fourth slot (near the fuel quantity) unless it is
unmarked with an alert and four other gauges are marked with a red/yellow alert
(With Red or Yellow Markings)
1. Oil Pressure
2. Oil Temperature
3. Fuel Flow
4. Fuel Pressure
5. Carb Temp
6. CDT
7. IAT

Rev. 13 Page F-4
8. CDT/IAT Diff
9. Digital
a. ALT AMPS
b. BATT Volts
c. BUS Volts
d. BATT AMPS
(Without Red or Yellow Markings)
10. Oil Pressure
11. Oil Temperature
12. Fuel Flow
13. Fuel Pressure
14. Carb Temp
15. CDT
16. IAT
17. CDT/IAT Diff
Figure F-6 Strip Gauge Priority Examples
The nomenclature with examples shown below can be used to determine EIS gauge placement:
[S1] Oil Press, unless Aux Fuel and alerting digital gauges are configured; if so, shift this and the
subsequent gauges down.
[S2] Oil Temp
[S3] 1. Highest priority marked gauge
2. Fuel Pressure
3. Highest priority unmarked gauge
[S4] 1. Next highest priority marked gauge
2. Fuel Flow
3. Next highest priority unmarked gauge
Refer to Figure F-7 for more information.

Rev. 13 Page F-5
Figure F-7 Strip Gauge Diagram
All alerting (i.e., red or yellow markings) gauges must be shown on the Main EIS page of the EIS display.
Some aircraft may have more alerting gauges than the GI 275 can display on a single EIS unit. If not all
alerting gauges can be configured for display on the Main EIS page, the original gauges must be retained.

Rev. 13 Page F-6
F.2 AUX EIS Page
The AUX EIS page is divided into four sections: top, bottom, middle left, and middle right. This page
provides supplemental EIS gauges and information. The top arc segment as well as the bottom segment
with Fuel Quantity are unchanged from the Main EIS page. No red/yellow alerting gauges can be
configured on the AUX EIS page without being displayed on the Main EIS page as well.
The middle left section of the AUX EIS page provides two miscellaneous fields that may be populated
differently depending on the EIS sensors displayed and gauge markings configured. The top field is a user-
selectable field for miscellaneous information.
The bottom field is reserved for digital gauges or another user-selectable field for miscellaneous
information. If AUX/Tip tanks are configured, as well as digital gauges, this space will display the digital
gauges (up to four). If more than two digital gauges are configured with or without AUX/Tip tanks, the
digital gauges will all be displayed in this field (up to four), even if the information is repeated from the
Main EIS page. Refer to Figure F-8 for examples.
Figure F-8 Left Side Aux Gauges Examples

The middle right section of the AUX EIS page provides two user-selectable fields for miscellaneous
information if no unmarked strip gauges are displayed on the AUX EIS page. If there are unmarked strip
gauges that do not fit onto the Main EIS page due to other priorities, these gauges will populate the middle
right of the AUX EIS page. Up to four strip gauges can be displayed on the AUX EIS page. One strip
gauge will replace the lower user-selectable field. Two or more strip gauges will replace both user-
selectable fields and will populate the gauges from the top down based on the strip gauge priorities. Refer
to Figure F-9 for examples.
Figure F-9 Right Side Aux Gauges Examples

The bottom of the AUX EIS page has the full-time center position for Fuel Qty, OAT, or Time, with spaces
for digital gauges on the left and right. If unmarked digital gauges cannot be displayed on the Main EIS
page due to other gauge priorities (such as AUX Fuel), they will be displayed on the bottom-left and
bottom-right, beginning with the higher priority digital gauge on the left. Refer to Figure F-10 for
examples.
Figure F-10 Bottom AUX Gauges Examples

Rev. 13 Page F-7
F.3 CHT/EGT Page
The CHT/EGT page is dedicated to CHT and EGT information, as well as Primary EGT or TIT, if
applicable. Similarly to the Main EIS and AUX EIS pages, the top section displays full-time gauges and
the bottom center area displays fuel quantity.
The bar graph on the CHT/EGT page will populate with 4 or 6 pairs (depending on engine configuration)
of CHT and EGT bars for each cylinder. If TIT sensors are installed and configured on the GI 275, then
one or two (depending on configuration) bars for TIT will be displayed on the right-hand side of the CHT/
EGT page. Alternatively, if a Primary EGT sensor is installed and configured, a bar for Primary EGT will
be displayed on the right-hand side of the CHT/EGT page. There is also a space below the CHT/EGT bar
graph where Fuel Flow is displayed, if installed and configured.
Figure F-11 CHT/EGT Page Examples

The CHT/EGT page can be cycled through three different modes that change display aspects of the CHT/
EGT bar graph for different pilot operations, such as Lean Assist or viewing cylinders in Normalized
layout during cruise.

Rev. 13 Page F-8
F.4 Fuel Page
If a Fuel Flow sensor is installed and configured, a Fuel page is available on the GI 275 EIS. Similar to the
AUX EIS and CHT/EGT pages, the top and bottom of the Fuel page retains the same full-time gauges and
fuel quantity gauges. The Fuel page will show Estimated Fuel and Endurance based on the Fuel Flow
sensor data. It will also show the Fuel Flow gauge with the fuel computer “fuel used” value.
Figure F-12 Fuel Page without GPS Source

Additionally, if a GPS source is interfaced with the GI 275 EIS, the Fuel page will display estimated range
and efficiency based on fuel flow sensor data and will give fuel and endurance estimates for a flight plan
waypoint if one is loaded on the interfaced GPS.
Figure F-13 Fuel Page with GPS Source

Rev. 13 Page F-9
F.5 Summary Page
The Summary page provides supplemental flight summary information. Similarly to the Main EIS and
AUX EIS pages, the top and bottom of the Summary page retain the full-time gauges and Fuel Quantity
gauges. The Summary page will additionally show Aircraft Timer information, RPM, and Temperature
data, as well as Fuel and Lean data.
Figure F-14 Summary Page – Aircraft Timers
Figure F-15 Summary Page – RPM and Temp Data
Figure F-16 Summary Page – Fuel and Lean Data

Rev. 13 Page F-10
F.6 Gauge Markings
F.6.1 Caution and Warning Alerts
The GI 275 EIS will generate alerts for gauges with configured red or yellow markings by highlighting the
numerical value in a red or yellow background, respectively. For strip and digital readout gauges, a
flashing alert triangle is generated in the top left of the display in addition to highlighting the numerical
gauge value. This alert triangle will persist on all EIS pages. Touching the triangle will stop the flashing
and return the display to the Main EIS page. The full-time arc gauges do not generate alert banners.
Figure F-17 Caution Alert (Flashing and Acknowledged)
Figure F-18 Warning Alert (Flashing and Acknowledged)

If both a Caution and a Warning alert have triggered, the flashing Warning alert triangle will be displayed,
and each numerical gauge value will flash the appropriate color (yellow for Caution and red for Warning).
Touching the flashing Warning alert triangle will acknowledge both the Caution and Warning alerts. The
non-flashing Warning alert triangle will persist until the alert condition is no longer true, in which case the
non-flashing Caution alert triangle will be displayed as long as that alert condition is true.
Figure F-19 Caution and Warning Alerts (Flashing and Acknowledged)

Rev. 13 Page F-11
If an acknowledged Warning alert triangle is currently displayed and a new Caution alert triggers, a
flashing Caution alert triangle will display in place of the Warning alert triangle. Once the Caution alert is
acknowledged, the alert triangle will default to the higher priority non-flashing Warning alert triangle.
Figure F-20 New Caution Alert with Ongoing Warning Alert

Certain gauges (Oil Pressure, Manifold Pressure, and Fuel Pressure) do not trigger alerts until the engine is
started. Gauges with red or yellow markings must be displayed on the Main EIS page. Green, blue, and
white markings do not produce alerts or affect gauge prioritization, and may be shown on the AUX EIS
page.
F.6.2 Gauge with Varying Arc Width

The GI 275 EIS display does not provide varying gauge arc width configuration options, as seen in
Figure F-21. If a gauge that contains a varying arc width is being replaced, it must be configured so that the
arc length is continuous for the intended length of the colored arc. Refer to Figure F-21 as an example.
Varying Gauge Arc Width Continuous Gauge Arc Width

Example Example
Figure F-21 Varying Gauge Arc

Rev. 13 Page F-12
APPENDIX G HIRF AND LIGHTNING PROTECTION
G.1 Shielded Wire .................................................................................................................................G-2

G.2 Lightning Zones for GTP 59 and GMU 11/44B ............................................................................G-3
G.2.1 Wings .................................................................................................................................... G-3
G.2.2 Fuselage ................................................................................................................................G-8
G.2.3 Empennage ..........................................................................................................................G-18
G.3 Example Lightning Zoning Diagrams ..........................................................................................G-19

Rev. 13 Page G-1
G.1 Shielded Wire
When extending existing sensor wiring, it is required to maintain continuity of the wire shield.
For the shielded wire(s), the shield on both sides of the open segment must be reconnected after the splice
is complete with a spacing of approximately 3 inches or less in total length.
1. Use solder sleeves with an insulated shield drain to jumper the shield ends together.
2. Protect the open segment of wire with fusion tape.
3. Start the wrap by making a complete turn of the tape around the cable approximately 0.5 inches
from the repair area.
4. Overlap the preceding wrap by 50%.
5. Extend the tape over the repair area by approximately 0.5 inches.
6. Use lacing tape to spot tie the end of the fusion tape.
1/2" 3" Segment opening 1/2"

Insulated shield drain
Shielded wire Fusion tape Lacing cord Shielded wire

Figure G-1 Shielded Wire Splice

Rev. 13 Page G-2
G.2 Lightning Zones for GTP 59 and GMU 11/44B
This section provides lightning zoning diagrams for various types of aircraft to facilitate correct placement
of the GMU 11/44B and GTP 59. Additional restrictions related to the placement of the GMU 11/44B and
GTP 59 can be found in Section 4.6.1 and Section 4.6.2, respectively.
The zoning levels correspond to the severity of lightning strikes and probability of occurrence on the
aircraft. The order of severity starting with the safest zone is Zone 3, 2A, 2B, 1C, and 1A/1B. The
GMU 44B and GTP 59 cannot be installed in Zones 1A, 1B, 1C, or 2B.
All diagrams in this appendix use the legend shown in Table . The zoning described is split into the
following: wings, fuselage, and empennage. For the particular airframe, the applicable wings, fuselage,
and empennage zoning should be merged to get a complete zonal definition. The zoning figures applicable
to any particular model are found in Table D-1. If there is a region of overlapping zones, the more severe
zone should always be applied (e.g., if Zone 2A and 1A overlap in a region, then the overlapping region
should be considered Zone 1A). Examples of complete lightning zoning diagrams can be found in
Appendix Section G.3.
Shading Zone Shading Zone
Zone 1A Zone 2A
Zone 1B Zone 2B
Zone 1C Zone 3
Figure G-2 Lightning Zoning Legend
G.2.1 Wings
The different zoning for wingtips and wings are contained in the following subsections.
G.2.1.1 Wingtips
G.2.1.1.1 Aircraft Not Limited to VFR Operation
NOTE
This zoning section is applicable to those aircraft models that are not limited to VFR
operation only in Table D-1. For zoning of models limited to VFR operation only, refer to
Appendix Section G.2.1.1.2.
Zoning of various types of wingtips is shown in Figure G-3. Figure G-3A shows zoning for straight
wingtips. Figure G-3B shows zoning for curved wingtips. The zones are similar to those of straight
wingtips. The main difference is that Zone 1 extends from the outboard edge of the wing past the tangent
point of the chord and 0.5 meters inboard.
Figure G-3C shows zoning for winglets. Note that the winglet figure shows a flattened winglet. Winglet
classifications are very similar to those of curved wingtips. The main difference is that Zone 1 extends
from the outboard edge of the wing past the tangent point of the winglet and 0.5 meters inboard.
Figure G-3D shows zoning for tip tanks. The rule that applies to tip tanks is very similar to that of the
curved wing. The main difference is that Zone 1 extends 0.5 meters past the inboard edge of the tip tank.

Rev. 13 Page G-3
0.6 m
0.6 m
0.5 m
0.5 m Tangent Point
0.15 m 0.15 m
A (STRAIGHT WINGTIP) B (CURVED WINGTIP)
0.6 m
0.6 m
0.5 m
0.5 m
Tangent Point
Tangent Point
0.15 m
0.15 m
C (WINGLET) D (TIP TANKS)
Figure G-3 Zoning for Wingtips on Aircraft Not Limited to VFR Operation

Rev. 13 Page G-4
G.2.1.1.2 Aircraft Limited to VFR Operation
This zoning section is applicable to those aircraft models that are limited to VFR operation only in
Appendix D. For zoning of models that are not limited to VFR operation only, refer to Appendix Section
G.2.1.1.1.
NOTE
The aircraft must have a position light in the wing tip area as a prerequisite for this STC.
If there is no position light on the wing, then no Zone 3 exists and the GTP 59 cannot be installed on this
particular aircraft. For those aircraft identified as VFR in Appendix D, the following criteria is used to
determine the Zone 3 area:
• Zone 1A/1B finishes as shown in Figure G-3 or 0.5 meters inboard from the inboard edge of the
position light, whichever is the greater distance from the outboard edge of the wing tip, as shown
in Figure G-4
• Zone 2A/2B extends a total of 2.1 meters inboard of Zone 1A/1B
• Zone 3 extends inboard of Zone 2A/2B from the wing tip and stops at another Zone 1A/1B or
2A/2B determined from other areas of Appendix Section G.2.2

Rev. 13 Page G-5
2.1 m
2.1 m 0.5 m
0.5 m Position Light
Position Light Tangent Point
0.15 m 0.15 m
A (STRAIGHT WINGTIP) B (CURVED WINGTIP)
2.1 m
2.1 m
0.5 m 0.5 m
Position Light Position Light
Tangent Point
Tangent Point
0.15 m
0.15 m
C (WINGLET) D (TIP TANKS)
Figure G-4 Zoning for Wingtips on Aircraft Limited to VFR Operation

Rev. 13 Page G-6
G.2.1.2 Landing Gear
The landing gear is considered Zone 1A. The struts that connect the landing gear to the wings are Zone 2A.
Each side of landing gear is zoned individually. If there is a single strut connecting the landing gear to the
wing, then the inboard and outboard edges of the landing gear should be used for zoning instead of using
the connection point of the wing and the strut. In addition to the zoning shown in Figure G-5, the zoning
described for the fuselage and wings also applies. The floats for a float-mounted fuselage have not been
zoned because they do not influence the zoning of the bottom of the fuselage. Neither the GTP 59 nor the
GMU 11/44B can be mounted on landing gear, including floats, or its struts.
Figure G-5 Zoning for Wings Affected by Landing Gear

Rev. 13 Page G-7
G.2.2 Fuselage
This section describes the zoning for several different types of fuselages. The empennage is zoned in
Appendix Section G.2.3. Aft of every Zone 2A is a 0.15 meter Zone 2B (i.e., Zone 2A is followed by a
0.15 meter Zone 2B). Although Zone 2B areas are marked on the diagrams, sometimes their widths are not
defined (0.15 meters should be used in these cases). The horizontal stabilizer of the tail is not zoned
because neither the GTP 59 nor the GMU 11/44B can be mounted there. In addition, neither the GTP 59
nor the GMU 11/44B can be mounted within 0.5 meters of the rear-most point of the fuselage. Appendix
Section G.2.3 explains the conditions under which the GTP 59 or GMU 11/44B can be mounted on the
vertical stabilizer. Although all diagrams show low-wing aircraft, the same zoning can be applied to high-
wing aircraft. The values d1 and d2 are defined as follows:
d1 = 1.3 m (51.2 in)
d2 = 2.6 m (102.4 in)
G.2.2.1 Single-Propeller Aircraft

Zoning of low- or high-wing aircraft with single propellers is shown in Figure G-6. The area of the nose
immediately aft of the propeller is Zone 3. The 0.6-meter distance should be measured from the outboard-
most edge of the fuselage or the tip of the propeller, whichever is longer. Figure G-8 shows the case of an
aircraft with a curved fuselage. The portion of the fuselage that extends 1.3 meters aft of the propeller
blades is Zone 1C. However, the bottom centerline is Zone 2A, and it is acceptable to mount the GTP 59
there.
Figure G-6 Zoning for a Single Propeller (Low- or High-Wing)

Rev. 13 Page G-8
A
Figure G-7 Zoning for a Low- or High-Wing Canard with a Rear-Mounted Propeller

Rev. 13 Page G-9
A
NOTE
The bottom centerline is Zone 2A, and it is acceptable to mount the GTP 59 there.
Figure G-8 Zoning for a Low- or High-Wing Aircraft with a Curved Lower Fuselage

Rev. 13 Page G-10
A
B
Figure G-9 Zoning for a Single, Rear-Mounted Prop above Fuselage

Rev. 13 Page G-11
G.2.2.2 Aircraft with Multiple Propellers
Zoning of low- or high-wing aircraft with twin front-mounted propellers is shown in Figure G-10. The text
below assumes the aircraft fuselage and wing are constructed of metal. Note that Zone 2A can overlap onto
the nacelles if they are within 0.6 meters outboard of the fuselage.
Zoning of low- or high-wing aircraft with rear-mounted twin propellers is shown in Figure G-11. The text
below assumes the aircraft fuselage and wing are constructed of metal.
For an empennage with a third engine, the GTP 59 cannot be located in the empennage. Therefore, the
zoning for this third engine area has been omitted from the diagrams below. The GTP 59 and GMU 11/44B
for this aircraft should be located in Zone 3 or Zone 2A on the bottom of the fuselage and wings.
Figure G-10 Zoning for Front-Mounted Twin Propellers (Low- or High-Wing)

Rev. 13 Page G-12
A
NOTE
Although the engine nacelles are shown as Zone 3, they may be Zone 2A if the engine falls
within the Zone 2 area of the wing (within 0.6 meters outboard from fuselage edge).
Figure G-11 Zoning for Rear-Mounted Twin Propellers (Low- or High-Wing)

Rev. 13 Page G-13
A
NOTE
Nothing can be mounted in the tail boom of the aircraft.
Figure G-12 Zoning for Front- and Rear-Mounted Propellers (Low- or High-Wing)

Rev. 13 Page G-14
A
Figure G-13 Zoning for High-Wing with Front and Rear Propellers Mounted Above
Fuselage

Rev. 13 Page G-15
A
B
Figure G-14 Zoning for Low- or High-Wing Canard with Twin Jet Engines
0.15m
d2
0.5m 0.15m
d1
TOP (VIEW LOOKING DOWN)
BOTTOM (VIEW LOOKING UP)
0.5m 0.15m
0.15m
Figure G-15 Zoning for Low or High Wing Canard with Twin Rear-Facing Props

Rev. 13 Page G-16
G.2.2.3 Biplanes
Figure G-16 shows how biplanes can be classified using previous figures. The top and bottom of both
wings will be zoned using Figure G-4, while the fuselage and the mid-sections of the wing can be zoned
using Figure G-6.
Figure G-16 Zoning for Single-Propeller Biplane
G.2.2.4 Aircraft with Jet Engines

Zoning of low- or high-wing twin jet engine aircraft is shown in Figure G-17.
d2
0.5m
d1
TOP (VIEW LOOKING DOWN)
BOTTOM (VIEW LOOKING UP)
0.5m
d2
d1
B
Figure G-17 Single Jet Engines with Two Inlets Zoning, Low or High Wing

Rev. 13 Page G-17
G.2.3 Empennage
If the GTP 59 and GMU 11/44B cannot be mounted in other areas of the aircraft that are Zone 3 locations,
it is acceptable for metal aircraft with one of the three traditional empennages shown in Figure G-18 to
mount the GTP 59 or GMU 11/44B in the Zone 2A area of the tail. However, the GTP 59 or GMU 11/44B
cannot be mounted on/under any non-conducting surfaces. If the complete empennage of the aircraft being
considered does not match those shown in Figure G-18, then it should be mounted in allowed areas defined
for the fuselage and wings. If only portions of the empennage shown below match, then the same rule
applies and the GTP 59 or GMU 11/44B cannot be installed in the empennage. Note that it is allowable for
only the horizontal stabilizer tips to differ from those shown in Figure G-18. The GTP 59 cannot be located
in the horizontal stabilizer of the empennage. Neither the GTP 59 nor the GMU 11/44B can be mounted in
the tail of a composite empennage.
A B C
D (APPLIES TO A) E (APPLIES TO B AND C)
Figure G-18 Zoning for Empennage

Rev. 13 Page G-18
G.3 Example Lightning Zoning Diagrams
This section contains sample lightning zoning diagrams for typical aircraft.
Figure G-19 Example Lightning Zoning for Single-Engine Aircraft

Rev. 13 Page G-19
Figure G-20 Example Lightning Zoning for Twin-Engine Aircraft

Rev. 13 Page G-20

Installation Manual 190-02246-10 - 13

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Installation Manual 190-02246-10 - 13

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Installation Manual 190-02246-10 - 13

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

GI 275

Part 23 AML STC

190-02246-10 May 2022 Revision 13

190-02246-10 GI 275 Part 23 AML STC Installation Manual

Software License Notification

190-02246-10 GI 275 Part 23 AML STC Installation Manual

3. Restrictions; Protection and Third Party Devices.

190-02246-10 GI 275 Part 23 AML STC Installation Manual

4. Term and Termination.

5. Disclaimer; Limitations of Liability; Indemnity.

190-02246-10 GI 275 Part 23 AML STC Installation Manual

190-02246-10 GI 275 Part 23 AML STC Installation Manual

DESCRIPTION OF REVISIONS 12 AND 13 CHANGES

190-02246-10 GI 275 Part 23 AML STC Installation Manual

190-02246-10 GI 275 Part 23 AML STC Installation Manual

190-02246-10 GI 275 Part 23 AML STC Installation Manual

190-02246-10 GI 275 Part 23 AML STC Installation Manual

190-02246-10 GI 275 Part 23 AML STC Installation Manual

190-02246-10 GI 275 Part 23 AML STC Installation Manual

190-02246-10 GI 275 Part 23 AML STC Installation Manual

190-02246-10 GI 275 Part 23 AML STC Installation Manual

190-02246-10 GI 275 Part 23 AML STC Installation Manual

190-02246-10 GI 275 Part 23 AML STC Installation Manual

190-02246-10 GI 275 Part 23 AML STC Installation Manual

190-02246-10 GI 275 Part 23 AML STC Installation Manual

190-02246-10 GI 275 Part 23 AML STC Installation Manual

190-02246-10 GI 275 Part 23 AML STC Installation Manual

190-02246-10 GI 275 Part 23 AML STC Installation Manual

190-02246-10 GI 275 Part 23 AML STC Installation Manual

190-02246-10 GI 275 Part 23 AML STC Installation Manual

190-02246-10 GI 275 Part 23 AML STC Installation Manual

190-02246-10 GI 275 Part 23 AML STC Installation Manual

1.1 STC Applicability .............................................................................................................................1-2

190-02246-10 GI 275 Part 23 AML STC Installation Manual

190-02246-10 GI 275 Part 23 AML STC Installation Manual

190-02246-10 GI 275 Part 23 AML STC Installation Manual

Figure 1-1 GI 275 System Installation (Before and After Example)

190-02246-10 GI 275 Part 23 AML STC Installation Manual

Table 1-1 Garmin Manuals and References for GI 275 System

Table 1-2 Garmin Installation Manuals for Other Systems

190-02246-10 GI 275 Part 23 AML STC Installation Manual

1.2.1 Hardware Variants

190-02246-10 GI 275 Part 23 AML STC Installation Manual

Not installed per

GMU 44B RS‐232 (GMU 44B) GI 275

[1]….GI 275 ADAHRS+AP required to drive the

Figure 1-2 GI 275 Primary ADI

190-02246-10 GI 275 Part 23 AML STC Installation Manual

Standard Turn Rate Indices

190-02246-10 GI 275 Part 23 AML STC Installation Manual

190-02246-10 GI 275 Part 23 AML STC Installation Manual

Not installed per

[1].…GI 275 ADAHRS+AP required to drive

Figure 1-3 GI 275 Horizontal Situation Indicator

190-02246-10 GI 275 Part 23 AML STC Installation Manual

190-02246-10 GI 275 Part 23 AML STC Installation Manual

Not installed per

Backup GPS Coaxial Multi‐Function Display

[1]....Each GI 275 only supports one analog RS‐232 ARINC 429